460UT-B Japon - 日本 - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels - Samsung
460UT-B Japon - 日本 - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung
SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
- Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung
- Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture
-->
http://www.samsung.com/jp/support/model/LH46CBPLBB/XJ-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712125201546/BN59-01094C-08Eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201006/20100626144019156/460UTn-2_460UT-2_460UTn-B_460UT-B_Jpn.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201006/20100626144019156/460UTn-2_460UT-2_460UTn-B_460UT-B_Eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712130317745/BN59-01094C-08Jpn.pdf
Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
Samsung-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-T01FR-Manuels
Samsung-LE19C350-LE19C350D1W-Manuels
Samsung-PS50C450-PS50C450B1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE22C452C4H-Manuels
Samsung-PS50A566-PS50A566S2M-Manuels
Samsung-LE40A577P2M-Manuels
Samsung-20-XTDVBEUE-NOR-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-LE26B450-LE26B450C4W-Manuels
Samsung-PS51D490A1W-Manuels
Samsung-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1200-Noir-HM1200-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D6530WS-Manuels
Samsung-NP530U3C-A01ES-NP530U3C-A01ES-Espagnol-Manuels
/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-Duos-GT-B5512-RUSSE-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-GT-I9100-SINGAPOUR-Manuels
Samsung-NP300E5ZI-NP300E5Z-A09MA-Manuels
Samsung-32-UE32D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE32D4000NW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C6805-UE46C6805US-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-UE40B6050-UE40B6050VW-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-PS50C535-PS50C535C1W-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-55-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6805-UE55ES6805U-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E8005-PS51E8005GU-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E555-PS51E555D1K-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES7005-UE46ES7005U-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6535-UE46ES6535U-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-40-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE40ES6565U-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_NOR-0424.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E8005-PS51E8005GU-Norvege-Manuels
Samsung-LE46C630-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-T240-JP-Manuels
Samsung-821SC-JP-Manuels
Samsung-941SC-JP-Manuels
Samsung-740SC-JP-Manuels
Samsung-940SC-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-7.0-Plus-SC-02D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-SNE-60K_UM_Embedded_KOR_100526-SEC-Manuels
Samsung-M_YUKON_2K_WD175ARYKSU_DC68-02631L-05-120810.pdf-SEC-Manuels
Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-SEC-Manuels
Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE52A676-LE52A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-22-LE22D450WXZF-serie-4-Full-HD-LCD-TV-LE22D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES7000S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels
SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels
Samsung-910MP-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels
Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
CLX-3185FW Manuels
Galaxy Ace GT-S5830
Galaxy S II GT-I9100
Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16
Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16
Galaxy YGT-S5360
LE32C350 LE32C350D1W
LE40C630 LE40C630K1W
MM-C330D
MM-D330D
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels
N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels
RSH5UEPN
SGH-F490
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000
Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
T23A550 T23A550
UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
Wave 575 GT-S5750E
Wave II GT-S8530
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
PRODUITS SAMSUNG :
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360°
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique)
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E6100 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung BD-ES5000
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung ES90 Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung EX1
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-E5530 3D
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D
Samsung HW-E350
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE32E420
Samsung LE40D503
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MM-E320
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS51E530
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung ST66 Noir
Samsung ST77 Blanc
Samsung ST77 Noir
Samsung ST77 Rouge
Samsung ST77 Violet
Samsung ST88 Noir
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung Wave 575
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB690 Noir
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung E2550
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D423
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE40D550
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
SAMSUNG ME106V-SX
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG ME82V-SX
SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL170 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43D450
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS59D530
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SC4340 noir ébène
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19D4010 LED
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32D5000 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D5710 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB750 Noir
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
SyncMaster 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UT-2, 460UTn-B, 460UT-B
LCD Display
User Manual
The color and the appearance may differ depending on the
product, and the specifications are subject to change
without prior notice to improve the performance.Safety Instructions
Notational
Note
These safety instructions must be followed to ensure your safety and prevent property damage.
Make sure to read the instructions carefully and use the product in the correct manner.
Warning / Caution
Failure to follow directions noted by this symbol could result in bodily
harm or damage to the equipment.
Note
Prohibited
Important to read and understand at all times
Do not disassemble
Disconnect the plug from the
outlet
Do not touch
Ground to prevent an electric
shock
Power
When not used for extended period of time, set your computer to DPM.
If using a screen saver, set it to active screen mode.
The images here are for reference only, and are not applicable in all cases
(or countries).
Shortcut to Anti-Afterimage Instructions
Do not use a damaged power cord or plug or a damaged or
loose power outlet.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
Do not touch the power plug with wet hands when removing or
plugging the plug into the outlet.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock.
Make sure to connect the power cord to a grounded power outlet.
• Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or personal injury. Ensure that the power plug is plugged into the power outlet
firmly and correctly.
• Otherwise, this may result in fire.
Do not forcefully bend or pull the power plug and do not place
any heavy material on it.
• Otherwise, this may result in fire.
Do not connect multiple appliances to the same power outlet.
• Otherwise, this may cause fire due to overheating.
Do not disconnect the power cord while using the product.
• Otherwise, this may result in damage to the product due to
electric shock.
To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be
pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall
be readily operable.
• Otherwise, this may cause electric shock or fire.
Use only the power cord provided by our company. Do not use
the provided power cord of another product.
• Otherwise, this may result in fire or electric shock.
Connect the power plug to a wall outlet that can be easily
reached.
• When a problem occurs with the product, you must unplug the
power plug to cut the power off completely. You cannot cut the
power off completely using only the power button on the product.
Installation
Be sure to contact an authorized Service Center when installing your
monitor in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures, high humidity, and exposed to chemical substances and where it operates for 24
hours such as at airports, train stations etc.
Failure to do so may cause serious damage to your monitor.
Ensure that at least two persons lift and move the product.
• Otherwise, it may be dropped and cause personal injury, and/
or damage the product.
When installing the product in a cabinet or rack, make sure that
the front end of the bottom of the product does not project out.
• Otherwise, it may fall or cause personal injury.
• Use a cabinet or rack of a size appropriate to the product.
Safety Instructions DO NOT PLACE CANDLES, MOSQUITO REPELLANT, CIGARETTES AND ANY HEATING APPLIANCES NEAR THE
PRODUCT.
• Otherwise, this may result in fire.
Keep heating appliances as far away from the power cord or the
product as possible.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
Do not install it in a badly ventilated location such as a bookcase
or closet.
• Otherwise, this may result in fire due to an increase in the internal temperature.
When putting the product down, make sure to put it down softly.
• Otherwise, this may result in damage to the screen display.
Do not place the front of the product on the floor.
• Otherwise, this may result in damage to the screen display.
Ensure that an authorized installation company installs the wall
mount.
• Otherwise, it may fall and cause personal injury.
• Make sure to install the specified wall mount.
Install your product in a well ventilated location. Ensure that
there is a clearance of more than 4 inches (10 cm) from the wall.
• Otherwise, it may result in fire due to an increase in the internal
temperature.
Ensure that the packaging vinyl is kept away from children.
• Otherwise, it may result in serious harm (suffocation) if children
play with it.
If the height of your monitor is adjustable, do not place any object or part of your body on the stand when lowering it.
• This may cause damage to the product or the person carrying
it.
Clean
When cleaning the monitor case or the surface of the TFT-LCD screen,
wipe with a slightly moistened, soft cloth.
Do not spray cleaner directly onto the surface of the product.
• Otherwise, this may result in the discoloration and distortion of
the structure and the screen surface may peel off.
Safety Instructions
Edible oil, such as soybean oil, can damage or deform the product. Do not install the product in a kitchen or near a kitchen counter. When cleaning the power plug pins or dusting the power outlet,
clean it with a dry cloth.
• Otherwise, it may result in fire.
When cleaning the product, make sure to disconnect the power
cord.
• Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire.
When cleaning the product, disconnect the power cord and
clean it with a soft, dry cloth.
• (Do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol, thinner,
mosquito repellant, lubricant, or cleaner.) These may change
the appearance of the product surface and peel off the indication labels on the product.
Since the product housing is easily scratched, make sure to use
the specified cloth only.
When cleaning the product, do not spray water directly onto the
main body of the product.
• Ensure that water does not enter the product and that it is not
wet.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock, fire or a malfunction.
Others
The product is a high voltage product. Do not disassemble, repair or modify the product yourself.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire. If the product
needs to be repaired, contact a Service Center.
If there is a strange smell or a strange sound or smoke is coming
from the product, disconnect the power plug immediately and contact a Service Center.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place this product in a location exposed to moisture, dust,
smoke, water, or in a car.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
When you drop the product or the case is broken, turn the power
off and disconnect the power cord. Contact a Service Center.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
Safety Instructions If thunder or lightning is occurring, do not touch the power cord
or antenna cable.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
Do not try to move the monitor by pulling only the wire or the
signal cable.
• Otherwise, it may fall and result in electric shock, damage to
the product or fire due to damage to the cable.
Do not lift or move the product back and forwards or right and
left while only holding the power cord or signal cables.
• Otherwise, it may fall and result in electric shock, damage to
the product or fire due to damage to the cable.
Make sure that the ventilating opening is not blocked by a table
or curtain.
• Otherwise, it may result in fire due to an increase in the internal
temperature.
Do not place any containers containing water, vases, flowerpots, medicines as well as any metal on the product.
• If water or a foreign material enters the product, disconnect the
power cord and contact a Service Center.
• This may result in a product malfunction, electric shock, or fire.
Do not use or keep combustible spray or flammable material
near the product.
• Otherwise, this may result in an explosion or fire.
Do not insert any metal, such as chopsticks, coins, pins and
steel, or flammable objects, such as matches or paper, inside the
product (through the ventilating openings, input and output terminals, etc).
• If water or foreign material enters the product, disconnect the
power cord and contact a Service Center.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
When using a fixed screen for a long time, an afterimage or stain
may occur.
• If you are not using your product for a long period of time, put
it into sleep mode or use a moving screen saver.
Set a resolution and frequency appropriate to the product.
• Otherwise, your eyesight may be damaged.
When using headphones or earphones, do not turn the volume
too high.
• Having the sound too loud may damage your hearing.
Safety Instructions To avoid eyestrain, do not sit too close to the product.
Take a rest for at least five (5) minutes after using the monitor
for one (1) hour.
This reduces eye fatigue.
Do not install it in an unstable location such as an unstable rack
or uneven surface or a location exposed to vibrations.
• Otherwise, it may fall and cause personal injury and/or damage
the product.
• If you use the product in a location exposed to vibrations, it may
damage the product and result in fire.
When moving the product, turn the power off and disconnect
the power plug, antenna cable, and all the cables connected to the
product.
• Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire.
Ensure that children do not hang onto the product or climb up
onto the product.
• The product may fall and cause personal injury or death.
If you do not use the product for a long period of time, disconnect
the power cord from the power outlet.
• Otherwise, this may result in overheating or fire due to dust,
and may result in fire due to electric shock or leakage.
Do not place any heavy items or toys or confectionery, such as
cookies etc. that may attract the attention of children and to the
product.
• Your children may hang onto the product causing it to fall and
this may result in personal injury or death.
Be careful that children do not place the battery in their mouths
when removed from the remote control. Place the battery in a location that children or infants cannot reach.
• If children have had the battery in their mouths, consult your
doctor immediately.
When replacing the battery, insert it with the right polarity (+, -).
• Otherwise, the battery may become damaged or it may cause
fire, personal injury or damage due to leakage of the internal
liquid.
Use only the specified standardized batteries, and do not use a
new battery and a used battery at the same time.
• Otherwise, the batteries may be damaged or cause fire, personal injury or damage due to a leakage of the internal liquid.
Safety Instructions The batteries (and rechargeable batteries) are not ordinary refuse and must be returned for recycling purposes. The customer
is responsible for returning the used or rechargeable batteries for
recycling.
• The customer can return used or rechargeable batteries to a
nearby public recycling center or to a store selling the same
type of the battery or rechargeable battery.
Do not place the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight
or near any heat such as a fire or heater.
• This may reduce the lifetime of the product, and may result in
fire.
Do not drop any objects onto the product or cause any impact
to the product.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
Do not use a humidifier near the product.
• Otherwise, this may result in electric shock or fire.
When there is a gas leak, do not touch the product or the power
plug; ventilate immediately.
• If a spark occurs, it may cause an explosion or fire.
If the product has been turned on for a long time, the display
panel becomes hot. Do not touch it.
Keep the small accessories in a location out of the reach of
children.
Be careful when adjusting the angle of the product or the height
of the stand.
• This may result in personal injury as your hand or fingers may
become caught.
• Also, if you tilt the product too far, it may fall and cause personal
injury.
Do not install the product in a location low enough for children
to reach.
• Otherwise, it may fall and result in personal injury.
• Since the front part of the product is heavy, install the product
on a level and stable surface.
Safety Instructions Do not put any heavy objects on the product.
• This may result in personal injury and/or damage to the product.
Safety InstructionsIntroduction
Package Contents
Checking the Contents of the Package
Remove the lock from the package box, as shown in the figure above.
Lift up the package box by
holding the grooves on
both sides of the package
box.
Check the contents of the
package.
Remove the Styrofoam
and vinyl cover.
Note
• After unpacking the package, make sure to check the contents of the package.
• Store the packaging box in case you need to move the Product later.
• If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
• Contact a local dealer to purchase optional items.
Unpacking
LCD DisplayManuals
Quick Setup Guide Warranty Card
(Not available in all locations)
User Manual
MagicInfo Software DVD
(Applicable to the
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B model only)
Cables
Power Cord D-Sub Cable
Others
Remote Control
(BP59-00138B)
Batteries (AAA X 2)
(Not available in all locations)
Sold separately
Semi Stand KIT LAN Cable USB Cable
(Applicable to the
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B model only)
IntroductionSold separately
RGB to BNC Cable RGB to Component Cable Network Box
(Applicable to the
460UT-2, 460UT-B model
only)
Wall Mount KIT TV Tuner Box (US Only)
Note
Accessories that can be purchased with the product vary by country.
Your LCD Display
Front
SOURCE button
Switches from PC mode to Video mode. Selects the input source that an
external device is connected to.
[PC] → [DVI] → [AV] → [Component] → [HDMI1] → [HDMI2] → [DisplayPort] → [MagicInfo] → [TV]
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US
Only)
• A network box (sold separately) must be connected to use MagicInfo
with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model.
POWER button
Use this button for turning the LCD Display on and off.
IntroductionPower indicator
Shows PowerSaver mode by blinking green
Note
See PowerSaver described in the manual for further information regarding
power saving functions. For energy conservation, turn your LCD Display
OFF when it is not needed or when leaving it unattended for long periods.
Remote Control Sensor
Aim the remote control towards this spot on the LCD Display.
Rear
Note
See the "Connections" section for details about cable connections. The LCD Display's configuration at the back may vary slightly depending on the model.
POWER S/W ON [ │ ] / OFF
Switches the LCD Display On/Off.
POWER
The power cord plugs into the LCD Display
and the wall outlet.
IR OUT/IN
Receives a signal from the remote control
and outputs the signal through Loopout when
a removable sensor board is connected.
AMBIENT SENSOR IN
Supplies power to the removable sensor
board and receives a signal from the light
sensor.
Introduction DVI OUT (LOOPOUT)
• Connect a monitor to another monitor
through a DVI, DVI to HDMI cable.
• Connect a DVI or DVI-HDMI cable to [DVI
OUT (LOOPOUT)] on the product and
[DVI IN] or [HDMI IN] on another monitor.
• HDMI and network signals sent via the
[DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] port are displayed on the second display which has
the [DVI IN] port.
Note
• The Loopout function can be used to duplicate the screen of the primary display.
Connect [DVI OUT] on the primary display to [DVI IN] or [HDMI] on another
display.
• A maximum of 100 monitors can be connected to DVI-Loopout (using a 2m-long
DVI cable). Up to HD resolution can be
supported. Compatible input sources include DVI IN, HDMI IN 1, and HDMI IN 2
(MagicInfo).
• The status of the cable may have a great
effect on the Loopout performance.
RGB/COMPONENT IN (PC/COMPONENT Connection Terminal (Input))
• Connect the [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
port on the monitor to the RGB port on the
PC using the D-SUB cable.
• Connect the [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
port on the monitor to the COMPONENT
port on the external device using the RGB
to COMPONENT cable.
• Connect the [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
port on the monitor to the BNC port on the
PC using the RGB to BNC cable.
DVI IN (PC Video Connection Terminal)
Connect the [DVI IN] port on the monitor to
the DVI port on the PC using the DVI cable.
RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN (PC/DVI/
DP/HDMI Audio Connection Terminal (Input))
IntroductionConnect the [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO
IN] terminal of the monitor and the speaker
output terminal of your computer's sound
card using a stereo cable (sold separately).
DP IN
Receives a signal from the Display port.
Connect a DP cable to [DP IN] on the product
and DP IN on another display.
AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [R-AUDIOL]
Connect the [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN
[R-AUDIO-L]] port on the monitor to the audio
output port on the PC or on the external device using an audio cable.
AV IN
Connect the [AV IN] terminal of your monitor
to the video output terminal of the external
device using a VIDEO cable.
AUDIO OUT
Connect a headphone or an External speaker.
DC OUT
Make sure to use connecting [DC OUT] terminal to the authorized TV-Tuner Box. (US
Only)
Otherwise, this may result in damage
to the product.
HDMI IN 1
• Connect the [HDMI IN 1] terminal at the
back of your LCD Display to the HDMI
terminal of your digital output device using a HDMI cable.
• Up to HDMI 1.3 can be supported.
Note
• A normal external device (DVD player or
camcorder, etc.) or a TV tuner box can be
connected to the [HDMI IN 1] terminal.
Introduction• To use a TV tuner box (US Only), make
sure to connect it to the [HDMI IN 1] terminal.
HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)
• Connect the [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)]
terminal at the back of your LCD Display
to the HDMI terminal of your digital output
device using a HDMI cable.
• Up to HDMI 1.3 can be supported.
Note
The MAGICINFO OUT port must be connected to the [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] port.
RJ 45 MDC (MDC PORT)
MDC(Multiple Display Control) Program Port
Connect the LAN cable to [RJ45 MDC] on the
product and LAN on the PC. To use an MDC,
the MDC program must be installed on the
PC.
Note
Go to Multi Control and select RJ45 MDC
as the MDC Connection.
RS232C OUT/IN (RS232C Serial PORT)
MDC(Multiple Display Control) Program Port
Connect a serial cable (cross type) to
[RS232C] on the product and RS232C on the
PC. To use an MDC, the MDC program must
be installed on the PC.
Note
Go to Multi Control and select RS232C
MDC as the MDC Connection.
Introduction RGB OUT
MagicInfo video output port
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B model only.
MAGICINFO OUT
Outputs MagicInfo DP signals. It should be
connected to [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] via
a DP to HDMI cable.
LAN (LAN Connection Terminal)
Connects to a LAN cable to allow Internet or
network access in MagicInfo mode.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B model only.
USB (USB Connection Terminal)
Keyboard / Mouse, Mass Storage Device
Compatible.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B model only.
Kensington Lock slot
A Kensington Lock is an anti-theft device that
enables users to lock the product so that they
can safely use it in public locations. Since the
shape and usage of the locking device may
differ depending on the model and the manufacturer, for more information, refer to the
User Manual supplied with the locking device
for more information.
To lock the product, follow these
steps:
1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around
a large, stationary object such as a desk
or chair.
2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock
attached through the looped end of the
Kensington lock cable.
Introduction3. Insert the Kensington Lock into the security slot ( ) on the back of the display.
4.
Lock the lock ( ).
Note
• You must purchase the Kensington Lock
separately.
• These are general instructions. For exact
instructions, see the User Manual supplied with the locking device.
• You can purchase the locking device
from an electronics store, an online shop,
or our service center.
Note
See the "Connections" section for details about cable connections.
Remote Control
Note
• The performance of the remote control may be affected by a TV or other electronic device
operating near the LCD Display , causing a malfunction due to interference with the frequency.
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
POWER
OFF
Number Buttons
/ GUIDE button
+ VOL -
SOURCE
D.MENU
TOOLS
Up-Down Left-Right buttons
INFO
The Color button and the PC/DVI/HDMI/DP
selection button
TTX/MIX
MTS/DUAL
ENTER/PRE-CH
Introduction MUTE
CH/P
TV
MENU
RETURN
EXIT
MagicInfo
POWER
Turns the product On.
OFF
Turns the product Off.
Number Buttons
Used to enter the password during the OSD adjustment or
to use MagicInfo.
Press to change the channel.
/ GUIDE button
The "-" button is used to select Digital channels.
Electronic Program Guide (EPG) display.
- This function does not work for this LCD Display.
+ VOL -
Adjusts the audio volume.
SOURCE
Selects a connected external input source or MagicInfo
mode.
Press the button to change the input signal SOURCE.
Changing the SOURCE is only allowed for external devices
that are connected to the LCD Display at the time.
D.MENU
DTV menu display
- This function does not work for this LCD Display.
TOOLS
Use to quickly select frequently used functions.
- This function does not work for this LCD Display.
Up-Down Left-Right buttons
Moves from one menu item to another horizontally, vertically
or adjusts selected menu values.
INFO
Current picture information is displayed on the upper left
corner of the screen.
The Color button and the
PC/DVI/HDMI/DP selection
button
In TV mode, these buttons can be used for setting the
broadcasting announcement function of a digital channel.
You can select the PC, DVI, HDMI or DP(DisplayPort) external input directly in a mode other than TV mode.
Introduction TTX/MIX
TV channels provide written information services via teletext.
- Teletext Buttons
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
MTS/DUAL
MTSYou can select MTS (Multichannel Television Stereo) mode.
Audio Type MTS/S_Mode Default
FM Stereo Mono Mono Manual
Change
Stereo Mono ↔ Stereo
SAP Mono ↔ SAP Mono
DUALSTEREO/MONO, DUAL l / DUAL ll and MONO/NICAM
MONO/NICAM STEREO can be operated depending on the
broadcasting type by using the DUAL button on the remote
control while watching TV.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
ENTER/PRE-CH
This button is used to return to the immediately previous
channel.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
MUTE
Pauses (mutes) the audio output temporarily. This is displayed on the lower left corner of the screen. The audio
comes back on if MUTE or - VOL + is pressed in the Mute
mode.
CH/P
In TV mode, selects TV channels.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
TV
Selects the TV mode directly.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
MENU
Opens the on-screen menu and exits from the menu or
closes the adjustment menu.
RETURN
Returns to the previous menu.
EXIT
Exits from the menu screen.
MagicInfo
MagicInfo Quick Launch Button.
Note
This button is disabled for products that do not support
MagicInfo.
IntroductionMechanical Layout
Mechanical Layout
LCD Display Head
IntroductionInstallation VESA Bracket
• When installing VESA, make sure to comply with the international VESA standards.
• Purchasing VESA Bracket and Installation Information : Please contact your nearest
SAMSUNG Distributor to place an order. After your order is placed, installation professionals will visit you and install the bracket.
• At least 2 persons are needed in order to move the LCD Display.
• SAMSUNG is not responsible for any product damage or any injury caused by installation
at customer's discretion.
Dimensions
Notice
For securing the bracket on a wall, use only machine screws of 6 mm diameter and 8 to 12
mm length.
Wall Bracket Installation
• Contact a technician for installing the wall bracket.
• SAMSUNG Electronics is not responsible for any damages to the product or harm to
customers when the installation is done by the customer.
Introduction• This product is for installing on cement walls. The product may not stay in place when
installed on plaster or wood.
Components
Only use the components and accessories shipped with the product.
Wall Bracket(1) Hinge(Left 1, Right
1)
Plastic
Hanger
(4)
Screw
(A)(11)
Screw
(B)(4)
Anchor
(11)
Wall Bracket Assembly
Note
There are two hinges(left and right). Use the correct one.
1. Insert and tighten the Captive Screw in the direction of the arrow.
When done, mount the wall bracket on the wall.
There are two hinges(left and right). Use the correct one.
A - Captive Screw
B - Wall Bracket
C - Hinge (Left)
D - Hinge (Right)
2. Before drilling into the wall, check if the length between the two locking holes at the back
of the product is correct.
IntroductionIf the length is too short or long, loosen all or some of the 4screws on the wall bracket to
adjust the length.
A - Length between the two locking holes
3. Check the installation diagram and mark the drill points on the wall. Use the 5.0 mm bit
to drill holes deeper than 35 mm. Fix each anchor in the corresponding hole. Match each
of the brackets and hinge holes to the corresponding anchor holes and insert and tighten
the 11 screws A.
To mount the product on the wall bracket
The shape of the product may vary depending on the model. (The assemblies of the plastic
hanger and the screw are the same)
1. Remove the 4 screws on the back of the product.
Introduction2. Insert the screw B into the plastic hanger.
Notice
• Mount the product on the wall bracket and make sure it is properly fixed to the left
and right plastic hangers.
• Be careful when installing the product on the bracket as fingers can be caught in the
holes.
• Make sure the wall bracket is securely fixed to the wall, or the product may not stay
in place after installation.
3. Tighten the 4 screws in step 2 (plastic hanger + screw B)to the rear holes of the product.
4. Remove safety pin (3) and insert the 4 product holders into the corresponding bracket
holes (1). Then place the product(2) so that it is firmly fixed to the bracket. Make sure to
re-insert and tighten the safety pin (3) to securely hold the product to the bracket.
IntroductionA - LCD Display
B - Wall Bracket
C - Wall
Wall Bracket Angle Adjustment
Adjust the bracket angle to -2° before installing it on the wall.
1. Fix the product to the wall bracket.
2. Hold the product at the top in the center and pull it forward (direction of the arrow) to
adjust the angle.
Note
You can adjust the bracket angle between -2° and 15°.
Make sure to use the top center, and not the left or the right side of the product to adjust the
angle.
IntroductionConnections
Connecting a Computer
There are several ways to connect the computer to the monitor. Choose
one from the following options.
Using the D-sub (Analog) connector on the video card.
• Connect the D-sub to the 15-pin, [RGB/COMPONENT IN] port on the
back of your LCD Display and the 15 pin D-sub Port on the computer.
Using the DVI (Digital) connector on the video card.
• Connect the DVI Cable to the [DVI IN] port on the back of your LCD
Display and the DVI port on the computer.
Using the DP (Digital) connector on the video card.
• Connect the [DP IN] port on the LCD Display to the DP port on the PC
using the DP cable. Note
Select HDMI2 (only with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or HDMI1 as an input
source when connected to the PC via an HDMI cable.
To obtain normal picture and audio from the PC, HDMI2 (only with a
460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or HDMI1 must be selected before PC is selected in Edit Name.
To enable audio when DVI Device is selected, be sure to establish the
connection using step ( ).
Connect the Audio cable for your LCD Display to the Audio port on the
back of the LCD Display.
Connect the power cord for your LCD Display to the Power port on the
back of the LCD Display. Turn on the power switch.
Note
Contact a local SAMSUNG Electronics Service Center to buy optional items.
Connecting to Other devices
Note
• AV input devices such as DVD players, VCRs or camcorders as well as your computer
can be connected to the LCD Display. For detailed information on connecting AV input
devices, refer to the contents under Adjusting Your LCD Display.
• The LCD Display 's configuration at the back may vary slightly depending on the LCD
Display model.
Connecting an External Monitor
Connections
Using the HDMI (Digital) connector on the video card.
• Connect the [HDMI IN 1] port on the LCD Display to the HDMI port on
the PC using the HDMI cable.Connect between the [DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] port on the LCD Display and
the input port on another monitor using a DVI cable.
Connect between the [AUDIO OUT] port on the LCD Display and the audio
input port on another monitor using a stereo cable.
Note
Select DVI Mode as an input source for the external monitor connected to [DVI OUT].
DVI OUT does not support HDCP.
Connecting AV Devices
1. Connect an audio cable to [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]] on
the product and the audio port on an external device such as a VCR or
DVD player.
2. Connect a video cable to [AV IN] on the product and the video output port
on the external device.
3. Then, start the DVD, VCR or Camcorders with a DVD disc or tape inserted.
4. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "AV".
Note
AV input devices such as DVD players, VCRs or camcorders as well as your computer can
be connected to the LCD Display. For detailed information on connecting AV input devices,
refer to the contents under Adjusting Your LCD Display.
ConnectionsConnecting to a Camcorder
1. Locate the AV output jacks on the camcorder. They are usually found on
the side or back of the camcorder. Connect a video cable between the
VIDEO OUTPUT jack on the camcorder and the [AV IN] on the LCD Display .
2. Connect a set of audio cables between the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on the
camcorder and the [AV /COMPONENT AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]] on the
LCD Display .
3. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "AV".
4. Then, start the Camcorders with a tape inserted.
Note
The audio-video cables shown here are usually included with a Camcorder.
(If not, check your local electronics store.)
If your camcorder is stereo, you need to connect a set of two cables.
ConnectionsConnecting Using a HDMI Cable
1. Connect an HDMI cable to [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (only with a
460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or [HDMI IN 1] on the product and the HDMI
output port on a digital device.
2. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "HDMI1 /
HDMI2(only with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model)"
Note
In HDMI mode, only PCM format audio is supported.
Connecting Using a DVI to HDMI Cable
Connect a DVI-HDMI cable to [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (only with a
460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or [HDMI IN 1] and the DVI output port on the
digital device.
Connect the red and white jacks of an RCA to stereo (for PC) cable to the
same colored audio output terminals of the digital output device, and conConnectionsnect the opposite jack to the [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN] terminal of
the LCD Display.
3. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "HDMI1 /
HDMI2(only with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model)"
Connecting a DVD Player
Connect a RGB to Component cable between the [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] port on the LCD Display and the PR, Y, PB jacks on the DVD player.
Connect a set of audio cables between the [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN
[R-AUDIO-L]] on the LCD Display and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD
player.
Note
• Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "Component".
• Then, start the DVD Player with a DVD disc inserted.
• A RGB to component cable is optional.
• For an explanation of Component video, consult your DVD manual.
ConnectionsConnecting a DTV Set Top (Cable/Satellite) Box
Connect a RGB to Component cable between the [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] port on the LCD Display and the PR, Y, PB jacks on the Set Top Box.
Connect a set of audio cables between the [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN
[R-AUDIO-L]] on the LCD Display and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the Set
Top Box.
Note
• Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "Component".
• For an explanation of Component video, see your Set Top Box owner's manual.
Connecting to an Audio System
1. Connect a set of audio cables between the AUX L, R jacks on the AUDIO
SYSTEM and [AUDIO OUT] on LCD Display.
ConnectionsConnecting a LAN Cable
1. Connect the LAN cable between the [LAN] port on the product and the
[LAN] port on your PC.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B model only.
Connecting a USB devices
1. You can connect USB devices such as a mouse or keyboard.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B model only.
ConnectionsUsing the Software
Monitor Driver
Note
When prompted by the operating system for the monitor driver, insert the CDROM included with this monitor. Driver installation is slightly different from one
operating system to another. Follow the directions appropriate for the operating system you have.
Prepare a blank disk and download the driver program file at the Internet web
site shown here.
Internet web site :
http://www.samsung.com/
Installing the Monitor Driver (Automatic)
1. Insert CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click "Windows".
3. Choose your monitor model in the model list, then click the "OK" button.
4. If you can see following message window, then click the "Continue Anyway" button. Then
click "OK" button (Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP/2000 Operating System). Note
This monitor driver is certified by Microsoft, and installing it will not damage your system.
The certified driver will be posted on Samsung Monitor homepage.
http://www.samsung.com/
Installing the Monitor Driver (Manual)
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista™‚ Operating System
1. Insert your Manual CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click (Start) and "Control Panel". Then, double-click on "Appearance and Personalization".
3. Click "Personalization" and then "Display Settings".
4. Click "Advanced Settings...".
5. Click "Properties" in the "Monitor" tab. If the "Properties" button is deactivated, it means
the configuration for your monitor is completed. The monitor can be used as is.
Using the SoftwareIf the message "Windows needs..." is displayed, as shown in the figure below, click
"Continue".
Note
This monitor driver is under certifying MS logo, and this installation will not damage your
system.
The certified driver will be posted on Samsung Monitor homepage.
6. Click "Update Driver..." in the "Driver" tab.
7. Check the "Browse my computer for driver software" checkbox and click "Let me pick
from a list of device drivers on my computer".
8. Click "Have Disk...” and select the folder (for example, D:\Drive) where the driver setup
file is located, and click "OK".
Using the Software9. Select the model that matches your monitor from the list of monitor models on the screen,
and click "Next".
10. Click "Close" → "Close" → "OK" → "OK" on the following screens displayed in sequence.
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP Operating System
Using the Software1. Insert CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click "Start" → "Control Panel", then click the "Appearance and Themes" icon.
3. Click "Display" icon and choose the "Settings" tab then click "Advanced...".
4. Click the "Properties" button on the "Monitor" tab and select "Driver" tab.
5. Click "Update Driver..." and select "Install from a list or..." then click "Next" button.
6. Select "Don't search, I will...", then click "Next" and then click "Have disk".
Using the Software7. Click the "Browse" button then choose A:(D:\Driver) and choose your monitor model in
the model list and click the "Next" button.
8. If you can see the following message window, then click the "Continue Anyway" button.
Then click "OK" button.
Note
This monitor driver is certified by Microsoft, and this installation will not damage your
system.
The certified driver will be posted on Samsung Monitor homepage.
http://www.samsung.com/
9. Click the "Close" button, then click the "OK" button continually.
Using the Software10. Monitor driver installation is completed.
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
2000 Operating System
When you can see "Digital Signature Not Found" on your monitor, follow these steps.
1. Choose "OK" button on the "Insert disk" window.
2. Click the "Browse" button on the "File Needed" window.
3. Choose A:(D:\Driver), then click the "Open" button and then click "OK" button.
How to install
1. Click "Start", "Setting", "Control Panel".
2. Double click the "Display" icon.
3. Select the "Settings" tab and click "Advanced Properties" button.
4. Choose "Monitor".
Case1 : If the "Properties" button is inactive, it means your monitor is properly configured.
Please stop installation
Case2 : If the "Properties" button is active, click the "Properties" button, then follow the
next steps.
5. Click "Driver" and then click on "Update Driver...", then click on the "Next" button.
6. Choose "Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific
driver", then click "Next" and then click "Have disk".
7. Click the "Browse" button, then choose A:(D:\Driver).
8. Click the "Open" button, then click "OK" button.
9. Choose your monitor model and click the "Next" button. Then click "Next" button.
10. Click the "Finish" button, then the "Close" button.
Using the SoftwareIf you can see the "Digital Signature Not Found" window, then click the "Yes" button.
Then click the "Finish" button and the "Close" button.
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Millennium Operating System
1. Click "Start", "Setting", "Control Panel".
2. Double click the "Display" icon.
3. Select the "Settings" tab and click "Advanced Properties" button.
4. Select the "Monitor" tab.
5. Click the "Change" button in the "Monitor Type" area.
6. Choose "Specify the location of the driver".
7. Choose "Display a list of all the driver in a specific location...", then click "Next" button.
8. Click the "Have Disk" button.
9. Specify A:\(D:\driver), then click "OK" button.
10. Select "Show all devices" and choose the monitor that corresponds to the one you connected to your computer and click "OK".
11. Continue choosing "Close" button and "OK" button until you close the Display Properties
dialogue box.
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
NT Operating System
1. Click "Start", "Settings", "Control Panel", and then double-click "Display" icon.
2. In Display Registration Information window, click Settings Tab and then click "All Display
Modes".
3. Select a mode that you wish to use (Resolution, Number of colors and Vertical frequency)
and then click "OK".
4. Click "Apply" button if you see the screen working normally after clicking "Test". If the
screen is not normal, change to a different mode (lower mode of resolution, colors or
frequency).
Note
If there is no Mode at All Display Modes, select the level of resolution and vertical frequency
by referring to the Preset Timing Modes in the user guide.
Linux Operating System
To execute X-Window, you need to make the X86Config file, which is a type of system setting
file.
1. Press "Enter" at the first and the second screen after executing the X86Config file.
2. The third screen is for setting your mouse.
3. Set a mouse for your computer.
4. The next screen is for selecting a keyboard.
Using the Software5. Set a Keyboard for your computer.
6. The next screen is for setting your monitor.
7. First of all, set a horizontal frequency for your monitor. (You can enter the frequency
directly.)
8. Set a vertical frequency for your monitor. (You can enter the frequency directly.)
9. Enter the model name of your monitor. This information will not affect the actual execution
of X-Window.
10. You have finished setting up your monitor. Execute X-Window after setting other requested hardware.
Using the SoftwareMDC Program Installation/Uninstallation
Installation
1 Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2 Click the MDC Unified installation program.
If a software installation window is not displayed on the main screen, install with the "MDC Unified"
execution file in the MDC folder on the CD.
3 Click "Next" in the displayed Installation Wizard screen.
4 In the "License Agreement" window displayed, select "I accept the terms in the license agreement"
and click "Next".
5 In the displayed "Customer Information" window, fill out all the information fields and click "Next".
6 In the displayed "Destination Folder" window, select the directory path you want to install the
program in and click "Next".
If the directory path is not specified, the program will be installed in the default directory path.
7 In the displayed "Ready to Install the Program" window, check the directory path to install the
program in and click "Install".
8 Installation progress will be displayed.
9 Click "Finish" in the displayed "InstallShield Wizard Complete" window.
Select "Launch MDC Unified" and click "Finish" to run the MDC program immediately.
10 The MDC Unified shortcut icon will be created on the desktop after installation.
The MDC execution icon may not be displayed depending on the PC system or product
specifications.
Press F5 if the execution icon is not displayed.
Uninstallation
1 Select Settings > Control Panel on the Start menu and double-click Add/Delete Program.
2 Select MDC Unified from the list and click Change/Remove.
MDC installation can be affected by the graphics card, mother board and network conditions.Connecting to MDC
Using MDC via RS-232C (serial data communications standards)
An RS-232C serial cable must be connected to the serial ports on the PC and monitor.
What is MDC?
Multiple display control "MDC" is an application that allows you to easily control multiple display devices
simultaneously using a PC.Using MDC via Ethernet
Enter the IP for the primary display device and connect the device to the PC. One display device can
connect to another using an RS-232C serial cable.Connection Management
Connection management includes the Connection list and Connection list modification options.
Connection list – Connection list shows the details of the connections such as connection setting (IP/
COM, Port No, MAC, and Connection Type), connection status, Set ID Range, and detected devices.
Each connection can contain a maximum of 100 devices connected in serial daisy-chain fashion. All the
LFDs detected in a connection are displayed in the Device list, where the user can make groups and
send commands to detected devices.
Connection list modification options – Connection modification options includes Add, Edit, Delete,
and Refresh.Auto Set ID
Auto Set ID feature assigns a Set ID for all the LFDs connected in daisy-chain of a selected connection.
There can be a maximum of 100 LFDs in a connection. The Set ID is assigned sequentially in the daisychain running from 1 to 99, and then finally to Set ID 0.
Cloning
Using the Cloning feature, you can copy the setting of one LFD and apply it to multiple selected LFDs.
You can select specific tab categories or all tab categories for cloning, using the copy setting option
window. Command Retry
This feature is used to specify the maximum number of times the MDC command will be retried in case of
there being no reply or a corrupted reply from an LFD. The retry count value can be set using the MDC
options window. The retry count value must be between 1-10. The default value is 1. Getting Started with MDC
1 To start the program, click Start Programs Samsung MDC Unified.
2 Click Add to add a display device.
If the connection is established via RS232C, go to Serial and specify the COM Port. If the connection is established via Ethernet, enter the IP that was entered for the display
device.Main Screen Layout
Menu Bar Change the status of a display device or the properties of the program.
Device Category
View a list of connected display devices or device groups.
Schedule Category
View a list of schedules for display devices.
Set List Select the display device you want to adjust.
Modify the Set List Add, edit, regroup or delete sets.
Help Topics Display help topics for the program.
4
3
2
1
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
6Menus
You can power on or off a selected device or change the input source or volume of the device.
Choose display devices from the list of sets, and select the Home tab.
Home
Select an item and change the corresponding setting.
Power
On: Power on a selected display.
Off: Power off a selected dis
Input
Input Source : Change the input source.
Input sources available can vary depending on the Display Device Models.
The input source can be changed only for displays that are turned on.
Channel : Change the channel.
The TV channel can be changed by using the up/down arrow keys.
The channel can be changed only when the input source is TV.
Only registered channels can be selected.
Volume
The volume can be changed or the sound can be muted only for displays that are turned on.
Volume
The volume can be adjusted using the slider bar in the range of 0 to 100.
Adjust the volume of a selected display.
Input
Enable or disable Mute for a selected display.
Mute will automatically be disabled if Volume is adjusted when Mute is on.
Alert
Fault Device
1
2
3 This menu shows a list of display devices which have following errors - fan error, temperature
error, brightness sensor error, or lamp error.
Select a display device from the list. The Repair button will be enabled. Click the refresh button
to refresh the error status of the display device. The recovered display device will disappear
from the Fault Device List.
Fault Device Alert
Display device in which error is detected will be reported by email.
Fill in all required fields. The Test and OK buttons will be enabled. Ensure the Sender
information and at least one Recipient are entered.Screen Adjustment
The screen settings (contrast, brightness, etc.) can be adjusted.
Choose display devices from the list of sets, and select the Picture tab.
Custom
Select an item and change the corresponding screen setting.
Color and Tint are not available if the input source is PC.
Red, Green, Blue and PC Screen Adjustment are not available if the input source is Video.
Color, Tint, Color Tone, Color Temp, Red, Green, Blue and PC Screen Adjustment are not
available if both PC Source and Video Source are selected.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast for the selected display device.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness for the selected display device.
Color
Adjust the colors for the selected display device.
Tint (G/R)
Adjust the tint for the selected display device.
Color Tone
Adjust the background color tone for the selected display device.
Color Temp
Adjust the color temperature for the selected display device.
This option is enabled if Color Tone is set to Off.
Red
Customize the intensity of red color for the selected display device.
Green
Customize the intensity of green color for the selected display device.
Blue
Customize the intensity of blue color for the selected display device.Options
Dynamic Contrast
Adjust the Dynamic Contrast for the selected display device.
Gamma Control
Change the gamma value for the selected display.
Auto Motion Plus
This option is used to view dynamic images.
Off: Disable the Auto Motion Plus function.
Clear: Set the level of Auto Motion Plus to clear. This mode is suitable to display vivid images.
Standard: Set the level of Auto Motion Plus to standard.
Smooth: Set the level of Auto Motion Plus to smooth. This mode is suitable to display smooth
images.
Custom: Customize the level of screen burn-in or flickering.
Demo: This function demonstrates the technology of Auto Motion Plus. The result when the mode
is changed can be previewed on the left side of the window.
Brightness Sensor
Enable or disable the Brightness Sensor for the selected display device.
The Brightness Sensor detects the ambient light intensity and automatically adjusts the screen
brightness.
Brightness Sensor may not be available depending on the product. Size
Picture Size
Adjust the screen size for the selected display device.
The Detail item will be disabled if Picture Size is set to a mode that does not support detailed
configuration.
The -/+ buttons can be used to adjust Zoom.
The screen can be relocated using the up/down/left/right buttons.
Detail
You can view details of the selected screen size.
PC Screen Adjustment
Frequency adjustment or fine-tuning is available by using the -/+ buttons in Coarse or Fine.
To relocate the screen, click one of the four images below Position.
To automatically adjust the frequency, fine-tune or relocate the screen, click Auto Adjustment.Sound Adjustment
You can change the sound settings.
Choose display devices from the list of sets, and select the Sound tab.
The Bass or Treble item will be disabled if the item is not supported by the selected set.
Bass
Adjust the bass for the selected display.
Treble
Adjust the treble for the selected display.
Balance (L/R)
Adjust the volume of the left and right speakers of the selected display device.
SRS TS XT
Enable or disable the SRS TS XT effect for the selected display device. System Setup
Choose display devices from the list of sets, and select the System tab.
Video Wall
The Video Wall function can be used to display part of a whole picture or repeat the same picture on
each of connected multiple display devices.
Video Wall is enabled only when devices are in the group.
Video Wall
Enable or disable Video Wall.
Format
Select the format to display the split screen.
Full NaturalH
Select the number of horizontal display devices.
A maximum of 15 displays can be arranged in a row.
A maximum of 6 can be assigned to V if 15 is assigned to H.
V
Select the number of vertical display devices.
A maximum of 15 displays can be arranged in a row.
A maximum of 6 can be assigned to V if 15 is assigned to H.
Screen Position
View the layout of displays (configured by the screen divider) or change the layout as required.
Screen Position and Preview are enabled when Video Wall is set to on.
Note that if multiple sets are selected, Preview is enabled only if the settings for H and V match the
layout of the selected sets.
To change the Position, select a set and drag it to a new position.
The range of screen divider settings may differ depending on the model.PIP
Basic information required to adjust PIP will appear in the menu screen.
PIP will be disabled when Video Wall is ON.
Note that Picture Size is disabled when PIP is ON.
PIP Size
View the PIP Size of the current display.
PIP Source
Select a PIP input source.
Sound Select
Select and enable the sound from either the primary screen or secondary screen.
Channel
The channel can be changed if PIP Source is TV.General
User Auto Color
Automatically adjust the screen colors.
Available only in PC mode.
Auto Power
Set the product to automatically power on.
Standby Control
Set the standby mode to activate if an input source is not detected.
Fan & Temperature
Configure the settings required to detect the fan speed and internal temperature for the product's
protection.
Fan Control
Select a method to configure the fan speed.
Fan Speed
Configure the fan speed.
Temperature
Detect the internal temperature by specifying the range of temperature.Security
Safety Lock
Lock the on-screen menus.
To unlock the menus, set Safety Lock to Off.
Button Lock
Lock the buttons on the display device.
To unlock the buttons, set Button Lock to Off.
OSD Display
Source OSD
Select whether to display a message when the Source is changed.
Not Optimum Mode OSD
Select whether to display a message when a non-compatible mode is selected.
No Signal OSD
Select whether to display a message when there is no input signal.
MDC OSD
Select whether to display a message when settings are changed by the MDC.Time
Clock Set
Change the current time on the selected display device according to the time set on a PC.
If the time is not set on the display device, null values will be displayed.
Timer
On Time: Set the time to power on the selected display device.
Off Time: Set the time to power off the selected display device.
Volume: Specify the volume of the display device when it is powered on by On Time.
Source: Specify the input source of the display device when it is powered on by On Time.
Holiday: The Holiday Management settings can be applied to the Timer.
Repeat : Specify the period for which you want to repeat the selected Timer. Once: Activate the timer only one time.
EveryDay: Activate the timer every day.
Mon~Fri: Activate the timer from Monday through Friday.
Mon~Sat: Activate the timer on Saturdays and Sundays.
Manual: Customize days of the week.
The checkboxes to select days of the week below Repeat are enabled only if Manual is selected.
Holiday Management
Holiday Management allows you to prevent devices that are set to be powered on by the Timer from
turning on at a specified date.
The Holiday Management function can be enabled or disabled in the Timer settings menu.
Add: You can specify holidays:
Click the Add button in the Holiday Management window.
Delete: Delete holidays: check the corresponding checkboxes and click this button.
List of holidays: View a list of holidays you have added. Screen Burn Protection
Pixel Shift
Move the screen slightly at specified time intervals to prevent screen burn-in.
Screen Saver
This function prevents screen burn-in when the screen of the selected display device is left idle for an
extended period of time.
Interval: Set the interval to activate the Screen Saver.
Mode: The Time setting can vary for each Mode.
Safety ScreenThe Safety Screen function can be used to prevent screen burn-in when a stationary image displays on
the screen of a display device for an extended period of time.
Lamp Control
Lamp Control is used to adjust the backlight to reduce power consumption.
Automatically adjust the backlight of the selected display device at a specified time.
If Manual Lamp Control is adjusted, Auto Lamp Control will automatically switch to Off.
Manually adjust the backlight for the selected display.
If Auto Lamp Control is adjusted, Manual Lamp Control will automatically switch to Off.
Ambient Light: Ambient Light detects ambient light intensity and automatically adjusts the screen
brightness of all the LFDs in the same serial chain.
Tool Settings
Security
Panel Control
Turn on or off the screen of a display device.
Remote Control
Enable or disable the remote control.
1 2 3 4
1 Reset
Reset Picture
Reset the screen settings.
Reset Sound
Reset the sound settings.
Reset System
Reset the system settings.
Reset All
Reset the screen, sound and system settings at the same time.
Edit Column
Select the items you want to display in the list of sets.
Information
View the program information.
2
3
4Other Functions
Resizing a Window
Place the mouse pointer on a corner of the program window. An arrow will appear. Move the arrow to
customize the size of the program window.Group Management
Creating Groups
Create groups and manage the list of sets on a group basis.
Duplicate group names cannot be used.
1 Right-click and select Group>Edit in the display device list section on the left side of the program
window.
2 In the Edit Group window displayed, click Add on the sub level or Add on the same level.
Add on the sub level: Create a sub-group under the selected group.
Add on the same level: Create a group on the same level as the selected group.The Add on the same level button is enabled only if at least one group is created.
3 Enter the group name.
Deleting Groups
1 Select a group name, and click Edit.
2 In the Edit Group window displayed, click Delete.
3 Click Yes. The group will be deleted.
Renaming Groups
1 Select a group name, and click Edit.
2 In the Edit Group window displayed, click Rename.
3 If a cursor appears in the old group name, enter a new group name.Schedule Management
Creating Schedules
Create and register a schedule on a group basis.
1 Click All Schedule List in the schedule section on the left side of the program window. The Add
button will be enabled in the middle.
2 Click the Add button. The Add Schedule window will appear.3 Click Add below the Device Group item, and select the group you want to add a schedule to.
4 Select Date&Time/Action and click OK. The schedule will be added and a list of schedules will
appear in the set list window.
Device Group: Select a group.
Date&Time
Instant Execution: Run the schedule immediately.
Timer Set the date, time and interval to run the schedule.
Action: Select a function that will activate at the specified time and interval.
Schedule Modification
To modify a schedule, select the schedule and click Edit.
Deleting a Schedule
To delete a schedule, select the schedule and click Delete.Troubleshooting Guide
This program may malfunction sometimes due to a communication problem between the PC and
display or electromagnetic waves emitted from nearby electronic devices.
Issue Solution
The display you want to control
does not appear on the system
information chart.
1. Check the connection of the RS232C cable (check that the
cable is properly connected to appropriate serial port).
2. Check that another display with a duplicate ID is not
connected. Connecting displays with a duplicate ID can
cause the displays not to be shown due to data collision.
3. Check that the display ID is within the range of 0 and 99.
(Change the ID using the Display menu.)
For a display that supports the ID in a range of 0 to 99,
the ID should be set between 0 and 99.
The display you want to control
does not appear on the other
Control Info Grids.
Check that the display is powered on. (See the power status in
the system information chart.)
Ensure you select the input source the display is connected to.
The following message appears
repeatedly.
Check that the display you want to control is selected.
Displays power on or off at different
time from one another even though
On Time or Off Time is set.
Adjust the time on the PC to synchronize the time between the
connected displays.
The remote control does not work. The remote control may not work if the RS-232C cable is
removed or the program is closed abnormally while the Remote
Control function is Disable. To resolve this, run the program
again and set Remote Control to Enable.How display properties are shown when multiple displays are used
1 When no display is selected: The default value is displayed.
2 When one display is selected: Settings for the selected display are displayed.
3 When two displays are selected (e.g. in sequence of ID 1 andID 3): The settings for ID 1 are
displayed before the settings for ID 3.
4 When the All+Select checkbox is checked and all displays are selected: The default settings are
displayed.Adjusting the LCD Display
Input
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
• AV
• Component
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Source List
Use to select PC, HDMI or other external input sources connected to the LCD Display. Use
to select the screen of your choice.
1. PC
2. DVI
3. AV
4. Component
5. HDMI1 - This is deactivated when a TV tuner box is installed.
6. HDMI2 - This is deactivated when a network box is installed.
7. DisplayPort
8. MagicInfo - For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a
network box is connected.
9. TV - Activated when a TV tuner box is connected. Note
The RGB/COMPONENT IN port is compatible with RGB (PC) and Component signals.
However, the picture may display abnormally if the connected external input signal is
different from the selected video signal.
PIP
Note
The PIP function is not available when Video Wall is On.
When external AV devices such as VCRs or DVDs are connected to the LCD Display , PIP
allows you to watch video from those devices in a small window super-imposed on the PC
Video signal. (Off/On)
Note
• PIP turns off when the LCD Display is switched to an external source.
•
If you select , , in Size, Position and Transparency will not be activated.
PIP
Turns the PIP Screen Off/On.
• Off
• On
Source
Note
• PIP is disabled if the primary screen does not receive a signal.
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
Selects the input source for the PIP.
Adjusting the LCD Display• PC : DVI / AV / HDMI1 / HDMI2 / DisplayPort
• DVI : PC
• AV : PC
• HDMI : PC
• Display Port : PC
Size
Changes the Size of the PIP window.
Note
will be changed to <16:9> when is .
Position
Changes the Position of the PIP window.
Transparency
Adjusts the Transparency of PIP windows.
• High
• Medium
• Low
Adjusting the LCD Display• Opaque
Edit Name
Name the input device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection
easier.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / HD STB / Satellite STB / AV Receiver / DVD Receiver /
Game /Camcorder / DVD Combo / DHR / PC / DVI Devices
Note
• The displayed devices differ depending on the external input mode.
• When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal, set Edit Name to PC. In other cases, set
Edit Name to AV. However, since 640x480, 720P (1280x720), and 1080p (1920x1080)
are common signals for AV and PC, make sure to set the Edit Name in accordance with
the input signal.
• The Picture menu changes depending on the input signal and Edit Name.
When using a DVI to HDMI cable connection (which does not support audio and video at
the same time), the audio port should be connected via a separate audio cable.
When a PC is connected, set Edit Name to DVI PC to enjoy the video and audio from the
connected PC.
When an AV device is connected, set Edit Name to DVI Device to enjoy the video and
audio from the connected AV device.
Source AutoSwitch Settings
Turning on the display with Source AutoSwitch On, and the previous video source selection
is not active, the display will automatically search the different video input sources for active
video.
Note
• If the display TV source is active (TV tuner connected to the display) the Source AutoSwitch search function becomes inactive. The display will remain in the TV source.
• Source AutoSwitch selection and PIP function: If the Source AutoSwitch selection is
set to On, the PIP function will not work, the Source AutoSwitch selection must be set
to Off, for the PIP feature to work.
• When the Source AutoSwitch selection is On, and or the Primary Source Recovery is
On, the display power saving mode becomes inactive.
• When Primary Source Recovery is On, only the Primary Source and Secondary
Source selection are available and they are interchangeable and selectable at will.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayRefer to PIP > Source for compatible signals for each primary input source.
Source AutoSwitch
When the Source AutoSwitch is On, the display video source will automatically be searched
for active video.
The Primary Source selection will be activated, if the current video source is not recognized.
Secondary source selection will become active, if no primary video source is available. If
the primary or secondary source is not recognized, the display will search again, if no active
video is found the display will show the no-input-signal message.
When the Primary Source selection is set to All, the display will search all the video source
inputs twice in sequence looking for an active video source, returning back to the first video
source in the sequence if no video is found.
1. Off
2. On
Primary Source Recovery
When Primary Source Recovery is On, only the Primary Source and Secondary
Source video source selection will be searched for active video.
The Primary Source will be selected if active video is found, if no video is found, the Secondary Source will be selected, if no video is found in Secondary Source again, the noinput-signal is displayed.
1. Off
2. On
Adjusting the LCD DisplayPrimary Source
Specify Primary Source for the automatic input source.
Secondary Source
Specify Secondary Source for the automatic input source.
Picture [PC / DVI / DisplayPort / MagicInfo Mode]
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
• AV
• Component
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Mode
Adjusting the LCD Display Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
1. Information
Recommended for communicating exact information (e.g. public information).
2. Advertisement
Recommended for displaying advertisements (e.g. videos or indoor or outdoor ads).
3. Custom
Custom
By using the on-screen menus, the contrast and brightness can be changed to your personal
preference.
Note
• By adjusting the picture using the Custom function, MagicBright will change to Custom mode.
• Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
1. Contrast
Adjusts the Contrast.
2. Brightness
Adjusts the Brightness.
3. Sharpness
Adjusts the Sharpness.
4. Gamma
Adjust the mid-range brightness (Gamma) for the picture.
• Natural
Adjusting the LCD Display• Mode 1
Sets the picture brighter than Natural.
• Mode 2
Sets the picture darker than Mode 1.
• Mode 3
Increases the contrast between dark and bright colors.
Color Tone
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
The color tones can be changed.
1. Off
2. Cool
3. Normal
4. Warm
5. Custom
Note
If you set the Color Tone to Cool, Normal, Warm, or Custom, the Color Temp. function is
disabled.
If you set the Color Tone to Off, the Color Control function is disabled
Color Control
Adjusts individual Red, Green, Blue color balance.
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
1. Red
2. Green
Adjusting the LCD Display3. Blue
Color Temp.
Color Temp. is a measure of the 'warmth' of the image colors.
Note
• Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
• This function is only enabled if the Color Tone is set to Off.
Image Lock
Image Lock is used to fine-tune and get the best image by removing noise that creates
unstable images with jitters and shakiness. If satisfactory results are not obtained using the
Fine adjustment, use the Coarse adjustment and then use Fine again.
Note
Available in PC mode only.
Coarse
Removes noise such as vertical stripes. Coarse adjustment may move the screen image
area. You may relocate it to the center using the horizontal control menu.
Fine
Removes noise such as horizontal stripes. If the noise persists even after Fine tuning, repeat
it after adjusting the frequency (clock speed).
Position
Adjusts the screen location horizontally and vertically.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayAuto Adjustment
The values of Fine, Coarse, Position are adjusted automatically. By changing the resolution
in the control panel, the auto function is performed.
Note
Available in PC mode only.
Signal Balance
This is used to make up for the weak RGB signal transmitted by a long signal cable.
Note
• Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
• Available in PC mode only.
Signal Balance
Selects either On or Off with the signal balance.
Signal Control
Note
Available when Signal Balance is set to On.
1. R-Gain
2. G-Gain
3. B-Gain
4. R-Offset
5. G-Offset
Adjusting the LCD Display6. B-Offset
Size
The Size can be switched.
1. 16:9
2. 4:3
PIP Picture
Adjusts the PIP Screen Settings.
Note
• Available Modes: PIP On
1. Contrast
Adjusts the Contrast of the PIP window on the screen.
2. Brightness
Adjusts the Brightness of the PIP window on the screen.
3. Sharpness
Adjusts the Sharpness of the PIP window on the screen.
4. Color
Adjusts the Color of the PIP window on the screen.
Adjusting the LCD Display Note
PIP input only operates in AV, HDMI, or Component mode.
5. Tint
Adds a natural tone to the PIP window.
Note
PIP input only operates in AV, HDMI, or Component mode.
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Contrast automatically detects the distribution of the visual signal and adjusts to
create an optimum contrast.
1. Off
2. On
Note
Disabled when PIP is set to On.
Lamp Control
Adjusts the inverter lamp in order to reduce energy consumption.
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
Picture Reset
Reset the screen settings.
Picture [ AV / HDMI / Component / TV Mode]
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
Adjusting the LCD Display• AV
• Component
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Mode
The LCD Display has four automatic picture settings ("Dynamic", "Standard", "Movie" and
"Custom") that are preset at the factory.
Dynamic, Standard, Movie, or Custom can be activated.
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
1. Dynamic
2. Standard
3. Movie
4. Custom
Custom
By using the on-screen menus, the contrast and brightness can be changed to your personal
preference.
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
Contrast
Adjusts the Contrast.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayBrightness
Adjusts the Brightness.
Sharpness
Adjusts the picture Sharpness.
Color
Adjusts the picture Color.
Tint
Adds a natural tone to the display.
Note
Operates only if the video signal is NTSC.
Color Tone
The color tones can be changed. The individual Color components are also user adjustable.
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
1. Off
2. Cool2
3. Cool1
4. Normal
5. Warm1
6. Warm2
Adjusting the LCD Display Note
If you set the Color Tone to Cool2, Cool1, Normal, Warm1, or Warm2, the Color Temp.
function is disabled.
Color Temp.
Color temp. is a measure of the 'warmth' of the image colors.
Note
This function is enabled when Mode is set to Custom, and Dynamic Contrast and Color
Tone are Off.
Size
The Size can be switched.
PC mode (PC, HDMI [PC Timing]) : 16:9 - 4:3
Video mode (HDMI [Video Timing], AV or Component): 16:9 - Zoom1 - Zoom2 - 4:3 -
Screen Fit - Custom
1. 16:9 - Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
2. Zoom 1 - Magnifies the size of the picture on the screen.
3. Zoom 2 - Magnifies the size of the picture more than Zoom 1.
4. 4:3 - Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
5. Screen Fit - Displays the input scenes as they are without any cutoff when HDMI 720p,
1080i, 1080p signals are input.
6. Custom - Changes the resolution to suit the user's preferences.
Note
• Certain external devices may feed the display an out of spec signal that may cause cutoff
even when using the Screen Fit feature.
• Zoom 1, Zoom 2 are unavailable in HDMI mode.
• The Position and Reset functions are available in Zoom 1 or Zoom 2 modes.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayDigital NR (Digital Noise Reduction)
Turns the Digital Noise Reduction feature Off/On. The Digital Noise Reduction feature allows
you to enjoy clearer and crisper images.
1. Off
2. On
Note
Digital NR function is not available for all resolutions.
HDMI Black Level
When a DVD or set-top box is connected to your TV via HDMI, it may cause a degradation
in the screen quality, such as an increase in the black level, a low contrast, or discoloration,
etc., depending on the external device connected. In this case, adjust the screen quality of
your TV by configuring the HDMI Black Level.
1. Normal
2. Low
Note
For Timing which can be used for both the PC and the DTV in HDMI mode, HDMI Black
Level will be activated.
Film Mode
Adjusting the LCD DisplayFilm Mode calibrates unnatural pictures that may occur in a movie (which is in 24 frames).
Moving subtitles may appear corrupted when this mode is enabled.
(In HDMI mode, this function is available when the input signal is interlaced scan; it is not
available in progressive scan.)
1. Off
2. On
PIP Picture
Adjusts the PIP Screen Settings.
Note
Available Modes: PIP On
1. Contrast
Adjusts the Contrast of the PIP window on the screen.
2. Brightness
Adjusts the Brightness of the PIP window on the screen.
3. Sharpness
Adjusts the Sharpness of the PIP window on the screen.
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Contrast automatically detects the distribution of the visual signal and adjusts to
create an optimum contrast.
1. Off
2. On
Note
Disabled when PIP is set to On.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayLamp Control
Adjusts the inverter lamp in order to reduce energy consumption.
Note
Not available when Dynamic Contrast is set to On.
Picture Reset
Reset the screen settings.
Sound
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
• AV
• Component
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Mode
The LCD Display has a built-in high fidelity stereo amplifier.
1. Standard
Selects Standard for the standard factory settings.
2. Music
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySelects Music when watching music videos or concerts.
3. Movie
Selects Movie when viewing movies.
4. Speech
Selects Speech when watching a show that is mostly dialog (i.e., news).
5. Custom
Selects Custom if you want to adjust the settings according to your personal preferences.
Custom
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences.
Note
• You can hear the sound even when sound value is set to 0.
• If you adjust sound using Custom function, Mode will turn to Custom mode.
Bass
Emphasizes low frequency audio.
Treble
Emphasizes high frequency audio.
Balance
Allows you to Adjusts the sound balance between the left and right speakers.
Auto Volume
Reduces the difference in volume control between broadcasters.
1. Off
2. On
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySRS TS XT
SRS TS XT is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel
content over two speakers. TruSurround XT delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound
experience through any two-speaker playback system, including internal television speakers.
It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats.
1. Off
2. On
Sound Select
Enable the sound of either the primary or secondary display in PIP mode.
Note
Available when PIP is set to On.
1. Main
2. Sub
Sound Reset
Reset the sound settings.
Setup
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
• AV
• Component
Adjusting the LCD Display• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Language
You can choose one of 13 languages.
Note
The language chosen affects only the language of the OSD. It has no effect on any software
running on the computer.
Time
Clock Set, Sleep Timer, Timer1 / Timer2 / Timer3, and Holiday Management can be set.
Clock Set
Current Time Setting.
Sleep Timer
Adjusting the LCD DisplayTurns the LCD Display off automatically at certain times.
1. Off
2. 30
3. 60
4. 90
5. 120
6. 150
7. 180
Timer1 / Timer2 / Timer3
You can set the LCD display to automatically turn on or off at a specified time.
Note
• Holiday : select Apply to disable the timer on holidays and Don't apply to enable the
timer on holidays.
• Only enabled when the clock is set using the Clock Set menu.
• The Manual option allows you to select a day of the week.
Holiday Management
• Add
You can register holidays.
• Delete Selected
Adjusting the LCD DisplayYou can delete selected holidays.
Note
• Only enabled when registered holidays are selected.
• More than one holiday can be selected and deleted.
• Delete All
You can delete all the registered holidays.
Menu Transparency
Change the transparency of the background of the OSD.
1. High
2. Medium
3. Low
4. Opaque
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySafety Lock
Change PIN
The password can be changed.
The preset password for the LCD Display is "0000".
Note
If you forgot your password, press the remote buttons INFO → EXIT → MUTE to reset the
password to "0000."
Lock On
This is the function that locks the OSD in order to keep the current settings or to prevent
others from adjusting the settings.
Energy Saving
This feature adjusts the power consumption of the unit in order to save energy.
1. Off
2. On
Video Wall
A Video Wall is a set of video screens connected together, so that each screen shows a part
of the whole picture or where the same picture is repeated on each screen.
When the Video Wall is on, you can adjust the Video Wall screen setting.
Adjusting the LCD Display Note
• When a Horizontal or Vertical split is over four, use a resolution of XGA (1024 x 768) or
greater to prevent any picture degradation.
• Size will be disabled when Video Wall is running.
• Disabled when PIP is set to On.
Video Wall
Turns Off/On the Video Wall function of the selected display Off/On.
• Off
• On
Format
The Format can be selected to see a divided screen.
• Full
Provides a full screen without any margins.
• Natural
Displays a natural image with the original aspect ratio intact.
Horizontal
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySets how many parts the screen should be divided horizontally.
Fifteen adjustment levels: 1~15.
Note
If Vertical is set to 15, the maximum value for Horizontal is 6.
Vertical
Sets how many parts the screen should be divided vertically.
Fifteen adjustment levels: 1~15.
Note
If Horizontal is set to 15, the maximum value for Vertical is 6.
Screen Position
The screen can be divided into several images. A number of screens can be selected with a
different layout when dividing.
• Select a mode in Screen Position.
• Select a display in Display Selection.
• The selection will be set up by pressing a number in the selected mode.
• The screen can be split into a maximum of 100 sub-screens.
Note
When more than four displays are connected, we recommend a resolution of XGA (1024*768)
or greater to prevent any picture degradation.
Safety Screen
The Safety Screen function is used to prevent afterimages that may appear when a still
picture is displayed on the screen over a long time.
Adjusting the LCD Display Note
This function is not available when the power is turned off.
Pixel Shift
Pixel Shift
To prevent after-images on the screen, you can use this function to have pixels move on the
LCD in the horizontal or vertical direction.
• Off
• On
Horizontal
Sets how many pixels the screen moves horizontally.
Five adjustment levels: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Vertical
Sets how many pixels the screen moves vertically.
Five adjustment levels: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayTime
Set the time interval for performing the horizontal or vertical movement, respectively.
Timer
Timer
You can set the timer for Screen Burn Protection.
If you start the operation to erase any residual image, the operation will be performed for the
set period of time and then automatically finish.
• Off
• On
Mode
You can change the Safety Screen Type.
• Bar
• Eraser
• Pixel
Adjusting the LCD DisplayPeriod
Use this function to set the execution period for each mode set in the timer.
Time
Within the set period of time specify a time for execution.
• Mode - Bar, Eraser, Pixel : 10~50 sec
Bar
This function prevents after-images on the screen by moving long black and white vertical
lines.
Eraser
This function prevents after-images on the screen by moving a rectangular pattern.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayPixel
This function prevents after-images by moving many pixels on the screen.
Side Gray
Select the brightness of the grey for the screen background.
• OFF
• Light
• Dark
Resolution Select
When the picture is not displayed properly on the screen when setting the graphics card
resolution of the computer to 1024 x 768 @ 60Hz, 1280 x 768 @ 60Hz, 1360 x 768@ 60Hz
or 1366 x 768 @ 60Hz, by using this function(Resolution Select), you can have the picture
displayed on the screen in the specified resolution.
Note
Available in PC mode only.
1. Off
2. 1024 X 768
3. 1280 X 768
4. 1360 x 768
Adjusting the LCD Display5. 1366 X 768
Note
Selecting the menu is only allowed when the graphics resolution is set to 1024 x 768 @ 60Hz,
1280 x 768 @ 60Hz, 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz or 1366 x 768 @ 60Hz.
Power On Adjustment
Adjusts the Power On time for the screen.
Caution: Set the Power On time to be longer to avoid overvoltage.
OSD Rotation
OSD Rotate
1. Landscape
2. Portrait
Advanced Settings
Configures the settings more elaborately.
Fan & Temperature
Protects the product by detecting the fan speed and internal temperature.
Fan Control
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySelects auto or manual for the fan speed settings.
Fan Speed Setting
Sets the fan speed within a range of 0 and 100.
Note
Enabled when Fan Control is set to Manual.
Temperature Control
Detects the product's internal temperature and specifies the desired temperature.
The product is set to 77°C by default.
Note
• The picture will be dimmed if the temperature exceeds the specified temperature, and the
product will automatically power off to prevent overheating if the temperature keeps rising.
• It is best to use the product at temperatures 75 - 80°C (based on ambient temperature of
40°C).
Refer to "Specifications" herein for details about operating conditions.
• It is best to set Fan Control to Auto when you change the Temperature Control setting.
Current Temperature
Shows the current temperature of the product.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayAuto Power
Enables or disables Auto Power for the product.
• Off
• On
Note
When Auto Power is On, the product will power on automatically as soon as it is connected
to power.
Button Lock
Locks or unlocks the monitor control buttons on the product.
• Off
• On
User Auto Color
1. Auto Color
Automatically adjusts the colors.
2. Reset
Resets the color settings.
Adjusting the LCD Display Note
Enabled only in PC mode.
Standby Control
Sets the standby mode, which will be activated when no input signal is detected.
• Off
A message will read if no input signal is detected.
• On
Power-saving mode will be activated if no input signal is detected.
• Auto
When no input signal is detected,
- Power-saving mode will be activated if an external device is connected.
- A message will read if no external device is connected.
Note
• Enabled only in PC, DVI, HDMI, or DisplayPort mode.
• This function at doesnt work at HDMI source.
Lamp Schedule
Adjusts the luminance to a user-specified value at a specified time.
OSD Display
Displays or hides a menu item on the screen.
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySource OSD
• Off
• On
Not Optimum Mode OSD
• Off
• On
No Signal OSD
• Off
• On
MDC OSD
• Off
Adjusting the LCD Display• On
Software Upgrade
Performs a software upgrade.
1. Connect the product to a computer via a digital signal such as DVI or HDMI. Click the
BMP image file converted from an SW code. The image below will appear on the screen
of the product.
2. While a BMP image onto which the software code has been converted is displayed on
the screen, select Software Upgrade.
Note
When there are two or more BMP images, they are displayed on the screen using a
slideshow.
• It is recommended that the playback interval between two BMP images in the slideshow should be one second. The image extraction probability will decrease with other
playback intervals.
• A BMP image might not be extracted if it is covered by another image (for example,
the mouse pointer).
3. If a more recent version than the current software version is detected, you will be asked
whether to upgrade the current software. If you select , the upgrade is performed.
4. When the software upgrade is completed, the product is turned off and on automatically.
Note
• This only operates with a digital signal, such as in DVI, HDMI1, or HDMI2 mode. (The
input resolution must be identical to the panel resolution.)
• In HDMI1 and HDMI2 modes, the timing values used for both the PC and TV are only
supported if the Edit Name is set to PC or DVI PC.
• This is only supported if the Size is set to 16:9.
Adjusting the LCD DisplaySetup Reset
Reset all the values for a setting.
Reset All
Reset all the settings for the display.
Multi Control
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
• AV
• Component
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Multi Control
Assigns an individual ID to the SET.
• ID Setup
Assigns distinctive IDs to the SET.
• ID Input
Adjusting the LCD DisplayUse to select the transmitter functions of the individual SET. Only a SET where the ID
corresponds to the transmitter setting becomes activated.
• MDC Connection
Selects a port to receive the MDC inputs from.
• Communicates with the MDC via a RS232C MDC cable.
• Communicates with the MDC via an RJ45 MDC cable.
• Network Setting
• IP Setting : Manual, Auto
• IP Address : Manually enter the IP Address if IP Setting is set to Manual.
• Subnet Mask : Manually enter the Subnet Mask if IP Setting is set to Manual.
• Gateway : Manually enter the Gateway if IP Setting is set to Manual.
MagicInfo
Available Modes
• PC / DVI / DisplayPort
• AV
• Component
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV. (US Only)
• For an 460UT-2, 460UT-B model, MagicInfo can only be enabled when a network box is
connected.
Note
• The remote control can be used to select MagicInfo. However, it is recommended to use
a separate USB keyboard to utilize MagicInfo fully.
• For MagicInfo in Device mode, moving external devices while booting may cause errors.
Set up external devices only if the LCD Display turns on.
• Do not unplug the LAN cable used for the network (ex: video display). Otherwise, the
program (MagicInfo) may stop. If you do unplug the cable, restart the system.
• Do not unplug the LAN cable used by an USB device (ex: video display). Otherwise, the
program (MagicInfo) may stop.
• To access other sources, press the SOURCE button in MagicInfo.
Adjusting the LCD Display• The preset password for the LCD Display is "000000".
• The server program's Power-On option works only if the LCD Display's power is completely shut off.
Please make sure not to use the Power-On option when the LCD Display is in the process
of shutting down since this may cause system errors on the LCD Display.
• When using MagicInfo with the MagicInfo Server Program: perform Network mode.
• When using MagicInfo with the device directly connected to LCD Display : execute Device
mode.
• Press ESC to directly go to the MagicInfo Window screen.
• To setup MagicInfo on a Windows screen, a keyboard and mouse are required.
• To setup MagicInfo on a Windows screen, refer to the MagicInfo Server Help.
It is highly recommended not to turn off the AC power during an operation.
• For pivoted LCD Displays, ticker transparency is not supported.
• For pivoted LCD Displays, a screen resolution of up to 720*480(SD) is supported for
movies.
• For drive D:, EWF is not applied.
• To save Setup contents that have been changed when EWF is in the Enable state, you
must Commit them.
• By selecting Disable, Enable or Commit, the system is restarted.
MagicInfo
1. Select Application - step 1
You can select an Application to be executed in your computer when Windows starts.
2. Select TCP/IP - step 2
Adjusting the LCD DisplayIn step 2 of MagicInfo Setup Wizard, you don’t have to go to Network Setting on the desktop
to make your settings for TCP/IP. You just do that at step 2 of MagicInfo installation.
3. Select Language - step 3
When using multiple languages, you can choose and set a specific language among them.
4. Select Screen Type - step 4
Adjusting the LCD Display
Note
English is set as the default language. You do not need to select a language if
you will be using English as the on-screen menu language.You can select which rotation type will be applied to your device.
5. Setup Information
Shows the settings that have been selected by the user.
Note
If the MagicInfo icon is not displayed on the notification area, double click the MagicInfo
icon on the window desktop. The icon will appear.
Adjusting the LCD DisplayTroubleshooting
Self-Test Feature Check
Note
Check the following items yourself before calling for assistance. Contact a Service Center for
problems that you cannot solve by yourself.
Self-Test Feature Check
1. Turn off both your computer and the LCD Display.
2. Unplug the video cable from the back of the computer.
3. Turn on the LCD Display.
The figure shown below ("No Signal") appears on a black background when the LCD
Display is working normally even though no video signal is detected: While in the SelfTest mode, the LED power indicator remains green and the figure moves around on the
screen.
4. Turn off your LCD Display and reconnect the video cable; then turn on both your computer and the LCD Display
If your LCD Display screen remains blank after using the previous procedure, check your
video controller and computer system; your LCD Display is functioning properly.
Warning Messages
You can even view the screen at a resolution of 1920 x 1080. However, you will receive the
following message for a minute; You can choose to change the screen resolution or stay in
the current mode during that time. If the resolution is more than 85Hz, you will see the black
screen because the LCD Display does not support over 85Hz.
Note
Refer to Specifications > Preset Timing Modes for the resolutions or frequencies supported
by the LCD Display.
Maintenance and Cleaning
1) Maintaining the LCD Display Case.
Clean with a soft cloth after disconnecting the power cord.• Do not use benzene, thinner or other flammable substances.
2) Maintaining the Flat Panel Display Screen.
Clean with a soft cloth (cotton flannel).
• Never use acetone, benzene or thinner.
(They may cause flaws or deformation of the screen
surface.)
• The user is responsible for any damage caused by
using these substances.
Symptoms and Recommended Actions
Note
A LCD Display recreates visual signals received from the computer. Therefore, if there is a
problem with the computer or the video card, this can cause the LCD Display to become
blank, have poor coloring, become noisy, etc. In this case, first check the source of the problem, and then contact a Service Center or your dealer.
1. Check if the power cord and the video cables are properly connected to the computer.
2. Check if the computer beeps more than 3 times when booting.
(If it does, request service.)
3. If you installed a new video card or if you assembled the PC, check if you installed the
Adaptor(video).
4. Check if the scanning ratio of the video screen is set to between 50 Hz ~ 85 Hz.
(Do not exceed 60Hz when using the maximum resolution.)
5. If you have problems in installing the Adaptor (video) driver, boot the computer in Safe
Mode, remove the Display Adaptor in the "Control Panel −> System −> Device Administrator" and then reboot the computer to reinstall the Adaptor (video) driver.
Check List
Note
• The following table lists possible problems and their solutions. Before calling for assistance, check the information in this section to see if you can remedy any problems for
yourself. If you do need assistance, please call the phone number on the Information
section or contact your dealer.
Problems related to the Installation (PC Mode)
Note
Problems related to the LCD Display installation and their solutions are listed.
Q: The LCD Display screen flickers.
TroubleshootingA: Check if the signal cable between the computer and the LCD Display is securely connected.
(Refer to Connecting a Computer)
Problems related to the Screen
Note
Problems related to the LCD Display screen and their solutions are listed.
Q: The screen is blank and the power indicator is off.
A: Ensure that the power cord is firmly connected and the LCD Display is on.
(Refer to the Connecting a Computer)
Q: "No Signal" message.
A: Ensure that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC or video sources.
(Refer to the Connecting a Computer)
A: Ensure that the PC or video sources are turned on.
Q: "Not Optimum Mode" message.
A: Check the maximum resolution and the frequency of the video Adaptor.
A: Compare these values with the data in the Preset Timing Modes Chart.
Q: The picture rolls vertically.
A: Check if the signal cable is securely connected. Re-connect it, if necessary.
(Refer to Connecting a Computer)
Q: The image is not clear; picture is blurred.
A: Run Frequency Coarse and Fine tuning.
A: Turn on again after removing all accessories (video extension cable, etc.)
A: Set the resolution and frequency to the recommended ranges.
Q: The picture image is unstable and shakes.
A: Check if the resolution and frequency set for the computer video card falls in the range
supported by the LCD Display. If not, reset them referring to the current Information
under the LCD Display menu and Preset Timing Modes.
Q: Ghost images are shown in the picture.
A: Check if the resolution and frequency set for the computer video card falls in the range
supported by the LCD Display. If not, reset them referring to the current Information
under the LCD Display menu and Preset Timing Modes.
Q: The image is too light or too dark.
A: Adjust the brightness and contrast.
(Refer to the Brightness, Contrast)
TroubleshootingQ: The screen color is inconsistent.
A: Adjust color using Custom under OSD Color Adjustment menu.
Q: The color image is distorted by dark shadows.
A: Adjust color using Custom under OSD Color Adjustment menu.
Q: The color white is poor.
A: Adjust color using Custom under OSD Color Adjustment menu.
Q: The Power Indicator blinks.
A: The LCD Display is currently saving the changes made in the settings to the OSD
memory.
Q: The screen is blank and the power indicator light blinks every 0.5 or 1 seconds.
A: The LCD Display is using its power management system. Press any key on the keyboard.
Problems related to Audio
Note
Problems related to audio signals and their solutions are listed below.
Q: No sound.
A: Ensure that the audio cable is firmly connected to both the audio-in port on your LCD
Display and the audio-out port on your sound card.
(Refer to the Connecting a Computer)
A: Check the volume level.
Q: The sound level is too low.
A: Check the volume level.
A: If the volume is still too low after turning the control to its maximum, check the volume
control on the computer sound card or software program.
Q: The sound is too high or too low.
A: Adjusts the Treble and Bass to the appropriate levels.
Problems related to the Remote Control
Note
Problems related to the remote control and their solutions are listed.
Q: The remote control buttons do not respond.
A: Check the polarities (+/-) of the batteries.
A: Check if the batteries are empty.
A: Check if the power is on.
A: Check if the power cord is securely connected.
TroubleshootingA: Check if a special fluorescent or neon lamp is on in the vicinity.
Q & A
Q: How can I change the frequency?
A: The frequency can be changed by reconfiguring the video card.
Note
That video card support can vary, depending on the version of the driver used. (Refer
to the computer or the video card manual for details.)
Q: How can I adjust the resolution?
A: Windows XP:
Control Panel → Appearance and Themes → Display → Settings.
A: Windows ME/2000:
Control Panel → Display → Settings.
* Contact the video card manufacturer for details.
Q: How can I set the Power Saving function?
A: Windows XP:
Control Panel → Appearance and Themes → Display → Screen Saver.
Set the function in the BIOS-SETUP of the computer. (Refer to the Windows / Computer
Manual).
A: Windows ME/2000:
Control Panel → Display → Screen Saver.
Set the function in the BIOS-SETUP of the computer. (Refer to the Windows / Computer
Manual).
Q: How can I clean the outer case/LCD Panel?
A: Disconnect the power cord and then clean the LCD Display with a soft cloth, using either
a cleaning solution or plain water.
Do not leave any detergent or scratches on the case. Do not let any water enter the
LCD Display.
Q: How can I play the video?
A: The video supports the MPEG1 and WMV codecs only. Install the corresponding codec
to play the video. Note that some of the codecs can be incompatible.
Note
Before calling for assistance, check the information in this section to see if you can remedy
any problems yourself. If you do need assistance, please call the phone number on the Information section or contact your dealer.
TroubleshootingSpecifications
General
General
Model Name SyncMaster 460UTn-2 / 460UTn2-UD2 / 460UT-2 / 460UTnB / 460UT-B
LCD Panel
Size 46 inches (116 cm)
Display area 1018.353 mm (H) x 572.544 mm (V)
Pixel Pitch 0.7455 mm (H) x 0.7455 mm (V)
Synchronization
Horizontal 30 ~ 81 kHz
Vertical 56 ~ 85 Hz
Display Color
16.7M
Resolution
Optimum resolution 1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz
Maximum resolution 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Maximum Pixel Clock
148.5 MHz (Analog,Digital)
Power Supply
This product supports 100 - 240 V.
Since the standard voltage may differ from country to country, please check the
label on the back of the product.
Signal connectors
D-sub(Component), DVI-D In/Out, VCR, HDMI 1/2, RS232C In/Out, DP
DC Out, Stereo Audio In/Out, Audio In(L/R), RJ45, IR In/Out, Mini USB
• USB, LAN, D-sub out (460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B Only)
Dimensions (W x H x D) / Weight
460UTn-2,
460UTn2-UD2
1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm (40.4 x 22.8 x 5.1 inches) /
27.8 Kg (61.3 Ibs)
460UT-2 1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm (40.4 x 22.8 x 5.1 inches) /
26.3 Kg (58.0 Ibs)
460UTn-B 1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm (40.4 x 22.8 x 5.1 inches) /
20.8 Kg (45.9 Ibs)
460UT-B 1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm (40.4 x 22.8 x 5.1 inches) /
19.3 Kg (42.5 Ibs)VESA Mounting Interface
600 mm × 400 mm
Environmental considerations
Operating 460UTn
-2
460UTn
2-UD2
460UTn
-B
Temperature : 50°F ~ 104°F (10°C ~ 40°C)
Humidity : 10 % ~ 80 %, non-condensing
460UT-
2
460UTB
Temperature : 32°F ~ 104°F (0°C ~ 40°C)
Humidity : 10 % ~ 80 %, non-condensing
Storage 460UTn
-2
460UTn
2-UD2
460UTn
-B
Temperature : -4°F ~ 113°F (-20°C ~ 45°C)
Humidity : 5 % ~ 95 %, non-condensing
460UT-
2
460UTB
Plug and Play Capability
This LCD Display can be installed on any Plug & Play compatible system. The
interaction of the LCD Display and the computer systems will provide the best operating conditions and LCD Display settings. In most cases, the LCD Display
installation will proceed automatically, unless the user wishes to select alternate
settings.
Dot Acceptable
TFT-LCD panels manufactured by using advanced semiconductor technology with
precision of 1ppm (one millionth) above are used for this product. But the pixels of
RED, GREEN, BLUE and WHITE color appear to be bright sometimes or some
black pixels may be seen. This is not from bad quality and you can use it without
any problems.
For example, the number of TFT-LCD sub pixels contained in this product are
3,147,264.
Note
• Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
• Attaching a Samsung ID (videowall kit) will increase the weight of an LFD by 1.6 kg.
Specifications Class A (Information Communication equipment for industrial use) : 460UTn-2,
460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B
Attention dealers and users. This device is registered for EMC requirements for industrial use
(Class A) and can be used in areas other than general households.
Class B(Information Communication equipment for residential use) : 460UT-2,
460UT-B
This device is registered for EMC requirements for home use (Class B). It can be used in all
areas. (Class B equipment emits less electromagnetic waves than Class A equipment.)
(USA Only)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To
find the nearest recycling location, go to our website, www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect, or call (877) 278 - 0799
PowerSaver
This LCD Display has a built-in power management system called PowerSaver. This system
saves energy by switching your LCD Display to low-power mode when it has not been used
for a certain amount of time. The LCD Display automatically returns to normal operation when
you press a key on the keyboard. For energy conservation, turn your LCD Display OFF when
it is not needed, or when leaving it unattended for long periods. The PowerSaver system
operates with a VESA DPM compliant video card installed in your computer. Use the software
utility installed on your computer to set up this feature.
PowerSaver
State Normal Operation
Power saving mode
Power off Power off
(Power
Swich)
Power Indicator On Blinking Amber Off
Power Consumption
(Typical)
460UTn-2
460UTn2-
UD2
300 Watts 5 Watts 5 Watts 0 Watts
460UT-2 230 Watts 2 Watts 1 Watts 0 Watts
460UTn-B 260 Watts 5 Watts 5 Watts 0 Watts
460UT-B 195 Watts 2 Watts 1 Watts 0 Watts
Note
• The actual power consumption may be different from the indicated power consumption
above if the system conditions or settings are changed.
• To stop any power consumption, turn off the switch or disconnect the power cable on the
back. Be sure to disconnect the power if you intend to stay away from home for many
hours.
• If you connect a network box (sold separately), the LFD will no longer be in compliance
with Energy Star 5.0.
SpecificationsPreset Timing Modes
If the signal transferred from the computer is the same as the following Preset Timing Modes,
the screen will be adjusted automatically. However, if the signal differs, the screen may go
blank while the power LED is on. Refer to the video card manual and adjusts the screen as
follows.
Display Mode Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical Frequency (Hz)
Pixel Clock
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H/V)
IBM, 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/-
IBM, 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
IBM, 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
MAC, 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
MAC, 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
MAC, 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/-
VESA, 640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
VESA, 640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
VESA, 800 x 600 35.156 56.250 36.000 +/+
VESA, 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
VESA, 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
VESA, 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
VESA, 848 x 480 31.020 60.000 33.750 +/+
VESA, 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
VESA, 1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
VESA, 1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
VESA, 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+
VESA, 1280 x 768 47.776 59.870 79.500 -/+
VESA, 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+
VESA, 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+
VESA, 1280 x 1024 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+
VESA, 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+
VESA, 1366 x 768 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+
VESA,1600 x 1200 75.000 60.000 162.000 +/+
VESA,1920 x 1080 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+
Horizontal Frequency
The time to scan one line connecting the right edge
to the left edge of the screen horizontally is called the
Horizontal Cycle and the inverse number of the Horizontal Cycle is called the Horizontal Frequency.
Unit: kHz
Vertical Frequency
Like a fluorescent lamp, the screen has to repeat the
same image many times per second to display an
image to the user. The frequency of this repetition is
Specifications
called the Vertical Frequency or Refresh Rate. Unit:
HzInformation
For a Better Display
Adjust the computer resolution and screen injection rate (refresh rate) on the
computer as described below to enjoy the best picture quality. You can have an
uneven picture quality on screen if the best picture quality is not provided for TFTLCD.
• Resolution: 1366 x 768
• Vertical frequency (refresh rate): 60 Hz
TFT-LCD panels manufactured by using advanced semiconductor technology
with a precision of 1ppm (one millionth) and above is used for this product. But the
pixels of RED, GREEN, BLUE and WHITE color seem to be bright sometimes or
some of black pixels could be seen. This is not from bad quality and you can use
it without any problems.
• For example, the number of TFT-LCD sub pixels contained in this product are
3,147,264.
When cleaning the monitor and the panel outside, please apply a small amount
of water to a soft cloth. Rub softly when cleaning the LCD area.If excessive force
is applied, you may stain it.
If you are not satisfied with the picture quality, you can get better quality of
picture by performing the "Auto Adjustment function" in display screen that is
appeared as window termination button is pressed. If there's still noise after the
automatic adjustment, use the Fine/Coarse adjustment function.
When viewing a fixed screen for an extended period of time, a residual image
or blurriness may appear. Change the mode to energy save or set a screensaver
to move the picture when you need to be away from the monitor for an extended
period of time.
PRODUCT INFORMATION (Image Retention Free)
What is Image Retention ?
Image retention may not occur when a LCD panel is operated under normal conditions.
Normal conditions are defined as continuously changing video patterns. When the
LCD panel is operated for a long time with a fixed pattern (over 12 hours), there
may be slight difference in voltage between electrodes that work the liquid crystal
(LC) in a pixel. The voltage difference between electrodes increases with time,
forcing the liquid crystal to lean. When this occurs, the previous image may be seen
when the pattern is changed. To prevent this, the accumulated voltage difference
must be decreased.Power Off, Screen Saver, or Power Save Mode
• Turn the power off for 2 hours after 12 hours in use
• Set the Monitor to power off with the PC Display Properties Power Scheme.
• Use a Screen saver if possible - Screen saver in one color or a moving image
is recommended.
• The Image Retention Free function applied to the product is recommended.
Change the Color Information periodically
Note
Use Two different colors
Rotate the Color Information with 2 different colors every 30 minutes.
• Avoid using a combination of characters and background color with large difference in luminance.
Avoid using Grey colors, which can cause Image retention easily.
Avoid: Colors with big difference in luminance (Black & White, Grey)
InformationChange the characters color periodically
• Use Bright colors with little difference in luminance.
- Cycle : Change the characters color and background color every 30 minutes
• Every 30 minutes, change the characters with movement.
• Have the images and logo cycle periodically.
- Cycle: Display moving image together with Logo for 60 seconds after 4 hours
in use.
• The best way to protect your monitor from Image retention is to turn the Power
off, or set your PC or System to operate a Screen Saver program when you are
not using it. If these guidelines are not followed, it may affect your warranty.
Apply the Screen Pixel function on Product
• Apply the Screen Pixel function
- Symptom: Dot with Black Color move up and down.
• Apply the Screen Bar function
- Symptom: Horizontal / Vertical Bar with Black Color move up and down.
Apply the Screen Erasing function on Product
Information• Apply the Screen Erasing function
- Symptom: 2 Vertical blocks move while erasing the display
InformationAppendix
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Note
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the
SAMSUNG customer care center.
North America
U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com/ca
http://www.samsung.com/
ca_fr (French)
MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
http://www.samsung.com
Latin America
ARGENTINA 0800-333-3733 http://www.samsung.com
BRAZIL 0800-124-421
4004-0000
http://www.samsung.com
BOLIVIA 800-10-7260 http://www.samsung.com
CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
From mobile 02-482 82 00
http://www.samsung.com
COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 http://www.samsung.com
COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 http://www.samsung.com
DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 http://www.samsung.com
ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 http://www.samsung.com
EL SALVADOR 800-6225 http://www.samsung.com
GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 http://www.samsung.com
HONDURAS 800-27919267 http://www.samsung.com
JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 http://www.samsung.com
NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 http://www.samsung.com
PANAMA 800-7267 http://www.samsung.com
PERU 0-800-777-08 http://www.samsung.com
PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 http://www.samsung.com
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 http://www.samsung.com
Europe
ALBANIA 42 27 5755 http://www.samsung.com
AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
http://www.samsung.com
BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 http://www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)Europe
http://www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French)
BOSNIA 05 133 1999 http://www.samsung.com
BULGARIA 07001 33 11 http://www.samsung.com
CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG (062 726
7864)
http://www.samsung.com
CZECH 800 - SAMSUNG
(800-726786)
http://www.samsung.com
DENMARK 70 70 19 70 http://www.samsung.com
FINLAND 030 - 6227 515 http://www.samsung.com
FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 http://www.samsung.com
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864, € 0,14/Min)
http://www.samsung.com
CYPRUS From landline : 8009 4000 http://www.samsung.com
GREECE From landline : 80111-SAMSUNG (7267864)
From landline & mobile : (+30)
210 6897691
http://www.samsung.com
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
KOSOVO +381 0113216899 http://www.samsung.com
LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 http://www.samsung.com
MACEDONIA 023 207 777 http://www.samsung.com
MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 http://www.samsung.com
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) ( € 0,10/Min)
http://www.samsung.com
NORWAY 815-56 480 http://www.samsung.com
POLAND 0 801-1SAMSUNG(172-678)
+48 22 607-93-33
http://www.samsung.com
PORTUGAL 808 20-SAMSUNG (808 20
7267)
http://www.samsung.com
RUMANIA From landline : 08010-SAMSUNG (7267864)
From landline & mobile : (+40)
21 206 01 10
http://www.samsung.com
SERBIA 0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726
7864)
http://www.samsung.com
SLOVAKIA 0800 - SAMSUNG (0800-726
786)
http://www.samsung.com
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172
678)
http://www.samsung.com
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) http://www.samsung.com
AppendixEurope
SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
http://www.samsung.com/ch
http://www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/(French)
U.K 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) http://www.samsung.com
EIRE 0818 717100 http://www.samsung.com
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 http://www.samsung.com
LATVIA 8000-7267 http://www.samsung.com
ESTONIA 800-7267 http://www.samsung.com
TURKEY 444 77 11 http://www.samsung.com
CIS
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 http://www.samsung.com
GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 http://www.samsung.com
ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 http://www.samsung.com
AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 http://www.samsung.com
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:
7799)
http://www.samsung.com
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
MONGOLIA - http://www.samsung.com
UKRAINE 0-800-502-000 http://www.samsung.com/ua
http://www.samsung.com/
ua_ru
BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
Asia Pacific
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 http://www.samsung.com
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)
http://www.samsung.com
CHINA 400-810-5858 http://www.samsung.com
HONG KONG (852) 3698 - 4698 http://www.samsung.com/hk
http://www.samsung.com/
hk_en/
INDIA 1800 1100 11
3030 8282
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
http://www.samsung.com
INDONESIA 0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777
http://www.samsung.com
AppendixAsia Pacific
JAPAN 0120-327-527 http://www.samsung.com
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 http://www.samsung.com
PHILIPPINES 1-800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) for PLDT
1-800-3-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) for Digitel
1-800-8-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) for Globe
02-5805777
http://www.samsung.com
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
THAILAND 1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
http://www.samsung.com
TAIWAN 0800-329-999
0266-026-066
http://www.samsung.com
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 http://www.samsung.com
Middle East
IRAN 021-8255 http://www.samsung.com
OMAN 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
KUWAIT 183-2255 http://www.samsung.com
BAHRAIN 8000-4726 http://www.samsung.com
EGYPT 08000-726786 http://www.samsung.com
JORDAN 800-22273 http://www.samsung.com
MOROCCO 080 100 2255 http://www.samsung.com
SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 http://www.samsung.com
U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
Africa
CAMEROON 7095- 0077 http://www.samsung.com
COTE D'LVOIRE 8000 0077 http://www.samsung.com
GHANA 0800-10077
0302-200077
http://www.samsung.com
KENYA 0800 724 000 http://www.samsung.com
NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 http://www.samsung.com
SENEGAL 800-00-0077 http://www.samsung.com
SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 http://www.samsung.com
UGANDA 0800 300 300 http://www.samsung.com
Terms
Dot Pitch The image on a monitor is composed of red, green and blue
dots. The closer the dots, the higher the resolution. The disAppendixtance between two dots of the same color is called the 'Dot
Pitch'. Unit: mm
Vertical Frequency The screen must be redrawn several times per second in
order to create and display an image for the user. The frequency of this repetition per second is called the Vertical
Frequency or Refresh Rate. Unit: Hz
Example: If the same light repeats itself 60 times per second, this is regarded as 60 Hz.
Horizontal Frequency The time to scan one line connecting the right edge to the
left edge of the screen horizontally is called the Horizontal
Cycle. The inverse number of the Horizontal Cycle is called
Horizontal Frequency. Unit: kHz
Interlace and Non-Interlace
Methods
Showing the horizontal lines of the screen from the top to
the bottom sequentially is called the Non-Interlace method
while showing odd lines and then even lines in turn is called
the Interlace method. The Non-Interlace method is used for
the majority of monitors to ensure a clear image. The Interlace method is the same as that used in TVs.
Plug & Play This is a function that provides the best quality screen for
the user by allowing the computer and the monitor to exchange information automatically. This monitor follows the
international standard VESA DDC for the Plug & Play function.
Resolution The number of horizontal and vertical dots used to compose
the screen image is called the 'resolution'. This number
shows the accuracy of the display. A high resolution is good
for performing multiple tasks as more image information can
be shown on the screen.
Example: If the resolution is 1920 x 1080, this means the
screen is composed of 1920 horizontal dots (horizontal resolution) and 1080 vertical lines (vertical resolution).
Correct Disposal
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with
separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items
from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased
this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how
they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
AppendixCorrect Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with
separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries
are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human
health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your
local, free battery return system.
Appendix
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with
separate battery return systems.)
The marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the battery in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste.
Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC
Directive 2006/66.
The battery incorporated in this product is not user replaceable. For information on its replacement, please contact your service provider. Do
not attempt to remove the battery or dispose it in a fire. Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture the battery. If you intend to discard the
product, the waste collection site will take the appropriate measures for
the recycling and treatment of the product, including the battery.Authority
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. is strictly forbidden.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental
or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
Samsung is the registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.; Microsoft, Windows
and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; VESA, DPM and DDC
are registered trademarks of Video Electronics Standard Association; All other product names
mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
TruSurround XT, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS
Labs, Inc.
TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS
Labs, Inc.
Appendix
SyncMaster 460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UT-2, 460UTn-B, 460UT-B
LCD ディスプレイ
ユーザー マニュアル
色と外観は製品によって異なる場合があり、製品
の仕様は性能の向上のために予告無く変更される
場合があります。安全使用上の注意
本書中のマークの説明
注意
製品を正しく使用して事故および製品の損傷を防止するために、下記の指示に従ってくだ
さい。
警告/注意
このマークの付いた指示に従わなかった場合には、人体への傷害また
は機器の損傷を招くことがあります。
注意
禁止 指示事項
分解禁止
コンセントからプラグを抜い
てください
接触禁止
感電を防ぐために、アースを
行ってください
電源
長期間使用しない場合には、コンピュータを節電モード(DPM)に設定し
ます。
スクリーン セイバーを使用している場合には、アクティブスクリーン
モードに設定します。
破損した電源コードまたはプラグ、破損またはがたつきのある
コンセントを使用しないでください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
コンセントにプラグを抜き差しするときに、濡れた手で電源プ
ラグに触れないでください。
• 感電の原因となることがあります。
電源コードは、アースされたコンセントに接続してください。
• 漏電または傷害の原因となることがあります。
電源プラグはコンセントにしっかりと正しく差し込みます。
• 火災の原因となることがあります。電源プラグや電源コードを無理に曲げたり引っ張らないでくだ
さい。また、電源プラグや電源コードに重い物を乗せないでくだ
さい。
• 火災の原因となることがあります。
同じコンセントに複数の電気製品を接続しないでください。
• 過熱による火災の原因となることがあります。
製品の使用中は電源コードを外さないでください。
• 感電によるモニターの故障の原因となることがあります。
本体から電源を抜く場合や、コンセントから電源を抜く場合の
ことを考えて、余裕を持って抜き差しができる環境に設置をして
ください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
気
•
電源プラグは、手の届きやすいコンセントに接続してくださ
い。
• 製品に問題が発生したときには、電源プラグを抜いて完全に
電源をオフにする必要があります。製品の電源ボタンだけで
は、電源を完全にオフにすることはできません。
インストール方法
ほこりが多い場所、異常な高温または低温にさらされる場所、湿度の高
い場所、化学溶媒が使用されている場所、および空港や駅など 24 時間
製品を使用する場所に設置する場合には、お客様相談ダイヤルにご相談
ください。
ご相談せずに設置した場合、モニターに重大な損傷が発生することがあ
ります。
製品の移動は必ず 2 人以上で行ってください。
• 落下事故やケガ、製品の破損の原因となることがあります。
キャビネットやラックなど高いところに製品を設置するときに
は、製品がはみ出たりしないようしっかりと安定した状態で設置
してください。
• 落下または傷害の原因になる場合があります。
• 製品に合ったサイズのキャビネットまたはラックを使用して
ください。
安全使用上の注意ろうそく、蚊取り線香、タバコおよびその他の熱源を製品に近
づけないでください。
• 火災の原因となることがあります。
電源コードまたは製品は、熱源となる機器に近づけないでくだ
さい。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
本棚やクローゼットなど、換気の悪い場所に設置しないでくだ
さい。
• 内部の温度が上昇して、火災の原因となることがあります。
製品を下ろすときには、手荒に扱わないでください。
• 表示画面が損傷する場合があります。
製品の前面を下にして床に置かないでください。
• 表示画面が損傷する場合があります。
壁掛け金具の設置は、専門の業者が行うようにしてください。
• 落下して傷害の原因になる場合があります。
• 指定された壁掛け金具で設置してください。
製品は、換気が十分に行われる場所に設置してください。壁か
ら 4 インチ (10 cm) 以上離してください。
• 内部の温度が上昇して、火災の原因となることがあります。
梱包材のビニールに、お子様が手を触れないようにしてくださ
い。
• お子様がビニールで遊んでいると、重大な傷害 (窒息) の原
因となることがあります。
モニターの高さ調整の際には指や手を挟まないよう十分ご注意
ください。
• 製品の損傷またはけがをする恐れがあります。
お手入れ
モニターの筐体または TFT-LCD 画面の表面を清掃するときには、少し
湿らせた柔らかい布で拭き取ります。
ほこりなどによりモニター背面の空気穴がつまり、故障を起こす 場合
もありますので定期的な掃除及び点検が必要となります。
安全使用上の注意
食用油 (大豆油など) を使用すると、製品の破損や変形の原因とな
ります。 製品をキッチンやキッチン カウンターの近くに設置しないでください。製品の表面にクリーナーを直接スプレーしないでください。
• 本体の脱色または歪み、画面表面のはがれが発生することが
あります。
電源プラグのピンを清掃するとき、またはコンセントのほこり
を取り除くときは、乾いた布を使用します。
• 火災の原因となることがあります。
製品を清掃するときは、電源コードを切り離してください。
• 感電または火災の原因となることがあります。
製品を清掃するときには、まず電源コードを外して乾いた布で
やさしく拭き取ります。
• (ワックス、ベンゼン、アルコール、シンナー、殺虫剤、潤滑
剤またはクリーナーなどの化学薬品を使用しないでくださ
い)これらの薬品によって、製品表面の外観が変わったり、製
品の表示ラベルがはがれることがあります。
製品の筐体にはキズが付きやすいため、液晶モニター用のクリ
ーニングクロスを使用してください。
製品を清掃するときには、製品本体に水を直接かけないでくだ
さい。
• 水が製品内に入らないようにし、濡れないようにしてくださ
い。
• 感電、火災または故障の原因となることがあります。
その他
この製品は、高電圧を使用しています。絶対にご自身で製品を
分解、修理または改造しないでください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。修理が必要な
場合には、お客様相談ダイヤルまでご連絡ください。
製品から異臭や異音、煙が出た場合には、直ちに電源プラグを
抜いてお客様相談ダイヤルにご連絡ください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
製品を湿気、ほこり、煙、水がかかる場所、または自動車の中
に設置しないでください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
製品が落下したり破損した場合には、電源をオフにして電源コ
ードを外し、お客様相談ダイヤルにご連絡ください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
安全使用上の注意雷が発生した場合には、電源コードまたはアンテナ ケーブル
に触れないでください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
配線または信号ケーブルのみを持ってモニターを動かさないで
ください。
• ケーブルが破損して、落下事故、感電、製品の損傷または火
災の原因となることがあります。
電源コードまたは信号ケーブルだけを持って、製品を持ち上げ
たり、前後または左右に動かさないでください。
• ケーブルが破損して、落下事故、感電、製品の損傷または火
災の原因となることがあります。
クロスやカーテンで換気口がふさがれないようにしてくださ
い。
• 内部の温度が上昇して、火災の原因となることがあります。
水の入った容器、花瓶、植木鉢、医薬品や、金属類を製品の上
に置かないでください。
• 製品が水に濡れたり、異物が製品内部に入ったりした場合に
は、電源コードを抜いてからお客様相談ダイヤルにご連絡く
ださい。
• 製品の故障、感電または火災につながる恐れがあります。
可燃性のスプレーまたは可燃物を製品に近づけないでくださ
い。
• 爆発または火災の原因となることがあります。
箸、コイン、ピンおよび刃物などの金属類、マッチや紙などの
可燃物を (換気口、入出力端子などから) 製品の中に入れないで
ください。
• 製品が水に濡れたり、異物が製品内部に入ったりした場合に
は、電源コードを抜いてからお客様相談ダイヤルにご連絡く
ださい。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
静止画面を長時間表示し続けると、残像が発生したり画面がぼ
やけたりする場合があります。また、場合によっては液晶パネル
が焼き付けを起こす場合があります。
• 長時間製品を試用しない場合には、スリープ モードにするか
動きのあるのスクリーン セイバーを使用します。
製品に適した解像度および周波数を設定します。
• 視力に影響を与えることがあります。
安全使用上の注意ヘッドフォンまたはイヤフォンを使用するときは、音量を大き
くしすぎないようにしてください。
• 音が大きすぎると、聴覚に影響を与えることがあります。
疲れ目を防止するために、製品に近づきすぎないでください。
モニターを 1 時間使用したら、少なくとも 5 分間の休憩をとり
ます。
疲れ目が軽減されます。
不安定な棚や平らでない面、または振動の多い場所に設置しな
いでください。
• 落下事故やケガ、製品の破損の原因となることがあります。
• 振動の多い場所で製品を使用すると、製品の寿命が短くなっ
たり出火の原因となる場合があります。
製品を移動するときには、電源をオフにして、電源プラグ、ア
ンテナ ケーブル、および製品に接続されているすべてのケーブ
ルを切り離します。
• 感電または火災の原因となることがあります。
お子様が製品にぶら下がったり、よじ登らないようにしてくだ
さい。
• 製品が落下して傷害または死亡事故の原因になる場合があり
ます。
製品を長期間使用しない場合には、コンセントから電源コード
を外してください。
• ほこりがたまって過熱または火災の原因となったり、感電ま
たは漏電の原因となることがあります。
製品に重たいものを乗せたり、小さいお子様が興味を示すよう
なもの(おもちゃやお菓子など)を置いたりしないでください。
• お子様が製品にぶら下がって、落下により傷害または死亡事
故の原因となることがあります。
リモコンから電池を取り外したときには、お子様が電池を口
の中に入れないようにしてください。電池は、子供または乳児の
手の届かない場所に置いてください。
• お子様が電池を口の中に入れたときには、すぐに医師の診察
を受けてください。
電池を交換するときには、正しい極性 (+、‐) の向きに入れ
てください。
• 電池が破損したり、液漏れにより火災、傷害または故障の原
因となることがあります。
安全使用上の注意指定された標準の電池のみを使用し、新しい電池と使用済みの
電池を混在して使用しないでください。
• 電池が破損したり、液漏れにより火災、けがまたは故障の原
因となることがあります。
バッテリ (および充電式バッテリ) は通常の廃棄物ではなく、
リサイクルするために返送する必要があります。使用済みのバッ
テリをリサイクルのために返送する責任はお客様にあります。
• お客様は、使用済みの充電式バッテリを公共のリサイクルセ
ンターまたは同じタイプのバッテリおよび充電式バッテリを
販売している店舗に返送することができます。
直射日光の当たる場所、炎またはヒーターなどの熱源の近くに
製品を置かないでください。
• 製品の寿命が短くなったり、火災の原因となることがありま
す。
製品の上に物を落としたり、製品に衝撃を与えないでくださ
い。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
製品の近くで加湿器を使用しないでください。
• 漏電または火災の原因となることがあります。
ガス漏れがあった場合には、製品または電源プラグに触れずに
直ちに換気を行ってください。
• 火花が発生すると、爆発または火災が発生することがありま
す。
長時間電源をオンにしていると液晶パネルが高温になりますの
で触れないでください。
特に小さなお子様が触れないよう十分ご注意ください。
製品の角度またはスタンドの高さを調整するときには注意して
ください。
• 手や指を挟まれると、傷害の原因となることがあります。
• また、製品を傾けすぎると、転倒して傷害の原因となること
があります。
製品を子供の手の届く高さに設置しないでください。
• 落下して傷害の原因になる場合があります。
• 製品は前の方が重たくなっているため、水平で安定した面に
設置してください。
安全使用上の注意製品の上に重い物を載せないでください。
• けがや製品の破損の原因となることがあります。
安全使用上の注意はじめに
パッケージ内容
パッケージの内容の確認
上の図に示すように、パッケージの箱からロックを取り外します。
箱の両側にある穴に手をか
けて、箱を持ち上げます。
パッケージの内容を確認し
ます。
発布スチロールとビニール
袋を取り外します。
注意
• パッケージを開いたら、内容を確認してください。
• 製品を運ぶときに必要になりますので、梱包されていた箱は保管しておいてください。
• 不足している品目がある場合には、販売店にお問い合わせください。
• オプション品の購入については、お近くの販売店にお問い合わせください。
同梱物
LCD ディスプレイマニュアル類
クイック セットアップ ガ
イド
保証書
(含まれていない地域もあ
ります)
ユーザー マニュアル
MagicInfo ソフトウェア
DVD
(460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B モデルのみ)
ケーブル
電源コード D‐Sub ケーブル
その他
リモートコントロール
(BP59-00138B)
バッテリ (AAA X 2)
(含まれていない地域もあ
ります)
別売り
(別売を行わない地域もあります)
セミ スタンド キット LAN ケーブル USB ケーブル
(460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2,
460UTn-B モデルのみ)
はじめに別売り
(別売を行わない地域もあります)
RGB to BNC ケーブル RGB to Component ケーブ
ル
NetWork ボックス
(460UT-2, 460UT-B モデル
のみ)
ウォール マウント キット TV チューナー ボックス
(米国のみ)
注意
製品と共に購入可能なアクセサリは、お住まいの国によって異なります。
お使いの LCD ディスプレイ
前面
SOURCE ボタン
PC モードからビデオモードに切り替えます。外部デバイスが接続されて
いる入力信号を選択します。
[PC] → [DVI] → [AV] → [コンポ一ネント] → [HDMI1] → [HDMI2]
→ [ディスプレイ ポート] → [MagicInfo] →[TV]
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する
必要があります。(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルで MagicInfo を使用するには、ネットワー
ク ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
POWER ボタン
はじめにこのボタンで、LCD ディスプレイの電源のオン/オフを切り替えます。
電源インジケーター
緑色に点滅して PowerSaver モードであることを示します
注意
省電力機能の詳細については、このマニュアルの「PowerSaver」を参照
してください。消費電力を押さえるために、必要ない場合または長時間
LCD ディスプレイから離れる場合にはモニターをオフにします。
リモートカラーセンサー
リモコンを LCD ディスプレイのこの部分に向けます。
背面
注意
ケーブル接続の詳細については、「接続」のセクションを参照してください。LCD ディス
プレイの背面の構成は、モデルによって若干異なる場合があります。
POWER S/W ON [ │ ] / OFF
LCD ディスプレイのオン/オフを切り替えま
す。
POWER
LCD ディスプレイと壁のコンセントに電源
コードを接続します。
IR OUT/IN
リモコンからの信号を受信して、リムーバ
ブル センサー ボードが接続されたときに
はループアウトを通じて信号を送信します。
AMBIENT SENSOR IN
リムーバブル センサー ボードに電源を供
給し、光センサーからの信号を受信します。
はじめに DVI OUT (LOOPOUT)
• モニターを DVI、DVI to HDMI ケーブル
を使用して別のモニターに接続します。
• DVI または DVI‐HDMI ケーブルを製品
の [DVI OUT (LOOPOUT)] と別のモニタ
ーの [DVI IN] または [HDMI IN] に接
続します。
• [DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] ポートから送出さ
れる HDMI およびネットワーク信号は、
[DVI IN] ポートを持つセカンド ディス
プレイに表示されます。
注意
• ループアウト機能を使用して、プライマ
リ ディスプレイの画面を二重化するこ
とができます。プライマリ ディスプレ
イの [DVI OUT] を別のディスプレイの
[DVI IN] または [HDMI] に接続します。
• DVI‐Loopout には (長さ 2m の DVI ケ
ーブルを使用して) 最大 100 台のモニ
ターを接続できます。最大で HD までの
解像度をサポートできます。入力信号
は、DVI IN、HDMI IN 1、および HDMI IN
2 (MagicInfo) に対応しています。
• ケーブルの状態は、Loopout の性能に大
きく影響します。
RGB/COMPONENT IN (PC/COMPONENT 接続
端子 (入力))
• モニターの [RGB/COMPONENT IN] ポート
を PC の RGB ポートに D‐SUB ケーブ
ルを使用して接続します。
• モニターの [RGB/COMPONENT IN] ポート
を外部デバイスの COMPONENT ポートに
RGB to COMPONENT ケーブルを使用して
接続します。
• モニターの [RGB/COMPONENT IN] ポート
を PC の BNC ポートに RGB to BNC ケ
ーブルを使用して接続します。
DVI IN (PC 映像接続端子)
モニターの [DVI IN] ポートを PC の DVI
ポートに DVI ケーブルを使用して接続しま
す。
RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN (PC/DVI/
DP/HDMI 音声接続端子 (入力))
はじめに別売りのステレオ ケーブルを使用して、モ
ニターの [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN] 端
子とお使いのコンピュータのサウンド カー
ドのスピーカー出力端子を接続します。
DP IN
ディスプレイ ポートからの信号を受信しま
す。
DP ケーブルを製品の [DP IN] と別のディ
スプレイの DP IN に接続します。
AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]
モニターの [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [RAUDIO-L]] ポートを PC または外部デバイ
スの音声出力ポートにオーディオ ケーブル
を使用して接続します。
AV IN
ビデオ ケーブルを使用して、モニターの
[AV IN] 端子を外部デバイスのビデオ出力
端子に接続します。
AUDIO OUT
ヘッドフォンまたは外部スピーカーを接続
します。
DC OUT
[DC OUT] 端子が承認済みの TV チューナ
ー ボックス に接続されていることを確認
します。(米国のみ)
製品が損傷する場合があります。
HDMI IN 1
• HDMI ケーブルを使用して、LCD ディス
プレイ背面の [HDMI IN 1] 端子をお使
いのデジタル出力デバイスの HDMI 端子
に接続します。
• HDMI 1.3 までをサポートしています。
注意
• 通常の外部デバイス (DVD プレーヤーや
レコーダーなど) や TV チューナー ボ
ックスを [HDMI IN 1] 端子に接続でき
ます。
はじめに• TV チューナー ボックス (米国のみ) を
使用する場合は、[HDMI IN 1] 端子に接
続してください。
HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)
• HDMI ケーブルを使用して、LCD ディス
プレイ背面の [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] 端子をお使いのデジタル出力デバ
イスの HDMI 端子に接続します。
• HDMI 1.3 までをサポートしています。
注意
MAGICINFO OUT ポートは、[HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] ポートに接続しなければなりませ
ん。
RJ 45 MDC (MDC PORT)
MDC (マルチディスプレイ コントロール)
プログラム ポート
LAN ケーブルを製品の [RJ45 MDC] と PC
の LAN に接続します。MDC を使用するに
は、PC に MDC プログラムがインストール
されている必要があります。
注意
マルチコントロール に移動して、MDC 接
続 として RJ45 MDC を選択します。
RS232C OUT/IN (RS232C シリアル ポー
ト)
MDC (マルチディスプレイ コントロール)
プログラム ポート
シリアル ケーブル (クロス タイプ) を製
品の [RS232C] と PC の RS232C に接続し
ます。MDC を使用するには、PC に MDC プ
ログラムがインストールされている必要が
あります。
注意
マルチコントロール に移動して、MDC 接
続 として RS232C MDC を選択します。
はじめに RGB OUT
MagicInfo ビデオ出力ポート
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B モデル
のみ。
MAGICINFO OUT
MagicInfo の DP 信号を出力します。 DP to
HDMI ケーブルで [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] に接続する必要があります。
LAN (LAN 接続端子)
LAN ケーブルに接続して、MagicInfo モー
ドでのインターネットまたはネットワーク
アクセスを可能にします。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B モデル
のみ。
USB(USB 接続端子)
キーボード/マウス、マス ストレージ機器
対応。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B モデル
のみ。
Kensington Lock slot
Kensington ロックは、公共の場所で製品を
安全に使用できるようにロックすることが
できる盗難防止用の装置です。固定装置の
形状と使用方法はモデルおよびメーカーに
よって異なるため、詳細については固定装
置に付属するユーザー マニュアルを参照し
てください。
製品をロックするには以下の手順に
従います。
1. Kensington ロック ケーブルを、デス
クや椅子など大きくて動かない物体に
かけます。
2. ロックのついたケーブルの端を Kensington ロック ケーブルの端の輪に通
します。
はじめに3. ケンジントン ロックをディスプレイ背
面にあるセキュリティ スロット ( )
に挿入します。
4. ロックします ( )。
注意
• Kensington ロックを別途購入する必要
があります。
• これは一般的な説明です。詳細について
は、ロック装置に付属するユーザー マ
ニュアルを参照してください。
• 固定装置の購入につきましてはお買い上
げいただいたお店にご確認ください。
注意
ケーブル接続の詳細については、「接続」のセクションを参照してください。
リモートコントロール
注意
• リモコンの動作は TV またはその他 LCD ディスプレイ付近で動作している電子機器の
影響を受ける場合があり、周波数の干渉によって誤作動することがあります。
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
POWER
OFF
ダイヤルパッド
/ GUIDE ボタン
+ VOL -
SOURCE
D.MENU
TOOLS
上下左右ボタン
INFO
色ボタンと PC/DVI/HDMI/DP 選択ボタン
TTX/MIX
MTS/DUAL
ENTER/PRE-CH
MUTE
CH/P
はじめにTV
MENU
RETURN
EXIT
MagicInfo
POWER
製品をオンにします。
OFF 製品をオフにします。
ダイヤルパッド OSD の調整時、または MagicInfo を使用するときにパス
ワードを入力するのに使用します。
押してチャンネルを変更します。
/ GUIDE ボタン 「‐」ボタンはデジタル チャンネルの選択に使用します。
電子番組ガイド (EPG) 表示
‐ この機能はこの LCD ディスプレイでは動作しません。
+ VOL - 音声の音量を調整します。
SOURCE 接続されている外部入力信号または MagicInfo モードを
選択します。
ボタンを押して、入力信号 SOURCE を切り換えます。
SOURCE の変更は、変更時に LCD ディスプレイに接続され
ている外部デバイスについてのみ行うことができます
D.MENU
DTV メニュー表示
‐ この機能はこの LCD ディスプレイでは動作しません。
TOOLS よく使う機能を素早く選択するのに使用します。
‐ この機能はこの LCD ディスプレイでは動作しません。
上下左右ボタン ひとつのメニューから別のメニューに横方向、縦方向に移
動したり、選択したメニューの値を調整したりします。
INFO 画面左上に現在の画像情報が表示されます。
色ボタンと PC/DVI/
HDMI/DP 選択ボタン
TV モードでは、これらのボタンを使用して、デジタル チ
ャンネルの放送通知機能を設定できます。
TV モード以外のモードでは、PC、DVI、HDMI または DP
(ディスプレイ ポート) 外部入力を直接選択できます。
TTX/MIX
TV チャンネルは、テレテキスト経由で文字情報サービスを
提供します。
‐ テレテキスト ボタン
はじめに‐ TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされていると
きに有効になります。
MTS/DUAL
MTS‐
MTS (マルチチャンネル テレビ ステレオ) モードを選択
できます。
音声タイプ MTS/S_Mode デフォルト
FM ステレオ モノラル モノラル 手動変更
ステレオ モノラル ↔ステ
レオ
SAP モノラル ↔ SAP モノラル
DUAL‐
STEREO/MONO、DUAL l / DUAL ll および MONO/NICAM MONO/
NICAM STEREO は、放送のタイプに応じて TV の視聴中に
リモコンの DUAL ボタンで操作することができます。
‐ TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされていると
きに有効になります。
ENTER/PRE-CH このボタンを使用して、前のチャンネルに直ちに戻りま
す。
‐ TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされていると
きに有効になります。
MUTE
音声の出力を一時的に停止(ミュート)します。これは画
面の左下隅に表示されます。消音モードで MUTE または -
VOL + が押されると、音声が再度聞こえるようになりま
す。
CH/P
TV モードで、TV のチャンネルを選択します。
‐ TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされていると
きに有効になります。
TV
TV モードを直接選択します。
‐ TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされていると
きに有効になります。
MENU オンスクリーン メニューを開いたり、メニューを終了し
たり、調整メニューを閉じたりします。
RETURN
前のメニューに戻ります。
EXIT
メニュー画面を終了します。
MagicInfo
MagicInfo クイック起動ボタン
注意
MagicInfo をサポートしない製品では、このボタンが無効
になっています。
はじめに物理的レイアウト
物理的レイアウト
LCD ディスプレイ ヘッド
はじめにオプションスタンド(別売品 : 別売を行わない地域もあります)
• VESA を取り付けるときには、国際 VESA 規格に準拠してください。
• VESA ブラケットの購入と設置についての情報:お近くの SAMSUNG 販売店にご注文くだ
さい。ご注文後、取り付け担当者がお伺いし、ブラケットの取り付けを行います。
• LCD ディスプレイを運搬するには、少なくとも 2 名の人員が必要です。
• SAMSUNG は、お客様による取り付けによって発生した損害および負傷について、責任を
負うものではありません。
寸法
注意
ブラケットを壁に固定するには、6 mm 径で長さ 8~ 12 mm のネジだけを使用するようにし
てください。
ウォールブラケットの取り付け
• ウォールブラケットの取り付けについては、技術者にご相談ください。
• お客様が自ら取り付けを行った場合には、SAMSUNG Electronics は製品の損傷およびお
客様の傷害について責任を負いかねます。
• この製品は、セメント製の壁に設置するためのものです。この製品は、合板または木製
の壁に取り付けることはできません。
はじめに部品
製品に付属している部品およびアクセサリのみを使用してください。
ウォール ブラケット
(1)
ヒンジ (左1、右1) プラスチ
ック ハ
ン ガ ー
(4)
ネジ (A)
(11)
ネジ (B)
(4)
ア ン カ
ー (11)
ウォール ブラケット アセンブリ
注意
ヒンジは 2個(左用または右用)あります。該当する方を使用してください。
1. 固定ネジを矢印の向きに挿入して固定します。
固定したら、ウォールブラケットを壁に取り付けます。
ヒンジは 2個(左用または右用)あります。該当する方を使用してください。
A ‐ 固定ネジ
B ‐ ウォールブラケット
C ‐ ヒンジ (左)
D ‐ ヒンジ (右)
2. 壁にドリルで穴を開ける前に、製品の背面にある 2 カ所の固定穴が適切な間隔になっ
ていることを確認してください。
長さが短い、または長い場合には、ウォールブラケットの 4 本のネジを緩めて調整を
行います。
はじめにA ‐ 2 カ所の固定穴の間隔
3. 取り付け図を見て、壁にドリルで穴を開ける位置に印を付けます。5.0 mm のビットを
使用して、35 mm より深い穴を開けます。 各アンカーを対応する穴に固定します。ブ
ラケットとヒンジの穴をそれぞれ該当するアンカー穴に合わせ、挿入して 11 本のネ
ジ (A) で固定します。
ウォール ブラケットに製品を取り付けるには
製品の形状はモデルによって異なります。(プラスティックハンガーおよびネジは同じで
す)
1. 製品の背面にある 4 本のネジを取り外します。
はじめに2. ネジ (B) をプラスチックハンガーに挿入します。
注意
• ウォールブラケットに製品を取り付けたら、左右のプラスチックハンガーに正しく
固定されていることを確認してください。
• 製品をブラケットに取り付けるときには、穴に指が挟まれないように注意してくだ
さい。
• ウォールブラケットが壁にしっかりと固定されていることを確認してください。取
り付け後に製品が動いてしまうことがあります。
3. 手順 2 で取り付けた 4 本のネジ (プラスチック ハンガー + ネジ (B)) を、製品の
背面の穴に固定します。
4. 安全ピン (3) を取り外して 4 個の製品ホルダーを対応するブラケット ホール (1)
に挿入します。続いて、製品 (2) をブラケットにしっかりと固定されるように配置し
ます。安全ピン (3) をしっかりと最挿入して締め付け、製品をブラケットに固定しま
す。
はじめにA ‐ LCD ディスプレイ
B ‐ ウォールブラケット
C ‐ 壁
ウォール ブラケットの角度調整
壁に取り付ける前に、ブラケットの角度を ‐2˚ に調整してください。
1. 製品をウォールブラケットに固定します。
2. 製品の上部中央を持ち、前(矢印の方向)に引っ張って角度を調整します。
注意
ブラケットの角度は ‐2˚~ 15˚ の範囲で調整できます。
角度を調整する際に、製品の側面を持たないようにしてください。必ず製品の上部中央を
持ってください。
はじめに接続
コンピュータの接続
コンピュータをモニターに接続するにはいくつかの方法があります。以
下のオプションから選択してください。
ビデオカードの D‐sub(アナログ)コネクタを使用します。
• D‐sub は、LCD ディスプレイ背面の 15‐pin の [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] ポートとコンピュータの 15‐pin D‐sub ポートを接続します。
ビデオカードの DVI(デジタル)コネクタを使用します。
• DVI ケーブルは、LCD ディスプレイ背面の [DVI IN] ポートとコンピ
ュータの DVI ポートを接続します。
ビデオカードの DP(デジタル)コネクタを使用します。
• LCD ディスプレイの [DP IN] ポートと PC の DP ポートを DP ケー
ブルを使用して接続します。注意
HDMI ケーブルで PC と接続したときには、入力信号として HDMI2
(460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合のみ) または HDMI1 を選択します。
PC からの画像と音声を正常に出力するには、外部入力名編集 で PC を
選択する前に HDMI2 (460UT‐2, 460UT‐B モデルのみ) または HDMI1
を選択します。
DVI 装置 が選択されているときに音声を有効にするには、ステップ
( ) を使用して接続されていることを確認します。
LCD ディスプレイのオーディオ ケーブルを LCD ディスプレイ背面のオ
ーディオ ポートに接続します。
LCD ディスプレイの電源コードを LCD ディスプレイ背面の電源ポートに
接続します。電源スイッチをオンにします。
注意
オプション品の購入については、SAMSUNG のお近くの販売店にお問い合わせください。
他のデバイスへの接続
注意
• お使いのコンピュータだけでなく、DVD プレイヤー、VCR またはカムコーダーなどの AV
入力機器を LCD ディスプレイに接続することができます。AV 入力デバイスの接続の詳
細については、「LCD ディスプレイの調整」の内容を参照してください。
• LCD ディスプレイの背面の構成は、LCD ディスプレイのモデルによって若干異なる場合
があります。
外部モニターの接続
接続
ビデオカードの HDMI(デジタル)コネクタを使用します。
• LCD ディスプレイの [HDMI IN 1] ポートと PC の HDMI ポートを
HDMI ケーブルを使用して接続します。LCD モニターの [DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] ポートと別のモニターの入力ポー
トを DVI ケーブルで接続します。
LCD モニターの [AUDIO OUT] ポートと別のモニターの入力ポートを DVI
ケーブルで接続します。
注意
[DVI OUT] に接続されている外部モニターの入力信号として、DVI モードを選択します。
DVI OUT は HDCP をサポートしていません。
AV デバイスの接続
1. オーディオ ケーブルを製品の [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]]
と VCR や DVD プレイヤーなどの外部デバイスのオーディオ ポートに接
続します。
2. ビデオ ケーブルを製品の [AV IN] と外部デバイスのビデオ出力ポート
に接続します。
3. 次に、DVD またはテープを挿入して、DVD、VCR、またはカムコーダーを
スタートさせます。
4. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「AV」を選択します。
注意
お使いのコンピュータだけでなく、DVD プレイヤー、VCR またはカムコーダーなどの AV
入力機器を LCD ディスプレイに接続することができます。AV 入力デバイスの接続の詳細
については、「LCD ディスプレイの調整」の内容を参照してください。
接続カムコーダーへの接続
1. カムコーダーの AV 出力ジャックの場所を確認します。通常は、カムコ
ーダーの側面または背面にあります。カムコーダーの VIDEO OUTPUT ジ
ャックと LCD ディスプレイの [AV IN] をビデオ ケーブルで接続しま
す。
2. オーディオ ケーブルをカムコーダーの AUDIO OUTPUT ジャックと LCD
ディスプレイの [AV /COMPONENT AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]] に接続します。
3. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「AV」を選択します。
4. 続いて、テープを挿入したカムコーダーをスタートします。
注意
ここに示した音声ビデオ ケーブルは、通常カムコーダーに付属しています。
(付属していない場合には、お近くの電器店でご購入ください)
カムコーダーがステレオの場合には、2 本のケーブルを接続する必要があります。
HDMI ケーブルを使用して接続する
接続1. HDMI ケーブルを製品の [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (460UT-2, 460UT-B
モデルのみ) または [HDMI IN 1] とデジタル デバイスの HDMI 出力ポ
ートに接続します。
2. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「HDMI1 / HDMI2 (460UT-2,
460UT-B モデルのみ)」を選択します。
注意
HDMI モードでは、PCM フォーマットの音声のみサポートしています。
DVI ‐ HDMI ケーブルを使用して接続する
DVI‐HDMI ケーブルを製品の [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (460UT-2,
460UT-B モデルのみ) または [HDMI IN 1] とデジタル デバイスの DVI
出力ポートに接続します。
RCA ‐ ステレオ (PC 用) ケーブルの赤および白のジャックをデジタル
出力デバイスの同じ色の音声出力端子に接続し、反対側のジャックを LCD
ディスプレイの [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN] 端子に接続します。
3. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「HDMI1 / HDMI2 (460UT-2,
460UT-B モデルのみ)」を選択します。
接続DVD プレイヤーの接続
RGB to Component ケーブルで LCD ディスプレイの [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] ポートと DVD プレイヤーの PR, Y, PB ジャックを接続します。
オーディオ ケーブルのセットを LCD ディスプレイの [AV/COMPONENT
AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]] と DVD プレイヤーの AUDIO OUT ジャックの間
に接続します。
注意
• 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「コンポ一ネント」を選択します。
• 次に、DVD ディスクを挿入して DVD プレイヤーをスタートさせます。
• RGB to Component ケーブルはオプションです。
• コンポーネント ビデオについては、お使いの DVD のマニュアルを参照してください。
DTV セット トップ (ケーブル/衛星) ボックスの接続
接続RGB to Component ケーブルで LCD ディスプレイの [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] ポートとセット トップ ボックスの PR, Y, PB ジャックを接続しま
す。
オーディオ ケーブルのセットを LCD ディスプレイの [AV/COMPONENT
AUDIO IN [R-AUDIO-L]] とセット トップ ボックスの AUDIO OUT ジャッ
クの間に接続します。
注意
• 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「コンポ一ネント」を選択します。
• コンポーネント ビデオについては、お使いのセット トップ ボックスのマニュアルを
参照してください。
オーディオ システムへの接続
1. オーディオ システムの AUX L、R ジャックと LCD ディスプレイの
[AUDIO OUT] をオーディオ ケーブルで接続します。
LAN ケーブルの接続
接続1. 製品の [LAN] ポートと PC の [LAN] ポートを LAN ケーブルで接続しま
す。
注意
USB デバイスの接続
1. マウスやキーボードなどの USB 機器を接続することができます。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。
接続
460UTn-2, 460UTn2-UD2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。ソフトウェアの使用
モニター ドライバ
注意
オペレーティング システム が モニタードライバを要求してきたら、このモ
ニターに同梱されている CD-ROM を挿入して下しさい。インストール方法は
オペレーティング システムによって多少異なります。お使いのオペレーティ
ング システムに対応する指示に従ってください。
空のディスクを用意して、以下に示すインターネット Web サイトのドライ
バ プログラム ファイルをダウンロードします。
ハードディスクにコピーしてご利用ください。
インターネット Web サイト:
http://www.samsung.com/
モニター ドライバのインストール (自動)
1. CD を CD-ROM ドライブに挿入します。
2. [Windows] をクリックします。
3. モデル一覧でお使いのモニターのモデルを選択し、["OK" (OK)] をクリックします。
4. 以下のメッセージが表示される場合には、["Continue Anyway" (続行)] ボタンをクリ
ックします。続いて ["OK"] ボタン (Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP/2000 オペレーティン
グ システム) をクリックします。注意
このモニター ドライバは Microsoft が承認したもので、インストールしてもシステ
ムにダメージを与えることはありません。
承認済みのドライバは、Samsung モニターのホームページに掲載されます。
http://www.samsung.com/
モニター ドライバのインストール (手動)
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista™‚ オペレーティング システム
1. マニュアル CD を CD-ROM ドライブに挿入します。
2.
[ ] (スタート) をクリックし、["Control Panel" (コントロール パネル)] をクリ
ックします。次に、["Appearance and Personalization" (デスクトップのカスタマイ
ズ)] をダブルクリックします。
3. ["Personalization" (個人設定)]、続いて ["Display Settings" (画面の設定)] をク
リックします。
4. ["Advanced Settings..." (詳細設定...)] をクリックします。
5. ["Monitor" (モニタ)] タブで ["Properties" (プロパティ)] をクリックします。
["Properties" (プロパティ)] ボタンが無効になっている場合は、モニターの設定が
ソフトウェアの使用完了していないことを示しています。そのままでも、モニターを使用することは可能
です。
下の図に示すように ["Windows needs..." (Windows の設定が必要です...)] というメ
ッセージが表示された場合には、["Continue" (続行)] をクリックします。
注意
このモニター ドライバーは MS ロゴの承認を受けており、このドライバのインストー
ルによってシステムが破損することはありません。
承認済みのドライバは、Samsung モニターのホームページに掲載されます。
6. ["Update Driver..." (ドライバのアップデート...)] タブで ["Driver" (ドライバ)]
をクリックします。
7. ["Browse my computer for driver software" (コンピュータを参照してドライバ ソ
フトウェアを検索します)] チェックボックスをチェックして、["Let me pick from a
list of device drivers on my computer" (コンピュータ上のデバイス ドライバの一
覧から選択します)] をクリックします。
8. ["Have Disk..." (ディスク使用)] をクリックして、ドライバ セットアップファイル
のあるフォルダ (たとえば D:\Drive) を選択し、[OK] をクリックします。
ソフトウェアの使用9. 画面上のリストからお使いのモニターモデルに一致するモデルを選択し、["Next" (次
へ)] をクリックします。
10. 続いて表示される画面で、["Close" (閉じる)] → ["Close" (閉じる)] → ["OK" (OK)]
→ ["OK" (OK)] をクリックします。
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP オペレーティング システム
1. CD を CD‐ROM ドライブに挿入します。
2. 〔スタート〕をクリックし、〔コントロールパネル〕を選択します。
ソフトウェアの使用3. 〔クラシック表示に切り替える〕をクリックし、〔画面〕のアイコンをクリックしま
す。
4. コントロールパネルの〔画面〕をダブルクリックします。
5. 〔画面のプロパティ〕から〔設定〕‐〔詳細設定〕を選択します。
ソフトウェアの使用6. タブの中から〔モニタ〕をクリック。〔プロパティ〕ボタンをクリックし、次の画面
で〔ドライバの更新〕を選択します。
7. 〔ハードウェアの更新ウィザード〕から〔一覧または特定の…〕を選択します。
8. 次の画面で〔検索しないで、インストールするドライバを選択する〕をクリックし、
〔次へ〕進みます。
ソフトウェアの使用9. 〔ディスクを使用〕をクリックします。
10.〔参照〕をクリックすると〔ファイルの場所〕が表示されます。
11.〔ファイルの場所〕で CD‐ROM ドライブを選択し、更に〔Driver〕フォルダをダブルク
リックし、〔開く〕をクリックします。
12.「製造元のファイルのコピー元」に選択したドライブの「Driver」フォルダ名が表示さ
れたら〔OK〕をクリックし、該当するモニタ一のドライバを選択します。〔次へ〕を
クリックします。
ソフトウェアの使用13. ソフトウェアをインストールする画 面から、完了画面に移ります。〔完了〕ボタンを
クリックし、続けて〔閉じる〕をクリックします。
ソフトウェアの使用14. モニタードライバのインストールはこれで完了です。
注意
このモニター ドライバーは MS ロゴの承認を受けており、このドライバのインストー
ルによってシステムが破損することはありません。
承認済みのドライバは、Samsung モニターのホームページに掲載されます。
http://www.samsung.com/
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
2000 オペレーティング システム
モニター上に["Digital Signature Not Found" (デジタル署名が見つかりません)] と表示
された場合は、以下の手順を行います。
1. ["Insert disk" (ディスク挿入)] ウィンドウで ["OK" (OK)] ボタンを選択します。
2. ["File Needed" (必要なファイル)] ウィンドウで ["Browse" (参照)] ボタンをクリ
ックします。
3. A:(D:\Driver) を参照してから ["Open" (開く)] ボタンをクリックし、続いて
["OK" (OK)] ボタンをクリックします。
インストール方法
1. ["Start" (スタート)]、["Setting" (設定)]、["Control Panel" (コントロール パネ
ル)] をクリックします。
2. ["Display" (画面)] アイコンをダブルクリックします。
3. ["Settings" (設定)] タブを選択し、["Advanced" (詳細設定)] ボタンをクリックし
ます。
4. ["Monitor" (モニタ)] を選択します。
ケース 1:["Properties" (プロパティ)] ボタンが有効でない場合には、モニターが適
切に設定されていることを意味します。インストールを中止してください。
ケース 2:["Properties" (プロパティ)] ボタンが有効になっている場合には、["Properties" (プロパティ)] ボタンをクリックして次の手順に進みます。
5. ["Driver" (ドライバ)] をクリックし、続いて ["Update Driver..." (ドライバの更
新...)] をクリックして ["Next" (次へ)] をクリックします。
6. ["Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a
specific driver" (このデバイスの既知のドライバを表示して、その一覧から選択す
る)] を選択して ["Next" (次へ)] をクリックし、["Have disk" (ディスク使用)] を
クリックします。
7. ["Browse" (参照)] ボタンをクリックして A:(D:\Driver) を選択します。
8. ["Open" (開く)] ボタンをクリックし、続けて ["OK" (OK)] ボタンをクリックしま
す。
9. お使いのモニターのモデルを選択し、["Next" (次へ)] ボタンをクリックして、さら
に ["Next" (次へ)] ボタンをクリックします。
10. ["Finish" (完了)] ボタンをクリックし、続いて ["Close" (閉じる)] ボタンをクリ
ックします。
ソフトウェアの使用["Digital Signature Not Found" (デジタル署名が見つかりません)] というウィンド
ウが表示された場合には、["Yes" (はい)] ボタンをクリックします。["Finish" (完
了)] ボタンをクリックし、続いて ["Close" (閉じる)] ボタンをクリックします。
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Millennium オペレーティング システム
1. ["Start" (スタート)]、["Setting" (設定)]、["Control Panel" (コントロール パネ
ル)] をクリックします。
2. ["Display" (画面)] アイコンをダブルクリックします。
3. ["Settings" (設定)] タブを選択し、["Advanced" (詳細設定)] ボタンをクリックし
ます。
4. ["Monitor" (モニタ)] タブを選択します。
5. ["Monitor Type" (モニタ タイプ)] 領域で、["Change" (変更)] ボタンをクリックし
ます
6. ["Specify the location of the driver" (ドライバの場所を指定)] を選択します。
7. ["Display a list of all the driver in a specific location..." (特定の場所にあ
るすべてのドライバ一覧を表示し、インストールドライバを選択する)] を選択し、
["Next" (次へ)] ボタンをクリックします。
8. ["Have Disk" (ディスク使用)] ボタンをクリックします。
9. A:\ (D:\driver) を指定して、["OK" (OK)] ボタンをクリックします。
10. ["Show all devices" (すべてのデバイスを表示)] を選択し、コンピュータに接続さ
れているものに対応するモニターを選択して、["OK" (OK)] をクリックします。
11. [画面のプロパティ] ダイアログボックスが閉じるまで、["Close" (閉じる)] ボタン
をクリックしてから ["OK" (OK)] ボタンをクリックする操作を繰り返します。
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
NT オペレーティング システム
1. ["Start" (スタート)]、["Settings" (設定)]、["Control Panel" (コントロール パ
ネル)] をクリックし、続いて ["Display" (画面)] アイコンをダブルクリックしま
す。
2. [登録情報の表示] ウィンドウで、[設定] タブをクリックしてから ["All Display
Modes" (すべての表示モード)] をクリックします。
3. 使用したいモード (解像度、色数および垂直周波数) を選択し、OK をクリックしま
す。
4. ["Apply" (適用)] ボタンをクリックし、["Test" (テスト)] をクリックして画面が正
常に表示されるか確認します。画面が正常に表示されない場合には、別のモード (解
像度、色数または周波数がより低いモード) に変更します。
注意
[すべての表示モード] にモードが表示されない場合には、ユーザー ガイドのプリセット
タイミング モードを参照して、解像度と 垂直周波数 を選択します。
Linux オペレーティング システム
X-Window を実行するには、システム設定ファイルの一種である X86Config ファイルを作
成する必要があります。
ソフトウェアの使用1. X86Config ファイルを実行した後に表示される最初と 2 番目の画面で ["Enter"] を
押します。
2. 3 番目の画面はマウスの設定用です。
3. コンピュータのマウスを設定します。
4. 次の画面はキーボードの選択用です。
5. お使いのコンピュータのキーボードを設定します。
6. 次の画面はモニターの設定用です。
7. まず、モニターの水平周波数を設定します。(周波数は直接入力することができます)
8. モニターの 垂直周波数 を設定します。(周波数は直接入力することができます)
9. モニターのモデル名を入力します。この情報は、実際の X-Window の実行には影響を
与えません。
10. これでモニターの設定は完了です。その他の必要なハードウェアを設定してから、XWindow を実行します。
ソフトウェアの使用MDC プログラムのイ ンス ト ール/アン イ ンス ト ール
イ ンス ト ール方法
1 CDをCD-ROMド ラ イブに挿入し ます。
2 MDC Unified のイ ンス ト ール プログラムを ク リ ッ ク し ます。
ソ フ ト ウ ェ アのイ ンス ト ール ウ ィ ン ド ウがメ イ ン画面に表示されない場合には、 CD の MDC
フ ォルダにある "MDC Unified" 実行フ ァ イルを使用し てイ ンス ト ールし ます。
3 表示されたイ ンス ト ール ウ ィ ザー ドの画面で "Next" を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
4 表示された "License Agreement" ウ ィ ン ド ウで、 "I accept the terms in the license agreement" を
選択し て、 "Next" を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
5 表示される "Customer Information" ウ ィ ン ド ウで、 すべての情報フ ィ ールド に記入し て "Next"
を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
6 表示される "Destination Folder" ウ ィ ン ド ウで、 プログラムを イ ンス ト ールするデ ィ レ ク ト リ を
選択し て "Next" を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
デ ィ レ ク ト リ パスを指定し ない場合には、 プログラムはデフ ォル ト のデ ィ レ ク ト リ パスにイ
ンス ト ールされます。
7 表示される "Ready to Install the Program" ウ ィ ン ド ウで、 プログラムのイ ンス ト ール先のデ ィ レ
ク ト リ パスを確認し てから "Install" を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
8 イ ンス ト ールの進捗状況が表示されます。
9 表示される "InstallShield Wizard Complete" ウ ィ ン ド ウで "Finish" を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
"Launch MDC Unified" を選択し て "Finish" を ク リ ッ ク し、 MDC プログラムをすぐに実行し ま
す。
10 イ ンス ト ール後には、 デスク ト ッ プ上に MDC Unified シ ョ ー ト カ ッ ト アイ コ ンが作成されます。
MDC の実行アイ コ ンは、 PC システムや製品の仕様によ って表示されないこ とがあ り ま
す。
実行アイ コ ンが表示されない場合には、 F5 を押し て く だ さい。
アン イ ンス ト ール
1 ス ター ト メ ニューの 設定 > コ ン ト ロール パネル を選択し て、 プログラムの追加と削除 をダブ
ルク リ ッ ク し ます。
2 リ ス ト から MDC Unified を選択し て、 変更/削除R を ク リ ッ ク し ます。
MDC のイ ンス ト ールは、 グラ フ ィ ッ ク カー ド、 マザー ボー ド およびネ ッ ト ワークの状態によ って
異な り ます。
!"#$ % &'( )*+,- ./01
23 4 526' 7 89: ; <05=
#>?
@ABCDC :7 6E$9FGHIJKL 32#
@ABCDC: 7 6E89ME #: 7 6EN9 O PQ F9 >? R5=)9STU O 32#
' V )W 7#$ % &'( )*+#X6 Y (&Z[ $\)&>? R5= @ABCDC
: 7 6E89ME]$ % &'( )*+ ^ 4 _ `>?01R5=>?#ab
>?#ab >>?7& O >>?7& Ocde': ; ?7 & O i>? 7 & O >?jk Xlm N9 O no p qrst#>?
u52vw >?xy AAX@z {3|}~h$\)vwfhR5= >?
: 7 6E$)9
9<0>? $\)&01R5= >?}
~h5#f$\)& 7 & O h 99 32E9'}~h$
\)&# W< YHf01R5=
>?7 & Ocde': ; <i>?cde': ; < pp {3|@@ ¡fgRhR
5=p
AX
p
AX 3 ¢ £¤ >?#$)9
9< >?h5# ¥ U O X
f¦ ¢§hR5= >?¨ ¢##"©05= ¥ U O X $)9
9<#
ª|« ¬¬R0¦ ¢§h ¥ U O X s ¢ R5=®¯9Q<
® ¯9Q< 4 °±##jk ²9 £¤ !"# ³01R5=
²9jke': ; <´ % < Y ´] ® ¯9Q<52µk#F M¶ ·¸ 7 R5#
F M¶·¸ 7 £¤01R5=W< Y#¹º»
¼# #½¾fs¿½¾fÀÁ ¿2Âà W< Y ¹º»52"
Äk52# R5= ¹º»¶´< O Å e': ; <´ % < Y ´jk01R5=
¹º»¶´< O ÅÆ#Ç#Å $È ÉE O Å s ¢ R5=ÊË52
1 '¯VÌÍÎ52 &&F9 O Ï '¯VÌÏ AAÐ
z Ñ ® 7 U ®
R5=
2 p ® 7 U ® $ % &'( )*+ÒÓ R5=
>?f@ACDCÔ ÕÖh¿2Âà AA ×Î mÄk R5= >?f¡Ô >?h¿2Âà $ % &'( )*+ u Z[ X
Z[ R5=Ø )<ÙÚ#()6´ O
Ø Q Û9\9 $ % &'( )*+#&·9 F &R'¯VÌ#'¯Ü· % c
d R5=
$\)&ÝÞß >?h¿2$\)&*+R$\)&E9' 7 & O
R5=
&8 Û9EÝÞß $ % &'( )*+#&8 Û9E 7 & O R5=
¥ U O 7 & O àá52$ % &'( )*+£¤ R5=
¥ U O 7 & O #cd ¥ U O ÒÓ âã ¹E9'ä Råæ R5=
çE' O ² U ® '¯VÌ#çE' O ² U ® R5=
4
3
2
1
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
6Ø QÛ9
£¤ $\)èé#e?h$ % &'( )*+#P$E 3 ] ñs ¢ R5=
Z[ê9&èéfe< s ]¿2$ % &'( ) ï #òcd01R5=
¡ð
ó ´ % < Y ´#
?@ '(AÛ901R5=
#z¡A
£¤ $ % &'( )*+##z¡AR R5=
#z¡A B#C#+ }~ ÙÚ#2 Î àá R5=
#z¡ADE#P$E 3 ] F01s¿¼ f¨ ¢ R5=S),
q
AG
£¤ $ % &'( )*+#ÙÚS),àá R5=
vwsjkSN9 O s¿P9 Y q
AGfjkh2 1 Þß s ¢ R
5=
BlH F <0IÐàá01R5=
ÙÚ#N: ; < õö?J#&KF <0àá01R5=
£¤ ÙÚS),#vwÕ01R5=
Aqp$
Ð
BL"àáRMàá R#BlH F < 01R5=
ÙÚ#N: ; < àá52 #ö ¨2N`#) Ø 9#th ® 7 U ® R5=
BL"ÎàáRMàá ^ ÙÚ#N: ; < cd52 pp
p$
Ð ®
7 U ® R5=ëOàá
ëOjkcd01R5=
¥ U O # 7 & O $ % &'( )*+£í0 AA
F M£¤ R5=
£¤ ¥ U O 0#RrrPÞßfSN9 O h¿s¿Âà Q#Þß s ¢ R
5=
#
£¤ $ % &'( )#Rëàá R5=
rP
£¤ $ % &'( )#Sëàá R5=
#q l@
£¤ $ % &'( )*+#?J#&²9¶9#ëìàá R5=
A@ArATr
£¤ $ % &'( )*+#AA@ArATrR R5=:&·Ì#jk
¥ U O # 7 & O $ % &'( )*+£í0 AAÐF M£¤ R5=
ôU
ôU V9WX#YZ52 >?h!"#$ % &'( )*+#Qh[h
,\V9]¢^52# R5=
ôU _$\)&f,\E9'` ¨2ÂÃ #ò s ¢ R5=
ôU
ôUR R5=
Ð
¦ÙÚ#&a£¤ R5=
î
bc&K d+h$ % &'( )*+#"£¤ R5=
e f©#$ % &'( ) d+01R5=
î f¦ ¢gÂÃ ô hR0¦ ¢g01R5=
Full Naturalô
ij&K d+h$ % &'( )*+#"£¤ R5=
e f©#$ % &'( ) d+01R5=
î f¦ ¢gÂÃ ô hR0¦ ¢g01R5=
Aq
$ % &'( )#( )6´ O ÙÚ$ % \)k0jkR ½\cd R5=
ôUfe< jkh¿2 1 AAqlf s ¢ R5=
!"#¥ U O f£¤h¿2Âà î ô#jkf£¤ ¥ U O #( )6´ O Ym52 1
lf s2 ¼ n± ¿=
cd52 ¥ U O £¤ ¿N: ; < Y V U R5=
ÙÚ$ % \)kjk#þP$E 3 ] ñs ¢ R5=
X
X#àá sopf Ø Q Û9ÙÚ hR5=
ôUfmmq s2 X s ¢ R5=
Xfmmq s2 q
AG s2 ¼ n± ¿=
XAG
rs#$ % &'( )#XAG R5=
XA
q
XZ[ê9&£¤ R5=
A
Aq
' V )W 7 R¥ ¶ ?h
5# `¿ÙÚ#2 Î àá R5=
9E#jk
¥ùÛ 7 · %
$ % &'( )*+#ÙÚe?Õ R5 89MEf³s
: 7 6EN9 O ² >?h¿2 ¼ Õ R
5=
C Xf£!52³#$ % &'( )f>?h¿s¿ ¼
Õ R5= XX#£! $ % &'( ) >?52
$9 F#´µ 3 ] $ % &'( )fhs¿¶·
s2 ¼ f¨ ¢ R5=
D $ % &'( )#XXfƬ¬#þ ¨2 ¼ Õ R
5 $ % &'( )# Ø Q Û90Xcd R5=
Ƭ¬#þ#XSN9 O 52$ % &'( )0
XƬ¬#þ0jk sh¸s ¢ R!í=
./ ¿$ % &'( )f#.
/ 7 U Y hs¿=
$ % &'( )#èéfe< s ]¿2 ¼ Õ
¿= :&·Ì
ó9 O #èé&·9 F &¹R5
$ % &'( ) >?hZ[Ho£¤ ¿=
ºö# Ø U ¥9f]¢^
hR5=
./ 3 4 52$ % &'( )f>?h¿2 ¼ Õ
¿=
mrÐRmm rÐfjkh
¿2# ³#- $ % &'
( )f»} e?h$ % &'( ) #Ç0,
¿=
7 P は、<同時画面> が <オン> の場合には <16:9> に変更されます。
ポジション
PIP ウィンドウの Position(位置)を変更します。
透明
PIP ウィンドウの透明度を調整します。
• 高
LCD ディスプレイの調整
:• 中
• 低
• 不透明
外部入力名編集
入力信号の選択を簡単にするために、入力ジャックに接続されている入力機器に名前を付
けます。
VTR / DVD / ケーブル STB / デジタル STB / 衛星放送チューナー / AV レシーバー / DVD
プレーヤー / ゲーム /DVC / DVD コンボ / DVD+HDD / PC / DVI 装置
注意
• ディスプレイ デバイスは外部入力モードによって異なります。
• PC を HDMI 端子に接続しているときは、外部入力名編集 を PC に設定します。その他
の場合には、外部入力名編集 を AV に設定します。ただし、640x480、720P (1280x720)
および 1080p (1920x1080) は AV と PC に共通する信号であるため、外部入力名編集
を入力信号に合わせて設定するようにしてください。
• [映像] メニューは、入力信号と [外部入力名編集] によって変わります。
DVI to HDMI ケーブルを使用して接続する場合は (オーディオとビデオは同時にサポー
トされません)、オーディオ ポートには、別途オーディオ ケーブルを使用して接続す
る必要があります。
PC が接続されている場合は、外部入力名編集 を DVI PC に設定して、接続された PC
からのビデオとオーディオを楽しむことができます。
AV 機器が接続されている場合は、外部入力名編集 を DVI 装置 に設定して、接続され
た AV 機器からのビデオとオーディオを楽しむことができます。
ソース自動切り替え設定
ソース自動切り替え が オン の状態でディスプレイをオンにしたとき、前に選択していた
ビデオ入力信号がない場合には、ディスプレイは自動的に別のアクティブなビデオ入力信
号を探します。
注意
• TV 信号がアクティブ(TV チューナーがディスプレイに接続されている)な場合、ソー
ス自動切り替え 検索機能は無効になります。ディスプレイは TV 信号のままになりま
す。
• ソース自動切り替え の選択と 同時画面 機能:ソース自動切り替え 選択が オン に設
定されている場合、同時画面 機能は動作しません。同時画面 機能を動作させるには、
ソース自動切り替え 選択を オフ にする必要があります。
LCD ディスプレイの調整• ソース自動切り替え 選択が オン のとき、または プライマリ ソースの復元 が オン
のときには、ディスプレイの省電力モードは無効になります。
• プライマリ ソースの復元 が オン のときには、プライマリ ソース および セカンダ
リ ソース 選択のみが利用でき、お好みに応じて入れ換えて選択することができます。
それぞれのプライマリ入力信号に対応する信号については 同時画面 > 外部入力 を参
照してください。
ソース自動切り替え
ソース自動切り替え が オン のときには、ディスプレイのビデオ信号が自動的にアクティ
ブなビデオを検索します。
現在の入力信号が認識できない場合には、プライマリ ソース 選択が有効になります。セ
カンダリ ソース 選択は、使用できるプライマリのビデオ信号がない場合に有効になりま
す。プライマリまたはセカンダリの信号が認識できない場合には、ディスプレイは再度検
索を行い、有効なビデオ信号が見つからなければディスプレイは入力信号がないことを示
すメッセージを表示します。
プライマリ ソース 選択が すべて に設定されているときは、ディスプレイはすべてのビ
デオ入力信号を 2 回連続して検索してアクティブなビデオ信号を探し、ビデオが見つから
ない場合には最初のビデオ信号に戻ります。
1. オフ
2. オン
プライマリ ソースの復元
プライマリ ソースの復元 が オン のときには、プライマリ ソース および セカンダリ
ソース のビデオ信号選択を検索してアクティブなビデオ信号を探します。
アクティブなビデオが見つかった場合には プライマリ ソース が選択され、ビデオが見つ
からない場合には セカンダリ ソース が選択されます。セカンダリ ソース にもビデオが
見つからない場合には、入力信号がないことを示すメッセージが表示されます。
1. オフ
2. オン
LCD ディスプレイの調整プライマリ ソース
自動入力信号に プライマリ ソース を指定します。
セカンダリ ソース
自動入力信号に セカンダリ ソース を指定します。
映像 [PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート / MagicInfo モード]
利用できるモード
• PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート
• AV
• コンポ一ネント
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合、 MagicInfo は、ネットワーク ボックスが接続され
ているときにのみ有効にすることができます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整モード
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
1. 情報
正確な情報の伝達用に推奨されます (公開情報など)。
2. 広告
広告の表示用に推奨されます (ビデオ、屋内または屋外広告など)。
3. ユーザー調整
ユーザー調整
オンスクリーン メニューを使用して、コントラストおよび明るさを好みに合わせて変更す
ることができます。
注意
• ユーザー調整 機能を使用して画像を調整すると、MagicBright は ユーザー調整 モー
ドに変わります。
• ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
1. コントラスト
コントラストを調整します。
2. 明るさ
輝度を調整します。
3. シャープネス
シャープネスを調整します。
4. ガンマ
LCD ディスプレイの調整映像の中間域の明るさ (ガンマ) を調整します。
• ナチュラル
• モード 1
映像を ナチュラル よりも明るく設定します。
• モード 2
映像を モード 1 よりも暗く設定します。
• モード 3
明るい色と暗い色の間のコントラストを強くします。
色温度
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
色温度を変更できます。
1. オフ
2. 青色系
3. 標準
4. 赤色系
5. ユーザー調整
注意
[色温度] を [青色系]、[標準]、[赤色系] または [ユーザー調整] に設定すると、Color
Temp. 機能が無効になります。
色温度 を オフ に設定している場合は、カラー調整 機能は無効になります。
LCD ディスプレイの調整カラー調整
赤、緑、青のそれぞれの色バランスを調整します。
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
1. 赤
2. 緑
3. 青
Color Temp.
Color Temp. は、画像の色の「暖かさ」を示す指標です。
注意
• ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
• この機能は、色温度 が オフ に設定されている場合にのみ有効になります。
画面調整
画面調整 は、ゆらぎやちらつきのある不安定な映像の原因となるノイズを取り除くことに
より、最適な映像を得るための微調整に使用します。細密調整を使用して満足な結果が得
られない場合には、粗調整による調整を行ってから再度細密調整を行ってください。
注意
PC モードでのみ使用可。
粗調整
縦縞などのノイズを除去します。粗調整では、画面イメージ領域が移動する場合がありま
す。水平コントロール メニューを使用して、中央に位置を合わせることができます。
微調整
横縞などのノイズを除去します。細密調整後もノイズが残る場合は、周波数 (クロック速
度) の調整を行ってから、調整し直してください。
LCD ディスプレイの調整ポジション
画面の水平および垂直位置を調整します。
自動調整
微調整、粗調整、ポジション の値は自動的に調整されます。コントロールパネルで解像度
を変更すると、自動機能が実行されます。
注意
PC モードでのみ使用可。
信号バランス
信号ケーブルが長いため弱くなっている RGB 信号を補強します。
注意
• ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
• PC モードでのみ使用可。
信号バランス
信号バランスは オン または オフ のいずれかを選択します。
信号制御
注意
信号バランス が オン になっているときに使用できます。
1. R ゲイン
2. G ゲイン
LCD ディスプレイの調整3. B ゲイン
4. R オフセット
5. G オフセット
6. B オフセット
サイズ
サイズ は切り替えられます。
1. 16:9
2. 4:3
PIP 映像
PIP 画面設定を調整します。
注意
• 利用できるモード:同時画面 オン
1. コントラスト
画面上の PIP ウィンドウのコントラストを調整します。
2. 明るさ
画面上の PIP ウィンドウの明るさを調整します。
3. シャープネス
LCD ディスプレイの調整画面の PIP ウィンドウのシャープネスを調整します。
4. 色の濃さ
画面の PIP ウィンドウの色を調整します。
注意
同時画面 入力は、AV、HDMI または コンポ一ネント モードでのみ動作します。
5. 色あい
ナチュラルトーンを PIP ウィンドウに追加します。
注意
同時画面 入力は、AV、HDMI または コンポ一ネント モードでのみ動作します。
ダイナミックコントラスト
ダイナミックコントラスト は、画像信号の分布を自動的に検出して、最適なコントラスト
となるように調整します。
1. オフ
2. オン
注意
同時画面 が オン になっているときには無効になります。
ライト調整
エネルギー消費を抑えるため、インバーター ランプを調整します。
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
映像リセット
LCD ディスプレイの調整画面の設定をリセットします。
映像 [ AV / HDMI / コンポ一ネント / TV モード]
利用できるモード
• PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート
• AV
• コンポ一ネント
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合、 MagicInfo は、ネットワーク ボックスが接続され
ているときにのみ有効にすることができます。
モード
LCD ディスプレイには、(「ダイナミック」、「標準」、「映画」および「ユーザー調
整」) の 4 種類の自動映像設定が工場出荷時に設定されています。
ダイナミック、標準、映画、または ユーザー調整 を有効にできます。
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
1. ダイナミック
2. 標準
3. 映画
4. ユーザー調整
ユーザー調整
オンスクリーン メニューを使用して、コントラストおよび明るさを好みに合わせて変更す
ることができます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
コントラスト
コントラストを調整します。
明るさ
輝度を調整します。
シャープネス
画像のシャープネスを調整します。
色の濃さ
画像の色を調整します。
色あい
ナチュラルトーンを表示に追加します。
注意
ビデオ信号が NTSC の場合にのみ動作
色温度
色温度を変更できます。個々の色成分もユーザーが調整することができます。
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
1. オフ
LCD ディスプレイの調整2. 青色系2
3. 青色系1
4. 標準
5. 赤色系1
6. 赤色系2
注意
色温度 を 青色系2、青色系1、標準、赤色系1、または 赤色系2 に設定すると、Color
Temp. 機能が無効になります。
Color Temp.
Color Temp. は、画像の色の「暖かさ」を示す指標です。
注意
この機能は、モード が ユーザー調整 に設定され、ダイナミックコントラスト と 色温
度 が オフ の場合に有効になります。
サイズ
サイズ は切り替えられます。
PC モード (PC、HDMI[PC タイミング]): 16:9 ‐ 4:3
Video モード (HDMI [ビデオ タイミング]、AV または コンポ一ネント):16:9 ‐ ズーム
1 ‐ ズーム 2 ‐ 4:3 ‐ 全画面表示 ‐ ユーザー調整
1. 16:9 ‐ 映像を 16:9 ワイド モードに設定します。
2. ズーム 1‐ 画面上の映像のサイズを拡大します。
3. ズーム 2‐「ズーム 1」を超える映像のサイズを拡大します。
4. 4:3 ‐ 映像を 4:3 ノーマル モードに設定します。
5. 全画面表示 ‐ HDMI 720p、1080i、1080p 信号が入力されているときは、入力される
画面が中断されることなく表示されます。
6. ユーザー調整 ‐ 好みに合わせて解像度を変更します。
LCD ディスプレイの調整注意
• 全画面表示 機能を使用しているときでも、仕様を外れる表示を行う一部の外部デバイ
スでは画面が途切れる場合があります。
• ズーム 1、ズーム 2 は HDMI モードでは使用できません。
• ポジション および リセット 機能は ズーム 1 または ズーム 2 モードでのみ使用でき
ます。
デジタル NR (Digital Noise Reduction)
デジタル ノイズ リダクション機能の オフ/オン を切り替えます。デジタル ノイズ リダ
クション機能によって、よりきれいではっきりした画像をお楽しみいただけます。
1. オフ
2. オン
注意
デジタル NR 機能は、解像度によっては使用できない場合があります。
HDMI 黒レベル
DVD またはセットトップボックスが HDMI を経由してテレビに接続されている場合、接続
している外部デバイスによっては、ブラックレベルの上昇、コントラストの低下、変色な
どの画質の低下の原因となることがあります。この場合には、HDMI 黒レベル を設定して
テレビの画質を調整してください。
1. 標準
2. 低
注意
PC と HDMI モードの DTV の両方で使用できるタイミングについては、HDMI 黒レベル が有
効になります。
LCD ディスプレイの調整フィルムモード
フィルムモード では、(24 フレームの) 映画で発生することのある不自然な映像のキャリ
ブレーションを行います。
このモードを有効にすると、動く字幕が正常に表示されないことがあります。
(HDMI モードでは、入力信号がインターレース スキャンの場合にこの機能を使用できま
す。プログレッシブ スキャン信号では使用できません)
1. オフ
2. オン
PIP 映像
同時画面 画面設定を調整します。
注意
利用できるモード:同時画面 オン
1. コントラスト
画面上の PIP ウィンドウのコントラストを調整します。
2. 明るさ
画面上の PIP ウィンドウの明るさを調整します。
3. シャープネス
画面の PIP ウィンドウのシャープネスを調整します。
ダイナミックコントラスト
LCD ディスプレイの調整ダイナミックコントラスト は、画像信号の分布を自動的に検出して、最適なコントラスト
となるように調整します。
1. オフ
2. オン
注意
同時画面 が オン になっているときには無効になります。
ライト調整
エネルギー消費を抑えるため、インバーター ランプを調整します。
注意
ダイナミックコントラスト が オン に設定されているときには使用できません。
映像リセット
画面の設定をリセットします。
音声
利用できるモード
• PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート
• AV
• コンポ一ネント
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合、 MagicInfo は、ネットワーク ボックスが接続され
ているときにのみ有効にすることができます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整モード
LCD ディスプレイには、Hi‐Fi ステレオアンプが内蔵されています。
1. 標準
工場出荷時の標準設定にするには [標準] を選択します。
2. 音楽
ミュージック ビデオまたはコンサートを視聴するには [音楽] を選択します。
3. 映画
映画を観るには [映画] を選択します。
4. ニュース
ほとんどが会話の番組 (ニュースなど) を視聴するときには、ニュース を選択しま
す。
5. ユーザー調整
好みに合わせて設定を調整するには、ユーザー調整 を選択します。
ユーザー調整
好みに合わせて音声設定を調整することができます。
注意
• 調整の際は、音量が 0 に設定されていても音声が鳴ります。
• ユーザー調整 機能を使用して音声の調整を行うと、ユーザー調整 が モード モードに
なります。
低音
周波数の低い音声を強調します。
高音
周波数の高い音声を強調します。
バランス
LCD ディスプレイの調整左右のスピーカーの音声バランスを調整できます。
自動音量
放送局による音量レベルの差を小さくします。
1. オフ
2. オン
SRS TS XT
SRS TS XT は、2 台のスピーカーで 5.1 チャンネルのコンテンツを再生するときの問題を
解決する特許取得済みの SRS 技術です。TruSurround XT は、テレビの内蔵スピーカーな
どのスピーカー 2 台で構成される再生システムで、素晴らしい仮想サラウンド音声環境を
実現します。すべてのマルチチャンネル フォーマットと完全な互換性があります。
1. オフ
2. オン
音声選択
同時画面 モードで、プライマリまたはセカンダリ表示のいずれかの音声を有効にします。
注意
同時画面 が オン になっているときに使用できます。
1. 主画面
2. 副画面
LCD ディスプレイの調整サウンド リセット
音声の設定をリセットします。
設定
利用できるモード
• PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート
• AV
• コンポ一ネント
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合、 MagicInfo は、ネットワーク ボックスが接続され
ているときにのみ有効にすることができます。
言語
13 つの言語のいずれかを選択できます。
注意
言語の選択は、OSD の言語にのみ反映されます。コンピュータ上で実行されるソフトウェ
アには影響しません。
時刻
時刻設定、スリープ タイマー、タイマー 1 / タイマー 2 / タイマー 3 および 休日の管
理 を設定できます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整時刻設定
現在の時刻を設定します。
スリープ タイマー
所定の時間が経過したら LCD ディスプレイを自動的にオフにします。
1. オフ
2. 30
3. 60
4. 90
5. 120
6. 150
7. 180
タイマー 1 / タイマー 2 / タイマー 3
LCD ディスプレイを指定した時間にオンまたはオフにするよう設定できます。
注意
• :休日にはタイマーを無効にするには 適用 を、休日にもタイマーを有効にす
るには 適用しない を選択します。
• 時刻設定 メニューを使用して時刻を設定した場合にのみ有効です。
LCD ディスプレイの調整
休日• Manual オプションを使用して、曜日を選択できます。
休日の管理
• 追加
休日を登録できます。
• 選択した日を削除
選択した休日を削除できます。
注意
• 登録された休日が選択されている場合にのみ有効です。
• 複数の休日を選択して削除できます。
• すべて削除
登録された休日をすべて削除できます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整メニューの背景透明度
OSD の背景の透明度を変更します。
1. 高
2. 中
3. 低
4. 不透明
安全ロック
PIN の変更
パスワードは変更できます。
プリセットされている LCD ディスプレイのパスワードは「0000」です。
注意
パスワードを忘れた場合には、リモコンの INFO →EXIT → MUTE ボタンを押してパスワー
ドを「0000」にリセットします。
ロック使用
これは、OSD をロックして設定状態を維持し、他のユーザーが現在の設定を変更できない
ようにする機能です。
LCD ディスプレイの調整省電力
この機能は、省エネのためにユニットの電力消費の調整を行います。
1. オフ
2. オン
画像分割
画像分割 は、各スクリーンが画面全体の一部になるように表示したり、同じ画像を各スク
リーンに繰り返し表示できるように接続されたビデオスクリーンのセットです。
画像分割 がオンになっているときには、画像分割 画面の設定を調整することができます。
注意
• 水平 または 垂直 の分割数が 4 を超える場合には、画質の劣化を防ぐために XGA (1024
x 768) 以上の解像度を使用してくただい。
• サイズ は 画像分割 の実行中は無効になります。
• 同時画面 が オン になっているときには無効になります。
画像分割
選択したディスプレイの 画像分割 機能のオン/オフを切り替えます。
• オフ
• オン
フォーマット
LCD ディスプレイの調整分割したスクリーンを表示する フォーマット を選択できます。
• フルモード
マージン無しで全画面表示を行います。
• ナチュラルモード
元の縦横比を維持したまま自然な映像を表示します。
水平
水平方向に画面をいくつの部分に分割するかを設定します。
15 段階の調整レベル: 1~15.
注意
垂直 が 15 に設定されている場合、水平 の最大値は 6 です。
垂直
垂直方向に画面をいくつの部分に分割するかを設定します。
15 段階の調整レベル: 1~15.
注意
水平 が 15 に設定されている場合、垂直 の最大値は 6 です。
画面の位置
LCD ディスプレイの調整スクリーンを複数の画像に分割できます。分割するときのレイアウトとともに、分割する
画面数を選択できます。
• 画面の位置 でモードを選択します。
• ディスプレイ選択でディスプレイを選択します。
• 選択したモードの数字を押すと、配置が設定されます。
• 画面は最大 100 個の小画面に分割できます。
注意
5 台以上のディスプレイが接続されている場合には、画質の低下を防ぐために XGA
(1024*768) 以上の解像度にすることをお勧めします。
画面保護
画面保護 機能は、静止画が画面上に長時間表示されたときに発生することのある残像を防
止するのに使用します。
注意
この機能は、電源がオフになっているときには使用できません。
ピクセル シフト
ピクセル シフト
LCD 上のピクセルを水平または垂直方向に動かすこの機能を使用して、画面に残像が発生
するのを防止することができます。
• オフ
• オン
水平
画面を水平方向に何ピクセル移動するか設定します。
画像分割は:0, 1, 2, 3, および 4.
LCD ディスプレイの調整垂直
画面を垂直方向に何ピクセル移動するか設定します。
画像分割は:0, 1, 2, 3, および 4.
時間
それぞれ、水平または垂直方向の動作を実行する間隔を設定します。
タイマー
タイマー
画面焼き付き防止のタイマーを設定することができます。
残像を消去するための処理を開始する場合には、処理は設定された時間行われ、自動的に
完了します。
• オフ
• オン
モード
LCD ディスプレイの調整画面保護 タイプを変更できます。
• バー
• 消しゴム
• ピクセル
間隔
この機能を使用して、各モード セットにおける実行間隔をタイマーに設定します。
時間
設定された間隔の範囲内で、実行する時間を指定します。
• モード ‐ バー, 消しゴム, ピクセル :10~50 秒
バー
この機能を使用して、長い黒白の垂直線を動かすことにより、画面上に残像が発生するの
を防止します。
消しゴム
LCD ディスプレイの調整この機能は、長方形のパターンを動かすことによって画面上に残像が発生するのを防止し
ます。
ピクセル
この機能は、画面上で多数のピクセルを動かすことによって残像を防止します。
サイドグレー
画面背景のグレーの明るさを選択します。
• オフ
• 明るくする
• 暗くする
解像度の選択
コンピュータのグラフィックカードの解像度を 1024 x 768 @ 60Hz、1280 x 768 @ 60Hz、
1360 x 768 @ 60Hz または 1366 x768 @ 60Hz に設定したときに画面が正常に表示されない
場合は、この機能(Resolution Select)を使用して指定した解像度で画面を表示すること
ができます。
注意
PC モードでのみ使用可。
1. オフ
2. 1024 X 768
LCD ディスプレイの調整3. 1280 X 768
4. 1360 x 768
5. 1366 X 768
注意
メニューの選択は、画面解像度が 1024 x 768 @ 60Hz、1280 x 768 @ 60Hz、1360 x 768 @
60Hz または 1366 x768 @ 60Hz に設定されているときにのみ可能です。
電源オン調整
画面の Power On time(電源がオンになる時間)を調整します。
警告:過電圧を避けるために、Power On time(電源がオンになる時間)を長く設定します。
OSD 回転
OSD の回転
1. ランドスケープ
2. ポートレイト
詳細設定
さらに詳細な設定を行います。
ファン & 温度
ファンの速度と内部の温度を検知して、製品を保護します。
LCD ディスプレイの調整ファン制御
ファン速度設定は、自動または手動のいずれかを選択します。
ファン速度の設定
ファンの速度を 0 ~ 100 の範囲で設定します。
注意
ファン制御 が 手動 になっているときに使用できます。
温度制御
製品内部の温度を検知して、目的の温度を指定します。
製品はデフォルトでは 77˚C に設定されています。
注意
• 指定した温度を超えると映像が暗くなり、温度が上がり続ける場合には製品の電源が自
動的にオフになって過熱を防止します。
• この製品を使用するには、75~80˚C の温度が最適です (室温 40˚C の場合)。
使用条件の詳細については、記載されている「仕様」を参照してください。
• 温度制御 の設定を変更するときには、ファン制御 を 自動 に設定します。
LCD ディスプレイの調整現在の温度
製品の現在の温度を表示します。
自動電源設定
製品の 自動電源設定 の有効/無効を切り替えます。
• オフ
• オン
注意
自動電源設定 が オン になっているときには、製品は電源に接続されると直ちにオンにな
ります。
ボタン ロック
製品のモニター制御ボタンをロック/ロック解除します。
• オフ
• オン
LCD ディスプレイの調整自動補正(ユーザー)
1. 自動カラー補正
色を自動で調整します。
2. リセット
色の設定をリセットします。
注意
PC モードでのみ有効になります。
スタンバイ制御
入力信号が検出されないときに動作するスタンバイ モードを設定します。
• オフ
入力信号が検出されないときには <信号がありません> というメッセージが表示されま
す。
• オン
入力信号が検出されない場合は省電力モードになります。
• 自動
入力信号が検出されないときには、
‐ 外部デバイスが接続されているときには省電力モードになります。
‐ 外部デバイスが接続されていないときには <信号がありません> というメッセージ
が表示されます。
注意
• PC、DVI、HDMI、または ディスプレイ ポート モードでのみ有効になります。
• HDMI ソースの選択時は、この機能の 設定は機能しません。
LCD ディスプレイの調整ランプ スケジュール
指定された時刻に、ユーザー指定の値に明るさを調整します。
OSD ディスプレイ
画面上のメニュー項目の表示/非表示を切り替えます。
ソース OSD
• オフ
• オン
非最適化 OSD モード
• オフ
• オン
OSD 信号なし
LCD ディスプレイの調整• オフ
• オン
MDC OSD
• オフ
• オン
ソフトウェア更新
ソフトウェアの更新を行います。
1. DVI または HDMI などのデジタル信号を使用して製品をコンピュータに接続します。
SW コードから変換された BMP 画像ファイルをクリックします。製品の画面に下に示
すような画像が表示されます。
2. ソフトウェア コードが変換された BMP 画像が画面に表示されている間に、[ソフトウ
ェア更新] を選択します。
注意
複数の BMP 画像がある場合は、スライドショーを使用して画面に表示されます。
• スライドショーでの BMP 画像の再生間隔を 1 秒に設定することをお勧めします。
他の再生間隔では、画像を正常に抽出できないことがあります。
• 別の画像 (マウス ポインタなど) が重なっている場合は、BMP 画像を正常に抽出
できないことがあります。
3. 現在のソフトウェア バージョンよりも新しいバージョンが検出された場合は、現在の
ソフトウェアをアップグレードするかどうか確認を求められます。<オン> を選択した
場合は、アップグレードが実行されます。
4. ソフトウェア アップグレードの完了後、製品の電源が自動的にオフになってから、オ
ンになります。
LCD ディスプレイの調整注意
• これは、DVI、HDMI1 または HDMI2 モードなどのデジタル信号の場合にのみ機能しま
す。(入力解像度はパネル解像度と同じにする必要があります。)
• HDMI1 および HDMI2 モードでは、PC と TV の両方で使用されるタイミング値は、外部
入力名編集 が PC または DVI PC に設定されている場合にのみサポートされます。
• これは、サイズ が 16:9 に設定されている場合にのみサポートされます。
セットアップをリセット
すべての設定値をリセットします。
すべてリセット
ディスプレイのすべての設定をリセットします。
マルチコントロール
利用できるモード
• PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート
• AV
• コンポ一ネント
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合、 MagicInfo は、ネットワーク ボックスが接続され
ているときにのみ有効にすることができます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整マルチコントロール
SET に個別の ID を割り当てます。
• ID 設定
SET に固有の ID を割り当てます。
• ID 入力
SET ごとに送信機の機能を選択します。送信機設定に対応する ID を持つ SET のみが
有効になります。
• MDC 接続
MDC 入力を受信するポートを選択します。
• RS232C MDC ケーブルを経由して MDC と通信します。
• RJ45 MDC ケーブルを経由して MDC と通信します。
• ネットワーク設定
• IP 設定 :手動, 自動
• IP アドレス :IP 設定 が 手動 に設定されている場合は、IP アドレス を手動で入
力します。
• サブネット マスク :IP 設定 が 手動 に設定されている場合は、サブネット マス
ク を手動で入力します。
• ゲートウェイ :IP 設定 が 手動 に設定されている場合は、ゲートウェイ を手動で
入力します。
MagicInfo
利用できるモード
• PC / DVI / ディスプレイ ポート
• AV
• コンポ一ネント
• HDMI
• MagicInfo
• TV
LCD ディスプレイの調整注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
(米国のみ)
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合、 MagicInfo は、ネットワーク ボックスが接続され
ているときにのみ有効にすることができます。
注意
• リモコンを使用して、MagicInfo を選択することができます。ただし MagicInfo を十
分に活用するには、別売りの USB キーボードを使用することをお勧めします。
• Device モードの MagicInfo では、外部デバイスを起動中に移動するとエラーの原因と
なる場合があります。外部デバイスの設定は、LCD ディスプレイがオンになっていると
きにのみ行います。
• ネットワークに使用されている LAN ケーブル(例:ビデオ表示)を外さないでくださ
い。外した場合には、プログラム (MagicInfo) が停止することがあります。ケーブル
を外したら、システムを再起動してください。
• USB 機器に使用されている LAN ケーブル (例: ビデオ表示) を外さないでください。
外した場合には、プログラム (MagicInfo) が停止することがあります。
• 他の入力信号に切り替えるには、MagicInfo の SOURCE ボタンを押します。
• プリセットされている LCD ディスプレイのパスワードは「000000」です。
• サーバー プログラムの Power‐On オプションは、LCD ディスプレイの電源が完全にオ
フになっている場合にのみ機能します。
LCD ディスプレイのシステムエラーの原因となる場合がありますので、LCD ディスプレ
イの終了中に Power‐On オプションを使用しないようにしてください。
• MagicInfo を MagicInfo Server プログラムとともに使用するとき:Network モードを
実行します。
• デバイスが LCD ディスプレイに直接接続されているときに MagicInfo を使用している
場合:Device モードを実行します。
• ESC を押して、MagicInfo ウィンドウ画面に直接移動します。
• Windows の画面で MagicInfo を設定するには、キーボードとマウスが必要になります。
• Windows で MagicInfo を設定する方法については、MagicInfo Server のヘルプを参照
してください。
操作中は、AC 電源をオフにしないことを強く推奨します。
• ピボット機能のある LCD ディスプレイでは、透明チッカーはサポートされていません。
• ピボット機能のある LCD ディスプレイでは、720*480 (SD) までの動画の画面解像度が
サポートされています。
• ドライブ D: には、EWF は適用されません。
• EWF が Enable 状態のときに変更された設定内容を保存するには、その内容を Commit
する必要があります。
• Disable、Enable または Commit を選択すると、システムが再起動します。
LCD ディスプレイの調整MagicInfo
1. Select Application - step 1
Windows を軌道したときにコンピュータで実行するアプリケーションを選択できます。
2. Select TCP/IP - step 2
MagicInfo Setup Wizard の step 2 では、TCP/IP の設定を行うためにデスクトップのネ
ットワーク設定に移動する必要はありません。MagicInfo のインストールの step 2 のみ
を行います。
3. Select Language - step 3
LCD ディスプレイの調整複数の言語を使用するときには、使用する言語を選択することができます。
4. Select Screen Type - step 4
デバイスに適用する回転のタイプを選択できます。
5. Setup Information
LCD ディスプレイの調整
注意
デフォルトの言語は英語に設定されています。オンスクリーン メニュー言語に英語を使用する場
合、言語を選択する必要はありません。ユーザーが選択した設定を表示します。
注意
Magicinfo アイコンが通知領域に表示されない場合には、Windows デスクトップで Magicinfo アイコンをダブルクリックしてください。アイコンが表示されます。
LCD ディスプレイの調整トラブルシューティング
セルフテスト機能チェック
注意
お問い合わせの前に、以下の項目についてチェックしてください。問題が解決しない場合
には、お客様相談ダイヤルにお問い合わせください。
セルフテスト機能チェック
1. コンピュータと LCD ディスプレイの両方をオフにします。
2. コンピュータの背面からビデオケーブルを取り外します。
3. LCD ディスプレイをオンにします。
ビデオ信号が検出されない場合でも LCD ディスプレイが正常に動作しているときに
は、下記の図 (「信号がありません」) が黒色の背景で表示されます。自己テスト モ
ードでは、LED 電源インジケータは緑色のままで、画像が画面内を動き回ります。
4. LCD ディスプレイをオフにして、ビデオ ケーブルを接続しなおします。次にコンピュ
ータと LCD ディスプレイの両方をオンにします。
前の手順を行った後でも LCD ディスプレイ画面に何も映らない場合は、ビデオ コントロ
ーラおよびコンピュータ システムをチェックしてください。LCD ディスプレイは正常に動
作しています。
警告メッセージ
画面は 1920 x 1080 の解像度でも表示することができます。 ただし、「画面の解像度を
変更するか、現在のモードのままにすることができます」というメッセージが短時間表示
されます。周波数が 85Hz を越える場合には、LCD ディスプレイでは 85Hz を越える周波
数をサポートしていないため、黒色の画面が表示されます。
注意
LCD ディスプレイがサポートしている解像度または周波数については、仕様 > プリセッ
ト タイミング モードを参照してください。
メンテナンスと清掃
1) LCD ディスプレイ筐体のメンテナンス
電源コードを抜いてから、柔らかい布で拭き取ります。• ベンゼン、シンナーまたはその他の引火性物質を使
用しないでください。
2) フラットパネルディスプレイ画面のメンテナンス
柔らかい布 (綿ネル) で拭き取ります。
• アセトン、ベンゼンまたはシンナーは使用してはな
りません。
(スクリーン表面の傷または劣化の原因となること
があります)
• これらの物質を使用したことによって発生した損害
は、すべてユーザーの責任となります。
症状と推奨される措置
注意
LCD ディスプレイは、コンピュータから受信した視覚信号を再生します。したがって、コン
ピュータまたはビデオカードに問題がある場合には、色彩の異常、ノイズなどのトラブル
が発生することがあります。この場合には、まず問題の原因をチェックしてから、お客様
相談ダイヤルまたは販売店にお問い合わせください。
1. 電源コードおよびビデオ ケーブルがコンピュータに正しく接続されているかどうかを
チェックします。
2. 起動時にコンピュータからビープ音が 3 回聞こえるかチェックします。
(この場合にはお問い合わせください)
3. ビデオカードを自分でインストールするか PC を組み立てた場合には、アダプタ (ビデ
オ) がインストールされているかどうか確認します。
4. ビデオ画面のスキャン速度が 50~ 85Hz の範囲内にあるかどうかチェックします。
(最大解像度を使用しているときは、60 Hz を超えてはなりません)
5. アダプタ (ビデオ) ドライバのインストールに問題がある場合には、コンピュータを
セーフ モードで起動して、[Control Panel (コントロール パネル)] → [System (シ
ステム)] → [Device Manger (デバイス マネージャ)] でディスプレイ アダプタを削
除して、コンピュータを再起動してアダプタ (ビデオ) ドライバを再インストールし
ます。
チェックリスト
注意
• 以下の表は、発生する可能性のある問題とその解決方法を示しています。お客様相談ダ
イヤルへ連絡する前に、このセクションに解決法が記載されていないかご確認くださ
い。不明な点がある場合には、お客様相談窓口にお電話いただくか、販売店にお問い合
わせください。
インストールに関する問題 (PC モード)
注意
LCD ディスプレイのインストールに関連する問題とその解決方法が記載されています。
トラブルシューティングQ: LCD ディスプレイの画面がちらつく。
A: コンピュータと LCD ディスプレイとの間を接続している信号ケーブルが、しっかり
と接続されているか確認します。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
画面に関する問題
注意
LCD ディスプレイの画面に関連する問題とその解決方法が記載されています。
Q: 画面が空白になり、電源インジケータがオフになる。
A: 電源コードをしっかりと接続してから LCD ディスプレイをオンにします。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
Q: "信号がありません」というメッセージ。
A: PC またはビデオ ソースに信号ケーブルがしっかり接続されていることを確認しま
す。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
A: PC またはビデオ ソースがオンになっていることを確認します。
Q: "最適なモードが選択されていません」というメッセージ。
A: ビデオ アダプタの最大解像度と周波数を確認します。
A: プリセット タイミング モードのチャートに記載されているデータとこれらの値を比
較します。
Q: 映像が縦に流れる。
A: 信号ケーブルがしっかりと接続されているか確認します。必要に応じて再度接続しま
す。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
Q: 画像がはっきりしない。画像がぼやける。
A: 微調整 の 粗調整 および 微調整 調整を実行します。
A: すべてのアクセサリ (ビデオ拡張ケーブルなど) を取り外してから再度オンにしま
す。
A: 解像度と周波数を推奨の範囲に設定します。
Q: 画像が安定せず、揺れる。
A: コンピュータのビデオ カードに対して設定した解像度および周波数が、LCD ディス
プレイがサポートしている範囲から外れていないか確認します。外れていない場合に
は、LCD ディスプレイのメニューとプリセット タイミング モードに記載されている
現在の情報を参照して再度設定します。
Q: 映像にゴーストが発生する。
A: コンピュータのビデオ カードに対して設定した解像度および周波数が、LCD ディス
プレイがサポートしている範囲から外れていないか確認します。外れていない場合に
トラブルシューティングは、LCD ディスプレイのメニューとプリセット タイミング モードに記載されている
現在の情報を参照して再度設定します。
Q: 映像が明るすぎる、または暗すぎる。
A: 明るさ と コントラスト を調整します。
(明るさ、コントラスト を参照してください)
Q: 画面の色が正しくない。
A: OSD カラー調整メニューの [ユーザー調整] を使用して、色を調整します。
Q: 暗い影によってカラー画像が歪む。
A: OSD カラー調整メニューの [ユーザー調整] を使用して、色を調整します。
Q: 白色が正しく表示されません。
A: OSD カラー調整メニューの [ユーザー調整] を使用して、色を調整します。
Q: 電源インジケータが点滅する。
A: LCD ディスプレイが OSD メモリに変更された設定を保存しています。
Q: 画面が点滅し、電源インジケータが 0.5 ~ 1 秒間隔で点滅します。
A: LCD ディスプレイが電源管理システムを使用しています。キーボードのいずれかのキ
ーを押します。
音声に関する問題
注意
音声信号に関する問題とその解決方法を以下に示します。
Q: 音声が聞こえない。
A: LCD ディスプレイの音声入力ポートとサウンドカードの音声出力ポートにオーディオ
ケーブルがしっかりと接続されていることを確認します。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
A: 音量レベルをチェックします。
Q: 音量が低すぎる。
A: 音量レベルをチェックします。
A: 音量を最大に調整しても音が小さすぎる場合には、コンピュータのサウンドカードま
たはソフトウェアプログラムの音量コントロールをチェックします。
Q: 音量が大きすぎるか小さすぎる。
A: 高音 および 低音 を適切なレベルに調整します。
リモコンに関する問題
注意
リモコンに関連する問題とその解決方法が記載されています。
Q: リモコンのボタンが応答しない。
トラブルシューティングA: バッテリの極性 (+/‐) を確認します。
A: バッテリが消耗していないかチェックします。
A: 電源がオンになっているかどうかをチェックします。
A: 電源コードがしっかりと接続されているか確認します。
A: 付近に特殊な蛍光灯またはネオン ランプがないかチェックします。
Q & A
Q: 周波数の変更方法は?
A: 周波数は、ビデオ カードの再設定によって変更することができます。
注意
ビデオ カードでサポートされている周波数は、使用しているドライバのバージョン
によって異なることにご注意ください。(詳細はコンピュータまたはビデオカードの
マニュアルを参照してください)
Q: 解像度の変更方法は?
A: Windows XP:
[コントロール パネル] → [デスクトップの表示とテーマ] → [画面] → [設定]。
A: Windows ME/2000:
[コントロール パネル] → [画面] → [設定]。
* 詳細についてはビデオカードのメーカーにお問い合わせください。
Q: 省電力機能の設定方法は?
A: Windows XP:
[コントロール パネル] → [デスクトップの表示とテーマ] → [画面] → [スクリー
ン セーバー]。
コンピュータの BIOS 設定で機能を設定します。(Windows/コンピュータのマニュア
ルを参照してください)
A: Windows ME/2000:
コントロール パネル → 画面 → スクリーンセイバー。
コンピュータの BIOS 設定で機能を設定します。(Windows/コンピュータのマニュア
ルを参照してください)
Q: 筐体/LCD パネルをきれいにしたいのですが?
A: 電源コードを抜き、LCD ディスプレイを柔らかい布で洗剤また真水を使って清掃しま
す。
洗剤が残ったままにしたり、筐体を傷つけないようにしてください。水が LCD ディ
スプレイの中に入らないようにしてください。
Q: ビデオの再生方法は?
トラブルシューティングA: ビデオは、MPEG1 および WMV コーデックのみをサポートしています。ビデオを再生す
るには、対応するコーデックをインストールします。互換性がないコーデックがある
ことに注意してください。
注意
お客様相談ダイヤルへ連絡する前に、このセクションに解決法が記載されていないかご確
認ください。不明な点がある場合には、お客様相談窓口にお電話いただくか、販売店にお
問い合わせください。
トラブルシューティング仕様
一般情報
一般情報
モデル名 SyncMaster 460UTn‐2 / 460UTn2‐UD2 / 460UT‐2 /
460UTn‐B / 460UT‐B
LCD パネル
サイズ 46 インチ (116 cm)
表示範囲 1018.353 mm (H) x 572.544 mm (V)
ピクセル ピッチ 0.7455 mm (H) x 0.7455 mm (V)
同期
水平 30 ~ 81 kHz
垂直 56 ~ 85 Hz
表示色
16.7M
解像度
最適解像度 1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz
最大解像度 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
最大ピクセル クロック
148.5 MHz (アナログ、デジタル)
電源
この製品は 100~ 240 V の電源に対応しています。
標準電圧は国によって異なる場合があるため、製品背面のラベルを確認してくだ
さい。
信号ケーブル
D-sub(Component), DVI-D In/Out, VCR, HDMI 1/2, RS232C In/Out, DP
DC Out, Stereo Audio In/Out, Audio In(L/R), RJ45, IR In/Out, Mini USB
• USB、LAN、D‐sub 出力 (460UTn-2, 460UTn-B のみ)
寸法 (W x H x D) / 重量
460UTn‐2
460UTn2‐UD2
1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm / 27.8 Kg
460UT‐2 1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm / 26. Kg
460UTn2‐UD2 ,
3寸法 (W x H x D) / 重量
460UTn‐B 1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm / 20.8 Kg
460UT‐B 1025.7 mm x 579.8 mm x 130.0 mm / 19. Kg
VESA 取り付けインターフェイス
600 mm × 400 mm
環境条件
動作時 460UTn
‐2
460UTn
‐B
温度:10˚~40˚C (50˚~104˚F)
湿度:10~80 %、結露しないこと
460UTn 温度:0˚~40˚C (32˚~104˚F)
‐2
湿度:10~80 %、結露しないこと
460UTn2
‐UD2
460UTn
‐B
記録装置 460UTn 温度:‐20˚~45˚C (‐4˚~113˚F)
(梱包保存 ‐2
時) 湿度:5~95 %、結露しないこと
460UTn
‐B
460UT‐
2
460UT‐
B
プラグ アンド プレイ機能
この LCD ディスプレイは、プラグ & プレイ互換システムにインストールするこ
とができます。LCD ディスプレイとコンピュータ システムとのインタラクショ
ンによって、最適な操作環境と LCD ディスプレイの設定が行われます。ほとん
どの場合、ユーザーが設定の変更を必要としない限り、LCD ディスプレイのイン
ストールは自動的に行うことができます。
ドット欠けについて
この製品には、1 ppm (百万分の 1) 精度の高度な半導体技術を利用した TFT-LCD
パネルが使用されています。ただし、赤、緑、青および白の各色のピクセルが光
って、もしくは黒く見える場合があります。これは製品の不具合ではなく、使用
上問題になるものではありません。
たとえば、この製品に含まれる TFT-LCD サブ ピクセルの数は 3,147,264 です。
注意
• 設計および仕様は事前の通知なしに変更されることがあります。
• Samsung ID (ビデオウォール キット) の取り付け時は、LFD の重量が 1.6 kg 増加し
ます。
仕様
460UTn2
‐UD2
3 : 460UTn‐2, 460UTn2‐UD2, 460UTn‐B
: 460UT‐2, 460UT‐B
PowerSaver
この LCD ディスプレイには、PowerSaver と呼ばれる消費電力管理システムが内蔵されて
います。このシステムは、LCD ディスプレイが一定時間使用されなかった場合に低消費電
力モードに切り替え、エネルギー消費を節約します。LCD ディスプレイは、キーボードの
キーが押されると自動的に通常の動作状態に戻ります。消費電力を押さえるために、必要
ない場合または長時間 LCD ディスプレイから離れる場合にはモニターをオフにします。
PowerSaver システムは、コンピュータにインストールされた VESA DPM 互換のビデオ カ
ードで動作します。お使いのコンピュータにインストールされているソフトウェア ユーテ
ィリティを使用して、この機能を設定してください。
PowerSaver
モード 通常動作 省電力モー
ド
電源オフ 電源オフ
(電源スイッ
チ)
電源インジケーター オン 点滅 黄色 オフ
消費電力
(一般)
460UTn‐2
460UTn2‐
UD2
300 ワット 5 ワット 5 ワット 0 ワット
460UT‐2 230 ワット 2 ワット 1 ワット 0 ワット
460UTn‐B 260 ワット 5 ワット 5 ワット 0 ワット
460UT‐B 195 ワット 2 ワット 1 ワット 0 ワット
注意
• システムの状態または設定が変更された場合は、実際の消費電力が上記の消費電力と異
なる場合があります。
• 電力消費を止めるには、スイッチをオフにするか、背面の電源ケーブルを抜きます。長
時間外出する場合は、電源ケーブルを抜いてください。
• ネットワーク ボックス (別売り) を接続した場合、LFD は Energy Star 5.0 準拠では
なくなります。
プリセット タイミング モード
コンピュータから送られてきた信号が以下のプリセット タイミング モードと同じ場合に
は、画面は自動的に調整されます。しかし、信号が異なる場合には、電源 LED が点灯して
いても画面に何も映らなくなる場合があります。ビデオ カードのマニュアルを参照して、
以下のように画面を調整してください。
仕様表示モード 水平周波数
(kHz)
垂直周波数
(Hz)
ピクセル ク
ロック (MHz)
同期極性 (H/
V)
IBM、640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/‐
IBM、640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 ‐/‐
IBM、720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 ‐/+
MAC、640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 ‐/‐
MAC、832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 ‐/‐
MAC、1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 ‐/‐
VESA、640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 ‐/‐
VESA、640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 ‐/‐
VESA、800 x 600 35.156 56.250 36.000 +/+
VESA、800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
VESA、800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
VESA、800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
VESA、848 x 480 31.020 60.000 33.750 +/+
VESA、1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 ‐/‐
VESA、1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 ‐/‐
VESA、1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
VESA、1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+
VESA、1280 x 768 47.776 59.870 79.500 ‐/+
VESA、1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+
VESA、1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+
VESA、1280 x 1024 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+
VESA、1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+
VESA、1366 x 768 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+
VESA,1600 x 1200 75.000 60.000 162.000 +/+
VESA,1920 x 1080 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+
水平周波数
画面の右端から左端を水平につなぐ 1 本の直線を
スキャンするのにかかる時間を水平サイクルと言
い、水平サイクルの逆数を水平周波数と言います。
単位: kHz
垂直周波数
蛍光灯と同じように、画面は同じ画像を 1 秒間に
何回も繰り返し表示して、ユーザーに対して映像を
表示しています。この繰り返しの周波数を、垂直周
波数またはリフレッシュ レートと言います。単位:
Hz
仕様情報
より良い画質でご覧いただくために
コンピュータの解像度と画面の描画頻度(リフレッシュ レート)を以下の説
明に従ってコンピュータ上で調整し、最適な表示をお楽しみください。TFT-LCD
に最適な画質でない場合には、画面の画質が不均一になる場合があります。
• 解像度:1366 x 768
• 垂直周波数 (リフレッシュ レート): 60 Hz
この製品には、1 ppm (百万分の 1) 以上の高精度な半導体技術を利用した
TFT-LCD パネルが使用されています。ただし、赤、緑、青および白の各色のピク
セルが光って、もしくは黒く見える場合があります。これは製品の不具合ではな
く、使用上問題になるものではありません。
• たとえば、この製品に含まれる TFT-LCD サブ ピクセルの数は 3,147,264 で
す。
モニターとパネルの外側を清掃するときには、柔らかい布に少量の水を付け
て拭き取ってください。LCD 部分を清掃するときには、力を入れずに拭き取って
ください。過剰な力がかかると、キズがつく場合があります。
画質に不満がある場合には、Auto ボタンを押したときに表示される表示画面
の「自動調整 機能」を行って画質を改善できる場合があります。自動調整後も
ノイズが発生する場合には、微調整/粗調整 調整機能を使用します。
静止画面を長時間表示し続けると、画像が残ったり画面がぼやけたりする場
合があります。長時間モニターの前から離れるときには、省電力モードにする
か、動画のスクリーンセーバーを設定してください。
製品情報(残像について)
残像とは?
LCD パネルは、通常の使用 (下記参照) において、残像は発生しません。
通常の条件とは、連続的に変化するビデオパターンとして定義されます。LCD パ
ネルが固定されたパターンの状態で、長時間(12時間以上)使用されると、ピク
セル内の液晶を動作させる電極の間で若干の電圧の差が生じる場合があります。
電極間の電圧の差が時間とともに増大すると、液晶が曲げられてしまいます。こ
のような現象が発生すると、パターンが変化したときに以前のイメージが見える
場合があります。これを防止するために、蓄積した電圧差を解消する必要があり
ます。電源オフ、スクリーンセイバー、または省電力モード
• 12 時間使用: 電源を 2 時間オフ
• PC の表示プロパティの電源管理機能で、モニターの電源をオフにするよう設
定します。
• 可能な場合にはスクリーンセイバーを使用します ‐ スクリーンセイバー
は、単色または動く映像のものをお勧めします。
• 残像防止機能を使用することをお勧めします。
定期的に色の組み合わせを変更する
注意
2 つの異なる色の使用
情報2 つの色情報を 30 分ごとに切り替えます。
• 明るさが極端に異なる文字色と背景色の組み合わせは避けてください。
また、残像が発生する原因となりますのでグレーは使用しないでください。
避けること:明るさが大きく異なる色 (白と黒、灰色) の使用。
定期的に文字色を変更する
• 明るさの差が少ない明るい色を使用します。
‐ 周期:文字色と背景色を 30 分間隔で変更
• 30 分ごとに、文字を動かして変更します。
• 画像やロゴを定期的に表示します。
‐ 周期:ロゴとともに移動するイメージを 4 時間使用するごとに 60 秒表示
します。
• 残像を抑えるのにもっとも効果的な方法は PC を使用していないときにスクリ
ーンセイバーが 起動するように設定することです。これらのガイドラインに
従わない場合には、保証内容に影響を与える場合があります。
製品に画面ピクセル機能を使用する
• 画面ピクセル機能を使用する
‐ 症状:黒色の点が上下に移動します。
• 画面バー機能を使用する
‐ 症状:黒色の水平/垂直線が上下に移動します。
情報製品に画面消去機能を使用する
• 画面消去機能を使用する
‐ 症状:2 つの垂直なブロックが表示を消していきます。
情報付録
お客様相談ダイヤル
東雲サービスセンター
受付時間 平日(土日祭日を除く)9:00~17:00 ※
ホームページ http://www.samsung.com/jp
住所 〒135‐0062 東京都江東区東雲2‐6‐38
Fax 03‐3527‐5533
注意
※ 予告なく変更する場合がございます。あらかじめご了承ください。
用語
ドット ピッチ モニターの画像は、赤色、緑色および青色のドットで構成
されています。ドットの間隔が小さいほど、解像度は高く
なります。同じ色の 2 個のドット間の距離を「ドット ピ
ッチ」と言います。単位:mm
垂直周波数 ユーザーに対して画像を作成して表示するには、1 秒間当
たり何回も画像を再描画しなければなりません。1 秒当た
りのこの繰り返しの回数を、垂直周波数またはリフレッシ
ュ レートと言います。単位: Hz
例:同じ光が 1 秒間に 60 回繰り返すときには、60 Hz と
なります。
水平周波数 画面の右端から左端を水平につなぐ直線をスキャンするの
にかかる時間を、水平サイクルと言います。水平サイクル
の逆数を水平周波数と呼びます。単位:kHz
インタレース法とノンインタ
レース法
画面の水平線を上から下に順番に表示していく方法をノン
インタレース法と言い、奇数番目のラインを表示してから
偶数番目のラインを表示する方法をインタレース法と言い
ます。ノンインタレース法は、明確な画像にするために多
くのモニターで使用されています。インタレース法は、TV
で使用されているものと同じです。
プラグ & プレイ コンピュータとモニターが自動的に情報を交換することに
より、ユーザーに最高の画質を提供する機能です。このモ
ニターは、プラグ & プレイ機能について国際規格 VESA
DDC に対応しています。
解像度 画面の画像を構成するのに使用される水平および垂直方向
のドットの数を、「解像度」と呼びます。この数は、表示
の正確さを示しています。高い解像度では、多くの画像情
報を画面上に表示できるため、複数の作業を実行する場合
に適しています。
例:解像度が 1920 X 1080 の場合、水平方向のドットが
1920 個 (水平解像度)、垂直線 1080 本 (垂直解像度) で
構成されていることを意味します。制限事項
本書の内容は、将来予告なく変更されることがあります。
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.の文書による許可なしには、いかなる複製も堅く禁じま
す。
内容に含まれる誤り、または設置や使用の結果として起こる損害について、Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.は一切の責任を負いません。
Samsung は Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.の登録商標です。Microsoft、Windows および
Windows NT は、Microsoft Corporation の登録商標です。VESA、DPM および DDC は Video
Electronics Standard Association の登録商標です。本書に記載されているその他すべて
の製品名は、各企業・団体の商標または登録商標です。
本製品は日本国内用として製造、販売しています。日本国外で使用された場合、当社は責
任を負い兼ねます。また、技術相談や、アフターサービスなども国外では行っておりませ
んのでご注意ください。
本製品は一般 OA 用として設計・製造されています。一般 OA 用以外の用途で使用される場
合は、保証期間内であっても無償修理の対象外となることがありますのでご注意ください。
TruSurround XT, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS
Labs, Inc.
TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
付録
LCD DISPLAY
quick start guide
460UTn-2, 460UT-2, 460UTn-B, 460UT-BIntroduction
Package Contents
Checking the Contents of the Package
Remove the lock from the package box, as shown in the figure above.
Lift up the package box by
holding the grooves on
both sides of the package
box.
Check the contents of the
package.
Remove the Styrofoam
and vinyl cover.
Note
• After unpacking the package, make sure to check the contents of the package.
• Store the packaging box in case you need to move the Product later.
• If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
• Contact a local dealer to purchase optional items.
• After unpacking, you may use the lower part of the package box as a temporary stand for
product test or operation check.
Unpacking
LCD DisplayManuals
Quick Setup Guide Warranty Card
(Not available in all locations)
User's Guide
Cables
Power Cord D-Sub Cable MagicInfo Software CD,
MagicInfo Manual CD
(Applicable to the
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B
model only)
Others
Remote Control
(BP59-00138B)
Batteries (AAA X 2)
(Not available in all locations)
Sold separately
Semi Stand KIT LAN Cable USB Cable
(Applicable to the
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B
model only)
IntroductionSold separately
RGB to BNC Cable RGB to COMPONENT Cable
Network Box
(Applicable to the
460UT-2, 460UT-B model
only)
Wall Mount KIT TV Tuner Box
Your LCD Display
Front
SOURCE button
Switches from PC mode to Video mode. Selects the input source that an
external device is connected to.
[PC] → [DVI] → [AV] → [Component] → [HDMI1] → [HDMI2] → [DisplayPort] → [MagicInfo] → [TV]
Note
• A TV tuner box (sold separately) must be connected to use the TV.
• A network box (sold separately) must be connected to use MagicInfo
with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model.
POWER button
Use this button for turning the LCD Display on and off.
Power indicator
Shows PowerSaver mode by blinking green
Introduction Note
See PowerSaver described in the manual for further information regarding
power saving functions. For energy conservation, turn your LCD Display
OFF when it is not needed or when leaving it unattended for long periods.
Remote Control Sensor
Aim the remote control towards this spot on the LCD Display.
Rear
Note
See the "Connections" section for details about cable connections. The LCD Display's configuration at the back may vary slightly depending on the model.
POWER S/W ON [ │ ] / OFF
Switches the LCD Display On/Off.
POWER
The power cord plugs into the LCD Display
and the wall outlet.
IR OUT/IN
Receives a signal from the remote control
and outputs the signal through Loopout when
a removable sensor board is connected.
AMBIENT SENSOR IN
Supplies power to the removable sensor
board and receives a signal from the light
sensor.
DVI OUT (LOOPOUT)
• Connect a monitor to another monitor
through a DVI, DVI to HDMI cable.
Introduction• Connect a DVI or DVI-HDMI cable to [DVI
OUT (LOOPOUT)] on the product and
[DVI IN] or [HDMI IN] on another monitor.
• HDMI and network signals sent via the
[DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] port are displayed on the second display which has
the [DVI IN] port.
Note
• The Loopout function can be used to duplicate the screen of the primary display.
Connect [DVI OUT] on the primary display to [DVI IN] or [HDMI] on another
display.
• A maximum of 50 monitors can be connected to DVI-Loopout (using a 2m-long
DVI cable). Up to Full HD resolution can
be supported. Compatible input sources
include DVI IN, HDMI IN 1, and HDMI IN
2 (MagicInfo).
RGB/COMPONENT IN (PC/COMPONENT Connection Terminal (Input))
• Connect the [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
port on the monitor to the RGB port on the
PC using the D-SUB cable.
• Connect the [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
port on the monitor to the COMPONENT
port on the external device using the RGB
to COMPONENT cable.
• Connect the [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
port on the monitor to the BNC port on the
PC using the RGB to BNC cable.
DVI IN (PC Video Connection Terminal)
Connect the [DVI IN] port on the monitor to
the DVI port on the PC using the DVI cable.
RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN (PC/DVI/
DP/HDMI Audio Connection Terminal (Input))
Connect the [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO
IN] terminal of the monitor and the speaker
output terminal of your computer's sound
card using a stereo cable (sold separately).
DP IN
Receives a signal from the Display port.
IntroductionConnect a DP cable to [DP IN] on the product
and DP IN on another display.
AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [L-AUDIOR]
Connect the [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN
[L-AUDIO-R]] port on the monitor to the audio
output port on the PC or on the external device using an audio cable.
AV IN
Connect the [AV IN] terminal of your monitor
to the video output terminal of the external
device using a VIDEO cable.
AUDIO OUT
Connect a headphone or an External speaker.
DC OUT
Make sure to use connecting [DC OUT] terminal to the authorized TV-Tuner Box
[SBB_DTC/ZA].
Otherwise, this may result in damage
to the product.
HDMI IN 1
• Connect the [HDMI IN 1] terminal at the
back of your LCD Display to the HDMI
terminal of your digital output device using a HDMI cable.
• Up to HDMI 1.3 can be supported.
Note
The [HDMI IN 1] port can be connected to
general external devices (DVD players, camcorders, etc.) or the TV set-top box.
HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)
• Connect the [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)]
terminal at the back of your LCD Display
to the HDMI terminal of your digital output
device using a HDMI cable.
• Up to HDMI 1.3 can be supported.
Introduction Note
The MAGICINFO OUT port must be connected to the [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] port.
RJ 45 MDC (MDC PORT)
MDC(Multiple Display Control) Program Port
Connect the LAN cable to [RJ45 MDC] on the
product and LAN on the PC. To use an MDC,
the MDC program must be installed on the
PC.
Note
Go to Multi Control and select RJ45 MDC as
the MDC Connection.
RS232C OUT/IN (RS232C Serial PORT)
MDC(Multiple Display Control) Program Port
Connect a serial cable (cross type) to
[RS232C] on the product and RS232C on the
PC. To use an MDC, the MDC program must
be installed on the PC.
Note
Go to Multi Control and select RS232C
MDC as the MDC Connection.
RGB OUT
MagicInfo video output port
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn-B model only.
MAGICINFO OUT
Outputs MagicInfo HDMI signals. It should
be connected to [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)]
via an HDMI cable.
LAN (LAN Connection Terminal)
Connects to a LAN cable to allow Internet or
network access in MagicInfo mode.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn-B model only.
IntroductionUSB (USB Connection Terminal)
Keyboard / Mouse, Mass Storage Device
Compatible.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn-B model only.
Kensington Lock slot
A Kensington Lock is an anti-theft device that
enables users to lock the product so that they
can safely use it in public locations. Since the
shape and usage of the locking device may
differ depending on the model and the manufacturer, for more information, refer to the
User Manual supplied with the locking device
for more information.
Note
You must purchase the Kensington Lock
separately.
To lock the product, follow these
steps:
1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around
a large, stationary object such as a desk
or chair.
2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock
attached through the looped end of the
Kensington lock cable.
3. Insert the Kensington Lock into the security slot ( ) on the back of the display.
4.
Lock the lock ( ).
Note
• These are general instructions. For exact
instructions, see the User Manual supplied with the locking device.
• You can purchase the locking device
from an electronics store, an online shop,
or our service center.
Note
See the "Connections" section for details about cable connections.
IntroductionRemote Control
Note
The performance of the remote control may be affected by a TV or other electronic device
operating near the LCD Display , causing a malfunction due to interference with the frequency.
POWER
OFF
Number Buttons
DEL / GUIDE button
+ VOL -
SOURCE
D.MENU
TOOLS
Up-Down Left-Right buttons
INFO
PC/DVI/HDMI/DP
TTX/MIX
MTS/DUAL
ENTER/PRE-CH
MUTE
CH/P
TV
MENU
RETURN
EXIT
MagicInfo
POWER
Turns the product On/Off.
OFF
Turns the product Off.
Number Buttons
Used to enter the password during the OSD adjustment or
to use MagicInfo.
Press to change the channel.
DEL / GUIDE button
The "-" button is used to select Digital channels.
Electronic Program Guide (EPG) display.
- This function does not work for this LCD Display.
+ VOL -
Adjusts the audio volume.
Introduction SOURCE
Selects a connected external input source or MagicInfo
mode.
Press the button to change the input signal SOURCE.
Changing the SOURCE is only allowed for external devices
that are connected to the LCD Display at the time.
D.MENU
DTV menu display
- This function does not work for this LCD Display.
TOOLS
Use to quickly select frequently used functions.
- This function does not work for this LCD Display.
Up-Down Left-Right buttons
Moves from one menu item to another horizontally, vertically
or adjusts selected menu values.
INFO
Current picture information is displayed on the upper left
corner of the screen.
PC/DVI/HDMI/DP
Directly selects an external input source: PC, DVI, HDMI or
DP(DisplayPort).
TTX/MIX
TV channels provide written information services via teletext.
- Teletext Buttons
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
MTS/DUAL
MTSYou can select MTS (Multichannel Television Stereo) mode.
Audio Type MTS/S_Mode Default
FM Stereo Mono Mono Manual
Change
Stereo Mono ↔ Stereo
SAP Mono ↔ SAP Mono
DUALSTEREO/MONO, DUAL l / DUAL ll and MONO/NICAM
MONO/NICAM STEREO can be operated depending on the
broadcasting type by using the DUAL button on the remote
control while watching TV.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
ENTER/PRE-CH
This button is used to return to the immediately previous
channel.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
MUTE
Pauses (mutes) the audio output temporarily. This is displayed on the lower left corner of the screen. The audio
Introductioncomes back on if MUTE or - VOL + is pressed in the Mute
mode.
CH/P
In TV mode, selects TV channels.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
TV
Selects the TV mode directly.
- This is activated when a TV tuner box is installed.
MENU
Opens the on-screen menu and exits from the menu or
closes the adjustment menu.
RETURN
Returns to the previous menu.
EXIT
Exits from the menu screen.
MagicInfo
MagicInfo Quick Launch Button.
Note
This button is disabled for products that do not support
MagicInfo.
IntroductionConnections
Connecting a Computer
There are several ways to connect the computer to the monitor. Choose
one from the following options.
Using the D-sub (Analog) connector on the video card.
• Connect the D-sub to the 15-pin, [RGB/COMPONENT IN] port on the
back of your LCD Display and the 15 pin D-sub Port on the computer.
Using the DVI (Digital) connector on the video card.
• Connect the DVI Cable to the [DVI IN] port on the back of your LCD
Display and the DVI port on the computer.
Using the (Digital) connector on the video card.
• Connect the [HDMI IN 1] port on the LCD Display to the HDMI port on
the PC using the HDMI cable.
HDMI Note
Select HDMI2 (only with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or HDMI1 as an input
source when connected to the PC via an HDMI cable.
To obtain normal picture and audio from the PC, HDMI2 (only with a
460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or HDMI1 must be selected before PC is selected in Edit Name.
To enable audio when DVI Device is selected, be sure to establish the
connection using step ( ).
Connect the Audio cable for your LCD Display to the AUDIO port on the
back of the LCD Display.
Connect the power cord for your LCD Display to the POWER port on the
back of the LCD Display. Turn on the power switch.
Note
Contact a local SAMSUNG Electronics Service Center to buy optional items.
Connecting to Other devices
Note
• AV input devices such as DVD players, VCRs or camcorders as well as your computer
can be connected to the LCD Display. For detailed information on connecting AV input
devices, refer to the contents under Adjusting Your LCD Display.
• The LCD Display 's configuration at the back may vary slightly depending on the LCD
Display model.
Connecting an External Monitor
ConnectionsConnect between the [DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] port on the LCD Display and
the input port on another monitor using a DVI cable.
Connect between the [AUDIO OUT] port on the LCD Display and the audio
input port on another monitor using a stereo cable.
Note
Select DVI Mode as an input source for the external monitor connected to [DVI OUT].
DVI OUT does not support HDCP.
Connecting AV Devices
1. Connect an audio cable to [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]] on
the product and the audio port on an external device such as a VCR or
DVD player.
2. Connect a video cable to [AV IN] on the product and the video output port
on the external device.
3. Then, start the DVD, VCR or Camcorders with a DVD disc or tape inserted.
4. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "AV".
Note
AV input devices such as DVD players, VCRs or camcorders as well as your computer can
be connected to the LCD Display. For detailed information on connecting AV input devices,
refer to the contents under Adjusting Your LCD Display.
ConnectionsConnecting to a Camcorder
1. Locate the AV output jacks on the camcorder. They are usually found on
the side or back of the camcorder. Connect a video cable between the
VIDEO OUTPUT jack on the camcorder and the [AV IN] on the LCD Display .
2. Connect a set of audio cables between the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on the
camcorder and the [AV /COMPONENT AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]] on the
LCD Display .
3. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "AV".
4. Then, start the Camcorders with a tape inserted.
Note
The audio-video cables shown here are usually included with a Camcorder.
(If not, check your local electronics store.)
If your camcorder is stereo, you need to connect a set of two cables.
ConnectionsConnecting Using a HDMI Cable
1. Connect an HDMI cable to [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (only with a
460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or [HDMI IN 1] on the product and the HDMI
output port on a digital device.
2. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "HDMI1 /
HDMI2(only with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model)"
Note
In HDMI mode, only PCM format audio is supported.
Connecting Using a DVI to HDMI Cable
Connect a DVI-HDMI cable to [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (only with a
460UT-2, 460UT-B model) or [HDMI IN 1] and the DVI output port on the
digital device.
Connect the red and white jacks of an RCA to stereo (for PC) cable to the
same colored audio output terminals of the digital output device, and conConnectionsnect the opposite jack to the [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN] terminal of
the LCD Display.
3. Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "HDMI1 /
HDMI2(only with a 460UT-2, 460UT-B model)"
Connecting a DVD Player
Connect a RGB to Component cable between the [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] port on the LCD Display and the PR, Y, PB jacks on the DVD player.
Connect a set of audio cables between the [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN
[L-AUDIO-R]] on the LCD Display and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD
player.
Note
• Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "Component".
• Then, start the DVD Player with a DVD disc inserted.
• A RGB to component cable is optional.
• For an explanation of Component video, consult your DVD manual.
ConnectionsConnecting a DTV Set Top (Cable/Satellite) Box
Connect a RGB to Component cable between the [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] port on the LCD Display and the PR, Y, PB jacks on the Set Top Box.
Connect a set of audio cables between the [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN
[L-AUDIO-R]] on the LCD Display and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the Set
Top Box.
Note
• Press SOURCE on the product or remote control and select "Component".
• For an explanation of Component video, see your Set Top Box owner's manual.
Connecting to an Audio System
1. Connect a set of audio cables between the AUX L, R jacks on the AUDIO
SYSTEM and [AUDIO OUT] on LCD Display.
ConnectionsConnecting a LAN Cable
1. Connect the LAN cable between the [LAN] port on the product and the
[LAN] port on your PC.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn-B model only.
Connecting a USB devices
1. You can connect USB devices such as a mouse or keyboard.
Note
Applicable to the 460UTn-2, 460UTn-B model only.
ConnectionsTroubleshooting
Self-Test Feature Check
Note
Check the following items yourself before calling for assistance. Contact a Service Center for
problems that you cannot solve by yourself.
Self-Test Feature Check
1. Turn off both your computer and the LCD Display.
2. Unplug the video cable from the back of the computer.
3. Turn on the LCD Display.
The figure shown below ("No Signal") appears on a black background when the LCD
Display is working normally even though no video signal is detected: While in the SelfTest mode, the LED power indicator remains green and the figure moves around on the
screen.
4. Turn off your LCD Display and reconnect the video cable; then turn on both your computer and the LCD Display
If your LCD Display screen remains blank after using the previous procedure, check your
video controller and computer system; your LCD Display is functioning properly.
Warning Messages
You can even view the screen at a resolution of 1920 x 1080. However, you will receive the
following message for a minute; You can choose to change the screen resolution or stay in
the current mode during that time. If the resolution is more than 85Hz, you will see the black
screen because the LCD Display does not support over 85Hz.
Note
Refer to Specifications > Preset Timing Modes for the resolutions or frequencies supported
by the LCD Display.
Maintenance and Cleaning
1) Maintaining the LCD Display Case.
Clean with a soft cloth after disconnecting the power cord.• Do not use benzene, thinner or other flammable substances.
2) Maintaining the Flat Panel Display Screen.
Clean with a soft cloth (cotton flannel).
• Never use acetone, benzene or thinner.
(They may cause flaws or deformation of the screen
surface.)
• The user is responsible for any damage caused by
using these substances.
Symptoms and Recommended Actions
Note
A LCD Display recreates visual signals received from the computer. Therefore, if there is a
problem with the computer or the video card, this can cause the LCD Display to become
blank, have poor coloring, become noisy, etc. In this case, first check the source of the problem, and then contact a Service Center or your dealer.
1. Check if the power cord and the video cables are properly connected to the computer.
2. Check if the computer beeps more than 3 times when booting.
(If it does, request service.)
3. If you installed a new video card or if you assembled the PC, check if you installed the
Adaptor(video).
4. Check if the scanning ratio of the video screen is set to between 50 Hz ~ 85 Hz.
(Do not exceed 60Hz when using the maximum resolution.)
5. If you have problems in installing the Adaptor (video) driver, boot the computer in Safe
Mode, remove the Display Adaptor in the "Control Panel −> System −> Device Administrator" and then reboot the computer to reinstall the Adaptor (video) driver.
Check List
Note
• The following table lists possible problems and their solutions. Before calling for assistance, check the information in this section to see if you can remedy any problems for
yourself. If you do need assistance, please call the phone number on the Information
section or contact your dealer.
• For more network-related information, refer to the MagicInfo Troubleshooting section.
Problems related to the Installation (PC Mode)
Note
Problems related to the LCD Display installation and their solutions are listed.
Q: The LCD Display screen flickers.
TroubleshootingA: Check if the signal cable between the computer and the LCD Display is securely connected.
(Refer to Connecting a Computer)
Problems related to the Screen
Note
Problems related to the LCD Display screen and their solutions are listed.
Q: The screen is blank and the power indicator is off.
A: Ensure that the power cord is firmly connected and the LCD Display is on.
(Refer to the Connecting a Computer)
Q: "Check Signal Cable" message.
A: Ensure that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC or video sources.
(Refer to the Connecting a Computer)
A: Ensure that the PC or video sources are turned on.
Q: "Not Optimum Mode" message.
A: Check the maximum resolution and the frequency of the video Adaptor.
A: Compare these values with the data in the Preset Timing Modes Chart.
Q: The picture rolls vertically.
A: Check if the signal cable is securely connected. Re-connect it, if necessary.
(Refer to Connecting a Computer)
Q: The image is not clear; picture is blurred.
A: Run Frequency Coarse and Fine tuning.
A: Turn on again after removing all accessories (video extension cable, etc.)
A: Set the resolution and frequency to the recommended ranges.
Q: The picture image is unstable and shakes.
A: Check if the resolution and frequency set for the computer video card falls in the range
supported by the LCD Display. If not, reset them referring to the current Information
under the LCD Display menu and Preset Timing Modes.
Q: Ghost images are shown in the picture.
A: Check if the resolution and frequency set for the computer video card falls in the range
supported by the LCD Display. If not, reset them referring to the current Information
under the LCD Display menu and Preset Timing Modes.
Q: The image is too light or too dark.
A: Adjust the brightness and contrast.
(Refer to the Brightness, Contrast)
TroubleshootingQ: The screen color is inconsistent.
A: Adjust color using Custom under OSD Color Adjustment menu.
Q: The color image is distorted by dark shadows.
A: Adjust color using Custom under OSD Color Adjustment menu.
Q: The color white is poor.
A: Adjust color using Custom under OSD Color Adjustment menu.
Q: The Power Indicator blinks.
A: The LCD Display is currently saving the changes made in the settings to the OSD
memory.
Q: The screen is blank and the power indicator light blinks every 0.5 or 1 seconds.
A: The LCD Display is using its power management system. Press any key on the keyboard.
Q: The screen is blank and it is blinking.
A: If you see the "TEST GOOD" message on the screen when you pressing the MENU
button, check the cable connection between the LCD Display and the computer to ensure that the connector is properly connected.
Problems related to Audio
Note
Problems related to audio signals and their solutions are listed below.
Q: No sound.
A: Ensure that the audio cable is firmly connected to both the audio-in port on your LCD
Display and the audio-out port on your sound card.
(Refer to the Connecting a Computer)
A: Check the volume level.
Q: The sound level is too low.
A: Check the volume level.
A: If the volume is still too low after turning the control to its maximum, check the volume
control on the computer sound card or software program.
Q: The sound is too high or too low.
A: Adjusts the Treble and Bass to the appropriate levels.
Problems related to the Remote Control
Note
Problems related to the remote control and their solutions are listed.
Q: The remote control buttons do not respond.
A: Check the polarities (+/-) of the batteries.
TroubleshootingA: Check if the batteries are empty.
A: Check if the power is on.
A: Check if the power cord is securely connected.
A: Check if a special fluorescent or neon lamp is on in the vicinity.
Q & A
Q: How can I change the frequency?
A: The frequency can be changed by reconfiguring the video card.
Note
That video card support can vary, depending on the version of the driver used. (Refer
to the computer or the video card manual for details.)
Q: How can I adjust the resolution?
A: Windows XP:
Set the resolution in the Control Panel → Appearance and Themes → Display → Settings.
A: Windows ME/2000:
Set the resolution in the Control Panel → Display → Settings.
* Contact the video card manufacturer for details.
Q: How can I set the Power Saving function?
A: Windows XP:
Set the resolution in the Control Panel → Appearance and Themes → Display → Screen
Saver.
Set the function in the BIOS-SETUP of the computer. (Refer to the Windows / Computer
Manual).
A: Windows ME/2000:
Set the resolution at the Control Panel → Display → Screen Saver.
Set the function in the BIOS-SETUP of the computer. (Refer to the Windows / Computer
Manual).
Q: How can I clean the outer case/LCD Panel?
A: Disconnect the power cord and then clean the LCD Display with a soft cloth, using either
a cleaning solution or plain water.
Do not leave any detergent or scratches on the case. Do not let any water enter the
LCD Display.
Q: How can I play the video?
A: The video supports the MPEG1 and WMV codecs only. Install the corresponding codec
to play the video. Note that some of the codecs can be incompatible.
Troubleshooting Note
Before calling for assistance, check the information in this section to see if you can remedy
any problems yourself. If you do need assistance, please call the phone number on the Information section or contact your dealer.
Troubleshooting
LCD DISPLAY
quick start guide
460UTn-2, 460UT-2, 460UTn-B, 460UT-Bはじめに
パッケージ内容
パッケージの内容の確認
上の図に示すように、パッケージの箱からロックを取り外します。
箱の両側にある穴に手をか
けて、箱を持ち上げます。
パッケージの内容を確認し
ます。
発布スチロールとビニール
袋を取り外します。
注意
• パッケージを開いたら、内容を確認してください。
• 製品を運ぶときに必要になりますので、梱包されていた箱は保管しておいてください。
• 不足している品目がある場合には、販売店にお問い合わせください。
• オプション品の購入については、お近くの販売店にお問い合わせください。
• 開梱したら、パッケージの箱の下部を仮のスタンドとして使用して製品のテストや動作
チェックを行うことができます。
同梱物
LCD ディスプレイマニュアル類
クイック セットアップ ガ
イド
保証書
(含まれていない地域もあ
ります)
ユーザー ガイド
ケーブル
電源コード D-Sub ケーブル MagicInfo ソフトウェア
CD, MagicInfo マニュア
ル CD
(460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モ
デルのみ)
その他
リモートコントロール
(BP59-00138B)
バッテリ (AAA X 2)
(含まれていない地域もあ
ります)
別売り
セミ スタンド キット LAN ケーブル USB ケーブル
(460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モ
デルのみ)
はじめに別売り
RGB to BNC ケーブル RGB to COMPONENT ケーブ
ル
NetWork ボックス
(460UT-2, 460UT-B モデル
のみ)
ウォール マウント キット TV チューナー ボックス
お使いの LCD ディスプレイ
前面
SOURCE ボタン
PC モードからビデオモードに切り替えます。外部デバイスが接続されて
いる入力信号を選択します。
[PC] → [DVI] → [AV] → [コンポ一ネント] → [HDMI1] → [HDMI2]
→ [ディスプレイ ポート] → [MagicInfo]
注意
• TV を使用するには、TV チューナー ボックス (別売り) を接続する
必要があります。
• 460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルで MagicInfo を使用するには、ネットワー
ク ボックス (別売り) を接続する必要があります。
POWER ボタン
このボタンで、LCD ディスプレイの電源のオン/オフを切り替えます。
電源インジケーター
緑色に点滅して PowerSaver モードであることを示します
注意
省電力機能の詳細については、このマニュアルの「PowerSaver」を参照
してください。消費電力を押さえるために、必要ない場合または長時間
LCD ディスプレイから離れる場合にはモニターをオフにします。
はじめにリモートカラーセンサー
リモコンを LCD ディスプレイのこの部分に向けます。
背面
注意
ケーブル接続の詳細については、「接続」のセクションを参照してください。LCD ディス
プレイの背面の構成は、モデルによって若干異なる場合があります。
POWER S/W ON [ │ ] / OFF
LCD ディスプレイのオン/オフを切り替えま
す。
POWER
LCD ディスプレイと壁のコンセントに電源
コードを接続します。
IR OUT/IN
リモコンからの信号を受信して、リムーバ
ブル センサー ボードが接続されたときに
はループアウトを通じて信号を送信します。
AMBIENT SENSOR IN
リムーバブル センサー ボードに電源を供
給し、光センサーからの信号を受信します。
DVI OUT (LOOPOUT)
• モニターを DVI、DVI to HDMI ケーブル
を使用して別のモニターに接続します。
• DVI または DVI-HDMI ケーブルを製品
の [DVI OUT (LOOPOUT)] と別のモニタ
ーの [DVI IN] または [HDMI IN] に接
続します。
• [DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] ポートから送出さ
れる HDMI およびネットワーク信号は、
はじめに[DVI IN] ポートを持つセカンド ディス
プレイに表示されます。
注意
• ループアウト機能を使用して、プライマ
リ ディスプレイの画面を二重化するこ
とができます。プライマリ ディスプレ
イの [DVI OUT] を別のディスプレイの
[DVI IN] または [HDMI] に接続します。
• DVI-Loopout には (長さ 2m の DVI ケ
ーブルを使用して) 最大 50 台のモニタ
ーを接続できます。最大で Full HD ま
での解像度をサポートできます。入力信
号は、DVI IN、HDMI IN 1、および HDMI
IN 2 (MagicInfo) に対応しています。
RGB/COMPONENT IN (PC/COMPONENT 接続
端子 (入力))
• モニターの [RGB/COMPONENT IN] ポート
を PC の RGB ポートに D-SUB ケーブル
を使用して接続します。
• モニターの [RGB/COMPONENT IN] ポート
を外部デバイスの COMPONENT ポートに
RGB to COMPONENT ケーブルを使用して
接続します。
• モニターの [RGB/COMPONENT IN] ポート
を PC の BNC ポートに RGB to BNC ケ
ーブルを使用して接続します。
DVI IN (PC 映像接続端子)
モニターの [DVI IN] ポートを DVI ケーブ
ルを使用して PC の DVI ポートに接続しま
す。
RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN (PC/DVI/
DP/HDMI 音声接続端子 (入力))
別売りのステレオ ケーブルを使用して、モ
ニターの [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN] 端
子とお使いのコンピュータのサウンド カー
ドのスピーカー出力端子を接続します。
DP IN
ディスプレイ ポートからの信号を受信しま
す。
DP ケーブルを製品の [DP IN] と別のディ
スプレイの DP IN に接続します。
はじめにAV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]
モニターの [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [LAUDIO-R]] ポートを PC または外部デバイ
スの音声出力ポートにオーディオ ケーブル
を使用して接続します。
AV IN
ビデオ ケーブルを使用して、モニターの
[AV IN] 端子を外部デバイスのビデオ出力
端子に接続します。
AUDIO OUT
ヘッドフォンまたは外部スピーカーを接続
します。
DC OUT
[DC OUT] 端子が承認済みの TV チューナ
ー ボックス Box[SBB_DTC/ZA] に接続され
ていることを確認します。
製品が損傷する場合があります。
HDMI IN 1
• HDMI ケーブルを使用して、LCD ディス
プレイ背面の HDMI 端子をお使いのデジ
タル出力デバイスの [HDMI IN 1] 端子
に接続します。
• HDMI 1.3 までをサポートしています。
注意
[HDMI IN 1] ポートは、一般の外部デバイ
ス (DVD プレイヤー、カムコーダーなど)
や TV セットトップ ボックスに接続できま
す。
HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)
• HDMI ケーブルを使用して、LCD ディス
プレイ背面の HDMI 端子をお使いのデジ
タル出力デバイスの [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] 端子に接続します。
• HDMI 1.3 までをサポートしています。
はじめに注意
MAGICINFO OUT ポートは、[HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] ポートに接続しなければなりませ
ん。
RJ 45 MDC (MDC PORT)
MDC (マルチディスプレイ コントロール)
プログラム ポート
LAN ケーブルを製品の [RJ45 MDC] と PC
の LAN に接続します。MDC を使用するに
は、PC に MDC プログラムがインストール
されている必要があります。
注意
Multi Control に移動して、MDC Connection として RJ45 MDC を選択します。
RS232C OUT/IN (RS232C シリアル ポー
ト)
MDC (マルチディスプレイ コントロール)
プログラム ポート
シリアル ケーブル (クロス タイプ) を製
品の [RS232C] と PC の RS232C に接続し
ます。MDC を使用するには、PC に MDC プ
ログラムがインストールされている必要が
あります。
注意
Multi Control に移動して、MDC Connection として RS232C MDC を選択します。
RGB OUT
MagicInfo ビデオ出力ポート
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。
MAGICINFO OUT
MagicInfo の HDMI 信号を出力します。HDMI
ケーブルで [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] に接
続する必要があります。
LAN (LAN 接続端子)
はじめにLAN ケーブルに接続して、MagicInfo モー
ドでのインターネットまたはネットワーク
アクセスを可能にします。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。
USB(USB 接続端子)
キーボード/マウス、マス ストレージ機器
対応。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。
Kensington Lock slot
Kensington ロックは、公共の場所で製品を
安全に使用できるようにロックすることが
できる盗難防止用の装置です。固定装置の
形状と使用方法はモデルおよびメーカーに
よって異なるため、詳細については固定装
置に付属するユーザー マニュアルを参照し
てください。
注意
Kensington ロックを別途購入する必要があ
ります。
製品をロックするには以下の手順に
従います。
1. Kensington ロック ケーブルを、デス
クや椅子など大きくて動かない物体に
かけます。
2. ロックのついたケーブルの端を Kensington ロック ケーブルの端の輪に通
します。
3. ケンジントン ロックをディスプレイ背
面にあるセキュリティ スロット ( )
に挿入します。
4. ロックします ( )。
注意
• これは一般的な説明です。詳細について
は、ロック装置に付属するユーザー マ
ニュアルを参照してください。
• 固定装置の購入につきましてはお買い上
げいただいたお店にご確認ください。
はじめに注意
ケーブル接続の詳細については、「接続」のセクションを参照してください。
リモートコントロール
注意
リモコンの動作は TV またはその他 LCD ディスプレイ付近で動作している電子機器の影響
を受ける場合があり、周波数の干渉によって誤作動することがあります。
POWER
OFF
ダイヤルパッド
DEL / GUIDE ボタン
+ VOL -
SOURCE
D.MENU
TOOLS
上下左右ボタン
INFO
PC/DVI/HDMI/DP
TTX/MIX
MTS/DUAL
ENTER/PRE-CH
MUTE
CH/P
TV
MENU
RETURN
EXIT
MagicInfo
POWER 製品のオン/オフを切り替えます。
OFF 製品をオフにします。
ダイヤルパッド OSD の調整時、または MagicInfo を使用するときにパス
ワードを入力するのに使用します。
押してチャンネルを変更します。
DEL / GUIDE ボタ
ン
「-」ボタンはデジタル チャンネルの選択に使用します。
電子番組ガイド (EPG) 表示
はじめに- この機能はこの LCD ディスプレイでは動作しません。
+ VOL - 音声の音量を調整します。
SOURCE 接続されている外部入力信号または MagicInfo モードを
選択します。
ボタンを押して、入力信号 SOURCE を切り換えます。
SOURCE の変更は、変更時に LCD ディスプレイに接続され
ている外部デバイスについてのみ行うことができます
D.MENU
DTV メニュー表示
- この機能はこの LCD ディスプレイでは動作しません。
TOOLS よく使う機能を素早く選択するのに使用します。
- この機能はこの LCD ディスプレイでは動作しません。
上下左右ボタン ひとつのメニューから別のメニューに横方向、縦方向に移
動したり、選択したメニューの値を調整したりします。
INFO 画面左上に現在の画像情報が表示されます。
PC/DVI/HDMI/DP 外部入力信号 (PC、DVI、HDMI または DP(ディスプレイ
ポート)) を直接選択します。
TTX/MIX
TV チャンネルは、テレテキスト経由で文字情報サービスを
提供します。
- テレテキスト ボタン
TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされているときに
有効になります。
MTS/DUAL
MTSMTS (マルチチャンネル テレビ ステレオ) モードを選択
できます。
音声タイプ MTS/S_Mode デフォルト
FM ステレオ モノラル モノラル 手動変更
ステレオ モノラル ↔ ステ
レオ
SAP モノラル ↔ SAP モノラル
DUALSTEREO/MONO、DUAL l / DUAL ll および MONO/NICAM MONO/
NICAM STEREO は、放送のタイプに応じて TV の視聴中に
リモコンの DUAL ボタンで操作することができます。
TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされているときに
有効になります。
はじめに ENTER/PRE-CH このボタンを使用して、前のチャンネルに直ちに戻りま
す。
TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされているときに
有効になります。
MUTE
音声の出力を一時的に停止(ミュート)します。これは画
面の左下隅に表示されます。消音モードで MUTE または -
VOL + が押されると、音声が再度聞こえるようになりま
す。
CH/P
TV モードで、TV のチャンネルを選択します。
TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされているときに
有効になります。
TV
TV モードを直接選択します。
TV チューナー ボックスがインストールされているときに
有効になります。
MENU オンスクリーン メニューを開いたり、メニューを終了し
たり、調整メニューを閉じたりします。
RETURN
前のメニューに戻ります。
EXIT
メニュー画面を終了します。
MagicInfo
MagicInfo クイック起動ボタン
注意
MagicInfo をサポートしない製品では、このボタンが無効
になっています。
はじめに接続
コンピュータの接続
コンピュータをモニターに接続するにはいくつかの方法があります。以
下のオプションから選択してください。
ビデオカードの D-sub(アナログ)コネクタを使用します。
• D-sub は、LCD ディスプレイ背面の 15-pin の [RGB/COMPONENT IN]
ポートとコンピュータの 15-pin D-sub ポートを接続します。
ビデオカードの DVI(デジタル)コネクタを使用します。
• DVI ケーブルは、LCD ディスプレイ背面の [DVI IN] ポートとコンピ
ュータの DVI ポートを接続します。
ビデオカードの (デジタル) コネクタを使用します。
• LCD ディスプレイの [HDMI IN 1] ポートを HDMI ケーブルを使用し
て PC の HDMI ポートに接続します。
HDMI注意
HDMI ケーブルで PC と接続したときには、入力信号として HDMI2
(460UT-2, 460UT-B モデルの場合のみ) または HDMI1 を選択します。
PC からの画像と音声を正常に出力するには、外部入力名編集 で PC を
選択する前に HDMI1 (460UT モデルのみ) または PC を選択します。
DVI 裝置 が選択されているときに音声を有効にするには、ステップ
( ) を使用して接続されていることを確認します。
お使いのコンピュータのオーディオ ケーブルを、コンピュータ背面のオ
ーディオ ポートに接続します。
LCD ディスプレイの電源コードを LCD ディスプレイ背面の電源ポートに
接続します。電源スイッチをオンにします。
注意
オプション品の購入については、SAMSUNG のお近くの販売店にお問い合わせください。
他のデバイスへの接続
注意
• お使いのコンピュータだけでなく、DVD プレイヤー、VCR またはカムコーダーなどの AV
入力機器を LCD ディスプレイに接続することができます。AV 入力デバイスの接続の詳
細については、「LCD ディスプレイの調整」の内容を参照してください。
• LCD ディスプレイの背面の構成は、LCD ディスプレイのモデルによって若干異なる場合
があります。
外部モニターの接続
接続LCD モニターの [DVI OUT(LOOPOUT)] ポートと別のモニターの入力ポー
トを DVI ケーブルで接続します。
LCD モニターの [AUDIO OUT] ポートと別のモニターの入力ポートを DVI
ケーブルで接続します。
注意
[DVI OUT] に接続されている外部モニターの入力信号として、DVI モードを選択します。
DVI OUT は HDCP をサポートしていません。
AV デバイスの接続
1. オーディオ ケーブルを製品の [AV/COMPONENT AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]]
と VCR や DVD プレイヤーなどの外部デバイスのオーディオ ポートに接
続します。
2. ビデオ ケーブルを製品の [AV IN] と外部デバイスのビデオ出力ポート
に接続します。
3. 次に、DVD またはテープを挿入して、DVD、VCR、またはカムコーダーを
スタートさせます。
4. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「AV」を選択します。
注意
お使いのコンピュータだけでなく、DVD プレイヤー、VCR またはカムコーダーなどの AV
入力機器を LCD ディスプレイに接続することができます。AV 入力デバイスの接続の詳細
については、「LCD ディスプレイの調整」の内容を参照してください。
接続カムコーダーへの接続
1. カムコーダーの AV 出力ジャックの場所を確認します。通常は、カムコ
ーダーの側面または背面にあります。カムコーダーの VIDEO OUTPUT ジ
ャックと LCD ディスプレイの [AV IN] をビデオ ケーブルで接続しま
す。
2. オーディオ ケーブルをカムコーダーの AUDIO OUTPUT ジャックと LCD
ディスプレイの [AV /COMPONENT AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]] に接続します。
3. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「AV」を選択します。
4. 続いて、テープを挿入したカムコーダーをスタートします。
注意
ここに示した音声ビデオ ケーブルは、通常カムコーダーに付属しています。
(付属していない場合には、お近くの電器店でご購入ください)
カムコーダーがステレオの場合には、2 本のケーブルを接続する必要があります。
HDMI ケーブルを使用して接続する
接続1. HDMI ケーブルを製品の [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (460UT-2, 460UT-B
モデルのみ) または [HDMI IN 1] とデジタル デバイスの HDMI 出力ポ
ートに接続します。
2. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「HDMI1 / HDMI2 (460UT-2,
460UT-B モデルのみ)」を選択します。
注意
HDMI モードでは、PCM フォーマットの音声のみサポートしています。
DVI - HDMI ケーブルを使用して接続する
DVI-HDMI ケーブルを製品の [HDMI IN 2 (MAGICINFO)] (460UT-2, 460UTB モデルのみ) または [HDMI IN 1] とデジタル デバイスの DVI 出力ポ
ートに接続します。
RCA - ステレオ (PC 用) ケーブルの赤および白のジャックをデジタル出
力デバイスの同じ色の音声出力端子に接続し、反対側のジャックを LCD
ディスプレイの [RGB/DVI/DP/HDMI AUDIO IN] 端子に接続します。
3. 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「HDMI1 / HDMI2 (460UT-2,
460UT-B モデルのみ)」を選択します。
接続DVD プレイヤーの接続
RGB to Component ケーブルで LCD ディスプレイの [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] ポートと DVD プレイヤーの PR, Y, PB ジャックを接続します。
オーディオ ケーブルのセットを LCD ディスプレイの [AV/COMPONENT
AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]] と DVD プレイヤーの AUDIO OUT ジャックの間
に接続します。
注意
• 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「コンポ一ネント」を選択します。
• 次に、DVD ディスクを挿入して DVD プレイヤーをスタートさせます。
• RGB to Component ケーブルはオプションです。
• コンポーネント ビデオについては、お使いの DVD のマニュアルを参照してください。
DTV セット トップ (ケーブル/衛生) ボックスの接続
接続RGB to Component ケーブルで LCD ディスプレイの [RGB/COMPONENT
IN] ポートとセット トップ ボックスの PR, Y, PB ジャックを接続しま
す。
オーディオ ケーブルのセットを LCD ディスプレイの [AV/COMPONENT
AUDIO IN [L-AUDIO-R]] とセット トップ ボックスの AUDIO OUT ジャッ
クの間に接続します。
注意
• 製品またはリモコンの SOURCE を押して「コンポ一ネント」を選択します。
• コンポーネント ビデオについては、お使いのセット トップ ボックスのマニュアルを
参照してください。
オーディオ システムへの接続
1. オーディオ システムの AUX L、R ジャックと LCD ディスプレイの
[AUDIO OUT] をオーディオ ケーブルで接続します。
LAN ケーブルの接続
接続1. 製品の [LAN] ポートと PC の [LAN] ポートを LAN ケーブルで接続しま
す。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。
USB デバイスの接続
1. マウスやキーボードなどの USB 機器を接続することができます。
注意
460UTn-2, 460UTn-B モデルのみ。
接続トラブルシューティング
セルフテスト機能チェック
注意
お問い合わせの前に、以下の項目についてチェックしてください。問題が解決しない場合
には、お客様相談ダイヤルにお問い合わせください。
セルフテスト機能チェック
1. コンピュータと LCD ディスプレイの両方をオフにします。
2. コンピュータの背面からビデオケーブルを取り外します。
3. LCD ディスプレイをオンにします。
ビデオ信号が検出されない場合でも LCD ディスプレイが正常に動作しているときに
は、下記の図 (「信号がありません」) が黒色の背景で表示されます。自己テスト モ
ードでは、LED 電源インジケータは緑色のままで、画像が画面内を動き回ります。
4. LCD ディスプレイをオフにして、ビデオ ケーブルを接続しなおします。次にコンピュ
ータと LCD ディスプレイの両方をオンにします。
前の手順を行った後でも LCD ディスプレイ画面に何も映らない場合は、ビデオ コントロ
ーラおよびコンピュータ システムをチェックしてください。LCD ディスプレイは正常に動
作しています。
警告メッセージ
画面は 1920 x 1080 の解像度でも表示することができます。 ただし、「画面の解像度を
変更するか、現在のモードのままにすることができます」というメッセージが短時間表示
されます。周波数が 85Hz を越える場合には、LCD ディスプレイでは 85Hz を越える周波
数をサポートしていないため、黒色の画面が表示されます。
注意
LCD ディスプレイがサポートしている解像度または周波数については、仕様 > プリセッ
ト タイミング モードを参照してください。
メンテナンスと清掃
1) LCD ディスプレイ筐体のメンテナンス
電源コードを抜いてから、柔らかい布で拭き取ります。• ベンゼン、シンナーまたはその他の引火性物質を使
用しないでください。
2) フラットパネルディスプレイ画面のメンテナンス
柔らかい布 (綿ネル) で拭き取ります。
• アセトン、ベンゼンまたはシンナーは使用してはな
りません。
(スクリーン表面の傷または劣化の原因となること
があります)
• これらの物質を使用したことによって発生した損害
は、すべてユーザーの責任となります。
症状と推奨される措置
注意
LCD ディスプレイは、コンピュータから受信した視覚信号を再生します。したがって、コン
ピュータまたはビデオカードに問題がある場合には、色彩の異常、ノイズなどのトラブル
が発生することがあります。この場合には、まず問題の原因をチェックしてから、お客様
相談ダイヤルまたは販売店にお問い合わせください。
1. 電源コードおよびビデオ ケーブルがコンピュータに正しく接続されているかどうかを
チェックします。
2. 起動時にコンピュータからビープ音が 3 回聞こえるかチェックします。
(この場合にはお問い合わせください)
3. ビデオカードを自分でインストールするか PC を組み立てた場合には、アダプタ (ビデ
オ) がインストールされているかどうか確認します。
4. ビデオ画面のスキャン速度が 50~ 85Hz の範囲内にあるかどうかチェックします。
(最大解像度を使用しているときは、60 Hz を超えてはなりません)
5. アダプタ (ビデオ) ドライバのインストールに問題がある場合には、コンピュータを
セーフ モードで起動して、[Control Panel (コントロール パネル)] −> [System (シ
ステム)] −> [Device Manger (デバイス マネージャ)] でディスプレイ アダプタを削
除して、コンピュータを再起動してアダプタ (ビデオ) ドライバを再インストールし
ます。
チェックリスト
注意
• 以下の表は、発生する可能性のある問題とその解決方法を示しています。お客様相談ダ
イヤルへ連絡する前に、このセクションに解決法が記載されていないかご確認くださ
い。不明な点がある場合には、お客様相談窓口にお電話いただくか、販売店にお問い合
わせください。
• ネットワークについての詳しい情報は、MagicInfo のトラブルシューティングのセクシ
ョンを参照してください。
トラブルシューティングインストールに関する問題 (PC モード)
注意
LCD ディスプレイのインストールに関連する問題とその解決方法が記載されています。
Q: LCD ディスプレイの画面がちらつく。
A: コンピュータと LCD ディスプレイとの間を接続している信号ケーブルが、しっかり
と接続されているか確認します。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
画面に関する問題
注意
LCD ディスプレイの画面に関連する問題とその解決方法が記載されています。
Q: 画面が空白になり、電源インジケータがオフになる。
A: 電源コードをしっかりと接続してから LCD ディスプレイをオンにします。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
Q: "信号ケーブルを確認してください」というメッセージ。
A: PC またはビデオ ソースに信号ケーブルがしっかり接続されていることを確認しま
す。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
A: PC またはビデオ ソースがオンになっていることを確認します。
Q: "最適なモードが選択されていません」というメッセージ。
A: ビデオ アダプタの最大解像度と周波数を確認します。
A: プリセット タイミング モードのチャートに記載されているデータとこれらの値を比
較します。
Q: 映像が縦に流れる。
A: 信号ケーブルがしっかりと接続されているか確認します。必要に応じて再度接続しま
す。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
Q: 画像がはっきりしない。画像がぼやける。
A: Frequency 粗調整 および 微調整 の調整を実行します。
A: すべてのアクセサリ (ビデオ拡張ケーブルなど) を取り外してから再度オンにしま
す。
A: 解像度と周波数を推奨の範囲に設定します。
Q: 画像が安定せず、揺れる。
A: コンピュータのビデオ カードに対して設定した解像度および周波数が、LCD ディス
プレイがサポートしている範囲から外れていないか確認します。外れていない場合に
トラブルシューティングは、LCD ディスプレイのメニューとプリセット タイミング モードに記載されている
現在の情報を参照して再度設定します。
Q: 映像にゴーストが発生する。
A: コンピュータのビデオ カードに対して設定した解像度および周波数が、LCD ディス
プレイがサポートしている範囲から外れていないか確認します。外れていない場合に
は、LCD ディスプレイのメニューとプリセット タイミング モードに記載されている
現在の情報を参照して再度設定します。
Q: 映像が明るすぎる、または暗すぎる。
A: 明るさ と コントラスト を調整します。
(明るさ、コントラスト を参照してください)
Q: 画面の色が正しくない。
A: OSD カラー調整メニューの [ユーザー調整] を使用して、色を調整します。
Q: 暗い影によってカラー画像が歪む。
A: OSD カラー調整メニューの [ユーザー調整] を使用して、色を調整します。
Q: 白色が正しく表示されません。
A: OSD カラー調整メニューの [ユーザー調整] を使用して、色を調整します。
Q: 電源インジケータが点滅する。
A: LCD ディスプレイが OSD メモリに変更された設定を保存しています。
Q: 画面が点滅し、電源インジケータが 0.5 ~ 1 秒間隔で点滅します。
A: LCD ディスプレイが電源管理システムを使用しています。キーボードのいずれかのキ
ーを押します。
Q: 画面に何も表示されず、点滅します。
A: [MENU] ボタンを押すと画面に「TEST GOOD」メッセージが表示される場合は、PDP デ
ィスプレイとコンピュータのケーブル接続を確認し、コネクタを正しく接続してくだ
さい。
音声に関する問題
注意
音声信号に関する問題とその解決方法を以下に示します。
Q: 音声が聞こえない。
A: LCD ディスプレイの音声入力ポートとサウンドカードの音声出力ポートにオーディオ
ケーブルがしっかりと接続されていることを確認します。
(コンピュータの接続を参照)
A: 音量レベルをチェックします。
Q: 音量が低すぎる。
A: 音量レベルをチェックします。
トラブルシューティングA: 音量を最大に調整しても音が小さすぎる場合には、コンピュータのサウンドカードま
たはソフトウェアプログラムの音量コントロールをチェックします。
Q: 音量が大きすぎるか小さすぎる。
A: 高音 および 低音 を適切なレベルに調整します。
リモコンに関する問題
注意
リモコンに関連する問題とその解決方法が記載されています。
Q: リモコンのボタンが応答しない。
A: バッテリの極性 (+/-) を確認します。
A: バッテリが消耗していないかチェックします。
A: 電源がオンになっているかどうかをチェックします。
A: 電源コードがしっかりと接続されているか確認します。
A: 付近に特殊な蛍光灯またはネオン ランプがないかチェックします。
Q & A
Q: 周波数の変更方法は?
A: 周波数は、ビデオ カードの再設定によって変更することができます。
注意
ビデオ カードでサポートされている周波数は、使用しているドライバのバージョン
によって異なることにご注意ください。(詳細はコンピュータまたはビデオカードの
マニュアルを参照してください)
Q: 解像度の変更方法は?
A: Windows XP:
[Control Panel (コントロール パネル)] → [Appearance and Themes (デスクトッ
プの表示とテーマ)] → [Display (画面)] → [Settings (設定)] で解像度を設定し
ます。
A: Windows ME/2000:
[Control Panel (コントロール パネル)] → [Display (画面)] → [Settings (設
定)] で解像度を設定します。
* 詳細についてはビデオカードのメーカーにお問い合わせください。
Q: 省電力機能の設定方法は?
A: Windows XP:
[Control Panel (コントロール パネル)] → [Appearance and Themes (デスクトッ
プの表示とテーマ)] → [Display (画面)] → [Screen Saver (スクリーン セイバ
ー)] で解像度を設定します。
コンピュータの BIOS 設定で機能を設定します。(Windows/コンピュータのマニュア
ルを参照してください)
トラブルシューティングA: Windows ME/2000:
[Control Panel (コントロール パネル)] → [Display (画面)] → [Screen Saver
(スクリーン セイバー)] で解像度を設定します。
コンピュータの BIOS 設定で機能を設定します。(Windows/コンピュータのマニュア
ルを参照してください)
Q: 筐体/LCD パネルをきれいにしたいのですが?
A: 電源コードを抜き、LCD ディスプレイを柔らかい布で洗剤また真水を使って清掃しま
す。
洗剤が残ったままにしたり、筐体を傷つけないようにしてください。水が LCD ディ
スプレイの中に入らないようにしてください。
Q: ビデオの再生方法は?
A: ビデオは、MPEG1 および WMV コーデックのみをサポートしています。ビデオを再生す
るには、対応するコーデックをインストールします。互換性がないコーデックがある
ことに注意してください。
注意
お客様相談ダイヤルへ連絡する前に、このセクションに解決法が記載されていないかご確
認ください。不明な点がある場合には、お客様相談窓口にお電話いただくか、販売店にお
問い合わせください。
トラブルシューティング
Skype™
pour téléviseurs
Samsung
Présentation de Skype 2
Pour vous connecter avec un
compte existant 3
Pour vous connecter avec la
Reconnaissance faciale 4
Reconnaissance faciale 5
Création d'un compte 6
Affichage 7
Ajout d'un contact 8
Pour appeler un contact 9
Réception 10
Histoire 11
Options Skype 12
Cmde vocale et par mouvement 13
* Les images et les couleurs peuvent être modifiées
Rev 1.0 sans préavis.2
Présentation de Skype
Passez des appels audio et vidéo avec Skype sur votre téléviseur.
O C'est possible grâce à SMART HUB, qui vous permet de disposer, sur votre téléviseur, de fonctions ludiques et utiles en provenance directe du Web.
✎ REMARQUE
x Branchez directement votre webcam SAMSUNG sur le téléviseur, en ne passant pas par un concentrateur USB.
x Si la webcam ne fonctionne pas correctement, éteignez et rallumez le téléviseur, et relancez Skype.
x Skype est désactivé lorsque le téléviseur est éteint.
x La qualité de la voix peut être diminuée dans un environnement bruyant.
x L'utilisation d'un réseau sans fil peut dégrader la qualité de l'appel.
x L'utilisation du logiciel Skype est soumis au Contrat de Licence Utilisateur Final (CLUF) de Skype (skype.com/legal/eula),
aux conditions de service de Skype (skype.com/legal/tos) et à la politique de confidentialité de Skype (skype.com/legal/privacy/general).
x En cas de suppression de Skype, les informations enregistrées (Historique et Options) sont supprimées.
x Pour obtenir de l'aide sur l'utilisation de Skype, visitez skype.com
x Vous devez configurer votre réseau avant d'utiliser Skype sur votre téléviseur. Reportez-vous aux instructions du présent manuel.
x La sonnerie retentit lorsqu'une personne vous appelle pendant que vous regardez la télévision ou utilisez une application Skype.
x Pour utiliser Skype, vous avez besoin de la caméra TV. Achetez la caméra TV de SAMSUNG si votre téléviseur n'en dispose pas d'une intégrée.
x Les caméras TV commercialisées en 2010 et les téléviseurs SAMSUNG commercialisés en 2012 ne sont pas compatibles.
x Seule la version 4.2 ou supérieure de Skype est prise en charge par les ordinateurs tournant sous Windows.
x Seule la version 5.0 ou supérieure de Skype est prise en charge par les ordinateurs tournant sous Macintosh.
x Non pris en charge par les ordinateurs tournant sous Linux.3
Bienvenue dans Skype !
Ouv sess Créer compte
Bienvenue dans Skype !
Nom Skype
Mot de passe
Se connecter au démarrage de Skype
Me connecter quand la TV s'allume
Ouv sess
Pour vous connecter avec un compte existant
2 Renseignez le champ Nom
Skype et Mot de passe.
Utilisez les touches du clavier pour renseigner les champs
Nom Skype et Mot de passe.
3 Appuyez sur Ouv sess.
Entrez votre pseudo Skype.
Nom Skype
Supp. tt
Supprimer
Espace
Numeric Paramètres OK Annuler
17/32
1 Appuyez sur Ouv sess.
Lorsque vous lancez Skype pour la première fois sur votre téléviseur, renseignez les champs Nom Skype et Mot de passe ou sélectionnez l'option Créer
compte. Si la connexion n'est pas établie, vérifiez la connexion réseau.
Mode Reconnaissance faciale
App. sur [Enter]
App. sur [Enter]4
R Retour
Bienvenue dans Skype !
Nom Skype
Mot de passe
Se connecter au démarrage de Skype
Me connecter quand la TV s'allume
Ouv sess Mode Reconnaissance faciale
App. sur [Enter]
App. sur [Enter]
Pour vous connecter avec la Reconnaissance faciale
x Vous pouvez ouvrir une session dans Skype en utilisant la Reconnaissance faciale sur votre téléviseur prenant en charge l'Interaction INTELLIGENTE
(Cmde vocale et par mouvement).
[ Pour que la fonction Reconnaissance faciale soit opérationnelle, une image miniature de votre visage doit être enregistrée dans votre téléviseur à des fins
de connexion.
[ Se connecter à Skype à l'aide de la Reconnaissance faciale peut être moins sécurisé qu'utiliser un identifiant et un mot de passe.
Bienvenue dans Skype !
Vous pouvez vous connecter à l'aide de la reconnaissance faciale.
Placez votre visage devant la TV au niveau de la caméra.
Mode mot de passe Arrêter
R Retour
1 Appuyez sur Mode Reconnaissance
faciale.
2 Le téléviseur lance la
Reconnaissance faciale.
• Tournez votre tête vers le téléviseur en tenant votre visage
au niveau de la caméra. Le téléviseur reconnaîtra votre visage
automatiquement.5
Reconnaissance faciale
Reconnaissance faciale
Vérifiez que votre visage est au centre de l'écran.
Patientez jusqu'à ce que le rectangle au centre de l'écran devienne vert.
Arrêter
R Retour
2 L'écran Reconnaissance faciale
s'affiche.
• Veillez à ce que votre visage soit au centre du cercle.
• Attendez jusqu'à ce que le rectangle au centre de l'écran
devienne vert.
Skype Credit : 0
Options Skype
Paramètres
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Contacts
Gestionnaire compte
Modif. MDP
Supprimer le visage reconnu
Reconnaissance faciale
R Retour
1 Sélectionnez Paramètres
→ Gestionnaire compte →
Reconnaissance faciale.6
Bienvenue dans Skype !
Ouv sess Créer compte
Création d'un compte
1 Appuyez sur Créer compte.
Créer un compte Skype
Créer un nom Skype
Mot de passe
Utilisez ce pseudo pour vous connecter à Skype.
Vous pourrez communiquer votre pseudo Skype à vos
amis de façon à ce qu'ils puissent vous ajouter à leurs
contacts Skype.
Vous en aurez besoin pour vous connecter à Skype ou pour
gérer votre compte en ligne.
Retour
2 Renseignez le champ
Créer un nom Skype et
Mot de passe.
3 Entrez votre Nom complet et
E-mail.
Créer un compte Skype
Nom complet
E-mail
Le nom que vous entrez ici est celui qui apparaîtra dans la
liste de contacts de vos contacts Skype.
Nous en aurons besoin si vous rencontrez des problèmes
pour accéder à votre compte ou si vous oubliez votre
mot de passe.
Retour Suivant Créer un compte Skype
Contrat de licence
AFFICHER LES CONDITIONS D'UTILISATION
AFF. ACCORD DE CONFIDENTIALITE
Aucun appel d'urgence.
Skype ne remplace pas votre téléphone ordinaire et ne peut pas être
utilisé pour les appels d'urgence.
Oui. J'ai lu et j'accepte cond. d'utili. ci-après.
Retour Accepter
R Retour
4 Sélectionnez Accepter.
Sélectionnez l'une des conditions pour consulter des
informations supplémentaires.7
Appel visio Appel vocal
1/1 Pages
Chat
Contacts
a Déconn. { Ajouter un contact R Retour
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Echo / Sound Test Service
Affichage
Cette zone affiche votre
nom Skype, votre état
en ligne, votre message
d'humeur ainsi que votre
image de profil.
Votre liste de contacts. Vous
pouvez sélectionner le mode
Appel visio, Appel vocal ou Chat.
Crédit Skype
Ce menu permet de sélectionner
les options Contacts, Chat,
Histoire, Appel. tél. et
Paramètres. Dans l'option de
menu, appuyez sur ENTERE
et choisissez l'option appropriée.
a Déconn. : Sélectionnez cette option pour vous déconnecter.
{ Ajouter un contact : Ajouter un contact Skype ou un numéro de
téléphone.
R Retour / Fin appel : Permet de revenir au menu précédent. / Ferme
l'application Skype une fois l'appel terminé.8
1/1 Pages
Contacts
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Echo / Sound Test Service
Chat
Sélectionner type de contact
Ajouter un contact
Ajouter contact Skype
Ajouter numéro de téléphone
R Retour
Appel visio Appel vocal
1/1 Pages
Contacts Chat
a Déconn. { Ajouter un contact R Retour
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Echo / Sound Test Service
Ajout d'un contact
1 { Appuyez sur Ajouter un contact.
2 Sélectionnez un contact.
• Ajouter contact Skype : Entrez le nom Skype de la personne,
son nom complet ou son adresse e-mail.
• Ajouter numéro de téléphone : Entrez le nom et le numéro
de téléphone.9
Appel visio Appel vocal
1/1 Pages
Contacts Chat
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Echo / Sound Test Service
Pour appeler un contact
1 Appuyez sur Appel visio ou Appel vocal.
Appel...
Annuler
samsung_skype1
1/1 Pages
Chat
Contacts
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Echo / Sound Test Service
• L'illustration du manuel peut différer
en partie de la forme réelle.
Appel visio Appel vocal
Durée d'appel 00:03:10
Fin appel Lancer vidéo Vol. micro En attente
T Outils } Liste contacts R Retour
Durée d'appel 00:00:42
Fin appel Arrêter vidéo Vol. micro En attente
T Outils b Plein écran } Liste contacts R Retour10
Durée d'appel 00:03:10
Fin appel Start Video Vol. micro En attente
T Outils } Liste contacts R Retour
Durée d'appel 00:00:42
Fin appel Arrêter vidéo Vol. micro En attente
T Outils b Plein écran } Liste contacts R Retour
• Si vous recevez un appel de conférence, l'option Vidéo est désactivée.
Réception
Pendant un appel vidéo ou visio.
Fin appel: Raccrocher.
Arrêter vidéo: Eteint la caméra.
Vol. micro: Permet de régler le volume du micro.
En attente / Reprendre: Suspend/reprend d'appel.
✎ Un contact Skype verra s'afficher un message lorsque
l'appel est mis en attente.
Lancer vidéo: Passe à un appel vidéo.
x B (Plein écran): Permet de passer en mode
plein écran.
x D (Liste contacts): Affiche la liste des contacts.
samsung_skype1
Appel...
Vidéo Voix Refuser
Appel visio Appel vocal
Refuse un appel.11
Afficher profil
Envoi msg vocal
Aj. ds contacts
Bloquer
Suppr. entrée
Déconn.
R Retour
Appel visio
Pages
Chat
Contacts
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Histoire
Chaque appel est accompagné
d'une icône.
Icônes Signification
Appel entrant
Appel sortant
Appel manqué
Message vocal
entrant
Message vocal
manqué
Conférence audio
entrante
Conférence audio
manquée
• Afficher profil : Affichez le profil du contact sélectionné.
• Envoi msg vocal : Envoyez un message vocal au contact sélectionné.
• Aj. ds contacts: Ajoutez cette personne comme contact. Cette option est
disponible lorsque cette personne n'est pas enregistrée dans votre liste de
contacts.
• Bloquer : Empêchez cette personne de vous contacter.
• Suppr. entrée : Supprimez cet élément de votre historique.
• Déconn. : Permet de se déconnecter.
✎ L'historique peut être limité par la capacité de mémoire.
✎ C'est l'heure réglée sur le téléviseur qui est enregistrée dans l'historique.
Affiche l'historique des appels passés, du plus récent (en haut) au plus ancien (en bas).12
Options Skype
a Sign Out R Return
Etat
Modifier profil
Changer photo
Gestionnaire compte
Paramètres
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Contacts
Skype Credit : 0
Paramètres généraux
Options Skype
R Retour
Paramètres vidéo
Param. confid.
Utilisateurs bloqués
Transfert d'appel
Messagerie vocale
A propos de Skype
Démar. auto qd allumage de TV :
Afficher une notification en cas de
connexion :
Arrêt
Arrêt
Options Skype
1 Sélectionnez Paramètres →
Options Skype.
2 Modifiez la ou les options de votre
choix.
• Paramètres généraux : Indiquez si vous voulez que Skype se lance
automatiquement lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur.
• Paramètres vidéo : Réglez les paramètres de confidentialité de la vidéo.
Choisissez de qui vous acceptez des appels vidéo en sélectionnant Toute
personne, Uniquement personnes de la liste Contacts ou Personne.
• Param. confid.: Choisissez de qui vous acceptez des appels. Sélectionnez
Autoriser tout le monde à me contacter ou Pers. ds liste contacts peuvent
me contac..
• Utilisateurs bloqués: Si vous ne voulez pas que quelqu'un vous contacte,
bloquez-le en entrant son nom Skype ou son numéro de téléphone. Toutes
les personnes bloquées apparaissent dans cette fenêtre. Vous pouvez aussi
bloquer quelqu'un à partir de la liste des contacts et de l'historique en
sélectionnant le contact et en appuyant sur TOOLST.
• Transfert d'appel: Pour renvoyer des appels de votre compte Skype lorsque
vous n'êtes pas sur Skype, ajoutez les numéros de téléphone vers lesquels les
appels doivent être renvoyés. Sélectionnez le pays et entrez le numéro avec
l'indicatif régional. Entrez le délai après lequel l'appel doit être renvoyé. Vous
devez acheter du crédit Skype sur skype.com pour utiliser cette fonction.
• Messagerie vocale: Cette fonction permet aux personnes qui vous appellent
de laisser des messages vocaux si vous êtes absent. Vous pouvez écouter
les messages à partir de n'importe quelle connexion Skype. Pour plus
d'informations ou pour recevoir le message vocal, sur skype.com, cliquez sur
Account.
• A propos de Skype: Cette option permet d'afficher les informations de
copyright de Skype.13
Smart TV Hi TV
Hello world!
Echo / Sound Test Service
Dites le nom de la personne que vous voulez appeler.
Appel visio Appel vocal
1/1 Pages
Chat
Contacts
a Sign Out { Add a Contact R
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Vidéo
Voix
Annuler
Smart TV Hi TV
Hello world!
Echo / Sound Test Service
Appel visio Appel vocal
1/1 Pages
Chat
Contacts
a Déconn. { Ajouter un contact R Return
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Annuler
Sonnerie…
Annuler
young470
Hello world!
Echo / Sound Test Service
1/1 Pages
Chat
Contacts
Chat
Histoire
Appel. tél.
Paramètres
Skype Credit : 0
Cmde vocale et par mouvement
1 Dites « Hi TV(Mots déclencheurs) » et prononcez le
nom de la personne que vous voulez appeler.
3 Dites Appel visio ou Appel
vocal pour passer l'appel.
2 Dites l'un des deux.
x Vous pouvez appeler ou évoluer dans Skype grâce à Cmde vocale et par mouvement sur le téléviseur, prenant en charge l'Interaction INTELLIGENTE
(Cmde vocale et par mouvement).
x Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la Commande vocale pendant un appel.
x Commande vocale peut être affectée par les noms difficiles à prononcer, comme ceux contenant des caractères spéciaux ou des lettres de l'alphabet et
des nombres. Vous pouvez le modifier en utilisant Renommer.
x Pour plus d'informations sur Smart Interaction, reportez-vous à la section "Smart Interaction" dans le manuel électronique ou dans le manuel
d'utilisation.
E-MANUAL
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model______________ Serial No.______________Channel Menu
• Connecting the TV 1
• Using the INFO button
(Now & Next guide) 24
• Using the Channel Menu 26
• Memorizing Channels 66
• Other Features 81
Basic Feature
• Changing the Preset Picture Mode 97
• Adjusting Picture Settings 102
• Changing the Picture Size 107
• Changing the Picture Options 121
• Using the TV with Your PC 139
• Changing the Preset Sound Mode 143
• Adjusting Sound Settings 145
Preference Features
• Connecting to the Network 161
• Setting up a Wired Network 178
• Setting up the Wireless Network 191
• Managing the Network Connected
Devices 218
• Setting the Time 231
• Blocking Programmes 248
• Economical Solutions 253
• Picture In Picture (PIP) 257
• Other Features 262
• Support Menu 291
ContentsAdvanced Features
• Using the 3D function 317
• Smart Hub 332
• Customizing the Home Screen 358
• Using Samsung Apps 388
• Search 399
• Your Video 407
• Family Story 424
• Fitness 478
• Kids 489
• Web Browser 505
• Skype 535
• AllShare Play 539
• Using the AllShare Play 562
• My list (In AllShare Play) 566
• Videos (In AllShare Play) 585
• Photos (In AllShare Play) 604
• Music (In AllShare Play) 621
• Recorded TV (In AllShare Play) 629
• Timeshift 643
• Using the DLNA Function 653
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 664Other Information
• Troubleshooting 682
• Picture Quality (Troubleshooting) 683
• Sound Quality (Troubleshooting) 691
• No Picture, No Video (Troubleshooting) 696
• RF (Cable / Aerial) Connection
(Troubleshooting) 700
• PC Connection (Troubleshooting) 703
• Network Connection (Troubleshooting) 704
• Recording / Timeshift (Troubleshooting) 705
• Others (Troubleshooting) 714
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Troubleshooting) 729
• AllShare Play (Troubleshooting) 737
• Smart Hub (Troubleshooting) 738
• Web Browser (Troubleshooting) 740
• Supported Subtitle and
AllShare Play file formats 748
• Data Service 757
• HbbTV 765
• Connecting to a TV Viewing Card slot 769
• Teletext Feature 779
• Anti-theft Kensington Lock 786
• Licence 791 Connecting the TV
Connecting to an Aerial or Satellite
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
or
TV rear panel
Channel Menuor
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel
Connecting to an AV Device
Using a HDMI (up to 1080p) The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV side panel
Using an HDMI cable (up to 1080p)
N HDMI IN 1(DVI), HDMI IN 2(ARC),
HDMI IN 3
● For better picture and audio quality, connect to a digital device using an
HDMI cable.
● An HDMI cable supports digital video
and audio signals, and does not require
an audio cable.
– To connect the TV to a digital device
that does not support HDMI output,
use an HDMI/DVI and audio cables.
● The picture may not display normally
(if at all) or the audio may not work if
an external device that uses an older version of HDMI mode is connected to
the TV. If such a problem occurs, ask
the manufacturer of the external device
about the HDMI version and, if out of
date, request an upgrade.
● for LED 6500 Series and above Be sure to
use an HDMI cable with a thickness of
14 mm or less.
● Be sure to purchase a certified HDMI
cable. Otherwise, the picture may not
display or a connection error may occur.
● A basic high-speed HDMI cable or one
with Ethernet is recommended. This
product does not support the Ethernet
function via HDMI.
● This product supports the 3D and ARC
(Audio Return Channel) functions via an
HDMI cable. Note that the ARC function
is supported by the HDMI IN 2(ARC)
port only.
● The ARC function allows digital audio to output via the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port.
It can be enabled only when the TV is
connected with an audio receiver that
supports the ARC function.
Using a Scart Cable
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV side panel
Using a Component (up to 1080i) The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel
Using a Component (up to 1080i) or an
Audio/Video (480i only) and a Scart Cable
N In Ext. mode, DTV Out supports
MPEG SD Video and Audio only.N When connecting to AV IN or
COMPONENT/AV IN connect the AV
connector (yellow) to the TV jack
(Green). (Depending on the model)
N To obtain the better picture quality,
the Component connection or Scart
connection are recommended over
the A/V connection.
Connecting to an Audio device
Using an Optical (Digital) Connection The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV side panel
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)● When you connect a Digital Audio
System to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL) jack, decrease the volume
of both the TV and the system.
● Use the System speakers for audio.
● 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when
the TV is connected to an external
device supporting 5.1 CH.
● When the receiver (home theatre) is set
to on, you can hear sound output from
the TV’s optical jack. When the TV is receiving a DTV signal, the TV will
send 5.1 CH sound to the home theatre
receiver. When the source is a digital
component such as a DVD / Bluray
player / cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box)
satellite receiver and is connected to the
TV via HDMI, only 2 CH audio will be
heard from the home theatre receiver. If
you want to hear 5.1 CH audio, connect
the digital audio out jack from your
DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver directly to an amplifier
or home theatre.
Using a Headphone Connection
for LED TV
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel
Headphones H
You can connect your headphones to
the headphones output on your set.
While the headphones are connected,
the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled.
● Sound function may be restricted
when connecting headphones to the
TV.
● Headphone volume and TV volume
are adjusted separately.
● The headphones jack supports only
the 3 conductor tip-ring-sleeve (TRS)
type.
Connecting to a PC Using an HDMI/DVI Cable
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV rear panel The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV side panel
Using an HDMI cable or an HDMI to DVI
cable
Connecting through the HDMI cable may not be supported depending on
the PC.
Optimal resolution is 1920 X 1080 @ 60
Hz.
N For HDMI/DVI cable connection, you
must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
N The interlace mode is not supported.
N The set might operate abnormally
if a non-standard video format is
selected.
N Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG (Sync On Green) is
not supported.
N PC (D-Sub) input is not supported.Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide)
The display identifies the current
channel and the status of certain audiovideo settings.
The Now & Next guide shows daily
TV programme information for each
channel according to the broadcasting
time.
● Scroll l, r to view information for a
desired programme while watching the
current channel.● Scroll u, d to view information for
other channels. If you want to move to
the currently selected channel, select
E using your remote.Using the Channel Menu
Press the ™ button to select the menu
you want to use. Each screen will be
displayed.
Guide
™ → Guide
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
information is provided by broadcasters.
Using programme schedules provided
by broadcasters, you can specify programmes you want to watch
in advance so that the channel
automatically changes to the selected
programme channel at the specified
time. Programme entries may appear
blank or out of date depending on a
channel status.
Using Channel View
● a (Sche. Mgr): Displays the Schedule
Manager.● b (-24 Hours): Viewing the list of
programmes to be broadcasted before
24 hours.
● { (+24 Hours): Viewing the list of
programmes to be broadcasted after 24
hours.
● } (Ch. Mode): Select the type of
channels you want to display on the
Channel View window.
● ` Information: Displays details of the
selected programme.● k Page: Move to next or previous page.
● E Watch / Schedule: When selecting
the current programme, you can watch
the selected programme. / When
selecting the future programme, you
can reserve to watch the selected
programme.
Channel
™ → Channel
Using this function, you can delete channels, set favourite channels and
edit the channel name for analogue
broadcasts.
N The available items may differ
depending on the selected aerial
source.
● All
Shows all channels.
● TV
Shows TV channels.
● RadioShows radio channels.
● Data/Other
Shows data channels and other
channels.
● Analogue
Shows analogue channels.
● Favourites 1 - Favourites 5
Shows all favourite channels, in up to
five groups. Each group has separate
channels.
N The TV displays favourites only if you have added favourites using Edit
Favourites in the Tools menu.
N If the highlight located in the
Favourites 1 – Favourites 5 category,
you can change the name of
category by selecting b using your
remote.
● Recently Viewed
Shows the most recently viewed
channels.
● Most ViewedShows the most frequently viewed
channels.
Using the coloured and function buttons
with Channel
● a Air / Cable / Satellite for PE570, PE6500,
UE5700, UE6300 Series and above
Select the desired aerial source.
The option may differ depending on
country.
N Appears only if your TV stored both Air and Cable.
● b Delete
Delete the selected channel(s).
● ` Information
Displays details of the selected channel.
● k Page
Scrolls the channel list to the next or
previous page.
● E Select / Deselect
Selects or deselects a channel.
● T ToolsDisplays the option menu.
● R Return
Return to the previous menu.
Using the Tools menu with the Channel
● Edit Favourites
Lets you assign channels you watch
frequently to a favourite group and
remove channels from a favourite
group. You access Edit Favourites on
the Tools menu.● Lock / Unlock
Lock a channel so that the channel
cannot be selected and viewed.
N This function is available only when
the Channel Lock is set to On.
● Rename channel
(Appears only if you have selected an
analogue channel.)
Lets you assign a name of up to five
characters to an analogue channel. For
example, Food, Golf, etc. This makes it easier to find and select the channel.
● Edit Channel Number
Edit the channel number by select the
numbers.
N This function may not be supported
depending on the region.
● Sorting (digital channels only)
Change the list ordered by name or
number.
● Channel Info
Displays information of channel signal. The item may differ depending on
channel.
● Search (when the aerial was set to
Satellite)
Channel scan is started.
● Delete
Delete a channel to display the
channels you want.
● Select All / Deselect All
Select all channels in the list. / Deselect
all channels you selected.To delete a channel from a Category
list on the Channel screen, follow these
steps:
1. If you want to delete a channel,
select a category of the channel.
2. Select a channel in the category list.
A c mark appears to the left of the
channel.
N You can select more than one
channel.
N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears.
3. Open the Tools menu using your
remote.
4. Select Delete. The message Delete
the selected channels? appears.
Select OK.
N You can delete the selected channel
immediately by selecting b using
your remote.
N When you delete a channel in the
Recently Viewed or Most Viewedcategory, the channel will disappear
from the category list. But, the
channel is not deleted.
To set channels as favourites, follow
these steps:
1. Select the All category.
2. Select a channel. A c mark appears
to the left of the channel.
N You can select more than one
channel.N If you select the selected channel
again, a c mark disappears.
3. Open the Tools menu using your
remote.
4. Select the Edit Favourites. The Edit
Favourites screen appears.
5. Select a using your remote. The
selected channel will be moved to
the favourite group.
N Also, you can select a channel in
the Edit Favourites screen.N You can add a favourite channel
to any one of the groups. To
change favourites group, select }
using your remote. Each time you
select }, a favourites group will
be changed.
6. When done, select OK. The channel is
made as a favourite and is assigned
to the favourite group you selected.
N The TV displays the “ ” symbol
next to the channel, indicating it is a favourite.
Using the coloured and function
buttons with Edit Favourites
● On the Edit Favourites screen, you
can use these functions buttons:
– a Add
Add selected channels to the
favourites group.
– } Change Fav.
Change the favourites group. Each time you select } using
your remote, the favourites group
changes.
– Ÿ Go To
You can enter a channel number
immediately using your remote.
– R Return
Return to the previous menu.
● When you highlight a favourite
channel in a favourites group on the
Edit Favourites screen, you can use these options:
– a Delete
Delete the selected channel.
– b Change order
Change the favourite group list
order.
– { Copy
Copy a selected channel to other
favourites groups.
– } Change Fav.
Change the favourites group. Each time you select } using
your remote, the favourites group
changes.
– Ÿ Go To
You can enter a channel number
immediately using your remote.
– R Return
Return to the previous menu.
To remove a channel from a favourites
group, follow these steps:1. Select the favourite’s group category.
2. Select a channel in the favourites
group. A c mark appears to the left
of the channel.
N You can select more than one
channel.
N If you select the selected channel
again, a c mark disappears.
3. Open the Tools menu using your
remote.
4. Select the Delete. The message Do you want to delete the selected
item(s)? appears.
5. Select OK. The message Deleted the
selected item(s). appears.
N You can delete the selected
channel from the list of favourites
group immediately by selecting b
using your remote.
Display Icons Used in the Channel screens
: An analogue channel.c: A channel selected.
: A favourite channel.
: A locked channel.
Schedule Manager
™ → Schedule Manager
Using this function, you can set
the TV to display a desired channel
automatically on a day and at a time of
your choice.
N You must set the current time first
using the Time → Clock function in the System menu to use this
function.
To use Schedule Viewing, follow these
steps:
1. On the Schedule Manager screen,
select a using your remote.
2. A pop up screen will appear. Select
Schedule Viewing.
3. Set Aerial, Channel, Repeat, and
Start Time.
● AerialSelect the desired aerial source.
● Channel
Select Channel to view the channel
numbers. Select the desired channel.
N You can only select memorised
channels.
N You can also enter the channel
number directly using the number
buttons on the remote.
● Repeat
Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday. If you select
Manual, you can set the day you
want.
N The c mark indicates a day you’
ve selected.
Date: You can set a desired date.
N The Date is available only when
you select Once in Repeat.
● Start Time
You can set the start time you want.
3. When done, select the OK, The selected channel is scheduled for
viewing.
N On the Schedule Manager screen,
you can view a list of Schedule
Viewing.
N If you select Information function
using your remote after highlight
an item, the Information screen
appears. On the Information
screen, you can change or cancel
the Schedule Viewing.Cancel schedule: Cancel the Schedule
Viewing.
Edit Schedule: Change the Schedule
Viewing.
Return: Return to the previous
screen.
To delete an item in a list of scheduled,
follow these steps:
1. On the Schedule Manager screen,
highlight an item you want to delete.2. Open the Tools menu using your
remote.
3. Select the Cancel schedule. The
Cancel selected list(s)? message
appears.
4. Select Yes. The selected schedule is
cancelled.
To use the Schedule Recording, follow
these steps:
for LED 4500, 5400 Series : This function is not supported.
(Digital channels only)
Allows you to make a reservation to
record a programme scheduled for
broadcast.
Set the current time first to use this
function.
1. Select Schedule Manager. The
Schedule Manager screen will be
displayed.
2. Select a using your remote. A pop up screen will appear.
3. Select the Schedule Recording.
N We recommend using a USB
HDD with at least 5,400 rpm, but
a USB HDD of RAID type is not
supported.
N More than 3TB USB HDD is not
supported.
N A USB storage device cannot
record until it completes the
Device Performance Test.N USB memory stick is not
compatible.
4. Set the Aerial, Channel, Repeat, Date,
Start / End Time.
N If you want to play a recorded
programme, refer to Recorded TV
in the e-Manual.
Channel List
Using this function, you can view the
channel list, programme information,
favourite channel, and manage of schedule viewing.
1. Press the CH LIST button. The
Channel List screen is displayed
immediately.
2. Change a channel or channel list
mode.
Using the coloured and function buttons
with the Channel List
N If you press the INFO button, the
TV displays details of the selected programme.
● a Aerial
Select the desired aerial source.
The option may differ depending on
country.
● { Programme View / Channel View
Displays the programme when digital
channel is selected. Returns to the
channel view.
● lr Ch. Mode / Channel
Move to the type of channels you want to display on the Channel List screen. /
On Programme View screen, change a
channel.
● E Watch / Information
Watches the channel you select.
/ Displays details of the selected
programme.
● k Page
Move to next or previous page.
Using the Schedule Viewing in Channel ListYou can use Schedule Viewing in
Channel List to schedule a digital
channel programme for viewing.
1. Press the CH LIST button. The
Channel List screen appears.
2. Select a desired digital channel.
3. Select { using your remote. The TV
displays the programme list of the
selected channel.
4. Select a desired programme in the
programme view, and then select Information using your remote.
5. On the Information screen, select
Schedule Viewing. The selected
programme is scheduled.
N If you want to cancel the Schedule
Viewing, follow Steps 1 through 4,
and then select Cancel schedule.
Channel Status Display Icons
: An analogue channel.
: A reserved programme.: A reserved recording programme.
: A locked channel.Memorizing Channels
Aerial
Menu → Channel → Aerial
Before your television can begin
memorizing the available channels, you
must specify the type of signal source
that is connected to the TV.
N The option may differ depending on
country.
Country
Menu → Channel → CountrySelect your country so that the TV can
correctly auto-tune the broadcasting
channels.
N The PIN input screen appears. Enter
your 4 digit PIN number.
● Digital Channel: Change the country
for digital channels.
● Analogue Channel: Change the
country for analogue channels.
Auto TuningMenu → Channel → Auto Tuning
Scans for a channel automatically and
stores in the TV.
N Automatically allocated programme
numbers may not correspond
to actual or desired programme
numbers. If a channel is locked using
the Channel Lock function, the PIN
input window appears.
● Auto Tuning: Scans for channels
automatically and stores them in the TV’s memory.
● Cable Search Option (when the aerial
was set to Cable)
(Depending on the country)
Sets additional search options such
as the frequency and symbol rate for
a cable network search.
When Aerial Source is set to Air or Cable
● Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue:
Select the channel source to memorise. When selecting Cable → Digital &
Analogue or Digital: Provide a value to
scan for cable channels.
● Automatic Ordering (Depending on
the country): Channels found will be
automatically ordered following a
criterion established by all the main
national and local televisions.
N Available only when the aerial source
is set to Air.
● Others Ordering (Depending on the country): If you select this menu you
will find others channels ordering
directly organized from private national
televisions.
N Available only when the aerial source
is set to Air.
● Operator Selection (Depending on the
country): Selects a provider of cable
services.
● Search Mode: If you selected the Cable,
the Search Mode screen appears. Scans for all channels with active
broadcast stations and stores them in
the TV.
N If you select Quick, you can set up
the Network, Network ID, Frequency,
Modulation, and Symbol Rate
manually by the remote control.
Network: Selects the Network ID setting
mode among Auto or Manual.
Network ID: When Network is Manual,
you can set up Network ID.Frequency: Displays the frequency for
the channel. (Differs in each country)
Modulation: Displays available
modulation values.
Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol
rates.
When Aerial Source is set to Satellite
(Depending on the country)
● Channel Type: Select the Channel Type
to memorise.● Satellite: Selects the satellite to scan.
The option may differ depending on
country.
● Scan Mode: Select a scan mode for the
selected satellite.
● Re-initialise: Selects the scanning
mode of the selected satellite.
● Search Mode: Sets search mode using
up/down buttons.
Manual TuningMenu → Channel → Manual Tuning
Scans for a channel manually and
stores in the TV.
N If a channel is locked using the
Channel Lock function, the PIN input
window appears.
N This function may not be supported
depending on the region.
When Aerial Source is set to Air or Cable
● Digital Channel Tuning: Scans for a digital channel.
1. Select the New.
N When selecting Aerial → Air:
Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth
N When selecting Aerial → Cable:
Frequency, Modulation, Symbol
Rate
2. Select the Search. When scanning
has finished, a channel is updated in
the channel list.
● Analogue Channel Tuning: Scans for a analogue channel.
1. Select the New.
2. Set the Programme, Colour System,
Sound System, Channel and Search.
3. Select the Store. When scanning has
finished, a channel is updated in the
channel list.
Channel mode
● P (programme mode): When tuning is
complete, the broadcasting stations
in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P0 to P99.
You can select a channel by entering
the position number in this mode.
● C (aerial channel mode) / S (cable
channel mode): These two modes
allow you to select a channel by
entering the assigned number for
each aerial broadcasting station or
cable channel.
When Aerial Source is set to Satellite● Transponder: Selects the transponder.
● Scan Mode: Selects either free or all
channels to store.
● Network Search: Enable / Disable
network search.
● Signal Quality: Display the current
status of broadcasting signal.
N Information on a satellite and its
transponder is subject to change
depending on the broadcasting
conditions.N When setting is completed, move to
Search. Channel scan is started.Other Features
Guide Type
Menu → Channel → Guide Type
(Depending on the country)
You can select a different type of
Guide.
● Samsung: Uses the guide programme
by provided Samsung.
● Rovi On Screen: Uses the guide
programme provided by Rovi International Solutions.
N ROVI EPG initial setting time can
take a while depending on the region
or broadcast environment.
Genre Selection for U.K
Menu → Channel → Genre Selection
Genre Selection is available when Aerial
is set to Freesat.
● Genre Selection: Turn the channelgenre selection feature on or off when using the guide.
Transfer Channel List
Menu → Channel → Transfer Channel List
Imports or exports the channel map.
You should connect USB storage to use
this function.
N The PIN input screen appears. Enter
the PIN using your remote.
● Import from USB: Import channel list
from USB.● Export to USB: Export channel list to
USB. This function is available when
USB is connected.
Fine Tune
Menu → Channel → Fine Tune
(Analogue channels only)
If the reception is clear, you do not
have to fine tune the channel, as this is
done automatically during the search
and store operation. If the signal is
weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. Scroll to the left or right until
the image is clear.
N Settings are applied to the channel
you’re currently watching.
N Fine tuned channels that have been
saved are marked with an asterisk “*”
on the right-hand side of the channel
number in the channel banner.
N To reset the fine-tuning, select the
Reset.Crosstalk noise reduction
Menu → Channel → Crosstalk noise
reduction
(Depending on the model)
(Analogue channels only)
This function reduces diagonal noise in
the picture caused by signal crosstalk
(interference). If your TV picture
displays diagonal noise or distortion
when you watch, turn on this function.Satellite System
Menu → Channel → Satellite System
Satellite System is available when
Aerial is set to Satellite. Before running
Auto Store, set Satellite System. Then
channel scan is run normally.
N The PIN input screen appears. Enter
your 4 digit PIN number.
● Satellite Selection: You can choose the
satellites for this TV.
● LNB Power: Enables or disables the power supply for the LNB.
● LNB Settings: Configures the outdoor
equipment.
Satellite: Selects the satellite for
receiving digital broadcasts.
Transponder: Selects a transponder
from the list or adds a new transponder.
DiSEqC Mode: Selects DiSEqC mode
for the selected LNB.
Lower LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB
oscillators to a lower frequency.Upper LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB
oscillators to a higher frequency.
Tone 22 kHz: Selects the Tone 22 kHz
depending on the LNB type. For a
universal LNB it should be Auto.
Signal Quality: Display the current
status of broadcasting signal.
● SatCR/Unicable Settings: Configure
single cable installation.
N This function may not support
depending on the region.SatCR/Unicable: Enables or disable
single cable installation support.
Slot Number: Select the SatCR user slot
number for this receiver.
Slot Frequency: Enter the appropriate
frequency to receive the signal from
SatCR.
Detect Slot Frequency: Auto-detect the
signal frequency for the selected slot
number.
Verify Slot Frequency: Verify that the frequency entered corresponds to the
selected slot.
● Positioner Settings: Configures the
aerial positioner.
Positioner: Enables or disables the
positioned control.
Positioner Type: Sets the positioned
type between DiSEqC 1.2 and USALS
(Universal Satellite Automatic Location
System).
– My Longitude: Sets the longitude for my location.
– My Latitude: Sets the latitude for my
location.
– Satellite Longitude Settings: Sets the
longitude of user defined satellites.
User Mode: Sets the position of satellite
aerial according to each satellite.
If you store the current position of
satellite aerial according to a certain
satellite, when the signal of that
satellite is needed, the satellite aerial can be moved to pre-populated
position.
– Satellite: Selects the satellite to set
the position for.
– Transponder: Selects a transponder
from the list for signal reception.
– Moving Mode: Selects the movement
mode between discrete and
continuous movement.
– Step Size: Adjusts the step size
degrees for the aerial rotation. Step Size is available when Moving Mode
is set to Step.
– Go To Stored Position: Rotates the
aerial to the stored satellite position.
– Aerial Position: Adjusts and stores
the aerial position for the selected
satellite.
– Store Current Position: Stores current
position as the selected positioner
limit.
– Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal.
Installer Mode: Sets limits to the scope
of movement of satellite aerial or reset
the position. Generally, installation
guide uses this function.
– Limit Position: Selects the direction
of the positioner Limit.
– Aerial Position: Adjusts and stores
the aerial position for the selected
satellite.
– Store Current Position: Stores the current position as the selected
positioner Limit.
– Go To Zero: Moves the aerial to the
reference position.
– Reset Positioner Limit: Allows the
aerial to rotate over the full arc.
● Reset All Settings: All satellite settings
will be reset to the initial values.Changing the Preset Picture Mode
Picture Mode
Menu → Picture → Picture Mode
Picture modes apply preset adjustments
to the picture.
N When your TV is connected to a PC
via an HDMI to DVI cable, you can
only select Entertain and Standard.
● Dynamic
Suitable for a bright room.
Basic Feature● Standard
Suitable for a normal environment.
● Natural for LED TV / Relax for PDP 6500
Series
Suitable for reducing eye strain.
● Movie
Suitable for watching movies in a dark
room.
● Entertain
Suitable for watching movies and
games.N Only available when the TV is
connected to a PC via an HDMI to
DVI and an HDMI to HDMI cables.
Samsung MagicAngle for LED 5400 Series
Menu → Picture → Samsung MagicAngle
Adjust screen viewing Angle to
optimize screen quality according to
your viewing position.
● Samsung MagicAngle: When viewing
the screen at an angle from below or above by setting the appropriate mode
for each position you can obtain a
similar picture quality as viewing the
screen directly from the front.
– Off: Select when viewing from the
front position.
– Lean Back Mode: Select when
viewing from a slightly lower
position.
– Standing Mode: Select when viewing
from the upper position.● Mode: Adjust screen viewing angle.
N When Samsung MagicAngle is set to
Lean Back Mode or Standing Mode,
Gamma is not available.Adjusting Picture Settings
Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV
Menu → Picture → Backlight / Cell Light
Adjusts the pixel brightness. 20 is the
brightest setting.
Contrast
Menu → Picture → Contrast
Adjusts contrast level. Values closer to
100 mean bigger light/dark contrast.Brightness
Menu → Picture → Brightness
Adjusts brightness level. Values closer
to 100 mean brighter screen.
Sharpness
Menu → Picture → Sharpness
Adjusts sharpness of picture. Values
closer to 100 mean a sharp image.
Colour
Menu → Picture → ColourAdjusts colour saturation level. Values
closer to 100 mean more intense
colours.
Tint (G/R)
Menu → Picture → Tint (G/R)
Adjusts tint levels for green and red.
Values closer to 100 mean greater
intensity for that colour.
To adjust picture quality, follow these steps:1. Select an option you want to adjust.
When you select an option, a slider
screen appears.
2. Adjust the option value using your
remote.
N When you change an option value,
the change will affect the OSD menu
also.
N When your TV is connected to a PC
via an HDMI to DVI cable, Colour and
Tint (G/R) is not available.N You can adjust and store settings for
each external device connected to
the TV.
N Lowering picture brightness reduces
power consumption.Changing the Picture Size
Screen Adjustment
Menu → Picture → Screen Adjustment
Using this function, you can select
various picture size and aspect ratio
options.
● Picture Size
Your cable box / satellite receiver may
have its own set of screen sizes as
well. However, we highly recommend you use 16:9 mode most of the time.
Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the
picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratios.
16:9: Adjusts the picture size to 16:9 for
DVDs or wide broadcasting.
Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size
more than 4:3.
Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures
vertically to fit the screen size.
4:3: The default setting for a movie or
normal broadcasting.N Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long
time. Traces of borders displayed
on the left, right and centre of the
screen may cause image retention
(screen burn) which is not covered
by the warranty.
Screen Fit: Displays the full image
without any cut-off when HDMI (720p
/ 1080i / 1080p), DTV (1080i, 1080p) or
Component (1080i / 1080p) signals are
inputted.Smart View 1: Reduces the 16:9 picture
by 50% for LED 5300, LED 5500 series and
above
Smart View 2: Reduces the 16:9 picture
by 25% for LED 5300, LED 5500 series and
above
N Smart View 1 is enabled only in
HDMI mode.
N Smart View 2 is enabled only in
HDMI or DTV mode.
N The picture size can vary when you play content from Videos in AllShare
Play.
● Zoom/position
Adjusts the picture zoom and position.
Zoom is only available if Picture Size is
set to Zoom. Position is only available
if Picture Size is set to Wide Zoom,
Zoom, or Screen Fit.
To use the Zoom function after
selecting Zoom, follow these steps:1. Select Zoom.
2. On the Zoom/position screen, select
Zoom, and then zoom in or zoom out
using your remote.
3. When done, select Zoom again, and
then select Close.
4. To reset the picture, press Reset.
To use the Position function after
selecting Wide Zoom, Zoom or Screen
Fit, follow these steps:1. Select the Position.
2. On the Position screen, select
Position, and then move the picture
to position you want using your
remote.
3. When done, select Position again,
and then select Close.
4. To reset the picture position, select
Reset.
Picture Sizes available by Input Source:– ATV, EXT, AV: Auto Wide, 16:9, Wide
Zoom, Zoom, 4:3
– DTV (576i, 576p, 720p): Auto Wide,
16:9, Wide Zoom, Zoom, 4:3, Smart
View 2 for LED 5300, LED 5500 series and
above
– DTV(1080i, 1080p) : Auto Wide, 16:9,
Wide Zoom, Zoom, 4:3, Screen Fit,
Smart View 2 for LED 5300, LED 5500
series and above
– Component (480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p): 16:9, Wide Zoom, Zoom, 4:3
– Component (1080i, 1080p): 16:9,
Wide Zoom, Zoom, 4:3, Screen Fit
– HDMI (480i, 480p, 576i, 576p): 16:9,
Wide Zoom, Zoom, 4:3, Smart View
1 for LED 5300, LED 5500 series and above
Smart View 2 for LED 5300, LED 5500
series and above
– HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p): 16:9,
Wide Zoom, Zoom, 4:3, Screen Fit,
Smart View 1 for LED 5300, LED 5500 series and above Smart View 2 for LED
5300, LED 5500 series and above
N Depending on the input source, the
picture size options may vary.
N The available items may differ
depending on the selected mode.
N HD (High Definition): 16:9 -
1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p
(1280x720)
N You can adjust and store settings
for each external device you have connected to an input on the TV.
Select the Source, and then adjust
the settings.
● 4:3 Screen Size
Available only when picture size is set
to Auto Wide. You can determine the
desired picture size at the 4:3 WSS
(Wide Screen Service) size or the
original size. Each European country
requires different picture size.
N Not available in Component or HDMI mode.
● PC Screen Adjustment for LED 5400 Series
N Available in PC mode only.
– Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces
picture noise. If the noise is not
removed by Fine-tuning alone,
use the Coarse function to adjust
the frequency as best as possible
(Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After
the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned with the centre of screen.
– Position: Adjust the PC’s screen
position using your remote if it is not
centred or does not fit the product
screen.
– Image Reset: Resets the image to the
default settings.
Auto Adjustment for LED 5400 Series
Menu → Picture → Auto Adjustment
Automatically adjusts the picture's frequency, position, and fine tune
settings in the PC mode.
N Available in PC mode only.
N Not available if you connect your
PC with an HDMI or an HDMI to DVI
cable.Changing the Picture Options
Advanced Settings
Menu → Picture → Advanced Settings
Using this function, you can configure
advanced picture settings to create
your preferred picture.
N Advanced Settings is available only
when the Picture Mode is set to
Standard or Movie mode.
N When connecting a PC using an
HDMI-DVI cable, you can only make changes to White Balance and
Gamma.
● Dynamic Contrast
Adjusts the screen contrast.
● Black Tone
Select the black level to adjust the
screen depth.
● Flesh Tone
Emphasizes pink “Flesh Tone.”
● RGB Only Mode
Displays the Red, Green and Bluecolours so you can make fine
adjustments to hue and saturation.
● Colour Space
Adjusts the range and variety of colours
(the colour space) available to create
images.
N for LED 6100 - 7200 Series and PDP 6500
Series To adjust Colour, Red, Green,
Blue and Reset, set the Colour Space
to Custom.
● White BalanceAdjusts the colour temperature for a
more natural picture.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset:
Adjusts each colour’s (red, green, blue)
darkness.
R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjusts each
colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness.
Reset: Resets the White Balance to its
default settings.
● 10p White Balance
for LED 4500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 - 570 Series : This function is not supported.
Lets you control the white balance
by adjusting the red, green, and blue
brightness in 10 point intervals.
N Available when the Picture Mode is
set to Movie. Available for all video
source.
N Some external devices may not
support this function.
Interval: Select the interval to adjust.
Red: Adjusts the red level.Green: Adjusts the green level.
Blue: Adjusts the blue level.
Reset: Resets the 10p White Balance to
its default settings.
● Gamma
Adjusts the primary colour intensity.
● Expert Pattern
for LED 4500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 - 570
Series : This function is not supported.
Use the Expert Pattern function to
calibrate the picture. If the OSD menu disappears or a menu other than the
Picture menu is opened, the TV saves
the calibration and the Expert Pattern
screen disappears.
Off: Turns the Expert Pattern function
off.
Pattern1: This test screen demonstrates
the effect of your display settings on
shades of grey and black.
Pattern2: This test screen demonstrates
the effect of your display settings on colours.
N After selecting Pattern1 or Pattern2,
you can adjust any of the advanced
settings for the desired effect.
N While the Expert Pattern is running,
the TV does not output sound.
N Only enabled in DTV, Component,
and HDMI modes.
● xvYCC
for LED 4500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 - 570
Series : This function is not supported.Setting xvYCC on increases picture
detail and enlarges the colour space
when you are watching movies input
from an external device (e.g. BD/DVD
player) connected to the TV’s HDMI or
Component IN jacks.
N Available only when you set
the Picture Mode to Movie and
the external input to HDMI or
Component.
N Some external devices may not support this function.
● Motion Lighting
Reduces power consumption by
reducing screen brightness when the
picture on the screen is in motion.
N This feature is not supported in 3D
mode.
N Only available in Standard mode.
N When you change the Backlight
for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV ,
Contrast, or Brightness, the TV sets Motion Lighting to Off.
Picture Options
Menu → Picture → Picture Options
Using this function, you can configure
additional picture settings to suit your
preference.
N When your TV is connected to a PC
via an HDMI to DVI cable, you can
only make changes to Colour Tone.
● Colour ToneSelect the colour temperature.
N Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated
when the Picture Mode is set to
Dynamic.
N You can adjust and store settings for
each external device connected to an
input on the TV. Select Source and
then adjust the settings.
● Digital Noise Filter
If the broadcast signal received by your
TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Filter feature to reduce any static
and ghosting that may appear on the
screen.
Auto Visualisation: When changing
analogue channels, displays signal
strength.
N When the signal is weak, try all the
options until the TV displays the best
picture.
N Only available for analogue channels.
N When the bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal.
● MPEG Noise Filter
Reduces MPEG noise to provide
improved picture quality.
● HDMI Black Level
Lets you adjust the screen depth by
selecting a black level.
N Available only in HDMI mode.
● Film Mode
Sets the TV so that it senses and then
processes film signals from all sources automatically and adjusts the picture
for optimum quality.
N Available in TV, AV, Component (480i
/ 1080i) and HDMI (1080i).
● Motion Plus for LED TV
for LED 5400 - 5500 Series : This function is
not supported.
Removes drag from fast scenes with
a lot of movement to provide a clearer
picture.
N The Info screen on your TV displays the resolution and frequency of the
incoming signal (60Hz), but not the
frequency the TV is generating for
the image it is displaying by using
Motion Plus function.
N If noise occurs on the screen, please
set up the Motion Plus to Off. If
Motion Plus is Custom, you can
set up the Blur Reduction, Judder
Reduction or Reset manually.
N If Motion Plus is Demo, you can compare the difference of on and off
modes.
Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur
reduction level from video sources.
Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder
reduction level from video sources
when playing films.
Reset: Reset the custom settings to the
factory defaults.
● LED Motion Plus for LED TV
for LED 4500, 5400 Series : This function is not supported.
Removes drag from fast scenes with
a lot of movement to provide a clear
picture.
Reset Picture
Menu → Picture → Reset Picture
Resets your current picture mode to its
default settings.Using the TV with Your PC
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC)
Display
Entering the Video Settings (Based on
Windows 7)
For your TV to work properly as a
computer display, you must enter the
correct video settings after you have
connected the TV to your PC.
N Depending on your version of Windows and your video card, the
procedure on your PC will probably
differ slightly from the procedure
presented here.
N However, the same basic information
will apply in most cases. (If not,
contact your computer manufacturer
or Samsung Dealer.)
1. Click “Control Panel” on the
Windows start menu.
2. Click “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window. A
display dialog box appears.
3. Click “Display”. Another display
dialog box appears.
4. Click the “Settings” tab on the
display dialog box.
– On the Settings tab, set the
correct resolution (screen size).
The optimal resolution for this TV
is 1920 x 1080.
– If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings
dialog box, select “60” or “60 Hz”.
Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit
the dialog box.Changing the Preset Sound Mode
Sound Mode
Menu → Sound → Sound Mode
Sound modes apply preset adjustments
to the sound.
N If Speaker Select is set to External
Speaker, Sound Mode is disabled.
● Standard
Selects the normal sound mode.
● Music
Emphasizes music over voices.● Movie
Provides the best sound for movies.
● Clear Voice
Emphasizes voices over other sounds.
● Amplify
Increase the intensity of high-frequency
sound to allow a better listening
experience for the hearing impaired.Adjusting Sound Settings
Sound Effect
Menu → Sound → Sound Effect
N If Speaker Select is set to External
Speaker, Sound Effect is disabled.
N Available only when the Sound Mode
is set to Standard.
● SRS TruSurround HD
This function provides a virtual 5.1
channel surround sound experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF
(Head Related Transfer Function)
technology.
● SRS TruDialog
This function allows you to increase
the intensity of voices over background
music or sound effects so that dialog
can be heard more clearly.
● Equaliser
The Equaliser displays a series of
sliders. Use the arrow buttons to select a slider, and then change the slider’s
value. To Reset the Equaliser, select
Reset. A pop-up appears asking if you
want to reset. Select Yes. To exit, select
Close.
Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance
between the left and right speaker.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz
(Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the
volume level of specific bandwidth
frequencies.Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default
settings.
Broadcast Audio Options
Menu → Sound → Broadcast Audio Options
● Audio Language
(Digital channels only)
Change the default value for audio
languages.
N The available language may differ
depending on the broadcast.● Audio Format
(Digital channels only)
When sound is emitted from both the
main speaker and the audio receiver,
a sound echo may occur due to the
decoding speed difference between the
main speaker and the audio receiver. In
this case, use the TV Speaker function.
N Audio Format option may differ
depending on the broadcast. 5.1ch
Dolby digital sound is only available when connecting an external speaker
through an optical cable.
● Audio Description
(Not available in all locations) (Digital
channels only)
This function handles the Audio Stream
for the AD (Audio Description) which
is sent along with the Main audio from
the broadcaster.
N Audio Description (Off / On): Turn
the audio description function on or off.
N Volume: Adjust the audio description
volume.
Additional Settings
Menu → Sound → Additional Settings
● DTV Audio Level
(Digital channels only)
This function allows you to reduce the
disparity of a voice signal (which is one
of the signals received during a digital TV broadcast) to a desired level.
N According to the type of broadcast
signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be
adjusted between -10dB and 0dB.
N To increase or decrease the volume,
adjust between the range 0 and -10
respectively.
● SPDIF Output
SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is
used to provide digital sound, reducing
interference going to speakers and various digital devices such as a DVD
player.
● Audio Format: You can select the
Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format.
N The available Digital Audio output
(SPDIF) format may differ depending
on the input source.
● Audio Delay
Lets you correct timing mismatches
between the audio track and the video
when you are watching the TV and listening to digital audio output from
the TV through an external device such
as an AV receiver. When you select the
Audio Delay function, a slider screen
appears. Adjust the option value using
your remote (0ms ~ 250ms).
● Dolby Digital Comp
This function minimizes signal disparity
between a dolby digital signal and a
voice signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC,
ATV Sound).N Select Line to obtain dynamic sound,
and RF to reduce the difference
between loud and soft sounds at
night time.
Line: Set the output level for signals
greater or less than -31dB (reference)
to either -20dB or -31dB.
RF: Set the output level for signals
greater or less than -20dB (reference)
to either -10dB or -20dB.Speaker Settings
Menu → Sound → Speaker Settings
● Speaker Select
If you are listening to the sound track
of a broadcast or movie through an
external receiver, you may hear a
sound echo caused by the difference
in decoding speed between the TV’s
speakers and the speakers attached to
your audio receiver. If this occurs, set
the TV to External Speaker.N When Speaker Select is set to
External Speaker, the TV’s speakers
are turned off. You will hear sound
through the external speakers only.
When the Speaker Select is set to TV
Speaker, both the TV’s speakers and
the external speakers are on. You
will hear sound through both.
N When the Speaker Select is set to
External Speaker, the volume buttons
and mute functions will not operate and the sound settings will be
limited.
N If there is no video signal, both
the TV’s speakers and the external
speakers will be mute.
● Auto Volume
Normal: Automatically equalizes the
volume level when switching to another
channel.
Night: Automatically equalizes and
decrease the volume level on each channel, so each channel is quieter.
Night is useful at night, when you may
want to keep the volume low.
N To use the volume control of a
connected source device, set Auto
Volume to Off. If Auto Volume is
set to Normal or Night, adjusting
the volume control of a connected
source device may have to effect.
Reset SoundMenu → Sound → Reset Sound
Reset all sound settings to the factory
defaults.Connecting to the Network
The Wired Network Connection
There are three ways to attach your TV
to your LAN using cable:
N For illustrations of the three kinds of
wired network connections, see your
paper user's manual.
– You can attach your TV to your
LAN by connecting the LAN port on
the back of your TV to an external
Preference Featuresmodem using a LAN cable.
– You can attach your TV to your LAN
by connecting the LAN port on the
back of your TV to a router which
is connected to an external modem.
Use LAN cable for the connection.
– You may be able to attach your TV
to your LAN by connecting the LAN
port on the back of your TV directly
to a network wall outlet using a
LAN cable. Note that the wall outlet is attached to a modem or router
elsewhere in your house.
N If your network requires a Dynamic
IP address, you should use an ADSL
modem or router that supports the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). Modems and routers that
support DHCP automatically provide
the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS values your TV
needs to access the Internet so you do not have to enter them manually.
Most home networks use a Dynamic
IP address.
N Some networks require a Static IP
address. If your network requires a
Static IP address, you must enter the
IP address, subnet mask, gateway,
and DNS values manually when you
set up the network connection. To
get the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If
you have a Windows computer, you
can also get these values through
your computer.
N You can use ADSL modems that
support DHCP if your network
requires a Static IP address. ADSL
modems that support DHCP also let
you use Static IP addresses.
The Wireless Network ConnectionN For an illustration of the wireless
network connection, see your paper
user's manual.
N for LED 5500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550
- 570 Series To connect your TV to
your network wireless, you need
a wireless router or modem and
a Samsung Wireless LAN adapter
(WIS10ABGN or WIS12ABGNX),
which you connect to your TV’s USB
port. Samsung Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately and is offered by
selected retailers, Ecommerce sites
and Samsungparts.com.
You can connect your TV to your LAN
through a standard wireless router or
modem.
This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g
and n communication protocols.
Samsung recommends using IEEE
802.11n. When you play video over a
network connection using IEEE 802.11 a/b or g, the video may not play
smoothly.
N for LED 5500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 -
570 Series The Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter and the USB extension Cable
are sold separately and are offered
by select retailers, Ecommerce sites
and Samsungparts.com.
N for LED 5500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 -
570 Series Ensure the TV is turned on
before you connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter.
N for LED 5500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 -
570 Series The Samsung Wireless LAN
adapter may not be recognized when
using a connection via a USB hub or
via a USB extension cable other than
the cable supplied.
N To use a wireless network, your TV
must be connected to a wireless
router or modem. If the wireless
router or modem supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP
address to connect to the wireless
network.
N Select a channel on the wireless
router or modem that is not currently
being used. If the channel set for the
wireless router or modem is currently
being used by another device nearby,
this will result in interference and
communication failure.
N Your TV supports only the following wireless network security protocols:
– Authentication Mode : WEP,
WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
– Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
N If you select the Pure Highthroughput (Greenfield) 802.11n
mode and the Encryption type is set
to WEP or TKIP on your AP (access
point) or wireless router, Samsung
TVs will not support a connection
in compliance with new Wi-Fi certification specifications.
N If your wireless router or modem
supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup), you can connect to the
network via PBC (Push Button
Configuration) or a PIN (Personal
Identification Number). WPS will
automatically configure the SSID and
WPA key in either mode.
N If your router, modem, or device is
not certified, it may not connect to the TV.
N Connection Methods: You can set up
the wireless network connection in
four ways:
– Using Auto Setup (with the Auto
Network Search function)
– Using Manual Setup
– Using WPS(PBC)
– Using Plug & Access
Notice for LED 5500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 - 570 Series
The picture may appear corrupted or
have static for some channels when
the TV is connected to the Samsung
Wireless LAN adapter. If this occurs,
establish a connection using one of
the following methods or connect the
Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using
a USB cable in a place that is not
affected by radio interference.
● Method 1: Connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the USB
right angle adapter.
To connect the Samsung Wireless
LAN adapter using the USB right angle
adapter, follow these steps:
1. Connect the USB right angle adapter
to the Samsung Wireless LAN
adapter.
2. Connect the other end of the right
angle adapter to the USB port.● Method 2: Connecting the Samsung
Wireless LAN adapter via an extension
cable.
To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN
adapter using the extension cable,
follow these steps:
1. Connect the extension cable to the
USB port.
2. Connect the extension cable and
Samsung Wireless LAN adapter.3. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN
adapter to the back of the TV near
the top, using double-sided adhesive
tape.Setting up a Wired Network
Network Settings
Menu → Network → Network Settings
Set up the wired or wireless network
connection so you can use various
Internet services such as Smart
Hub and AllShare Play and perform
software upgrades.
Automatic Wired Network Setup
You can configure your TV's wired network connection automatically when
connecting your TV to a network that
supports DHCP.
N If you have connected a LAN cable,
the wired network set up screen
appears automatically.
To set up your TV’s wired network
connection automatically, follow these
steps:
1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Network → Network Settings)
2. Select Start. The network test screen
appears and verifies the network
connection.
3. When the connection has been
verified, the "You are connected
to the Internet. If you have any
problems using online services,
please contact your Internet service
provider." message appears. Select
OK.N If the connection process fails, check
the LAN port connection.
N If the automatic process cannot find
the network connection values or
if you want to set the connection
manually, go to the next section,
"Manual Network Setup."
Manual Wired Network Setup
You can configure your TV's wired
network connection manually when
connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address.
Getting the Network Connection Values
To view the Network connection values
on Winows XP computers, follow these
steps:
1. Right click the Network icon on the
bottom right of the screen.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears,
click Status.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab.
4. On the Support Tab, click the Details
button. The Network connection
values are displayed.
To set up your TV's wired network
connection manually, follow these
steps:
1. Go to the Network Settings screen.
(Network → Network Settings)
2. Select Start. The network connection screen appears and the verification
process starts.
3. Select Stop. The verification process
stops. Select IP Settings on network
connection screen. The IP Settings
screen appears.
4. Select the IP Mode, and then set the
IP Mode to Manual.
5. Go to the IP Address entry field, and
then select the IP Address using the
remote.6. Enter the first portion of the IP
Address (for example, 105) into the
first entry field using your remote.
When done, go to the next field.
7. Enter the next portion of the IP
Address. When done, go to the next
field.
8. Repeat the entry process for each
field in the IP Address.
N If you make a mistake when
entering a number, re-enter the number to correct it.
9. When done, go to the Subnet Mask
fields.
10.Repeat the same entry process for
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS
Server.
11.When done, select OK. The network
test screen appears and the
verification process starts. When the
connection has been verified, the
"You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online
services, please contact your Internet
service provider." message appears.
Select OK.
Network Status
Menu → Network → Network Status
You can check the current network and
Internet status.
If the wired network connection failed...● No network cable found.
Check if your network cable is plugged
in. If it is connected, make sure that
the router is turned on. If it is on, try
turning if off and on again.
● IP auto setting failed.
Try the following to set your IP address
automatically or set your IP address
manually by selecting IP Settings.
1) Ensure that DHCP server is enabled
on the router. 2) Unplug and re-plug-in the router. 3) Contact your Internet
Service Provider for more information
● Unable to connect to the network.
Try the following: check if your IP
address is set correctly in IP Settings.
Contact your Internet Service Provider
for more information.
● Connected to your local network, but
cannot connect to the Internet.
Check the DNS settings in IP Settings
or contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet.
● Network setup complete, but cannot
connect to the Internet.
Contact your Internet Service Provider
to access the Internet.Setting up the Wireless Network
Network Settings
Menu → Network → Network Settings
Set up the wired or wireless network
connection so you can use various
Internet services such as Smart
Hub and AllShare Play and perform
software upgrades.
Automatic Wireless Network Setup
Most wireless networks have an optional security system that requires
devices that access the network to
transmit an encrypted security code
called an Access or Security Key. The
Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase,
typically a word or a series of letters
and numbers of a specified length
you were asked to enter when you set
up wireless security for your wireless
network.
If you use this method of setting up the network connection, and have a
Security Key for your wireless network,
you will have to enter the Pass Phrase
during the automatic or manual setup
process.
N Depending on your router or modem,
you may be able to use a WPS PIN
instead.
To set up your TV’s wireless network
connection automatically, follow these steps:
1. Go to the Network Settings screen.
(Network → Network Settings)
2. Select Start. The network function
searches for available wireless
networks. When done, it displays a
list of the available networks.
3. In the list of networks, select a
network you want to connect to and
then select Next.
N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to
select Add Network and enter
the correct Network Name (SSID)
and Security Key to establish the
connection.
4. If the Enter security key screen
appears, go to step 5. If you selected
a wireless router that does not have
wireless security, go to step 7.
5. To set wireless security for the router,
enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN).
N You can enter the Security Key
(Security key or PIN) using
a keyboard screen. Enter the
Security Key using your remote.
N A keyboard can be used to
enter the security key via a USB
or Bluetooth connection. The
Bluetooth feature might not be
available depending on model.
N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up
screens you used to set up your
router or modem.
6. When done, select Next. The network
connection screen appears and the
verification process starts.
7. When the connection has been
verified, the You are connected to the
Internet. If you have any problems
using online services, please contact
your Internet service provider.message appears.
N If the network does not accept the
Security Key or PIN, select Retry
or select IP Settings to enter the
settings manually.
N If you want to set up the connection
manually, select IP Settings. Then, go
to the next section, “Manual Network
Setup”.
Manual Wireless Network Setup
You can configure your TV's wireless network connection manually when
connecting your TV to a network that
requires a Static IP address or if the
automatic connection process has
failed.
Getting the Network Connection Values
To view the Network connection values
on most Windows computers, follow
these steps:
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears,
click Status.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the
Support tab.
4. On the Support Tab, click the Details
button. The Network connection
values are displayed.
To set up your TV's wireless network
connection manually, follow these steps:
1. Go to the Network Settings screen.
(Network → Network Settings)
2. Select Start. The network function
searches for available wireless
networks. When done, it displays a
list of the available networks.
3. In the list of networks, select a
network you want to connect to and
then select Next.
N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to
select Add Network and enter
the correct Network Name (SSID)
and Security Key to establish the
connection.
4. If the Enter security key screen
appears, go to step 5. If you select
a wireless router that does not have
wireless security, go to step 7.
5. To set wireless security for the router,
enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN).
N You can enter the Security Key
(Security key or PIN) using
a keyboard screen. Enter the
Security Key using your remote.
N You should be able to find the
Pass Phrase on one of the set up
screens you used to set up your
router or modem.
6. When done, select Next. The network
connection screen appears and the verification process starts.
7. Select Stop. The verification process
stops. Select IP Settings on the
network connection screen. The IP
Settings screen appears.
8. Select IP Mode, and then set the IP
Mode to Manual.
9. Go to the IP Address entry field, and
then select the IP Address using the
remote.
10.Enter the first portion of the IP Address (for example, 105) into the
first entry field using your remote.
When done, go to the next field.
11.Enter the next portion of the IP
Address. When done, go to the next
field.
12.Repeat the entry process for each
field in the IP Address.
N If you make a mistake when
entering a number, re-enter the
number to correct it.13.When done, go to the Subnet Mask
fields.
14.Repeat the same entry process for
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS
Server.
15.When done, select OK. The network
connection screen appears and the
verification process starts. When the
connection has been verified, the
"You are connected to the Internet. If
you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet
service provider." message appears.
WPS(PBC) Network Setup
If your router has a WPS(PBC)
button, you can configure your TV's
wireless network connection using the
WPS(PBC) button quickly and easily.
To set up your TV's wireless network
connection using WPS(PBC), follow these steps:
1. Go to Network Settings screen.
(Network → Network Settings)
2. Select Start. The network function
searches for available wireless
networks. When done, it displays a
list of the available networks.
3. Select the WPS(PBC).
4. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your
router within 2 minutes. Your TV
automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects
to your network.
5. The network connection screen
appears, and network setup is done.
Plug & Access Network Setup
The Plug & Access function lets you
easily connect your Samsung TV to
your Samsung wireless router (sold
separately) by using a USB memory
stick to transfer the setup information from the router to the TV. If your
non-Samsung wireless router does
not support Plug & Access, you
must connect using one of the other
methods.
N You can check for equipment that
supports Plug & Access on www.
samsung.com.
To set up your TV's wireless network
connection using Plug & Access, follow these steps:
1. Turn on the Samsung wireless router
and your TV.
2. Insert a USB memory stick into the
USB port in your Samsung wireless
router. Check the router’s LED’s to
make sure it is on (Blinking → on).
3. Take the USB memory stick out of
the router, and then insert it into
a USB port on your Samsung TV.
The memory stick downloads the connection information.
4. Wait until the connection is
automatically established.
N If Plug & Access does not connect
your TV to your wireless router,
a popup screen appears on the
screen notifying you of the failure.
If you want to try using Plug &
Access again, disconnect the USB
memory stick, reset the router, and
then try again from Step 1. You can also choose one of the other
connection setup methods.
5. The network connection screen
appears, and the network setup is
done.
N If the wireless router’s settings
change or you install a new wireless
router, you must perform the Plug &
Access procedure again, beginning
from Step 1.Network Status
Menu → Network → Network Status
You can check the current network and
Internet status.
If the wireless network connection failed...
● Wireless network connection failed.
No wireless router selected. Go to
Network Settings to select your router.
● Unable to connect to wireless router.
Try the following: check if the router is turned on, and if it is, try turning it
off and on again. Check if you need to
enter a security key to use the router.
● IP auto setting failed.
Try the following to set your IP address
automatically or set your IP address
manually by selecting IP Settings.
1) Ensure that DHCP server is enabled
on the router. 2) Unplug and re-plugin the router. 3) Contact your Internet
Service Provider for more information.● Unable to connect to the network.
Try the following: check if your IP
address is set correctly in IP Settings.
Contact your Internet Service Provider
for more information.
● Connected to your local network, but
cannot connect to the Internet.
Check the DNS settings in IP Settings,
or contact your Internet Service
Provider to access the Internet.
● Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet.
Contact your Internet Service Provider
to access the Internet.Managing the Network Connected Devices
Wi-Fi Direct
Menu → Network → Wi-Fi Direct
Set to connect the TV to wireless
mobile devices. Using this function, you
can connect wireless mobile devices to
your TV directly without a router.
N To use this function, your mobile
device should be supported by the
Wi-Fi Direct.N for LED 5500 - 5700 Series and PDP 550 - 570
Series You can use this function when
connecting the Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter. (May not be available,
depending on your model.)
To connect your mobile device with
your TV using Wi-Fi Direct, follow
these steps:
1. Turn on the Wi-Fi Direct device and
activate its Wi-Fi Direct function.2. Go to the Wi-Fi Direct screen.
(Network → Wi-Fi Direct) The TV
starts to search devices and then
displays the devices on the Wi-Fi
Direct screen.
3. Turn on the Wi-Fi Direct function on
your device. Select the desired Wi-Fi
device.
– For PBC: Press the WPS(PBC)
button on your Wi-Fi device
within 2 minutes. The Connecting popup appears, followed by
the Connected pop-up. When it
closes, you should see the device
listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen
as connected.
– For PIN: Input the displayed PIN
on your device. The Connecting
popup appears, followed by
the Connected pop-up. When it
closes, you should see the device
listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as connected.
N If you want to disconnect the device,
select the connected Wi-Fi device,
and then select Disconnect.
N The TV and BD products perform the
role of the Group Owner. If a TV or
BD is connected via Wi-Fi Direct, the
connected device is represented as a
Group Owner in the Wi-Fi Direct list.
However, even in this case, the TV
cannot connect to another TV or BD through Wi-Fi Direct.
Soft AP
Menu → Network → Soft AP
Using this function, you can connect
the TV to your mobile devices if your
mobile devices do not support Wi-Fi
Direct.
The Soft AP screen lets you set the
options for connecting Wi-Fi devices.
● Soft APTurns Soft AP on or off. When Soft AP
is set to On, your mobile devices can
find the TV's network name in their WiFi connection list.
● Security Key
Enter a Security Key at least 8
characters long using the remote
control. Select Done when finished.
– If the security key is not at least
8 characters long, Done is not
available.– To connect a mobile device to the
TV, you must input the security key
into the device.
– If network does not operate correctly,
check the security key again. An
incorrect security key may cause a
malfunction.
Using Wi-Fi Direct or Soft AP, you can
share data through AllShare Play.
(For only some of the mobile device models among the mobile device
models supporting Wi-Fi Direct or Soft
AP.)
Wi-Fi Direct Soft AP
Number of Wi-Fi devices that
can be connected
Up to 5 Up to 5
Data sharing
Supported through AllShare
(only for supported mobile
device models.)
Only through AllShare
AllShare Settings
Menu → Network → AllShare Settings
AllShare Play lets you play Videos,
Photos, or Music located on your PC or your DLNA compatible device on the
TV using a network connection. It also
lets you control the TV through these
devices.
The AllShare Settings screen lists your
network connected AllShare devices
and their IP addresses. Through this
screen, you can allow a device to
access the TV, deny access, or delete
the device from the AllShare list.
The AllShare Settings screen only displays devices if you have established
networked connections to AllShare
devices. Otherwise, it will be empty.
To use the AllShare network function,
you must install the AllShare network
software on your PC. For details on set
up options, refer to "Using the AllShare
Play Functions".
Device Name
Menu → Network → Device NameEnter a name for this TV. This name will
be shown on network remote controls
and devices using AllShare Play.
N A keyboard appears on the screen.
Key in a name for your TV manually
using your remote. When finished,
select Done.
N To enter letters, highlight and select
each letter. To enter numbers,
highlight and select each number or
press the number buttons on your remote.
N To shift to capital letters (or from
capital letters to lower case), select
the Caps or Shift button.
N To display symbols and punctuation,
select . To redisplay letters, select
again.Setting the Time
Time
Menu → System → Time
N The current time will appear every
time you select INFO using your
remote.
● Clock
Set the clock to use the various timer
features of the TV.
N If you disconnect the power cord,
you have to set the clock again.Clock Mode: Set the current time
manually or automatically.
– Auto: The TV sets the current time
automatically using the time from a
digital channel.
N You must have the cable or an
aerial connected to the TV to set
the time automatically.
N Depending on the broadcast
station and signal, the auto time
set up may not be correct. In this case, set the time manually.
– Manual: Set the current time
manually.
Clock Set: Set the Date and Time
manually. You can set the current date
and time using your remote.
N Available only when the Clock Mode
is set to Manual.
Time Zone: Select your time zone.
N This function is only available when
the Clock Mode is set to Auto.GMT: Selects your time zone.
N When Country is set to Others, you
can use this function.
DST: Switches the DST (Daylight
Saving Time) function on or off.
N This function is only available when
the Clock Mode is set to Auto.
● Sleep Timer
Automatically shuts off the TV after a
preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120,
150, or 180 minutes).N Select a period of time using your
remote. To cancel the Sleep Timer,
select Off.
● On Timer
Set On Timer so that your TV turns on
automatically at a time and on a day
of your choosing. You can set up three
separate On Timer configurations (On
Timer 1, On Timer 2, On Timer 3) and
select the source of the content the TV
plays when it turns on: an air or cable channel, a USB device, or a set-top box
connected to one of the TV's inputs
(HDMI1, AV, etc.).
N You must set the clock before you
can use the On Timer function.
Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday,
Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual.
If you select Manual, you can choose
the days you want On Timer to turn on
your TV.
N The c mark indicates days you’ve selected.
Time: Set the time that the TV turns on
automatically.
Volume: Set the desired volume level.
Change the volume level using your
remote.
Source: To select the source of the
content that will play when the TV
turns on. You can:
– Select TV and have the TV display a
specific air or cable channel.– Select USB and have the TV play
back photo or audio files from a USB
device.
– Select a source on your TV (HDMI1,
HDMI2, Component, etc.) that you
have connected a set-top box to, and
have the TV display a channel from
the set-top box.
N The USB device must be connected
to your TV before you can select
USB.N If you select a source other than TV
or USB, you must:
Have a cable or satellite set-top
box attached to that source
Set the set-top box to the
channel you want to watch when
the TV goes on
Leave the set-top box turned on.
N When you select a source other than
TV or USB, the Aerial and Channel
options will disappear.Aerial (when the Source is set to TV):
Select ATV or DTV.
Channel (when the Source is set to TV):
Select the desired channel.
Music / Photo (when the Source is set
to USB): Select a folder in the USB
device that contains music that you
want played when the TV turns on
automatically or a folder that contains
music and a folder that contains photo
files. If you select both, the TV will display the photos you selected as it
plays the music you selected.
To select folders on the USB device,
follow these steps:
1. Select Music. The TV displays a
single folder (the Root folder) and
the type or name of the device.
2. Select the type or name of the device
you want to play. A list of folders on
the selected device appears.
N If there are no folders on your device, move the highlight to the
Select, and then select the Root
folder. The Timer screen re-appears
with the name of the device in the
Music field. Go to Step 4.
3. Highlight a folder that contains
music, highlight the Select next to
it. The Timer screen re-appears with
the folder name in the Music field.
4. If you want the TV to display photos
as the music you chose plays, select Photos, and then repeat the same
process.
5. When done, select the Close at the
bottom of the screen.
N You must select a music file. You
cannot select only a photo file.
N If there is no music file on the USB
device or you don’t select a folder
containing a music file, the Timer
function does not operate correctly.
N If there is only one photo file in the USB, the slide show will not play.
N If a folder name is too long, the
folder cannot be selected.
N Each USB you use is assigned its
own folder. When using more than
one of the same types of USB, make
sure the folders assigned to each
USB have different names.
N We recommend that you use a USB
memory stick and a multi card
reader when using the On Timer. The On Timer function may not work
with USB devices that have a built-in
battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made
by some manufacturers because the
TV can take too long to recognize
these devices.
N If you set the On Timer to play a file
saved on a USB HDD, it may take up
to 40 seconds or more to play the
file after the TV is turned on.
● Off TimerSet Off Timer so that your TV turns off
automatically at a time and on a day
of your choosing. You can set up three
separate Off Timer configurations. (Off
Timer 1, Off Timer 2, Off Timer 3)
N You must set the clock before you
can use the Off Timer.
Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday,
Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual.
If you select Manual, you can choose
the days you want Off Timer to turn off your TV.
N The c mark indicates days you’ve
selected.
Time: Set the time that the TV turns off
automatically.Blocking Programmes
Security
Menu → System → Security
Using this function, you can configure
programme related security options.
Every time you access the Security
functions, the PIN screen will appear
and you must enter that PIN. The PIN
screen closes and the Security menu
appears.● Channel Lock
Lock channels in Channel menu, to
prevent unauthorized users, such as
children, from watching unsuitable
programme.
N Available only when the Source is
set to TV.
● Programme Rating Lock
(Depending on the country)
When turned on, the Programme
Rating Lock feature can automatically block programmes that you deem
inappropriate for your children.
You must enter a PIN (personal
identification number) before you can
set or change any of the Programme
Rating Lock restrictions.
N The items of Programme Rating Lock
differs depending on the country.
● Adult genre enabling for U.K
You can adjust the Adult genre
enabling.N The Adult genre enabling is available
for Freesat aerial only.
● Change PIN
The Change PIN screen will appear.
Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and
enter them in the Enter New PIN. Reenter the same 4 digits in the Confirm
New PIN. When the Confirm screen
disappears, select Close. The TV has
memorised your new PIN.How to watch a restricted programme or
movie
If the TV is tuned to a restricted
programme or movie, the Programme
Rating Lock will block it.
The screen will go blank and the
message This channel is blocked by
Channel lock settings. Please enter PIN
to unblock. appears. Enter the PIN to
unblock the programme or movie using
your remote.Economical Solutions
Eco Solution
Menu → System → Eco Solution
● Energy Saving
Lets you adjusts the brightness of
the TV in order to reduce power
consumption. If you select Picture Off,
the screen is turned off, but the sound
remains on. Press any button except
the volume button to turn on the screen.
● Eco Sensor
for LED 4500, LED 5400 Series : This function
is not supported.
To enhance your power savings, the
picture settings will automatically
adapt to the light in the room.
N If you adjust Backlight for LED TV /
Cell Light for PDP TV in the Picture
menu, the Eco Sensor is set to Off
automatically.Min. Backlight for LED TV / Min Cell
Light for PDP TV : When the Eco Sensor
is set to On, you can manually adjust
the minimum screen brightness.
N If the Eco Sensor is set to On, the
display brightness may change
(become slightly darker or brighter)
depending on the surrounding light
intensity. You can control the screen’
s minimum brightness with the Min.
Backlight for LED TV / Min Cell Lightfor PDP TV function.
● No Signal Power Off
To avoid unnecessary energy
consumption, you can set how long
you want the TV to remain on if it’s not
receiving a signal.
● Auto Power Off
The TV will automatically turned off
when no user operation is detected for
4 hours.Picture In Picture (PIP)
PIP
Menu → System → PIP
You can watch a programme whose
signal has passed through the TV’s
tuner and watch video from one
external video source simultaneously.
If you have a Blu-ray player connected
to the TV, for example, you can watch
a TV programme and the Blu-ray movie at the same time by using the PIP
feature.
N While Smart Hub or Programme
Rating Lock is on, you cannot use
the PIP.
● PIP
Activate or deactivate the PIP function.
● Channel
Select the channel for the sub-picture
screen.
● SizeSelect a size for the sub-picture screen.
● Position
Select a position for the sub-picture
screen.
● Sound Select
You can choose to listen to the sound
from the main picture or the sub
picture.
N If you turn the TV off while watching
in the PIP mode, the PIP function is
reset to Off. When you turn your TV on, you must turn PIP on again to
watch in the PIP mode.
N You may notice that the picture in
the PIP screen becomes slightly
unnatural when you use the main
screen to view a game or karaoke.
N PIP does not work when the 3D
function is active.
N PIP Settings: The picture from the
external video source will be in the
main screen and the picture from the TV’s tuner will be in the PIP subpicture screen.
– Main picture: Component, HDMI
– Sub picture: TVOther Features
Language
Menu → System → Language
● Menu Language
Set the menu language.
● Teletext Language
Set a desired language for teletext.
N English is the default in cases where
the selected language is unavailable
in the broadcast.● Preferred Language
Select a language, which will be the
default language when a channel is
selected.
Device Manager
Menu → System → Device Manager
Using this function, you can set up
a keyboard or mouse to use with the
TV. You can view your device lists and
adjust keyboard or mouse settings in this menu.
N Depending on the model of the USB
HID keyboard and mouse may not be
compatible with your TV.
N You can connect a keyboard and
mouse at the same time.
● Keyboard settings
Lets you use a USB or Bluetooth
keyboard with your TV. for LED 6100-
7200 Series and PDP TV If you want to
use a USB keyboard, connect it to the USB port. If you want to use a
Bluetooth keyboard, connect it using
the Bluetooth function.
N Available only when the QWERTY
keypad screen appears.
Select keyboard
Select which keyboard to use from your
keyboard list. You can only use one
keyboard at a time even if several are
connected.
Add Bluetooth Keyboard for LED 6100-7200 Series and PDP TV
You can add a Bluetooth keyboard.
Keyboard Options
Sets the default options for the
keyboard language and type.
– Keyboard Language: Set a language
for your keyboard.
– Keyboard type: Set what a type of
keyboard you're using to enter text.
– Switch Input Language: Select a key
sequence to change switching input language.
● Mouse settings
Lets you use a USB or Bluetooth mouse
with your TV. If you want to use a USB
mouse, connect it to the USB port. for
LED 6100-7200 Series and PDP TV If you want
to use a Bluetooth mouse, connect it
using the Bluetooth function.
You can use a mouse in the TV's menu
in the same way you use a mouse on
your PC.Select mouse
Select which mouse to use from your
mouse list. You can only use one
mouse at a time even if several are
connected.
Add Bluetooth mouse
for LED 6100-7200 Series and PDP TV
You can add a Bluetooth mouse.
Mouse Options
Sets the default options for the mouse
buttons.– Primary Button: Select the main
button you want to use to click and
select on screen.
– Pointer Size: Set the size of the onscreen mouse pointer.
– Pointer Speed: Select the speed of
the mouse pointer.
Using the TV's menu with a mouse
1. Connect a USB or Bluetooth mouse
on your TV.2. Click a primary button you selected.
The Go To pop-up appears.
3. Click a menu you wish, and then you
can use the menu to same way as on
a PC.
Subtitle
(On-Screen Text Messages)
Menu → System → Subtitle
Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode.
● SubtitleSwitches subtitles on or off.
● Subtitle Mode
Sets the subtitle mode.
● Subtitle Language
Sets the subtitle language.
N If the programme you are
watching does not support the
Hearing Impaired function, Normal
automatically activates even if the
Hearing Impaired mode is selected.
N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable
in the broadcast.
Digital Text for U.K
Menu → System → Digital Text
If the programme broadcasts with
digital text, this feature is enabled.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia
Information Coding Experts Group):
An International standard for data
encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level
than the MPEG system which includes
data-linking hypermedia such as still
images, character service, animation,
graphic and video files as well as
multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime
interaction technology and is being
applied to various fields including VOD
(Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive
TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), teleeducation, tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games.
Screen Burn Protection for PDP TV
Menu → System → Screen Burn Protection
To reduce the possibility of screen
burn, this unit is equipped with Pixel
Shift screen burn prevention technology.
Pixel Shift moves the picture slightly on
the screen.
The Pixel Shift Time setting allows
you to programme the time between movements of the picture in minutes.
Your TV also has the following
additional screen burn protection
functions:
– Pixel Shift
– Auto Protection Time
– Scrolling
– Side Grey
● Pixel Shift
Using this function, you can set the TV to move pixels minutely on the
PDP screen in a horizontal or vertical
direction to minimize after images on
the screen.
Available Pixel Shift settings and
optimum settings:
Horizontal
– Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels)
– Optimum settings for TV/AV/
Component/HDMI: 4 Vertical
– Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels)
– Optimum settings for TV/AV/
Component/HDMI: 4
Time (minutes)
– Available Settings: 1 – 4 min
– Optimum settings for TV/AV/
Component/HDMI: 4 min
N The Pixel Shift value may differ
depending on the monitor size
(inches) and mode.N This function is not available in
the Screen Fit mode.
● Auto Protection Time
If the screen displays a still image for
a certain period of time you define, the
TV activates the screen saver to prevent
the formation of burnt in ghost images
on the screen.
● Scrolling
This function removes after-images on
the screen by illuminating all the pixels on the screen according to a pattern.
Use this function when there are after
images or symbols on the screen,
especially when you displayed a still
image on the screen for a long time.
N The after-image removal function
has to be executed for a long time
(approximately 1 hour) to effectively
remove after-images on the screen.
If the after-image is not removed
after you apply the function, repeat the function.
N Press any button to cancel this
feature.
● Side Grey
When you watch TV with the screen
ratio set to 4:3, using the Side Grey
function can prevent damage to the
edges of the screen by adjusting the
white balance on the extreme left and
right sides.Auto Protection Time for LED TV
Menu → System → Auto Protection Time
If the screen displays a still image for
a certain period of time you define, the
TV activates the screen saver to prevent
the formation of burnt in ghost images
on the screen.
General
Menu → System → General
● Game ModeWhen you have connected a game
console such as a PlayStation™ or
Xbox™ to the TV, you can enjoy a
more realistic gaming experience if you
set the Game Mode on.
Precautions and limitations for Game
Mode
– Before disconnecting a game console
and connecting another external
device, set Game Mode to Off.– If you display the TV menu in Game
Mode, the screen shakes slightly.
N Game Mode is not available when
the input source is set to TV.
N Set Game Mode to On only after
connecting a game console. If you
turn Game Mode on before you have
attached the game console, you may
notice reduced picture quality.
N If Game Mode is set to On, Picture
Mode is set to Standard and Sound Mode is set to Movie automatically.
● BD Wise
for LED 4500 - 5700 Series : This function is
not supported.
Provides the optimal picture quality
for Samsung DVD, Blu-ray, and Home
Theatre products which support BD
Wise. When the BD Wise is set to On,
the picture mode is automatically
changed to the optimal resolution.
N Available when you connect Samsung products that support BD
Wise through an HDMI cable to the
TV.
● Menu Transparency
Adjust transparency of menu box.
● Sound Feedback
Your TV gives sound feedback when
you use TV. Sound Feedback is enabled
by default. Turn off Sound Feedback or
adjust its volume.
● Panel LockLock or unlock all the keys on the TV
Controller at once. When Panel Lock is
on, the TV Controller does not operate.
● Boot Logo
Displays the Samsung logo when the
TV is turned on.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Allows you to control all connected
Samsung devices that support anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote.
For details on set up options, refer
to the “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)”
instructions.
DivX® Video On Demand
Menu → System → DivX® Video On
Demand
Shows the registration code authorized
for the TV. If you connect to the DivX
web site and register with 10-digit
registration code, you can download the VOD activation file. Once you play
it using Media Play, the registration is
completed.
N For more information on DivX(R)
VOD, visit http://vod.divx.com.
Common Interface
Menu → System → Common Interface
● CI Menu: This enables the user to select
from the CAM-provided menu. Select
the CI Menu based on the menu PC
Card.● Application Info: View information
on the CAM inserted into the CI slot
and on the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is
inserted into the CAM. You can install
the CAM anytime whether the TV is on
or off.
1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your
nearest dealer or by phone.
2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”
into the CAM in the direction of the
arrow.3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+
CARD” into the common interface
slot, in the direction of the arrow so
that it aligns parallel with the slot.
4. Check if you can see a picture on a
scrambled signal channel.Support Menu
e-Manual
Menu → Support → e-Manual
The e-Manual is built into your TV.
Open the e-Manual to learn how to use
your TV are many features.
N For the detailed information about
the e-Manual Screen, refer to “How
to view the e-Manual” in the User’s
Manual.Self Diagnosis
Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis
● Picture Test
Use to check for picture problems.
Picture Test displays a high definition
picture that you can examine for flaws
or faults.
Yes: Select Yes if the test picture
does not appear or there is noise or
distortion in the test picture. There
may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance.
No: Select No if the test picture
displays properly. There may be a
problem with your external equipment.
Please check your connections. If the
problem persists, refer to the external
device’s user manual.
● Sound Test
Use the built-in melody to check for
sound problems.
N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the
sound test, make sure Speaker Select
is set to TV Speaker in the Sound
menu, and then try the speakers
again.
N You will hear the melody during the
test even if you have set Speaker
Select to External Speaker or have
muted the sound.
Yes: Select Yes if you can hear sound
from only one speaker or from neither speaker during the sound test. There
may be a problem with the TV. Contact
Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance.
No: Select No if you can hear sound
from the speakers. There may be a
problem with your external equipment.
Please check your connections. If the
problem persists, refer to the external
device’s user manual.
● Signal Information
(Digital channels only)The reception quality of over-theair HD channels is either perfect or
the channels are unavailable. Signal
Information displays HD channel signal
strength so you can adjust your aerial
to increase signal strength and receive
HD channels.
● Reset
Reset all setting to factory defaults
except for your network settings.
To reset your TV to its default settings, follow these steps:
1. Go to the Reset menu. (Support →
Self Diagnosis → Reset)
2. The PIN input screen appears. Enter
the four digit security PIN using your
remote.
N If you have not changed the PIN,
enter the default PIN, 0-0-0-0.
You can change the PIN using the
Change PIN option. (System →
Security → Change PIN)3. When done, the PIN screen disappear.
The message "All the settings will
return to factory defaults." appears.
4. Select Yes. All settings are reset.
The TV will turn off and on again
automatically. The Setup screen
appears. For more information about
Setup, see the paper user manual.
● Troubleshooting
If your TV seems to be having a
problem, access the troubleshooting guide for a solution.
Software Update
Menu → Support → Software Update
The Software Update menu lets you
upgrade your TV’s software to the
latest version.
Current Version: This is the software
version already installed in the TV.
Upgrading to the Latest Version you can upgrade in five ways:
– By USB
– Online
– By Channel
– Alternative Software
– Standby Mode Upgrade
The five methods are explained in the
following pages.
N Be careful not to turn off the power
until the upgrade is complete. The
TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software
upgrade. When you upgrade
software, all video and audio
settings you have made will return to
their default settings. We advise you
to write down your settings so that
you can easily reset them after the
upgrade.
● By USB
To upgrade the By USB, follow these
steps:1. Visit www.samsung.com.
2. Click Support at the top of the page.
3. On the Support page, enter your
model number in the Find Your
Product field, and then press Enter or
click Find Product.
4. Under Downloads on the left side,
click Get downloads. The Download
Centre screen appears.
5. Click Firmware on the left side of the
page.6. On the Firmware tab, click the file
icon on the right, and then click Save
File on the pop-up that appears.
7. Extracts the exe archive to your
computer. You should have a single
folder with the same name as the
exe file.
8. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive.
9. Turn on the TV, and then insert the
USB flash drive into the USB port of
the TV.10.In the TV’s menu, go to Support →
Software Upgrade.
11.Select the By USB.
N Please be careful not to remove
the USB drive until the upgrade is
complete.
● Online
The Online function lets you download
the upgrade software directly from the
Internet into your TV and then upgrade
the software in one operation. To use Online, you must have configured your
TV to connect to your network and the
TV must be connected to the Internet.
See the "Setting up the Network"
instructions.
To upgrade using the Online, follow
these steps:
1. Select the Online. The Connecting to
Server message appears.
2. If there is a download available, the Download popup appears with
a progress bar and the download
starts.
3. When the download is complete,
the Upgrade Query screen appears
with three choices: Upgrade Now,
Upgrade Later, or Don't Upgrade.
– If you select Upgrade Now, the TV
upgrades the software, turns off,
and then turns on automatically.
– If you do not make a selection in one minute or select Upgrade
Later, the TV stores the new
upgrade software. You can
upgrade the software later using
the Alternative Software function.
– If you select Don't Upgrade, the
TV cancels the upgrade.
● By Channel
Upgrade the software using the
broadcasting signal.
N If the function is selected during the software transmission period,
software will be automatically
searched and downloaded.
N The time required to download the
software is determined by the signal
status.
● Alternative Software
The Alternative Software option
lets you upgrade using a file the TV
downloaded earlier, but you decided
not to install immediately, or a file downloaded by the TV in Standby
Mode (See Standby Mode Upgrade in
the next section).
To upgrade using Alternative Software,
follow these steps:
1. If upgrade software has been
downloaded, you will see the
software version number to the right
of Alternative Software.
2. Select Alternative Software.3. The TV displays a message asking if
you want to upgrade. Select Yes. The
TV begins the upgrade.
4. When the upgrade is complete, the
TV turns off automatically, and then
turns on.
● Standby Mode Upgrade
You can set the Standby Mode Upgrade
function so that the TV downloads new
upgrade software when it is in Standby
mode.In Standby mode, the TV is off, but
its Internet connection is active. This
allows the TV to download upgrade
software automatically, when you are
not using it. Because the TV is turned
on internally, the screen may glow
slightly. This phenomenon may continue
for more than 1 hour until the software
download is complete.
To set Standby Mode Upgrade, follow these steps:
1. Select the Standby Mode Upgrade.
2. Select Off, 1 hour later, 2 hours later,
0:00, 2:00, 12:00 or 14:00.
– Off: If you select Off, the TV will
notify you with a pop up message
when new upgrade software is
available.
– 1 hour later / 2 hours later / 0:00
/ 2:00 / 12:00 / 14:00: The TV
will automatically download new upgrade software when it is in
Standby mode with the power off.
N To use the Standby Mode Upgrade
function, your TV must be connected
to the Internet.
Contact Samsung
Menu → Support → Contact Samsung
View this information when your TV
does not work properly or when you
want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call
centres and how to download products
and software.
Remote Management
Menu → Support → Remote Management
Remote Management lets our Call
Centre access and control your
Samsung Product remotely to
troubleshoot a problem. Use Remote
Management only when you have a problem, and contact our Call Centre
first, before you activate Remote
Management.
You can find the current number of
our Call Centre on the Support page
at www.samsung.com under Contact
support.
Smart Hub
Menu → Support → Smart Hub
Smart Hub lets you connect to the Internet and enjoy a variety of Internet
and multimedia contents. For more
information on how to use the Smart
Hub, see “Smart Hub” in the e-Manual.Using the 3D function
for LED 4500 - 5700 Series : This function is not
supported.
3D
Menu → Picture → 3D
This exciting new feature enables you
to view 3D content. To fully enjoy
this feature, you must need a pair of
Samsung 3D Active Glasses to view 3D
video.
Advanced FeaturesIMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY
INFORMATION FOR 3D PICTURES.
Read and understand the following safety
information before using the TV’s 3D function.
[ Warning
Some viewers may experience
discomfort while viewing 3D TV such
as dizziness, nausea and headaches.
If you experience any such symptom,
stop viewing 3D TV; remove the 3D Active Glasses and rest.
Watching 3D images for an extended
period of time may cause eye strain.
If you feel eye strain, stop viewing
3D TV; remove your 3D Active
Glasses and rest.
A responsible adult should frequently
check on children who are using the
3D function. If there are any reports
of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or
nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest.
Do not use the 3D Active Glasses
for other purposes (such as general
eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective
goggles, etc.)
Do not use the 3D function or 3D
Active Glasses while walking or
moving around. If you use the 3D
function or 3D Active Glasses while
walking or moving around you
can injure yourself by running into objects, tripping, or falling.
● 3D Mode
Select the 3D input format.
N If you want to experience the 3D
effect fully, put the 3D Active Glasses
on first, and then select the 3D Mode
from the list below that provides the
best 3D viewing experience.
Off : Turns the 3D function off.
: Changes a 2D image to 3D.
: Displays two images next to each other.
: Displays one image above another.
N The 3D Mode may differ depending
on the input signal.
N Some file formats may not support
.
● 3D Perspective
Adjusts overall 3D perspective of onscreen image.
● Depth
Adjusts overall depth.● L/R Change
Swaps the left and right pictures.
● 3D Optimisation for LED TV
Automatically adjusts the picture
overall to provide an optimal 3D effect.
Support resolution (16:9 only)
HDMI3D Format Resolution Frequency (Hz)
/
1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 /
30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
Frame Packing
1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 /
29.97 / 30 Hz
Component
Resolution Frequency (Hz)
1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
DTVResolution Frequency (Hz)
1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz
1920 x 1080P 25 Hz
Videos / Photos (In AllShare Play)
N Refer to "Supported Subtitle and
AllShare Play file formats" in the
Other Information section.
Resolution supported for HDMI PC mode
The optimal resolution for 3D in the HDMI PC mode is 1920 x 1080.
If the input resolution is not 1920 x
1080, the TV may not display images
properly in 3D display or full screen
mode.
How to watch the 3D images
Some 3D modes may not be available
depending on the format of the image
source.
To watch in 3D, you must wear 3D Active Glasses and turn the glasses on
by pressing the power button.
1. Go to the 3D screen. (Picture → 3D)
2. Select the 3D Mode, The 3D Mode
screen appears.
3. Select the 3D Mode option for the
image you want to view. The screen
goes blank for a moment, and then
reappears in the 3D mode you
selected.Read These Notes Before Using the 3D
Function...
The 3D Mode is set to Off
automatically when you access
Smart Hub function.
The 3D Mode is set to its memorised
configuration value automatically
when you change the input source.
Some Picture functions are disabled
in 3D mode.
PIP is not supported in 3D mode. 3D Active Glasses from Samsung’s
previous IR type 3D products and 3D
glass from other manufacturers are
not supported.
When the TV is initially powered on,
it may take some time until the 3D
display is optimized.
The 3D Active Glasses may not work
properly if there is any other 3D
product or electronic device turned
on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic
devices as far away as possible from
the 3D Active Glasses.
Be sure to stay within the viewing
angle and optimum TV viewing
distance when watching 3D pictures.
Otherwise, you may not be able to
see 3D effects properly.
The ideal 3D viewing distance is
three times or more the height of the
screen. For example, if your screen is two feet high, you should sit at
least six feet from the screen. We
recommend sitting so that your eyes
are level with the screen.Smart Hub
Menu → Support → Smart Hub
Using Smart Hub, you can stream
movies, videos, and music from the
Internet, access various for pay or freeof-charge applications and view them
on your TV.
Application content includes news,
sports, weather forecasts, stock market
quotes, maps, photos, and games.
N You can also start this function by pressing the ™ button on the remote
control.
Notice
Samsung Electronics takes no legal
responsibility for any interruption of
the Smart Hub service caused by the
service provider for any reason.
Application services may be provided
in English only and the contents
available may vary, depending on your area.
For more information about a Smart
Hub service, visit the web site of the
applicable service provider.
The Smart Hub service downloads
and processes data via the Internet
so that you can enjoy the Internet
contents on your TV screen. If the
Internet connection is unstable,
the service may be delayed or
interrupted. Furthermore, the player may turn off automatically
in response to conditions on the
Internet. If this occurs, check the
Internet connection and try again.
The services provided are subject
to change by the Smart Hub service
provider without notice.
The Smart Hub service contents may
differ depending on the player’s
firmware version.To start Smart Hub for the first time, follow
these steps:
1. Press the ™ button.
2. The Smart Hub screen appears. In
a few cases, the Country screen
appears immediately.
3. If the Country screen has appeared,
select your country using your
remote.
N Some applications are available
only in certain countries.4. The General Disclaimer screen
appears. Select Agree.
N Screens can take a few seconds
to appear.
5. The Samsung Service Privacy policy
screen appears. Select Agree.
6. The Update Pop-up appears. Select
OK.
7. The Service Update screen appears
and installs a number of services and
applications. When done, it closes. The Smart Hub screen displays
the downloaded applications and
services. This may take some time.
N Smart Hub may close momentarily
during the installation process.
N A number of screens may appear
after installation. You can close
them or let them close on their
own.
8. To start an application, select an
application using your remote.Using the Keypads and Keyboards
A number of Smart Hub applications
display a numeric keypad or a QWERTY
keyboard so you can enter account
names, passwords, and other data.
In most applications, you can toggle
between the numeric keypad and the
QWERTY keyboard by selecting the b
button.Using the Numeric Keypad
When the keypad is displayed, you
can use your remote to enter letters
in lower or upper case, numbers,
punctuation, and symbols.
There are two ways to enter characters,
in the ABC mode and in the XT9 mode.
Method 1: Using the keypad of ABC
type.
Example: Inputting “105Chang”.1. Select the TTX/MIX key three times
using your remote to change the
input mode from lower case to
numbers.
2. Select 1, 0 and 5 in numerical order
on your remote.
3. Select the TTX/MIX key three times
using your remote to change the
input mode from numbers to upper
case.
4. Select 2 three times using your remote to input C.
5. Input the rest of “Chang” using your
remote in the same way. When done,
select OK.
Method 2: Using the Keypad of XT9
type.
To change to XT9 mode, follow these
steps:
A.With the Numerical keypad displayed,
open the Tools menu using your remote.
B. On the Tools menu, select XT9 text
input.
C. Select On, and then select OK.
Example: Inputting“105Chang”.
1. Select the TTX/MIX key three times
using your remote to change the
input mode from lower case to
numbers.
2. Select 1, 0 and 5 in numerical order
on your remote.3. Select the TTX/MIX key three
times using your remote to change
the input mode from numbers to
capitalized case.
4. Select in sequence: 2, 4, 2, 6, 4. A
thin window appears at the top of
the screen displaying a list of words
you can enter.
Using the QWERTY Keypad
If you have a USB or Bluetooth keyboard attached to the TV, and the
screen is displaying the QWERTY
keyboard, you can use the attached
keyboard just like a regular keyboard.
Type a character and the character
appears on the screen.
If you don't have a USB or Bluetooth
keyboard attached and the QWERTY
keyboard is displayed, use your remote
to highlight and then select letters,
numbers, and symbols on the keyboard one at a time.
N Select the Caps or Shift button to
display Capital letters. Select again
to re-display lower case.
N Select the 1 button to display
symbols and icons. Select again to
re-display letters.
N If XT9 text input is On, words will
appear in a ribbon at the top of the
page. Select the } button to select a
word in the ribbon.Using the coloured and function
buttons with the QWERTY Keypad
● a Delete All
Delete all inputted character.
● b Numeric / QWERTY
Toggles the keypad mode between
Numeric keypad mode and QWERTY
mode.
N When the keypad is set to
QWERTY mode, you can input characters using a USB or
Bluetooth keyboard connected on
the TV.
● { Space
You can enter a space character.
● T Settings
Displays the options menu.
Input Language: Select an input
language.
XT9 text input: Turns the XT9 word
function on or off. Available in both Numeric Keypad and QWERTY mode
when you use the remote or a mouse
to select and enter characters.
● E Enter
Enter the selected character.
● R Return
Return to the previous menu.
● π Prev Page
Display the previous set of symbols/
icons.
N Available only when the keypad screen is in symbol/icon mode (
).
● µ Next Page
Display the next set of symbols/
icons.
N Available only when the keypad
screen is in symbol/icon mode (
).
Creating an Account
To establish your own, exclusive configuration of Smart Hub, create your
own Samsung Account.
N You must use an e-mail address as
an ID.
N You can register up to 10 User
Accounts.
N You do not need an account to use
Smart Hub.
To create an account, follow these
steps:1. On the Smart Hub screen, select a
using your remote. The Login screen
appears.
2. Select Create Account using your
remote. The Create Account screen
appears.
3. Select Samsung Account. An entry
screen and keypad appear.
4. Use the keypad to enter your e-mail
address. This will serve as your ID.
N If you have a Bluetooth or USB keyboard attached to the TV, use
the keyboard to enter the e-mail
address. Then, in Steps 6 through
10, use the keyboard to enter the
required password. Note that after
you type in the e-mail address
and password, you will need to
use your remote to continue.
5. When done, select OK. The Login
screen reappears.
6. Select Password. The Passwordscreen and a keypad appear.
7. Use the keypad to enter a password.
The password can be any
combination of letters, numbers, and
symbols.
N Select a using your remote to
display or hide the password as
you enter it.
8. When done, select OK.
9. Select Confirm Password. The
Password screen and a keypad re-appear.
10.Repeat Steps 7 and 8.
11.When done, select Create Account.
The Confirmation window appears.
12.Select OK. The Continue to register
service ID window appears.
13.Select OK.
N If you don’t have existing provider
accounts or do not want to register
existing accounts at this time, select
Cancel. You can also let the window close on its own in about a minute.
14.The Register service account window
appears.
N If you have existing accounts
with any of the listed providers,
you can associate the provider
account and the provider account
password with your Samsung
Account. Registration makes it
easier to access the provider’s web
site. For registration instructions, go to Step 2 in Account Manager
under Settings in the “Configuring
Smart Hub with Settings” section
of this manual.Customizing the Home Screen
● a Login / Logout
To log in to your Samsung Account,
follow these steps:
1. With the Smart Hub main screen
displayed on your TV, select a
using your remote. The Login screen
appears.
2. Select the ^ next to the Samsung
Account entry filed. A drop down list appears.
N If you want to input your Samsung
Account name manually, select
the Samsung Account entry field.
A keypad screen appears. Input
your Samsung Account manually.
When done, go to Step 4.
3. Select your ID from the list that
appears. The Login screen reappears.
4. Select Password. The Passwordwindow and a keypad appear.
5. Enter your password using your
remote. When done, select OK.
N If you want Smart Hub to enter
your password automatically, select
Remember my password. after you
have entered your password. A c
mark appears. Smart Hub will now
enter your password automatically
when you select or enter your ID.
N If you want to log in to Smart Hubautomatically when Smart Hub
function starts, select Sign me in
automatically. A c mark appears.
N If you forget your Samsung account
password, you can reset it. Select
b using your remote. A popup
message appears. Select OK. Smart
Hub will send a guide to your e-mail
address that explains how to reset
your password.
● b WallpaperYou can change the background image
on the Smart Hub home screen.
● { Account Manager
Lets you register your service provider
accounts, delete or deactivate
your Samsung account. For more
information about Account Manager,
see "Configuring the Smart Hub with
the Settings Menu" in this section.
N Available only when you have logged
in to Smart Hub.Using the Tools menu with Smart Hub
N Depending on the icons and folders
displayed on the Smart Hub screen,
some of the functions listed below may
not appear.
● Login / Logout
Log in or log out of your Samsung
Account.
● Wallpaper
You can change the background image on the Smart Hub home screen.
● Move
The Move function lets you change the
screen position of an application or a
folder.
To use the Move function, follow these
steps:
1. Select an application icon or a folder,
and then open the Tools menu using
your remote.2. Select the Move. A position change
screen appears.
3. Move the icon using your remote.
When the icon is in the position of
your choice, select the icon. The
application icon moves to its new
location.
● Move to Folder
The Move to Folder function lets you
move an application to a folder.To use the Move to Folder function,
follow these steps:
1. Select an application, and then open
the Tools menu using your remote.
2. Select the Move to Folder. The Move
to Folder window opens.
3. Select a folder using your remote.
A move finished message appears.
Select OK. The message window
closes. The application has been
moved to the folder.N If you select an application in a
folder, you can use the Move to
Folder to move the application to the
Smart Hub screen.
To access an application in a Folder
1. On the Smart Hub screen, select a
folder. The folder opens.
2. Select an application you want to
execute. The application service
starts.● Delete
The Delete function lets you delete
applications from Smart Hub.
To use the Delete function, follow these
steps:
1. Select an application, and then open
the Tools menu using your remote.
2. Select the Delete. The message
Do you want to delete the selected
item(s)? appears.3. Select OK. The application is deleted.
● New Folder
The New Folder function lets you create
and name new folders. You can move
applications into the folders
you have created.
To use the New Folder function, follow
these steps:
1. Open the Tools menu using your
remote.2. Select the New Folder in the menu.
The New Folder pop-up and a
keyboard screen appear.
3. Using the keyboard and your remote,
enter a name for the folder.
4. When done, select OK. The New
Folder screen closes and the New
Folder appears on the Smart Hub
screen.
● Rename Folder
The Rename Folder function lets you rename folders.
To use the Rename Folder function,
follow these steps:
1. Select a folder, and then open the
Tools menu using your remote.
2. Select the Rename Folder. The
Rename Folder window and a
keyboard screen appear.
3. Enter a new name using your remote
or edit the old name.4. When done, select OK. The Rename
Folder window closes and the new
or revised name appears below the
folder.
● Lock
The Lock function lets you lock some
applications in Smart Hub so they
cannot be opened without entering the
password.
To use the Lock function, follow these steps:
1. Select an application, and then open
the Tools menu using your remote.
2. Select Lock. The Security window
appears.
3. Enter your security PIN using the
remote. If you have not created a
PIN, enter “0-0-0-0”.
4. A confirmation message screen
appears. Select OK. The message
screen closes and a lock symbol appears to left of the application.
● Unlock
To use the Unlock function, follow
these steps:
1. Select a locked application, and then
open the Tools menu using your
remote.
2. Select Unlock. The Security window
appears.
3. Enter your security PIN using the remote. If you have not created a
PIN, enter “0-0-0-0”.
4. A confirmation message screen
appears. Select OK. The message
screen closes and the lock symbol to
left of the application disappears.
● Information
Depending on application, you can
view the detailed information about the
selected application.
N You can also lock or unlock the application on the Detailed
Information screen.
Configuring Smart Hub with the Settings
Menu
The Settings menu gives you access
to Account Manager, Service Manager,
Reset, and About Smart Hub functions.
To use these three functions, you must
be logged into your Samsung Smart
Hub account.To access the Settings menu, and then
select a menu item, follow these steps:
1. Open the Tools menu using your
remote.
2. Select Settings. The Settings window
appears.
3. Select a menu item using your
remote.
● Account Manager
The Account Manager menu contains functions that let you register your
service provider accounts and delete or
deactivate your Samsung Account.
Link to other accounts: If you have
existing accounts with any of the
providers listed by the Link to other
accounts function, you can associate
the provider account and the provider
account password with your Samsung
Account. If you associate the account,
you will be able to log onto the account through Smart Hub easily,
without entering your account name or
password.
N Before register your site account,
corresponding application should be
installed in the Smart Hub.
To use the Link to other accounts
function, follow these steps:
1. In the Account Manager menu, select
the Link to other accounts. The Link to other accounts window appears.
2. Select an application you want
to associate with your Samsung
Account.
3. In the pop-up that appears, select
Register.
4. In the Link to other accounts entry
screen, enter your site ID and
password using your remote. When
done, select OK.
N This is the ID and password you normally use to access your
account on this application.
5. If you have entered the ID and
password correctly, the Registered
successfully. message appears.
6. If want to add another service
application, and then repeat Steps
2 through 4 to associate another
service application.
7. When done, select OK.Remove from TV account list: Cancels
all the currently registered Service
Accounts that appear on the Register
service account screen.
Deactivate account: Deactivates your
Samsung Account and deletes it and all
your account settings entirely from the
Smart Hub.
● Service Manager
Auto Ticker: You can set Auto Ticker to come on when the TV powers.
N The Ticker application provides
useful News, Weather, and Stock
Market information. Before you can
set the Auto Ticker on, you must
download the Ticker application into
Smart Hub.
N Depending on your country, the
Ticker application may have a
different service or not be supported.
Push Notification Settings: When on, Push Notification that displays a
notification message when an event
takes place in an application installed
on Smart Hub. The TV will display the
notification message and allow you to
view details of the event even while
you are viewing TV.
● Reset
The Reset function initializes all
downloaded applications, erases all
user accounts and settings from the TV, and resets all Smart Hub settings to the
factory default settings. It then restarts
Smart Hub as if it were starting for the
first time.
Your account, however, remains on
the Smart Hub server. To log into your
account, enter your ID and password
on the Login screen.
To use the Reset function, follow these
steps:1. In the Settings menu, select Reset.
The Reset screen appears.
2. Enter security PIN using your remote.
3. After a few moments, Smart Hub
automatically resets. The screen may
go black, and then Smart Hub reappears. In a few moments, it starts
the re-initialization procedure.
4. To complete the re-initialization, go
to Step 2 in "To start Smart Hub for
the first time, follow these steps:" section of this manual.
● About Smart Hub
The About Smart Hub menu contains
functions that display information
about Smart Hub.
More: Lists information about Smart
Hub including version number, the
number of services installed, memory
usage, and the unique product ID.
Terms of Service Agreement: Display
the Terms of Service Agreement.Using Samsung Apps
Samsung Apps
™ → Samsung Apps
Samsung Apps is a store from which
you can download applications to use
on Samsung TV/AV equipment.
You can enjoy a variety of contents
such as videos, music, photos, games,
useful information etc. using the
downloaded applications.New applications are added regularly.
Using the coloured and function buttons
with Samsung Apps
● a Login / Logout
Log in to or log out of your Samsung
Account.
● b Filter by Price
To toggle the view between All, Paid
and Free.
● { SortTo sort the applications by
Recommended, Name, Date or
Downloaded.
N You can sort all categories except
Most Popular.
● } View Mode
Each time you select } using your
remote, the View Mode toggles
between basic mode and thumbnail
mode.
● π PreviousMove to previous page.
● µ Next
Move to next page.
● T Tools
Displays the option menu.
● R Return
Moves to previous menu.
Using Samsung Apps by category
The following categories are available:
● Most PopularDisplays the most popular applications
for users.
● Video
Includes apps that provide video media
such as movies, TV shows, and short
length videos.
● Game
Includes various game apps such as
sudoku and chess.
● Sports
Includes apps that provide sports content such as game results, images,
and short length video.
● Lifestyle
Includes apps that provide lifestyle
media services such as music, personal
photo management tools, and social
networking such as Facebook and
Twitter.
● Information
Includes apps that provide information
content such as news, financial information, stock quotes, weather, etc.
● Education
Includes apps that provide education
content such as story books, dictionary,
VOD (Video on Demand) for kids etc.
● My Apps
My Apps provides information about
your available App cash coupon and
information about the apps you have
already purchased or installed on your
TV.N You can purchase App cash that you
can use to buy applications through
tv.samsungapps.com.
N Downloaded apps displays the list
of free apps that are installed on the
TV.
● Help
If you have questions about Samsung
Apps, check this section first.
To search for an application in Samsung Apps, follow these steps:
1. On the Samsung Apps screen, select
Search Samsung Apps. The Search
window and keyboard appears.
2. Enter a keyword using your remote.
The keyword should be part of the
name of an application. For example,
enter f-a-c-e to search for Facebook.
3. When done, select OK at the bottom
of the keyboard.
4. Wait until the search result screen displays. After Samsung Apps
displays the results, you can select
an application you want in the search
result screen.
N You can find a keyword in the search
history If you have searched using
that keyword before.
N If you have a keyboard and/or a
mouse connected to your TV, you
can use the mouse to select the
Search Samsung Apps field and the keyboard to type in the keyword.Search
™ → Search
(May not be available, depending on
your country.)
Easily search for and access content
from diverse sources (e.g. applications,
Your Video, AllShare Play)
1. On the Smart Hub, select Search at
the top of the screen or press the
Search button on your remote.
2. If you want to input a search term directly, select Enter search keyword.
entry field A keypad screen appears.
Enter the search term using your
remote.
N If you want to search by category,
select a category below the field
using your remote.
Using the Search function by category
● Your Video
Personalize your movie-watching with a customized video on demand (VOD)
recommendation service.
● Most searched
You can search by selecting a key word
in the key word list. The key word list
displays words you frequently use for
searches.
● Top application
You can search applications and
services in the application list. The
application list displays apps that users download frequently.
● Search history
Lets you delete previously used
keywords from the search history list.
Also, If you select Delete All, you can
delete all your search history.
Using the coloured and function buttons
with Search
● b Refresh
Refresh the Search function.● T Tools
You can set general parameters for the
Search function or delete the search
history.
● R Return
Return to the previous menu.
Using the Tools menu with Search
● General Settings
Keyword recommendation: Turns the
Keyword Recommendation function on or off.
Search area: Sets a search scope. The
default is allowed all application.
To customize a search area, follow
these steps:
1. On the Search screen, open the
Tools menu using your remote.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select an application in the Search
area. A c mark disappears from the
check box.N When you remove the c mark,
you remove that application from
the search scope. Only checked
applications are included.
4. When done, press the RETURNR
button.
● Search history
Lets you delete previously used
keywords from the the search history
list. Also, If you select Delete All, you
can delete all your search history.To delete a search history keyword,
follow these steps:
1. On the Search screen, open the
Tools menu using your remote.
2. Select Search history.
3. Select a keyword in the Keyword list.
4. Press the E button. The keyword
disappears from the list.Your Video
™ → Your Video
(May not be available, depending on
your country.)
Using this service from Smart Hub, you
can get video recommendation, search
for movies from multiple providers, and
stream or purchase movies. To stream
or purchase movies, you must have the
vendors app installed in Smart Hub.
Depending on the vendor, you may also need a vendor account.
Using the Your Video Search Tab
1. On the Smart Hub screen, select
Your Video.
2. If this is the first time you have
accessed Your Video, the Privacy
Notice appears. Read the notice, and
then select Agree.
3. When the Your Video screen appears,
it displays a list of recommended movies with Recommended at the
top of the screen highlighted. Move
the highlight from the top of the
screen down to the first movie, and
then scroll the movies to the right to
view all the movies in the list.
4. To see additional lists of movies,
move the highlight back to the top
of the screen. You can select - in
addition to Recommended - New
releases, Top 20 films, Top 20 TV shows, and From friends.
5. To select a movie, highlight it,
and then press the E button. The
movie's Data screen appears. On
this screen you can view Basic
Information, Director/Cast, Photos,
Awards, and Related Movies.
6. To watch the movie, select Watch. A
list of online vendors that have the
movie available for rent or purchase
appears. Renting usually means you can stream the movie for a certain
number of hours or days.
N To go to a vendor's web site,
you must have that vendor's app
installed in Smart Hub. To install
apps, access Samsung Apps on
the main Smart Hub screen.
7. You can search for a particular
movie. To search, select { with your
remote. The Search Entry screen and
a keyboard appear.8. Enter the name of the movie into
the Search field. As you enter
characters, the Search function will
display suggestions below. You can
either continue entering characters,
or, if your movie appears, move the
highlight down and select it. The
movie's Data screen appears (See
Steps 5 and 6).
N If you are entering using a
keyboard, you can either press Enter or you can move the
highlight down using the down
arrow key.
Using the Function and Coloured
Buttons on the Search Tab
● a Login / Logout
To login to your Smart Hub account or
log out.
● { Search
To search for movies or videos (Steps 7 and 8).
● T My Page
Displays your My Video Bookmarks,
Likes/Shares (if you have a Facebook
or Twitter account registered in Smart
Hub), and lets you establish certain
Preferences.
● R Return
Return to the previous menu.
Using Function and Coloured Buttons on a Movie's Data Page
● a Login / Logout
● To log in to your Smart Hub account
or log out.
● b Bookmark / Unbookmark
To bookmark a movie or video or
to remove the bookmark. When you
bookmark, Bookmark appears on the
left side of the screen. Bookmarked
movies or videos are listed on My
Page.● { Search
To search for movies or videos (Steps
7 and 8).
● } Home
To go to the My Video Home screen.
● T My Page
Displays your My Video Bookmarks,
Likes/Shares (if you have a Facebook
or Twitter account registered in
Smart Hub), and lets you establish
certain Preferences.● R Return
Return to the previous page or menu.
Using the Your Video Genre Tab
When you start Your Video, the Your
Video screen displays the Search tab.
You can also display the Genres tab
which sorts movies and videos by
genre.
1. On the Your Video Search tab, move
the highlight to the bottom of the screen, and then select Genres. The
Genres tab appears.
2. On the Genres tab, select either
Movies or TV show on the left side
of the screen.
3. On the right side of the screen,
select the genre (Action/adventure,
Animated, etc.). Your Video displays
the Genre Movie or TV Show List
screen with the movies or TV shows
in the genre you selected.4. Highlight a movie or TV show and
then select it. The Data screen for
that movie or TV show appears.
Using the Function and Coloured
Buttons on a Genre Movie or TV Show
List Screen
● a Login / Logout
To log in to your Smart Hub account
or log out.
● b GenresTo re-display the Genres tab.
● { Search
To search for movies or videos.
● } Sort
To sort movies or videos by Ratings,
Year, or Title.
● T My Page
Displays your My Video Bookmarks,
Likes/Shares (if you have a Facebook
or Twitter account registered in
Smart Hub), and lets you establish certain Preferences.
● R Return
Return to the previous page or menu.
Using My Page
My Page displays your My Video
Bookmarks, Likes/Shares (if you
have a Facebook or Twitter account
registered in Smart Hub), and lets you
establish certain Preferences. When
the T My Page icon is displayed at the bottom of a screen, select or press
T. My Page appears displaying your
bookmarked movies and videos. Select
a bookmarked movie or video, access
your Likes/Shares, or view or change
your Preferences.
Using the Function and Coloured
Buttons on the My Video Screen
● a Login / Logout
To log in to your Smart Hub account or log out.
● { Search
To search for movies or videos.
● } Home
To go to the My Video Home screen.
● R Return
Return to the previous page or menu.Family Story
™ → Family Story
Family Story feature allows you to
share photos, messages, and events
with your family.
● Create Group
If you are starting Family Story for
the first time, you can create a family
group and invite members to join.
● Invite Members
After creating a group, you can invite the family members who you want to
share your family's photos and events
with to join.
● Join Group
If you were invited to join a family
group by a family member, you can
select Join Group to enjoy Family Story
services.
N You must be logged into your Smart
Hub account to create a family
group, access your group, or use Family Story.
To create a family group, follow these
steps:
1. On the Smart Hub screen, select
Family Story. The Family Story
screen appears.
2. Select Create Group. The Create and
invite pop-up appears.
3. Select OK. The Family Story
agreement appears. Read the agreement, and then select Agree.
N It is required to agree with the
terms prior to using Family Story.
4. Enter a Group Name, Your Name, and
Your Phone Number without dashes
using your remote.
N If you want to add a group image,
select an image box. (An external
device containing photos must be
connected to your TV via USB.)
N * Fields marked with an asterisk are required.
5. When done, select Done. The group
creation is completed.
N If you want to invite members to
your group, select Invite Members.
If you want to go your Family
Story, select Go to Family Story. If
you selected Invite Members, go
to Step 4 in the procedure below.
To invite members to your Family Story group, follow these steps:
1. From the starting menu in Family
Story, open the Tools menu using
your remote, and then select Group
Members. The Group Members
screen appears.
2. Select Invite Members. The Invite
pop-up appears.
3. Select OK. The Invite Members
screen appears.
4. Select Select to enter message.. The keypad screen appears.
5. Enter message using your remote.
When finished, select OK on the
bottom of the keyboard, and then
select Done.
6. Select Phone number or Samsung
account ID. The keypad screen reappears.
7. Enter the prospective member's
phone number or Samsung account
ID using your remote. When finished, select OK on the bottom of the
keyboard, and then, select Done.
N If you want to add more
prospective members, select
Add Member, and repeat Steps 4
through 7.
8. When finished adding members,
select Done. The Member Invitation
Completed screen appears.
9. If invited by phone number, 4-digit
invite code will be generated and the code needs to be shared with
the member. If invited by Samsung
Account, the member will be notified
about the invitation via e-mail. Select
OK to finish.
To join a group using the received invite
code, follow these steps:
1. Start Family Story and accept the
terms.
2. You will see a pop-up message asking about invitation type. If
you were invited by phone number,
please select Invite Code. If you were
invited by Samsung account, please
select Samsung Account.
3. If joining by Samsung Account, a
list of invitations from your family
groups will be displayed. Select
Accept to join. You can select Deny
if you don't want to join the inviting
group.4. If joining by Invite Code, first enter
your phone number using your
remote. When done, select Done.
Then you will see a list of invitations
from your family groups. Select
Accept to join. You can select Deny
if you don't want to join the inviting
group. Enter the 4-digit invite code
shared by your family member, and
then select Done to finish.
5. Select OK. Joining your family group has been completed.
Creating an Album
You can upload pictures from a USB
device and create a picture album
which other group members can view
and add to.
To create a picture album, follow these
steps:
1. Attach a USB device containing the pictures you want to upload to the
picture album to your TV.
2. Log into your Smart Hub account,
and then start Family Story.
3. Highlight and select the "create
album" icon on the left side of the
Family Story screen or select b
Create using your remote. The Create
screen appears.
4. Highlight and select Add on the
Album tab. The File Browser screen appears.
5. Highlight and select the USB device.
The device opens, displaying either
folders or picture files.
6. If picture files are displayed,
highlight and select each file you
want to upload. A check appears on
each file.
7. If folders are displayed, highlight and
select the folder that contains the
pictures you want to upload. Then, select each file you want to upload.
A check appears on each file.
N You can highlight and select the
Select All button on the right side
if you want to select all displayed
pictures.
8. When finished, highlight and select
the OK button on the right side. The
Create screen re-appears displaying
some or all the photos you want to
upload.N To delete a photo from the
upload queue, select T Tools.
In the Tools menu, select Delete
Photos. Either highlight and select
individual photos or select Delete
All. When done, select the Delete
button on the bottom of the page.
A pop-up appears asking whether
you want to delete the photos.
Select Yes.
9. Highlight and select the Done button on the bottom of the screen. The
photos are uploaded, and then the
Story of the Day screen appears,
displaying the photos.
10.Select R Return. The Cover Story
(Main Family Story) screen appears
displaying the photos.
N The Cover Story screen runs a
continuous slide show of photos
you uploaded. It also displays
some of the photos on a "shelf" below the slide show area.
Deleting a Picture
To delete a picture, follow these steps:
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the strip of photos on the
bottom left. The Story of the Day
screen appears.
2. Highlight and select the photo you
want to delete.3. Select T Tools.
4. In the Tools menu, select Delete. A
message appears asking if you want
to delete the photo.
5. Select OK. The picture is deleted.
Editing a Picture
The Edit function lets you add a memo
to a picture or add the picture to an
event.To edit a picture, follow these steps:
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the strip of photos on the
bottom left. The Story of the Day
screen appears.
2. Highlight and select the photo you
want to edit.
3. Select T Tools.
4. In the Tools menu, select Edit. The
Edit screen appears.
5. To add a memo, highlight and select the "enter Memo" field. The Enter
Memo screen and keyboard appear.
6. To add the picture to an event,
highlight and select Find event.
The Events list screen appears. Use
the left and right arrow buttons to
change the month. Use the up and
down arrow buttons to select an
event. Press Enter when done.
7. After you have added a memo
or added the photo to an event, highlight and select Done on the
bottom of the screen.
Creating a Memo
You can create a memo that all group
members can see.
To create a memo, follow these steps:
1. Log into your Smart Hub account,
and then start Family Story.
2. Highlight and select the "create memo" display on the right side of
the Family Story screen or select b
Create using your remote. The Create
screen appears.
3. On the Memos tab, highlight and
select the "enter Memo" area. The
Enter memo screen and keyboard
appear.
4. Use your remote to highlight and
select letters. If you have a USB
or Bluetooth keyboard attached to the TV, use the Keyboard to type in
letters.
5. When done, select OK on the on
screen keyboard, press the E
button. If you are using a physical
keyboard, press the Enter key on the
key board. The Create screen reappears displaying the memo.
N To edit the memo, highlight and
select the "enter Memo' area
again. The Enter memo screen and key board re-appear.
6. Highlight and select the Done button
on the bottom of the screen. The
Story of the Day screen appears
displaying the memo.
7. Select R Return to go back to the
main Family Story screen.
Deleting a Memo
To delete a memo, follow these steps:1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the memos on the right
side of the screen. The Story of the
Day screen appears.
2. Highlight and select the memo you
want to delete.
3. Select T Tools.
4. In the Tools menu, select Delete. A
message appears asking if you want
to delete the memo.
5. Select OK. The memo is deleted.Editing a Memo
To edit a memo, follow these steps:
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the memos on the right
side of the screen. The Story of the
Day screen appears.
2. Highlight and select the memo you
want to edit.
3. Select T Tools.4. In the Tools menu, select Edit. The
Edit screen appears.
5. Highlight and select the Edit field.
The Memo screen and keyboard
appears. Edit the memo, and then
press Enter when done.
6. The Edit screen re-appears. Highlight
and select Done on the bottom of the
screen.
Creating an EventYou can create a record of an event,
such as a birthday party or a wedding,
with pictures, that all group members
can see. You can also create a record
for a future event.
To create an event, follow these steps:
1. Attach a USB device containing the
pictures of the event that you want
to upload to your Family Story.
2. Log into your Smart Hub account, and then start Family Story.
3. Highlight and select the "create
event" display on the right side of
the Family Story screen or select b
Create using your remote. The Create
screen appears.
4. On the Event tab, highlight and select
the Event title field. The Event Title
screen and keyboard appear.
5. Use your remote to highlight and
select letters. If you have a USB or Bluetooth keyboard attached to
the TV, use the keyboard to type in
letters.
6. When done, select OK on the on
screen keyboard, press the E
button. If you are using a physical
keyboard, press E on the keyboard.
7. Highlight and select Done on the
Event Title screen with your remote.
The Event Tab reappears.
8. User your remote to highlight and select the "Enter Description" field.
The Enter Description screen and
keyboard appear.
9. Enter a description of the event the
same way you entered the Event
Title in Step 5. When done, close
the Enter Description screen the
same way you closed the Event Title
screen in Steps 6 and 7.
10.Highlight and select the From field.
The Time Settings screen appears. Use the up and down arrow buttons
on your remote to change the values
in each field. Use the left and right
arrow buttons to move from field to
field. Press Enter when done.
11.Highlight and select the to field. The
Time Setting screen appears. Set the
To time the same way you set the
From time in Step 10.
12.To define the Event Type, highlight
and select the Change button. The Event Type list appears.
13.Use the up and down arrow buttons
on your remote to select an event
type. When done, press the E
button. The Event Tab re-appears.
14.To add photos, highlight and select
the Add button. The File Browser
appears.
15.Highlight and select the USB device.
The device opens, displaying either
folders or picture files.16.If picture files are displayed,
highlight and select each file you
want to upload. A check appears on
each file.
17.If folders are displayed, highlight and
select the folder that contains the
pictures you want to upload. Then,
select each file you want to upload.
A check appears on each file.
N You can highlight and select the
Select All button on the right side if you want to select all displayed
pictures.
18.When finished, highlight and select
the OK button on the right side. The
Event Tab re-appears displaying
some or all the photos you want to
upload.
N To delete a photo from the
upload queue, select T Tools.
In the Tools menu, select Delete
Photos. Either highlight and select individual photos or select Delete
All. When done, select the Delete
button on the bottom of the page.
A pop-up appears asking whether
you want to delete the photos.
Select Yes.
19.When done entering all information
and selecting all photos, highlight
and select the Done button at the
bottom of the Event Tab. Family
Story uploads the photos you selected and then displays the Story
of the Day screen.
20.Select R Return to go back to the
main Family Story screen.
Deleting an Event
To delete an event, follow these steps:
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the events on the bottom
right side of the screen. The Story of the Day screen appears.
2. Highlight and select the event you
want to delete.
3. Select T Tools.
4. In the Tools menu, select Delete. A
message appears asking if you want
to delete the event.
5. Select OK. The event is deleted.
Editing an EventTo edit an event, follow these steps:
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the events on the bottom
right side of the screen. The Story of
the Day screen appears.
2. Highlight and select the event you
want to edit.
3. Select T Tools.
4. In the Tools menu, select Edit. The
Edit screen appears.
5. Edit the elements in the event in the same fashion you first entered them.
6. To remove a photo, highlight the
photo, and then Select T Tools.
7. In the Tools menu, select Disconnect
photos.
8. Highlight and select individual photos
or highlight and select Select All.
9. Highlight and select Delete. A
message appears asking if you want
to delete the photos. Select Yes.
10.When finished editing, highlight and select Done at the bottom of the
page.
Functions on the Cover Story (Main) Screen
On the Cover Story screen, you can
launch a slide show, display individual
pictures, view memos, and view events.
Launching a Slide Show
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the large Slide Show area.
This is the portion of the screen that displays constantly changing
pictures. The slide show starts. The
slide show controls are displayed
momentarily, then disappear.
2. To stop or start the slide show and
to re-display the controls, press
Enter on your remote.
3. To view individual pictures, stop the
slide show, and then press the left or
right arrow button on your remote.
4. To change the speed of the slide show, select the πor µ button.
5. To end the slide show, select R
Return.
Viewing Individual Pictures
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the strip of photos on
the bottom right. The Story of the
Day screen appears displaying the
individual photos.
2. Highlight and select a photo. The individual photo is displayed.
● To add a comment about the
photo, highlight and select the Add
Comment button or select b Add
Comment. The Comment screen and
keyboard appear.
● To watch a slide show that includes
the picture, highlight and select the
picture. The slide show begins.
● To watch a slide show together with
another member of your group, select { Watch together now. This function
lets you and another member of your
group watch the same slide show
on your own TVs, even if you are
thousands of miles apart.
Viewing Individual Memos
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight
and select the memos displayed
on the right side. The Story of the
Day screen appears displaying the individual memos.
2. Highlight and select a memo. The
individual memo is displayed.
● To add a comment about the
memo, highlight and select the Add
Comment button or select b Add
Comment. The Comment screen and
keyboard appear.
Viewing Individual Events
1. On the Cover Story screen, highlight and select the events displayed
on the right side. The Story of the
Day screen appears displaying the
individual events.
2. Highlight and select an event. The
individual event is displayed.
● To add a comment about the
event, highlight and select the Add
Comment button or select b Add
Comment. The Comment screen and
keyboard appear.● To watch a slide show of the pictures
saved in the event, highlight and
select the pictures at the bottom left
of the screen. The slide show begins.
The Tools Menu Functions
The Tools Menu appears on most of
the Family Story screens. This section
provides a run down of all the Tools
Menu functions by screen.
Tools Menu Functions on the Cover Story Screen
Group Members: Lists the current group
members and the current prospective
members with invitations.
My groups: Lists the groups you are a
member of. Also lets you access your
groups.
Settings: Lets you edit your profile
information and set whether your group
will allow new content, new members,
new invitations, and issue event reminders.
Logout: Logs you out of Family Story
and your Smart Hub account. Returns
you to the Smart Hub screen.
Create: Takes you to the Create screen
where you can create a photo album,
memo, or event record.
Updates: Lets you know if there is an
update for the Family Story application,
and lets you download and install it.Tools Menu Functions on the Story of
the Day Screen
Filter: Lets you select what to view
on the Story of the Day screen by
category: All, Album, Memos, Event.
View by Member: Lets you view entries
(Albums, Memos, Events) by member.
The rest of the functions - Group
Members, My groups, Settings, Logout,
and Updates - are the same functions
as the Cover Story screen functions.Other Functions on the Story of the
Day Screen
The Story of the Day screen also has
a date filter function on the bottom of
the screen.
Date created / Date Uploaded: You
can sort the items on the Story of
the Day screen by Date created or
Date Uploaded by highlighting and
then selecting the Date created / Date Uploaded slider button.
You can also quickly move to the
month certain items occurred or were
uploaded by selecting a highlighted
number on the monthly number bar.
You can also select a year, and then a
month. When you select a month, Family
Story displays the items that were
uploaded or occurred in that month.Fitness
™ → Fitness
The Fitness application provided by
Smart Hub lets you track and manage
a fitness and exercise programme you
create.
N To use Fitness, you should be logged
in the Smart Hub.
Read these notes before exercising...
N Please warm-up or stretch before exercising.
N Stop exercising immediately if you
feel pain, or dizzy, exhausted, or
short of breath.
Create Your Profile
When you start Fitness for the first
time, you should create your own
profile. On the Fitness screen, select
Create your profile. A pop-up message
appears. Select Create your profile. The Personal Trainer/Create Profile screen
appears.
1. To go to next step, press the right
arrow button. The Name pop-up
appears.
2. Select First Name. The Username
screen and keyboard appear. Enter
your name. When done, Select OK.
3. Select Last Name. The Username
screen and keyboard re- appear.
Enter your last name. When done, Select OK.
4. Press the right arrow button on your
remote. The Gender pop-up appears.
5. Highlight and select your gender.
When you select our gender, you
will see a black dot appear in your
selection.
6. Press the right arrow button on
your remote until the Date pop-up
appears.
7. Enter your birth date using your remote. It will be used to personalize
some parameters for you.
8. Press the right arrow button remote.
The Units pop-up appears.
9. Select your preferred units. The
selected units will be applied
throughout the Fitness app. Move to
the right again. The Height pop-up
appears.
10.Enter your height. This will be used
to calculate your body mass index (BMI). Move to the right again. The
Weight pop-up appears.
11.Enter your weight. This will be used
to calculate your body mass index
(BMI). Move to the right again. The
application calculates your BMI.
12.The creation of your profile is
finished. The TV displays your profile
information and BMI. To start the
Fitness app, select Enjoy Fitness.Using Fitness with categories
● Exercise
Provides information on your exercise
goal, current status and recommended
contents.
● Progress
Provide information on your basic body
profile, exercise progress, achievement
of your goals, etc.
● Edit
Edit lets you change or adjust your fitness goals.
Selecting Exercise Programs
Fitness displays a number of exercise
videos and programs you can use to
help you reach your fitness goals. Each
of these videos and programs must
be downloaded from Samsung Apps.
Videos labeled VOD (Video on Demand)
are part of a group of free exercise
videos. We suggest you download those first.
To download a VOD programme or
video, follow these steps;
1. On the Fitness screen, highlight and
select a program. A message appears
asking you if you want to go to
Samsung apps.
2. Select Yes. The Samsung Apps
screen appears.
N This may take a few minutes.3. If this is the first time you have
download a VOD programme or
video, you will be directed to
download the VOD video app that
lets you download and play all the
VOD exercise videos.
4. Follow the directions on the screen
to download the VOD video app.
5. After the video app has been
downloaded, press RETURNR several
times to go back to the Fitness screen.
6. You can now select and play any of
the VOD videos.
N As you play these videos, Fitness
notes the video you are using and
calculates the number of calories
you have burned, base on the
video.Kids
™ → Kids
The Smart Hubs Kids app provides a
quick app launcher and a recommended
list of kids and education-related
applications and contents your kids can
start easily and quickly. It also provides
management tools that let you control
what your kids can view in the app and
how long they can watch.Using Kids with categories
● Playground
Displays recommended contents and
applications. When you select an
application or content, the TV executes
the application or contents immediately.
N You can add up to 40 items to the
recommended list. See "My choice"
in this section.
N You can edit the contents list. For
more detailed information, refer to "My choice" in this section.
N Most of the content must be
downloaded from Samsung apps. To
download, follow the directions on
the screen. When the download is
complete, press RETURNR repeatedly
until the Kids app reappears. Start
the contents or app by highlighting
and then selecting it.
● Sticker Book
Displays the Sticker Books with the stickers your kids received. Also, it can
be share with your Family Story.
Your kids can receive the sticker
through these methods:
– By User (parent): You can present a
sticker using the Present Stickers
function in the Parents menu.
– Automatically: Kids presents a sticker
while the child is watching content.Creating a Sticker Book
1. If you want to create a new Sticker
Book, select Sticker Book on the
top of the screen, and then Create a
New Sticker Book at the bottom of
the screen. The Create a New Sticker
Book screen appears.
2. Enter the Sticker Book's name using
your remote. When done, select
Next.
3. Select a colour for the Sticker Book. When done, select Next.
4. Check the created sticker book. If
you want to change a name, select
Edit. If you want to change a colour,
select Back.
5. When done, select Done. A new
Sticker Book is created.
N You can create a new sticker book.
Maximum number of books is 10.
N You can check arrived stickers by
highlighting and selecting New Sticker. Only ten new sticker types
are displayed in New Sticker at one
time.
● Browse all
Displays the kids or education-related
applications list and all contents list.
N When you select an application
or contents, if the application or
contents has not been installed
on the TV, the TV displays the
corresponding download screen from the Samsung Apps screen.
To use Browse all, follow these steps:
1. On the Browse all screen, select
a character. The contents for that
character appears on the right.
2. Select the kind of contents you want.
Videos: Displays the video contents
of the corresponding character.
Games: Displays the game contents
of the corresponding character.Stories: Displays the e-book contents
of the corresponding character.
3. The detailed information screen for
the selected contents appears. You
can play the contents, share the
contents with your Family Story, add
the contents to My choice, and give
the contents a rating.
N If you were purchased already, you
can play the contents. If you are
not purchased, you can download the contents in the Samsung Apps.
● Parents
Lets you edit the Playground, give
stickers to your kids, check usage time,
and set the watching limit alarm.
My choice
You can add or delete contents in the
Playground. The Playground displays
the added contents only.
To add or delete contents in the Playground, follow these steps:
1. On the Parents screen, select My
choice. The My choice screen
appears.
N My choice contains content you
added through the Browse all
screen.
2. Select contents you want to add or
delete in the list. A pop-up message
appears.
3. Select Yes.4. The selected contents is added or
deleted.
Present Stickers
When your kids do a good job today,
you can present a sticker to them.
To present a sticker to your kids, follow
these steps:
1. On the Parents screen, select Present
Stickers. The Present Stickers screen appears.
2. Select a sticker you want to present.
A pop-up message appears.
3. Select Yes.
4. Select a sticker book you want to
put the sticker into, and then select
Present.
N If you want to check a sticker
book, select Check Now. You can
check the stickers in the selected
sticker book.5. The sticker is placed in the sticker
book you selected.
History
Lets you check how long your kids
have used the app through a graph.
Also, lets you check how long your
kids have used each video or content
item. Change a date or content title
using your remote.
Set AlarmLets you set how long your kids can
watch. When the time is up, the alarm
window appears.
To set the time your kids can watch,
follow these steps:
1. On the Parents screen, select Set
Alarm. The Set Alarm screen
appears.
2. Select Timer.
3. Select amount of time. The alarm is set.Web Browser
™ → Web Browser
(May not be available, depending on
your country.)
Using this function provided by the
Smart Hub, you can surf the Internet on
your TV.
1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Web
Browser. The Web Browser screen
appears.
2. Surf the Internet in the same way as on a PC.
Using the coloured and function buttons
with the Web Browser
● b Control Panel
Shows or hides the control panel at the
top of the screen.
● { Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing
You can change the cursor to Link
Browsing mode or Pointer Browsing
mode. In Pointer Browsing mode, you use a pointer to select items on the
screen in the same way you use a
pointer on a computer. In Link Browsing
mode, you move a blue rectangle
from link to link on the screen by
pressing the directional keys on your
remote. Pointer Browsing is best if
you have a mouse attached to the TV.
Link Browsing only works if you are
browsing using your remote.
N When you select Pointer Browsing, you cannot use the remote to select
items in the Tools Menu.
N In Pointer Browsing Mode, you can
use the arrow keys on your remote
to move the pointer.
● } PIP
Turns PIP on or off. With PIP on, you
can watch TV while using the Web
Browser.
● T Tools
Displays the Tools menu.Control Panel: Shows or hides the
control panel in the top of the screen.
Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing: You
can change the cursor to Link Browsing
mode or Pointer Browsing mode.
PIP: Turns PIP on or off.
PIP Settings: Lets you select where
the PIP window is displayed on the
screen and which sound source the TV
plays, sound from the main screen (the
browser) or sound from the sub screen (the PIP window).
Add to Bookmark: Add the current
page to your Bookmarks.
Enable Grabbing / Disable Grabbing:
You can move a current web page in
the direction you choose. To move
a web page, select a page, and then
move it in the direction you wish using
your remote.
N Available only when the cursor is set
to Pointer Browsing.● πµ Scroll up/down
You can scroll the page up or down.
● R Return
Close the Web Browser.
Using the Control Panel with Web Browser
The Web Browser has a series of icons
across the top of the screen which
provide a number of useful functions.
With these icons, you can easily
use the Web Browser. The icons are described below, starting with the icon
on the far left of the screen.
● Back
Moves to the previous web page.
N If there is no previous web page, this
icon will not work.
● Forward
Moves to the next web page.
N If there is no next web page, this
icon will not work.
● Refresh / StopRefreshes the current page or stops the
current connection from loading.
● Home Page
Goes to the URL you specified as
you’re the home page.
● Zoom
You can select a zoom level of 50%,
75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%, 300%
and Fit to screen.
● Bookmarks
Displays the Bookmarks screen. You can bookmark the current page or
select a favourite page to visit from
the bookmark list. You can also sort
by Date, Name, or Times Visited. To
sort, select the Sort. When you select
Enter URL, you can enter in a new URL
address directly using your remote or
mouse and bookmark it. When you
highlight a bookmark, the Option button
appear on the right. In the Option popup, you can edit the selected page or delete the selected page from bookmark
list.
Using the Tools menu with Bookmark
● Delete All
Delete all bookmark lists.
● Add to Bookmark
Bookmarks the current page.
● Import bookmarks
You can import a bookmark file
saved on another device such as a PC.
● Export bookmarks
You can export a bookmark file from
your TV to another device connected
to your TV.
● History
Displays the History screen. You can
select a web page to visit in the History
list. You can also sort by Date, Name,
or Times Visited. To sort, select Sort.
When you select Enter URL, you can enter in a new URL address directly
using your remote or mouse. When you
highlight a page, the Option button
appear on the right. In the Option popup, you can delete the selected page
from the history list or add the selected
page to bookmark.
N If you want to delete all entries in the
history lists, open the Tools menu
and then select Delete All.
● URL FieldShows the URL of the current page. If
you select the URL field, the URL popup appears. Using your remote, you
can enter a new URL directly.
● Windows List
Displays list or images of open windows
(the Windows List). You can open new
window from list (using Open new
window), select and access a window
in the list, select and close a window
in the list, or close all windows. When you select Enter URL, you can enter a
new URL address directly using your
remote or mouse. By clicking the Text/
Image button in the upper right of the
screen, you can toggle the Windows
list between text descriptions of open
windows and images of the open
windows.
Using the Tools menu with Windows
List● Open new window
Open a new web browser window.
The new web browser page
automatically displays the home
page.
● Close all windows
Close all the currently opened
windows listed in Windows List.
After closing all windows, the TV
opens a new web browser window
automatically. The new web browser window automatically displays the
home page.
● Search
Lets you search the web. When you
access the Search entry field, the
Search screen appears.
To search the web by word input,
follow these steps:
1. On the Search screen, select the
search engine.2. Select Enter search keyword.. The
keyboard screen appears.
3. Enter the word you want to use as
the keyword using your mouse or
remote. The TV searches using the
keyword and search engine you
selected.
● Share
Share the current web page with your
Family Story.
● OptionsYou can configure the Web Browser
settings.
Configuring the Web Browser Using Options
Move the cursor to the top of the
screen, and then select the Options
icon.
● Reading Tools
Provides an easy-to-read page by
enlarging the main text. Reading Tools
is not available for all pages.● Approved Sites
Allows to restrict your children’s
access to inappropriate web pages.
Therefore, this function allows access
of only the registered web sites.
N Every time you access the Approved
Sites, the PIN screen appears. The
first time you access Approved Sites,
enter the default PIN, 0-0-0-0 using
the numbers keypad on your remote.
You can change the PIN using the Reset password for Approved Sites
function. See below.
Approved Sites feature: Turns the
Approved Sites function on or off.
Reset password for Approved Sites.:
Change the Approved Sites password.
Add current site: Lets you add the
currently displayed web site to the
Approved Sites list.
Manage Approved Sites: Lets you key
in URLs to add to the Approved Sites list and delete sites from the Approved
Sites list.
N If you turn Approved Sites on and
have not added any sites to the
Approved Sites list, you will not be
able to access any Internet sites.
● Private Browsing
Enable or disable the Privacy mode.
When the Privacy mode is enabled, the
browser does not retain the URLs of
sites you visit. If you want to enable Private Browsing, select Yes.
If the Private Browsing function is
running, the “Stop” icon appears in
front of the URL at the top of the
screen. To disable Private Browsing,
select it again when Private Browsing is
enabled.
● PIP Settings
Lets you configure the PIP function.
PIP Position: Select a position for the
PIP sub-picture.Sound: Select the audio source you will
hear - Main or Sub - when PIP is on.
● Web Browser Settings
You can configure Web Browser
options.
Set as homepage: You can set the
home page.
– Most visited: Set the most frequently
visited URL as the home page.
– Current Page: Sets the current page
as the home page.– Bookmarks: Sets the bookmarks URL
as the home page.
– Enter URL: Lets you key in the URL
of the page you want for your home
page. The keyboard works like a cell
phone texting keyboard.
Pop-up block settings: Turns the Popup Block on or off.
Ad Block Settings: You can determine
whether to block advertisements
and select the URLs for which advertisements are blocked.
– Ad Blocker: Turns the Ad Blocker on
or off.
– Block current page: Adds the current
page to the blocked list.
– Manage blocked sites: You can add
a website for which advertisements
will be blocked by directly keying in
the URL, or you can delete a website
from the list.
General: You can delete your personal information.
– Delete history: Deletes the website
history.
– Delete browsing data: Deletes
Internet access information such as
cookies.
– Reset Settings: Reset all web
browser settings to the factory
defaults.
– Hide Menu: Turns the control panel
auto-hide on or off. If you select on, the control panel on the top will be
hidden and only appear when you
move the pointer to the top of the
screen.
Encoding: You can set the Encoding
setting for web pages to Automatic or
Manual.
– Auto select: Turns automatic
Encoding for web pages on or off.
The browser selects the appropriate
encoding format automatically.– Settings: Select an encoding format
from a list of encoding formats
manually. The format is applied to all
pages.
Pointer: You can set the speed of the
cursor when the cursor is set to Pointer
Mode.
– Pointer Speed: Select a pointer
speed.
Browser Information: Displays the
version and copyright information for the Web Browser.Skype
™ → Skype
Skype created a little piece of software
that makes communicating with people
around the world easy and fun.
With Skype you can say hello or share
a laugh with anyone, anywhere. And
if both of you are on Skype, it’s free.
Communicate with people around the
world!
N To use Skype, you need the Samsung TV Camera (sold separately). Other
company’s TV Cameras are not
compatible with Skype on your TV.
N For more information, download the
Skype user’s manual from “www.
samsung.com.”
[Legal Statement]
Due to the various capabilities of
products featuring the Samsung Smart
Hub - Content Service, as well as limitations in the available content,
certain features, applications, and
services may not be available on all
devices or in all territories.
Some features on Smart Hub may
also require additional peripheral
devices or membership fees that
are sold separately. Please visit
http://www.samsung.com for more
information on specific device
information and content availability. The services and availability of content
through Smart Hub are subject to
change from time to time without prior
notice.AllShare Play
™ → AllShare Play
View or play photos, music, and movie
files located on a USB Mass Storage
Class (MSC) device, a PC, or a DLNA
device (a cell phone, for example) on
your TV.
N To view content on a USB device,
you must plug the device into a USB
port on the TV.
N If you want using a USB HDD, we recommend using a USB HDD that
has a power adapter.
N To play content located on your PC
or on a DLNA compatible cell phone,
you must connect your PC and the
TV to your network and download
and install the AllShare network
software on your PC.
Connecting a USB Device
1. Turn on your TV.2. Connect a USB device containing
photo, music and/or movie files to
the USB port on the TV.
3. When a USB device is connected to
the TV, the New device connected.
window appears. Select a category
you want to play among Videos,
Photos and Music.
N The TV may display the files on the
USB device automatically if it is the
only device connected.4. The AllShare Play Music, Photos, or
Videos screen appears. If the USB
device has folders, the TV displays
a list of folders. Highlight and then
select a folder. If the USB device
does not have folders, the TV will
display files or thumbnails.
5. Highlight and then select a file to
view or play.
N To select a different Content
Type or Device Type, press the RETURNR button repeatedly until
the AllShare Play main screen
appears.
N For more information about
playing back files, see the section
of this manual starting with
"Controlling Video Playback".
Read this information before using AllShare
Play with a USB device.Restrictions and Cautions
Before connecting your device to the
TV, please back up your files ensure
against file damage or data loss.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for any
data file damage or data loss.
Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated
USB 1 (HDD 5V 1.0A) port.
Do not disconnect a USB device
while it is being read by the TV.
If you connect a USB device with a USB extension cable, the TV may not
recognize the USB device or read the
files on the device.
If a USB device you connect to the
TV is not recognized, the files on the
device are corrupted, or a file in the
list is not played, connect the USB
device to a PC, format the device,
re-copy the files to the device, and
then try playing again.
If a file you deleted from the PC is still found when you run Smart Hub,
use the “Empty the Recycle Bin”
function on the PC to permanently
delete the file.
If your PC cannot construct a
functional database of saved files
on a USB device because there is no
free space on the USB device, you
may not be able to view any new
files you have added, even though
you have saved these files to the USB device.
Supported Devices
Certain types of USB Digital camera
and audio devices may not be
compatible with this TV.
AllShare Play supports only USB
Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices.
MSC is a Mass Storage Class BulkOnly Transport device. Examples of
MSC include Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers, and USB HDD (USB
HUB are not supported). Devices
should be connected directly to the
TV’s USB port.
If more than 2 PTP (Picture Transfer
Protocol) devices are connected, you
can only use one at a time.
If more than two MSC devices are
connected, some of the devices may
not be recognized.
A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V)
may not be supported.
If the TV has no input during the
time set in Auto Protection Time, the
Screensaver will run.
The power-saving mode of some
external hard disk drives may be
released automatically when you
connect them to the TV.
File system and formats The USB function might not work
properly with unlicensed multimedia
files.
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not
supported.
The file system supports FAT16,
FAT32, and NTFS.
AllShare Play supports only the
Sequential jpeg format. It does not
support the Progressive jpeg format.
The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display
on the screen.
The maximum supported JPEG
resolution is 15360 X 8640 pixels.
If a file is corrupted or the TV does
not support the file type, the Not
Supported File Format. message
appears.
If the files are sorted by Folder view,
the TV can display the names of up
to 1000 files in each folder. If the number of files and folders
saved on a USB storage device is
over approximately 8000, some files
and folders may not appear and
some folders may not be unopenable.
The TV cannot play MP3 files with
DRM that have been downloaded
from a for pay site. Digital Rights
Management (DRM) is a technology
that supports the creation,
distribution, and management of digital content in an integrated
and comprehensive way, including
protecting the rights and interests of
content providers, preventing illegal
copying of contents, and managing
billings and settlements.
Even if a file you want to play is
encoded in a supported format, an
error message may appear due to a
sub container or profile problem.Connecting to a PC through a network
You can play pictures, music, and
videos located on your PC through a
network connection using AllShare
Play.
N For more information on how to
configure your TV and connect it to
your network, refer to “Setting up
the Network” in this manual.
N To view content located on your
PC, you must have connected your TV and your PC to your LAN and
downloaded and installed AllShare
PC Software on your PC.
N We recommend you locate both
your TV and PC in the same
network subnet. IP addresses have
four parts, separated by periods
(111.222.333.444). If your TV and PC
are in the same subnet, the first 3
parts of the TV IP address and the
PC IP address (111.222.333) will be the same and only the last part (the
host address) will be different.
The following AllShare Play functions
are not supported when you are playing
media from a PC connected through a
network:
N The Background Music and
Background Music Setting functions.
N Sorting files by preference in the
Photos, Music, and Videos folders.
– The † (REW) or … (FF) function while a movie is playing.
Additional Notes
N DivX DRM is not supported.
N Set your PC firewall programme
so that AllShare PC Software is a
permitted programme.
N Depending on the Internet server,
when you use AllShare Play through
a network connection:
– The sorting method may vary.– The Scene Search function may
not be supported.
– The Resume function, which
resumes playing of a video, may
not be supported.
– The Resume function does
not support multiple users. (It
memorizes only the point where
the most recent user stopped
playing a video.)
– The search function may not work depending on the content
information.
N You may experience file stuttering
while playing a video in AllShare
Play through a network connection.
You can play the content in the Web storage
on TV. Follow the instructions below:
– Enter the AllShare Play service
on TV → Select a content type of
Music, Photos, and Videos → Select SugarSync → Select a file to play
– Visit www.sugarsync.com and you
can upload PC contents to the Web
stroage (SugarSync). However, you
can use the TV to play the content
in the PC only where the uploading
path is Web Archive -AllShare Play -
Music / Photos / Videos.
– You can also use the TV to play the
content in a AllShare Play -enabled
mobile device where the uploading path is specified as above.Using the AllShare Play
AllShare Play enables you to enjoy the
following services. You need to log in
to your Samsung account to use web
storage or social services.
AllShare Play can play various contents
in three ways:
– Using USB Device: You can play
videos, photos, or music from a
connected USB device.
– Using DLNA or Web storage: You can play various contents from devices
connected to your home network or
web storage.
– Using Social Services: You can play
some content from social services
such as Family Story, Facebook or
Picasa.
N Before using Facebook or Picasa, it
should be installed in the Smart Hub.
N To use SugarSync, Facebook,
or Picasa, you should log in to corresponding application.
Alternatively, you can register your
application account in to your
Samsung account. To register
your application account, refer to
"Configuring the Smart Hub with
Settings" in the Smart Hub section.
N To use Family Story, you should log
in to your Samsung account. Before
using Family Story, you should join a
group at least one more.N You can transfer a desired content to
other device connected to the TV.
Contents Type Supported transfer device
USB DLNA, SugarSync, Family
Story, Picasa, Facebook
Camera DLNA
DLNA USB
SugarSync USB
Family Story USB
Picasa USB
Facebook USB
Mobile device USBMy list (In AllShare Play)
™ → AllShare Play → My list
Using this function, you can access
content easily and quickly.
● Recently played
Displays a list of recently played video,
photo or music files. If you have a file
you want to play again, use this list.
N When you play a file from the
Recently played list, and the USB
device is not connected or the file is not found, the "Unable to find the
file." message appears.
N The Recently played list can have up
to 48 files. The files are arranged so
that the most currently played files
are at the top of the list.
N Recently played files located on a
mobile phone may not play.
● What's new
Displays newly saved videos, photo,
or music files on a connected USB device or your PC. If you have a newly
updated file you want to play, use this
category.
● Playlist
Displays the Playlist files saved on the
USB device or your PC. If you want to
play a playlist, select the playlist. The
selected playlist plays immediately.
N You can create up to 12 playlists.
N You can add up to 100 files to a
single playlist.N You can only add one type of
content to a single playlist. For
example, you can only add music
files to a playlist that includes music
files.
Creating a Playlist
1. On the AllShare Play main screen,
select Videos, Photos, or Music on
the left side of the screen.
2. On the right side of the screen, highlight and select the device that
has the files you want in the playlist.
AllShare Play displays the folders
and/or files on the device.
3. If AllShare Play is displaying folders,
highlight and select the folder that
contains the files you want. If it is
only displaying files, go to Step 4.
4. Highlight a file, and then open the
Tools menu using your remote,
5. Highlight and select Add to Playlist.6. Highlight and select a file you want
to add. The c mark appears in the
check box.
7. Repeat Step 6 to select additional
files.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a
selection, select the file again.
8. When done, select Add. The Add to
Playlist screen appears.
9. Select Create new. The Create a new playlist. screen appears.
10.Enter playlist name using your
remote or accept the default name.
11.When finished, Select Done. The new
playlist is created. The Added popup appears.
12.Select Play to play now or OK to
play later.
To add music files a playlist, follow
these steps:1. On the AllShare Play main screen,
select Videos, Photos, or Music on
the left side of the screen.
N You must select the kind of
content that is already in the
playlist. For example, if you want
to add files to a music playlist,
you must select Music.
2. On the right side of the screen,
highlight and select the device that
has the files you want in the playlist. AllShare Play displays the folders
and/or files on the device.
3. If AllShare Play is displaying folders,
highlight and select the folder that
contains the files you want. If it is
only displaying files, go to Step 4.
4. Hiighlight a file, and then open the
Tools menu using your remote,
5. Highlight and select Add to Playlist.
6. Highlight and select a file you want
to add. The c mark appears in the check box.
7. Repeat Step 6 to select additional
files.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a
selection, select the file again.
8. When done, select Add. The Add to
Playlist screen appears.
9. Highlight and select the playlist you
want to add the files to. The Added
pop-up appears.10.Select Play to play now or OK to
play later.
Using Play Selection with music files
1. Highlight a music file in the file list.
2. Open the Tools menu using your
remote, and then select Play
selection.
3. Select the track you want to add. A
c mark appears in the check box on
the left.4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional
tracks.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a
selection, select the file again.
5. Select Play. The selected music files
play.
Using View with Music files
When you use the AllShare Play
function with your Web storage rather than a USB device, View is not
supported.
1. To sort files in the file lists, select }
using your remote. The View screen
appears.
2. Select sort criteria you want.
● Folder view
Displays the folders on the device
in alphabetical order. To view the
file names and thumbnails, select a
folder.● Title
Sorts and displays the files by title
in Symbol / Number / Alphabet /
Special order.
● Artist
Sorts the music files by artist in
alphabetical order.
● Album
Sorts the music files by album in
alphabetical order.
● GenreSorts the music files by the genre.
Send your music files
Lets you send your music files to your
Web storage or other devices.
N To use the Send Function, you must
be logged in to Smart Hub.
1. To send music files in the file list,
open the Tools menu using your
remote, and then select Send.
2. Select a music file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check
box.
3. Repeat Step 2 to select additional
tracks.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a
selection, select the file again.
4. When done, select Send. The Send
screen appears.
5. Choose the destination device to
send, and then select Send.6. From these steps, please follow the
instructions on the screen.
To delete one or more files in the
Playlist, follow these steps:
1. On the AllShare Play main screen,
select My list.
2. In the Playlist area at the bottom of
the screen, highlight the playlist you
want to edit.
3. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Edit playlist.
The Edit playlist screen appears.
4. Select a file you want to delete. The
c mark appears in the check box.
5. Repeat Step 5 to select additional
files.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a
selection, select the file again.
6. When done, select Remove. A popup message appears.7. Select Yes. The selected file(s) has
been removed from the playlist.Videos (In AllShare Play)
™ → AllShare Play → Videos
You can play video files saved on USB
device and/or your PC.
N For more information about the
subtitle formats and codec formats,
refer to "Supported Subtitle and
AllShare Play file formats" in the
Other Information section.
Playing a Video1. On the AllShare Play screen, select
Videos.
2. Highlight and select the device you
want to play.
3. If AllShare Play displays folders,
highlight and select the folder that
contains the file you want, then go
to Step 4. If AllShare Play displays
files only, go directly to Step 4.
4. Highlight and select the desired video
on the file list screen.N If you stop the video while it is
playing, you can play the video
later from the point where you
stopped it.
N The file name appears on the top
of the screen with the video's
playing time.
N If video time information is
unknown, the playing time and
progress bar are not displayed.Video playback control buttons
● †, …
Each time you select † or … using
your remote, the playback speed
change as follows. († 1 / † 2 / † 3 /
… 1 / … 2 / … 3)
● l, r
Jump to backward or forward from
current position.
● ∑
Pause the scene.– For Slow Motion: In pause mode,
select …. Each time you select …
using your remote, the playback
speed is reduced in this order „
1/8 / „1/4 / „1/2. The playback
speed is displayed in the upper
left corner.
– For Step Mode: In pause mode,
select ∑. Each time you select ∑
using your remote, a new frame
will be appear.N To return to normal speed
playback, select r using your
remote.
N The product does not play sound
in Step mode or Slow Motion.
N Slow Motion and Step Mode
operate only in the forward
direction.
Using the Tools menu with Videos
● On the file list screen, you can use the
following these options:– View
Lets you sort the file list by one of
four sort criteria.
– Play selection
Lets you select one or more files to
play immediately.
– Send
Lets you send your video files to
your Web storage or other devices.
N If you want to use this function,
you must log in to Smart Hub.– Login / Logout
You can login to or logout of your
Samsung Account.
– Add to Playlist
Lets you create playlists. When you
create
playlists, you can play a series of
videos that you want to watch easily
and quickly.
– Go to playlist
Moves to the Playlist screen.– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.
● During playback, you can use the
following options on the Tools menu:
– Go to Videos List
Stops the video and takes you to the
file list screen.
– Play from the beginning
You can restart a video file from the
beginning.– Scene Search
You can use the Scene Search
function during playback to view or
start a movie from the scene of your
choice.
N If the index information in the
file damaged or the file does not
support indexing, you will not
be able to use the Scene Search
function.
– Title SearchYou can search the video using the
left and right arrow keys or input
a playing time directly using your
remote.
– Time Search
Search the video or input the play
time directly using your remote.
– Repeat Mode
You can play a single movie file or
all the files on the play list screen
repeatedly.– Picture Size
Lets you adjust the picture size to
your preference.
– Picture Mode
You can change the Picture Mode.
– Sound Mode
You can change the Sound Mode.
– Audio Language
You can listen to the video in one of
supported languages. The function is
enabled only when you play stream-type files which support multiple
audio formats.
– Subtitle
Lets you view with language
subtitles. You can select a specific
language if the subtitle file contains
multiple languages.
– Subtitle Settings
Displays the Subtitle Settings. You
can select subtitle options such as
colour and transparency.– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.
N The functions available on the Tools
menu at one time depend on the
characteristics of the video you
are playing. All functions are not
necessarily available for all videos.
Using the View function with Video Files
When you use the AllShare Playfunction with your Web storage
rather than a USB device, View is not
supported.
1. To sort files in the file lists, select }
using your remote. The View screen
appears.
2. Select sort criteria.
● Folder view
Displays the folders on the device
in alphabetical order. To view the
file names and thumbnails, select a folder.
● Title
Sorts and displays the file by title
in Symbol / Number / Alphabet /
Special order.
● Latest Date
Sorts and displays files by the latest
create date.
● Earliest Date
Sorts and displays files by the
earliest create date.Send your video files
Lets you send your video files to your
Web storage or other devices.
N To use Send, you must be logged in
to Smart Hub.
1. To send video files in the file list,
open the Tools menu using your
remote, and then select Send.
2. Select a video file you want to send.
The c mark appears in the check box.
3. Repeat Step 2 to select additional
files.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a
selection, select the file again.
4. When done, select Send. The Send
screen appears.
5. Choose the destination device to
send, and then select Send.
6. From these steps, please follow the instructions on the screen.Photos (In AllShare Play)
™ → AllShare Play → Photos
Viewing a photo (or slide show)
N For more information about the
supported image formats, refer to
"Supported Subtitle and AllShare
Play file formats" in the Other
Information section.
1. On the AllShare Play screen, select
Photos.2. On the right side of the screen,
select the device that has the photos
you want to view.
3. If AllShare Play displays folders,
select the folder that contains the
photos you want, then go to Step
4. If AllShare Play displays photo
thumbnails, go directly to Step 4.
4. To start a slide show, select ∂ using
your remote.
N To view another photo manually, press the l or r button.
N During the slide show, all files in
the file list are displayed in order,
starting from the file you selected.
N When viewing a photo file or slide
show, you can add background
music if you have music files on
same device.
N If you select the wrong
background music, you cannot
change the music until the BGM (Background Music) has finished
loading.
Photo playback control buttons
● † / …
The slide show speed change as
follow (Slow, Normal, Fast). The
speed is displayed in the upper right
of the screen.
● l, r
Go to the previous or next photo.● ∫
Return to the file list screen.
● ∂
Start the slide show.
● ∑
Pause the slide show.
Using the Tools menu with Photos
● To use the Tools menu with photos,
you must first highlight a photo file
on the file list screen. After you have highlighted a photo on the file list
screen, you can use the following
options in the Tools menu:
– View
Lets you sort the file list by one of
four sort criteria.
– Play selection
Lets you select one or more files to
play immediately.
– Send
Lets you send your photos with your Family Story account or photorelated application.
N To use Send, you must be logged
in to Smart Hub.
– Login / Logout
You can login to or logout of your
Samsung Account.
– Add to Playlist
Lets you create playlists. When you
create playlists, you can play a series
of photos easily and quickly– Go to playlist
Moves to the Playlist screen.
– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.
● When playing a photo file, you can use
the following options:
– Go to Photos List
Moves to the file list screen.
– Start Slide Show / Stop Slide Show
You can start or stop a slide show. Alternatively, select ∂ to start a slide
show or ∑ to stop a slide show using
your remote.
– Slide Show Speed
You can select the slide show speed
during the slide show. Alternatively,
select † or … using your remote.
– Background Music On / Background
Music Off
You can turn on or turn off
background music.– Background Music Setting
You can set and select background
music when watching a photo file or
slide show.
– Picture Mode
You can change the Picture Mode.
– Sound Mode
You can change the Sound Mode.
N Available only when Background
Music is set to on.
– ZoomYou can zoom into images in full
screen mode.
– Rotate
You can rotate images.
– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.
Using the View function with Photo Files
When you use the AllShare Play
function with Family Story, Facebook, or Picasa rather than a USB device,
View is not supported.
1. To sort files in the file lists, select }
using your remote. The View screen
appears.
2. Select sort criteria.
● Folder view
Displays the folders on the device
in alphabetical order. To view the
file names and thumbnails, select a
folder.● Title
Sorts and displays the files by title
in Symbol / Number / Alphabet /
Special order.
● Latest Date
Sorts and displays files by the latest
create date.
● Earliest Date
Sorts and displays files by the
earliest create date.
● MonthlySorts and shows photo files by
month.
Send your photos
Lets you send your photos with your
Family Story account or to other
devices.
N To use Send, you must be logged in
to Smart Hub.
1. For example, suppose that you want
to send with your Family Story.2. To send photo files in the file list,
highlight a file, open the Tools menu
using your remote, and then select
Send.
3. Select a photo file you want to send.
A c mark appears in the check box
on the left.
4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional
tracks.
N To select all the files in the list,
select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again.
5. When done, select Send. The Send
screen appears.
6. Choose the destination device to
send to.
7. Choose the family group to share
with. A pop-up window appears.
8. Enter a message to send to the
family group you selected.
N In the QWERTY keyboard screen is
displayed, you can use a keyboard connected to the TV to enter the
message.
9. When done, select Send.Music (In AllShare Play)
™ → AllShare Play → Music
Playing Music
N For more information about the
supported music file formats, refer
to "Supported Subtitle and AllShare
Play file formats" in the Other
Information section.
1. On the AllShare Play screen, press
the arrow button to select Music.2. Select the device that contains the
files you want to play.
3. If AllShare Play displays folders,
highlight and select the folder that
contains the music files you want,
then go to Step 4. If AllShare
displays only files, go directly to
Step 4.
4. Select the desired music file in the file
list or select ∂ using your remote.
N To move to a previous page, select b using your remote. To move to
the next page, select { using your
remote.
N When the music is playing, you
can fast forward or fast rewind
the music file by selecting † or …
using your remote.
N If the sound is abnormal when you
play MP3 files, adjust the Equaliser
in the Sound menu. (An over
modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.)
Music playback control buttons
During playback, you can use additional
functions at the bottom right of the
screen.
● Play / Pause
You can start or pause a music file.
Alternatively, you can select ∂ or ∑
using your remote.
● Repeat ModeYou can play one or all the music
files shown in the file list repeatedly.
● Shuffle Mode
You can play the music files
sequentially or randomly.
● Sound Mode
You can change the Sound Mode.
Using the Tools menu with Music
● To use the Tools menu with Music,
you must first highlight a music file on the file list screen. After you have
highlighted a music file on the file
list screen, you can use the following
options in the Tools menu:
– View
You can sort the file list by one of
four sort criteria.
– Play selection
Lets you select one or more files to
play immediately.
– SendLets you send your music files to
your Web storage or other devices.
N To use Send, you must be logged
in to Smart Hub.
– Login / Logout
You can login to or logout of your
Samsung Account.
– Add to Playlist
Lets you create playlists. When you
create playlists, you can play a group
of music files easily and quickly.– Go to playlist
Moves to the Playlist screen.
– Encoding
You can select an encoding format
from the encoding format list.
– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.Recorded TV (In AllShare Play)
for LED 4500 - 5400 Series : This function is not
supported.
™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV
(Depending on the country)
To use the recording or Timeshift
function, the connected USB device
must be available for recording. Device
format is recommended to use USB
HDD.
N During the Device formatting, do not disconnect the device while
formatting is in progress. If you
format the device, all files will be
deleted.
N Before formatting your device to
the TV, please back up your files to
prevent them from damage or loss of
data. SAMSUNG is not responsible
for any data file damage or data
loss.To record a current broadcasting programme
Allows you to record a programme
currently being broadcasted.
Set the current time first to use this
function.
1. When you record a broadcast
programme, press the ∏ button on
the remote to record. A pop up
window will appear.
N We recommend using a USB
HDD with at least 5,400 rpm, but a USB HDD of RAID type is not
supported.
N A USB storage device cannot
record until it completes the
Device Performance Test.
N The file systems of the PVR
output (Personal Video Recorder)
and the Camera app are different.
Therefore, you cannot save both
output types on the same USB
device. To make a recording using the PVR and the Camara app, you
have to save the recordings using
different USB ports.
2. Select Length to set up the recording
time, and then select OK.
Playing Recorded TV Programme
1. On the AllShare Play screen, select
Recorded TV.
2. Select the device you want to play.
3. Select the desired recorded TV file in the file list.
N To move a previous page, select
π using your remote. To move a
next page, select µ.
4. Select ∂.
● The selected file is displayed on the top
with its playing time.
Playback control button with Recorded TV
● †, …
Each time select †, … your remote, the playback speed change as follows. (†
1 / † 2 / † 3 / † 4 / † 5 / † 6 / † 7 / …
1 / … 2 / … 3 /… 4 / … 5 / … 6 / … 7 )
● l, r
Jump to backward or forward from
current position.
● ∑
Pause the scene.
– In pause mode, select … using your
remote. Each time select … using
your remote, the playback speed is reduced to „1/8 / „1/4 / „1/2.
– In pause mode, select ∑ using your
remote. Each time the ∑ function is
selected, a new frame will be appear.
N To return to normal speed
playback, select r using your
remote.
N The product does not play sound
in stop mode.
N Stop motion operates only in the
forward direction.Using the Tools menu with Recorded TV
● On the file list screen, you can use the
following these options:
– Play Current Group
Will play the contents of the selected
groups.
– View
You can sort the file list by selecting
sort criteria you want.
– Play selectionYou can play by selecting the desired
music file in the file list.
– Delete
Deletes the file from the list.
– Add to Playlist
Lets you make your own playlist.
When you use the playlist, you can
play music you want to listen easily
and quickly.
– Go to playlist
Moves to Playlist screen. – Lock / Unlock
To enable or disable the lock.
– Device Management
On the device can scan and format.
● The following functions are available
only in selected content item.
– Rename
Change the name of the content.
– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.● During playback, you can use the
following these options:
– Go to Recorded List
Moves to the file list screen.
– Play from the beginning
You can restart a video file from the
beginning.
– Title Search
You can move directly to another
title.
– Time SearchSearch the video or input the play
time directly using your remote.
– Repeat Mode
You can play movie files repeatedly.
– Picture Size
You can adjust the picture size to
your preference.
– Picture Mode
You can change the Picture Mode.
– Sound Mode
You can change the Sound Mode.– Information
Displays detailed information about
the selected file.Timeshift
(Depending on the country)
for LED 4500 - 5400 Series : This function is not
supported.
Using the Timeshift function
If you missed a live broadcast, you can
see from the recorded broadcast using
this feature.
1. When you watch a broadcast
programme, select ∂ using your remote to start the Timeshift
function.
2. If you want to stop the Timeshift
function, select ∫ using your remote.
N The Timeshift mode operates for
a maximum of 90 minutes.
N The Timeshift function is not
supported for analogue channels.
N The Timeshift functions are
disabled for channels locked with
Channel Lock.Before using the Timeshift and a record
function...
Recorded videos are DRM (digital rights
management) protected and cannot be
played on a PC or other TVs. Note that
files saved on the TV cannot be used
after the main board is changed.
NOTE
● We recommend using a USB HDD with at least 5,400 rpm, but a USB HDD of
RAID type is not supported.
● The availability of both recording and
the Timeshift function may differ
depending on picture quality and the
free space on the hard disk drive.
● USB memory stick is not compatible.
● When the Timeshift is used to the
gunwales, the pause may be cancelled.
● When recording is performed by both
the PVR (Personal Video Recorder) function and a device that supports the
HDMI-CEC feature, recording by the
PVR function takes precedence.
● If the USB device has failed the Device
Performance Test, the USB device must
go through the Device Format and
Device Performance Test again before
you record with the Guide or Channel.
● The Timeshift functions can only be
used with a USB storage device that
completed the Device Performance Test.
● If you attempt the recording or
Timeshift function with a device that
did not have the Device Performance
Test, the function will not start.
● If any function that turns off the TV
(Sleep Timer, Off Timer, etc.) is set for
a time that conflicts with recording,
the TV will be turned off once the
recording is complete.
● For the Timeshift operation, the USB device requires 1.5GB of free space.
● The Schedule Recording function
requires 100MB of free space on the
USB device.
● If the free space of the USB device
decreases to less than 50MB while
a Schedule Recording is operating,
the Schedule Recording function is
automatically terminated.
● When both the Schedule Recording
and Timeshift functions are running, and the free space on the USB device
decreases to less than 500MB, only
the Schedule Recording function is
automatically terminated.
● The Timeshift function continues even
after changing the digital channel and
users can watch past programs using
the saved Timeshift data.
– If the TV enters a state where the
Timeshift function is not supported
(application execution, input signal switching, analogue channel change,
etc.), the Timeshift data are not
saved.
● If the TV enters a state where the
Timeshift function is not supported
(application execution, input signal
switching, analogue channel change,
etc.) while the Timeshift function is
running, it is automatically terminated
without an additional message being
displayed.● If a user tunes to a digital channel, the
suspended Timeshift function resumes
automatically.Using the DLNA Function
™ → AllShare Play
You can play media contents including
videos, photos, and music saved on
your mobile phones or the other devices
(such as your PC) by controlling them
on the TV via the network.
For more information, visit
“www.samsung.com” or contact
the Samsung call centre. Mobile
devices may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each
device’s user’s guide.
N If your Samsung TV connects to
a non-Samsung DLNA server, a
compatibility issue may occur during
video playback.
N By connecting your Samsung TV to
a network via AllShare Play, you can
use Samsung’s original functions as
follows:
– Playback of various video formats (DivX, MP4, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV,
etc.)
– Video thumbnail feature
– Bookmark function (to resume
video playback)
– Auto-chaptering (scene
navigation)
– Digital content management
– Compatibility with various subtitle
formats (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT,
TTXT)– Search with file names
– And many others
N To use the original DLNA functions
of Samsung fully, it is recommended
that you use the AllShare Play
software provided in your TV.
AllShare Settings
Menu → Network → AllShare Settings
Shows a list of mobile phones or
connected devices which have been set up to use AllShare Settings with this
TV.
N The AllShare Settings function is
available in all devices which support
DLNA DMC.
● Allowed / Denied: Allows / Blocks the
devices.
● Delete: Deletes the devices from the
list.
N This function only deletes the name
of the device from the list. If the deleted device is turned on or tries to
connect to the TV, it may appear on
the list again.
To play the media contents of the
devices connected to DLAN function,
follow these steps:
1. On the AllShare Play screen, select
the kind of content you want to play:
Videos, Photos, Music.
2. On the right side of the screen, select DLNA. The TV displays the
list of devices connected using the
DLNA function.
3. Select a device. AllShare displays
the accessible files or folders on the
device.
4. Select a file in the file list. The
selected file will play.
Playing media contents saved on DLNA
devices1. Connect the mobile phone or other
devices which support AllShare Play
function.
2. Play media contents on the device. A
popup screen appears on the bottom
of your TV.
3. Select Allow to accept the connected
device. The media contents of the
device can now play on your TV.
N You can find the allowed devices
on AllShare Settings.N An alarm window appears informing
you that media contents (videos,
photos, music) sent from a mobile
phone will be displayed on your
TV. The contents are played
automatically 3 seconds after the
alarm window appears.
– If you close the alarm window
using your remote when the
alarm window appears, the media
contents are not played.N The first time a device accesses your
TV through the media function, a
warning pop up window appears.
Select Allow. This permits the phone
to access the TV freely and use the
Media function to play content.
N To turn off media contents
transmissions from a mobile phone,
set the device to Denied in the
AllShare Settings.
N Contents may not play on your TV depending on their resolution and
format.
N Some buttons may not work
depending on the type of media
content.
N Using the mobile device, you can
control the media play. For details,
refer to each device’s user’s guide.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Anynet+ is a function that enables
you to control all connected Samsung
devices that support Anynet+ with your
Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet+
system can be used only with Samsung
devices that have the Anynet+ feature.
To be sure your Samsung device
has this feature, check if there is an
Anynet+ logo on it.N You can only control Anynet+
devices using the TV’s remote
control, not the buttons on the TV.
N The TV remote control may not work
under certain conditions. If this
occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device.
N The Anynet+ functions do not
operate with other manufacturers’
products.
N For instructions explaining how to
connect Anynet+ external devices, refer to the device’s user manual.
You must connect an Anynet+ device
using an HDMI cable. Some HDMI
cables may not support Anynet+
functions.
N Anynet+ works when the AV device
supporting Anynet+ is in the standby
or on status.
N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV
devices in total. Note that you can
connect up to 3 devices of the same type.
N However, you can connect only one
Anynet+ Home Theatre. To connect
an Anynet+ Home Theatre, connect
the Home Theatre to the TV using an
HDMI cable then:
– To hear sound from the Home
Theatre’s front, left and right
speakers and the subwoofer only,
connect a digital optical cable
between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port on your TV and
the Digital Audio Input on the
Home Theatre.
– To hear 5.1 channel audio, connect
HDMI cables to your Anynet+ DVD
player, satellite box, etc. Then,
connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL) port on your DVD
player, Satellite Box, etc. (i.e.
Anynet+ Device 1 or 2) directly to
the Home Theatre, not the TV.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Menu
TOOLS → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
The Anynet+ menu changes depending
on the type and status of the Anynet+
devices connected to the TV.
● View TV
Change from Anynet+ mode to TV
broadcast mode.
● Device List
Shows the Anynet+ device list.● (device_name) Menu
Shows the menu of the connected
device. E.g. if a DVD player is
connected, the disc menu of the DVD
player will appear.
● (device_name) Tools
Shows the Tools menu of the
connected device. E.g. if a DVD
player is connected, the Tools menu
of the DVD player will appear.
N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available.
● (device_name) Title Menu
Shows the title menu of the disc in
the connected device. E.g. If a DVD
player is connected, the title menu
of the movie in the DVD player will
appear.
N Depending on the device, this
menu may not be available.
● Receiver
Sound is played through the receiver.Setting up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) must be set to On.
N When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
function is disabled, all the Anynet+
related operations are deactivated
● Auto Turn Off
Set an Anynet+ Device to turn off
automatically when the TV is turned off.
N If Auto Turn Off is set to Yes,
running external devices will turn off
at the same time as the TV powers
off.
N May not be enabled depending on
the device.
● Receiver
You can listen to sound through a
receiver (i.e. Home Theatre) instead of
the TV Speaker.Switching between Anynet+ Devices
1. Open the Tools menu using your
remote, and then select Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Select Device List. The Device List
screen appears.
N If you cannot find a device you
want, select Refresh to refresh the
list.
3. Select a device, and then wait until the switch to the selected device is
completed.
N The Device List menu appears
only when you set Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) to On in the System
menu.
N Switching to the selected device
may take up to 2 minutes. You
cannot cancel the switching
operation while switching is in
progress.N If you have selected an Anynet+
device using the Source function,
you cannot use the Anynet+
function. Make sure to switch
to an Anynet+ device using the
Device List function. (TOOLS →
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → Device
List)
Listening through a Receiver
You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e. Home Theatre) instead
of the TV Speaker. To listen to sound
through a receiver, go to Receiver
screen (System → Anynet+ (HDMICEC) → Receiver). Then select Receiver
and set to On.
N If your receiver supports audio
only, it may not appear in the
device list.
N The receiver will work when you
have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
port of the TV.
N When the receiver (i.e. Home
Theatre) is set to on, you can
hear sound output from the TV’
s Optical jack. When the TV is
displaying a DTV (air) signal, the
TV will send out 5.1 channel sound
to the receiver. When the source
is a digital component such as a DVD player and it is connected
to the TV via HDMI, you will hear
only 2 channel sounds from the
receiver.
Using the ARC function
for LED 6500 Series and above, for PDP TV
You can listen to sound from the TV
through a receiver connected using
an HDMI cable without connecting
a separate optical cable. To listen to sound through a receiver using the ARC
function, go to Receiver screen (System
→ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → Receiver).
Then select Receiver and set to On.
N To use the ARC function, a receiver
which supports the HDMI-CEC and
ARC features must be connected to
the HDMI IN 2 (ARC) port.
N To disable the ARC function,
set the Receiver to Off. Even if
the TV transmits the ARC signal continuously, the receiver will be
blocked from receiving the signal.Troubleshooting
Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis →
Troubleshooting
To view a list of all troubleshooting
items, go to e-Manual home screen
(Menu → Support → e-Manual → Other
Information) or press the SUPPORT
button, and then search a desired item
by selecting a chapter.
Other InformationPicture Quality (Troubleshooting)
First, perform the Picture Test and to
see if your TV is properly displaying
the test image.
(Go to Menu → Support → Self
Diagnosis → Picture Test)
If the test image is properly displayed,
the poor picture may be caused by the
source or signal.
The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store.
If you have an analogue cable / set
top box, upgrade to a digital set top
box. Use HDMI or Component cables
to deliver HD (High Definition) picture
quality.
Many HD channels are up scaled
from SD(Standard Definition)
contents.
Cable / Satellite subscribers: Try HD
stations from the channel lineup. Aerial connection: Try HD stations
after performing Auto Tuning.
Adjust the Cable/Set top box video
output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
Make sure you are watching the
TV at the minimum recommended
distance based on the size and
definition of the signal.
The picture is distorted: macro block error,
small block, dots, pixelization The compression of video contents
may cause picture distortion
especially in fast moving pictures
such as those in sports and action
movies.
A weak or bad quality signal can
cause picture distortion. This is not a
TV issue.
Mobile phones used close to the TV
(cca up to 1m) may cause noise in
the picture on analogue channels.Colour is wrong or missing.
If you’re using a component
connection, make sure the
component cables are connected
to the correct jacks. Incorrect or
loose connections may cause colour
problems or a blank screen.
There is poor colour or brightness.
Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu (go to Picture mode / Colour /
Brightness / Sharpness)
Adjust the Energy Saving option in
the TV menu (go to Menu → System
→ Eco Solution → Energy Saving)
Try resetting the picture to view the
default picture settings (go to Menu
→ Picture → Reset Picture)
There is a dotted line on the edge of the
screen. If the Picture Size is set to Screen
Fit, change it to 16:9.
Change cable / satellite box
resolution.
The picture is black and white.
If you are using an AV composite
input, connect the video cable
(yellow) to the Green jack of
component on the TV.When changing channels, the picture
freezes or is distorted or delayed.
If the TV is connected to a cable
box, try to reset the box. (Disconnect
and then reconnect the AC cord and
wait until the cable box reboots. It
may take up to 20 minutes.)
Set the output resolution of the cable
box to 1080i or 720p.Sound Quality (Troubleshooting)
First, perform the Sound Test to
determine if your TV audio is operating
properly. (Go to Menu → Support →
Self Diagnosis → Sound Test)
If the audio is OK, the sound problem
may caused by the source or signal.
There is no sound or the sound is too low
at maximum volume.
Check the volume setting of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray
etc.) connected to your TV.
The picture is good but there is no sound.
Set the Speaker Select option to TV
Speaker in the Sound menu.
If you are using an external device,
make sure the audio cables are
connected to the correct audio input
jacks on the TV.
If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output
option (ex. you may need to change
your cable box’s audio option to
HDMI if you have the box connected
to your TV using an HDMI cable.
If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable,
a separate audio cable is required.
If your TV has a headphone jack,
make sure there is nothing plugged
into it.
Reboot the connected device by disconnecting, and then reconnecting
device’s power cable.
The speakers are making an inappropriate
noise.
Check the cable connections. Make
sure a video cable is not connected
to an audio input.
For aerial or cable connections,
check the signal strength. Low signal
level may cause sound distortion. Perform a Sound Test. (Support →
Self Diagnosis → Sound Test)No Picture, No Video (Troubleshooting)
The TV won’t turn on.
Make sure the AC power cord is
securely plugged in to the wall outlet
and the TV.
Make sure the wall outlet is working.
Try pressing the P button on the TV
to make sure the problem is not the
remote. If the TV turns on, refer to
“The remote control does not work” below.
The TV turns off automatically.
Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off
in the Setup menu.
If your PC is connected to the TV,
check your PC power settings.
Make sure the AC power cord is
plugged in securely to the wall outlet
and the TV.
When watching TV from an aerial or cable connection, the TV will turn
off after 10~15 minutes if there is no
signal.
There is no picture/Video.
Check cable connections (remove
and reconnect all cables connected
to the TV and external devices).
Set your external device’s (Cable /
Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video
outputs to match the connections to the TV input. For example, if an
external device’s output is HDMI,
it should be connected to an HDMI
input on the TV.
Make sure your connected devices
are powered on.
Be sure to select the TV’s correct
source by select Source using your
remote.RF (Cable / Aerial) Connection
(Troubleshooting)
The TV is not receiving all channels.
Make sure the Aerial cable is
connected securely.
Please try Setup to add available
channels to the channel list. Go
to Menu → System → Setup and
wait for all available channels to be
stored. Verify the Aerial is positioned
correctly.
The picture is distorted: macro block error,
small block, dots, pixelization.
The compression of video contents
may cause picture distortion,
especially with fast moving pictures
such as those in sports and action
movies.
A weak signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem.PC Connection (Troubleshooting)
A “Mode Not Supported” message appears.
Set your PC’s output resolution so it
matches the resolution supported by
the TV.
The video is OK but there is no audio.
If you are using an HDMI connection,
check the audio output setting on
your PC.Network Connection (Troubleshooting)
The wireless network connection failed.
The Samsung Wireless LAN adapter
is required to use a wireless network.
for LED 5500 - 5700 series and PDP 550 - 570
series
Make sure the TV is connected to a
wireless IP sharer (router).Recording / Timeshift (Troubleshooting)
The USB device is not recognized or a
Device Format, Checking Device or Device
Performance Test fails.
See the manual for the USB device
to check that the USB device supports
recording.
If the USB device has a lock, ensure
it is off.
Check that the USB device can be formatted when connected to the
PC. Connect the USB to the TV
and format it. (Formatting may fail
intermittently.)
If a Device Performance Test or
formatting failed, it means that there
is a problem with the USB hardware
or the performance of the USB
hardware is too low.
A message prompts me to format a USB device that has been working well.
If the USB device has a lock, ensure
it is off.
Recover the USB device using the
recovery function in Checking
Device.
The recording function does not work.
Check that a USB device is
connected.
Check that the channel is a recordable digital channel.
If the signal is weak or does not
exist, the recording function will
automatically be closed.
The TV will not record if the USB
device has no free memory space.
Check that this is not the case.
Timeshift Mode does not work.
Check that a USB device is
connected. Radio channels and analogue
broadcasts are not supported.
Data broadcast channels are not
supported.
If the signal is weak or does not
exist, the Timeshift Mode function
will automatically be closed.
Timeshift Mode cannot be performed
if the USB device has no free
memory space. Check that this is not
the case. USB memory stick is not supported.
Please use the USB HDD type.
A message indicates a performance test
failure, and the recording and Timeshift
Mode functions do not work.
These problems may occur if you
use a low-performance USB device
that does not support recording. We
recommend using a USB HDD with
at least 5 400 rpm, but a USB HDD of RAID type is not supported.
A scheduled recording has failed.
A scheduled recording is disabled
for certain operations (formatting,
performance test, error checking,
deleting) that access the file system
of a USB device.
If there is no USB device connected,
the TV will not record even if the
scheduled time is reached. The TV will not record if the USB
device has no free memory space.
Check that this is not the case.
If you record a channel locked with
Programme Rating Lock, the PIN
input window will appear when you
try to play back the recording.
Several recording devices are connected but
the TV stopped recording.
If multiple recording devices are connected and the device set as
Default Recording Device has no
free memory space, the recording
function will be closed. Attempt
recording again. The device with
the most free memory space will
automatically be set as Default
Recording Device and the TV will
start recording.Others (Troubleshooting)
The picture won’t display in full screen.
HD channels will have black bars
on either side of the screen when
displaying up scaled SD (4:3)
contents.
Black bars will appear on the top
and bottom of the screen when you
watch movies that have aspect ratios
different from your TV. Adjust the picture size options on
your external device or set the TV
picture size to full screen.
The remote control does not work.
Replace the remote control batteries
with the poles (+ / –) in the right
direction.
Clean the sensor’s transmission
window on the remote.
Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away.
The cable/set top box remote control
doesn’t turn the TV on or off, or adjust the
volume.
Programme the Cable/Set top box
remote control to operate the TV.
Refer to the Cable/Set user manual
for the SAMSUNG TV code.
A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. Check the supported resolution of the
TV, and adjust the external device’s
output resolution accordingly. Refer
to the resolution settings in the User
manual.
There is a plastic smell from the TV.
This smell is normal and will
dissipate in a short time.
The TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnosis menu.
This function is only available with
digital channels from an Aerial / RF/
Coax connection.
The TV is tilted to the side.
Remove the base stand from the TV
and reassemble the stand.
There are difficulties assembling the stand
base. Make sure the TV is placed on a
flat surface. It is necessary to use
magnetized screw driver if you
cannot remove the screws from the
TV.
The channel menu is greyed out.
(Unavailable)
The Channel menu is only available
when you select the TV source.Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or
every time the TV is turned off.
If the TV is in the Store Demo
mode, it will reset audio and picture
settings every 30 minutes. Change
the settings from Store Demo mode
to Home Use mode in the Setup
procedure. Select TV in the Source
using your remote, and go to Menu
→ System → Setup.
It is possible to disable the Store Demo via Tools as well. (Tools →
Demo → Off)
You have intermittent loss of audio or
video.
Check the cable connections and
reconnect them.
Loss of audio or video can be
caused by using overly rigid or thick
cables. Make sure the cables are
flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to the wall, we
recommend using cables with 90
degree connectors.
You see small particles when you look
closely at the edge of the frame of the TV.
This is part of the product’s design
and is not a defect.
The PIP menu is not available.
PIP functionality is only available when you are using a HDMI or
components source.
The message “Scramble signal” or “Weak
Signal/No Signal” appears.
If you are using a CAM CARD (CI /
CI+), check that it is installed into the
common interface slot.
If there is still a problem, pull the
CAM CARD out of the TV and insert
it into the slot again.You turned the TV off 45 minutes ago, and
it turned on again.
It is normal. The TV operates the
OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself
to upgrade firmware downloaded
whilst your watching TV.
There are recurrent picture/ sound issues.
Check and change the signal/source.A reaction may occur between the rubber
cushion pads on the base stand and the top
finish of some furniture.
To prevent this, use felt pads on
any surface of the TV that comes in
direct contact with furniture.
You can keep your TV as optimum
condition to upgrade the latest
firmware on web site (samsung.com →
Support → Downloads) by USB.POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on
the screen.
Select Home Use under Setup mode.
For details, refer to the Setup Feature.
The Plasma TV is making humming noise.
for PDP TV Plasma TVs typically make
a soft humming sound. This is normal.
It’s caused by the electrical charges
that are used to create the images on the screen.
If the humming sound is loud, you may
have set the brightness on the TV too
high. Try setting the brightness lower.
You can also have loud humming if the
back of your Plasma TV is too close to
a wall or other hard surface. Also, try
rerouting your connection cables.
An improperly installed wall mount can
also create excessive noise.Image Retention (Burn In) Issue.
for PDP TV To minimize the possibility
of screen burn, this unit is equipped
with Pixel Shift screen burn reduction
technology. Pixel Shift lets you set the
picture so it moves slightly up and
down (Vertical Line) and side to side
(Horizontal Dot). The regular, slight
movement of the picture reduces screen
burn in.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Troubleshooting)
Anynet+ does not work.
Check if the device is an Anynet+
device. The Anynet+ system supports
Anynet+ devices only.
You can connect only one receiver
(home theatre).
Check if the Anynet+ device power
cord is properly connected.
Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections.
Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is
set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
Check whether the TV remote control is
in TV mode.
Check whether the remote control is
Anynet+ compatible.
Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain
situations. (Searching channels,
operating Smart Hub or Setup, etc.)
If you have removed and then reconnected the HDMI cable, please
make sure to search devices again or
turn your TV off and on again.
I want to start Anynet+.
Check if the Anynet+ device is properly
connected to the TV and check if the
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On.
(Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMICEC))
Open the Tools menu using your remote and then select Anynet+ (HDMICEC). Then select a menu you want.
I want to exit Anynet+.
Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu.
Go to the Source screen using your
remote and select a non- Anynet+
device.
The message Connecting to Anynet+ device
... appears on the screen.You cannot use the remote control
when you are configuring Anynet+ or
switching to a view mode.
Use the remote control after the TV has
completed Anynet+ configuration or
has finished switching to Anynet+.
The Anynet+ device does not play.
You cannot use the play function when
Setup is in progress.The connected device is not displayed.
Check whether or not the device
supports Anynet+ functions.
Check whether or not the HDMI cable is
properly connected.
Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is
set to On. (Menu → System → Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC))
Search Anynet+ devices again.
Anynet+ requires an HDMI connection.
Make sure the device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable.
Some HDMI cables may not support
Anynet+ functions.
If the connection is terminated because
there has been a power failure or the
HDMI cable has been disconnected,
please repeat the device scan.
The TV sound is not output through the
receiver.
Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver.
The ARC function enables digital output
of sound using the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port
and can only be operated when the TV
is connected to an audio receiver that
supports the ARC function.AllShare Play (Troubleshooting)
This file may not be playable properly.
This may appear because of the
high bit rate of the content. Content
generally will play but could experience
some playability issue.Smart Hub (Troubleshooting)
Some application contents only appear in
English. How can I change the language?
The Application content language may
be different from the application user
interface language.
The ability to change the language
depends on the service provider.
Some application services do not work.Check with the service provider.
Refer to the help website for application
service provider information.
When a network error occurs, I can only use
the setting menu.
If network connection doesn’t work,
your service might be limited, as all
functions except the setting menu need
to be connect to the internet.Web Browser (Troubleshooting)
1. To open Web Browser, select Web
Browser in Smart Hub. Unlike a PC,
the Web Browser may be displayed
differently.
2. The Web Browser is not compatible
with Java applications.
3. When you attempt to download a
file, and the file could not be saved,
an error message will appear.
4. Access may be blocked to some websites or to web browsers
operated by certain businesses.
5. Playback of Flash video may be
restricted.
6. E-commerce, for purchasing
products online, is not supported.
7. Scrolling a web page that allows
only part (and not all) of the page
to be scrolled may cause corrupted
characters.
8. ActiveX is not supported.9. Some options cannot be accessed
in Link Browsing mode. (To access
such options, switch to Pointer
Browsing mode.)
10.Some text may appear corrupted
because the number of supported
fonts is limited.
11.The response to a command on the
remote or the screen display may be
delayed temporarily if a web page is
currently loading.12.Copy and Paste are not supported.
13.When writing emails or posting
messages, some functions (Such as
changing the size or colours.) may
not be supported.
14.The number of bookmarks and logs
that can be saved is limited.
15.The maximum number of windows
that can open at the same time
may vary depending on browsing
conditions or the TV model.16.The web browsing speed depends on
the network conditions.
17.PIP will automatically be deactivated
if a video is played in the browser.
Videos may not commence playback
after PIP interruption and a possible
refresh for the page may be required.
18.The Web Browser can play MP3
audio files only.
19.The function for importing or
exporting bookmarks is compatible with bookmark files in a particular
file format only. (Compatible format:
Netscape-bookmark-file-1)
20.When you import or export
bookmarks, the folder tree is not
included.
21.If you import the bookmark file to a
Computer from the TV, the bookmark
file will be saved in “Samsung Smart
TV Bookmark” folder.
22.If the time is not set in the menu (Menu → System → Time → Clock),
the history information may not be
saved.
23. Visited web site history is saved
in chronological order and will be
removed from the list by oldest page
accessed.
24.Some video or audio content may
not play during Flash playback
depending on the video/audio codec
supported.25.A sudden change in the picture
brightness inside the video window
may affect the brightness of the
surrounding stationary picture. for
PDP TV
26. Video Content that requires
Flash Player 10.2 or higher is not
supported.Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file
formats
Subtitle
External
– MPEG-4 timed text (.ttxt)
– SAMI (.smi)
– SubRip (.srt)
– SubViewer (.sub)
– Micro (.sub or .txt)– SubStation Alpha (.ssa)
– Advanced SubStation Alpha (.ass)
– Powerdivx (.psb)
Internal
– Xsub
Container: AVI
– SubStation Alpha
Container: MKV
– Advanced SubStation Alpha
Container: MKV– SubRip
Container: MKV
– MPEG-4 timed text
Container: MKV
Supported image resolutions
File Extension Type Resolution
*.jpg JPG 15360 x 8640
*.png PNG 1920 x 1080
*.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080
*.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640Supported music file formats
File Extension Type Codec Comments
*.mp3 MP3 MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
*.m4a
*.mpa
*.aac
*.3ga
MPEG4 AAC
*.flac FLAC FLAC
The Seek (jump) function is not
supported.
Supports up to 2 channel
*.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channel
*.wma WMA WMA
WMA 9, 10 Pro supports up to 5.1
channel and M2 profile (except LBR
mode of M0).
Video CodecFile
Extension
Container Video Codec Resolution
Frame rate
(fps)
Bit rate
(Mbps)
Audio Codec
*.avi
*.mkv
*.asf
*.wmv
*.mp4
*.3gp
*.vro
*.mpg
*.mpeg
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
*.mov
*.flv
*.vob
*.svi
*.m2ts
*.mts
*.webm
*.divx
AVI
MKV
ASF
MP4
3GP
VRO
VOB
PS
TS
WebM
DIVX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.1
1920 x 1080
6 – 30
30
AC3
LPCM
ADMPCM(IMA,
MS)
AAC
HE-AAC
WMA
DD+
MPEG(MP3)
DTS Core
G.711(A-Law,
μ-Law)
MPEG4 SP/ASP
H.264 BP/MP/HP
Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8
Window Media Video
v9
1920 x 1080 30
MPEG2
MPEG1
VP8
VP6 640 x 480 4
Other Restriction
N Video content will not play, or not
play correctly, if there is an error in the content or the container.
N Sound or video may not work if the
contents have a standard bit rate/
frame rate above the compatible
Frame/sec listed in the table above.
N If the Index Table is in error, the Seek
(Jump) function is not supported.
N When you play video over a network
connection, the video may not be
played smoothly.
N The menu may take longer to appear if the video’s bit rate exceeds
10Mbps.
N Some USB/digital camera devices
may not be compatible with the
player.
Video decoder
● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1.
● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP /
AP L4 and AVCHD are not supported.
● For all Video codecs except MVC, VP8, VP6:
– Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max
– Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max
– GMC is not supported.
● Supports only SVAF Top/Bottom and
Side by Side.
● Supports only BD MVC Spec.
Audio decoder
● WMA 9, 10 Pro supports up to 5.1
channel and M2 profile (except LBR mode of M0).
● WMA lossless audio is not supported.
● If Vorbis is only in WebM container,
supports up to 2 channel.Data Service
Allows the user to use information
(text, still images, graphics, documents,
software, etc.) transmitted via broadcast
media.
Auto Run Data Service (On / Off) for Italy
Menu → System → Auto Run Data Service
Sets whether or not to automatically
run data service. Auto Run Data Service
automatically runs data service without user intervention.
N If any other secondary function is
under way, Auto Run Data Service
may not work.
Using Data Service
If the channel you are currently
watching provides data service, you
can enjoy a variety of data services by
select a using your remote.
N Provided Data Service information may vary depending on broadcast.
N While using data service, changing
the channel using the numeric
functions may not be possible
depending on the service.
1. Select a using your remote. Select a
desired service.
N If Auto Run Data Service is On,
the data service will automatically
run with loading banner. In this
case, the a function does not work.
2. Select a using your remote. The
data service screen will be displayed.
3. Move to a desired option by your
remote control on the data service
screen and then select OK. The
selected service will be started.
N If a Colour function of a certain
function appears on the screen,
you can use the offered function
by select corresponded function.4. If you select EXIT, data service will
be closed.
Main Data Service buttons and their
functions
● a (Data Service)
Displays the Data Service list and
immediately starts Data Service.
● BACK
Returns to the previous screen.
● Colour ButtonPerform functions corresponding to
each Colour button image displayed on
the screen during Data Service.
N Operations may differ depending on
the service provider.
● Symbol
Text can be inputted using the numbers
and letters printed on and above the
numeric keys on the remote control.
If you input the numeric keys on the
remote control one by one into the blank where the cursor is located on
the text input screen, the corresponding
lettering, numbers or special characters
will be displayed. e.g., if you press the
number 3 key in rapid succession, then
the assigned letters (D, E, and F) and
the number 3 will alternately appear in
order of input.
● TEXT
Switches to teletext mode or Returns to
the previous screen.N Operations may differ depending on
the service provider.
● u / d / l / r
Moves the Data Service menu up,
down, left and right.
● OK
Runs a selected item.
● EXIT
Stops a running Data Service.HbbTV
(Depending on the country)
You will be able to access services
from entertainment providers, online
providers and CE manufactures through
the HbbTV.
N In some countries, HbbTV is a data
service.
N This service may be supported in
other countries.
N Some broadcasting may not support the HbbTV.
1. HbbTV is turned off by default. To
use HbbTV, go to System → Data
Service and set it Enable. (Depending
on the country)
2. HbbTV is not available when
Timeshift is running or when a
recorded video is being played back.
3. An application on HbbTV may
malfunction temporarily depending
on the circumstances of the broadcast station or application
provider.
4. An application is only available for
use on HbbTV when the TV network
is connected to an external network.
The application may malfunction
depending on the network
conditions.
5. If the current channel is compatible
with both the HbbTV and non-HbbTV
text input modes, activate TTX by select TTX key twice.
● When the screen indicates (with the a,
etc.) that HbbTV is being accessed.
● Select TTX using your remote, once to
enter the HbbTV text-input mode.
● Select TTX using your remote, twice to
enter the non-HbbTV text-input mode.Connecting to a TV Viewing Card slot
To connect the CI CARD Adapter, follow
these steps: for LED 4500~6300 Series and PDP TV
Using the “CI or CI+ CARD”
To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted.
● If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+
CARD”, some channels will display the
message “Scrambled Signal”.
● The pairing information containing a
telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD”
ID the Host ID and other information
will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes.
If an error message is displayed, please
contact your service provider.
● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message
“Updating Completed” is displayed,
indicating the channel list is updated.
NOTE
– You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD”
from a local cable service provider.
– When removing the “CI or CI+
CARD”, carefully pull it out with your
hands since dropping the “CI or CI+
CARD” may cause damage to it.– Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the
direction marked on the card.
– The location of the COMMON
INTERFACE slot may be different
depending on the model.
– “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in
some countries and regions; check
with your authorized dealer.
– If you have any problems, please
contact a service provider.
– Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current aerial settings.
The screen will be distorted or will
not be seen.
To connect the CI CARD Adapter, follow
these steps: for LED 6500 Series and above
N We recommend attaching the adapter
before installing the wall mount, or
inserting the “CI or CI+ CARD”.
1. Insert the CI CARD Adapter into the
two holes on the product 1.
N Please find two holes on the rear
of the TV. Two holes are beside
the COMMON INTERFACE port.
2. Connect the CI CARD Adapter into
the COMMON INTERFACE port on
the product 2.3. Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”
Warning
We recommend that you insert the CI
card before you mount the TV on a
wall. It may be difficult to insert after
the mounting. Insert the card after
attaching the CI-Module on TV. It is
difficult to attach the module if you
insert the card before attaching.Using the “CI or CI+ CARD”
To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+
CARD” must be inserted.
● If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+
CARD”, some channels will display the
message “Scrambled Signal”.
● The pairing information containing a
telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD”
ID the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes.
If an error message is displayed, please
contact your service provider.
● When the configuration of channel
information has finished, the message
“Updating Completed” is displayed,
indicating the channel list is updated.
NOTE
– You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD”
from a local cable service provider.– When removing the “CI or CI+
CARD”, carefully pull it out with your
hands since dropping the “CI or CI+
CARD” may cause damage to it.
– Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the
direction marked on the card.
– The location of the COMMON
INTERFACE slot may be different
depending on the model.Teletext Feature
(Depending on the country)
The index page of the Teletext service
gives you information on how to use
the Service. For Teletext information
to be displayed correctly, channel
reception must be stable. Otherwise,
information may be missing or some
pages may not be displayed.
N You can change Teletext pages by
select numeric using your remote control.
/ Teletext on / mix / off: Activates
the Teletext mode for the current
channel. Press the button twice to
overlap the Teletext mode with the
current broadcasting screen. Press it
one more time to exit teletext.
8 Store: Stores the Teletext pages.
4 Size: Displays the teletext on the
upper half of the screen in double-size.
To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal
display, press it once again.
9 Hold: Holds the display at the
current page, in the case that there are
several secondary pages that follow
automatically. To undo, press it again.
Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue):
If the FASTEXT system is used by the
broadcasting company, the different
topics on a Teletext page are colourcoded and can be selected by coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding
to the topic of your choice. A new
colour coded page is displayed. Items
can be selected in the same way. To
display the previous or next page,
select corresponding coloured button.
0 Mode: Selects the Teletext mode
(LIST / FLOF). If pressed during LIST
mode, switches the mode to List save
mode. In List save mode, you can save
a Teletext page into a list using the 8 (store) button.
1 Sub-page: Displays the available
sub-page.
2 Page up: Displays the next Teletext
page.
3 Page down: Displays the previous
Teletext page.
6 Index: Displays the index (contents)
page at any time while you are viewing
Teletext.
5 Reveal: Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example).
To display the normal screen, press it
again.
7 Cancel: Shrinks the Teletext display
to overlap with the current broadcast.
Typical Teletext pagePart Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel identity.
C Current page number or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information. FASTEXT information.Anti-theft Kensington Lock
A Kensington Lock is a device you can
use to physically fix your TV in place
when using it in a public place.
You wrap the Kensington Lock’s cable
1
2
around a large, immobile object and
then attach the lock to the Kensington
slot on the back of the TV.
The appearance and locking method
may differ from the illustration below
depending on the manufacturer.
Refer to the manual provided with
the Kensington Lock for additional
information on proper use. The
Kensington Lock is not supplied by
Samsung.N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of
the TV. The Kensington slot is beside
the “K” icon.
To lock the product, follow these steps:
1. Wrap the Kensington Lock cable
around a large, stationary object
such as desk or chair.
2. Slide the end of the cable with the
lock attached through the looped
end of the Kensington Lock cable.3. Insert the locking device into the
Kensington slot on the product.
4. Lock the lock.
N These are general instructions. For
exact instructions, see the User
manual supplied with the locking
device.
N The locking device has to be
purchased separately.
N The location of the Kensington slot
may be different depending on the TV model.Licence
Open Source Licence Notice
In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licences are available
on the product menu.
Open Source Licence Notice is written only English.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p,
including premium content.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are
trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are
used under licence.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a
subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that
plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to
convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be
registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies.
To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device
setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete
your registration.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668;
7,515,710; 7,519,274TheaterSound, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS
Labs, Inc.
TheaterSound technology is incorporated under licence from
SRS Lab, Inc.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS
and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+
Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product Includes software. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and
other countries.Trademark: Rovi and Rovi Guide are trademarks of Rovi
Corporation and/or its subsidiaries.
Licence: The Rovi Guide system is manufactured under licence
from Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries.
Patent: The Rovi Guide system is protected by patents and
patent applications filed in the US, Europe, and other countries
including one or more of the United States patents 6,396,546;
5,940,073; 6,239,794 issued to Rovi Corporation and/or its
subsidiaries.
Disclaimer: Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries and
related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or
availability of the programme schedule information or other
data in the Rovi Guide system and cannot guarantee service
availability in your area. In no event shall Rovi Corporation and/
or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection
with the accuracy or availability of the programme schedule
information or other data in the Rovi Guide system.
Plasma TV
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model _____________Serial No. _____________
E-MANUAL
© 2011 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
BN68-03497E-03
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Country Customer Care Centre Web Site
AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at
BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
CZECH 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/dk
FINLAND 030 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi
FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/fr
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.de
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/it
LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl
NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com/no
POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)
022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com/pl
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt
SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se
TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk
EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com/ie
SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/(French)
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt
LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 1 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:20English - 2
For more information on how to use e-Manual (p. 14)
Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product
appearance. Product design and specifications may be changed without notice.
Digital TV notice
1. Functionalities related to Digital TV (DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC) digital terrestrial signals are
broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cable-TV service. Please check with your local
dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal.
2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C is that for the broadcast
transmission of digital TV over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric Programme Guide), VOD (Video On Demand) and so
on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be workable at this moment.
3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital terrestrial and
DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.
4. Depending on the countries/areas where this TV set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may
be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business.
5. Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with some cable service providers.
6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre.
✎ The reception quality of TV may be affected due to differences in broadcasting method between the countries. Please check the TV
performance in the local SAMSUNG Authorized Dealer, or the Samsung Call Centre whether it can be improved by reconfiguring TV setting or
not.
User Instructions
• Screen Image retention
Do not display a still image (such as on a video game) on the plasma display panel for more than several minutes as it can cause screen image
retention. This image retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the
screen when displaying a still image.
• Heat on the top of the Plasma TV
The top side of the product may be hot after long periods of use as heat dissipates from the panel through the vent hole in the upper part of the
product.
This is normal and does not indicate any defect or operation failure of the product.
However, children should be prevented from touching the upper part of the product.
• The product is making a “cracking” noise.
A “cracking” noise may occur when the product contracts or expands due to a change in the surrounding environment such as temperature or
humidity. This is normal and not a defect of the unit.
• Cell Defects
The PDP uses a panel consisting of 2,360,000(HD-level) to 6,221,000(FHD-level) pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However,
there may be a few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product.
• Avoid operating the TV at temperatures below 41°F (5°C)
• A still image displayed too long may cause permanent damage to the PDP Panel.
Watching the Plasma TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of
the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or a game console may cause similar effects to
the screen.
Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty.
• After-images on the Screen.
Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images.
To prevent this effect, reduce the “brightness” and “contrast” when displaying still images for a long time.
• Warranty
Warranty does not cover any damage caused by image retention.
Burn-in is not covered by the warranty.
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger,
headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible
harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste
and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the
retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items
for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase
contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other
household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery
contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of,
these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material
reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 2 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:21English - 3
Accessories
✎Please make sure the following items are included with your TV. If any items are missing, contact your
dealer.
✎The items’ colours and shapes may vary depending on the models.
✎Cables not included in the package contents can be purchased separately.
✎Check that there is no accessory hidden behind packing materials when you open the box.
[CAUTION: INSERT SECURELY LEST SHOULD BE DETACHED IN SET
• Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) • Power Cord
• Owner’s Instructions • Cleaning-Cloth
• Warranty Card (Not available in some locations) / Safety Guide
43 inches model
Ferrite Core (2EA)
✎Ferrite Core for Power Cord: The ferrite cores are used to shield the cables from
interference. When connecting a cable, open the ferrite core and clip it around the
cable near the plug as shown in the figure.
x A Minimum distance between the ferrite core and the end of the cord inserted in
the TV: 6~8 inches (15~20 cm)
x B Maximum distance between the ferrite core and the other end of the cord
inserted in the AC outlet: 3/4 inches (2 cm)
Power Cord
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 3 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:21English - 4
51 inches model
Ferrite Core (2EA) Ferrite Core (1EA)
✎Ferrite Core for Power Cord: The ferrite cores are used to shield the cables from
interference. When connecting a cable, open the ferrite core and clip it around the
cable near the plug as shown in the figure.
x A Minimum distance between the ferrite core and the end of the cord inserted in
the TV: 6~8 inches (15~20 cm)
x B Maximum distance between the ferrite core and the other end of the cord
inserted in the AC outlet: 3/4 inches (2 cm)
Power Cord
✎Ferrite Core: The ferrite cores are used to shield the cables from interference.
When connecting a cable, open the ferrite core and clip it around the cable near
the plug as shown in the figure.
Antenna Cable /
Component Cable
(sold separately)
• An administration fee may be charged if either
– (a) an engineer is called out at your request and there is no defect in the product
(i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual)
– (b) you bring the unit to a repair centre and there is no defect in the product
(i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual).
• The amount of such administration charge will be advised to you before any work or home visit is carried out.
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 4 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:22English - 5
Viewing the Control Panel
✎The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
Remote control sensor Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.
Power Indicator Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in standby mode.
SOURCEE Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use
this button as you would use the ENTERE button on the remote control.
MENU Displays an on-screen menu, the OSD (on screen display) of your TV’s
y features.
Adjusts the volume. In the OSD, use the y buttons as you would use
z the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control.
Changes the channels. In the OSD, use the z buttons as you
would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons on the remote control.
P (Power) Turns the TV on or off.
Standby mode
Do not leave your TV in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on a holiday, for example).
A small amount of electric power is still consumed even when the power button is turned off. It is best to unplug
the power cord.
Securing the Installation Space
Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of
the product.
✎When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only.
x If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury
due to the product falling.
✎The appearance may differ depending on the product.
✎Be careful when you contact the TV because some parts can be somewhat hot.
Installation with a stand. Installation with a wall-mount.
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Control Panel
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 5 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:22English - 6
Viewing the Remote Control
✎This is a special remote control for the visually impaired and has Braille points on the Channel and Number
buttons.
Installing batteries (Battery size: AAA)
Turns the TV on and off.
Displays and selects the available video
sources.
Returns to the previous channel.
Cuts off the sound temporarily.
Changes channels.
Displays channel lists on the screen.
Displays the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide).
Displays information on the TV screen.
u/d/l/r : Move the cursor on-screen
menu item.
ENTERE: Selects the menu and
changes the corresponding item value.
Exits the menu.
Have direct access to channels.
Adjusts the volume.
Alternately select Teletext ON, Double,
Mix or OFF.
Opens the OSD.
Quickly select frequently used functions.
Displays the Content Home, which
includes Watch TV, My Downloads and
Source.
Returns to the previous menu.
These buttons are for the Channel
Manager, My Downloads menu, etc.
Use these buttons in My Downloads
and Anynet+ modes.
P.MODE: Press to select the Picture
Mode.
W: Sets the video, which provided with
3D signal.
DUAL f-g: Sound effect selection.
E-MANUAL: Displays the e-Manual.
P.SIZE: Selects the Picture Size.
AD/SUBT.: Turns the audio description on
and off (not available in some locations). /
Displays digital subtitles.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 6 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:23English - 7
Changing the Input Source
Source
Use to select TV or an external input
sources such as a DVD / Blu-ray player /
cable box /STB satellite receiver.
1. Press the SOURCE button on your
remote.
2. Select a desired external input source.
✎You can change the view mode
among the All and Connected by pressing
the l or r button.
■ TV / Ext. / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3 /
AV / Component / USB
✎In the Source, connected inputs will be
highlighted.
✎Ext. and PC always stay activated.
✎If the connected external devices are not
highlighted, press the red button. The TV will
search for connected devices.
Edit Name
In the Source, press the TOOLS button, and then you
can set an external input sources name you want.
■ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR
STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC /
DVI PC / DVI Devices / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD
DVD / DMA: Name the device connected to the
input jacks to make your input source selection
easier.
✎When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN 1(DVI)
port with HDMI cable, you should set the TV to
PC mode under Edit Name. (PS51D490)
✎When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN 1(DVI)
port with HDMI to DVI cable, you should set
the TV to DVI PC mode under Edit Name.
(PS51D490)
✎When connecting an AV devices to the HDMI IN
1(DVI) port with HDMI to DVI cable, you should
set the TV to DVI Devices mode under Edit
Name. (PS43D490, PS51D490)
Information
You can see detailed information about the selected
external device.
Connecting to an Antenna
When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically.
✎Preset: Connecting the mains and antenna.
✎The PDP device may interfere with an amateur radio or AM radio.
✎When using two-way radio mobile and portable units or amateur radio or AM radio near by your TV, this may
cause the TV to malfunction.
Cable VHF/UHF Antenna
or
Power Input
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 7 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:24English - 8
Plug & Play (Initial Setup)
When the TV is initially powered on, a sequence of on-screen prompts will assist in configuring basic settings.
Press the POWERP button. Plug & Play is available only when the Source is set to TV.
✎Before turning on the TV, make sure the antenna cable is connected (p. 6).
✎To return to the previous step, press the Red button.
1
Selecting a language Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button.
Select the desired OSD (On Screen Display) language.
2
Selecting Store
Demo or Home Use
Press the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button.
Select the Home Use mode. Store Demo mode is for retail
environments.
To return the unit’s settings from Store Demo to Home Use
(standard): Press the volume button on the TV. When you see the
volume OSD, press and hold MENU for 5 sec.
Store Demo is only for shop display. If you select it, several
functions are not able to use. Please select Home Use when you
watch at home.
3
Selecting a country Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select the
appropriate country. (depending on the country)
✎After selecting the country in the Country menu, some models may proceed
with an additional option to setup the pin number.
✎When you input the PIN number, “0-0-0-0” is not available.
4
Setting the Clock
Mode
Set the Clock Mode automatically or manually.
Auto: Select the time zone where you are located.
Manual: Allows you to manually set the current date and time.
5
Selecting an antenna Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select the Antenna
source to memorise.
6
Selecting a channel Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select the channel
source to memorise. When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears
allowing you to assign numerical values (channel frequencies) to the channels. For
more information, refer to Channel → Auto Tuning.
7
Enjoy your TV. Press the ENTERE button.
If You Want to Reset This Feature...
You should do Plug & Play (MENU → System) again at home although you did in shop.
Select System - Plug & Play (Initial Setup). Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number is “0-0-0-0”
(except France). If you want to change the PIN number, use the Change PIN function.
✎If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode,
which resets the PIN to “0-0-0-0” (France: “1-1-1-1”): MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (on).
P
POWER
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 8 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:24English - 9
Connecting to an AV devices
¦
Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, HD cable box, HD STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite
receiver, VCR
Using an HDMI or an HDMI to DVI cable (up to 1080p)
✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
x When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack for video. A DVD,
Blu-ray player, HD cable box, or HD STB satellite receiver may require a DVI-HDMI (DVI to HDMI) cable
or DVI-HDMI (DVI to HDMI) adapter. The PC/DVI AUDIO IN jack is required for audio.
x The picture may not display normally (if at all) or the audio may not work if an external device that uses
an older version of HDMI mode is connected to the TV. If such a problem occurs, ask the manufacturer
of the external device about the HDMI version and, if out of date, request an upgrade.
x Be sure to purchase a certified HDMI cable. Otherwise, the picture may not display or a connection
error may occur.
USB HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
W R
HDMI connection
HDMI to DVI connection
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 9 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:25English - 10
Using a Component (up to 1080p) or an Audio/Video (480i only) and a Scart Cable
✎In Ext. mode, DTV Out supports MPEG SD Video and Audio only.
✎When connecting to AV IN, the colour of the AV IN [Y/VIDEO] jack (green) will not match the video
cable (yellow).
✎To obtain the best picture quality, the Component connection is recommended over the A/V
connection.
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
PR PB Y
COMPONENT OUT
EXT
Component connection
AV connection
SCART connection
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 10 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:25English - 11
Connecting to a PC and Audio device
¦ Available devices: digital audio system, amplifier, DVD home theatre, PC
Using an Optical (Digital) or a Headphone Connection
✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
x When a digital audio system is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack, decrease the
volume of both the TV and the system.
x 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1 CH.
x When the receiver (home theatre) is set to on, you can hear sound output from the TV’s optical jack.
When the TV is receiving a DTV signal, the TV will send 5.1 CH sound to the home theatre receiver.
When the source is a digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB (Set-TopBox) satellite receiver and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 CH audio will be heard from the
home theatre receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 CH audio, connect the digital audio out jack from your
DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver directly to an amplifier or home theatre.
✎Headphones H: You can connect your headphones to the headphones output on your set. While the
headphones are connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled.
x Sound function may be restricted when connecting headphones to the TV.
x Headphone volume and TV volume are adjusted separately.
OPTICAL
DVD home theatre connection
Headphones connection
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 11 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:26English - 12
¦ Using an HDMI cable or an HDMI to DVI cable or a D-sub cable
✎Connecting through the HDMI cable may not be supported depending on the PC.
Display Modes (D-Sub and an HDMI to DVI Input)
• PS43D490: 1024 X 768 @ 60Hz
• PS51D490: 1360 X 768 @ 60Hz
Mode Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency (KHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
Pixel Clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
PS43D490 PS51D490
IBM
640 x 350
720 x 400
31.469
31.469
70.086
70.087
25.175
28.322
+/-
-/+
c
c
c
c
MAC
640 x 480
832 x 624
35.000
49.726
66.667
74.551
30.240
57.284
-/-
-/-
c
c
c
c
VESA DMT
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1360 x 768
31.469
37.861
37.500
37.879
48.077
46.875
48.363
56.476
60.023
47.712
59.940
72.809
75.000
60.317
72.188
75.000
60.004
70.069
75.029
60.015
25.175
31.500
31.500
40.000
50.000
49.500
65.000
75.000
78.750
85.500
-/-
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
✎NOTE
x For HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
x The interlace mode is not supported.
x The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
x Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG(Sync On Green) is not supported.
PC OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DVI OUT HDMI OUT
PC connection
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 12 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:27English - 13
Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot
Using the “CI or CI+ CARD”
To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted.
• If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”, some channels will
display the message “Scrambled Signal”.
• The pairing information containing a telephone number, the
“CI or CI+ CARD” ID the Host ID and other information will
be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is
displayed, please contact your service provider.
• When the configuration of channel information has finished,
the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating
the channel list is updated.
✎NOTE
x You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider.
x When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+
CARD” may cause damage to it.
x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card.
x The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model.
x “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorized dealer.
x If you have any problems, please contact a service provider.
x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current antenna settings. The screen will be distorted or
will not be seen.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 13 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:27English - 14
How to view the e-Manual
Screen Display
How to toggle between the e-Manual and the corresponding menu(s).
✎This function is not enabled in some menus.
Method 1 Method 2
1. Press the red button to select Try Now, if you
want to execute the corresponding menu(s).
2. To return to the e-Manual screen, press the
E-MANUAL button.
1. Press the ENTERE button when selecting
Contents Area. The “Are you sure?” is displayed.
Select Yes and then press the ENTERE button.
The OSD window will be displayed.
2. To return to the e-Manual screen, press the
E-MANUAL button.
E-MANUAL You can read the introduction and instructions about the TV features stored
in your TV.
O MENUm → Support → e-Manual → ENTERE
✎If you want to return to e-Manual, press E-MANUAL button on remote.
✎You can’t use the Try Now function, if the menu is not activated.
Basic Features
Changing the Preset Picture Mode
Adjusting Picture Settings
Changing the Picture Size
Changing the Picture Options
Setting up the TV with Your PC
} Index E Enter e Exit
TV Screen: Displays the current
input
source screen.
Change the category. Press l or r
button to select category you want.
Displays the sub-menu list. Press
ENTERE button to select submenu you want.
Operation Buttons:
} Blue (Index): Displays index screen.
E Enter: Select a category or sub-menu.
e Exit: Exit the e-Manual.
Try Now
E-MANUAL
Changing the Preset Picture Mode
■
Select your preferred picture type.
Picture Mode t
• Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
• Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
• Natural for LED TV / Relax for PDP TV : Suitable for reducing eye strain.
• Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
• Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games.
N It is only available in PC mode.
Changing the Preset Picture Mode
O MENUm → Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE
■ Picture Mode
Select your preferred picture type.
N When an input source is set to PC, the Picture Mode is only available the
Standard and Entertain.
• Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
• Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
• Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
• Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games.
Basic Features > Changing the Preset Picture Mode (5/10)
a Try Now b Home { Zoom } Index L Page e Exit
Picture
Picture Mode : Standard r
Cell Light : 10
Contrast : 100
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Screen Adjustment
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 14 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:33English - 15
Viewing the Contents
Using the Zoom mode
When you view the e-Manual instruction, select the
yellow button to magnify the screen. You can scroll
through the magnified screen by using the u or d
buttons.
✎To return to the previous screen, press the
RETURN button.
How to search a keyword by using index page
✎This function may not supported depending on the language.
1. If you want to search a keyword, press the blue button to select Index.
2. Press the l or r button to select a character order you want, and then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the u or d button to select a keyword you want to see, and then press the ENTERE button.
4. You can view the corresponding e-Manual instruction screen.
✎To close the Index screen, press the RETURN button.
a Try Now b Home { Zoom } Index L Page e Exit
Basic Features > Changing the Preset Picture Mode (5/10)
Contents Area: You can view the corresponding
contents, if you selected a sub-menu. To move
previous or next page, press the l or r button.
Operation Buttons:
a Red (Try Now): Displays the corresponding menu(s).
b Green (Home): Moves to the e-Manual home screen.
{ Yellow (Zoom): Magnifies a screen.
} Blue (Index): Displays index screen.
L (Page): Moves to previous or next page.
Changing the Preset Picture Mode
O MENUm → Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE
■ Picture Mode
Select your preferred picture type.
N When an input source is set to PC, the Picture Mode is only
available the Standard and Entertain.
• Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
• Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
• Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
• Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games.
R Return
Changing the Preset Picture Mode
O MENUm → Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE
■ Picture Mode
Select your preferred picture type.
N When an input source is set to PC, the Picture Mode is only available the Standard
and Entertain.
• Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
• Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
• Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
• Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 15 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:34English - 16
Installing the Wall Mount
Installing the Wall Mount Kit
The wall mount kit (sold separately) allows you to mount the TV on the wall.
For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the wall mount. Contact a
technician for assistance when installing the wall mount bracket.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or others if you elect
to install the TV on your own.
Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)
✎The wall mount kit is not supplied, but sold separately.
Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials,
please contact your nearest dealer. If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal
injury.
✎NOTE
x Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are shown in the table below.
x When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly
are provided.
x Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications.
x Do not use screws that are longer than the standard dimension or do not comply with the VESA standard
screw specifications. Screws that are too long may cause damage to the inside of the TV set.
x For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the
screws may differ depending on the wall mount specifications.
x Do not fasten the screws that are too strongly; this may damage the product or cause the product to fall,
leading to personal injury. Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents.
x Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall
mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions.
x Do not mount the TV at more than a 15 degree tilt.
Product Family inches
VESA Spec.
(A * B)
Standard Screw Quantity
PDP-TV
43~51 400 X 400
M8 4
59~64 600 X 400
✎Unscrew the hole around before installing Wall-Mount on the wall.
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury
due to electric shock.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 16 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:35English - 17
Troubleshooting
If you have any questions about the TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please
visit “www.samsung.com,” then click on Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back-cover of this
manual.
Issues Solutions and Explanations
The TV won’t turn on. • Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the TV.
• Make sure the wall outlet is working.
• Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the TV turns
on, refer to “Remote control does not work” below.
There is no picture/video. • Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external
devices).
• Set your external device’s (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the connections
to the TV input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be connected to an
HDMI input on the TV.
• Make sure your connected devices are powered on.
• Be sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the remote control.
The remote control does not work. • Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction.
• Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote.
• Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away.
The cable/set top box remote control
doesn’t turn the TV on or off, or adjust the
volume.
• Programme the Cable/Set remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable/Set user manual for
the SAMSUNG TV code.
✎Some of above pictures and functions are available at specific models only.
✎You can keep your TV as optimum condition to upgrade the latest firmware on web site (samsung.com →
Support → Downloads) by USB.
Licence
List of Features
Excellent Digital Interface & Networking: With a built-in HD digital tuner, nonsubscription HD broadcasts can be
viewed without a cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver.
3D
This exciting new feature enables you to view 3D content.
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)
Allows you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote.
My Downloads
Allows you to play music files, pictures, and movies saved on a USB device.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 17 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:35English - 18
Securing the TV to the wall
Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing onto the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure
that your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over,
resulting in serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided in the included Safety
Flyer. For added stability and safety, install the anti-fall device as follows.
To Avoid the TV from Falling
1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall.
Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall.
✎You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on
the type of wall.
✎Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied,
please purchase these additionally.
2. Remove the screws from the back centre of the TV, put the screws into
the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again.
✎Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please
purchase the screws of the following specifications.
3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall
with a strong cable and then tie the string tightly.
✎NOTE
x Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.
x It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the
clamps fixed on the TV.
x Untie the string before moving the TV.
4. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If
you have any doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer.
Storage and Maintenance
✎If you attached some stickers on the TV screen, it remains some debris after removing the sticker. Please
clean it to watch TV.
Do not spray water or a cleaning agent directly onto
the product. Any liquid that goes into the product may
cause a failure, fire, or electric shock.
Clean the product with a soft cloth dapped in a small
amount of water.
Wall
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 18 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:36English - 19
Specifications
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
TV System Analogue: B/G, D/K, L, I (Depending on your country selection)
Digital: DVB-T/DVB-C
Colour/Video System Analogue: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60
Digital: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0
Sound System BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC.
HDMI IN Video: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i
Audio: 2Ch Linear PCM 32/44.1/48kHz, 16/20/24bits.
Stand Swivel (Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Model Name PS43D490 PS51D490
Screen Size 43 inches (109 cm) 51 inches (128 cm)
Sound
(Output) 10 W X 2
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
1011.8 X 56.0 X 622.4 mm
1011.8 X 305.0 X 698.7 mm
1187.8 X 56.0 X 706.6 mm
1187.8 X 305.0 X 782.9 mm
Weight
Without Stand
With Stand
16.0 kg
20.3 kg
22.5 kg
26.8 kg
Display Resolution 1024 X 768 1360 X 768
✎Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
✎For information about power supply, and more about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the
product.
✎Hereby, Samsung, declares that this PDP TV is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 19 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:36Declaration of Conformity
For the following
Product : PDP TV
Model(s) : PS43D490, PS51D490
Year of Affixing CE Marking : 2011
Manufactured at:
F1: Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
416, Maetan 3-Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon-Si, Gyeonggi-Do, 443-742 Korea
F2: Samsung Electronics Slovakia s.r.o
Hviezdoslavova 807 924 27 Galanta, Slovak Republic
F3: Samsung Electronics Hungarian Co., Ltd.
H-5126 Jaszfenyszaru, Samsung ter 1
(Factories name and address)
We hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the electrical product above is in compliance with
the essential requirements of R&TTE Directive (1995/5/EC), the Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) and
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/EC) by application of
EN 60065: 2002+A1:2006+A11:2008
EN55022: 2006+A1:2007
EN61000-3-2:2006
EN 300 328-1 v1.7.1
EN 301 489-17 v1.3.2 :2008
EN61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001+A2:2005
EN55024:1998+A1:2001+A2:2003
EN55013:2001+A1:2003+A2 :2006
EN55020:2007
EN 301 489-1 v1.8.1 :2008
and the Eco-Design Directive (2009/125/EC) implemented by Regulation (EC) No 642/2009 for televisions.
The Technical documentation is kept at the below Manufacturer’s address.
Manufacturer
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
416 Maetan-dong, Young-Tong gu,
Suwon, Korea 442-742
05 Jan 2011
(Place and date of issue)
Chang Seub Eum / Manager
(Name and signature of authorized person)
Representative in the EU :
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park
Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire
GU46 6GG, UK
06 Jan 2011
(Place and date of issue)
Joong Hoon Choi / Lab. Manager
(Name and signature of authorized person)
Note : It is not the address of Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the phone number of
Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact the retailer where you purchased your
product.
ELECTRONICS
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 20 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:37This page is intentionally
left blank.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 21 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:37Français - 2
Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation du manuel électronique (p. 14)
Les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. Elles peuvent différer de
l’aspect réel du produit. La conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis.
Avis concernant le téléviseur numérique
1. Les fonctions relatives au téléviseur numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux terrestres numériques de type DVB-T
(MPEG2 et MPEG4 AVC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un service de télévision par câble compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC).
Consultez votre distributeur local pour connaître les possibilités en matière de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. La norme DVB-C est quant à elle prévue pour la
diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions particulières, telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program
Guide - EPG), la vidéo à la demande (Video on Demand - VOD), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Dès lors, elles ne seront pas
traitées pour l’instant.
3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes DVB-T et DVB-C (août 2008), il n’est pas garanti qu’il soit compatible avec les futures diffusions de
signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C.
4. En fonction du pays ou de la région où vous vous trouvez, certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des frais supplémentaires pour un tel
service. Vous devrez aussi peut-être accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés.
5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et que la réception des signaux DVB-C
ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs.
6. Pour plus d’informations, contactez le service client local de Samsung.
✎ Les différentes méthodes de diffusion adoptées en fonction des pays peuvent affecter la qualité de réception du téléviseur. Vérifiez le fonctionnement
du téléviseur chez votre revendeur agréé SAMSUNG ou contactez le centre d’appel de Samsung pour savoir s’il est possible d’en améliorer les
performances en reconfigurant les réglages.
Instructions d’utilisation
• Rémanence à l’écran
N’affichez pas une image figée (telle qu’elle apparaît sur un jeu vidéo) sur l’écran à plasma au-delà de quelques minutes, sinon cela risquerait de provoquer
une rémanence à l’écran. Cette rémanence de l’image est également appelée “brûlure de l’écran”. Pour éviter la rémanence, réduisez le niveau de contraste
ou de luminosité de l’écran lorsque vous affichez une image figée.
• Chaleur diffusée sur la partie supérieure du téléviseur à écran plasma
Le dessus de l’appareil peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation prolongée, car la chaleur s’échappe du panneau par le trou d’aération situé dans la partie supérieure
du produit.
Ce phénomène est normal et n’indique aucunement la présence d’un défaut ou d’un dysfonctionnement.
Il convient cependant d’empêcher les enfants de toucher la partie supérieure de l’écran.
• Le produit fait un bruit de “claquement”.
Ce bruit de “claquement” risque d’être perceptible lorsque le produit se contracte ou s’étend suite à un changement du milieu ambiant, tel que la température
ou l’humidité. Ce phénomène est normal et ne constitue pas un défaut.
• Défauts de cellule
L’écran à plasma utilise un panneau constitué de 2 360 000 (niveau HD) à 6 221 000 (niveau FHD) pixels dont la fabrication fait appel à une technologie
avancée. Il se peut toutefois que quelques points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l’écran. Ils n’ont aucune incidence sur la performance du produit.
• Evitez d’utiliser le téléviseur à des températures inférieures à 5°C (41°F).
• Une image figée affichée pendant une période prolongée peut endommager définitivement l’écran PDP.
Visionner pendant longtemps le téléviseur à écran plasma en format 4/3 risque de laisser apparaître des traces de bordures sur la gauche,
sur la droite et au centre de l’écran. Ces traces sont dues à la différence de luminosité sur l’écran. Lire un DVD ou un jeu vidéo sur console
risque de provoquer des effets similaires sur l’écran.
Les dommages provoqués par l’effet susmentionné ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
• Images rémanentes à l’écran.
L’affichage d’images fixes de jeux vidéo et d’ordinateurs pendant une période excessive peut produire des rémanences.
Pour empêcher ce phénomène, réduisez la luminosité et le contraste en cas d’affichage prolongé d’images figées.
• Garantie
La garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés par la rémanence.
Les brûlures ne sont pas couvertes par la garantie.
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés
(chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des
déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres
déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont
invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et
les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs
et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
professionnels et commerciaux.
Élimination des piles de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont
mis en place)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec
les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités
de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne
sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les
ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler
via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 2 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:37Français - 3
Accessoires
✎Vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont inclus avec votre téléviseur. S’il manque des éléments, contactez votre
revendeur.
✎Les couleurs et les formes des éléments peuvent varier en fonction des modèles.
✎Les câbles qui ne se trouvent pas dans le contenu de l’emballage peuvent être achetés séparément.
✎Vérifiez qu’aucun accessoires n’est caché dans l’emballage lorsque vous ouvrez la boîte.
[ATTENTION : INSEREZ FERMEMENT DE MANIERE A CE QU’IL NE SE DETACHE PAS
• Télécommande et piles (AAA x 2) • Câble d’alimentation
• Instructions d’utilisation • Tissu de nettoyage
• Carte de garantie (non disponible dans certains pays) / Manuel de sécurité
dèle 43 pouces uniquement
Blindage magnétique (2EA)
✎Blindage magnétique pour cordon d’alimentation : le blindage magnétique sert à protéger les
câbles des interférences. Lors de la connexion d’un câble, ouvrez le blindage magnétique et
rabattez-le autour du câble près de la prise, comme illustré.
x A Distance maximale entre le blindage magnétique et une extrémité du cordon insérée dans
le téléviseur : 6~8 pouces (15~20 cm)
x B Distance maximale entre le blindage magnétique et l’autre extrémité du cordon insérée
dans la prise CA : 3/4 pouces (2 cm)
Câble
d’alimentation
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 3 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:38Français - 4
Modèle 51 pouces uniquement
Blindage magnétique (2EA) Blindage magnétique (1EA)
✎Blindage magnétique pour cordon d’alimentation : le blindage magnétique sert à protéger
les câbles des interférences. Lors de la connexion d’un câble, ouvrez le blindage
magnétique et rabattez-le autour du câble près de la prise, comme illustré.
x A Distance maximale entre le blindage magnétique et une extrémité du cordon insérée
dans le téléviseur : 6~8 pouces (15~20 cm)
x B Distance maximale entre le blindage magnétique et l’autre extrémité du cordon insérée
dans la prise CA : 3/4 pouces (2 cm)
Câble d’alimentation
✎Blindage magnétique : le blindage magnétique sert à protéger les câbles des interférences.
Lors de la connexion d’un câble, ouvrez le blindage magnétique et rabattez-le autour du
câble près de la prise, comme illustré.
Cable d’antenne /
Câble composante
(matériel vendu
séparément)
• Des frais d’administration peuvent vous être facturés si :
– (a) un technicien intervient à votre demande et que le produit ne comporte aucun défaut
(c.-à-d. si vous n’avez pas pris la peine de lire le présent manuel d’utilisation)
– (b) vous amenez le produit dans un centre de réparation alors qu’il ne comporte aucun défaut
– (c.-à-d. si vous n’avez pas pris la peine de lire le présent manuel d’utilisation).
• Le montant de ces frais d’administration vous sera signifié avant la réalisation de toute prestation ou visite à domicile.
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 4 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:38Français - 5
Présentation du panneau de configuration
✎La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
Capteur de la télécommande Dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur.
Témoin d’alimentation Clignote, puis s’arrête lorsque le téléviseur est allumé. S’allume en mode Veille.
SOURCEE Bascule entre toutes les sources d’entrée disponibles. Dans le menu du téléviseur, ce
bouton a la même fonction que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande.
MENU Affiche un menu à l’écran OSD (on screen display) reprenant les fonctions de votre
y téléviseur.
Règle le volume. Dans le menu à l’écran (OSD), utilisez les boutons y de la
z même façon que les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande.
zPermet de modifier les chaînes. Dans le menu à l’écran (OSD), utilisez les boutons
de la même façon que les boutons ▼ et ▲ de la télécommande.
P (Alimentation) Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le téléviseur.
Mode veille
Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode Veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous partez en vacances, par exemple).
Même s’il est en veille, l’appareil consomme toujours une petite quantité d’énergie. Il est préférable de débrancher le cordon
d’alimentation.
Sécurisation de l’espace d’installation
Maintenez les distances requises entre le produit et les autres objets (par exemple, les murs) afin de garantir une ventilation
adaptée.
Le non-respect de ces distances peut provoquer un incendie ou un problème au produit en raison d’une augmentation de la
température interne de celui-ci.
✎Lors de l’utilisation d’un pied ou d’un support mural, utilisez uniquement les pièces fournies par Samsung Electronics.
x L’utilisation de pièces fournies par un autre fabricant peut occasionner un problème au niveau du produit ou la chute
de celui-ci, ce qui pourrait vous blesser.
✎L’aspect peut varier en fonction du produit.
✎Soyez prudent lorsque vous touchez le téléviseur, car certaines parties peuvent être brûlantes.
Installation avec un pied. Installation avec un support de montage mural.
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Panneau de configuration
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 5 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:39Français - 6
Présentation de la télécommande
✎Ceci est une télécommande spéciale destinée aux malvoyants. Elle dispose de points Braille sur les touches de chaînes
et de volume.
Installation des piles (type de pile : AAA)
Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le téléviseur.
Permet d’afficher et de sélectionner les
sources vidéo disponibles.
Permet de revenir à la chaîne précédente.
Permet d’arrêter temporairement le son.
Permet de changer de chaîne.
Permet d’afficher les listes des chaînes à l’écran.
Permet d’afficher le EPG (Electronic
Programme Guide).
permet d’afficher des informations à l’écran.
u/d/l/r : permet de déplacer le curseur
dans les éléments du menu à l’écran.
ENTERE: permet de sélectionner le
menu et de modifier la valeur de l’élément
correspondante.
Permet de quitter le menu.
Donne un accès direct aux chaînes.
Règle le volume.
Choisissez Teletext Activé, Double, Mix ou
ARRET.
Permet d’ouvrir l’affichage à l’écran.
Permet de sélectionner rapidement les
fonctions fréquemment utilisées.
Affiche le menu Content Home, qui comprend
Regarder la TV, Mon contenu et Source.
Permet de revenir au menu précédent.
Ces boutons sont utilisés dans les menus
Gestion chaînes, Mon contenu, etc.
Utilisez ces boutons avec les modes
Mon contenu et Anynet+.
P.MODE : permet de sélectionner le mode
Mode Image.
W: définit la vidéo fournissant le signal 3D.
DUAL f-g : Sélection d’effets sonores.
E-MANUAL : affiche le e-Manual.
P.SIZE : sélectionne le Format de l’image.
AD/SUBT. : permet d’activer ou de
désactiver la description audio (non
disponible pour tous les pays). / Permet
d’afficher les sous-titres numériques.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 6 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:40Français - 7
Changement de la source d’entrée
Source
A utiliser pour sélectionner le téléviseur ou
d’autres sources d’entrée externes, telles que
des lecteurs DVD/Blu-ray, des décodeurs
câble ou des récepteurs satellite (boîtiers
décodeurs).
1. Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de votre
télécommande.
2. Sélectionnez la source d’entrée externe de votre choix.
✎Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes d’affichage
Tous et Connecté en appuyant sur le bouton l
ou r.
■ TV / Ext. / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / AV /
Component / USB
✎Les entrées connectées sont mises en surbrillance
dans Source.
✎Les options Ext. et PC sont toujours activées.
✎Si les périphériques externes connectés ne sont pas
mis en surbrillance, appuyez sur le bouton rouge. Le
téléviseur lance une recherche de périphériques.
Modif. Nom
Dans Source, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Vous pouvez
ensuite définir le nom de la source externe que vous
souhaitez.
■ Magnétoscope / DVD / Décodeur câble / Décodeur
satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeux /
Caméscope / PC / DVI PC / Périph. DVI / TV / IPTV
/ Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA : Nommez le périphérique
connecté aux prises d’entrée pour faciliter la sélection
de la source d’entrée.
✎Lorsque vous connectez un PC au port HDMI IN 1(DVI)
avec un câble HDMI, vous devez définir le téléviseur en
mode PC dans Modif. Nom. (PS51D490)
✎Lorsque vous connectez un PC au port HDMI IN
1(DVI) avec un câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez définir
le téléviseur en mode DVI PC dans Modif. Nom.
(PS51D490)
✎Lorsque vous connectez un périphérique AV au port
HDMI IN 1(DVI) avec un câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez
définir le téléviseur en mode Périph. DVI dans Modif.
Nom. (PS43D490, PS51D490)
Information
Affiche des informations détaillées sur le périphérique
externe sélectionné.
Raccordement à une antenne
Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s’effectuent de manière automatique.
✎Préréglage : connexion du câble d’alimentation et de l’antenne.
✎L’appareil PDP peut créer des interférences avec la radio amateur ou la radio AM.
✎L’utilisation de radios portables ou mobiles, d’émetteurs-récepteurs, ainsi que de radios amateur ou AM près de votre
téléviseur pourrait engendrer des dysfonctionnements de l’appareil.
Câble Antenne VHF/UHF
ou
Entrée de l’alimentation
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 7 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:40Français - 8
Plug & Play (configuration initiale)
Lorsque le téléviseur est allumé pour la première fois, plusieurs invites s’affichent pour vous aider à configurer les réglages de
base. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP. Plug & Play est disponible uniquement si Source est définie sur TV.
✎Avant de mettre le téléviseur sous tension, assurez-vous que l’antenne est branchée (p. 6).
✎Pour revenir à l’étape précédente, appuyez sur le bouton rouge.
1
Choix d’une langue Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Sélectionnez la langue de votre choix pour l’affichage à l’écran.
2
Sélection du mode Enr.
démo ou Util. domicile
Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Sélectionnez le mode Util. domicile. Le mode Enr. démo est prévu pour
un usage en magasin.
Pour rétablir les paramètres du téléviseur de Enr. démo à Util. domicile
(standard) : appuyez sur le bouton Volume du téléviseur. Lorsque
l’affichage à l’écran du volume apparaît, appuyez pendant 5 secondes sur
MENU.
Enr. démo est disponible uniquement pour être exposé en magasin.
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, plusieurs fonctions ne sont pas
disponibles. Sélectionnez Util. domicile lorsque vous regardez le
téléviseur à la maison.
3
Sélection d’un pays Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le
pays de votre choix. (en fonction du pays)
✎Après la sélection du pays dans le menu Pays, certains modèles peuvent demander,
en plus, le code PIN.
Lors de l’entrée du code PIN, “0-0-0-0” n’est pas disponible.
4
Réglage du Mode
Horloge
Réglez le Mode Horloge automatiquement ou manuellement.
Auto. : Sélectionnez votre fuseau horaire.
Manuel : vous permet de définir manuellement la date et l’heure actuelles.
5
Sélection d’une antenne Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionner les
antennes à mettre en mémoire.
6
Sélection d’une chaîne Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. permet de
sélectionner la source des chaînes à mémoriser. Lors du réglage de la source d’antenne
sur Câble, une fenêtre s’affiche pour vous permettre d’attribuer des valeurs numériques
(fréquences) aux chaînes. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à Canal → Recherche
automatique.
7
Profitez de votre
téléviseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction...
Vous devez à nouveau sélectionner Plug & Play (MENU → Système) chez vous, bien que vous l’ayez fait en magasin.
Sélectionnez Système - Plug & Play (Configuration initiale). Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut
est “0-0-0-0” (excepte France) Si vous souhaitez modifier le code PIN, utilisez la fonction Modifier PIN.
✎Si vous avez oublié le code PIN, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui remet le code
PIN à “0-0-0-0” (France: “1-1-1-1”): MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (marche)
P
POWER
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 8 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:41Français - 9
Connexion à un périphérique AV
¦
Périphériques disponibles : DVD, Lecteur Blu-ray, décodeur câble HD, récepteur satellite
HD (boîtier décodeur), Magnétoscope
Utilisation d’un câble HDMI ou HDMI vers DVI (jusqu’à 1080p)
✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
x Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 1(DVI) pour les
vidéos. Un lecteur DVD ou Blu-ray, un décodeur câble HD, un récepteur satellite HD, un décodeur câble ou un
récepteur satellite (décodeur) peuvent nécessiter un câble DVI-HDMI (DVI vers HDMI) ou un adaptateur DVI-HDMI
(DVI vers HDMI). La prise PC/DVI AUDIO IN est indispensable pour les signaux audio.
x Il se peut que l’affichage soit médiocre, voire inexistant, ou que le son soit de mauvaise qualité si un périphérique
externe connecté au téléviseur utilise un mode HDMI d’une ancienne version. Dans ce cas, demandez au
fabricant du périphérique externe de vous communiquer la version HDMI et, dans l’hypothèse où elle serait
obsolète, demandez-lui une mise à niveau.
x Veillez également à acheter un câble HDMI certifié. Dans le cas contraire, il se peut que l’écran n’affiche aucune
image ou qu’une erreur de connexion se produise.
USB HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
W R
Connexion HDMI
Connexion HDMI à DVI
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 9 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:41Français - 10
Utilisation d’un câble Composant (jusqu’à 1080p) ou Audio/Vidéo (480i uniquement) et d’un câble Scart
✎En mode Ext., la sortie DTV prend uniquement en charge les signaux vidéo et audio MPEG SD.
✎Lors de la connexion à AV IN, la couleur de la prise AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (verte) ne correspond pas à celle du câble
vidéo (jaune).
✎Pour obtenir une qualité d’image optimale, il est préférable d’opter pour la connexion Composante (plutôt que la
connexion A/V).
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
PR PB Y
COMPONENT OUT
EXT
Connexion à composantes
Connexion AV
Connexion SCART
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 10 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:42Français - 11
Connexion entre un PC et un périphérique audio
¦
Périphériques disponibles : système audio numérique, amplificateur, système home
cinéma DVD, PC
Utilisation d’une connexion Optique (Numérique) ou d’une sortie casque
✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
x Lorsqu’un système audio numérique est connecté à la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL), diminuez le volume
du téléviseur et du système.
x Le mode audio 5.1 CH est disponible uniquement si le téléviseur est relié à un périphérique externe prenant en
charge ce mode.
x Lorsque le récepteur (home cinéma) est activé, vous pouvez écouter le son sortant de la prise optique du
téléviseur. Lorsque le téléviseur reçoit un signal DTV, il envoie du son 5.1 canaux au récepteur du système home
cinéma. Si la source est un composant numérique (par exemple, un lecteur DVD, un lecteur Blu-ray, un décodeur
câble ou un récepteur satellite) connecté au téléviseur en HDMI, le récepteur home cinéma émet uniquement du
son sur 2 canaux. Pour obtenir un son en mode 5.1, reliez la prise de sortie audio numérique du lecteur DVD, du
lecteur Blu-ray, du décodeur câble ou du récepteur satellite (boîtier externe) directement à un amplificateur ou un
système home cinéma.
✎Ecouteurs H : vous pouvez brancher vos écouteurs sur la prise casque du téléviseur. Lorsque le casque est
branché, les enceintes intégrées n’émettent plus de son.
x La fonction Son peut être limitée lorsque des écouteurs sont connectés au téléviseur.
x Le volume des écouteurs et celui du téléviseur sont réglés séparément.
OPTICAL
Connexion Ensemble
DVD Home Theater
Connexion casque
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 11 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:42Français - 12
¦ Utilisation d’un câble HDMI, d’un câble HDMI vers DVI ou d’un câble D-sub
✎En fonction du PC, la connexion à l’aide du câble HDMI peut ne pas être prise en charge.
Modes d’affichage (Entrées D-Sub et HDMI vers DVI)
• PS43D490 : 1024 X 768 @ 60Hz
• PS51D490 : 1360 X 768 @ 60Hz
Mode Résolution
Fréquence
horizontale (kHz)
Fréquence
verticale (kHz)
Fréquence
d’horloge pixels
(MHz)
Polarité de
synchronisation
(H/V)
PS43D490 PS51D490
IBM
640 x 350
720 x 400
31,469
31,469
70,086
70,087
25,175
28,322
+/-
-/+
c
c
c
c
MAC
640 x 480
832 x 624
35,000
49,726
66,667
74,551
30,240
57,284
-/-
-/-
c
c
c
c
VESA DMT
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1360 x 768
31,469
37,861
37,500
37,879
48,077
46,875
48,363
56,476
60,023
47,712
59,940
72,809
75,000
60,317
72,188
75,000
60,004
70,069
75,029
60,015
25,175
31,500
31,500
40,000
50,000
49,500
65,000
75,000
78,750
85,500
-/-
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
✎REMARQUE
x Dans le cas d’une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI IN 1(DVI).
x Le mode entrelacé n’est pas pris en charge.
x Le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n’est pas standard.
x Les modes Separate et Composite sont pris en charge. Le mode SOG (Sync On Green) n’est pas pris en charge.
PC OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DVI OUT HDMI OUT
Connexion PC
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 12 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:43Français - 13
Connexion à un port INTERFACE COMMUNE
Utilisation de la “CARTE CI ou CI+”
Pour regarder les chaînes payantes, la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+)
CARD) doit être insérée.
• Si vous ne l’insérez pas, certaines chaînes afficheront le message
“Signal brouillé”.
• Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone,
l’ID de la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD), l’ID de l’hôte
et d’autres informations s’afficheront dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un
message d’erreur s’affiche, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès.
• Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les canaux est terminée,
le message “Mise à jour terminée” s’affiche, indiquant que la liste des
chaînes est mise à jour.
✎REMARQUE
x Vous devez vous procurer une carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) auprès d’un fournisseur local de diffusion
par câble.
x Lorsque vous sortez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD), tirez-la délicatement. Une chute pourrait en effet
l’endommager.
x Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci.
x L’emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du modèle.
x La carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n’est pas prise en charge dans certains pays et certaines régions ;
vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé.
x Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez le fournisseur d’accès.
x Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI ou CI+ CARD), qui prend en charge les paramètres actuels de l’antenne.
L’image sera déformée, voire invisible.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 13 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:44Français - 14
Consultation du manuel électronique (e-Manual)
Affi chage
Comment basculer entre le e-Manual et le(s) menu(s) correspondant(s)
✎Cette fonction n’est pas disponible dans certains menus.
Méthode 1 Méthode 2
1. Appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour sélectionner
Essayer, si vous souhaitez exécuter le(s) menu(s)
correspondant(s).
2. Pour revenir à l’écran du manuel électronique, appuyez
sur le bouton E-MANUAL.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE lors de la sélection
de la zone de contenu. Le message “Exécuter?”
s’affi che. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez ensuite sur le
bouton ENTERE. La fenêtre des menus à l’écran
s’affi che.
2. Pour revenir à l’écran du manuel électronique, appuyez
sur le bouton E-MANUAL.
Vous pouvez consulter la présentation et les instructions relatives aux fonctionnalités
TV stockées sur le téléviseur.
O MENUm→ Assistance → e-Manual → ENTERE
✎Pour revenir au manuel électronique, appuyez sur la touche E-MANUAL de la télécommande.
✎Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Essayer si le menu n’est pas activé.
Fonctions de base
Changement du Mode Image prédéfi ni
Réglages des paramètres de l’image
Changement de la taille de l’image
Modifi cation des options d’image
Confi guration du téléviseur avec le PC
} Index E Entrer e Quitter
Ecran de télévision : affi che l’écran de
la source d’entrée actuelle.
Changer de catégorie. Appuyez sur le
bouton l ou r pour sélectionner la
catégorie de votre choix.
Affi che la liste des sous-menus.
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE
pour sélectionner le sous-menu de
votre choix.
Boutons d’opération :
}Bleu (Index) : affi che l'écran d'index.
E Entrer : sélectionner une catégorie ou un sous-menu.
e Quitter : permet de quitter le e-Manual.
E-MANUAL
Essayer
E-MANUAL
Changing the Preset Picture Mode
■
Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez.
Mode Image t
• Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux.
• Standard : adapté à un environnement normal.
• Naturel pour les téléviseurs LED / Relax pour les téléviseurs plasma : permet de réduire
la fatigue oculaire.
• Cinéma : adapté au visionnage de fi lms dans une pièce sombre.
• Loisirs : adapté au visionnage de fi lms et de jeux vidéo.
N Disponible uniquement en mode PC.
Changement du Mode Image prédéfi ni
O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE
■ Mode Image
Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez.
N Lorsqu’une source d’entrée est défi nie sur PC, seules les options Standard et
Loisirs sont disponibles pour le Mode Image.
• Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux.
• Standard : adapté à un environnement normal.
• Cinéma : adapté au visionnage de fi lms dans une pièce sombre.
• Loisirs : adapté au visionnage de fi lms et de jeux vidéo.
Fonctions de base > Changement du Mode Image prédéfi ni (5/10)
a Essayer b Accueil { Zoom } Index L Page e Quitter
Image
Mode Image : Standard r
Lum. Cellules : 10
Contraste : 100
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V/R) : V50/R50
Réglage de l’écran
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 14 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:50Français - 15
Affichage du contenu
Utilisation du mode Zoom
Lors de la consultation des instructions du manuel
électronique, appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour agrandir
l’écran. Pour parcourir l’écran agrandi, utilisez le bouton u
ou d.
✎Pour revenir à l’écran précédent, appuyez sur le bouton
RETURN.
Recherche d’un mot-clé en utilisant la page d’index
✎Cette fonction n’est pas prise en charge dans toutes les langues.
1. Si vous souhaitez rechercher un mot-clé, appuyez sur le bouton bleu afin d’ouvrir l’écran Index.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton l ou r pour sélectionner l’ordre des caractères de votre choix et appuyez ensuite sur
ENTERE.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton uor d pour sélectionner le mot-clé à afficher et appuyez ensuite sur ENTERE.
4. Vous accédez à l’écran d’instructions correspondant du manuel électronique.
✎Pour fermer l’écran Index, appuyez sur le bouton RETURN.
a Essayer b Accueil { Zoom } Index L Page e Exit (Quitter)
Fonctions de base > Changement du Mode Image prédéfini (5/10)
Zone de contenu : si vous avez sélectionné un
sous-menu, vous pouvez afficher le contenu
correspondant. Pour accéder à la page précédente
ou suivante, appuyez sur le bouton l ou r.
Boutons d’opération :
a Rouge (Essayer) : affiche le(s) menu(s) correspondant(s).
b Vert (Accueil) : permet d'accéder à l'écran d'accueil du e-Manual.
{Jaune (Zoom) : agrandit l'écran.
}Bleu (Index) : affiche l'écran d'index.
L (Page): permet de passer à la page précédente ou suivante.
Changement du Mode Image prédéfini
O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE
■ Mode Image
Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez.
N When an input source is set to PC, the Picture Mode is only
available the Standard and Entertain.
• Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux.
• Standard : adapté à un environnement normal.
• Cinéma : adapté au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre.
• Loisirs : adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo.
R Retour
Changement du Mode Image prédéfini
O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE
■ Mode Image
Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez.
N Lorsqu’une source d’entrée est définie sur PC, seules les options Standard et
Loisirs sont disponibles pour le Mode Image.
• Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux.
• Standard : adapté à un environnement normal.
• Cinéma : adapté au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre.
• Loisirs : adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 15 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:51Français - 16
Installation du support mural
Installation du kit de montage mural
Le kit de montage mural (vendu séparément) permet de fixer le téléviseur au mur.
Pour plus d’informations sur l’installation du support mural, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le support mural.
Faites appel à un technicien pour installer la fixation murale.
Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable d’un endommagement du produit ou d’une blessure si vous
choisissez d’effectuer vous-même l’installation murale.
Caractéristiques du kit de fixation murale (VESA)
✎Le kit de montage mural n’est pas fourni ; il est vendu séparément.
Installez votre fixation murale sur un mur solide perpendiculaire au sol. Si vous souhaitez la fixer sur d’autres matériaux de
construction, veuillez prendre contact avec votre revendeur le plus proche. Si vous l’installez au plafond ou sur un mur non
droit, la fixation risque de tomber et de provoquer de graves blessures.
✎REMARQUE
x Les dimensions standard pour tous les kits de fixation murale sont indiquées dans le tableau ci-dessous.
x Un manuel d’installation détaillé et toutes les pièces nécessaires au montage sont fournis avec le kit de fixation mural.
x N’utilisez pas de vis non conformes aux spécifications des vis VESA standard.
x N’utilisez pas de vis plus longues que la dimension standard ou non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA
standard. Des vis trop longues pourraient endommager l’intérieur du téléviseur.
x Pour les fixations murales non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard, la longueur des vis peut varier,
selon les caractéristiques de la fixation murale.
x Ne serrez pas trop les vis : cela pourrait endommager le produit ou provoquer sa chute, entraînant des blessures
corporelles. Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de ce type d’accident.
x Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de tout dommage au produit ou toute blessure corporelle dans le cas de
l’utilisation d’une fixation murale non-VESA ou non spécifiée, ou si l’utilisateur ne suit pas les instructions d’installation
du produit.
x N’inclinez pas le téléviseur de plus de 15 degrés.
Famille de
produits
pouces
Spéc. VESA
(A * B)
Vis standard Quantité
TELEVISEUR
ECRAN A
PLASMA
43~51 400 X 400
M8 4
59~64 600 X 400
✎Desserrez les vis avant d’installer le dispositif de fixation murale.
N’installez pas votre kit de fixation murale lorsque le téléviseur est allumé. Vous risqueriez de vous
électrocuter.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 16 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:51Français - 17
Résolution des problèmes
Si vous avez des questions sur le téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces
solutions de dépannage ne s’applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site “www.samsung.com”, puis
cliquez sur Assistance ou contactez le centre d’appels dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page de ce
manuel.
Problèmes Solutions et explications
La télévision ne s’allume pas. • Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation secteur est branché correctement sur la prise murale et sur le
téléviseur.
• Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle.
• Essayez d’appuyer sur le bouton POWER du téléviseur pour vous assurer que le problème n’est pas dû
à la télécommande. Si le téléviseur s’allume, reportez-vous au problème “La télécommande ne fonctionne
pas” ci-après.
Aucune image/vidéo n’est affichée. • Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles connectés au téléviseur et aux appareils
externes, puis rebranchez-les).
• Réglez la sortie vidéo de votre périphérique externe (décodeur câble/satellite, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire
correspondre les connexions à l’entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple, si la sortie d’un périphérique externe est
HDMI, vous devez établir une connexion avec une entrée HDMI du téléviseur.
• Vérifiez que les appareils connectés sont sous tension.
• Veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur la touche SOURCE de la
télécommande.
La télécommande ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez que la polarité (+/–) des piles de la télécommande est respectée.
• Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande.
• Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur à une distance de 1,5 à 1,8 m.
La télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier
décodeur ne fonctionne pas.
• Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur de telle sorte qu’elle puisse
commander le téléviseur. Consultez le mode d’emploi du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour obtenir le
code du téléviseur SAMSUNG.
✎Certaines des images et des fonctions ci-dessus sont uniquement disponibles sur des modèles spécifiques.
✎Vous pouvez maintenir votre téléviseur dans des conditions optimales en le mettant à niveau avec le dernier
micrologiciel (samsung.com → Support → Downloads) par le biais d’un périphérique USB.
Licence
Liste des fonctions
Interface numérique et réseau excellents : Avec un syntoniseur numérique HD intégré, la vision des émissions HD sans
inscription ne nécessite pas de décodeur câble/récepteur satellite (boîtier décodeur).
3D
Cette incroyable nouvelle fonction vous permet de regarder du contenu 3D.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Vous permet de contrôler tous les appareils Samsung connectés compatibles Anynet+ à l’aide de votre télécommande
Samsung.
Mon contenu
Vous permet de lire les fichiers de musique, les images et les films enregistrés sur un périphérique USB.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 17 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:52Français - 18
Fixation du téléviseur au mur
Attention : si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez
notamment à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait
le faire basculer et occasionner des blessures graves, voire entraîner la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions
de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité et une sécurité accrues,
installez le dispositif antichute comme indiqué ci-après.
Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur :
1. Glissez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les solidement au mur. Assurez-vous
que les vis ont été fermement fixées au mur.
✎En fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel
supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles.
✎Les colliers, vis et chaînettes n’étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter
séparément.
2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, placez les vis dans
les bagues, puis fixez-les à nouveau sur le téléviseur.
✎Il se peut que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. Dans ce cas,
achetez des vis présentant les caractéristiques suivantes.
3. Reliez les colliers fixés au téléviseur et ceux fixés sur le mur à l’aide d’un câble
solide, puis attachez-les fermement.
✎REMARQUE
x Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu’il ne bascule pas vers
l’arrière.
x Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur soient placés à la même
hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur.
x Détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur.
4. Vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. Vérifiez régulièrement que les connexions ne présentent
aucun signe d’usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la sécurité des connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel.
Stockage et entretien
✎Si des autocollants sont appliqués sur l’écran du téléviseur, leur retrait peut laisser quelques traces. Nettoyez-les avant
d’utiliser le téléviseur.
Ne vaporisez pas d’eau ni d’agent nettoyant directement
sur le produit. Tout liquide qui entre dans le produit peut
engendrer une défaillance, un incendie ou une électrocution.
Nettoyez le produit à l’aide d’un chiffon doux imprégné d’une
petite quantité d’eau.
Mur
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 18 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:53Français - 19
Caractéristiques techniques
Considérations environnementales
Température de fonctionnement
Humidité en cours de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Humidité sur le lieu de stockage
De 10°C à 40°C (50°F à 104°F)
10% à 80%, sans condensation
De -20°C à 45°C (-4°F à 113°F)
5% à 95%, sans condensation
Système TV Analogique : B/G, D/K, L, I (en fonction de votre pays)
Numérique : DVB-T/DVB-C
Système de couleur/vidéo Analogique : PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60
Numérique : MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0
Système Sonore BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC.
HDMI IN Vidéo : 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i
Audio : 2Ch Linear PCM 32/44.1/48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits.
Socle orientable (gauche/droite) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Nom du modèle PS43D490 PS51D490
Taille de l’écran 43 pouces (109 cm) 51 pouces (128 cm)
Son
(Sortie) 10 W X 2
Dimensions (L x P x H)
Corps
Avec socle
1011,8 X 56,0 X 622,4 mm
1011,8 X 305,0 X 698,7 mm
1187,8 X 56,0 X 706,6 mm
1187,8 X 305,0 X 782,9 mm
Poids
Sans socle
Avec socle
16,0 kg
20,3 kg
22,5 kg
26,8 kg
Résolution de l’affichage 1024 X 768 1360 X 768
✎La conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
✎Pour plus d’informations sur les caractéristiques d’alimentation et de consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l’étiquette
fixée au produit.
✎Par la présente Samsung déclare que l’appareil PDP TV est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 19 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:53Déclaration de conformité
Produit : PDP TV
Modèles : PS43D490, PS51D490
Apposition du marquage CE : 2011
Ce produit a été fabriqué dans l’une des usines suivantes :
U1: Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd
416, Maetan 3-Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon-Si, Gyeonggi-Do, 443-742, Corée
U2: Samsung Electronics Slovaquie s.r.o
Hviezdoslavova 807 924 27 Galanta, République slovaque
U3: Samsung Electronics Co. hongrois
H-5126 Jaszfenyszaru
(Nom et adresse des usines)
Par la présente Samsung Electronics déclare que les PDP TV, PS43D490, PS51D490 sont conformes aux
exigences essentielles de la Directive 1999/5/CE du Parlement Européen et du Conseil du 9 mars 1999
concernant les équipements hertziens et les équipements terminaux de télécommunications et la
reconnaissance mutuelle de leur conformité, ainsi qu’à la Directive Basse Tension (2006/95/CE) et la
Directive Compatibilité Electromagnétique (2004/108/CE) par application des
EN 60065: 2002+A1:2006+A11:2008
EN55022:2006+A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 300 328-1 v1.7.1
EN 301 489-17 v1.3.2 :2008
EN61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001+A2:2005
EN55024:1998+A1:2001+A2:2003
EN55013:2001+A1:2003+A2 :2006
EN55020:2007
EN 301 489-1 v1.8.1 :2008
et la Directive Eco-conception (2009/125/CE) mise en œuvre par le Règlement (CE) n° 642/2009 pour les
téléviseurs.
La documentation technique est conservée à l’adresse du fabricant figurant ci-dessous.
Fabricant:
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
416 Maetan-dong, Young-Tong gu,
Suwon, Korea 442-742
26 Janv 2011
(Lieu et date de signature)
Chang Seub Eum / Manager
(Nom et signature de la personne autorisée)
Représentant en UE :
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park
Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire
GU46 6GG, UK
28 Janv 2011
(Lieu et date de signature)
Joong Hoon Choi / Responsable du Laboratoire
(Nom et signature de la personne autorisée)
Note : L’adresse ci-dessus ne correspond pas à l’adresse du Centre de Service Samsung. Pour obtenir l’adresse
ou le numéro de téléphone du Centre de Service Samsung dont vous dépendez, veuillez vous reporter à la carte de
garantie du produit ou contacter votre revendeur.
Cet équipement peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’Union Européenne.
Restriction : En France, cet équipement ne doit être utilisé qu’à l’intérieur des bâtiments.
ELECTRONICS
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 20 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:53This page is intentionally
left blank.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 21 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:53Deutsch - 2
Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung des e-Manuals (Seite 14)
Die Abbildungen und Illustrationen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Information und können vom tatsächlichen
Aussehen des Geräts abweichen. Änderungen an Ausführung und technischen Daten vorbehalten.
Hinweis zu Digitalfernsehen
1. Die Funktionalitäten für Digital TV (DVB) stehen nur in Ländern/Regionen zur Verfügung, in denen digitale terrestrische DVB-T-Signale (MPEG2 und MPEG4
AVC) gesendet werden oder in denen Sie Zugang zu einem kompatiblen Kabelfernsehdienst mit DVB-C (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AAC) haben. Fragen Sie Ihren
örtlichen Händler, wenn Sie Informationen über die Verfügbarkeit von DVB-T oder DVB-C in Ihrer Gegend benötigen.
2. DVB-T ist der Standard des europäischen DVB-Konsortiums für die terrestrische Versorgung mit digitalem Fernsehen, und DVB-C ist der Standard
des Konsortiums für die Versorgung mit digitalem Kabelfernsehen. Allerdings werden manche Unterscheidungsmerkmale wie EPG (elektrische
Programmzeitschrift), VOD (Video on Demand) usw. in dieser Spezifikation nicht berücksichtigt. Deshalb können sie zum jetzigen Zeitpunkt noch nicht
eingesetzt werden.
3. Zwar hält dieses Fernsehgerät die aktuellen Standards der DVB-T- und DVB-C-Spezifikationen [Version August 2008] ein, aber es kann nicht garantiert
werden, dass die Kompatibilität mit zukünftigen digitalen terrestrischen DVB-T und DBV-C-Signalen gewahrt bleibt.
4. In Abhängigkeit von den Ländern/Regionen, in denen dieses Fernsehgerät eingesetzt wird, verlangen manche Kabelfernsehanbieter zusätzliche Gebühren für
solch einen Dienst, und möglicherweise wird verlangt, dass Sie den Vertragsbedingungen des Unternehmens zustimmen.
5. Manche Digitalfernsehfunktionen sind in einigen Ländern oder Regionen möglicherweise nicht verfügbar, und DVB-C-Signale kann das Gerät bei manchen
Kabelfernsehanbietern möglicherweise nicht fehlerfrei verarbeiten.
6. Für weitere Informationen setzen Sie sich bitte mit dem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung.
✎ Die Empfangsqualität des Fernsehgeräts kann durch Unterschiede bei den Sendeverfahren in verschiedenen Ländern beeinträchtigt werden.
Kontrollieren Sie die Leistung des Fernsehgeräts bei Ihrem örtlichen SAMSUNG-Händler oder wenden Sie sich an das Samsung-Callcenter um
festzustellen, ob sich die Empfangsqualität durch Ändern der Fernseheinstellungen verbessern lässt.
Benutzerhinweise
• Einbrennen von Standbildern
Lassen Sie Standbilder (z. B. von einem Videospiel) auf dem Plasmamonitor höchstens einige Minuten lang anzeigen, da das Bild anderenfalls einbrennen
kann. Das Einbrennen von Standbildern wird auch als „Bildkonservierung“ bezeichnet. Sie können das Einbrennen vermeiden, indem Sie die Helligkeit und den
Kontrast des Bildschirms beim Anzeigen von Standbildern verringern.
• Wärmeentwicklung auf der Oberseite des Plasmabildschirms
Die Oberseite des Produkts kann nach längerem Betrieb warm werden, da die Wärme aus dem Monitor über die Entlüftungsöffnung im oberen Teil des Geräts
abgeführt wird.
Dies ist normal und weist nicht auf einen Defekt oder eine Fehlfunktion des Geräts hin.
Allerdings sollten Kinder von dem oberen Teil des Geräts ferngehalten werden.
• Das Gerät verursacht ein „knackendes“ Geräusch.
Ein „knackendes“ Geräusch entsteht, wenn das Gerätematerial sich aufgrund einer Änderung der Umgebung, wie z. B. Temperaturschwankungen oder
Änderung der Luftfeuchtigkeit, zusammenzieht oder ausdehnt. Das ist normal und stellt keinen Defekt des Geräts dar.
• Pixelfehler
Der Plasmabildschirm, für dessen Herstellung hoch entwickelte Technologie eingesetzt wird, besitzt eine Bildfläche mit 2.360.000 (bei HD-Auflösung) bis
6.221.000 (bei Full-HD-Auflösung) Pixeln. Allerdings können ein paar zu helle oder zu dunkle Pixel auf der Bildfläche zu sehen sein. Diese Pixelfehler haben
keinen Einfluss auf die Geräteleistung.
• Vermeiden Sie den Betrieb des Plasmabildschirms bei Temperaturen unter 5°C.
• Ein Standbild, dass zu lange angezeigt wird, kann zu einer bleibenden Beschädigung des Plasmabildschirms führen.
Der Betrieb des Plasmafernsehers im Format 4:3 für einen längeren Zeitraum kann links, rechts und in der Mitte des Monitors Spuren der
Bildränder hinterlassen, die durch die unterschiedliche Lichtemission auf dem Monitor verursacht werden. Durch die Wiedergabe einer DVD
oder den Betrieb einer Spielkonsole kann es auf dem Bildschirm zu ähnlichen Effekten kommen.
Schäden, die durch die o. g. Effekte verursacht wurden, fallen nicht unter die Garantie.
• Nachbilder auf dem Bildschirm.
Durch das Anzeigen der Standbilder von Videospielen oder vom PC über einen gewissen Zeitraum hinaus können partielle Nachbilder entstehen.
Um diesen Effekt zu verhindern, verringern Sie Helligkeit und Kontrast, wenn Sie Standbilder für einen längeren Zeitraum anzeigen möchten.
• Garantie
Durch diese Garantie nicht abgedeckt sind Schäden, die durch das Einbrennen von Bildern entstehen.
Das Einbrennen von Bildern wird von der Garantie nicht abgedeckt.
Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgeräten (Elektroschrott)
(In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten Sammelsystem)
Die Kennzeichnung auf dem Produkt, Zubehörteilen bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation gibt an, dass das Produkt und Zubehörteile
(z. B. Ladegerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden dürfen.
Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit nicht
durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu schaden. Helfen Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile fachgerecht zu entsorgen, um die nachhaltige
Wiederverwertung von stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern. Private Nutzer wenden sich an den Händler, bei dem das Produkt gekauft wurde, oder
kontaktieren die zuständigen Behörden, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wo Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine umweltfreundliche Entsorgung
abgeben können. Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren Lieferanten und gehen nach den Bedingungen des Verkaufsvertrags vor. Dieses
Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt werden.
Korrekte Entsorgung der Batterien dieses Produkts
(In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten Altbatterie-Rücknahmesystem)
Die Kennzeichnung auf der Batterie bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation oder Verpackung gibt an, dass die Batterie zu diesem Produkt
nach seiner Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden darf. Wenn die Batterie mit den chemischen
Symbolen Hg, Cd oder Pb gekennzeichnet ist, liegt der Quecksilber-, Cadmium- oder Blei-Gehalt der Batterie über den in der EG-Richtlinie
2006/66 festgelegten Referenzwerten. Wenn Batterien nicht ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können sie der menschlichen Gesundheit bzw. der
Umwelt schaden. Bitte helfen Sie, die natürlichen Ressourcen zu schützen und die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen Ressourcen zu
fördern, indem Sie die Batterien von anderen Abfällen getrennt über Ihr örtliches kostenloses Altbatterie- Rücknahmesystem entsorgen.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 2 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:54Deutsch - 3
Zubehör
✎Vergewissern Sie sich, dass im Lieferumfang des Fernsehgeräts folgende Komponenten enthalten sind. Falls
irgendwelche Teile fehlen sollten, setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrem Händler in Verbindung.
✎Farbe und Form der Teile können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
✎Kabel, die nicht zum Paketinhalt gehören, können gesondert erworben werden.
✎Achten Sie darauf, dass Sie beim Auspacken keine Zubehörteile übersehen, die durch Verpackungsmaterialien verdeckt
werden.
[VORSICHT: STELLEN SIE DIE VERBINDUNG DAUERHAFT HER, DAMIT DAS NETZTEIL NICHT VOM GERÄT
GETRENNT WERDEN KANN
• Fernbedienung und 2 Batterien (Typ AAA) • Netzkabel
• Bedienungsanleitung • Reinigungstuch
• Garantiekarte (nicht überall verfügbar) / Sicherheitshinweise
Nur 43-Zoll-Modell
Ferritkern (2 Stk.)
✎Ferritkern für Netzkabel: Mit dem Ferritkern werden die Kabel vor Störungen geschützt.
Wenn Sie ein Kabel anschließen, öffnen Sie den Ferritkern und legen Sie ihn in der Nähe des
Steckers mit einem deutlich hörbaren Klicken um das Kabel (siehe Abbildung).
x A Mindestabstand zwischen dem Ferritkern und dem anderen Ende des Kabels, das in das
Fernsehgerät eingesteckt wird: 6~8 Zoll (15~20 cm)
x B Maximaler Abstand zwischen dem Ferritkern und dem anderen Ende des Kabels, das in
die Steckdose eingesteckt wird: 3/4 Zoll (2 cm)
Netzkabel
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 3 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:54Deutsch - 4
Nur 51-Zoll-Modell
Ferritkern (2 Stk.) Ferritkern (1 Stk.)
✎Ferritkern für Netzkabel: Mit dem Ferritkern werden die Kabel vor Störungen geschützt.
Wenn Sie ein Kabel anschließen, öffnen Sie den Ferritkern und legen Sie ihn in der Nähe des
Steckers mit einem deutlich hörbaren Klicken um das Kabel (siehe Abbildung).
x A Mindestabstand zwischen dem Ferritkern und dem anderen Ende des Kabels, das in
das Fernsehgerät eingesteckt wird: 6~8 Zoll
x B Maximaler Abstand zwischen dem Ferritkern und dem anderen Ende des Kabels, das
in die Steckdose eingesteckt wird: 3/4 Zoll
Netzkabel
✎Ferritkern: Mit dem Ferritkern werden die Kabel vor Störungen geschützt. Wenn Sie ein
Kabel anschließen, öffnen Sie den Ferritkern und legen Sie ihn in der Nähe des Steckers mit
einem deutlich hörbaren Klicken um das Kabel (siehe Abbildung).
Antennenkabel /
Komponentenkabel
(gesondert lieferbar)
• Verwaltungskosten werden abgerechnet, wenn:
– (a) auf Ihren Wunsch ein Ingenieur zu Ihnen geschickt wird, und es liegt kein Defekt des Geräts vor
(d.h. wenn Sie dieses Benutzerhandbuch nicht gelesen haben)
– (b) Sie das Gerät in eine Reparaturwerkstatt bringen, und es liegt kein Defekt des Geräts vor
(d.h. wenn Sie dieses Benutzerhandbuch nicht gelesen haben)
• Der abgerechnete Betrag wird Ihnen mitgeteilt, ehe irgendwelche Arbeiten oder Kundenbesuche ausgeführt werden.
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 4 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:55Deutsch - 5
Bedienfeld
✎Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
Fernbedienungssensor Richten Sie die Fernbedienung auf diesen Sensor am Fernsehgerät.
Netzanzeige Beim Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts blinkt die Netzleuchte kurz und erlischt
anschließend. Im Standby-Modus leuchtet die Anzeige permanent.
SOURCEE Umschalten zwischen allen verfügbaren Signalquellen. Im Bildschirmmenü können
Sie diese Taste wie die Eingabetaste ENTERE auf der Fernbedienung verwenden.
MENU y Hiermit zeigen Sie die Funktionen des Fernsehgeräts in einem Bildschirmmenü an.
yEinstellen der Lautstärke. Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie die
z -Schaltflächen wie die Tasten ◄ und ► auf der Fernbedienung verwenden.
zWechseln des Senders. Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie die
-Schaltflächen wie die Tasten ▼ und ▲ auf der Fernbedienung
verwenden.
P (Netz) Ein- oder Ausschalten des Fernsehgeräts.
Standby-Modus
Der Standby-Modus ist nicht für längere Phasen der Abwesenheit gedacht (z. B. wenn Sie verreist sind). Eine kleine Menge
Strom wird auch dann noch verbraucht, wenn das Gerät mit dem Netzschalter ausgeschaltet wurde. Es ist am besten, das
Netzkabel aus der Steckdose zu ziehen.
Absichern des Aufstellbereichs
Halten Sie die erforderlichen Abstände zwischen dem Gerät und anderen Objekten (z.B. Wänden) ein, um ausreichende
Lüftung sicherzustellen.
Wenn Sie dies nicht tun, besteht die Gefahr, dass aufgrund eines Anstiegs der Temperatur im Innern des Geräts ein Brand
ausbricht oder andere Probleme mit dem Gerät auftreten.
✎Wenn Sie einen Standfuß oder eine Wandhalterung einsetzen, verwenden Sie ausschließlich Teile von Samsung
Electronics.
x Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu Verletzungen
kommen, weil das Gerät herunterfällt.
✎Das Aussehen kann sich je nach Gerät unterscheiden.
✎Gehen Sie beim Anschließen des Fernsehgeräts vorsichtig vor, da einige Teile warm werden können.
Aufstellen des Geräts mit dem Standfuß Installation des Geräts mit der Wandhalterung
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Systemsteuerung
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 5 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:55Deutsch - 6
Fernbedienung
✎Dies ist eine spezielle Fernbedienung für Personen mit beeinträchtigtem Sehvermögen. Die Tasten zum Einstellen des
Senders und die Zifferntasten sind in Braille beschriftet.
Einlegen von Batterien (Batteriegröße: AAA)
Ein- und Ausschalten des Fernsehgeräts.
Anzeigen und Auswählen der verfügbaren
Videosignalquellen.
Zurück zum vorherigen Kanal.
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den Ton
vorübergehend auszuschalten.
Wechseln des Kanals.
Anzeigen der Senderlisten auf dem Bildschirm.
Anzeigen des elektronischen
Programmführers.
Anzeigen von Informationen auf dem
Bildschirm
u/d/l/r : Bewegen Sie den Cursor über
ein Element des Bildschirmmenüs.
ENTERE: Auswählen des Menüs und
Ändern der entsprechenden Elementwerte.
Schließen des Menüs.
Direkter Zugriff auf die Kanäle.
Einstellen der Lautstärke.
Alternativ wählen Sie “Videotext ein”,
“Doppel”, “Mix” oder “Aus”
Das Bildschirmmenü wird geöffnet.
Hiermit können Sie häufig verwendete
Funktionen schnell auswählen.
Anzeigen der Startseite mit dem Inhalt,
auf der die Optionen Fernsehen, Eigene
Inhalte und Quelle angeboten werden.
Zurück zum vorherigen Menü.
Verwenden Sie diese Tasten bei der Arbeit
im Menü Kanal-Manager, Eigene Inhalte
usw.
Verwenden Sie diese Tasten im Modus
Eigene Inhalte und Anynet+.
P.MODE: Drücken Sie diese Taste zum
Auswählen des Bildmodus.
W: Einstellen des Videos, das mit dem
3D-Signal zur Verfügung gestellt wird.
DUAL f-g: Auswahl von Toneffekten
E-MANUAL: Anzeigen des e-Manuals.
P.SIZE: Auwählen des Bildformats.
AD/SUBT.: Aktivieren/Deaktivieren des
Audiokommentars für Sehgeschädigte (in
manchen Gegenden nicht verfügbar). /
Anzeigen digitaler Untertitel.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 6 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:56Deutsch - 7
Ändern der Signalquelle
Quelle
Hiermit wählen Sie, ob das Fernsehgerät mit
einem Fernsehsignal versorgt wird oder an
externe Signaleingänge wie z. B. DVD- / BluRay-Player / Kabelreceiver / Satellitenreceiver
(Set-Top Box) angeschlossen ist.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE auf Ihrer
Fernbedienung.
2. Wählen Sie die gewünschte externe Eingangsquelle.
✎Sie können durch Drücken der Taste l oder r für
den Anzeigemodus zwischen Alle und Verbunden
wählen.
■ TV / Ext. / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / AV /
Component / USB
✎Im Fenster Quelle werden die angeschlossenen
Signalquellen hervorgehoben.
✎Ext. und PC bleiben immer aktiviert.
✎Wenn die angeschlossenen externen Geräte nicht
hervorgehoben werden, drücken Sie den roten Knopf.
Das Fernsehgerät sucht nach angeschlossenen
Geräten.
Name bearb.
Drücken Sie im Fenster Quelle die Taste TOOLS, um die
gewünschten externen Eingangsquellen einzustellen.
■ VCR / DVD / Kabel-STB / Sat-STB / PVR-STB /
AV-Receiver / Spiel / Camcorder / PC / DVI PC /
DVI-Geräte / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA:
Vergeben Sie Namen für die an die Eingangsbuchsen
angeschlossenen Geräte, um die Auswahl der
Signalquelle zu vereinfachen.
✎Wenn Sie einen PC über ein HDMI-Kabel mit dem
HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Anschluss verbinden, müssen Sie
unter Name bearb. den PC-Modus des Fernsehgeräts
aktivieren. (PS51D490)
✎Wenn Sie einen PC über ein HDMI/DVI-Kabel mit dem
HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Anschluss verbinden, müssen Sie
unter Name bearb. den PC-Modus des Fernsehgeräts
aktivieren. (PS51D490)
✎Wenn Sie einen PC über ein HDMI/DVI-Kabel mit
dem HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Anschluss verbinden, müssen
Sie unter Name bearb. den DVI-Geräte-Modus des
Fernsehgeräts aktivieren. (PS43D490, PS51D490)
Information
Sie können Detailinformationen zum ausgewählten externen
Gerät anzeigen.
Anschließen an eine Antenne
Wenn das Fernsehgerät zum ersten Mal eingeschaltet wird, werden automatisch die Grundeinstellungen vorgenommen.
✎Voreinstellung: Anschließen ans Stromnetz und an die Fernsehantenne.
✎Das Plasmagerät kann Störungen im Amateurfunk- oder Mittelwellenband verursachen.
✎Wenn Sie ein Mobiltelefon mit Zweiwegradio oder Mobilgeräte, die das Amateurfunk- und Mittelwellenband nutzen, in der
Nähe des Fernsehgeräts verwenden, kann dies zu Störungen am Fernseher führen.
Kabel VHF/UHF-Antenne
oder
Netzanschluss
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 7 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:57Deutsch - 8
Plug & Play (Anfangseinstellung)
Wenn das Fernsehgerät erstmals eingeschaltet wird, helfen eine Reihe aufeinanderfolgender Abfragen beim Durchführen der
Grundeinstellungen. Drücken Sie die Taste POWERP. Plug & Play ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Quelle auf TV eingestellt ist.
✎Stellen Sie vor dem Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts sicher, dass das Antennenkabel angeschlossen ist (S. 6).
✎Um zum vorherigen Schritt zurückzukehren, drücken Sie die rote Taste.
1
Auswählen der Sprache Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, und drücken Sie dann die Eingabetaste
ENTERE.
Wählen Sie die gewünschte Sprache des Bildschirmmenüs (OSD) aus.
2
Auswählen von
Shop-Demo oder
Privatgebrauch
Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ►, und drücken Sie dann die Eingabetaste
ENTERE.
Wählen Sie den Modus Privatgebrauch aus. Der Modus Shop-Demo ist
für den Betrieb in Einzelhandelsgeschäften bestimmt.
Zurücksetzen der Geräteeinstellungen von Shop-Demo auf
Privatgebrauch (Standard): Drücken Sie die Lautstärketaste am
Fernsehgerät. Wenn das Menü „Lautstärke“ angezeigt wird, halten Sie die
Taste MENU 5 Sekunden lang gedrückt.
Shop-Demo ist ausschließlich für den Betrieb in Geschäften bestimmt.
Wenn Sie diese Option dennoch auswählen, stehen einige Funktionen
nicht zur Verfügung. Wählen Sie Privatgebrauch, wenn Sie zuhause
fernsehen möchten.
3
Auswählen eines
Landes
Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, und drücken Sie dann die Eingabetaste ENTERE.
Wählen Sie das gewünschte Land aus. (je nach Land)
✎Nachdem Sie das Land im Menü Land eingestellt haben, werden Sie bei manchen
Modellen aufgefordert, die PIN-Nummer einzurichten.
✎Die Ziffernkombination „0-0-0-0“ dürfen Sie als PIN-Nummer nicht eingeben.
4
Einstellen des
Uhrmodus
Stellen Sie den Uhrmodus automatisch oder manuell ein.
Auto: Wählen Sie Ihre Zeitzone.
Manuell: Hiermit können Sie das Datum und die Uhrzeit manuell einstellen.
5
Auswählen einer
Antenne
Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, und drücken Sie dann die Eingabetaste ENTERE.
Sendertyp zum Speichern auswählen.
6
Auswählen eines
Senders.
Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, und drücken Sie dann die Eingabetaste ENTERE.
Wählen Sie den Sendertyp für den Suchlauf aus. Wenn Sie den Antennentyp auf
Kabel einstellen, können Sie den Sendern im nächsten Schritt einen Zahlenwert
(Senderfrequenzen) zuweisen. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie unter Sender →
Autom. Sendersuchlauf.
7
Gute
Fernsehunterhaltung!
Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE.
So setzen Sie diese Funktion zurück:
Sie sollten das Plug & Play-Verfahren (MENU → System) zuhause erneut durchführen, selbst wenn Sie es bereits im
Geschäft durchgeführt haben. Wählen Sie System - Plug & Play (Anfangseinstellung). Geben Sie Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
Die Standard-PIN lautet „0-0-0-0“ (außer Frankreich). Wenn Sie die PIN ändern möchten, verwenden Sie die Funktion PIN
ändern.
✎Wenn Sie den PIN-Code vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Tasten auf der Fernbedienung im Standby-Modus in der
angegebenen Reihenfolge, um die PIN auf „0-0-0-0“ zurückzusetzen: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (ein).
P
POWER
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 8 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:57Deutsch - 9
Anschließen an ein AV-Gerät
¦
Verfügbare Geräte: DVD, Blu-ray-Player, HD-Kabelreceiver, HD-Satellitenreceiver,
Videorekorder
Mit Hilfe eines HDMI- oder HDMI/DVI-Kabels (bis zu 1080p)
✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
x Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über den Videoanschluss HDMI IN 1(DVI) erfolgen. DVDPlayer, Blu-ray-Player, HD-Kabelreceiver, HD-Satellitenreceiver, Kabelreceiver oder Satellitenreceiver erfordern
möglicherweise ein DVI/HDMI-Kabel (DVI-zu-HDMI) oder einen DVI/HDMI-Adapter (DVI-zu-HDMI). Die PC/DVI
AUDIO IN-Buchse wird für den Audioanschluss benötigt.
x Das Bild wird möglicherweise nicht normal (wenn überhaupt) angezeigt oder es erfolgt keine Tonausgabe, wenn
ein externes Gerät an den Fernseher angeschlossen wird, das eine ältere HDMI-Version verwendet. Wenn solch
ein Problem auftritt, erfragen Sie die HDMI-Version beim Hersteller des externen Geräts und bitten Sie, wenn
veraltet, um ein Upgrade.
x Achten Sie darauf, nur ein zertifiziertes HDMI-Kabel zu kaufen. Andernfalls kann es passieren, dass kein Bild
angezeigt wird oder ein Verbindungsfehler auftritt.
USB HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
W R
HDMI-Anschluss
HDMI/DVI-Anschluss
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 9 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:58Deutsch - 10
Mit Hilfe eines Komponentenkabels (bis 1080p) oder eines Audio/Video-Kabels (nur 480i) und eines Scartkabels
✎Im Modus Ext. unterstützt DTV Out nur MPEG SD-Video und -Audio.
✎Bei Anschluss an AV IN stimmt die Farbe des Anschlusses AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (grün) nicht mit der des Videokabels
(gelb) überein.
✎Um die beste Bildqualität zu erhalten, wird eine Komponentenverbindung über den A/V-Anschluss empfohlen.
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
PR PB Y
COMPONENT OUT
EXT
Komponentenanschluss
AV-Anschluss
SCART-Anschluss
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 10 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:58Deutsch - 11
Anschließen an einen PC und ein Audiogerät
¦ Verfügbare Geräte: Digital-Audiosystem, Verstärker, DVD-Heimkino, PC
Mit Hilfe des optischen Anschlusses (digital) oder des Anschlusses für die Kopfhörer
✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
x Wenn ein Digital-Audiosystem mit dem DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)-Anschluss verbunden ist, reduzieren Sie
die Lautstärke von Fernsehgerät und System.
x 5.1-Kanalton ist möglich, wenn das Fernsehgerät an ein externes Gerät angeschlossen ist, das 5.1-Kanalton
unterstützt.
x Wenn der Receiver (Heimkinosystem) angeschaltet ist, können Sie den Ton hören, der vom optischen Ausgang
des Fernsehgeräts zur Verfügung gestellt wird. Wenn das Fernsehgerät ein (terrestrisches) DTV-Signal empfängt,
überträgt das Fernsehgerät 5.1-Kanalton an den Receiver des Heimkinosystems. Wenn es sich bei der Signalquelle
um eine digitale Komponente wie beispielsweise einen DVD-Player/Blu-Ray-Player/Kabel- /Satellitenreceiver (SetTop-Box) handelt, der über HDMI an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist, kann der Receiver des Heimkinosystems
nur Zweikanalton wiedergeben. Wenn Sie 5.1-Kanalton wünschen, müssen Sie den digitalen Ausdioausgang am
DVD-/Blu-Ray-Player / Kabel- / Satellitenreceiver (Set-Top-Box) direkt an einen Verstärker oder ein Heimkinosystem
anschließen.
✎Kopfhörer H: Sie können Ihre Kopfhörer an den Kopfhörer-Ausgang Ihres Fernsehgeräts anschließen. Wenn
Kopfhörer angeschlossen sind, ist die Tonwiedergabe über die eingebauten Lautsprecher ausgeschaltet.
x Wenn Sie Kopfhörer an das Fernsehgerät anschließen, ist die Tonfunktion eingeschränkt.
x Die Lautstärke der Kopfhörer und des Fernsehgeräts werden getrennt geregelt.
OPTICAL
Anschluss für DVD-Heimkinosystem
Kopfhöreranschluss
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 11 2011-03-07 오후 5:24:59Deutsch - 12
¦ Mit Hilfe eines HDMI-, HDMI/DVI- oder D-Sub-Kabels
✎Der Anschluss über ein HDMI-Kabel wird je nach PC möglicherweise nicht unterstützt.
Anzeigemodi (D-Sub- und HDMI/DVI-Eingang)
• PS43D490: 1024 x 768 bei 60Hz
• PS51D490: 1360 x 768 bei 60Hz
Modus Auflösung
Horizontalfrequenz
(kHz)
Vertikalfrequenz
(Hz)
Pixeltakt (MHz)
Synchronisationspolarität
(H/V)
PS43D490 PS51D490
IBM
640 x 350
720 x 400
31,469
31,469
70,086
70,087
25,175
28,322
+/-
-/+
c
c
c
c
MAC
640 x 480
832 x 624
35,000
49,726
66,667
74,551
30,240
57,284
-/-
-/-
c
c
c
c
VESA DMT
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1360 x 768
31,469
37,861
37,500
37,879
48,077
46,875
48,363
56,476
60,023
47,712
59,940
72,809
75,000
60,317
72,188
75,000
60,004
70,069
75,029
60,015
25,175
31,500
31,500
40,000
50,000
49,500
65,000
75,000
78,750
85,500
-/-
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
✎HINWEIS
x Bei Anschluss über ein HDMI/DVI-Kabel müssen Sie den HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Anschluss verwenden.
x Das Zeilensprungverfahren wird nicht unterstützt.
x Das Fernsehgerät funktioniert möglicherweise nicht ordnungsgemäß, wenn kein Standardmodus ausgewählt
wird.
x Separate- und Composite-Modus werden unterstützt. SOG (Sync On Green) wird nicht unterstützt.
PC OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DVI OUT HDMI OUT
PC-Anschluss
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 12 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:00Deutsch - 13
Anschließen an den COMMON INTERFACE-Steckplatz
Verwenden der „CI“- oder „CI+“-Karte
Um Bezahlsender zu sehen, müssen Sie eine „CI“ oder „CI+“-Karte
einsetzen.
• Wenn Sie keine „CI“ oder „CI+“-Karte einsetzen, wird bei einigen
Kanälen die Meldung „Gestörtes Signal“ angezeigt.
• Die Verbindungsinformationen mit Telefonnummer, Kennung der
„CI“ oder „CI+“-Karte, Hostkennung und anderen Angaben wird
nach ungefähr 2 bis 3 Minuten angezeigt. Wenn eine Fehlermeldung
angezeigt wird, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Dienstanbieter.
• Wenn die Kanalinformationskonfiguration abgeschlossen ist, wird
die Meldung „Udating Completed“ Aktualisierung abgeschlossen)
angezeigt. Dies bedeutet, dass die Kanalliste aktualisiert ist.
✎HINWEIS
x Sie können die „CI“ oder „CI+“-Karte bei einem der örtlichen Kabelnetzbetreiber erwerben.
x Ziehen Sie die „CI“- oder „CI+“-Karte vorsichtig mit den Händen heraus. Sie könnte beim Herunterfallen ansonsten
beschädigt werden.
x Die Richtung, in der Sie die „CI“ oder „CI+“-Karte einsetzen müssen, ist auf der Karte markiert.
x Die Position des COMMON INTERFACE-Steckplatzes ist modellabhängig.
x „CI“ oder „CI+“-Karten werden in einigen Ländern und Regionen nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie diesbezüglich Ihren
offiziellen Händler.
x Wenden Sie sich bei Problemen an den Dienstanbieter.
x Setzen Sie eine „CI“ oder „CI+“-Karte ein, die für die aktuellen Antenneneinstellungen geeignet ist. Andernfalls ist das
Bild gestört oder es fällt aus.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 13 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:00Deutsch - 14
So zeigen Sie das e-Manual an
Bildschirmanzeige
So wechseln Sie zwischen dem e-Manual und den entsprechenden Menüs.
✎Diese Funktion steht in einigen Menüs nicht zur Verfügung.
Methode 1 Methode 2
1. Wählen Sie mit der roten Taste Jetzt test., wenn Sie die
entsprechenden Menüs ausführen möchten.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste E-MANUAL, um zum Fenster des
e-Manuals zurückzukehren.
1. Wählen Sie mit der Taste ENTERE das Inhaltsfenster
aus. Die Meldung „Möchten Sie dies ausführen?“ wird
angezeigt. Wählen Sie Ja aus, und drücken Sie die Taste
ENTERE. Das Bildschirmmenü wird angezeigt.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste E-MANUAL, um zum Fenster des
e-Manuals zurückzukehren.
Sie können die Einleitung und die Anweisungen zu den TV-Funktionen auch in
elektronischer Form auf Ihrem Fernsehgerät lesen.
O MENUm→ Unterstützung → e-Manual → ENTERE
✎Drücken Sie die Taste E-MANUAL auf der Fernbedienung, um zum e-Manual zurückzukehren.
✎Wenn das Menü deaktiviert ist, können Sie die Funktion Jetzt test. nicht verwenden.
Grundfunktionen
Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus
Anpassen der Bildeinstellungen
Ändern des Bildformats
Ändern der Bildoptionen
Einstellen des Fernsehgeräts mithilfe Ihres PCs
} Index E Eingabe e Beenden
Fernsehbildschirm: Anzeigen des
Bilds der aktuellen Eingangsquelle.
Ändern Sie die Kategorie. Drücken
Sie die Taste l oder r, um die
gewünschte Kategorie auszuwählen.
Anzeigen der Untermenüliste Drücken
Sie die Taste ENTERE, um das
gewünschte Untermenü auszuwählen.
Bedientasten:
}Blau (Index): Anzeigen des Index-Fensters.
E Eingabe: Wählen Sie eine Kategorie oder ein
Untermenü.
eExit: Schließen des e-Manuals.
E-MANUAL
Jetzt test.
E-MANUAL
Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus
■
Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Bildtyp aus.
Bildmodus t
• Dynamisch: Für helle Zimmer geeignet.
• Standard: Für normale Umgebungen geeignet.
• Natürlich für LED-Fernsehgeräte / Entspannen für Plasmafernsehgeräte : Für geringe
Augenbelastung geeignet.
• Film: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen in einem abgedunkelten Zimmer geeignet.
• Unterhalt.: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen und Spielen geeignet.
N Diese Funktion ist nur im PC-Modus verfügbar.
Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus
O MENUm → Bild → Bildmodus → ENTERE
■ Bildmodus
Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Bildtyp aus.
N Wenn als Signalquelle PC eingestellt ist, können Sie im Bildmodus nur
zwischen Standard und Unterhalt. wählen.
• Dynamisch: Für helle Zimmer geeignet.
• Standard: Für normale Umgebungen geeignet.
• Film: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen in einem abgedunkelten Zimmer geeignet.
• Unterhalt.: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen und Spielen geeignet.
Grundfunktionen > Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus (5/10)
a Jetzt test. b Start { Zoom } Index L Seite e Beenden
Bild
Bildmodus : Standard r
Zellhelligkeit : 10
Kontrast : 100
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50
Bildschirmanpassung
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 14 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:07Deutsch - 15
Anzeigen der Inhalte
Verwenden des Zoommodus
Wenn Sie das e-Manual anzeigen, können Sie das Fenster
mit der gelben Taste vergrößern. Mit der Taste u oder d
können Sie durch das vergrößerte Fenster blättern.
✎Um zum vorherigen Menü zurückzukehren, drücken Sie
die Taste RETURN.
So suchen Sie mithilfe der Indexseite nach einen Stichwort
✎Diese Funktion wird, je nach Sprache, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt.
1. Wenn Sie nach einem Stichwort suchen möchten, wählen Sie mit der blauen Taste Index.
2. Wählen Sie mit der Taste l oder r den Anfangsbuchstaben des gewünschten Stichworts aus, und drücken Sie dann die
Taste ENTERE.
3. Wählen Sie mit der Taste u oder d das gewünschte Stichwort aus, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
4. Sie können das Fenster der entsprechenden Anweisung im e-Manual anzeigen.
✎Drücken Sie die Taste RETURN, um das Index-Fenster zu schließen.
R Zurück
Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus
O MENUm → Bild → Bildmodus → ENTERE
■ Bildmodus
Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Bildtyp aus.
N Wenn als Signalquelle PC eingestellt ist, können Sie im Bildmodus nur zwischen
Standard und Unterhalt. wählen.
• Dynamisch: Für helle Zimmer geeignet.
• Standard: Für normale Umgebungen geeignet.
• Film: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen in einem abgedunkelten Zimmer geeignet.
• Unterhalt.: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen und Spielen geeignet.
a Jetzt test. b Start { Zoom } Index L Seite e Beenden
Grundfunktionen > Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus (5/10)
Inhaltsfenster: Wenn Sie ein Untermenü auswählen,
können Sie die entsprechenden Inhalte anzeigen.
Mit der Taste l oder r wechseln Sie zur
vorherigen oder zur nächsten Seite.
Bedientasten:
aRot (Jetzt test.): Anzeigen der entsprechenden Menüs.
b Grün (Start): Wechseln zum Startfenster des e-Manuals.
{ Gelb (Zoom): Vergrößern des Fensters.
}Blau (Index): Anzeigen des Index-Fensters.
L (Seite): Wechseln zur vorherigen oder zur nächsten Seite.
Ändern des voreingestellten Bildmodus
O MENUm → Bild → Bildmodus → ENTERE
■ Bildmodus
Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Bildtyp aus.
N Wenn als Signalquelle PC eingestellt ist, können Sie im
Bildmodus nur zwischen Standard und Unterhalt. wählen.
• Dynamisch: Für helle Zimmer geeignet.
• Standard: Für normale Umgebungen geeignet.
• Film: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen in einem abgedunkelten Zimmer
geeignet.
• Unterhalt.: Zum Anzeigen von Filmen und Spielen geeignet.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 15 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:08Deutsch - 16
Anbringen der Wandhalterung
Anbringen der Wandhalterung
Mit der (separat erhältlichen) Wandhalterung können Sie das Fernsehgerät an einer Wand befestigen.
Detaillierte Informationen zum Montieren der Wandhalterung finden Sie in den Anweisungen, die im Lieferumfang der
Wandhalterung enthalten sind. Lassen Sie sich beim Anbringen der Wandhalterung von einem Techniker helfen.
Samsung Electronics haftet nicht für Schäden an Gerät oder Personen, wenn die Montage vom Kunden selbst durchgeführt
wird.
Spezifikation (VESA) der Wandhalterung
✎Die Wandhalterung wird nicht mitgeliefert, ist aber gesondert erhältlich.
Montieren Sie die Wandhalterung an einer soliden Wand, die senkrecht zum Boden steht. Bei Installation auf anderen
Trägermaterialien wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Fachhändler. Bei Montage an einer Decke oder schrägen Wand kann das
Fernsehgerät herunterfallen und zu Verletzungen führen.
✎HINWEIS
x Die Standardabmessungen der Wandhalterung finden Sie in der nachfolgenden Tabelle.
x Beim Kauf unserer Wandhalterung erhalten Sie ein detailliertes Installationshandbuch sowie alle für die Montage
erforderlichen Teile.
x Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen.
x Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die länger sind als in der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben angegeben.
Zu lange Schrauben können Schäden an den inneren Bauteilen des Fernsehgeräts verursachen.
x Bei Wandhalterungen, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen, hängt die Länge der
Schrauben von der Spezifikation der Wandhalterung ab.
x Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht zu fest an, weil Sie auf diese Weise das Gerät beschädigen könnten oder weil das
Gerät dadurch herunterfallen und damit Verletzungen verursachen könnte. Samsung haftet nicht bei derartigen
Unfällen.
x Samsung haftet nicht für Geräteschäden oder Verletzungen, wenn eine Wandhalterung verwendet wird, die nicht
dem VESA-Standard entspricht oder nicht spezifiziert ist, oder wenn der Verbraucher die Installationsanleitung für
das Produkt nicht befolgt.
x Montieren Sie das Fernsehgerät nicht in einem Winkel von mehr als 15 Grad.
Produktfamilie Zoll
VESASpezifikation
(A * B)
Standardschraube Menge
Plasmabildschirm
43~51 400 X 400
M8 4
59~64 600 X 400
✎Lösen Sie die Schrauben des Lochkreises, ehe Sie die Wandhalterung an
der Wand befestigen.
Installieren Sie die Wandhalterung nicht bei eingeschaltetem Fernsehgerät. Sie könnten dabei einen
Stromschlag erhalten und sich verletzen.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 16 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:08Deutsch - 17
Fehlerbehebung
Bei Fragen zum Fernsehgerät schauen Sie zuerst in dieser Liste nach. Wenn keiner dieser Tipps zur
Fehlerbehebung weiterhilft, öffnen Sie die Website „www.samsung.com“ und klicken Sie dort auf „Support“ oder
wenden Sie sich an das in der Liste auf der letzten Seite angegebene Callcenter.
Probleme Lösungen und Erklärungen
Der Fernseher kann nicht eingeschaltet
werden.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem Fernsehgerät
verbunden ist.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Netzsteckdose Strom liefert.
• Drücken Sie die Taste POWER am Fernsehgerät, um zu prüfen, ob die Fernbedienung richtig funktioniert.
Wenn das Fernsehgerät angeht, lesen Sie den Abschnitt „Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht“ weiter
unten.
Kein Bild/Video. • Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. Unterbrechen Sie kurzzeitig alle Kabelverbindungen zwischen dem
Fernsehgerät und den externen Geräten.
• Stellen Sie den Videoausgang Ihres externen Geräts (Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver, DVD-/Blu-ray-Player usw.)
so ein, dass er zur Verbindung mit dem Fernsehgerät passt. Zum Beispiel: Wenn der HDMI-Ausgang des
externen Geräts verwendet wird, schließen Sie es an den HDMI-Eingangs Ihres Fernsehers an.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass die angeschlossenen Geräte eingeschaltet sind.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die richtige Signalquelle für den Fernseher eingestellt ist. Drücken Sie dazu die
Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung.
Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht. • Ersetzen Sie die Batterien der Fernbedienung, und achten Sie dabei auf die richtige Polung (+/-).
• Reinigen Sie das Sendefeld der Fernbedienung.
• Zeigen Sie mit der Fernbedienung aus 1,5 bis 2 m Entfernung direkt auf das Fernsehgerät.
Die Fernbedienung des Kabel-/
Satellitenreceivers schaltet das Fernsehgerät
nicht ein/aus oder regelt auch nicht die
Lautstärke.
• Programmieren Sie die Fernbedienung des Kabel-/Satellitenreceivers so, dass sie das Fernsehgerät
anspricht. Den Code für SAMSUNG TV finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung für Ihren Kabel-/
Satellitenreceiver.
✎Manche der obigen Abbildungen und Funktionen gibt es nur bei bestimmten Modellen.
✎Sie können den optimalen Zustand Ihres Fernsehgeräts erhalten, indem Sie die aktuelle Firmware per USB von der
Website (samsung.com → Unterstützung → Downloads) herunterladen.
Lizenz
Liste der Funktionen
Hervorragende digitale Schnittstelle und Netzwerkverbindung: Mit dem eingebauten digitalen HDTV-Tuner können Sie
unverschlüsselte HDTV-Sendungen ohne zusätzlichen Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver empfangen.
3D
Mit dieser aufregenden neuen Funktion können Sie Inhalte räumlich anzeigen.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Dabei handelt es sich um eine Funktion, mit der Sie alle angeschlossenen Samsung-Geräte, die Anynet+ unterstützen, mit der
Fernbedienung für Ihr Samsung-Fernsehgerät steuern können.
Eigene Inhalte
Hiermit können Sie Musikdateien, Bilder und Filme abspielen, die auf einem USB-Gerät gespeichert sind.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 17 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:09Deutsch - 18
Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand
Achtung: Das Fernsehgerät kann hinfallen, wenn Sie daran ziehen, es schieben oder darauf klettern. Stellen
Sie insbesondere sicher, dass sich keine Kinder an das Gerät hängen oder es aus dem Gleichgewicht bringen.
Anderenfalls könnte das Gerät umkippen und zu schweren Verletzungen oder dem Tod führen. Beachten Sie
alle Anweisungen der beigefügten Sicherheitshinweise. Noch mehr Stabilität und Sicherheit erreichen Sie,
wenn Sie den Kippschutz installieren. Gehen Sie dazu folgendermaßen vor.
So verhindern Sie, dass das Fernsehgerät umkippt
1. Stecken Sie die Schrauben durch die Halterungen und befestigen Sie sie fest an
der Wand. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Schrauben gut halten.
✎Je nach Ausführung der Wand benötigen Sie zum Befestigen weiteres
Material, wie z. B. Dübel.
✎Da die benötigten Halterungen, Schrauben und das Band nicht zum
Lieferumfang gehören, müssen Sie diese Teile gesondert erwerben.
2. Entfernen Sie die Schrauben in der Mitte auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts.
Setzen Sie diese Schrauben in die Halterungen ein, und befestigen Sie die
Schrauben dann wieder am Fernsehgerät.
✎Die Schrauben werden möglicherweise nicht zusammen mit dem Gerät
geliefert. Kaufen Sie in diesem Fall Schrauben entsprechend den folgenden
Angaben.
3. Verbinden Sie die Halterungen an der Wand und die Halterung am Fernsehgerät
mit einem festen Kabel miteinander, und ziehen Sie es dann fest.
✎HINWEIS
x Stellen Sie das Fernsehgerät in der Nähe der Wand auf, damit es nicht nach hinten kippen kann.
x Es ist noch sicherer, wenn die Halterungen an der Wand niedriger als die Halterungen am Fernsehgerät sind.
x Lösen Sie das Band, ehe Sie den Fernseher bewegen.
4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob alle Befestigungen ordnungsgemäß gesichert sind. Prüfen Sie regelmäßig die Verbindungen auf
Zeichen von Ermüdung oder Versagen. Bei Zweifeln hinsichtlich der Sicherheit Ihrer Halterungen wenden Sie sich an
einen professionellen Installationsbetrieb.
Lagerung und Wartung
✎Wenn Sie Aufkleber auf dem Bildschirm des Fernsehgeräts anbringen, bleiben nach dem Entfernen Kleberückstände
zurück. Entfernen Sie diese, bevor Sie fernsehen.
Sprühen Sie kein Wasser oder Reinigungsmittel direkt auf
das Gerät. Jede Flüssigkeit, die in das Gerät eindringt,
kann zu einer Funktionsstörung, einem Brand oder einem
Stromschlag führen.
Reinigen Sie das Gerät mit einem weichen Tuch, das Sie
vorher mit einer kleinen Menge Wasser anfeuchten.
Wand
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 18 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:10Deutsch - 19
Technische Daten
Umgebungsbedingungen
Betriebstemperatur
Luftfeuchtigkeit (bei Betrieb)
Temperatur (Lagerung)
Luftfeuchtigkeit (Lagerung)
10° C bis 40° C (50°F bis 104°F)
10% bis 80%, nicht kondensierend
-20° C bis 45° C (-4°F bis 113°F)
5% bis 95%, nicht kondensierend
TV-System Analog: B/G, D/K, L, I (je nach eingestelltem Land)
Digital: DVB-T/DVB-C
Fernsehnorm/Videosystem: Analog: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60
Digital: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0
Audiosystem BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC.
HDMI IN Video: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i
Audio: 2-Kanal-Linear-PCM 32/44.1/48 kHz, 16/20/24 Bit.
Drehbarer Fuß (Links / Rechts) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Modellname PS43D490 PS51D490
Bildschirmgröße 43 Zoll (109 cm) 51 Zoll (128 cm)
Ton
(Ausgang) 10 W x 2
Abmessungen (BxTxH)
Gehäuse
Mit Fuß
1011,8 X 56,0 X 622,4 mm
1011,8 X 305,0 X 698,7 mm
1187,8 X 56,0 X 706,6 mm
1187,8 X 305,0 X 782,9 mm
Gewicht
Ohne Fuß
Mit Fuß
16,0 kg
20,3 kg
22,5 kg
26,8 kg
Anzeigeauflösung 1024 X 768 1360 X 768
✎Änderungen der technischen Daten und des Geräte-Designs vorbehalten.
✎Die technischen Daten zur benötigten Netzspannung und zum Energieverbrauch finden Sie auf dem Etikett am Produkt.
✎Hiermit erklärt Samsung, dass sich das Gerät PDP TV in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und
den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 19 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:10Nederlands - 2
Voor meer informatie over het gebruik van de E-handleiding (pag.14)
De figuren en illustraties in deze gebruikershandleiding dienen alleen ter referentie en kunnen afwijken van
het werkelijke uiterlijk van het product. Het ontwerp en de specificaties van het product kunnen zonder
kennisgeving worden gewijzigd.
Opmerking over digitale tv
1. Functionaliteit betreffende digitale televisie (DVB) is alleen beschikbaar in landen/gebieden waar digitale DVB-T-televisiesignalen (MPEG2 en MPEG4
AVC) per zendmast worden uitgezonden of waar u toegang hebt tot een compatibele DVB-C-service (MPEG2 en MPEG4 AAC) voor kabel-tv.
Informeer bij een lokale dealer of u DVB-T- of DVB-C-signalen kunt ontvangen.
2. DVB-T is de Europese DVB-consortiumnorm voor de uitzending van digitale televisie per zendmast en DVB-C voor de uitzending van digitale
televisie over de kabel. Bepaalde specifieke functies, zoals EPG (Elektronische programmagids), VOD (Video on Demand) enzovoort, zijn echter niet
opgenomen in deze specificatie. Deze werken dus op dit moment nog niet.
3 Hoewel dit televisietoestel voldoet aan de huidige DVB-T- en DVB-C-normen vanaf [augustus 2008], kan de compatibiliteit met toekomstige digitale
DVB-T-signalen via de zendmast en digitale DVB-C-signalen via de kabel niet worden gegarandeerd.
4. Afhankelijk van de landen/gebieden waar dit televisietoestel wordt gebruikt, kunnen leveranciers van kabeltelevisie aanvullende kosten voor dergelijke
services in rekening brengen en moet u wellicht akkoord gaan met hun voorwaarden en bepalingen.
5. Bepaalde digitale televisiefuncties zijn mogelijk niet beschikbaar in bepaalde landen of regio’s en DVB-C werkt mogelijk niet goed met bepaalde
leveranciers van kabelservices.
6. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met de klantendienst van Samsung.
✎ De ontvangstkwaliteit van televisie-uitzendingen kan minder goed zijn door verschil in uitzendmethode tussen landen. Controleer de
televisieprestaties bij uw plaatselijke geautoriseerde SAMSUNG-dealer of bel de klantenservice van Samsung om te informeren of u de kwaliteit
kunt verbeteren door de tv-instellingen aan te passen.
Instructies voor gebruik
• Beeldretentie
Geef een stilstaand beeld (bijvoorbeeld van een videospel) niet langer dan enkele minuten op het plasmascherm weer, omdat dit beeldretentie kan
veroorzaken. Beeldretentie wordt ook wel ‘inbranden’ genoemd. Verlaag bij de weergave van een stilstaand beeld de helderheid en het contrast om
beeldretentie te voorkomen.
• Warmte op de bovenkant van de plasma-tv
De bovenkant van het scherm kan na een lange gebruiksperiode erg warm worden, omdat de warmte van het scherm zich door het ventilatiegat aan
de bovenkant van het toestel verspreidt.
Dit is normaal en duidt niet op een defect of storing.
Zorg dat kinderen de bovenkant van het product niet kunnen aanraken.
• Het product maakt een ‘krakend’ geluid.
Een ‘krakend’ geluid kan optreden als het product uitzet of inkrimpt door een verandering in de omgeving, zoals de temperatuur of de
luchtvochtigheid. Dit is normaal en duidt niet op een defect.
• Celdefecten
Het plasmascherm gebruikt een paneel dat bestaat uit 2.360.000 (HD-niveau) tot 6.221.000 (FHD-niveau) pixels, wat het gebruik van geavanceerde
productietechnologie vereist. Het scherm kan echter enkele heldere of donkere pixels bevatten. Deze pixels zijn niet van invloed op de prestaties van
het product.
• Gebruik de tv niet bij een temperatuur lager dan 5°C
• Als u een stilstaand beeld te lang op het scherm weergeeft, kan plasmascherm permanent beschadigd raken.
Als u gedurende langere tijd naar uw plasma-tv kijkt terwijl het beeld in 4:3-formaat wordt weergegeven, kunnen aan de linker- en
rechterkant en in het midden van het scherm randen achterblijven. Hetzelfde effect kan optreden wanneer u een dvd afspeelt of een
spelcomputer gebruikt.
Schade ontstaan door het bovengenoemde effect valt niet onder de garantie.
• Scherminbranding.
Het gedurende langere tijd weergeven van stilstaande beelden van dvd’s of computerspellen kan (gedeeltelijke) scherminbranding tot gevolg hebben.
Om dit te voorkomen, kunt u tijdens het langdurig weergeven van stilstaande beelden de ‘helderheid’ en het ‘contrast’ verminderen.
• Garantie
De garantievoorwaarden gelden niet voor schade veroorzaakt door beeldretentie.
Het inbranden van het scherm valt niet onder de garantievoorwaarden.
Correcte verwijdering van dit product (elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur)
Dit merkteken op het product, de accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product en zijn elektronische accessoires (bv.
lader, headset, USB-kabel) niet met ander huishoudelijk afval verwijderd mogen worden aan het einde van hun gebruiksduur. Om mogelijke
schade aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid door ongecontroleerde afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, moet u deze artikelen van
andere soorten afval scheiden en op een verantwoorde manier recyclen, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van materiaalbronnen wordt
bevorderd. Huishoudelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze dit product hebben gekocht of met de gemeente
waar ze wonen om te vernemen waar en hoe ze deze artikelen milieuvriendelijk kunnen laten recyclen. Zakelijke gebruikers moeten
contact opnemen met hun leverancier en de algemene voorwaarden van de koopovereenkomst nalezen. Dit product en zijn elektronische
accessoires mogen niet met ander bedrijfsafval voor verwijdering worden gemengd.
Correcte behandeling van een gebruikte accu uit dit product
(Van toepassing op de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen met afzonderlijke inzamelingssystemen voor accu’s en
batterijen.)
Dit merkteken op de accu, handleiding of verpakking geeft aan dat de accu in dit product aan het einde van de levensduur niet samen
met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden weggegooid. De chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb geven aan dat het kwik-, cadmium- of
loodgehalte in de accu hoger is dan de referentieniveaus in de Richtlijn 2006/66/EC. Indien de gebruikte accu niet op de juiste wijze
wordt behandeld, kunnen deze stoffen schadelijk zijn voor de gezondheid van mensen of het milieu. Ter bescherming van de natuurlijke
hulpbronnen en ter bevordering van het hergebruik van materialen, verzoeken wij u afgedankte accu’s en batterijen te scheiden van andere
soorten afval en voor recycling aan te bieden bij het gratis inzamelingssysteem voor accu’s en batterijen in uw omgeving.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 2 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:11Nederlands - 3
Accessoires
✎Controleer of de volgende onderdelen bij uw tv geleverd zijn. Neem contact op met uw verkoper als er
onderdelen ontbreken.
✎De vorm en kleur van de items kunnen enigszins afwijken. Dit is afhankelijk van het model.
✎Kabels die niet bij het product worden geleverd, kunnen apart worden aangeschaft.
✎Controleer of er geen accessoire is achtergebleven in het verpakkingsmateriaal in de doos.
[LET OP: STEVIG BEVESTIGEN ZODAT DE ADAPTER GOED IS VASTGEKOPPELD
• Afstandsbediening en batterijen (AAA x 2) • Netsnoer
• Gebruikershandleiding • Schoonmaakdoekje
• Garantiekaart (niet op alle locaties beschikbaar) / Veiligheidsvoorschriften
alleen 43-inch model
Ferrietkern (2EA)
✎Ferrietkern voor netsnoer: De ferrietkernen worden gebruikt om de kabels af te
schermen van interferentie. Open de ferrietkern bij het aansluiten van een kabel en
klem deze om de kabel bij de plug, zoals wordt weergegeven in de afbeelding.
x A Minimale afstand tussen de ferrietkern en het uiteinde van het snoer in de tv:
6~8 inch (15~20 cm)
x B Maximale afstand tussen de ferrietkern en het uiteinde van het snoer dat op de
stroom is aangesloten: 3/4 inch (2 cm)
Netsnoer
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 3 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:11Nederlands - 4
alleen 51-inch model
Ferrietkern (2EA) Ferrietkern (1EA)
✎Ferrietkern voor netsnoer: De ferrietkernen worden gebruikt om de kabels af te
schermen van interferentie. Open de ferrietkern bij het aansluiten van een kabel en
klem deze om de kabel bij de plug, zoals wordt weergegeven in de afbeelding.
x A Minimale afstand tussen de ferrietkern en het uiteinde van het snoer in de tv:
6~8 inch (15~20 cm)
x B Maximale afstand tussen de ferrietkern en het uiteinde van het snoer dat op
de stroom is aangesloten: 3/4 inch (2 cm)
Netsnoer
✎Ferrietkern: De ferrietkernen worden gebruikt om de kabels af te schermen van
interferentie. Open de ferrietkern bij het aansluiten van een kabel en klem deze om
de kabel bij de plug, zoals wordt weergegeven in de afbeelding.
Antennekabel /
componentkabel
(afzonderlijk
verkrijgbaar)
• In de volgende gevallen kunnen administratiekosten in rekening worden gebracht:
– (a) Er wordt op uw verzoek een engineer gestuurd, maar het product is niet defect
(wanneer u deze gebruikershandleiding niet hebt gelezen).
– (b) U brengt het apparaat naar een reparatiecentrum, maar het product is niet defect
(wanneer u deze gebruikershandleiding niet hebt gelezen).
• U wordt op de hoogte gesteld van deze administratiekosten voordat een dergelijke reparatie of bezoek wordt
uitgevoerd.
A B
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 4 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:12Nederlands - 5
Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel
✎De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen afhankelijk van het model variëren.
Sensor voor de
afstandsbediening
Richt de afstandsbediening op dit punt van de tv.
Aan/uit-lampje Als de stroom is ingeschakeld, knippert het lampje even en gaat het
vervolgens uit. In de stand-bymodus blijft het aan.
SOURCEE Hiermee schakelt u tussen de beschikbare ingangsbronnen. Gebruik
deze toets in het schermmenu zoals u de toets ENTERE op de
afstandsbediening gebruikt.
MENU y Hiermee wordt het schermmenu met de functies van de tv weergegeven.
Hiermee regelt u het volume. Gebruik de y-toetsen in het
z schermmenu zoals u de toetsen ◄ en ► op de afstandsbediening gebruikt.
Hiermee wisselt u van kanaal. Gebruik de z-toetsen in het
schermmenu zoals u de toetsen ▼ en ▲ op de afstandsbediening gebruikt.
P (Aan/uit) Hiermee schakelt u de tv in en uit.
Stand-bymodus
Laat de tv niet gedurende langere tijd in de stand-bymodus staan (bijvoorbeeld wanneer u op vakantie bent).
Zelfs wanneer het apparaat via de aan/uit-knop is uitgeschakeld, wordt een kleine hoeveelheid stroom gebruikt.
U kunt het netsnoer het beste loskoppelen.
Installatieruimte
Bewaar de nodige afstand tussen het product en andere objecten (bijvoorbeeld muren) zodat er een goede
ventilatie mogelijk is.
Wanneer u dit niet doet, kunnen er door een stijging van de interne temperatuur brand of problemen bij het
product ontstaan.
✎Bij gebruik van een voet of wandbevestiging mogen er alleen onderdelen worden gebruikt die door
Samsung Electronics zijn geleverd.
x Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs
tot lichamelijk letsel doordat het product valt.
✎Het uiterlijk van het product kan afwijken van het afgebeelde apparaat.
✎Wees voorzichtig wanneer u de tv aanraakt. Sommige onderdelen kunnen heet zijn.
Plaatsing op een voet. Plaatsing met een wandbevestiging.
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Configuratiescherm
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 5 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:12Nederlands - 6
Overzicht van de afstandsbediening
✎Dit is een speciale afstandsbediening voor visueel gehandicapten en heeft brailletekens op de kanaal- en
cijfertoetsen.
Batterijen plaatsen (batterijformaat: AAA)
Hiermee schakelt u de tv in en uit.
De beschikbare videobronnen weergeven
en selecteren.
Hiermee gaat u terug naar het vorige
kanaal.
Hiermee wordt het geluid tijdelijk
uitgeschakeld.
Hiermee worden kanalen gewijzigd.
Hiermee wordt de kanaallijst op het
scherm weergegeven.
De EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
weergeven.
hiermee wordt informatie op het tvscherm weergegeven.
u/d/l/r: beweeg de cursor op het
scherm voor het menu-item.
ENTERE: selecteert het menu en kiest
de overeenkomstige itemwaarde.
hiermee kunt u het menu afsluiten.
Directe toegang tot kanalen.
Hiermee regelt u het volume.
Wisselen tussen Teletekst AAN, Dubbel,
Mix of UIT.
Hiermee wordt het schermmenu geopend.
snel veelgebruikte functies selecteren.
Geeft het beginscherm inhoud weer, met
Tv kijken, Mijn inhoud en Bron.
hiermee gaat u terug naar het vorige
menu.
Deze toetsen zijn voor het menu van
Kanaalbeheer, Mijn inhoud enzovoort.
Gebruik deze toetsen in de modi Mijn
inhoud en Anynet+.
P.MODE: druk op deze toets om de
Beeldmodus te selecteren.
W: hiermee stelt u de video met een
3D-signaal in.
DUALf-g: Geluidseffect selecteren.
E-MANUAL: de e-Manual weergeven.
P.SIZE: het Beeldformaat selecteren.
AD/SUBT.: hiermee wordt de
audiobeschrijving in- en uitgeschakeld (op
enkele locaties niet beschikbaar). / digitale
ondertiteling weergeven.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 6 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:13Nederlands - 7
De ingangsbron wijzigen
Bron
Hiermee kunt u de tv of een externe
ingangsbron selecteren, zoals een dvdspeler/Blu-rayspeler/kabelbox/STBsatellietontvanger.
1. Druk op de SOURCE toets op de
afstandsbediening.
2. Selecteer de gewenste externe
ingangsbron.
✎U kunt de kijkmodus wijzigen voor Alle
en Verbonden door op de toets l of r te
drukken.
■ TV / Ext. / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3 /
AV / Component / USB
✎In de Bron worden aangesloten ingangen
gemarkeerd.
✎Ext. en PC blijven altijd geactiveerd.
✎Als de aangesloten externe apparaten niet zijn
gemarkeerd, druk dan op de rode toets. De tv
zoekt dan naar aangesloten apparaten.
Naam wijzigen
Druk in de Bron op de toets TOOLS. Hier kunt u een
naam voor externe-invoerbron instellen.
■ VCR / DVD / Kabel STB / Satelliet STB /
PVR STB / AV-ontvanger / Spelcomputer /
Camcorder / PC / DVI PC / DVI-apparaten /
TV / IPTV /Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: geef het
apparaat dat op de ingangen is aangesloten,
een naam om de selectie van de ingangsbron
gemakkelijker te maken.
✎Waneer u een pc met een HDMI-kabel aansluit
op de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-poort, moet u de tv
instellen op de modus PC onder Naam wijzigen.
(PS51D490)
✎Waneer u een pc met een HDMI-naar-DVI-kabel
aansluit op de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-poort, moet u de
tv instellen op de modus DVI PC onder Naam
wijzigen. (PS51D490)
✎Waneer u AV-apparaat met een HDMI-naar-DVIkabel aansluit op de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-poort, moet
u de tv instellen op de modus DVI-apparaten
onder Naam wijzigen. (PS43D490, PS51D490)
Informatie
Hiermee kunt u gedetailleerde informatie over het
geselecteerde externe apparaat weergeven.
Aansluiten op een antenne
Wanneer u de tv voor het eerst inschakelt, worden er automatisch enkele basisinstellingen uitgevoerd.
✎Vooraf doen: het netsnoer en de antenne aansluiten.
✎Het PDP-apparaat kan de ontvangst van amateur- en AM-zenders storen.
✎Het gebruik van een tweezijdig radiosysteem en draagbare unit of amateruradio of AM-radio in de buurt
van uw tv kan leiden tot een niet goed functionerende tv.
Kabel VHF/UHF-antenne
of
Netvoeding
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 7 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:13Nederlands - 8
Plug & Play (eerste instelling)
Wanneer de tv voor het eerst wordt ingeschakeld, verschijnen er een enkele instructies op het scherm die u
helpen de basisinstellingen te configureren. Druk op de toets POWERP. Plug & Play is alleen beschikbaar als
de Bron is ingesteld op tv.
✎Zorg ervoor dat de antennekabel is aangesloten voordat u de tv inschakelt (p. 6).
✎Om terug te keren naar het vorige menu drukt u op de rode toets.
1
Een taal selecteren Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ en druk vervolgens op de toets
ENTERE.
Selecteer de gewenste taal voor het schermmenu.
2
Selecteer
Winkeldemo of
Thuisgebruik.
Druk op de toets ◄ of ► en druk vervolgens op de toets
ENTERE.
Selecteer de modus Thuisgebruik. De modus Winkeldemo is
alleen bedoeld voor gebruik in winkels.
De instellingen van het apparaat van Winkeldemo terugzetten
op Thuisgebruik (standaard): druk op de volumeknop op de tv.
Wanneer het schermmenu voor het volume wordt weergegeven,
houdt u MENU 5 seconden ingedrukt.
Winkeldemo is alleen voor winkelweergave. Als u deze modus
selecteert, zijn verschillende functies niet beschikbaar. Selecteer
Thuisgebruik als u thuis kijkt.
3
Uw land selecteren Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Selecteer
uw land. (afhankelijk van het land)
✎Bij bepaalde modellen kunt u ervoor kiezen om een pincode in te stellen
nadat u in het menu Land uw land hebt geselecteerd.
✎Wanneer u een pincode invoert, is “0-0-0-0” niet beschikbaar.
4
De Klokmodus
instellen
Stel de Klokmodus automatisch of handmatig in.
Auto: Selecteer uw tijdzone.
Handm.: hier kunt u de datum en tijd handmatig instellen.
5
Een antenne
selecteren
Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Selecteer
antennebron om te onthouden.
6
Een kanaal
selecteren
Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Selecteer
de kanaalbron die moet worden opgeslagen. Wanneer u de antennebron als
Kabel instelt, kunt u numerieke waarden (kanaalfrequenties) voor de kanalen
opgeven. Zie voor meer informatie Kanaal → Automatisch afstemmen.
7
Veel kijkplezier. Druk op de toets ENTERE.
Als u deze functie wilt resetten...
Ook al hebt u dit al in de winkel gedaan, moet u nogmaals Plug & Play (MENU → Systeem) uitvoeren.
Selecteer Systeem – Plug & Play (eerste instelling). Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. De standaardpincode is ‘0-
0-0-0’ (behalve Frankrijk). Als u de pincode wilt wijzigen, gebruikt u de functie PIN wijzigen.
✎Als u de pincode bent vergeten, drukt u in de stand-bymodus achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen
van de afstandsbediening zodat de pincode opnieuw wordt ingesteld op ‘0-0-0-0’: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4
→ POWER (aan).
P
POWER
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 8 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:14Nederlands - 9
Aansluiten op een AV-apparaat
¦
Beschikbare apparaten: dvd-speler, Blu-rayspeler, HD-kabelbox, Satelliet STB (settopbox),
Videorecorder
Een HDMI- een HDMI-naar-DVI-kabel gebruiken (tot 1080p)
✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
x Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelverbinding, moet u de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-aansluiting voor video
gebruiken. Voor een dvd-speler, Blu-rayspeler, HD-kabelbox of HD STB-satellietontvanger hebt u
mogelijk een DVI-HDMI-kabel(DVI-naar-HDMI) of DVI-HDMI-adapter (DVI-naar-HDMI) nodig. Voor
audio hebt u de PC/DVI AUDIO IN-aansluiting nodig.
x Mogelijk wordt het beeld niet normaal (of helemaal niet) weergegeven of werkt het geluid niet als een
extern apparaat dat met een oudere versie van HDMI werkt, op de televisie wordt aangesloten. Als
een dergelijk probleem zich voordoet, informeert u bij de fabrikant van het externe apparaat naar de
HDMI-versie die wordt ondersteund en vraagt u, als deze verouderd is, om een upgrade.
x Let op dat u een goedgekeurde HDMI-kabel aanschaft. Anders wordt het beeld mogelijk niet
weergegeven of treedt er een verbindingsfout op.
USB HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
W R
HDMI-verbinding
HDMI-naar-DVI-verbinding
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 9 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:14Nederlands - 10
Een component gebruiken (maximaal 1080p) of een audio/video (uitsluitend 480i) en een scartkabel
gebruiken
✎In de modus Ext. ondersteunt DTV Out alleen MPEG SD-video en -audio.
✎Wanneer u verbinding maakt met AV IN, komt de kleur van de AV IN [Y/VIDEO]-aansluiting (groen) niet
overeen met die van de videokabel (geel).
✎Voor de beste beeldkwaliteit kunt u beter de componentaansluiting in plaats van de A/V-aansluiting
gebruiken.
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
PR PB Y
COMPONENT OUT
EXT
Component-verbinding
AV-verbinding
SCART-verbinding
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 10 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:15Nederlands - 11
Verbinding maken met een pc en audio-apparaat
¦ Beschikbare apparaten: digitaal audiosysteem, versterker, dvd-thuisbioscoop, PC
Een optische (digitale) aansluiting of een hoofdtelefoonaansluiting gebruiken
✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
x Wanneer een digitaal audiosysteem op de DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)-aansluiting wordt
aangesloten, moet u het volume van zowel de tv als het audiosysteem reduceren.
x 5.1-kanaals audio is mogelijk wanneer de tv op een extern apparaat is aangesloten dat dit ondersteunt.
x Wanneer de ontvanger (thuisbioscoop) is ingesteld op Aan, hoort u alleen geluid via de optische
aansluiting van de tv. Wanneer de tv een DTV-signaal ontvangt, zendt de tv een 5.1-kanaalsgeluid
naar de ontvanger van de thuisbioscoop. Wanneer de bron een digitale component is, zoals een dvdspeler/blu-rayspeler/kabelbox/STB-satellietontvanger (settopbox) en via HDMI op de tv is aangesloten,
geeft de ontvanger van de thuisbioscoop alleen 2-kanaalsgeluid weer. Als u 5.1-kanaalsgeluid wilt
horen, sluit u de digitale uitgang van de dvd-speler/Blu-rayspeler/kabelbox/STB-satellietontvanger
(settopbox) rechtstreeks op een versterker of thuisbioscoop aan.
✎Hoofdtelefoon H: u kunt een hoofdtelefoon op de desbetreffende uitgang van uw set aansluiten.
Wanneer de hoofdtelefoon is aangesloten, worden de ingebouwde luidsprekers uitgeschakeld.
x Mogelijk kunt u de geluidsfunctie beperkt gebruiken wanneer er een hoofdtelefoon op de tv is
aangesloten.
x Het volume van de hoofdtelefoon en het volume van de tv worden apart geregeld.
OPTICAL
Verbinding dvd-thuisbioscoop
Hoofdtelefoonaansluiting
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 11 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:16Nederlands - 12
¦ Een HDMI-kabel of een HDMI-naar-DVI-kabel of een D-subkabel gebruiken
✎Verbinding maken via de HDMI-kabel wordt mogelijk niet ondersteund, afhankelijk van de pc.
Weergavemodi (D-Sub en HDMI-naar-DVI-invoer)
• PS43D490: 1024 X 768 bij 60Hz
• PS51D490: 1360 X 768 bij 60Hz
Modus Resolutie
Horizontale
frequentie (kHz)
Verticale
frequentie (Hz)
Pixelklokfrequentie
(MHz)
Synchronisatie-
polariteit (H/V)
PS43D490 PS51D490
IBM
640 x 350
720 x 400
31,469
31,469
70,086
70,087
25,175
28,322
+/-
-/+
c
c
c
c
MAC
640 x 480
832 x 624
35,000
49,726
66,667
74,551
30,240
57,284
-/-
-/-
c
c
c
c
VESA DMT
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1360 x 768
31,469
37,861
37,500
37,879
48,077
46,875
48,363
56,476
60,023
47,712
59,940
72,809
75,000
60,317
72,188
75,000
60,004
70,069
75,029
60,015
25,175
31,500
31,500
40,000
50,000
49,500
65,000
75,000
78,750
85,500
-/-
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-
-/-
+/+
+/+
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
✎OPMERKING
x Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelaansluiting moet u de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-aansluiting gebruiken.
x De interlace-modus wordt niet ondersteund.
x De tv werkt mogelijk niet normaal als een afwijkend videoformaat wordt geselecteerd.
x Afzonderlijke modus en compositemodus worden ondersteund. SOG (Sync On Green) wordt niet
ondersteund.
PC OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DVI OUT HDMI OUT
pc-verbinding
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 12 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:17Nederlands - 13
Aansluiten op een aansluiting voor ALGEMENE INTERFACE
De CI of CI+ CARD gebruiken
Voor betaalde kanalen moet een CI of CI+ CARD zijn geplaatst.
• Als u de ‘CI- of CI+-kaart’ niet plaatst, wordt bij sommige
kanalen het bericht “Scrambled Signal” (Gecodeerd signaal)
weergegeven.
• De koppelingsgegevens met een telefoonnummer, de ID van
de CI of CI+ CARD, de host-ID en andere informatie worden
na circa 2-3 minuten weergegeven. Neem contact op met uw
serviceprovider als er een foutbericht wordt weergegeven.
• Wanneer de kanaalgegevens zijn geconfigureerd, wordt
het bericht Update voltooid weergegeven. Hiermee wordt
aangegeven dat de kanaallijst is bijgewerkt.
✎OPMERKING
x U kunt een CI of CI+ CARD bij een lokale kabelaanbieder aanschaffen.
x Wanneer u de CI of CI+ CARD wilt verwijderen, doet u dat door de kaart er met uw handen voorzichtig
uit te trekken, want de kaart kan beschadigen als u deze laat vallen.
x Plaats de CI of CI+ CARD in de richting die op de kaart staat gemarkeerd.
x De plaats van de COMMON INTERFACE-aansluiting kan per model verschillen.
x CI of CI+ CARD wordt in sommige landen en regio’s niet ondersteund. Controleer dit bij uw
geautoriseerde verkoper.
x Neem contact op met uw serviceprovider als u problemen ondervindt.
x Plaats de CI of CI+ CARD die de huidige antenne-instellingen ondersteunt. Er wordt een vervormd beeld
of helemaal geen beeld weergegeven.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 13 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:17Nederlands - 14
De e-Manual weergeven
Schermweergave
Schakelen tussen de e-Manual en de bijbehorende menu’s.
✎Deze functie is niet beschikbaar sommige menu’s.
Methode 1 Methode 2
1. Druk op de rode toets om Probeer nu te
selecteren als u de bijbehorende menu’s wilt
uitvoeren.
2. Om terug te keren naar het vorige scherm van de
e-Manual drukt u op de toets E-MANUAL.
1. Druk op de toets ENTERE wanneer u het
inhoudsgebied hebt geselecteerd. “Wilt u dit
uitvoeren?” wordt weergegeven. Selecteer Ja
en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Het
schermvenster wordt weergegeven.
2. Om terug te keren naar het vorige scherm van de
e-Manual drukt u op de toets E-MANUAL.
E-MANUAL Hier kunt u de introductie en instructies over de functies van uw tv lezen.
O MENUm → Ondersteuning → e-Manual → ENTERE
✎Om terug te keren naar de E-handleiding drukt u op de toets E-MANUAL op uw
afstandsbediening.
✎U kunt de functie Probeer nu niet gebruiken als het menu niet is geactiveerd.
Basisfuncties
De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen
De beeldinstellingen aanpassen
De beeldgrootte wijzigen
De beeldopties wijzigen
De tv instellen met uw pc
} Index E Enter e Afsl.
Tv-scherm: geeft het beeld voor de
huidige invoerbron weer.
De categorie wijzigen. Druk op
de toets l of r om de gewenste
categorie te selecteren.
De lijst met submenu’s wordt
weergegeven. Druk op de toets
ENTERE om het gewenste
submenu weer te geven.
Bedieningstoetsen:
} Blauw (Index): het indexscherm weergeven.
E Enter: een categorie of submenu selecteren.
e Afsl.: de e-Manual sluiten.
Probeer nu
E-MANUAL
De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen
■
Selecteer het beeldtype dat uw voorkeur heeft.
Beeldmodus t
• Dynamisch: geschikt voor een heldere kamer.
• Standaard: geschikt voor een normale omgeving.
• Natural voor LED-tv / Ontspannen voor plasma-tv : geschikt om vermoeide
ogen tegen te gaan.
• Film: geschikt om fi lms in een donkere kamer te kijken.
• Amusement: geschikt voor fi lms en games.
N Alleen beschikbaar in de modus PC.
De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen
O MENUm → Beeld → Beeldmodus → ENTERE
■ Beeldmodus
Selecteer het beeldtype dat uw voorkeur heeft.
N Als een invoerbron is ingesteld op PC, zijn voor de Beeldmodus alleen
Standaard en Amusement beschikbaar.
• Dynamisch: geschikt voor een heldere kamer.
• Standaard: geschikt voor een normale omgeving.
• Film: geschikt om fi lms in een donkere kamer te kijken.
• Amusement: geschikt voor fi lms en games.
Basisfuncties > De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen (5/10)
a Probeer nu b Start { Zoom } Index L Pagina e Afsl.
Beeld
Beeldmodus : Standaard r
Helderheid : 10
Contrast : 100
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Schermaanpassing
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 14 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:24Nederlands - 15
De inhoud weergeven
De zoomfunctie gebruiken
Wanneer u de e-Manual-instructies weergeeft,
selecteert u gele toets om in te zoomen op het scherm.
U kunt door het ingezoomde scherm schuiven met de
toetsen u en d.
✎Om terug te keren naar het vorige menu drukt u op
de toets RETURN.
Een trefwoord zoeken via de indexpagina
✎Deze functie wordt mogelijk niet in alle talen ondersteund.
2. Als u een trefwoord wilt zoeken, drukt u op de blauwe toets om het scherm Index te openen.
2. Druk op de toets l of r om een beginletter te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
3. Druk op de toets u of d om een trefwoord te selecteren die uw wilt weergeven, en druk vervolgens op de
toets ENTERE.
4. U kunt het bijbehorende scherm met instructies voor de E-handleiding weergeven.
✎Als u het scherm Index wilt sluiten, drukt u op de toets RETURN.
a Probeer nu b Start { Zoom } Index L Pagina e Afsl.
Basisfuncties > De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen (5/10)
Inhoudsgebied: als u een submenu selecteert,
kunt u de bijbehorende inhoud weergeven.
Druk op de toets l of r om naar de vorige of
volgende pagina te gaan.
Bedieningstoetsen:
a Rood (Probeer nu): de bijbehorende menu's weergeven.
b Groen (Start): het startscherm van de e-Manual weergeven.
{ Geel (Zoom): een beeld vergroot weergeven.
} Blauw (Index): het indexscherm weergeven.
L (Pagina): de vorige of volgende pagina weergeven.
De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen
O MENUm → Beeld → Beeldmodus → ENTERE
■ Beeldmodus
Selecteer het beeldtype dat uw voorkeur heeft.
N Als een invoerbron is ingesteld op PC, zijn voor de Beeldmodus
alleen Standaard en Amusement beschikbaar.
• Dynamisch: geschikt voor een heldere kamer.
• Standaard: geschikt voor een normale omgeving.
• Film: geschikt om films in een donkere kamer te kijken.
• Amusement: geschikt voor films en games.
R Terug
De vooraf ingestelde beeldmodus wijzigen
O MENUm → Beeld → Beeldmodus → ENTERE
■ Beeldmodus
Selecteer het beeldtype dat uw voorkeur heeft.
N Als een invoerbron is ingesteld op PC, zijn voor de Beeldmodus alleen Standaard
en Amusement beschikbaar.
• Dynamisch: geschikt voor een heldere kamer.
• Standaard: geschikt voor een normale omgeving.
• Film: geschikt om films in een donkere kamer te kijken.
• Amusement: geschikt voor films en games.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 15 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:25Nederlands - 16
De wandbevestiging plaatsen
De wandbevestigingsset monteren
Met de wandbevestigingsset (apart verkrijgbaar) kunt u de tv aan de muur bevestigen.
Zie de instructies bij de onderdelen voor wandbevestiging als u wilt weten hoe u de wandbevestiging installeert.
Neem contact op met een technicus voor hulp alvorens de wandbeugel te bevestigen.
Samsung Electronics is niet verantwoordelijk voor schade aan het product of voor verwondingen die u zelf of
anderen oplopen wanneer u besluit de tv zelfstandig te installeren.
Specificaties voor de wandbevestigingsset (VESA)
✎De wandbevestigingsset is niet meegeleverd, maar wordt apart verkocht.
Monteer de wandbevestiging op een stevige wand die loodrecht op de vloer staat. Wanneer de steun aan
andere bouwmaterialen bevestigd moet worden, dient u contact op te nemen met de dichtstbijzijnde leverancier.
Als u de wandbevestiging aan het plafond of een schuine wand monteert, kan de tv vallen en daarmee tot zwaar
lichamelijk letsel leiden.
✎OPMERKING
x In de onderstaande tabel vindt u de standaardafmetingen voor wandbevestigingssets.
x Wanneer u onze wandbevestigingsset aanschaft, zijn een gedetailleerde installatiegids en alle vereiste
montageonderdelen daarbij inbegrepen.
x Gebruik geen schroeven die niet aan de standaard VESA-schroefspecificaties voldoen.
x Gebruik geen schroeven die langer zijn dan de standaardafmeting of die niet aan de standaard
VESA-schroefspecificaties voldoen. Schroeven die te lang zijn, kunnen de binnenkant van de televisie
beschadigen.
x Voor wandbevestigingen die niet voldoen aan de standaardspecificaties voor VESA-schroeven, kan de
lengte van de schroeven afwijken, afhankelijk van de specificaties voor wandbevestiging.
x Draai de schroeven niet te vast. Hierdoor kan het product beschadigd raken of vallen, wat kan leiden tot
lichamelijk letsel. Samsung is voor dit soort ongevallen niet aansprakelijk.
x Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor productschade of lichamelijk letsel wanneer een niet-VESA of nietgespecificeerde wandbevestiging is gebruikt of wanneer de consument de installatie-instructies voor het
product niet in acht heeft genomen.
x Bevestig de televisie niet in een hoek van meer dan 15 graden.
Productgroep formaat in cm
VESA-spec.
(A * B)
Standaardschroef Aantal
Plasma-tv
43~51 400 X 400
M8 4
59~64 600 X 400
✎Draai de schroeven rond het gat los voordat u de muurbevestiging
op de wand installeert.
Monteer de wandbevestigingsset niet terwijl de tv is ingeschakeld. Dit kan resulteren in
lichamelijk letsel door elektrische schokken.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 16 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:25Nederlands - 17
Problemen oplossen
Wanneer u vragen over deze televisie hebt, kunt u eerst deze lijst raadplegen. Als geen van de tips in deze lijst
van toepassing zijn, gaat u naar ‘www.samsung.com’ en klikt u daar op Ondersteuning, of neemt u contact op
met een van de callcenters die u op de achterkant van deze handleiding vindt.
Probleem Oplossingen en uitleg
De tv kan niet worden ingeschakeld. • Controleer of het netsnoer stevig op het stopcontact en op de tv is aangesloten.
• Controleer of het stopcontact werkt.
• Druk op de POWER-toets op de tv om te controleren of het probleem niet bij de afstandsbediening
ligt. Als de tv wordt ingeschakeld, raadpleegt u ‘De afstandsbediening werkt niet’ hieronder.
Er is geen beeld/video. • Controleer de kabelverbindingen (haal alle kabels die op de tv en externe apparaten zijn aangesloten,
los en sluit ze vervolgens weer aan).
• Stel de video-uitgang van het externe apparaat (aftakdoos, satellietdoos, dvd, Blu-ray enzovoort)
in zodat deze overeenkomt met de aansluitingen van de tv-ingang. Als bijvoorbeeld de HDMIuitgang van een extern apparaat wordt gebruikt, moet deze op de HDMI-ingang van de tv worden
aangesloten.
• Controleer of de aangesloten apparaten zijn ingeschakeld.
• Selecteer de juiste bron voor de tv door op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening te drukken.
De afstandsbediening werkt niet. • Vervang de batterijen van de afstandsbediening en plaats de batterijen met de polen (+/–) in de juiste
richting.
• Reinig het venster van de zender op de afstandsbediening.
• Richt vanaf circa 1,5 tot 2 meter afstand de afstandsbediening direct naar de televisie.
Met de afstandsbediening van de
kabelbox/settopbox kan de tv niet worden
in- of uitgeschakeld of kan het volume niet
worden geregeld.
• Programmeer de afstandsbediening voor de kabelbox/settopbox zodanig dat deze werkt voor de tv.
Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding van uw kabelbox/settopbox voor de code voor de SAMSUNGtv.
✎Enkele van de bovenstaande afbeeldingen en functies zijn alleen voor bepaalde modellen verkrijgbaar.
✎U kunt uw tv in optimale toestand houden door de nieuwste firmware op de website (samsung.com →
Ondersteuning → Downloads) via USB te installeren.
Licentie-informatie
Lijst met functies
Excellent Digital Interface & Networking: Met een ingebouwde digitale HD-tuner kunnen HD-uitzendingen zonder
abonnement worden bekeken zonder kabelbox/STB-satellietontvanger (settopbox).
3D
Met deze fantastische nieuwe functie kunt u 3D-inhoud bekijken.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Hiermee kunt u alle aangesloten Samsung-apparaten die Anynet+ ondersteunen met de afstandsbediening van
de Samsung-tv bedienen.
Mijn downloads
Hiermee kunt u muziekbestanden en films bekijken die op een USB-apparaat zijn opgeslagen.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 17 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:26Nederlands - 18
De tv vastzetten aan de wand
Let op: als u duwt of trekt aan de tv of op de tv klimt, kan deze vallen. Zie er met name op
toe dat uw kinderen niet aan de tv gaan hangen of deze uit balans brengen. De tv kan dan
omvallen, wat verwondingen kan veroorzaken of zelfs fatale gevolgen kan hebben. Neem
alle voorzorgsmaatregelen die in de bijgesloten veiligheidsfolder worden genoemd. Om
veiligheidsredenen is het raadzaam de antivalvoorziening te installeren om de stabiliteit van het
toestel te verhogen.
Voorkomen dat de tv valt
1. Plaats de schroeven in de beugels en bevestig deze stevig aan de wand.
Controleer of de schroeven stevig in de wand zijn gedraaid.
✎Afhankelijk van het wandtype hebt u mogelijk aanvullend materiaal
nodig om het geheel te verankeren.
✎De benodigde beugels, schroeven en draad worden niet
meegeleverd. Deze moeten apart worden aangeschaft.
2. Verwijder de schroeven in het midden aan de achterkant van de tv, steek
de schroeven door de beugels en draai de schroeven weer vast in de tv.
✎Het is mogelijk dat de schroeven niet bij het product worden
meegeleverd. In dat geval moet u schroeven met de volgende
specificaties aanschaffen.
3. Verbind de beugels die aan de tv zijn bevestigd met een sterke draad
aan de beugels die aan de muur zijn bevestigd en knoop de draad stevig
vast.
✎OPMERKING
x Plaats de tv dicht bij de muur zodat deze niet achterover kan vallen.
x Het is veilig om de draad zodanig aan te brengen dat de beugels die aan de muur zijn bevestigd zich
boven de beugels op de tv of op gelijke hoogte daarmee bevinden.
x Haal de draad los voordat u de tv verplaatst.
4. Controleer of alle bevestigingen goed zijn aangebracht. Controleer de bevestigingspunten regelmatig op
tekenen van moeheid of verzwakking. Neem in geval van twijfel over de veiligheid van de bevestiging contact
op met een professionele installateur.
Opslag en onderhoud
✎Als u stickers op het tv-scherm hebt geplakt, kunnen er resten achterblijven als u de sticker weghaalt.
Reinig het tv-scherm voordat u tv gaat kijken.
Spuit geen water of reinigingsmiddel rechtstreeks
op het product. Vloeistoffen die in het product
terechtkomen kunnen een storing, brand of elektrische
schok veroorzaken.
Reinig het product met een zachte doek die licht met
water is bevochtigd.
Muur
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 18 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:26Nederlands - 19
Specificaties
Omgevingsvereisten
Bedrijfstemperatuur
Gebruiksvochtigheid
Opslagtemperatuur
Opslagvochtigheid
10°C tot 40°C (50°F tot 104°F)
10% tot 80%, niet-condenserend
-20°C tot 45°C (-4°F tot 113°F)
5% tot 95%, niet-condenserend
Tv-systeem Analoog: B/G, D/K, L, I (afhankelijk van de landkeuze)
Digitaal: DVB-T/DVB-C
Kleuren-/videosysteem Analoog: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60
Digitaal: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0
Geluidssysteem BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC.
HDMI IN Video: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i
Audio: 2-kan. lineair PCM 32/44.1/48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits.
Draaivoet (links/rechts) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Modelnaam PS43D490 PS51D490
Schermformaat 43 inch (109 cm) 51 inch (128 cm)
Geluid
(Uitgang) 10 W x 2
Afmetingen (BxHxD)
Behuizing
Met voet
1011,8 X 56,0 X 622,4 mm
1011,8 X 305,0 X 698,7 mm
1187,8 X 56,0 X 706,6 mm
1187,8 X 305,0 X 782,9 mm
Gewicht
Zonder voet
Met voet
16,0 kg
20,3 kg
22,5 kg
26,8 kg
Beeldresolutie 1024 X 768 1360 X 768
✎Vormgeving en specificaties kunnen zonder kennisgeving worden gewijzigd.
✎Zie voor informatie over de stroomvoorziening en het energieverbruik het etiket op het product.
✎Hierbij verklaart Samsung dat het toestel PDP TV in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 19 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:27This page is intentionally
left blank.
[PD490-XN_ZF]BN68-03497E-02L04.indb 20 2011-03-07 오후 5:25:27
E-MANUAL
Imaginez les possibilités
Merci d'avoir acheté ce produit Samsung.
Afin de bénéficier d'un service plus complet,
veuillez enregistrer votre produit à l'adresse
www.samsung.com/register
Modèle ________ N° de série____________Contenu
Canal
• Utilisation du bouton INFO
(Guide Now & Next) 3
• Utilisation du menu Canal 4
• Utilisation des chaînes 14
• Mémorisation des chaînes 20
• Utilisation des chaînes (Satellite) 27
• Mémorisation de chaînes (Satellite) 32
• Autres fonctionnalités 46
Fonctions de base
• Changement du Mode Image prédéfini 48
• Réglage des paramètres de l’image 49
• Changement de la taille de l’image 50
• Modification des options d’image 54
• Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC 61
• Changement du mode Son prédéfini 65
• Réglage des paramètres sonores 66
Préférence
• Connexion à un réseau câblé 76
• Configuration du réseau 80
• Connexion à un réseau sans fil 87
• Réglage de l'heure 111
• Verrouillage des programmes 119
• Solutions économiques 122
• Incrustation d'image (PIP) 124
• Autres fonctionnalités 127
• Menu Assistance 138
Fonctions avancées
• Utilisation de la fonction 3D 146
• A propos d’AllShare™ 158
• Configuration de la fonction AllShare™ 160
• Configuration d’Anynet+ 164
• Anynet+ 166
• Basculement entre des appareils Anynet+ 171
• Ecoute via un récepteur 173
• Résolution des problèmes Anynet+ 175
• Utilisation de Mon contenu 178
• Connexion d’un périphérique USB 179
• Affichage 184
• Vidéos 185
• Musique 191
• Photos 194
• Mon contenu
- Fonctions supplémentaires 196
Informations supplémentaires
• Fonction télétexte 200
• Résolution des problèmes 205
• Fente INTERFACE
COMMUNE pour les connexions 216
• Verrou antivol Kensington 219
• Licence 221▶
Français
❑ Utilisation du bouton INFO (Guide Now & Next)
L’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et
vidéo.
Le Guide Now & Next affiche des informations quotidiennes sur les programmes
de télévision en fonction de l’heure de diffusion.
● Faites défiler à l’aide des boutons l, r pour afficher des informations sur le
programme de votre choix, tout en regardant la chaîne actuelle.
● Faites défiler à l’aide des boutons u, d pour afficher des informations sur
d’autres chaînes. Si vous souhaitez accéder à la chaîne sélectionnée, appuyez
sur le bouton ENTERE.
Canal
, Life On Venus Avenue
Non classé
Aucune information détaillée. a Information
18:11 Jeu 6 Jan
18:00 ~ 6:00
abc1
TV TNT
15◀ ▶
Français
❑ Utilisation du menu Canal
O MENUm → Assistance → Accueil contenu → ENTERE
Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT pour sélectionner Regarder TV, puis
sélectionner le menu que vous souhaitez utiliser. Chaque écran s’affiche.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
Regarder TV
Guide
Gestionnaire prog.
Liste des chaînes
Gestion chaînes
Mon contenu Source◀ ▶
Français
■ Guide
Les informations du Guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par
les diffuseurs.
Les programmes planifiés fournis par les diffuseurs vous permettent de planifier
les émissions que vous souhaitez regarder, de telle sorte que le téléviseur change
automatiquement de chaîne à l’heure indiquée. Des entrées de programmes
peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison de l’état d’une chaîne.◀ ▶
Français
Utilisation de la fonction Channel View (Vue chaînes)
a Rouge (Gest. prog): Affiche le
Gestionnaire prog..
b Vert (-24 heures): Affiche la liste
des programmes qui seront diffusés
dans les 24 heures.
{ Jaune (+24 heures): Affiche la liste
des programmes qui seront diffusés
dans plus de 24 heures. ● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
a Gest. prog { +24 heures } Mode CH ; Information k Page E Regarder
TV TNT 05.1 Globo HD
TELA QUENTE (HD)
10:05 pm - 12:10 pm
10
DESVENTURAS EM SERIE (HD)
Auj.
Guide 16:02 Mar 19 Juil
Vue chaînes - Toutes les chaînes
Programmes resume at 06:00
Home and...
Aucune information.
QVC Selection
Aucune information.
04 Globo HD
05 DiscoveryH&L
06 TV GloboSD
07 price-drop.tv
08 QVC
09 R4DTT
Tine Team
Aucune information. Fiv... Dark Angel
American Chopper
16:00 16:30 17:00 17:30◀ ▶
Français
} Bleu (Mode CH): Permet de sélectionner le type des chaînes à afficher dans la
fenêtre Channel View.
; Information: Affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné.
k Page: Permet de passer à la page suivante ou précédente.
ERegarder: Si vous sélectionnez le programme en cours, vous pouvez le regarder.
/ si vous sélectionnez le programme suivant, vous pouvez le réserver.◀ ▶
Français
■ Gestionnaire prog.
O CONTENT → Gestionnaire prog. → ENTERE
Vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une chaîne que vous avez réservée.
Utilisation de la fonction Rappel programme
Vous pouvez programmer l’affichage automatique d’une chaîne déterminée à l’heure
prévue. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, vous devez régler l’heure.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Gestionnaire prog..
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour ajouter un programme à planifier
manuellement. L’écran Rappel programme s’affiche.◀ ▶
Français
3. Appuyez sur les boutons l / r / u / d pour définir Antenne, Canal, Répétition,
Date ou Heure démarrage.
● Antenne: Sélectionnez la source d’antenne de votre choix.
● Canal: sélectionnez la chaîne de votre choix.
● Répétition: Sélectionnez Une fois, Manuel, Sam~Dim, Lun~Ven ou Quotid.
pour définir l’option suivant vos besoins. Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous
pouvez définir le jour de votre choix.
N Le symbole c indique que la date est sélectionnée.
● Date: permet de définir la date de votre choix.
N Cette option est disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez Une fois sous
Répétition.◀ ▶
Français
● Heure démarrage: Vous pouvez définir l’heure de début de votre choix.
N Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour accéder aux Infos détaillées. L’écran Infos
détaillées vous offre la possibilité de modifier ou d’annuler des informations
réservées.
● Annuler progr.: Permet d’annuler une émission que vous avez réservée.
● Editer: Permet de modifier une émission que vous avez réservée.
● Retour: Permet de revenir à l’écran précédent.◀ ▶
Français
■ Liste des chaînes
Vous pouvez afficher toutes les chaînes
recherchées.
O Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche CH
LIST de la télécommande, l’écran Liste
des chaînes s’affiche.
O Utilisation des boutons de fonctionnement
dans la Liste des chaînes.
● a Rouge (Antenne): Sélectionnez la source d’antenne de votre choix.
N l’option peut varier en fonction des modèles.
● { Jaune (Vue progr. / Vue chaînes): Affiche le programme lorsque la chaîne
numérique est sélectionnée. Revient à l’affichage des chaînes.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
Liste des chaînes
Tous
Hertzien a Antenne { Vue progr. L Mode CH E Regarder k Page
6 M6
9 W9
W9 MUSIC
11 NT1
800 24H TVE
801 arte
802 ATV
803 BBC
804 BBC
805 BBC◀ ▶
Français
● l r Mode CH / Canal: permet d’accéder au type de chaînes que vous
souhaitez afficher sur l’écran Liste des chaînes / Permet de changer de
chaîne.
N l’option peut varier en fonction du pays.
● ERegarder / Information: permet de regarder la chaîne sélectionnée /
affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné.
● k Page: permet de passer à la page suivante ou précédente.◀ ▶
Français
Utilisation de la fonction de rappel de programme dans la liste des chaînes
(chaînes numériques uniquement)
Lorsque vous définissez l’option Rappel programme dans Liste des chaînes, vous
pouvez uniquement définir le programme sur Vue progr..
1. Appuyez sur le bouton CH LIST, puis sélectionnez la chaîne numérique de votre
choix.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton { (Vue progr.).
3. Appuyez sur les boutons u / d pour sélectionner le programme de votre choix,
puis appuyez sur ENTEREInformation.
4. Sélectionnez Rappel programme, et appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE lorsque
vous avez terminé.
N Pour annuler la fonction Rappel programme, suivez les étapes 1 à 3. Sélectionnez
Annuler progr..◀ ▶
Français
❑ Utilisation des chaînes
■ Gestion chaînes
O CONTENT → Gestion chaînes→
ENTERE
Modifiez la chaîne favorite et sélectionnez
ensuite Supprimer, Désélectionner tout ou
Sélectionner tout. Vous pouvez modifier le
nom de la chaîne uniquement pour les chaînes
analogiques.
● L’image affi chée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
Gestion chaînes Tous
Elément sélectionné: 0 Numéro chaîne
Page 2/3
Hertzien a Antenne } Trier par k Page E Sélectionner T Outils R Retour◀ ▶
Français
● ( ) Chaînes: Sélectionnez une chaîne dans Tous, TV, Radio, Donn/autre, et
Analogique.. Modifiez les paramètres de l’antenne ou des chaînes à l’aide des
menus situés dans le coin supérieur droit de l’écran.
● ( ) Favoris 1 sur 5: Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites..
N Utilisation des boutons de couleur avec la fonction Gestion chaînes.
● a Rouge (Antenne): Sélectionnez la source d’antenne de votre choix.
● } Bleu (Trier par): permet de changer l’ordre des chaînes classées par nom
ou par numéro.◀ ▶
Français
Icônes d’affichage de l’état des chaînes
Icône Opérations
a Chaîne analogique.
c Chaîne sélectionnée.
F Chaîne définie comme favorite.
Menu d’options Gestion chaînes t
Réglez chaque chaîne à l’aide des options du menu Gestion chaînes (Regarder,
Ajouter aux favoris / Modif. favoris, Verr / Déverr, Modif. nom de chaîne, Modif.
num. chaîne, Supprimer, Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout). Les options du
menu peuvent varier en fonction de l’état de la chaîne.◀ ▶
Français
1. Sélectionnez une chaîne et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton TOOLS.
2. Sélectionnez une fonction et modifiez ses réglages.
● Regarder: permet de regarder la chaîne sélectionnée.
● Ajouter aux favoris / Modif. favoris: permet de définir comme favorites les
chaînes que vous regardez souvent / Permet d’ajouter ou de retirer les chaînes
sélectionnées de Favoris 1 sur 5.
1. Sélectionnez Ajouter aux favoris / Modif. favoris, puis appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
N Si la chaîne a déjà été ajoutée comme favorite, l’option Modif. favoris
s’affiche.◀ ▶
Français
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Favoris 1 sur 5 et
appuyez ensuite sur OK.
N Vous pouvez affecter une chaîne Favoris qui sera incluse dans la liste
Favoris 1 sur 5.
● Verr / Déverr: vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu’elle ne puisse pas être
sélectionnée ni visualisée.
N Cette fonction n’est disponible que si l’option Verr. chaîne est définie sur
Activé.◀ ▶
Français
● Modifi. nom de chaîne (chaînes analogiques uniquement): vous permet d’attribuer
votre propre nom à la chaîne.
N Cette fonction n’est pas prise en charge dans toutes les régions.
● Modif. num. chaîne: vous pouvez modifier le numéro en appuyant sur les touches
numériques souhaitées.
N Cette fonction n’est pas prise en charge dans toutes les régions.
● Supprimer: vous pouvez supprimer une chaîne afin d’afficher celles de votre
choix.
● Sélectionner tout: permet de sélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des
chaînes.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Mémorisation des chaînes
N MENUm → Canal → ENTERE
■
N
Antenne
l’option peut varier en fonction du pays. t
Avant que votre téléviseur ne puisse commencer à mémoriser les chaînes
disponibles, vous devez spécifier le type de la source du signal reliée au téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
■ Recherche automatique
N Il est possible que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne
correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels. Si une
chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr. chaîne, la fenêtre de saisie du code
PIN s’affiche.◀ ▶
Français
● Antennes: sélectionnez la source d’antenne à mémoriser. l’option peut varier
en fonction du pays.
● Numér. et Anal. / Numérique / Analogique: permet de sélectionner la source
des chaînes à mémoriser. Lors de la sélection de Câble → Numér. et Anal. ou
Numérique: fournit une valeur à rechercher pour les chaînes câblées.
● Mode de rech. (Complet / Réseau / Rapide): recherche toutes les chaînes
avec des stations de diffusion actives et les enregistre dans la mémoire du
téléviseur.
N Si vous sélectionnez Rapide, vous pouvez définir Réseau, ID réseau,
Fréquence, Modulation et Taux de symbole manuellement en appuyant sur
le bouton de la télécommande.
● Réseau (Auto. / Manuel): sélectionnez le mode de réglage ID réseau Auto. ou
Manuel.◀ ▶
Français
● ID réseau: si Réseau est défini sur Manuel, vous pouvez configurer un ID
réseau à l’aide des boutons numériques.
● Fréquence: affiche la fréquence correspondant à la chaîne (varie d’un pays à
l’autre).
● Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
● Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles.
■ Option de rech. de câble
(en fonction du pays)
Définit des options de recherche supplémentaires telles que la fréquence et le
débit de symboles pour une recherche sur réseau câblé.◀ ▶
Français
■ Recherche manuelle
Recherche manuellement une chaîne et la mémorise dans le téléviseur.
N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr. chaîne, la fenêtre de saisie du
code PIN s’affiche.
● Réglage des chaînes numériques: recherche une chaîne numérique.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton a pour sélectionner Nouveau.
N Lorsque vous sélectionnez Antenne → Hertzien: Canal, Fréquence,
Bande passante
N Lorsque vous sélectionnez Antenne → Câble: Fréquence, Modulation,
Taux de symbole◀ ▶
Français
2. Appuyez sur le bouton d pour sélectionner Rech.. Au terme de la
recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour.
● Réglage des chaînes analogiques: recherche une chaîne analogique.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton a pour sélectionner Nouveau.
2. Définissez les options Programme, Système de Couleur, Système
Sonore, Canal et Rech..
3. Appuyez sur le bouton d pour sélectionner Mémoriser. Au terme de la
recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour.◀ ▶
Français
N Mode Canal
● P (Mode Programme): à la fin du réglage, des numéros de position compris
entre P0 et P99 sont attribués aux stations de radiodiffusion de votre région.
Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant son
numéro de position.
● C (Mode canal Hertzien) / S (Mode canal Câble): ces deux modes vous
permettent de sélectionner une chaîne en entrant le numéro attribué à
chaque chaîne câblée ou station de radiodiffusion hertzienne.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Utilisation des chaînes (Satellite)
pour PDP 570
■ Gestion chaînes
O CONTENT → Gestion chaînes→
ENTERE
Ajoutez ou modifiez les chaînes favorites
et définissez les chaînes sur Supprimer,
Désélectionner tout ou Sélectionner tout.
Vous pouvez modifier le nom de la chaîne
uniquement pour les chaînes analogiques.
● L’image affi chée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
Gestion chaînes Tous
Elément sélectionné: 0 Numéro chaîne
Page 2/3
Hertzien a Antenne } Trier par k Page E Sélectionner T Outils R Retour◀ ▶
Français
● ( ) Chaînes: Sélectionnez une chaîne dans Tous, TV, Radio, Donn/autre et
Analogique. Modifiez les paramètres de l’antenne ou des chaînes à l’aide des
menus situés dans le coin supérieur droit de l’écran.
● ( ) Favoris 1 sur 5: Affiche les chaînes favorites .
N Utilisation des boutons de couleur avec la fonction Gestion chaînes.
● a Rouge (Antenne): Sélectionnez la source d’antenne de votre choix.
● } Bleu (Trier par): Permet de changer l’ordre des chaînes classées par
numéro ou par nom.◀ ▶
Français
Icônes d’affichage de l’état des chaînes
Icône Opérations
a Chaîne analogique.
c Chaîne sélectionnée.
F Chaîne définie comme favorite.
Menu d’options Gestion chaînes t
Réglez chaque chaîne à l’aide des options du menu Gestion chaînes (Regarder,
Ajouter aux favoris / Modif. favoris, Verr / Déverr, Modif. nom de chaîne, Modif.
num. chaîne, Supprimer, Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout). Les options du
menu peuvent varier en fonction de l’état de la chaîne.◀ ▶
Français
1. Sélectionnez une chaîne et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton TOOLS.
2. Sélectionnez une fonction et modifiez ses réglages.
● Regarder: permet de regarder la chaîne sélectionnée.
● Ajouter aux favoris / Modif. favoris: permet de définir comme favorites les
chaînes que vous regardez souvent.
1. Sélectionnez Ajouter aux favoris / Modif. favoris, puis appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
N Si la chaîne a déjà été ajoutée comme favorite, l’option Modif. favoris
s’affiche.◀ ▶
Français
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Favoris 1 sur 5, puis
appuyez sur le bouton OK.
N Vous pouvez affecter une chaîne favorite dans Favoris entre Favoris 1 sur 5.
● Supprimer: vous pouvez supprimer une chaîne afin d’afficher celles de votre
choix.
● Sélectionner tout: permet de sélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des
chaînes.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Mémorisation de chaînes (Satellite)
N MENUm → Canal → ENTERE
■ Antennet
N l’option peut varier en fonction du pays.
Avant que votre téléviseur ne puisse commencer à mémoriser les chaînes
disponibles, vous devez spécifier le type de la source du signal reliée au téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
■ Recherche automatique
● Recherche automatique
Recherche automatiquement une chaîne et la mémorise dans le téléviseur.
N Il est possible que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne
correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels. Si une
chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr. chaîne, la fenêtre de saisie du code
PIN s’affiche.
● Antennes: sélectionnez la source d’antenne à mémoriser. l’option peut varier
en fonction du pays.◀ ▶
Français
● Numér. et Anal. / Numérique / Analogique: permet de sélectionner la source
des chaînes à mémoriser. Lors de la sélection de Câble → Numér. et Anal. ou
Numérique : fournit une valeur à rechercher pour les chaînes câblées.
● Mode de rech. (Complet / Réseau / Rapide): recherche toutes les chaînes
avec des stations de diffusion actives et les enregistre dans la mémoire du
téléviseur.
N Si vous sélectionnez Rapide, vous pouvez définir Réseau, ID réseau,
Fréquence, Modulation et Taux de symbole manuellement en appuyant
sur le bouton de la télécommande.
● Réseau (Auto / Manuel): sélectionne le mode de réglage ID réseau Auto. ou
Manuel.
● ID réseau: si Réseau est défini sur Manuel, vous pouvez configurer un ID
réseau à l’aide des boutons numériques.◀ ▶
Français
● Fréquence: affiche la fréquence correspondant à la chaîne (varie d’un pays à
l’autre).
● Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
● Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles.
■ Option de rech. de câble
(En fonction du pays)
Définit des options de recherche supplémentaires, telles que la fréquence et le
taux de symbole pour une recherche sur un réseau câblé.◀ ▶
Français
– Fréq. de départ / Fréquence de fin.: définit la fréquence de début ou de fin
(varie d’un pays à l’autre).
– Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles.
– Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
● Mémorisation auto veille (Arrêt / Marche) pour l’Italie
: Permet ou rend infirme
l’auto-air pendant que la TV est dans le mode de secours.
● Réveil (1 hour later / 2 hours later / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00) pour l’Italie:
Sélectionne le programmateur pour la mise sous tension du téléviseur et le
balayage automatique des chaînes.◀ ▶
Français
■ Recherche manuelle
Recherche manuellement une chaîne et la mémorise dans le téléviseur.
N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr. chaîne, la fenêtre de saisie du
code PIN s’affiche.
● Transpondeur: permet de sélectionner le transpondeur à l’aide des boutons
haut/bas.
● Mode Recherche: permet de mémoriser soit les chaînes gratuites, soit toutes
les chaînes.
● Rech. réseau (Désactiver / Activer): recherche d’un réseau à l’aide des
boutons haut/bas.◀ ▶
Français
● Qualité du signal: permet d’afficher l’état actuel du signal de diffusion.
N Les informations concernant un satellite et son transpondeur sont sujettes à
des modifications selon les conditions de diffusion.
N Une fois le paramétrage terminé, allez sur Rechercher et appuyez sur le
bouton ENTERE. La recherche des chaînes commence.◀ ▶
Français
■ Système satellite
L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. La
fonction système satellite est disponible lorsque l’option Antenne est définie sur
Satellite. Avant d’exécuter la fonction Mémorisation Auto, définissez système
satellite. La recherche des chaînes est alors exécutée normalement.
● Sélection du satellite: vous pouvez choisir les satellites pour ce téléviseur.
● Alimentation du LNB (Arrêt / Activé) : permet d’activer ou de désactiver
l’alimentation du LNB.◀ ▶
Français
● Réglages LNB: configure l’équipement extérieur.
– Transpondeur: permet de sélectionner le transpondeur à l’aide des boutons
haut / bas.
– Mode DiSEqC: permet de sélectionner le mode DiSEqC pour le LNB
sélectionné.
– Osc. LNB plus bas: permet de régler les oscillateurs LNB sur une
fréquence inférieure.
– Osc. LNB plus hauts: permet de régler les oscillateurs LNB sur une
fréquence supérieure.
– Tone 22 kHz (Arrêt / Activé / Auto.): permet de sélectionner la tonalité
22 KHz en fonction du type de LNB. Dans le cas d’un LNB universel, elle
doit être définie sur Auto.
– Qualité du signal: permet d’afficher l’état actuel du signal de diffusion.◀ ▶
Français
● Param. SatCR/Unicable: Configurez l’installation à câble unique.
N Cette fonction n’est pas prise en charge dans toutes les régions.
– SatCR/Unicable: Activez ou désactivez la prise en charge de l’installation à
câble unique.
– Numéro de logement: Sélectionnez le numéro de logement de l’utilisateur
SatCR pour ce récepteur.
– Fréquence du logement: Entrez la fréquence appropriée pour recevoir le
signal de SatCR.
– Détec. fréq. logement: Détectez automatiquement la fréquence du signal
pour le numéro de logement sélectionné.
– Vérif. fréq. logement: Vérifiez que la fréquence indiquée correspond au
logement sélectionné.◀ ▶
Français
● Réglages du positionneur: Configure le positionneur de l’antenne.
Positionneur (Activé / Arrêt): Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le contrôle du
positionneur.
Type de posit. (USALS / DiSEqC 1.2): Permet de définir le type de
positionneur entre DiSEqC 1.2 et USALS (Universal Satellite Automatic Location
System).
– Longitude: Définit la longitude de mon emplacement.
– Latitude: Définit la latitude de mon emplacement.
– Réglages longitude satellite: Règle la longitude des satellites définis par
l’utilisateur.◀ ▶
Français
Mode Utilisateur: Permet de définir la position de l’antenne satellite en fonction
de chaque satellite. Si vous mémorisez la position actuelle de l’antenne satellite
en fonction d’un satellite donné, lorsque le signal de ce satellite est requis,
l’antenne satellite peut se placer dans la position prédéfinie.
– Satellite: Permet de sélectionner le satellite pour lequel la position doit être
définie.
– Transpondeur: Permet de sélectionner un transpondeur dans la liste pour
la réception du signal.
– Mode Déplacement: Permet de choisir entre le mode de déplacement
individuel ou continu.
– Taille des pas: Permet de régler les degrés de la taille des pas pour la
rotation de l’antenne. L’option Taille des pas est disponible lorsque Mode
Déplacement est défini sur Pas.◀ ▶
Français
– Aller à une pos. enregistrée: Permet de faire pivoter l’antenne jusqu’à la
position de satellite enregistrée.
– Position de l’antenne: Permet d’ajuster et de mémoriser la position de
l’antenne pour le satellite sélectionné.
– Mémoriser la position actuelle: Permet de mémoriser la position actuelle
comme limite de positionneur sélectionnée.
– Qualité du signal: Permet d’afficher l’état actuel du signal de diffusion.◀ ▶
Français
Mode Installateur: Permet de fixer des limites à l’étendue des mouvements
de l’antenne satellite ou de réinitialiser la position. En règle générale, le guide
d’installation utilise cette fonction.
– Position limite (Est / Ouest): Permet de sélectionner la direction de la limite
du positionneur.
– Position de l’antenne: Permet d’ajuster et d’enregistrer la position de
l’antenne pour le satellite sélectionné.
– Mémoriser la position actuelle: Permet de mémoriser la position actuelle
comme Limite du positionneur sélectionnée.
– Réinitialiser la position: Déplace l’antenne jusqu’à la position de référence.
– Redéfinir limite positionneur: Autorise l’antenne à effectuer un arc
complet.
● Réinit. tous les paramètres (OK / Annuler): Toutes les valeurs initiales des
paramètres du satellite seront réinitialisées.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Autres fonctionnalités
O MENUm → Canal → ENTERE
■ Réglage fin
(Chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Si la réception est nette, vous n’avez pas besoin d’effectuer un réglage fin du
canal, car cette opération s’effectue automatiquement pendant la recherche
et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou déformé, vous pouvez effectuer
manuellement un réglage fin du canal. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou vers la droite
jusqu’à ce que l’image soit nette.◀ ▶
Français
N Les paramètres s’appliquent à la chaîne regardée actuellement.
N Les chaînes réglées et mémorisées sont repérées par un astérisque (*) placé à
droite de leur numéro dans la bannière des chaînes.
N Pour réinitialiser le réglage précis, sélectionnez Réinit..
■ Transfert de liste des chaînes
L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
Importe ou exporte la carte des chaînes. Vous devez connecter un périphérique de
stockage USB pour utiliser cette fonction.
● Importer depuis le périphérique USB: Permet d’importer une liste de chaînes
depuis un périphérique USB.
● Exporter vers le périphérique USB: Permet d’exporter la liste des chaînes
vers le périphérique USB. Cette fonction est disponible lorsqu’un périphérique
USB est connecté.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Changement du Mode Image prédéfini
O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE
■ Mode Image
Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez.
N Lorsqu’une source d’entrée est définie sur PC, seules les options Standard et
Loisirs sont disponibles pour le Mode Image.
● Dynamique: adapté à un environnement lumineux.
● Standard: adapté à un environnement normal.
● Cinéma: adapté au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre.
● Loisirs: adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo.
N cette option n’est disponible que si vous connectez un PC.
Fonctions de base◀ ▶
Français
❑ Réglage des paramètres de l’image
O MENUm → Image → ENTERE
■ Lum. Cellules / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R)
Votre téléviseur dispose de plusieurs options de réglage pour le contrôle de la
qualité d’image.
N Lorsque vous modifiez les paramètres Lum. Cellules, Contraste, Luminosité,
Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R) l’affichage écran change en conséquence.
N En mode PC, vous pouvez uniquement apporter des modifications aux options
Lum. Cellules, Contraste, Luminosité et Netteté.
N Les paramètres peuvent être définis et mémorisés pour chaque appareil
externe connecté au téléviseur.
N La réduction de la luminosité de l’image se traduit par une consommation
d’énergie moindre.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Changement de la taille de l’image
O MENUm → Image → Réglage de l’écran → ENTERE
■ Réglage de l’écran
● Format de l’image: il se peut que votre décodeur câble / récepteur satellite
dispose de son propre jeu de formats d’écran. Il est toutefois vivement conseillé
d’utiliser le mode 16:9.
16:9 Auto: règle automatiquement la taille de l’image sur le format 16:9.
16:9: règle l’image en mode large, c’est-à-dire en 16:9.
Zoom large: Affiche les images au format 4/3 au 16/9 en rognant haut et bas
d’image.
N Règle la Position à l’aide des boutons u, d.◀ ▶
Français
Zoom: Etire l’image au format 16:9 verticalement.
N Règle la Zoom et Position à l’aide des boutons u et d.
4:3: Met l’image au format 4:3.
N Ne regardez pas un film au format 4:3 pendant une période prolongée. Les
traces de bordures situées sur la gauche, sur la droite et au centre de l’écran
peuvent donner lieu au phénomène de rémanence (brûlure d’écran) non
couvert par la garantie.
Adapter à l’écran: Affiche l’intégralité de l’image sans coupure lors de l’entrée
de signaux HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p).◀ ▶
Français
N Remarque
● Les options de format de l’image peuvent varier en fonction de la source
d’entrée.
● Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné.
● En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés.
● Les paramètres peuvent être définis et mémorisés pour chaque appareil
externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
● Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter à écran avec l’entrée HDMI 720p, une
ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, comme c’est le cas
avec la fonction Overscan.◀ ▶
Français
● 4:3 Taille écran (16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3): disponible uniquement
lorsque le format de l’image est défini sur 16:9 Auto. Vous pouvez déterminer
le format d’image souhaité sur 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou sur la taille
d’origine. Chaque pays européen impose une taille d’image différente.
N Non disponible en mode PC, Composant et HDMI.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Modification des options d’image
■ Paramètres avancés
O MENUm → Image → Paramètres avancés → ENTERE
(L’option Paramètres avancés est disponible dans le mode Standard / Cinéma)
Comparés aux modèles précédents, les nouveaux téléviseurs Samsung offrent une
image plus précise.
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Gamma et Balance
blancs.◀ ▶
Français
● Nuance de noir (Arrêt / Sombre / Plus
sombre / Le plus sombre): sélectionnez le
niveau de noir afin de régler la profondeur
d’écran.
● Contraste Dyn. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen /
Elevé): permet de régler le contraste de
l’écran.
● Gamma: permet de régler l’intensité des
couleurs primaires.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du
modèle.
Paramètres avancés
Nuance de noir : Arret r
Contraste Dyn. : Moyen
Gamma : 0
RVB uniquement : Arret
Espace de couleur : Natif
Balance blancs
Carnation : 0
d
U Déplacer EEntrer R Retour◀ ▶
Français
● RVB uniquement (Arrêt / Rouge / Vert / Bleu): Affiche les couleurs Rouge,
Vert et Bleu afin de permettre un réglage précis de la teinte et de la saturation.
● Espace de couleur (Auto. / Natif): permet de régler la gamme des couleurs
disponibles pour créer l’image.
● Balance blancs: permet de régler la température des couleurs pour que l’image
soit plus naturelle.
Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu: permet de régler la profondeur de chaque
couleur (rouge, vert, bleu).
Régl. Rouge / Régl. vert / Régl. bleu: permet de régler la luminosité de
chaque couleur (rouge, vert, bleu).
Réin.: rétablit les paramètres de balance des blancs par défaut.◀ ▶
Français
● Carnation: Accentue la rougeur de la carnation.
● Netteté des contours (Arrêt / Activé): fait ressortir les contours des objets.
● Lumin./Mouvement (Arrêt / Activé): permet de réduire la consommation
d’électricité en contrôlant la luminosité.
N Lorsque vous modifiez une valeur de Contraste, Lumin./Mouvement est
défini sur Arrêt.◀ ▶
Français
■ Options d’image
O MENUm → Image → Options d’image → ENTERE
N En mode PC, vous pouvez uniquement
apporter des modifications aux options
Nuance Coul.
● Nuance Coul. (Froide / Standard /
Chaude1 / Chaude2)
N Les options Chaude1 ou Chaude2 ne
sont activées que si le mode d’image est
Dynamique.
N Les paramètres peuvent être définis et
mémorisés pour chaque appareil externe connecté à une entrée du
téléviseur.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du
modèle.
Options d’image
Nuance Coul. : Standard r
Filtre Bruit num. : Auto.
Filtre Bruit MPEG : Auto.
Niv. noir HDMI : Normal
Mode Film : Arrêt
U Déplacer EEntrer R Retour◀ ▶
Français
● Filtre Bruit num. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto. / Visualisation auto):
si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu par votre téléviseur est faible, vous pouvez
activer la fonction Filtre Bruit num. pour faciliter la réduction d’images
fantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran.
N Lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu’à obtention
de la meilleure image possible.
● Visualisation auto: Lors du changement des chaînes analogiques, il affiche
l’intensité du signal.
N Disponible uniquement pour les chaînes analogiques.
N Lorsque la barre est verte, vous recevez le meilleur signal possible.
● Filtre Bruit MPEG (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto.): Réduit le bruit MPEG
pour améliorer la qualité de l’image.◀ ▶
Français
● Niv. noir HDMI (Bas / Normal): permet de choisir le niveau de noir pour régler
la profondeur de l’écran.
N Disponible en mode HDMI (RVB) uniquement.
● Mode Film (Arrêt / Auto.1 / Auto.2 / Cinema Smooth pour les PDP 550
): règle
le téléviseur de sorte qu’il détecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de
cinéma en provenance de toutes les sources et adapte l’image afin d’obtenir
une qualité optimale. La fonction Cinema Smooth n’est activée que lorsqu’un
signal HDMI 24 Hz est en entrée.
N Disponible en modes TV, AV, COMPOSANT (480i / 1080i) et HDMI (1080i).
■ Réinit. param. img (OK / Annuler)
Rétablit les paramètres par défaut du mode d’image actuel.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC
Réglez le mode d’entrée sur PC.
■ Réglage Automatique
O MENUm → Image → Réglage Automatique → ENTERE
Cette option permet de régler les positions / valeurs de fréquence et d’affiner
automatiquement les paramètres.
N Non disponible en cas de connexion à l’aide d’un câble HDMI vers DVI.◀ ▶
Français
■ Réglage écran PC
O MENUm → Image → Réglage de l’écran → Réglage écran PC →
ENTERE
● Régl. Base / Regl. Préc: élimine ou réduit les parasites visuels. Si vous ne
pouvez pas éliminer ces parasites au moyen d’un réglage précis uniquement,
réglez la fréquence (Régl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau un
réglage précis. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de
l’image pour l’aligner au centre de l’écran.
● Position: réglez la position de l’écran du PC à l’aide des touches de direction (u
/ d / l / r).
● Réinitialiser Image: rétablit les paramètres d’image par défaut.◀ ▶
Français
Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d’ordinateur (PC)
Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP)
En fonction de la version de Windows et de la carte vidéo, il se peut que les écrans
de votre PC présentent un aspect différent. Dans ce cas, les mêmes informations de
paramétrage de base seront presque toujours d’application. Dans le cas contraire,
contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou votre revendeur Samsung.
1. Cliquez sur ‘Panneau de configuration’ dans le menu Démarrer de Windows.
2. Cliquez sur “Apparence et thèmes” dans le “Panneau de configuration”. Une boîte
de dialogue s’ouvre alors.
3. Cliquez sur “Affichage” et une boîte de dialogue apparaît.◀ ▶
Français
4. Naviguez vers l’onglet “Paramètres” dans la boîte de dialogue.
● S’il existe une option de fréquence verticale dans votre boîte de dialogue des
paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est “60” ou “60 Hz”. Sinon, cliquez
sur “OK” et quittez la boîte de dialogue.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Changement du mode Son prédéfini
■ Mode Son
● Standardt: sélectionne le mode son normal.
● Musique: accentue la musique par rapport aux voix.
● Cinéma: offre le meilleur son pour les films.
● Voix claire: accentue les voix par rapport aux autres sons.
● Amplifier: augmente l’intensité du son aigu pour garantir une meilleure écoute
aux personnes malentendantes.
N Si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Ht-parl ext est désactivé.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Réglage des paramètres sonores
O MENUm → Son → Sound Effect →ENTERE
■ Effet sonore
● SRS TruSurround HD (Arrêt / Activé)
(mode de son standard uniquement)
Cette fonction garantit un son surround virtuel 5.1 canaux par le biais de deux
haut-parleurs grâce à la technologie HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function).
N Si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Ht-parl ext, SRS
TruSurround HD est désactivé.◀ ▶
Français
● SRS TruDialog (Arrêt / Activé)
(mode de son standard uniquement)
Cette fonction permet d’accentuer l’intensité d’une voix par rapport au fond
musical ou aux effets sonores, de manière à rendre les dialogues plus clairs.
N Si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Ht-parl ext, SRS TruDialog
est désactivé.◀ ▶
Français
● Egaliseur
Cette fonction permet de régler le mode de son (mode de son standard
uniquement).
– Balance G/D: règle la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche.
– 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (réglage de la bande passante): règle le
niveau des fréquences de bande passante spécifiques.
– Réinit.: rétablit les paramètres par défaut de l’égaliseur.
N Si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Ht-parl ext, Egaliseur est
désactivé.◀ ▶
Français
■ Options diffusion du son
● Langue audio
(chaînes numériques uniquement)
Permet de modifier la valeur par défaut des langues audio.
N La langue disponible peut varier en fonction de l’émission.
● Format Audio
(chaînes numériques uniquement)
Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur
audio, un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de
décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas,
utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur TV.◀ ▶
Français
N L’option Format Audio peut varier en fonction de l’émission. Le son Dolby
Digital 5.1 est disponible uniquement en cas de connexion d’un haut parleur
externe au moyen d’un câble optique.
● Description audio
(non disponible dans toutes les régions) (chaînes numériques uniquement)
Cette fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (AD) lorsqu’il est
envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur.
N Description audio (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive la fonction de
description audio.
N Volume: permet de régler le volume de description audio.◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètre supp.
(chaînes numériques uniquement)
● Niveau Audio DTV (MPEG / HE-AAC): cette fonction vous permet de régler le
niveau sonore souhaité (à savoir l’un des signaux reçus lors d’une émission de
télévision numérique).
N En fonction du type de signal de radiodiffusion, les options MPEG / HEAAC peuvent être définies sur une valeur comprise entre -10 dB et 0 dB.
N Pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume, réglez ces valeurs entre 0 et -10,
respectivement.◀ ▶
Français
● Sortie SPDIF: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) permet d’offrir un son
numérique et de réduire ainsi les interférences vers les haut-parleurs et divers
appareils numériques, tels qu’un lecteur DVD.
Format Audio: Vous pouvez sélectionner le format de sortie audio numérique
(SPDIF).
N Le format de sortie audio numérique (SPDIF) peut varier en fonction de la
source d’entrée.
Retard Audio: Permet de corriger les problèmes de synchronisation audiovidéo, lorsque vous regardez la télévision ou une vidéo, et d’écouter une sortie
audio numérique à l’aide d’un appareil externe tel qu’un récepteur AV (0 ms ~
250 ms).◀ ▶
Français
● Comp Dolby Digital (Line / RF): cette fonction réduit la différence de niveau
sonore entre un signal Dolby Digital et d’autre (à savoir, Audio MPEG, HE-AAC,
Son ATV).
N Sélectionnez Line pour obtenir un son dynamique et RF pour réduire la
différence de niveau sonore entre l’autre format audio.
Line: Permet de définir le niveau de sortie des signaux supérieurs ou inférieurs
à -31 dB (référence) sur -20 dB ou -31 dB.
RF: Permet de définir le niveau de sortie des signaux supérieurs ou inférieurs à
-20 dB (référence) sur -10 dB ou -20 dB.◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètres haut-parleur
● Sélection Haut-parleur (Ht-parl ext / Haut-parleur TV): Lorsque le récepteur
Audio externe est utilisé en passant par SPDIF, un effet d’écho peut se produire
en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal
et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, réglez le téléviseur sur Ht-parl ext.
N Lorsque l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Haut-parleur
ext, les boutons de volume et MUTE ne sont pas opérationnels et les
paramètres sonores sont limités.
N Lorsque Sélection Haut-parleur est défini sur Haut-parleur ext.
● Haut-parleur TV: Arrêt, Haut-parleur ext: Activé◀ ▶
Français
N Lorsque Sélection Haut-parleur est défini sur Haut-parleur TV.
● Haut-parleur TV: Activé, Haut-parleur ext: Activé
N En l’absence de signal vidéo, les deux haut-parleurs sont coupés.
● Volume auto (Arrêt / Normal / Nuit): Pour équilibrer le niveau de volume sur
chaque canal, définissez cette option sur Normal.
Nuit: Ce mode propose un meilleur son que celui du mode Normal, ne faisant
presque aucun bruit. Il s’avère particulièrement utile pendant la nuit.
■ Réinit. son (OK / Annuler)
Cette fonction permet de rétablir tous les paramètres sonores par défaut.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Connexion à un réseau câblé
Pour les séries PDP 550 et 570
Vous pouvez connecter votre téléviseur au réseau local de trois manières
différentes:
● En connectant le port LAN situé à l'arrière du téléviseur à un modem externe à
l'aide d'un câble LAN. Voir le schéma ci-dessous.
Préférence
Connecteur modem mural
LAN
Câble modem Câble LAN
Modem externe
(ADSL / VDSL / TV par câble)◀ ▶
Français
● En connectant le port LAN situé à l'arrière du téléviseur à un routeur IP
connecté, à son tour, à un modem externe. Utilisez le câble LAN pour la
connexion. Voir le schéma ci-dessous.
Connecteur
modem mural LAN
Câble modem Câble LAN Câble LAN
Modem externe
(ADSL / VDSL / TV par câble)
Routeur IP
(avec serveur DHCP)◀ ▶
Français
● En fonction de la configuration de votre réseau, il se peut que vous puissiez
connecter directement le port LAN situé à l'arrière du téléviseur à une prise
réseau murale à l'aide d'un câble LAN. Voir le schéma ci-dessous. Nous
attirons votre attention sur le fait que la prise murale est connectée à un
modem ou routeur situé en un autre point de la maison.
Connecteur LAN mural LAN
Câble LAN◀ ▶
Français
● Si vous possédez un réseau dynamique, vous devez utiliser un modem
ou routeur ADSL prenant en charge le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol). Les modems et routeurs de ce type fournissent
automatiquement l'adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et les
valeurs DNS dont votre téléviseur a besoin pour accéder à Internet. Aucune
saisie manuelle n'est donc requise. La plupart des réseaux domestiques sont
de type dynamique.
Certains réseaux nécessitent une adresse IP statique. Si tel est votre cas,
vous devez saisir manuellement l'adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la
passerelle et les valeurs DNS dans l'écran de configuration câble de votre
téléviseur lors de la configuration de la connexion réseau. Pour obtenir ces
données, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. Si vous disposez d'un
ordinateur Windows, vous pouvez également utiliser ce dernier pour obtenir
ces paramètres.
N Si votre réseau nécessite une adresse IP statique, vous pouvez utiliser un
modem ADSL prenant en charge le protocole DHCP. En effet, les modems
de ce type vous permettent également d'utiliser des adresses IP statiques.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Configuration du réseau
Pour la série PDP 550 / 570
■ Paramètres réseau
O MENUm → Réseau → Paramètres réseau→ ENTERE
Définissez la connexion réseau de manière à utiliser divers services Internet, tels
que et AllShare, ou encore procéder à la mise à niveau du logiciel.
■ Etat du réseau
O MENUm → Réseau → Etat du réseau→ ENTERE
Vous pouvez vérifier l'état du réseau actuel et de la connexion Internet.◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètres AllShare
O MENUm → Réseau → Paramètres AllShare→ ENTERE
Sélectionne l'utilisation de fonctions média sur le réseau.
■ Paramètre réseau (Auto.)
Utilisez l'option de configuration automatique du réseau lors de la connexion du
téléviseur à un réseau prenant en charge le protocole DHCP. Pour configurer
automatiquement la connexion réseau par câble de votre téléviseur, procédez
comme suit :◀ ▶
Français
Procédure de configuration automatique
1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau.
Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions de la
section Paramètres réseau.
2. Sélectionnez l'option Câble.
3. L'écran de test du réseau s'affiche et la
configuration du réseau est effectuée.
U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètres réseau
Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau.
Câble
Sans fil (général)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Connexion au réseau par câble réseau. Vérifiez que
le câble réseau est correctement branché. ◀ ▶
Français
N Si la configuration automatique échoue,
vérifiez la connexion du port LAN.
N Si les valeurs de connexion réseau sont
introuvables ou si vous souhaitez définir
la connexion manuellement, définissez
cette option sur Manuel. Reportez-vous
à la section "Procédure de configuration
manuelle"
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
a Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètre réseau
La connexion au réseau sans fil et à Internet est maintenant terminée.
Réessayer OK
Adresse MAC 00:40:30:30:20:10
Adresse IP 192.168.10.21
Masque ss-réseau 255.255.255.0
Passerelle 192.168.10.1
Serveur DNS 203.248.252.2
La connexion à Internet a été établie avec succès.
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes lors de l'utilisation du service Internet,
contactez votre fournisseur d'accès.
Param. IP◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètre réseau (Manuel)
Utilisez l'option de configuration manuelle du réseau lors de la connexion du
téléviseur à un réseau qui nécessite une adresse IP statique.
Obtention des valeurs de connexion au réseau
Pour obtenir les valeurs de connexion au réseau sur la plupart des ordinateurs
Windows, procédez comme suit:
1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Réseau située dans le coin
inférieur droit de l'écran.
2. Cliquez sur Etat dans le menu contextuel.
3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Assistance dans la boîte de dialogue affichée.
4. Cliquez sur le bouton Détails dans l'onglet Assistance. Les valeurs de
connexion réseau sont affichées.◀ ▶
Français
Procédure de configuration automatique
Pour configurer manuellement la connexion réseau par câble de votre téléviseur,
procédez comme suit:
1. Suivez les étapes 1 et 2 de la procédure de
configuration automatique.
2. Sélectionnez Param. IP dans l'écran de
test du réseau.
3. Définissez Mode IP sur Manuel.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton d de la
télécommande pour accéder à l'Adresse IP
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètres IP
Config. prot. Internet : Manuel r
Adresse IP . . .
Masque ss-réseau . . .
Passerelle . . .
DNS : Manuel
Serveur DNS . . .
OK◀ ▶
Français
5. Entrez les valeurs Adresse IP, Masque ss-réseau, Passerelle et Serveur
DNS. Utilisez les touches numériques de votre télécommande pour saisir des
chiffres et les touches fléchées pour passer d'un champ de saisie à un autre.
6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, sélectionnez OK.
7. L'écran de test du réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Connexion à un réseau sans fil
Pour la série PDP 550 / 570
Pour établir une connexion sans fil entre le téléviseur et le réseau, vous avez
besoin d'un routeur ou d'un modem et d'un adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung
(WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, WIS10ABGN), que vous connectez à la prise USB
située sur le panneau latéral ou arrière du téléviseur. Voir l'illustration ci-dessous.
Connecteur LAN mural
Câble LAN
Wireless IP sharer
(router having DHCP server)
Adaptateur LAN
sans fil Samsung
Panneau arrière du
téléviseur◀ ▶
Français
L'adaptateur sans fil LAN Samsung est vendu séparément et est disponible
chez quelques revendeurs tels que les sites Ecommerce et Samsungparts.com.
L'adaptateur WLAN Samsung prend en charge les protocoles de communication
IEEE 802,11a/b/g et n. Samsung vous conseille d'utiliser le protocole IEEE 802,11n.
Si vous lisez une vidéo sur une connexion réseau, des saccades risquent d'apparaître.
N REMARQUE
● Vous devez employer l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung (WIS09ABGN,
WIS09ABGN2, WIS10ABGN) pour utiliser un réseau sans fil.◀ ▶
Français
● Pour utiliser un réseau sans fil, votre téléviseur doit être connecté à un dispositif
de partage IP sans fil (un routeur ou un modem). Si ce routeur prend en charge
le protocole DHCP, le téléviseur peut utiliser DHCP ou une adresse IP statique
pour se connecter au réseau sans fil.
● Sélectionnez un canal inutilisé pour le routeur IP sans fil. Si le canal affecté au
routeur IP sans fil est actuellement utilisé par un autre périphérique à proximité,
il y aura des interférences et des interruptions de communication.
● Si vous utilisez des paramètres de sécurité différents de ceux indiqués cidessous, le routeur ne fonctionnera pas avec le téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
● Si le mode Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802,11n est sélectionné et que
le type de cryptage est défini sur WEP, TKIP ou TKIP-AES (WPS2Mixed) pour
votre point d'accès, les téléviseurs Samsung ne prendront pas en charge la
connexion, conformément aux nouvelles spécifications de certification Wi-Fi.
● Si votre point d'accès prend en charge la norme WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup),
vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau via PBC (Push Button Configuration)
ou à l'aide d'un code PIN (Personal Identification Number). La fonction WPS
configurera automatiquement le SSID et la clé WPA dans ces deux modes.
● Si votre routeur, modem ou appareil n'est pas certifié, il risque de ne pas
pouvoir se connecter au téléviseur via l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung.◀ ▶
Français
● Assurez-vous que le téléviseur est hors tension avant de connecter l'adaptateur
LAN sans fil Samsung.
● Méthodes de connexion: vous pouvez configurer la connexion réseau sans fil
de six façons différentes.
– Configuration automatique (à l'aide de la fonction Recherche réseau
automatique)
– Configuration manuelle
– WPS(PBC)
– Ad Hoc
– One Foot Connection
– Plug & Access◀ ▶
Français
● L'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung peut ne pas être reconnu si vous utilisez
une connexion par hub USB ou par câble d'extension USB autre que le câble
fourni.
■ Paramètre réseau (Auto.)
La plupart des réseaux sans fil disposent d'un système de sécurité en option qui
oblige les périphériques qui y accèdent à transmettre un code de sécurité chiffré,
appelé Clé d'accès ou de sécurité. Cette clé de sécurité repose sur une phrase
de passe ; il s'agit généralement d'un mot ou d'une série de lettres et de chiffres
d'une longueur donnée que vous avez été invité à saisir lors de la configuration de
la sécurité de votre réseau sans fil. Si vous utilisez cette méthode de configuration
et qu'une clé de sécurité est définie pour votre réseau sans fil, vous devrez saisir la
phrase de phase lors de la procédure de configuration.◀ ▶
Français
Procédure de configuration automatique
1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau.
Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions de la
section Paramètres réseau.
2. Sélectionnez Sans fil.
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètres réseau
Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau.
Câble
Sans fil (général)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Configurez le réseau sans fil en sélectionnant votre routeur
sans fil. En fonction de sa configuration, il vous sera peut-
être demandé d'entrer une clé de sécurité.◀ ▶
Français
3. La fonction Réseau recherche les réseaux sans fil disponibles. Lorsque vous
avez terminé, la liste des réseaux disponibles s'affiche.
4. Dans la liste des réseaux, appuyez sur le bouton u ou d pour sélectionner un
réseau, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Si le point d'accès est caché (Invisible), vous devez sélectionner l'option
Ajouter réseau et entrer les valeurs Nom du réseau (SSID) et Code de
sécurité pour établir la connexion.
5. Si la fenêtre contextuelle Sécurité s'affiche, passez à l'étape 6. Si vous
sélectionnez le point d'accès dépourvu de sécurité, allez à l'étape 7.◀ ▶
Français
6. Si le point d'accès est sécurisé, entrez la
clé de sécurité (Sécurité ou Code PIN), puis
sélectionnez Terminé.
N Lors de la saisie de la clé de sécurité
(Sécurité ou Code PIN), utilisez les
touches u / d / l / r de votre
télécommande pour sélectionner des
chiffres/caractères.
N La phrase de passe doit normalement se trouver sur l'un des écrans
de configuration que vous avez utilisés pour configurer votre routeur ou
modem.
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
a Précédent b Terminé n Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètre réseau
Entrez la clé de sécurité. 0 sais.
a
g
m
s
a/A
b
h
n
t
f
l
r
x
Espace
d
j
p
v
Supprimer
2
5
8
z
Terminé
c
i
o
u
F
1
4
7
y
e
k
q
w
3
6
9
0◀ ▶
Français
7. L'écran de connexion du réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est
effectuée.
N Si la définition de la clé de sécurité (Sécurité ou Code PIN) échoue,
sélectionnez Réin. ou Param. IP.
N Si vous souhaitez définir manuellement la connexion, sélectionnez Param.
IP.. Reportez-vous à la section "Procédure de configuration manuelle"◀ ▶
Français
■ Config. du réseau (Manuel)
Utilisez l'option de configuration manuelle du réseau lors de la connexion du
téléviseur à un réseau qui nécessite une adresse IP statique.
Obtention des valeurs de connexion au réseau
Pour obtenir les valeurs de connexion au réseau sur la plupart des ordinateurs
Windows, procédez comme suit:
1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Réseau située dans le coin
inférieur droit de l'écran.
2. Cliquez sur Etat dans le menu contextuel.◀ ▶
Français
3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Assistance dans la boîte de dialogue affichée.
4. Cliquez sur le bouton Détails dans l'onglet Assistance. Les valeurs de
connexion réseau sont affichées.
Procédure de configuration manuelle
Pour configurer manuellement la connexion réseau par câble de votre téléviseur,
procédez comme suit:
1. Suivez les étapes 1 et 2 de la procédure de configuration automatique.
2. Sélectionnez Param. IP dans l'écran de test du réseau.
3. Définissez Mode IP sur Manuel.◀ ▶
Français
4. Appuyez sur le bouton d de la télécommande pour accéder à l' Adresse IP.
5. Entrez les valeurs Adresse IP, Masque ss-réseau, Passerelle et Serveur
DNS. Utilisez les touches numériques de votre télécommande pour saisir des
chiffres et les touches fléchées pour passer d'un champ de saisie à un autre.
6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, sélectionnez OK.
7. L'écran de test du réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée.◀ ▶
Français
■ Config. du réseau (WPS(PBC))
Configuration à l'aide de la méthode WPS(PBC)
Si votre routeur est pourvu d'un bouton PBC
(WPS), procédez comme suit:
1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau.
Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions de la
section Paramètres réseau.
2. Sélectionnez WPS(PBC).
3. Appuyez sur le bouton WPS(PBC) de votre
routeur dans les deux minutes. Votre téléviseur récupère automatiquement
tous les paramètres réseau dont il a besoin et se connecte à votre réseau.
4. L'écran de test du réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée.
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètres réseau
Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau.
Câble
Sans fil (général)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Connectez-vous au routeur sans fil en appuyant simplement
sur le bouton WPS(PBC). Procédez de cette manière si votre
routeur sans fil prend en charge la méthode PBC.◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètres réseau (One Foot Connection)
La fonction One Foot Connection vous permet de connecter automatiquement
votre téléviseur Samsung à un routeur Samsung sans fil placé votre point d'accès
à 25 cm de votre téléviseur. Si votre routeur sans fil ne prend pas en charge la
fonction One Foot Connection, vous devez vous connecter en utilisant l'une des
autres méthodes.
N Vous pouvez rechercher du matériel prenant en charge la fonction One Foot
Connection sur www.samsung.com.◀ ▶
Français
Configuration à l'aide de la fonction One Foot Connection
Mettez le routeur et le téléviseur sous tension.
1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau. Pour
ce faire, suivez les instructions de la section
Paramètres réseau.
2. Sélectionnez One Foot Connection.
3. Placer le routeur sans fil en parallèle avec
l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung à une
distance inférieure à 25 cm.
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour
Paramètres réseau
Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau.
Câble
Sans fil (général)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Connectez-vous automatiquement au réseau sans fil si votre point
d'accès prend en charge One Foot Connection. Pour sélectionner
ce type de connexion, positionnez le point d'accès à 25 cm de
votre TV.◀ ▶
Français
N Si la fonction One Foot Connection ne parvient pas à connecter le téléviseur
à votre point d'accès, une fenêtre contextuelle s'ouvre pour vous informer
de l'échec. Si vous essayez d'utiliser à nouveau One Foot Connection,
réinitialisez le point d'accès, déconnectez l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung,
puis réessayez à partir de l'étape 1. Vous pouvez également opter pour l'une
des autres méthodes de configuration de la connexion.◀ ▶
Français
4. L'écran de connexion du réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est
effectuée.
5. Placez le point d'accès à l'emplacement souhaité.
N En cas de modification des paramètres du point d'accès ou d'installation d'un
nouveau point d'accès, vous devez effectuer à nouveau la procédure One Foot
Connection en commençant à l'étape 1.◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètre réseau (Plug & Access)
La fonction Plug & Access vous permet de connecter facilement votre routeur
sans fil Samsung à votre téléviseur Samsung à l'aide d'une clé USB. Si votre
routeur sans fil ne prend pas en charge la fonction Plug & Access, vous devez
vous connecter en utilisant l'une des autres méthodes.
N Vous pouvez rechercher du matériel prenant en charge la fonction Plug &
Access sur le site Web www. samsung.com
Configuration à l'aide de la fonction Plug & Access
Mettez le point d'accès et le téléviseur sous tension.
1. Insérez la clé USB dans le routeur sans fil Samsung et vérifiez l'état du voyant
du routeur (clignotant → allumé).
2. Enlevez ensuite la clé USB et insérez-la dans le téléviseur Samsung.◀ ▶
Français
3. Attendez que la connexion soit établie automatiquement.
N Si la fonction Plug & Access ne parvient pas à connecter le téléviseur à
votre routeur sans fil, une fenêtre contextuelle s'ouvre pour vous informer
de l'échec. Si vous essayez d'utiliser à nouveau Plug & Access, réinitialisez
le routeur sans fil, déconnectez l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung, puis
réessayez à partir de l'étape 1. Vous pouvez également opter pour l'une des
autres méthodes de configuration de la connexion.
4. L'écran de connexion du réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est
effectuée.
5. Placez le point d'accès à l'emplacement souhaité.
N En cas de modification des paramètres du routeur sans fil ou d'installation
d'un nouveau routeur sans fil, vous devez effectuer à nouveau la procédure
Plug & Access, en commençant à l'étape 1.◀ ▶
Français
Priorité HQS
Le routeur sans fil Samsung est une solution de diffusion AV HD optimisée
pour les téléviseurs numériques Samsung.
Il s'agit là d'une fonction distinctive de notre produit.
Le routeur sans fil Samsung peut être connecté à de nombreux périphériques, tels
que des ordinateurs portables, des téléphones mobiles, des lecteurs BD, etc.
Si vous connectez un téléviseur Samsung au routeur sans fil Samsung alors que
d'autres dispositifs sont déjà connectés, le routeur attribue au téléviseur une
connexion prioritaire.
Cette fonction garantit un débit et une qualité de diffusion optimales.
● Accélérez le débit de votre téléviseur en donnant priorité à la bande passante
de votre téléviseur (activation / désactivation facultative).
● En donnant la priorité aux téléviseurs Samsung, profitez du contenu HD sans
mise en mémoire tampon.
● La vitesse de connexion peut différer en fonction de l'environnement réseau.◀ ▶
Français
■ Paramètres réseau (Ad-Hoc)
Vous pouvez établir une connexion à un appareil mobile prenant en charge le
mode Ad-Hoc sans utiliser un point d'accès en passant par l'adaptateur LAN
sans fil Samsung. Lors de la connexion d'un appareil mobile, vous pouvez utiliser
des fichiers qui y sont stockés ou vous connecter à Internet à l'aide de la fonction
AllShare ou Multimédia.
Comment établir une nouvelle connexion Ad-hoc
1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau. Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions de
la section Paramètres réseau.
2. Sélectionnez Sans fil.◀ ▶
Français
3. Une fois la recherche d'un appareil mobile terminée, définissez le Nom du
réseau (SSID) et la clé de sécurité de l'appareil, puis établissez la connexion
réseau.
N Si le réseau ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez à nouveau le Nom
du réseau (SSID) et la clé de sécurité. Une clé de sécurité incorrecte peut
provoquer un dysfonctionnement.
N Lorsque vous connectez un appareil, il s'affiche dans la liste Paramètre
réseau. La prochaine fois que vous le connecterez, vous le trouverez dans
cette liste.◀ ▶
Français
Si le téléviseur ne parvient pas à se connecter à Internet
Il se peut que la connexion échoue car votre fournisseur d'accès Internet a enregistré, de
manière permanente, l'adresse MAC (numéro d'identification unique) de votre ordinateur ou
modem et qu'il utilise cette adresse à des fins d'authentification chaque fois que vous vous
connectez à Internet. Cela a pour but d'empêcher tout accès non autorisé. Dans la mesure
où votre téléviseur possède une adresse MAC différente, votre fournisseur d'accès Internet
ne peut pas l'authentifier, ce qui rend impossible toute connexion.
Pour remédier à ce problème, demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès la procédure à suivre
pour connecter des appareils autres que votre PC (votre téléviseur, par exemple) à Internet.
Si votre fournisseur d'accès exige un identifiant (ID) ou un mot de passe pour la connexion
à Internet, votre téléviseur ne pourra peut-être pas se connecter à Internet. Si tel est le cas,
vous devez entrer l'identifiant ou le mot de passe lors de la connexion à Internet.
La connexion à Internet peut échouer en raison d'un problème de pare-feu. Dans ce cas,
contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet.
Si vous ne parvenez toujours pas à vous connecter à Internet après avoir suivi les procé-
dures indiquées par votre fournisseur d'accès.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Réglage de l'heure
O MENUm → Système → ENTERE
■ Heure
● Horloge: le réglage de l'heure est nécessaire pour utiliser différentes fonctions
de minuterie du téléviseur.
O L'heure actuelle s'affiche à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton
INFO.
N Si vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation, vous devez régler à nouveau
l'horloge.
– Mode Horloge (Auto. / Manuel)
Auto.: règle automatiquement l'heure en fonction des signaux diffusés par
une chaîne numérique.◀ ▶
Français
N L'antenne doit être connectée pour permettre le réglage automatique de
l'heure.
Manuel: permet de régler l'heure manuellement.
N En fonction du signal et de la station de diffusion, il se peut que la
configuration automatique de l'heure soit incorrecte. Dans ce cas, réglez
l'heure manuellement.
– Réglage Horloge: Réglez les paramètres Jour, Mois, Année, Heure et
Minute.
N Disponible uniquement lorsque l'option Mode Horloge est définie sur
Manuel.
N Vous pouvez régler directement le mois, le jour, les heures et les minutes
en appuyant sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande.
– Fuseau Horaire (Auto. / Manuel): Sélectionnez GMT comme fuseau
horaire.
N L'option peut varier en fonction du pays.
N Cette fonction n'est disponible que si l'option Mode Horloge est définie
sur Auto.◀ ▶
Français
Utilisation de la veille
O MENUm → Système → Heure → Veille → ENTERE
● Veillet: éteint automatiquement le téléviseur après une période
déterminée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 et180 minutes).
N Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt.◀ ▶
Français
Réglage de la minuterie de mise en marche / arrêt
O MENUm → Système → Heure → ENTERE
● Progr. activ. 1 / Progr. activ. 2 / Progr.
activ. 3: vous pouvez définir trois réglages
différents. Vous devez, au préalable, régler
l'horloge.
Configuration: Sélectionnez Arrêt, Une
fois, Quotid., Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam,
Sam~Dim ou Manuel selon vos besoins.
Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous pouvez choisir le jour d'activation de la
minuterie.
N Le symbole c indique que le jour est sélectionné.
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
TV
11 00 20
DTV 1
Progr. activ. 1
Configuration
Une fois
11
Source
Période d'activation Volume
Antenne Canal
Dim Lun Mar Mer Jeu Ven Sam
L Déplacer U Régler E Entrer R Retour◀ ▶
Français
Période d'activation: Règle les heures et les minutes.
Volume: Permet de sélectionner le volume désiré.
Source: Sélectionnez le contenu TV ou USB à lire lors de la mise sous tension
automatique du téléviseur. (L'option USB peut uniquement être sélectionnée
lorsqu'un périphérique USB est connecté au téléviseur.)
Antenne (lorsque Source est défini sur TV): Sélectionnez la source d'antenne
de votre choix.
Canal (lorsque Source est défini sur TV): Sélectionnez la chaîne de votre choix.
Musique / Photo (lorsque Source est défini sur USB): Permet de sélectionner
un dossier du périphérique USB contenant les fichiers de musique ou les
images devant être lus lorsque le téléviseur s'allume automatiquement.◀ ▶
Français
N Auto Power Off (disponible uniquement lorsque le téléviseur est allumé par
le minuteur): le téléviseur est mis hors tension automatiquement après quatre
heures d'inactivité pour éviter toute surchauffe.
N REMARQUE
● Si le périphérique USB ne contient aucun fichier audio ou si le dossier
contenant un fichier audio n'est pas sélectionné, la fonction de veille ne
fonctionne pas correctement.
● Si le périphérique USB ne contient qu'un seul fichier photo, la fonction
de diaporama ne démarre pas.
● Les dossiers dont le nom est trop long ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés.◀ ▶
Français
● Chaque périphérique USB utilisé se voit attribuer son propre dossier. Si
vous utilisez plusieurs périphériques USB du même type, assurez-vous
que les dossiers affectés à chacun d'eux portent des noms différents.
● Il est conseillé d'utiliser une clé USB et un lecteur de cartes multiformat
lors de l'utilisation de la fonction Progr. activ. Il se peut que l'option
Progr. activ. ne fonctionne pas avec certains périphériques USB
équipés d'une batterie intégrée, ainsi que des lecteurs MP3 et lecteurs
multimédias portables de certains fabricants, car leur reconnaissance
prend trop de temps.◀ ▶
Français
● Progr. désact. 1 / Progr. désact. 2 /
Progr. désact. 3: Vous pouvez définir
trois réglages différents. Vous devez, au
préalable, régler l'horloge.
Configuration: Sélectionnez Arrêt, Une
fois, Quotid., Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam,
Sam~Dim ou Manuel selon vos besoins.
Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous pouvez choisir le jour d'activation de la
minuterie.
N Le symbole c indique que le jour est sélectionné.
Période de désactivation: Règle les heures et les minutes.
● L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
00 00
Progr. désact. 1
Configuration
Une fois
Période de désactivation
Dim Lun Mar Mer Jeu Ven Sam
L Déplacer U Régler E Entrer R Retour◀ ▶
Français
❑ Verrouillage des programmes
O MENUm → Système → Sécurité → ENTERE
■ Sécurité
L'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
● Verr. chaîne (Arrêt / Activé): Vous pouvez verrouiller des chaînes dans la
fonction Gestion chaînes afin d'empêcher certains utilisateurs, tels que des
enfants, de regarder des émissions qui ne leur sont pas destinées.
N Disponible uniquement lorsque la Source est définie sur TV.◀ ▶
Français
● Contrôle Parental (en fonction du pays): cette fonction permet d'empêcher
certains utilisateurs, tels que des enfants, de regarder des émissions qui ne leur
sont pas destinées, à l'aide d'un code PIN à 4 chiffres défini par l'utilisateur. Si
la chaîne sélectionnée est verrouillée, le symbole “\” apparaît.
N Les options de Contrôle Parental diffèrent selon le pays.
● Modifier PIN: permet de modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir
configurer le téléviseur.
● Serv. adultes (Off / On): permet de régler l'option Serv. adultes.
N L'option Serv. adultes est disponible pour l'antenne Freesat uniquement.◀ ▶
Français
Comment regarder une chaîne à restriction
Si la TV est sur un canal à restriction, la fonction Contrôle Parental le bloque.
L’affichage disparaît et fait place au message suivant:
Ce canal est bloqué par la fonction Contrôle Parental Entrez le code PIN pour le
débloquer.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Solutions économiques
■ Solution Eco
O MENUm → Système → Solution Eco → ENTERE
● Mode éco. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée) t:
cette fonction permet de régler la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la
consommation. Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l'écran est éteint,
mais le son reste activé. Appuyez sur n'importe quel bouton, sauf celui du
volume, pour allumer l'écran.
● Capteur Eco (Arrêt / Activé): cette fonction permet d'optimiser vos économies
d'énergie ; les réglages de l'image s'adaptent automatiquement en fonction de
la luminosité de la pièce.◀ ▶
Français
N Lors du réglage de la fonction Lum. Cellules, le Capteur Eco passe sur
Arrêt.
Lum. cellules min.: lorsque Capteur Eco est défini sur Activé, la luminosité
minimale de l'écran peut être définie manuellement.
N Si Capteur Eco est défini sur Activé, la luminosité de l'écran peut changer
(il devient plus ou moins lumineux) en fonction de l'intensité de la lumière
environnante.
● Veille si aucun signal (Arrêt / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): pour éviter toute
consommation d'énergie inutile, définissez la durée d'activation du téléviseur
lorsqu'il ne reçoit pas de signal.
N Cette fonction est désactivée lorsque le PC est en mode d'économie
d'énergie.
● Auto Power Off (Arrêt / Activé): le téléviseur est mis hors tension
automatiquement après quatre heures d'inactivité pour éviter toute surchauffe.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Incrustation d'image (PIP)
O MENUm → Système → PIP → ENTERE
■ PIP
Vous pouvez regarder simultanément le tuner TV et une source vidéo externe. PIP
(Picture-in-Picture) ne fonctionne pas dans le même mode.◀ ▶
Français
● PIP (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive la fonction PIP.
● Canal: permet de choisir la chaîne affichée dans l'écran secondaire.
● Taille (õ / ã): permet de sélectionner une taille pour l'image secondaire.
● Position (ã / – / — / œ): permet de sélectionner une position pour
l'image secondaire.
● Sélection du son (Principal / Secondaire): vous pouvez sélectionner le mode
audio de votre choix Principal / Secondaire en mode PIP.◀ ▶
Français
N REMARQUE
● Pour le son PIP, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives à Sélection du
son.
● Si vous éteignez le téléviseur alors que la fonction PIP est activée, la fenêtre
PIP disparaît.
● Il est possible que l'image affichée dans la fenêtre PIP semble légèrement
moins naturelle lorsque vous utilisez l'écran principal pour un jeu ou un
karaoké.
● Lorsque les fonctions Contrôle Parental sont en cours d'exécution, la
fonction PIP ne peut pas être utilisée.
● Réglages PIP
Image principale Image secondaire
Component, HDMI, PC TV◀ ▶
Français
❑ Autres fonctionnalités
O MENUm → Système → ENTERE
■ Langue
● Langue des menus: Permet de définir la langue des menus.
● Langue du télétexte: Permet de définir la langue du télétexte.
N L'anglais est utilisé par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée.
● Préférence (Langue Audio principale / Langue Audio secondaire / Langue
princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres / Langue Télétexte principale
/ Langue Télétexte secondaire): Sélectionnez la langue qui sera utilisée par
défaut lors de la sélection d'une chaîne.
N L'option peut varier en fonction du pays.◀ ▶
Français
■ Sous-titres
Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode Sous-titres.
● Sous-titres (Arrêt / Activé): Active ou désactive les sous-titres.
● Mode sous-titre (Normal / Malentendant): Configure le mode des sous-titres.
● Langue des sous-titres: Définit la langue des sous-titres.
N Si le programme visionné ne prend pas en charge la fonction Malentendant,
le mode Langue préférée est automatiquement activé, même si le mode
Malentendant est sélectionné.
N L'anglais est utilisé par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée.◀ ▶
Français
■ Texte numérique (Désactiver / Activer) pour le Royaume Uni
Si le programme diffuse du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group):
Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le
multimédia et l'hypermédia. Niveau supérieur à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut
de l'hypermédia à liaison de données tel que images fixes, service de caractères,
animation, fichiers graphiques et vidéo et données multimédia. MHEG est une
technologie d'interaction utilisateur qui s'applique à divers domaines, dont la vidéo
à la demande (VOD), la télévision interactive (ITV), le commerce électronique,
la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en
réseau.◀ ▶
Français
■ Protec brûl. écran
Pour réduire le risque de brûlure d'écran, cet écran est équipé d'une technologie
de prévention des brûlures. Le paramètre Durée permet de programmer la durée
en minutes séparant les mouvements de l'image.
● Modif. pixel. (Arrêt / Activé): cette fonction permet de déplacer les pixels sur
l'écran dans le sens vertical ou horizontal, afin d'éviter une image résiduelle sur
l'écran.
N Conditions optimales pour la modification des pixels
Elément TV/AV/Composant/HDMI/PC
Horizontal 0~4 4
Vertical 0~4 4
Durée (minute) 1~4 min 4 min◀ ▶
Français
N La valeur Modif. pixel peut changer selon le mode et la taille de l’écran.
N Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en mode Adapter à écran.
● Temps protection auto (Arrêt / 10 min / 20 min / 40 min / 1 heure): Si
l'écran est inutilisé et affiche une image fixe pendant un certain temps défini par
l'utilisateur, l'économiseur d'écran est activé de manière à prévenir la formation
d'images parasites sur l'écran.
● Défilement: cette fonction supprime les images résiduelles à l'écran en
déplaçant tous les pixels sur l'écran, selon le motif. Utilisez cette fonction
lorsque des images résiduelles ou des symboles apparaissent à l'écran, en
particulier lorsque vous affichez une image fixe à l'écran pendant une longue
période. ◀ ▶
Français
N La fonction de suppression d'images résiduelles doit être exécutée pendant
longtemps (environ une heure) pour supprimer efficacement les images
résiduelles. Si l'image résiduelle n'est pas supprimée après l'exécution de
cette fonction, répétez l'opération.
N Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche de la télécommande pour annuler
cette fonction.
● Gris de bord (Clair / Sombre): si vous regardez la télévision dans un rapport
d'écran 4:3, l'écran est protégé contre tout dommage grâce à l'ajustement de
la balance des blancs sur les côtés gauche et droit.◀ ▶
Français
■ Général
● Mode Jeu (Arrêt / Activé): lorsque vous connectez une console de jeux, telle
qu'une PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, vous pouvez bénéficier d'une expérience
ludique encore plus réaliste en sélectionnant le mode Jeu.
N Précautions et limitations pour le mode Jeu
– Pour déconnecter la console de jeux et connecter un autre périphérique
externe, définissez Mode Jeu sur Arrêt dans le menu de configuration.
– Si vous affichez le menu du téléviseur en Mode Jeu, l'écran tremble
légèrement.
N L'option Mode Jeu n'est pas disponible lorsque la source d'entrée est
définie sur TV ou PC.◀ ▶
Français
N Après avoir connecté la console de jeux, définissez Mode Jeu sur Activé.
Malheureusement, il se peut que la qualité d'image soit moins bonne.
N Si Mode Jeu est défini sur Activé:
– Le mode Image est défini sur Standard et le mode Son est défini sur
Cinéma.
● Transparence menu (Lumineux / Sombre): permet de définir la transparence
du menu.
● Affich. logo (Arrêt / Activé): affiche le logo Samsung lors de la mise sous
tension du téléviseur.
● Nom TV Pour la série PDP 550 / 570
: définit le nom du téléviseur afin que vous
puissiez le retrouver aisément sur un appareil mobile.
N Si vous sélectionnez Entrée util., vous pouvez écrire sur le téléviseur à l'aide
du clavier à l'écran.◀ ▶
Français
■ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Pour plus d'informations sur les options de configuration, reportez-vous à la
section "Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)"
■ DivX® Vidéo à la demande
Affiche le code d'enregistrement autorisé pour le téléviseur. Si vous vous connectez
au site web DivX et que vous vous enregistrez, vous pourrez télécharger le fichier
d'enregistrement VOD (vidéo à la demande). Si vous lisez l'enregistrement VOD à
l'aide de Vidéos sous SMART HUB, l'enregistrement est terminé.
N Pour plus d'informations sur DivX® VOD, rendez-vous sur le site Web "http://
vod.divx.com".◀ ▶
Français
■ Interface commune
● CI Menu: permet à l'utilisateur d'opérer une sélection dans le menu du module
CAM. Sélectionnez le CI Menu en fonction du menu Carte PC.
● Infos sur l'application: affiche des informations sur le module CAM inséré
dans l'emplacement CI et sur la carte d'interface commune CI ou CI+ insérée
dans le module CAM. Vous pouvez installer le module CAM, que le téléviseur
soit allumé ou éteint.
1. Vous pouvez acheter un module CI CAM chez le revendeur le plus proche
ou le commander par téléphone.
2. Insérez fermement la carte d'interface commune CI ou CI+ dans le module
CAM en suivant le sens de la flèche.
3. Insérez le module CAM avec la carte dans la fente de l'interface commune
(dans le sens de la flèche), de telle sorte qu'il soit aligné parallèlement à la
fente.
4. Vérifiez qu'une image est visible sur une chaîne à signal brouillé.◀ ▶
Français
■ Télécommande réseau (Arrêt / Activé) Pour la série PDP 550 / 570
Permet d'activer / désactiver ou de donner les autorisations d'accès aux
téléphones mobiles Samsung.
Vous devez disposer d'un appareil / téléphone mobile Samsung prenant en charge
la fonction Télécommande réseau. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, reportezvous au mode d'emploi qui accompagne l'appareil mobile.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Menu Assistance
■ e-Manual
O MENUm → Assistance → ENTERE
Vous pouvez lire l'introduction et les instructions relatives aux fonctions de votre
TV.
N Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran du manuel électronique (e-Manual),
reportez-vous à la section "Consultation du manuel électronique" du mode
d'emploi.◀ ▶
Français
■ Diagnost. auto.
O MENUm → Assistance → ENTERE
N Le diagnostic automatique peut prendre quelques minutes ; ce phénomène est
normal.
● Test de l'image: utilisez cette option pour rechercher d'éventuels problèmes
d'image.
Oui: Si l’image couleur n'apparaît pas où si elle est parasitée, sélectionnez
Oui. Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Contactez le centre d'appel de
Samsung pour obtenir de l'aide.
Non: si l’image couleur s'affiche correctement, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut
que l'équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème
persiste, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe.◀ ▶
Français
● Test du son: utilisez la mélodie intégrée pour rechercher d'éventuels problèmes
sonores.
N Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d'effectuer le test
du son, vérifiez que l'option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Hautparleur TV dans le menu Son.
N La mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l'option Sélection Hautparleur est définie sur Haut-parleur TV ou si le son a été désactivé en
appuyant sur le bouton MUTE.
Oui: Si, pendant le test du son, vous n'entendez du son que d'un hautparleur ou pas de son du tout, sélectionnez Oui. Il se peut que le téléviseur soit
défaillant. Contactez le centre d'appel de Samsung pour obtenir de l'aide.
Non: si vous entendez du son des haut-parleurs, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut
que l'équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème
persiste, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe.◀ ▶
Français
● Informations de signal: (chaînes numériques uniquement) Indicateurs
d’intensité de signal de réception et de niveau d’erreur. Réglez votre antenne
afin d'augmenter l'intensité du signal.
● Résolution des problèmes: consultez cette description s'il vous semble que
le téléviseur rencontre un problème.
N Si aucun des conseils de dépannage ne s'applique au problème rencontré,
contactez le service clientèle de Samsung.◀ ▶
Français
■ Mise à niveau du logiciel
La Mise à niveau du logiciel peut être effectuée via une connexion réseau ou en
téléchargeant le dernier micrologiciel depuis le site "www.samsung.com" vers une
unité de stockage USB.
Version actuelle le logiciel déjà installé sur le téléviseur.
N Le numéro de version est affiché au format suivant: "année / mois / jour_
version".◀ ▶
Français
Installation de la dernière version
● USB: insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur
USB contenant la mise à niveau du
micrologiciel, téléchargée depuis le site
"www.samsung.com". Veillez à ne pas
couper l'alimentation ni à retirer le lecteur
USB pendant l'application des mises
à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du
microprogramme terminée, le téléviseur
se met automatiquement hors tension, puis se rallume. Lorsque la mise à
niveau du logiciel est terminée, les paramètres vidéo et audio par défaut sont
réinitialisés. Nous vous recommandons de noter vos réglages pour les rétablir
facilement après la mise à niveau.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
USB◀ ▶
Français
● En ligne Pour les séries PDP 550 et 570
: permet de mettre le logiciel à niveau par
Internet.
N Commencez par configurer votre réseau. Pour plus d'informations sur
l'utilisation de la fonction Config. du réseau, reportez-vous à la section
Paramètres réseau.
N Si la connexion Internet ne fonctionne pas correctement, il se peut que la
connexion soit interrompue. Réessayez le téléchargement. Si le problème
persiste, effectuez la procédure de téléchargement USB et procédez à la
mise à niveau.
● Canal: met à niveau le logiciel en utilisant le signal de radiodiffusion.
N Si la fonction est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du
logiciel, ce dernier est automatiquement recherché et téléchargé.
N Le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l'état du
signal.◀ ▶
Français
● Autre logiciel Pour les séries PDP 550 et 570
(sauvegarde): En cas de problème
avec le nouveau micrologiciel (si, par exemple, le téléviseur ne fonctionne plus
correctement), vous pouvez revenir à la version précédente.
N Si le logiciel a été modifié, la version existante s'affiche.
● Mise à niveau en mode veille: une mise à niveau manuelle est
automatiquement effectuée à l'heure indiquée. Etant donné que la mise
sous tension s'effectue de façon interne, il se peut que l'écran LED s'allume
légèrement. Le phénomène peut se poursuivre pendant plus d'une heure
jusqu'à ce que la mise à jour du logiciel soit terminée.
■ Contacter Samsung
Consultez ces informations si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou
si vous souhaitez mettre à niveau le logiciel. Vous y trouverez des informations
concernant nos centres d'appels ainsi que la procédure de téléchargement de nos
produits et logiciels.
■ Accueil contenu
Vous bénéficiez de contenu utile et varié.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Utilisation de la fonction 3D
A partir de la série PDP 490
O MENUm → Image → 3D → ENTERE
■ 3D
Cette nouvelle fonctionnalité vous permet de regarder du contenu 3D. Pour
en profiter pleinement, vous devez acquérir des lunettes 3D Samsung afin de
regarder des vidéos 3D. Ces lunettes sont vendues séparément. Pour obtenir des
informations d’achat plus détaillées, contactez le revendeur qui vous a vendu ce
téléviseur.
Fonctions avancées◀ ▶
Français
INFORMATIONS IMPORTANTES SUR LA SECURITE ET LA PROTECTION DE
LA SANTE CONCERNANT LES FILMS EN 3D.
Il est important de lire attentivement et de bien comprendre les informations
de sécurité suivantes avant d’utiliser la fonction 3D de votre téléviseur.
[ AVERTISSEMENT
● Certaines personnes peuvent être victimes de vertiges, nausées et maux
de tête lorsqu’elles regardent la télévision en 3D. Si vous présentez des
symptômes de ce type, arrêtez de regarder la télévision en 3D, retirez les
lunettes 3D actives et reposez-vous.
● Le fait de regarder des images 3D pendant une période prolongée peut
causer une fatigue oculaire. Si vous présentez ce type de symptôme, arrêtez
de regarder la télévision en 3D, retirez les lunettes 3D actives et reposezvous.◀ ▶
Français
● Un adulte responsable est censé vérifier régulièrement que tout se passe
bien pour les enfants qui utilisent la fonction 3D. Si un enfant vous dit qu’il
a les yeux fatigués ou qu’il est victime de maux de tête, de vertiges ou de
nausées, demandez-lui d’arrêter de regarder la télévision en 3D et dites-lui
de se reposer.
● N’utilisez pas les lunettes 3D actives à d’autres fins (par exemple, comme
lunettes de vue, de soleil ou de protection).
● N’utilisez pas la fonction 3D ou les lunettes 3D actives lorsque vous marchez
ou vous vous déplacez. Si vous utilisez la fonction 3D ou les lunettes 3D
actives lorsque vous vous déplacez, vous pouvez vous occasionner des
blessures en trébuchant, en chutant et/ou en percutant des objets.◀ ▶
Français
● Mode 3D: permet de sélectionner le format d’entrée 3D.
N Pour profiter pleinement de l’effet 3D, mettez les lunettes actives 3D, puis
sélectionnez l’un des modes 3D décrits dans la liste ci-dessous pour obtenir
une qualité 3D optimale.
N Lorsque vous regardez des images 3D, allumez les lunettes 3D actives.
Mode 3D Fonctionnement
Arrêt Désactive la fonction 3D.
2D → 3D Transforme une image 2D en image 3D.
Côte à côte Affiche deux images côte à côte.
Haut et bas Affiche deux images, l’une au-dessus de l’autre.◀ ▶
Français
N Certains formats de fichier ne sont pas pris en charge par le mode “2D →
3D”.
N Les modes “Cote a cote” et “Haut et bas” sont disponibles lorsque la
résolution est définie sur 720p, 1080i et 1080p, en modes DTV, HDMI et
USB, ou sur PC lorsque l’ordinateur est connecté via un câble HDMI/DVI.
● Perspective 3D (-5~+5): permet de régler la perspective 3D globale de l’image
à l’écran.
● Profondeur (0~10): permet de régler la profondeur globale.
● Modification G/D (Image G/D / Image D/G): intervertit les images gauche et
droite.
● 3D → 2D (Arrêt / Activé): affiche uniquement l’image pour l’œil gauche.
N Cette fonction est désactivée lorsque Mode 3D est défini sur “2D → 3D” ou
sur Arrêt.◀ ▶
Français
Résolution prise en charge en mode PC HDMI
La résolution en mode PC HDMI est optimisée pour une entrée 1920 x 1080.
Une résolution d’entrée différente de 1920 x 1080 ne sera peut-être pas affichée
correctement en mode 3D ou en mode plein écran.◀ ▶
Français
Visionnage d’une image 3D
N La disponibilité de certains modes 3D dépend du format de l’image source.
N Pour regarder la télévision en 3D, portez des lunettes 3D actives et appuyez sur
le bouton d’alimentation des lunettes.
1. Appuyez sur la touche MENU de votre télécommande, utilisez la touche u ou
d pour sélectionner Image, puis appuyez
sur ENTERE.
2. Utilisez la touche u ou d pour sélectionner
3D et appuyez ensuite sur ENTERE.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du
modèle.
3D
Mode 3D : Arret r
Perspective 3D : 0
Profondeur : 5
Modification G/D : Image G/D
3D → 2D : Arret
EEntrer R Retour◀ ▶
Français
3. Utilisez la touche u ou d pour sélectionner
Mode 3D et appuyez ensuite sur ENTERE.
4. A l’aide de la touche l ou r de la télécommande,
sélectionnez le Mode 3D de l’image à visionner.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du
modèle.
Mode 3D
U Arrêt L Déplacer EEntrer R Retour◀ ▶
Français
Formats pris en charge et spécifications de fonctionnement du format
HDMI 3D standard
N Les formats 3D indiqués ci-dessous sont recommandés par l’association HDMI
et doivent être pris en charge.
Format du signal source Norme HDMI 1.4 3D
1920 x 1080p à 24 Hz x 2 1920 x 2205p à 24 Hz
1280 x 720p à 50 Hz x 2 1280 x 1470p à 50 Hz◀ ▶
Français
Avant d’utiliser la fonction 3D...
N Remarque
● Mode 3D est défini automatiquement sur Arrêt lors de l’accès aux fonctions
Mon contenu.
● Le Mode 3D est défini automatiquement sur la valeur de configuration
mémorisée en cas de changement de la source d’entrée.
● Certaines fonctions Image sont désactivées en mode 3D.
● Le mode 3D ne prend pas en charge la fonction PIP.◀ ▶
Français
● Il se peut que les lunettes 3D actives d’un modèle antérieur de Samsung (de
type IR) ou d’autres fabricants ne soient pas prises en charge.
● Lors de la mise en marche initiale du téléviseur, l’optimisation de l’écran 3D
peut prendre quelques instants.
● En cas de proximité avec un autre appareil 3D ou électronique, il est
possible que les lunettes 3D actives ne fonctionnent pas correctement.
En cas de problème, éloignez aussi loin que possible les autres appareils
électroniques des lunettes 3D actives.◀ ▶
Français
● Certains formats de fichier ne sont pas pris en charge par le mode “2D →
3D”.
● Veillez à rester dans l’angle de visualisation et à une distance de visualisation
de la télévision optimale lorsque vous regardez des images 3D.
● Sinon, vous risquez de ne pas pouvoir profiter des effets 3D attendus.
● La distance de visualisation idéale doit correspondre à au moins trois fois la
hauteur de l’écran. Nous recommandons une position assise où les yeux du
spectateur sont au même niveau que l’écran.
● Lorsque vous regardez des images 3D sous une lumière tremblotante
comme une lampe fluorescente (50 Hz ~ 60 Hz) ou une lampe à 3 longueurs
d’onde, il se peut que l’écran scintille légèrement. Si tel est le cas, atténuez
l’intensité de l’éclairage ou éteignez la lumière.◀ ▶
Français
❑ A propos d’AllShare™
à partir de la série PDP 550
AllShare™ connecte votre téléviseur et vos téléphones portables / appareils
Samsung compatibles via un réseau. En outre, vous pouvez lire du contenu
multimédia (photos, vidéos et musique) enregistré sur votre téléphone portable
ou d’autres appareils (un PC, par exemple) en le contrôlant sur le téléviseur via le
réseau.
N Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur “www.samsung.com” ou contactez
le centre d’appel Samsung. Il peut être nécessaire d’installer des logiciels
supplémentaires sur l’appareil mobile. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous
au mode d’emploi de l’appareil concerné.◀ ▶
Français
N Si votre téléviseur Samsung est connecté à un serveur DLNA d’une autre
marque, une erreur de compatibilité peut survenir lors de la lecture de vidéos.
N La connexion de votre téléviseur Samsung à un réseau via AllShare™ vous
permet d’utiliser les fonctions originales de Samsung suivantes:
– Lecture de différents formats vidéos (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, etc.)
– Fonction de vidéo miniature
– Fonction de signet (pour la reprise de la lecture d’une vidéo)
– Chapitrage automatique (navigation entre les scènes)
– Gestion de contenu numérique
– Compatibilité avec différents formats de sous-titres (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT,
TTXT)
– Recherche sur le nom de fichier
– Et plus encore
N Pour utiliser toutes les fonctions DLNA originales de Samsung, il est
recommandé d’utiliser le logiciel AllShare™ fourni avec votre téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Configuration de la fonction AllShare™
à partir de la série PDP 550
O MENUm → Réseau → Paramètres AllShare → ENTERE
■ Paramètres AllShare
● Média (Activé / Arrêt): permet d’activer
ou de désactiver la fonction Média. lorsque
la fonction Média est activée, la lecture du
contenu multimédia peut être contrôlée par
un téléphone portable et d’autres appareils
prenant en charge la fonction DLNA DMC.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
Paramètres AllShare
Média : Arrêt ►
U Dépl. E Enter R Retour◀ ▶
Français
■ Média
Affiche la liste des téléphones portables ou appareils connectés qui ont été
configurés avec ce téléviseur en vue d’utiliser la fonction Média.
N La fonction Média est disponible sur tous les appareils prenant en charge la
fonction DLNA DMC.
● Autor. / Refusé: autorise / bloque les appareils.
● Supprimer: supprime les appareils de la liste.
N Cette fonction efface simplement le nom de l’appareil de la liste. Si l’appareil
effacé s’allume ou tente de se reconnecter au téléviseur, il est possible qu’il
s’affiche à nouveau.◀ ▶
Français
Utilisation de la fonction Média
Une fenêtre d’alarme informe l’utilisateur que le contenu multimédia (vidéos, photos,
musique) provenant du téléphone portable va s’afficher sur le téléviseur. Le contenu
est lu automatiquement 3 secondes après l’affichage de la fenêtre d’alarme. Si vous
appuyez sur le bouton RETURN ou EXIT lorsque la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche, le
contenu multimédia n’est pas lu.
N REMARQUE
● S’il s’agit de la première exécution de la fonction Media (Média), la fenêtre
contextuelle d’avertissement s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour
sélectionner Autor. Vous pourrez ensuite utiliser la fonction Média sur cet
appareil.◀ ▶
Français
● Pour désactiver la transmission du contenu multimédia en provenance
du téléphone portable, définissez l’option Média sur Arrêt dans le menu
Paramètres AllShare.
● En fonction de sa résolution et de son format, le contenu peut ne pas être lu
sur le téléviseur.
● Il se peut que les boutons ENTERE et l / r ne fonctionnent pas avec
certains types de contenu multimédia.
● Il est possible de contrôler la lecture à l’aide de l’appareil mobile. Pour plus
d’informations, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de l’appareil concerné.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Configuration d’Anynet+
O MENUm → Système → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → ENTERE
■ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Pour utiliser la fonction Anynet+, l’option
(Arrêt / Activé) tAnynet+ (HDMI-CEC) doit être définie
sur Activé.
N Lorsque la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est désactivée, toutes les activités
qui y sont associées sont indisponibles.◀ ▶
Français
■ Arrêt automatique (Non / Oui)
Configuration de l’arrêt automatique d’un appareil Anynet+ lorsque le téléviseur est
mis hors tension.
N Si la fonction Arrêt automatique est définie sur Oui, les périphériques externes
en cours d’exécution s’éteindront en même temps que le téléviseur.
N N’est peut-être pas pris en charge en fonction du périphérique.◀ ▶
Français
Qu’est-ce que Anynet+ ? t
Anynet+ est une fonction qui vous permet de contrôler tous les appareils Samsung
connectés compatibles Anynet+ à l’aide de votre télécommande Samsung. Le
système Anynet+ peut être utilisé uniquement avec les appareils Samsung disposant
de la fonction Anynet+. Pour être sûr que votre appareil Samsung dispose de cette
fonction, vérifiez qu’il comporte le logo Anynet+.
N Remarque
● Vous pouvez commander n’importe quel appareil Anynet+ à l’aide de la
télécommande, et non des boutons du téléviseur.
● Il se peut que la télécommande du téléviseur ne fonctionne pas dans certaines
situations. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez de nouveau le périphérique Anynet+.
● Les fonctions Anynet+ ne sont pas opérationnelles sur les produits d’autres
fabricants.◀ ▶
Français
Pour plus d’informations sur la méthode de connexion des périphériques externes,
consultez le mode d’emploi approprié.
N Remarque
● Connectez le câble optique entre la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
de votre téléviseur et l’entrée Digital Audio (audio numérique) de votre système
home cinéma.
● En suivant les instructions de connexion ci-dessus, la prise Optical (Optique)
diffuse du son sur 2 canaux uniquement. Vous n’entendrez du son qu’au niveau
des haut-parleurs avant, gauche et droit et du caisson de basses de votre
système home cinéma. Pour écouter du contenu audio 5.1, branchez la prise
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du lecteur DVD ou du décodeur satellite
(c’est-à-dire, le périphérique Anynet 1 ou 2) directement sur l’amplificateur ou
sur le système home cinéma, et non sur le téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
● Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul système home cinéma.
● Vous pouvez connecter un appareil Anynet+ à l’aide du câble HDMI. Il se peut
que certains câbles HDMI ne prennent pas en charge les fonctions Anynet+.
● Anynet+ fonctionne lorsque l’appareil AV compatible est en veille ou en marche.
● Le système Anynet+ prend en charge jusqu’à 12 appareils AV. Vous pouvez
connecter jusqu’à 3 appareils du même type.◀ ▶
Français
Menu Anynet+
Le menu Anynet+ varie selon le type et l’état des appareils Anynet+ connectés au
téléviseur.
Menu Anynet+ Description
Voir télévision Fait basculer le mode Anynet+ en mode de diffusion TV.
Liste d’appareils Affiche la liste des appareils Anynet+.
(nom_appareil) MENU Affiche les menus de l’appareil connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD
est connecté, son menu de disque s’affiche.
(nom_appareil) Tools Affiche le menu des outils de l’appareil connecté. Par exemple, si un
graveur DVD est connecté, son menu de lecture s’affiche.
N Ce menu n’est pas disponible avec tous les appareils.◀ ▶
Français
Menu Anynet+ Description
(nom_appareil) Menu titre Affiche le menu de titres de l’appareil connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur
DVD est connecté, son menu de titres s’affiche.
N Ce menu n’est pas disponible avec tous les appareils.
Récepteur Le son est diffusé par l’intermédiaire du récepteur.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Basculement entre des appareils Anynet+
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour sélectionner Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Liste d’appareils.
N Si l’appareil recherché est introuvable, appuyez sur le bouton a pour
actualiser la liste.
2. Sélectionnez un appareil et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous
pouvez basculer vers l’appareil sélectionné.
N Le menu Liste d’appareils s’affiche uniquement lorsque vous définissez
l’option Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) sur Activé dans le menu Système.◀ ▶
Français
● Le basculement vers l’appareil sélectionné peut prendre 2 minutes. Il est
impossible d’annuler l’opération de basculement.
● Si vous avez choisi un mode d’entrée externe en appuyant sur le bouton
SOURCE, il est impossible d’utiliser la fonction Anynet+. Veillez à basculer
vers un appareil Anynet+ à l’aide de la Liste d’appareils.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Ecoute via un récepteur
Vous pouvez diffuser du son via un récepteur (c’est-à-dire un système home
cinéma) au lieu du Haut-parleur TV.
1. Sélectionnez Récepteur et définissez l’option sur Activé.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu.
N Si votre récepteur ne prend en charge que l’audio, il se peut qu’il ne figure
pas dans la liste d’appareils.
N Le récepteur fonctionnera lorsque vous aurez correctement raccordé
la prise d’entrée optique du récepteur à la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL) du téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
N Lorsque le récepteur (système home cinéma) est activé, vous pouvez
écouter le son sortant de la prise optique du téléviseur. Lorsque le téléviseur
reçoit une émission avec le son 5.1, il diffuse un son 5.1 canaux vers le
récepteur. Si la source est un composant numérique (un lecteur DVD, par
exemple) connecté au téléviseur via HDMI, seul un son 2 canaux est diffusé
par le récepteur.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Résolution des problèmes Anynet+
Problème Solution possible
Anynet+ ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez que l’appareil est compatible Anynet+. Le système Anynet+
ne prend en charge que les appareils compatibles Anynet+.
• Un seul récepteur (home cinéma) peut être connecté.
• Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation de l’appareil Anynet+ est bien
connecté.
• Vérifiez la connexion des câbles vidéo/audio/HDMI du périphérique
Anynet+.
• Vérifiez que l’option Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est définie sur Activé
dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet+.
• Vérifiez que la télécommande du téléviseur est en mode TV.
• Vérifiez que la télécommande est compatible avec Anynet+.
• Anynet+ ne fonctionne pas dans toutes les conditions. (Recherche
de chaînes, utilisation de Mon contenu ou Plug & Play (configuration
initiale), etc.)
• Lorsque vous branchez ou retirez le câble HDMI, veillez à relancer
une recherche d’appareils ou à éteindre et rallumer votre téléviseur.
• Vérifiez que la fonction Anynet+ de l’appareil Anynet+ est activée.◀ ▶
Français
Problème Solution possible
Je veux démarrer Anynet+. • Assurez-vous que le périphérique Anynet+ est bien connecté au
téléviseur et que la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est définie sur
Activé dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet+.
• Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Anynet+ et
sélectionnez le menu de votre choix.
Je veux quitter Anynet+. • Sélectionnez Voir télévision dans le menu Anynet+.
• Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande et choisissez
un appareil non compatible Anynet+.
Le message “Connexion à
Anynet+...” apparaît à l’écran.
• Il est impossible d’utiliser la télécommande lorsque vous configurez
Anynet+ ou basculez vers un mode d’affichage.
• La télécommande n’est utilisable qu’au terme de la configuration
d’Anynet+ ou du passage vers un mode d’affichage.
La lecture ne démarre pas sur
l’appareil Anynet+.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction de lecture lorsque Plug &
Play (configuration initiale) est en cours.◀ ▶
Français
Problème Solution possible
Le périphérique connecté ne
s’affiche pas.
• Vérifiez que l’appareil est compatible avec les fonctions Anynet+.
• Vérifiez que le câble HDMI est bien connecté.
• Vérifiez que l’option Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est définie sur Activé
dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet+.
• Lancez une nouvelle recherche d’appareils Anynet+.
• Vous pouvez uniquement connecter un appareil Anynet+ à l’aide du
câble HDMI. Il se peut que certains câbles HDMI ne prennent pas
en charge les fonctions Anynet+.
• Si la connexion est interrompue à cause d’une coupure de courant
ou parce que le câble HDMI a été déconnecté, effectuez une
nouvelle recherche d’appareils.
Le son du téléviseur n’est pas
diffusé par le récepteur.
• Connectez le téléviseur au récepteur à l’aide du câble optique.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Utilisation de Mon contenu
Profitez des photos, des fichiers musicaux et/ou des films enregistrés sur un
périphérique de stockage de masse USB de la
classe MSC.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton u / d / l / r pour
sélectionner le menu de votre choix Vidéos,
Photos, Musique et appuyez ensuite sur
ENTERE.
● L’image affi chée peut varier en fonction du
modèle.
Vidéos
Photos
Musique
Source Regarder TV
Mon contenu◀ ▶
Français
❑ Connexion d’un périphérique USB
1. Allumez votre téléviseur.
2. Connectez un périphérique USB contenant
des photos, des fichiers musicaux et/ou des
films au port USB sur le côté du téléviseur.
3. Lorsqu’un périphérique USB est connecté
au téléviseur, une fenêtre contextuelle
s’ouvre. Vous pouvez alors sélectionner Nv.
périph. conn..
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
USB◀ ▶
Français
N Il se peut que le fonctionnement ne soit pas correct avec des fichiers multimédias
sans licence.
N Ce qu’il faut savoir avant d’utiliser la fonction Mon contenu
● Le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) n’est pas pris en charge.
● Le système de fichiers prend en charge les formats FAT16, FAT32 et NTFS.
● Il est possible que certains types d’appareils photo numériques et de
périphériques audio USB ne soient pas compatibles avec ce téléviseur.
● Mon contenu one prend en charge que les périphériques de stockage de
masse USB de la catégorie MSC. Pour la série PDP 550 / 570
Cette dernière
est dédiée aux périphériques de transport de masse uniquement. Il s’agit
notamment des clés USB, lecteurs de cartes Flash et disques durs USB
(les Hub USB ne sont pas pris en charge). Les périphériques doivent être
connectés directement au port USB du téléviseur.
● L’utilisation d’un Hub USB n’est pas prise en charge. Pour la série PDP 450 / 490 ◀ ▶
Français
● Avant de connecter l’appareil au téléviseur, sauvegardez vos fichiers afin
d’éviter qu’ils ne soient endommagés ou que des données ne soient perdues.
SAMSUNG ne saurait, en aucun cas, être tenue responsable de la perte de
données ou de l’endommagement d’un fichier de données.
● Ne déconnectez pas le périphérique USB en cours de chargement.
● Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus le temps d’affichage à l’écran sera
long.
● La résolution JPEG maximale prise en charge est de 15360 x 8640 pixels.
● Pour les fichiers non pris en charge ou endommagés, le message “Format de
fichier inconnu” s’affiche.
● Si le critère de tri est défini sur Aff. de base, il est possible d’afficher jusqu’à
1000 fichiers dans chaque dossier.
● Si le nombre de fichiers et dossiers enregistrés sur un périphérique de stockage
USB est supérieur à environ 4000, certains peuvent ne pas apparaître et
certains dossiers sont susceptibles de ne pas pouvoir être ouverts.◀ ▶
Français
● Les fichiers MP3 avec gestion des droits numériques (DRM) téléchargés à partir
d’un site payant ne peuvent pas être lus. La technologie de gestion des droits
numériques (DRM) prend en charge la création, la distribution et la gestion du
contenu de manière intégrée et complète, y compris la protection des droits et
des intérêts des fournisseurs de contenu, la prévention de la copie illégale du
contenu, ainsi que la gestion de la facturation et des règlements.
● Si plusieurs périphériques PTP sont connectés, vous ne pouvez en utiliser
qu’un à la fois.
● Si plusieurs périphériques MSC sont connectés, il se peut que certains d’entre
eux ne soient pas reconnus. Un périphérique USB nécessitant beaucoup de
puissance (plus de 500mA / 5V) ne sera peut-être pas pris en charge.
● Si un message d’avertissement de surcharge s’affiche lorsque vous connectez
ou utilisez un périphérique USB, il se peut que le périphérique ne soit pas
reconnu ou qu’il fonctionne mal.◀ ▶
Français
● Si aucune entrée n’a été reçue au cours de la période définie dans le paramètre
Temps protection auto, l’économiseur d’écran s’active.
● Le mode d’économie d’énergie de certains disques durs externes peut être
désactivé automatiquement lors d’une connexion au téléviseur.
● Si un câble d’extension USB est utilisé, il se peut que le périphérique USB ne
soit pas reconnu ou que les fichiers qui y sont stockés ne soient pas lus.
● Si un périphérique USB connecté au téléviseur n’est pas reconnu, si la liste des
fichiers qui y sont stockés est corrompue ou si un fichier de la liste est illisible,
connectez le périphérique en question à l’ordinateur, formatez le périphérique
et vérifiez la connexion.
● Si un fichier supprimé depuis le PC apparaît encore lors de l’utilisation de Mon
contenu, utilisez la fonction “Vider la Corbeille” de l’ordinateur pour supprimer
définitivement ce fichier.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Affichage
Accédez au fichier souhaité à l’aide des boutons l / r / u / d, puis appuyez sur
le bouton ENTERE ou � (Lecture). La lecture du fichier commence. L’écran
Mon contenu peut varier en fonction du mode d’accès utilisé.
Information: Affiche la catégorie
contente choisie (la Musique,
par exemple), l’artifice
(Le trajet d’USB, par exemple),
le nom de chemise / dossier, la
page, et critères de sorte.
Mode Contenu / Nom périph.:
Vous pouvez choisir la Catégorie
Contente désirée ou l’Artifice.
Boutons d’opération:
● { Jaune (mode Edit): Vous permet de choisir la musique en vérifiant les
dossiers que vous voulez jouer. Seulement disponible dans la Musique.
● � / µ (Page): permet de passer à la page suivante ou précédente.
● T Outils: affiche le menu d’options.
● R Retour: permet de passer à l’étape précédente..
Section Liste
des fichiers: Les
dossiers d’étalages
ou les chemises
classées selon les
critères vous pouvez
choisir.
{ Mode édit. T Outils R Retour
Musique | SUM
⁄ Folder Name > File Name
1/100 pages
Vue Dossier
Musique_3
Pas de chanteur
Musique_4
Pas de chanteur
Musique_2
Pas de chanteur
Musique_5
Pas de chanteur
Musique_6
Pas de chanteur
Musique_7
Pas de chanteur
Musique_8
Pas de chanteur
Musique_9
Pas de chanteur
Musique_10
Pas de chanteur
Musique_1
Pas de chanteur◀ ▶
Français
■ Vidéos
Lecture de vidéos
1. Appuyez sur le bouton l / r / u / d pour
sélectionner la vidéo de votre choix dans la
liste.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou �
(Lecture).
– Le fichier sélectionné s’affiche en haut
de l’écran, avec le temps de lecture.
– Si les informations sur la durée de la vidéo sont inconnues, la durée de
lecture et la barre de progression ne s’affichent pas.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
L Passer T Outils R Retour◀ ▶
Français
– Pendant la lecture vidéo, vous pouvez effectuer des recherches à l’aide des
boutons l et r.
– Vous pouvez utiliser les boutons � (retour rapide) et µ (avance rapide)
en cours de lecture.
N Ce mode vous permet de profiter des séquences vidéo d’un jeu vidéo, mais
pas de jouer au jeu proprement dit.
● Formats de sous-titres pris en charge
Nom Extension de fichier Format
Texte temporel MPEG-4 .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt chaînes
SubViewer .sub chaînes
Micro DVD .sub ou .txt chaînes◀ ▶
Français
● Formats vidéo pris en charge
Extension de
fichier
Conteneur Codec vidéo Résolution
Fréquence
d’images
(i / s)
Débit
binaire
(Mbit / s)
Codec audio
*.avi
*.mkv
AVI MKV
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8
MP3 / AC3
/ LPCM /
ADPCM /
DTS Core
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8
Motion JPEG 640 x 480 6 ~ 30 8
*.asf ASF
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8
MP3 / AC3
/ LPCM /
ADPCM /
WMA
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8
Motion JPEG 640 x 480 6 ~ 30 8
*.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA
*.mp4 MP4
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 MP3 /
ADPCM /
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 AAC◀ ▶
Français
Extension de
fichier
Conteneur Codec vidéo Résolution
Fréquence
d’images
(i / s)
Débit
binaire
(Mbit / s)
Codec audio
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 ADPCM /
AAC / HEAAC
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8
*.vro VRO VOB
MPEG1 1920 x 1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG
MPEG2 1920 x 1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 / LPCM
*.mpg,
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 1920 x 1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
AC3 / MPEG
/ LPCM /
AAC
MPEG2 1920 x 1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
H.264 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2 1920 x 1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
AC3 / AAC /
MP3 / DD+ /
HE-AAC
H.264 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25
VC1 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25◀ ▶
Français
Décodeur vidéo Décodeur audio
• Prise en charge jusqu’à la norme H.264,
Level 4.1
• Les normes H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP
/ MP / AP L4 et AVCHD ne sont pas prises en
charge.
• MPEG4 SP, ASP :
− Résolution inférieure à 1280 x 720 :
60 images max.
− Résolution supérieure à 1280 x 720 :
30 images max.
• GMC n’est pas pris en charge.
• Prise en charge jusqu’à WMA 7, 8, 9, STD
• WMA 9 PRO ne prend pas en charge l’audio
deux canaux, multicanaux ou sans perte.
• Le taux d’échantillonnage WMA 22 050 Hz
mono n’est pas pris en charge.◀ ▶
Français
Autres restrictions
N Remarque
● Le contenu vidéo ne sera pas lu, ou ne sera pas lu correctement, si une erreur
est présente dans le contenu ou sur le suport.
● Il se peut que le son ou la vidéo ne fonctionne pas si le contenu présente un
débit binaire / une fréquence d’images standard supérieur aux taux d’images
par seconde repris dans le tableau ci-dessus.
● Si une erreur survient dans la table d’index, la fonction de recherche (passer)
n’est pas prise en charge.
● Il est possible que la lecture d’un fichier vidéo via une connexion réseau soit
saccadée. Pour la série PDP 550 / 570
● Le contenu vidéo ne peut pas être lu si plusieurs contenus existent dans un
fichier.
● Certaines périphériques USB / caméra numériques peuvent ne pas être
compatibles avec la lecture.
● Si vous lisez une vidéo sur une connexion réseau, des saccades risquent
d’apparaître.◀ ▶
Français
■ Musique
Lecture de musique
1. Appuyez sur le bouton l / r / u / d pour
sélectionner le fichier musical de votre choix
dans la liste.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou �
(Lecture).
– Vous pouvez utiliser les boutons �
(retour rapide) et µ (avance rapide) en
cours de lecture.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
E Pause L Page T Outils R Retour
Musique
SUM
1/2◀ ▶
Français
N Seuls les fichiers portant l’extension MP3 sont affichés. Les fichiers portant
d’autres extensions ne s’affichent pas, même s’ils sont enregistrés sur le même
périphérique USB.
N Si le son est déformé lors de la lecture de fichiers MP3, réglez l’option
Egaliseur dans le menu Son. (Un fichier MP3 surmodulé peut être à l’origine
d’un problème sonore.)◀ ▶
Français
Lecture des fichiers musicaux sélectionnés
1. Appuyez sur le bouton { (Mode édit.).
2. Sélectionnez le fichier musical de votre choix.
N Le symbole c s’affiche à gauche des fichiers sélectionnés.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS et sélectionnez ensuite Lire contenu
sélectionné.
N Vous pouvez sélectionner ou désélectionner toute la musique en appuyant
sur Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout. ◀ ▶
Français
■ Photos
Visualisation d’une photo (ou d’un diaporama)
1. Appuyez sur le bouton l / r / u / d pour
sélectionner la photo de votre choix dans la
liste.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
● Lorsqu’une photo sélectionnée est
affichée, appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE pour lancer le diaporama.
● Pendant le diaporama, tous les fichiers de la liste sont affichés dans l’ordre.
● Le diaporama démarre automatiquement lorsque vous appuyez sur le
bouton � (Lecture) dans la liste des fichiers.
● L’image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle.
E Pause L Précéd. /Suivant T Outils R Retour
Normal◀ ▶
Français
N Des fichiers musicaux peuvent être lus automatiquement pendant le diaporama,
si l’option Fond musical est définie sur Activé.
N Il n’est pas possible de changer le Fond musical tant que le chargement de la
musique de fond n’est pas terminé.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Mon contenu - Fonctions supplémentaires
Menu d’options pour la lecture de Vidéos / Musique / Photos
Pendant la lecture d’un fichier, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
Catégorie Fonctionnement Vidéos Musique Photos
Recherche titre
Vous permet de passer
directement à un autre titre. c
Recher. temps
Vous pouvez parcourir le film à
l’aide des boutons l et r par
intervalles de 10 secondes.
c
Mode aléatoire
Vous pouvez lire les fichiers
musicaux de manière aléatoire. c
Mode Répétition
Vous pouvez lire des fichiers
musicaux et vidéo en boucle. c c
Format de l’image
Vous permet de régler la taille
de l’image en fonction de vos
préférences.
c◀ ▶
Français
Catégorie Fonctionnement Vidéos Musique Photos
Mode Image
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres
d’image. c c
Mode Son
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres
sonores. c c c
Langue des soustitres
Vous pouvez afficher des soustitres. Vous pouvez sélectionner
une langue de sous-titrage
spécifique si le fichier en contient
plusieurs.
c
Param. de sous-titre
Vous pouvez visionner la vidéo
avec des sous-titres. Cette
fonction n’est opérationnelle
que si les sous-titres possèdent
le même nom de fichier que la
vidéo.
c◀ ▶
Français
Catégorie Fonctionnement Vidéos Musique Photos
Audio
Vous pouvez regarder une vidéo
dans une des langues prises
en charge. Cette fonction n’est
active que lors de la lecture de
fichiers de type streaming prenant
en charge plusieurs formats
audio.
c
Lancer le diaporama
/ Suspendre
diaporama
Vous pouvez lancer ou suspendre
la lecture d’un diaporama. c
Vit. diaporama
Vous pouvez sélectionner la
vitesse du diaporama pendant sa
diffusion.
c
Fond musical
Vous pouvez activer/désactiver le
fond musical d’un diaporama. c
Paramètres de
musique de fond
Vous pouvez sélectionner le fond
musical d’un diaporama. c◀ ▶
Français
Catégorie Fonctionnement Vidéos Musique Photos
Zoom
Vous pouvez zoomer sur les
images lorsque vous êtes en
mode Plein écran.
c
Pivoter
Vous pouvez faire pivoter les
images lorsque vous êtes en
mode Plein écran.
c
Information
Vous pouvez afficher des
informations détaillées sur le
fichier lu.
c c c◀ ▶
Français
❑ Fonction télétexte
La page d’index du télétexte contient des instructions sur l’utilisation du service.
Pour que les informations du télétexte s’affichent correctement, la réception des
chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des informations pourraient manquer ou
certaines pages ne pas s’afficher.
N Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les boutons
numériques de la télécommande.
Informations supplémentaires◀ ▶
Français
/
(Télétexte activé /
mixte / désactivé)
Active le mode télétexte pour la chaîne choisie. Appuyez deux fois sur ce bouton pour
superposer le mode Télétexte à l’émission en cours de diffusion. Appuyez sur le bouton
une nouvelle fois pour quitter le système télétexte.
8
(mémoriser)
Permet d’enregistrer les pages de télétexte.
4
(taille)
Permet d’afficher la moitié supérieure de l’écran en caractères deux fois plus grands.
Pour afficher le texte dans la moitié inférieure de l’écran, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur
ce bouton. Pour rétablir l’affichage normal, appuyez dessus une fois de plus.
9
(en attente)
Arrête l’affichage sur la page en cours, au cas où plusieurs pages supplémentaires
suivraient automatiquement. Pour annuler, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche.◀ ▶
Français
Boutons de couleur
(rouge, vert, jaune,
bleu)
Si la société de radiodiffusion utilise le système FASTEXT, les différents sujets traités
dans la page télétexte disposent d’un code couleur et peuvent être sélectionnés à l’aide
des boutons de couleur de la télécommande. Appuyez sur la couleur correspondant au
sujet de votre choix. Une nouvelle page avec code couleur est affichée. Les éléments
peuvent être sélectionnés de la même manière. Pour afficher la page précédente ou la
page suivante, appuyez sur le bouton de couleur correspondant.
0
(mode)
Permet de sélectionner le mode Télétexte (LIST / FLOF). Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton
alors que le mode LIST est sélectionné, il passe en mode d’enregistrement de liste.
Dans ce mode, vous pouvez enregistrer une page télétexte dans une liste à l’aide du
bouton 8 (mémoriser).
1
(page secondaire)
(taille)
Permet d’afficher une page secondaire.
2
(haut de page)
Permet d’afficher la page suivante du télétexte.◀ ▶
Français
3
(bas de page)
Permet d’afficher la page précédente du Télétexte.
6
(index)
Permet d’afficher la page d’index du télétexte (sommaire).
5
(afficher)
Affiche le texte masqué (les réponses à un questionnaire, par exemple). Pour rétablir le
mode d’affichage normal, appuyez de nouveau sur ce bouton.
7
(annuler)
Réduit l’écran télétexte pour le superposer à l’émission en cours.◀ ▶
Français
Page de Télétexte type
Catégorie Contenu
A Numéro de la page sélectionnée.
B Identité de la chaîne émettrice.
C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche.
D Date et heure.
E Texte.
F Informations sur l’état. Informations FASTEXT.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Résolution des problèmes
Si vous avez des questions sur le téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste
ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces solutions de dépannage ne s’applique à votre
problème, rendez-vous sur le site “www.samsung.com”, puis cliquez sur
Assistance ou contactez le centre d’appels, dont les coordonnées figurent sur la
dernière page de ce manuel.
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Qualité de l’image • Exécutez tout d’abord le Test de l’image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur
affiche correctement l’image de test. (accédez au mode MENU -
Assistance - Diagnost. auto. - Test de l’image) Si l’image de test
s’affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou
au signal.
La qualité de l’image affichée
par le téléviseur n’est pas aussi
bonne que dans le magasin.
• Si vous possédez un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique,
passez à un décodeur numérique. Utilisez des câbles HDMI ou
Composant pour fournir une qualité d’image HD (high definition).
• Abonnés câble / satellite: essayez les chaînes HD dans la liste des
canaux.
• Connexion de l’antenne: essayez les chaînes HD après avoir effectué
une mémorisation automatique.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
L’image est déformée : erreur
macrobloc, petit bloc, points,
pixelisation.
• La compression de contenu vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de
l’image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et
les films d’action.
• Un niveau de signal faible ou de mauvaise qualité peut déformer l’image.
Il ne s’agit pas d’un problème lié au téléviseur.
• Utiliser un téléphone portable à proximité d’un téléviseur (jusqu’à
1 m environ) peut constituer une source de parasites visuels sur les
téléviseurs analogiques et numériques.
Couleur incorrecte ou
manquante.
• Si vous utilisez une connexion Composant, vérifiez que les câbles sont
connectés aux prises adéquates. Des raccordements desserrés ou
incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au niveau de la couleur ou
un écran vide.
La couleur ou la luminosité est
de mauvaise qualité.
• Réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (accédez au mode
Image / Couleur / Luminosité / Netteté).
• Réglez l’option Mode éco. dans le menu du téléviseur (accédez à
MENU – Système – Solution Eco – Mode éco.).
• Essayez de réinitialiser l’image pour afficher ses paramètres par défaut
(accédez à MENU - Image - Réinitialisation de l’image).◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Il y a une ligne pointillée sur les
bords de l’écran.
• Si le format de l’image est défini sur Adapter à écran, réglez le
paramètre sur 16:9.
• Changez la résolution du décodeur câble / satellite.
L’image est en noir et blanc. • Si vous utilisez une entrée composite AV, connectez le câble vidéo (jaune)
au connecteur vert de l’entrée Composant 1 du téléviseur.
Lors d’un changement de
chaîne, l’image se bloque, est
déformée ou s’affiche avec un
léger décalage.
• En cas de raccordement avec le décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser
ce dernier (rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation secteur et patientez
jusqu’au redémarrage du décodeur câble. Cette opération peut durer
jusqu’à 20 minutes).
• Réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p.
Qualité sonore Exécutez tout d’abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de
votre téléviseur fonctionne correctement. (Accédez à MENU - Assistance
- Diagnost. auto. - Test du son.)
Si le système audio fonctionne correctement (OK), le problème lié au son
peut provenir de la source ou du signal.
Il n’y a aucun son ou celuici est trop faible au volume
maximum.
• Vérifiez le volume du périphérique (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur,
DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) connecté à votre téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
La qualité d’image est bonne,
mais aucun son n’est émis.
• Réglez l’option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le
menu Son.
• Si vous utilisez un appareil externe, assurez-vous que les câbles audio
sont raccordés aux prises d’entrée audio appropriées du téléviseur.
• Si vous utilisez un périphérique externe, vérifiez l’option de sortie audio
du périphérique. (Par exemple, il se peut que vous deviez remplacer
l’option audio de votre décodeur câble par HDMI si vous utilisez la
connexion HDMI.)
• Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis.
• Si votre téléviseur est équipé d’une prise casque, assurez-vous que rien
n’y est connecté.
• Redémarrez le périphérique connecté en rebranchant le câble
d’alimentation du périphérique.
Les haut-parleurs émettent un
son inhabituel.
• Vérifiez les connexions des câbles. Vérifiez qu’aucun câble vidéo n’est
raccordé à une entrée audio.
• Pour les connexions de l’antenne ou du câble, vérifiez l’intensité du
signal. Un niveau de signal faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Aucune image, aucune vidéo
Le téléviseur s’éteint
automatiquement.
• Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est réglée sur Arrêt dans le menu
Système.
• Si votre PC est connecté au téléviseur, vérifiez les paramètres
d’alimentation de votre PC.
• Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation secteur est branché correctement
sur la prise murale et sur le téléviseur.
• Lorsque vous regardez la télévision à partir d’une antenne ou d’une
connexion avec câble, le téléviseur s’éteint après 10 à 15 minutes s’il ne
reçoit aucun signal.
Connexion RF (câble / antenne)
Le téléviseur ne reçoit pas
toutes les chaînes.
• Vérifiez que le câble coaxial est raccordé correctement.
• Essayez la fonction Plug & Play (configuration initiale) pour ajouter
des chaînes disponibles à la liste. Accédez à MENU - Système -
Plug & Play (configuration initiale) et attendez que toutes les chaînes
disponibles soient mémorisées.
• Vérifiez que l’antenne est positionnée correctement.
L’image est déformée : erreur
macrobloc, petit bloc, points,
pixelisation.
• La compression de contenu vidéo peut provoquer une déformation de
l’image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et
les films d’action.
• Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l’image. Ce n’est pas un
problème lié au téléviseur.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Connexion PC
Le message “Mode non pris en
charge” est affiché.
• Réglez la résolution de sortie de votre PC de telle sorte qu’elle
corresponde aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur.
“PC” reste affiché dans la
liste Source, même si aucun
ordinateur n’est connecté.
• Cela est tout à fait normal ; la mention “PC” apparaît toujours dans la
liste Source.
La qualité de la vidéo est
bonne, mais aucun son n’est
émis.
• Si vous utilisez une connexion HDMI, vérifiez le paramètre de sortie
audio sur votre PC.
Connexion réseau Pour les séries PDP 550 et 570
La connexion au réseau sans fil
a échoué.
• La clé USB sans fil Samsung est requise pour utiliser un réseau sans fil.
• Assurez-vous que le paramètre de connexion réseau est défini sur Sans
fil.
• Assurez-vous que le téléviseur est connecté à un routeur IP sans fil.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Autres
L’image ne s’affiche pas en
mode plein écran.
• Des barres noires s’affichent de chaque côté des chaînes HD lors de
l’affichage de contenu SD (4:3) mis à niveau.
• Des barres noires s’affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format
d’image est différent de celui de votre téléviseur.
• Définissez les options de format d’image de votre appareil externe ou
téléviseur sur Plein écran.
Le téléviseur à écran plasma
émet un bourdonnement.
• En règle générale, les téléviseurs à écran plasma émettent un léger
bourdonnement. Cela est tout à fait normal ! Ce bruit résulte des
charges électriques qui sont utilisées pour créer les images sur l’écran.
• Si le bourdonnement est fort, il se peut que la luminosité que vous avez
réglée soit trop élevée. Essayez de réduire la luminosité.
• Le bourdonnement peut également être provoqué par une trop
grande proximité entre un mur ou une autre surface dure et l’arrière de
votre téléviseur à écran plasma. Vous pouvez également essayer de
réacheminer vos câbles de connexion.
• Une installation incorrecte de la fixation murale peut créer un bruit
excessif.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Problème de rémanence de
l’image (brûlures).
• Pour réduire le risque de brûlure d’écran, cet écran est équipé d’une
technologie de réduction des brûlures. Cette technologie (Pixel Shift)
permet de régler le mouvement de l’image de bas en haut (ligne
verticale) et de gauche à droite (point horizontal).
Le message “Mode non pris en
charge” est affiché.
• Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution
de sortie de l’appareil externe en conséquence. Reportez-vous aux
paramètres de résolution indiqués dans le manuel utilisateur.
Une odeur de plastique se
dégage du téléviseur.
• Cette odeur est normale et s’atténuera avec le temps.
L’option Informations de
signal du téléviseur n’est pas
disponible dans le menu de
test du diagnostic automatique.
• Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’avec des chaînes numériques
diffusées sur une connexion d’antenne/RF/coaxiale.
Le téléviseur penche sur le
côté.
• Retirez le support de base du téléviseur et remontez-le.
Le menu des chaînes est grisé
(indisponible).
• Le menu Canal n’est disponible que si la source TV est sélectionnée.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Vos paramètres sont perdus
après 30 minutes ou à chaque
mise hors tension du téléviseur.
• Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres audio et vidéo
sont réinitialisés toutes les 30 minutes. Remplacez le mode Enr. démo
en Util. domicile dans la procédure Plug & Play. Appuyez sur le
bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV et accédez à MENU →
Système → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
Perte intermittente du signal
audio ou vidéo.
• Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; rebranchez-les au besoin.
• Une perte de l’image ou du son peut être provoquée par l’utilisation
de câbles trop rigides ou épais. Veillez à ce que les câbles soient
suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long terme. En cas
d’installation du téléviseur en position murale, nous vous recommandons
d’utiliser des câbles avec des connecteurs de 90 degrés.
Des petites particules sont
visibles lorsque vous observez
de près le bord du cadre du
téléviseur.
• Elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un
défaut.◀ ▶
Français
Problèmes Solutions et explications
Message “Scramble signal” ou
“Weak Signal / No Signal”.
• Si vous utilisez une CARTE CAM (CI / CI+), vérifiez qu’elle est installée
dans la fente de l’interface commune.
• Si le problème persiste, retirez la CARTE CAM du téléviseur et
réintroduisez-la dans la fente.
Le menu PIP n’est pas
disponible.
• La fonctionnalité PIP n’est disponible que lorsque vous utilisez une
source HDMI, PC ou Composant.
Le téléviseur s’est rallumé
45 minutes après sa mise hors
tension.
• Cela est tout à fait normal. Le téléviseur exécute, en effet, la fonction de
liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à niveau le microprogramme téléchargé
au cours de son utilisation.
Problèmes récurrents liés à
l’image/au son.
• Vérifiez et modifiez le signal/la source.
Il peut y avoir une réaction entre
les coussinets en caoutchouc
situés sur le support de base et
la finition de certains meubles.
• Pour éviter que cela ne se produise, utilisez des coussinets de feutre sur
toute surface du téléviseur en contact direct avec un meuble.◀ ▶
Français
N Certaines des images et des fonctions ci-dessus sont uniquement disponibles sur
des modèles spécifiques.
N Vous pouvez maintenir votre téléviseur dans des conditions optimales en le mettant
à niveau avec le dernier micrologiciel (samsung.com → Support → Downloads)
par le biais d’un périphérique USB.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Fente INTERFACE COMMUNE pour les connexions
Pour regarder les chaînes payantes, la carte d’interface commune (CI (CI+) CARD)
doit être insérée.
● Si vous ne l’insérez pas, certaines chaînes afficheront
le message “Signal brouillé”.
● Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro
de téléphone, l’ID de la carte d’interface commune
(CI ou CI+), l’ID de l’hôte et d’autres informations
s’afficheront après 2 ou 3 minutes. Si, message
d’erreur s’affiche, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès.
● Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les canaux est terminée, le message
“Mise à jour terminée” s’affiche, indiquant que la liste des chaînes est mise à jour.◀ ▶
Français
N Remarque
● Vous devez vous procurer une carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD)
auprès d’un fournisseur local de diffusion.
● Lorsque vous sortez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD), tirez-la
délicatement. Une chute pourrait en effet l’endommager.
● Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) dans le sens indiqué sur
celle-ci.
● L’emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du
modèle.
● La carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n’est pas prise en charge dans
certains pays et certaines régions ; vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé.◀ ▶
Français
● Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez le fournisseur d’accès.
● Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI ou CI+ CARD), qui prend en charge
les paramètres actuels de l’antenne. L’image sera déformée, voire invisible.
● Lorsque vous regardez la télévision par satellite, retirez la carte CI(CI+) de la
diffusion hertzienne ou par câble. L’image sera déformée, voire invisible. (Pour
le satellite)◀ ▶
Français
❑ Verrou antivol Kensington
Le verrou antivol Kensington n’est pas
fourni par Samsung. L’antivol Kensington
est un dispositif utilisé pour fixer
physiquement le système lorsqu’il est
utilisé dans un endroit public. L’aspect
du verrou et la méthode de verrouillage
peuvent différer de l’illustration en fonction
du fabricant. Consultez le manuel fourni avec le verrou Kensington pour obtenir
des instructions d’utilisation supplémentaires.
N Une icône “K” est présente à l’arrière du téléviseur. Un verrou Kensington se
trouve à côté de l’icône “K”.
1
◀ ▶
Français
Pour vérrouiller l’appareil, procédez comme suit:
1. Enroulez le câble de verrouillage Kensington autour d’un objet large et fixe tel
qu’un bureau ou une chaise.
2. Glissez le bout du câble auquel est attaché le verrou dans la boucle du câble
de verrouillage Kensington.
3. Insérez le dispositif de verrouillage dans la fente Kensington de l’appareil 1.
4. Fermez le verrou.
N Ces instructions sont d’ordre général. Pour de plus amples informations,
consultez le manuel d’utilisation fourni avec le dispositif de verrouillage.
N Le dispositif de verrouillage est vendu séparément.
N L’emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle.◀ ▶
Français
❑ Licence
TheaterSound, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TheaterSound technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Lab, Inc.
Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des
marques commerciales de Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.◀
Français
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
licence.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified®
device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Avis concernant les Licences libres
En cas d’utilisation d’un logiciel libre, des Licences libres sont disponibles dans le menu du produit.
L’avis concernant les Licences libres est uniquement disponible en anglais.
E-MANUAL
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung
product. To receive more complete service,
please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model __________ Serial No.____________Contents
Channel
• Using the INFO button
(Now & Next guide) 3
• Using the Channel Menu 4
• Using the Channel 14
• Memorising Channels 20
• Using the Channel (for Satellite TV) 27
• Memorising Channels (for Satellite TV) 32
• Other Features 47
Basic Features
• Changing the Preset Picture Mode 49
• Adjusting Picture Settings 50
• Changing the Picture Size 51
• Changing the Picture Options 55
• Setting up the TV with Your PC 62
• Changing the Preset Sound Mode 66
• Adjusting Sound Settings 67
Preference
• Connecting to a Wired Network 77
• Setting the Network 81
• Connecting to a Wireless Network 88
• Setting the Time 112
• Locking Programmes 120
• Economical Solutions 123
• Picture In Picture (PIP) 125
• Other Features 128
• Support Menu 139
Advanced Features
• Using the 3D function 147
• About AllShare™ 159
• Setting Up AllShare™ 161
• Setting Up Anynet+ 165
• Anynet+ 167
• Switching between Anynet+ Devices 172
• Listening through a Receiver 174
• Troubleshooting for Anynet+ 176
• Using the My Downloads 179
• Connecting a USB Device 180
• Screen Display 185
• Videos 186
• Music 192
• Photos 195
• My Downloads - Additional Functions 197
Other Information
• Teletext Feature 201
• Troubleshooting 206
• CONNECTIONS COMMON
INTERFACE Slot 217
• Anti-theft Kensington Lock 220
• Licence 222▶
English
❑ Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide)
The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video
settings.
The Now & Next guide shows daily TV programme information for each channel
according to the broadcasting time.
● Scroll l, r to view information for a desired programme while watching the
current channel.
● Scroll u, d to view information for other channels. If you want to move to the
currently selected channel, press the ENTERE button.
, Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information a Information
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
18:00 ~ 6:00
abc1
DTV Air
15
Channel◀ ▶
English
❑ Using the Channel Menu
O MENUm → Support → Contents Home → ENTERE
Press the CONTENT button to select Watch TV, and then select the menu you
want to use. Each screen will be displayed.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Watch TV
Guide
Schedule Manager
Channel List
Channel Manager
My Downloads Source◀ ▶
English
■ Guide
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by broadcasters.
Using programme schedules provided by broadcasters, you can specify
programmes you want to watch in advance so that the channel automatically
changes to the selected programme channel at the specified time. Programme
entries may appear blank or out of date depending on a channel status.◀ ▶
English
Using Channel View
a Red (Sche. Mgr): Displays the
Schedule Manager.
b Green (-24 Hours): Viewing the list
of programmes to be broadcasted
before 24 hours.
{ Yellow (+24 Hours): Viewing the
list of programmes to be broadcasted
after 24 hours. ● The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
a Sche. Mgr { +24 Hours } Ch Mode ; Information k Page E Watch
DTV Air 05.1 Globo HD
TELA QUENTE (HD)
10:05 pm - 12:10 pm
10
DESVENTURAS EM SERIE (HD)
Today 16:00 16:30 17:00 17:30
Guide 16:02 Tue 19 Jul
Channel View - All Channels
Programmes resume at 06:00
Home and...
No Information
QVC Selection
No Information
04 Globo HD
05 DiscoveryH&L
06 TV GloboSD
07 price-drop.tv
08 QVC
09 R4DTT
Tine Team
No Information Fiv... Dark Angel
American Chopper◀ ▶
English
} Blue (Ch.Mode): Select the type of channels you want to display on the
Channel View window.
; Information: Displays details of the selected programme.
k Page: Move to next or previous page.
EWatch / Schedule: When selecting the current programme, you can watch
the selected programme. / When the selecting the next programme, you can
reserve the selected programme.◀ ▶
English
■ Schedule Manager
O CONTENT → Schedule Manager → ENTERE
You can view, modify or delete a channel you have reserved to watch.
Using the Timer Viewing
You can set a desired channel to be displayed automatically at the intended time. Set
the current time first to use this function.
1. Press the ENTERE button to select Schedule Manager.
2. Press the ENTERE button to add programme to schedule manually. The Timer
Viewing screen appears.◀ ▶
English
3. Press the l / r / u / d buttons to set the Antenna, Channel, Repeat, Date or
Start Time.
● Antenna: Select the desired antenna source.
● Channel: Select the desired channel.
● Repeat: Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday to set at your
convenience. If you select Manual, you can set the day you want.
N The c mark indicates the date is selected.
● Date: you can set the desired date.
N It is available when you select Once in Repeat.◀ ▶
English
● Start Time: You can set the start time you want.
N Press INFO to enter Detailed Information. On the Detailed Information
screen, you can change or cancel a reserved information.
● Cancel Schedules: Cancel a show you have reserved to watch.
● Edit: Change a show you have reserved to watch.
● Return: Return to the previous screen.◀ ▶
English
■ Channel List
You can view all the channel searched.
O When you press the CH LIST button on the
remote control, Channel List screen will be
displayed at once.
O Using the operation buttons with the
Channel List.
● a Red (Antenna): Select the desired
antenna source.
N The option may differ depending on country.
● { Yellow (Programme View / Channel View): Displays the programme when
digital channel is selected. Returns to the channel view.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
Channel List
All
6 M6
9 W9
W9 MUSIC
11 NT1
800 24H TVE
801 arte
802 ATV
803 BBC
804 BBC
805 BBC
Air a Antenna { Programme View L Ch. Mode E Watch k Page ◀ ▶
English
● l r Ch. Mode / Channel: Move to the type of channels you want to display on
the Channel List screen / Change channels.
N The option may differ depending on country.
● EWatch / Information: Watches the channel you select / Displays details of
the selected programme.
● k Page: Move to next or previous page.◀ ▶
English
How to use Timer Viewing in Channel List (digital channels only)
When you set the Timer Viewing in Channel List, you can only set the programme in
Programme View.
1. Press the CH LIST button, then select a desired digital channel.
2. Press the { (Programme View) button.
3. Press the u / d buttons to select the desired programme, then press the
ENTEREInformation button.
4. Select Timer Viewing, then press the ENTERE button when done.
N If you want to cancel Timer Viewing, follow steps 1 through 3. Select Cancel
Schedules.◀ ▶
English
❑ Using the Channel
■ Channel Manager
O CONTENT → Channel Manager →
ENTERE
Edit the favourite channel and set the channels
to Delete, Deselect All or Select All. You
can edit the channel name only for analogue
channels.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
Channel Manager All
Seclected item: 4 Channel Number
2/3 page
Air a Antenna } Sorting k Page E Select T Tools R Return ◀ ▶
English
● ( ) Channels: Select a channel in the All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Analogue
screen. Change the antenna, or channel settings using the menus in the top
right corner of the screen.
● ( ) Favourites 1 to 5: Shows favourite channels.
N Using the colour buttons with the Channel Manager.
● a Red (Antenna): Select the desired antenna source.
● } Blue (Sorting): Changes the list ordered by channel number or name.◀ ▶
English
Channel Status Display Icons
Icon Operations
a An analogue channel.
c A channel selected.
F A channel set as a favourite.
Channel Manager Option Menu t
Set each channel using the Channel Manager menu options (Watch, Add to
Favourites / Edit Favourites, Lock / Unlock, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel
Number, Delete, Select All / Deselect All). Option menu items may differ depending
on the channel status.◀ ▶
English
1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button.
2. Select a function and change its settings.
● Watch: Watch the selected channel.
● Add to Favourites / Edit Favourites: Set channels you watch frequently as
favourites / Add or Delete the selected channel in Favourites 1-5.
1. Select the Add to Favourites / Edit Favourites, then press the ENTERE
button.
N If the channel is already added to favourite channel, Edit Favourites will be
shown.◀ ▶
English
2. Press the ENTERE button to select Favourites 1 to 5, then press the OK
button.
N One favourite channel can be added in several of Favourites among
Favourites 1 to 5.
● Lock / Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and
viewed.
N This function is available only when the Channel Lock is set to On.◀ ▶
English
● Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only): Assign your own channel name.
N This function may not support depending on the region.
● Edit Channel Number: Edit the number by pressing the number buttons desired.
N This function may not support depending on the region.
● Delete: Delete a channel to display the channels you want.
● Select All: Select all the channels.◀ ▶
English
❑ Memorising Channels
O MENUm → Channel → ENTERE
■
N
Antenna
The option may differ depending on country. t
Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels, you must
specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV.◀ ▶
English
■ Country (depending on the country)
N The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N Select your country so that the TV can correctly auto-tune the broadcasting
channels.
● Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels.
● Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue channels.
■ Auto Tuning
N Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or
desired programme numbers. If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock
function, the PIN input window appears.◀ ▶
English
● Antenna Source: Select the antenna source to memorise. The option may
differ depending on country.
● Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to
memorise. When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue or Digital: Provide a
value to scan for cable channels.
● Search Mode (Full / Network / Quick): Scans for all channels with active
broadcast stations and stores them in the TV.
N If you select Quick, you can set up the Network, Network ID, Frequency,
Modulation, and Symbol Rate manually by pressing the button on the remote
control.
● Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network ID setting mode among Auto
or Manual.◀ ▶
English
● Network ID: When Network is Manual, you can set up Network ID using the
numeric buttons.
● Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country)
● Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
● Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
■ Cable Search Option
(depending on the country)
Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable
network search.◀ ▶
English
■ Manual Tuning
Scans for a channel manually and stores in the TV.
N If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function, the PIN input window
appears.
● Digital Channel Tuning: Scans for a digital channel.
1. Press the a button to select New.
N When selecting Antenna → Air: Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth
N When selecting Antenna → Cable: Frequency, Modulation, Symbol
Rate◀ ▶
English
2. Press the d button to select Search. When scanning has finished, a
channel is updated in the channel list.
● Analogue Channel Tuning: Scans for a analogue channel.
1. Press the a button to select New.
2. Set the Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel and
Search.
3. Press the d button to select Store. When scanning has finished, a channel
is updated in the channel list.◀ ▶
English
N Channel mode
● P (programme mode): When tuning is complete, the broadcasting stations
in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P0 to P99. You
can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode.
● C (aerial channel mode) / S (cable channel mode): These two modes allow
you to select a channel by entering the assigned number for each aerial
broadcasting station or cable channel.◀ ▶
English
❑ Using the Channel (for Satellite TV)
for PDP 570
■ Channel Manager
O CONTENT → Channel Manager →
ENTERE
Edit the favourite channel and set the channels
to Delete, Deselect All or Select All. You
can edit the channel name only for analogue
channels.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
Channel Manager All
Seclected item: 4 Channel Number
2/3 page
Air a Antenna } Sorting k Page E Select T Tools R Return ◀ ▶
English
● ( ) Channels: Select a channel in the All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Analogue
screen. Change the antenna, or channel settings using the menus in the top
right corner of the screen.
● ( ) Favourites 1 to 5: Shows favourite channels.
N Using the colour buttons with the Channel Manager.
● a Red (Antenna): Select the desired antenna source.
● } Blue (Sorting): Changes the list ordered by number or name.◀ ▶
English
Channel Status Display Icons
Icon Operations
a An analogue channel.
c A channel selected.
F A channel set as a favourite.
Channel Manager Option Menu t
Set each channel using the Channel Manager menu options (Watch, Add to
Favourites / Edit Favourites, Lock / Unlock, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel
Number, Delete, Select All / Deselect All). Option menu items may differ depending
on the channel status.◀ ▶
English
1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button.
2. Select a function and change its settings.
● Watch: Watch the selected channel.
● Add to Favourites / Edit Favourites: Set channels you watch frequently as
favourites.
1. Select the Add to Favourites / Edit Favourites, then press the ENTERE
button.
N If the channel is already added to favourite channel, Edit Favourites will be
shown.◀ ▶
English
2. Press the ENTERE button to select Favourites 1 to 5, then press the OK
button.
N One favourite channel can be added in several of Favourites among
Favourites 1 to 5.
● Delete: Delete a channel to display the channels you want.
● Select All: Select all the channels in the channel list.◀ ▶
English
❑ Memorising Channels (for Satellite TV)
O MENUm → Channel → ENTERE
■
N
Antenna
The option may differ depending on country. t
Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels, you must
specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV.◀ ▶
English
■ Country
N The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N Select your country so that the TV can correctly auto-tune the broadcasting
channels.
● Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels.
● Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue channels.◀ ▶
English
■ Auto Tuning
● Auto Tuning
Scans for a channel automatically and stores in the TV.
N Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or
desired programme numbers. If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock
function, the PIN input window appears.
● Antenna Source: Select the antenna source to memorise. The option may
differ depending on country.◀ ▶
English
● Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to
memorise. When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue or Digital: Provide a
value to scan for cable channels.
● Search Mode (Full / Network / Quick): Scans for all channels with active
broadcast stations and stores them in the TV.
N If you select Quick, you can set up the Network, Network ID, Frequency,
Modulation, and Symbol Rate manually by pressing the button on the remote
control.
● Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network ID setting mode among Auto
or Manual.
● Network ID: When Network is Manual, you can set up Network ID using the
numeric buttons.◀ ▶
English
● Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country)
● Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
● Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
■ Cable Search Option
(depending on the country)
Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable
network search.◀ ▶
English
– Start frequency / Stop Frequency: Set the start or stop frequency. (differs in
each country)
– Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
– Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
● Standby Auto Store (Off / On) for Italy
: Enables or disables auto-tune while TV
is in standby mode.
● Wake-up Timer (1 hour later / 2 hours later / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 /
14:00) for Italy
: Selects the schedule timer to turn the TV on and scan channels
automatically.◀ ▶
English
■ Manual Tuning
Scans for a channel manually and stores in the TV.
N If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function, the PIN input window
appears.
● Transponder: Selects the transponder using the up/down buttons.
● Scan Mode: Selects either free or all channels to store.
● Network Search (Disable / Enable): network search using the up/down
buttons.◀ ▶
English
● Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal.
N Information on a satellite and its transponder is subject to change depending
on the broadcasting conditions.
N When setting is completed, move to Search and press the ENTERE button.
Channel scan is started.◀ ▶
English
■ Satellite System
The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. Satellite System
is available when Antenna is set to Satellite. Before running Auto Store, set
Satellite System. Then channel scan is run normally.
● Satellite Selection: You can choose the satellites for this TV.
● LNB Power (Off / On): Enables or disables the power supply for the LNB.◀ ▶
English
● LNB Settings: Configures the outdoor equipment.
– Transponder: Selects the transponder using the up/down buttons.
– DiSEqC Mode: Selects DiSEqC mode for the selected LNB.
– Lower LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB oscillators to a lower frequency.
– Upper LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB oscillators to a higher frequency.
– Tone 22 kHz (Off / On / Auto): Selects the Tone 22 kHz depending on the
LNB type. For a universal LNB it should be Auto.
– Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal.◀ ▶
English
● SatCR/Unicable Settings: Configure single cable installation.
N This function may not support depending on the region.
– SatCR/Unicable: Enables or disable single cable installation support.
– Slot Number: Select the SatCR user slot number for this receiver.
– Slot Frequency: Enter the appropriate frequency to receive the signal from
SatCR.
– Detect Slot Frequency: Auto-detect the signal frequency for the selected
slot number.
– Verify Slot Frequency: Verify that the frequency entered corresponds to the
selected slot.◀ ▶
English
● Positioner Settings: Configures the antenna positioner.
Positioner (On / Off): Enables or disables the positioned control.
Positioner Type (USALS / DiSEqC 1.2): Sets the positioned type between
DiSEqC 1.2 and USALS (Universal Satellite Automatic Location System).
– My Longitude: Sets the longitude for my location.
– My Latitude: Sets the latitude for my location.
– Satellite Longitude Settings: Sets the longitude of user defined satellites.◀ ▶
English
User Mode: Sets the position of satellite antenna according to each satellite.
If you store the current position of satellite antenna according to a certain
satellite, when the signal of that satellite is needed, the satellite antenna can be
moved to pre-populated position.
– Satellite: Selects the satellite to set the position for.
– Transponder: Selects a transponder from the list for signal reception.
– Moving Mode: Selects the movement mode between discrete and
continuous movement.
– Step Size: Adjusts the step size degrees for the antenna rotation. Step Size
is available when Moving Mode is set to Step.◀ ▶
English
– Go to Stored Position: Rotates the antenna to the stored satellite position.
– Antenna Position: Adjusts and stores the antenna position for the selected
satellite.
– Store Current Position: Stores current position as the selected positioner
limit.
– Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal.◀ ▶
English
Installer Mode: Sets limits to the scope of movement of satellite antenna or
reset the position. Generally, installation guide uses this function.
– Limit Position (East / West): Selects the direction of the positioner Limit.
– Antenna Position: Adjusts and stores the antenna position for the selected
satellite.
– Store Current Position: Stores the current position as the selected
positioner Limit.
– Go to Zero: Moves the antenna to the reference position.
– Reset Positioner Limit: Allows the antenna to rotate over the full arc.
● Reset All Setting (OK / Cancel): All satellite settings will be reset to the initial
values.◀ ▶
English
❑ Other Features
O MENUm → Channel → ENTERE
■ Fine Tune
(analogue channels only)
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done
automatically during the search and store operation. If the signal is weak or
distorted, fine tune the channel manually. Scroll to the left or right until the image is
clear.◀ ▶
English
N Settings are applied to the channel you’re currently watching.
N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk “*” on
the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner.
N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset.
■ Transfer Channel List
The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. Imports or exports
the channel map. You should connect a USB storage to use this function.
● Import from USB: Import channel list from USB.
● Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. this function is available when USB
is connected.◀ ▶
English
❑ Changing the Preset Picture Mode
O MENUm → Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE
■ Picture Mode
Select your preferred picture type.
N When connecting a PC, the Picture Mode is only available the Standard and
Entertain.
● Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
● Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
● Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
● Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games.
N It is only available when connecting a PC.
Basic Features◀ ▶
English
❑ Adjusting Picture Settings
O MENUm → Picture → ENTERE
■ Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Your television has several setting options for picture quality control.
N When you make changes to Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness,
Colour or Tint (G/R) the OSD will be adjusted accordingly.
N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Cell Light, Contrast,
Brightness and Sharpness.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to the
TV.
N Lowering picture brightness reduces power consumption.◀ ▶
English
❑ Changing the Picture Size
O MENUm → Picture → Screen Adjustment → ENTERE
■ Screen Adjustment
● Picture Size: Your cable box / satellite receiver may have its own set of screen
sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use 16:9 mode most of the
time.
Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3.
N Adjusts the Position by using u, d buttons.◀ ▶
English
Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the screen size.
N Adjusts the Zoom or Position by using u, d button.
4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode.
N Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces of borders displayed on
the left, right and centre of the screen may cause image retention (screen
burn) which are not covered by the warranty.
Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p /
1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted.◀ ▶
English
N NOTE
● Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary.
● The available items may differ depending on the selected mode.
● When connecting a PC, only 16:9 and 4:3 modes can be adjusted.
● Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to
an input on the TV.
● If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at
the top, bottom, left and right as in the over scan function.◀ ▶
English
● 4:3 Screen Size (16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3): Available only when picture
size is set to Auto Wide. You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3
WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each European country
requires different picture size.
N Not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode.◀ ▶
English
❑ Changing the Picture Options
■ Advanced Settings
O MENUm → Picture → Advanced Settings → ENTERE
(Advanced Settings are available in Standard / Movie mode)
Compared to previous models, new Samsung TVs have a more precise picture.
N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Gamma and White
Balance.◀ ▶
English
● Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest):
Select the black level to adjust the screen
depth.
● Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium /
High): Adjust the screen contrast.
● Gamma: Adjust the primary colour intensity.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
Advanced Settings
Black Tone : Off r
Dynamic Contrast : Medium
Gamma : 0
RGB Only Mode : Off
Colour Space : Native
White Balance
Flesh Tone : 0
d
U Move EEnter R Return◀ ▶
English
● RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): Displays the Red, Green and
Blue colour for making fine adjustments to the hue and saturation.
● Colour Space (Auto / Native): Adjust the range of colours available to create
the image.
● White Balance: Adjust the colour temperature for a more natural picture.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue)
darkness.
R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness.
Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings.◀ ▶
English
● Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink “Flesh Tone”.
● Edge Enhancement (Off / On): Emphasize object boundaries.
● Motion Lighting (Off / On): Reduce power consumption by brightness control.
N When changing a setting value of Contrast, Motion Lightning will be set to
Off.◀ ▶
English
■ Picture Options
O MENUm → Picture → Picture Options → ENTERE
N When connecting a PC, you can only make
changes to the Colour Tone.
● Colour Tone (Cool / Standard / Warm1 /
Warm2)
N Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated
when the picture mode is Dynamic.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for
each external device connected to an
input on the TV.
● The displayed image may differ depending on
the model.
Picture Options
Colour Tone : Standard r
Digital Noise Filter : Auto
MPEG Noise Filter : Auto
HDMI Black Level : Normal
Film Mode : Off
U Move EEnter R Return◀ ▶
English
● Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto / Auto Visualisation):
If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital
Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the
screen.
N When the signal is weak, try other options until the best picture is displayed.
● Auto Visualisation: When changing analogue channels, displays signal
strength.
N Only available for analogue channels.
N When bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal.
● MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto): Reduces MPEG noise
to provide improved picture quality.◀ ▶
English
● HDMI Black Level (Low / Normal): Selects the black level on the screen to
adjust the screen depth.
N Available only in HDMI mode.
● Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2 / Cinema Smooth for PDP 550 and above
): Sets
the TV to automatically sense and processes film signals from all sources and
adjusts the picture for optimum quality. The Cinema Smooth function is only
activated when HDMI 24Hz signal is inputted.
N Available in TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (1080i).
■ Reset Picture (OK / Cancel)
Resets your current picture mode to its default settings.◀ ▶
English
❑ Setting up the TV with Your PC
Select the input source to PC.
■
O
Auto Adjustment
MENUm → Picture t→ Auto Adjustment → ENTERE
Frequency values / position and fine tune are adjusted automatically.
N Not available when connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable.◀ ▶
English
■ PC Screen Adjustment
O MENUm → Picture → Screen Adjustment → PC Screen Adjustment →
ENTERE
● Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise. If the noise is not removed
by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse)
and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so
that it is aligned to the centre of screen.
● Position: Adjusts the PC screen position with direction button (u / d / l / r).
● Image Reset: Resets the image to default settings.◀ ▶
English
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
Depending on the version of Windows and the video card, the actual screens on your
PC may differ in which case the same basic set-up information will almost always be
applied. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.)
1. Click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu.
2. Click on “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window and a display
dialog-box will appear.
3. Click on “Display” and a display dialog box will appear.◀ ▶
English
4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box.
● If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the
correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog
box.◀ ▶
English
❑ Changing the Preset Sound Mode
■ Sound Mode
● Standard: Selects the normal sound mode. t
● Music: Emphasizes music over voices.
● Movie: Provides the best sound for movies.
● Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds.
● Amplify: Increases the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better
listening experience for the hearing impaired.
N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker is disabled.◀ ▶
English
❑ Adjusting Sound Settings
O MENUm → Sound → Sound Effect →ENTERE
■ Sound Effect
● SRS TruSurround HD (Off / On)
(standard sound mode only)
This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound experience through
a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology.
N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, SRS TruSurround HD is
disabled.◀ ▶
English
● SRS TruDialog (Off / On)
(standard sound mode only)
This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music
or sound effects so that dialog can be heard more clearly.
N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, SRS TruDialog is disabled.◀ ▶
English
● Equalizer
Adjusts the sound mode (standard sound mode only).
– Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker.
– 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the
level of specific bandwidth frequencies.
– Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default settings.
N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, Equalizer is disabled.◀ ▶
English
■ Broadcast Audio Options
● Audio Language
(digital channels only)
Change the default value for audio languages.
N The available language may differ depending on the broadcast.
● Audio Format
(digital channels only)
When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver,
a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the
main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function.◀ ▶
English
N Audio Format option may differ depending on the broadcast. 5.1ch Dolby
digital sound is only available when connecting an external speaker through
an optical cable.
● Audio Description
(not available in all locations) (digital channels only)
This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description) which is
sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster.
N Audio Description (Off / On): Turn the audio description function on or off.
N Volume: Adjust the audio description volume.◀ ▶
English
■ Additional Settings
(digital channels only)
● DTV Audio Level (MPEG / HE-AAC): This function allows you to reduce the
disparity of a voice signal (which is one of the signals received during a digital
TV broadcast) to a desired level.
N According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be
adjusted between -10dB and 0dB.
N To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between the range 0 and -10
respectively.◀ ▶
English
● SPDIF Output: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is used to provide digital
sound, reducing interference going to speakers and various digital devices such
as a DVD player.
Audio Format: You can select the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format.
N The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format may differ depending on
the input source.
Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when watching TV or video,
and when listening to digital audio output using an external device such as an
AV receiver (0ms~250ms).◀ ▶
English
● Dolby Digital Comp (Line / RF): This function minimizes signal disparity
between a dolby digital signal and a voice signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC,
ATV Sound).
N Select Line to obtain dynamic sound, and RF to reduce the difference
between loud and soft sounds at night time.
Line: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -31dB (reference) to
either -20dB or -31dB.
RF: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -20dB (reference) to
either -10dB or -20dB.◀ ▶
English
■ Speaker Settings
● Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV Speaker): A sound echo may occur
due to a difference in decoding speed between the main speaker and the audio
receiver. In this case, set the TV to External Speaker.
N When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume and MUTE
buttons will not operate and the sound settings will be limited.
N When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.
● TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On◀ ▶
English
N When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker.
● TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On
N If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute.
● Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night): To equalize the volume level on each
channel, set to Normal.
Night: This mode provides an improved sound experience compared to
Normal mode, making almost no noise. It is useful at night.
■ Reset Sound (OK / Cancel)
Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults.◀ ▶
English
❑ Connecting to a Wired Network
for PDP 550 and 570 Series
You can attach your TV to your LAN using cable in three ways:
● You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of
your TV to an external modem using a LAN cable. See the diagram below.
Preference
The Modem Port on the Wall
LAN
Modem Cable LAN Cable
External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV)◀ ▶
English
● You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back
of your TV to a IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use LAN
cable for the connection. See the diagram below.
The Modem
Port on the Wall LAN
Modem Cable LAN Cable LAN Cable
External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV)
IP Sharer
(having DHCP server)◀ ▶
English
● Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your
TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV directly to
a network wall outlet using a LAN cable. See the diagram below. Note that the
wall outlet is attached to a modem or router elsewhere in your house.
The LAN Port on the Wall LAN
LAN Cable◀ ▶
English
● If you have a Dynamic Network, you should use an ADSL modem or router
that supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and
routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS values your TV needs to access the Internet so you do not
have to enter them manually. Most home networks are Dynamic Networks.
Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static
IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS
values manually on your TV’s Cable Setup Screen when you set up the network
connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values,
contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If you have a Windows computer,
you can also get these values through your computer.
N You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a
Static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use Static
IP addresses.◀ ▶
English
❑ Setting the Network
for PDP 550 and 570 Series
■ Network Settings
O MENUm → Network → Network Settings → ENTERE
Set the network connection to use various Internet services such as AllShare™
and perform software upgrade.
■ Network Status
O MENUm → Network → Network Status → ENTERE
You can check the current network and Internet status.◀ ▶
English
■ AllShare Settings
O MENUm → Network → AllShare Settings → ENTERE
Selects whether to use media functions on the network.
■ Network Settings (Auto)
Use the Automatic Network Settings when connecting your TV to a network that
supports DHCP. To set up your TV’s cable network connection automatically,
follow these steps:◀ ▶
English
How to set up automatically
1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it,
follow the directions of Network Settings.
2. Select the Wired.
3. The network test screen appears, and
network setting is done. U Move E Enter R Return
Network Settings
Select the network connection type.
Wired
Wireless(general)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Connect to the network using a LAN cable. Please
make sure that the LAN cable is connected. ◀ ▶
English
N If it fails to set automatically, check the
connection of LAN port.
N If you cannot find network connection
values or if you want to set connection
manually, set it to Manual. Refer to following
“How to set up manually”.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
a Previous L Move E Enter R Return
Network Setting
Wired network and Internet connection completed.
IP Settings Retry OK
MAC Address 00:40:30:30:20:10
IP Address 192.168.10.21
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 192.168.10.1
DNS Server 203.248.252.2
Internet is connected successfully.
If you have a problem with using Internet service, contact your Internet service
provider.◀ ▶
English
■ Network Settings (Manual)
Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that
requires a Static IP address.
Getting the Network Connection Values
To get the Network connection values on most Windows computers, follow these
steps:
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab.
4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The Network connection values
are displayed.◀ ▶
English
How to set up manually
To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually, follow these steps:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 2 in the “How to set
up automatically” procedure.
2. Select the IP Settings on network test
screen.
3. Set IP Mode to Manual.
4. Press the d button on your remote to go to
the IP Address.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
U Move E Enter R Return
IP Settings
Internet Protocol Setup : Manual r
IP Address . . .
Subnet Mask . . .
Gateway . . .
DNS : Manual
DNS Server . . .
OK◀ ▶
English
5. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values. Use
the number buttons on your remote to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to
move from one entry field to another.
6. When done, select the OK.
7. The network test screen appears, and network setting is done.◀ ▶
English
❑ Connecting to a Wireless Network
for PDP 550 and 570 Series
To connect your TV to your network wireless, you need a wireless router or
modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN adapter (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2,
WIS10ABGN), which you connect to your TV’s back or side panel USB port. See
the illustration below.
The LAN Port on the Wall
LAN Cable
Wireless IP sharer
(router having DHCP server)
Samsung
Wireless LAN
adapter
TV Rear Panel◀ ▶
English
Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately and is offered by selected retailers,
Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com. Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports
the IEEE 802.11a/b/g and n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using
IEEE 802.11n. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be
played smoothly.
N NOTE
● You must use the “Samsung Wireless LAN adapter” (WIS09ABGN,
WIS09ABGN2, WIS10ABGN) to use a wireless network.◀ ▶
English
● To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer
(either a router or a modem). If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV
can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network.
● Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the
channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device
nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure.
● If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not
work with the TV.◀ ▶
English
● If Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n mode is selected and the
Encryption type is set to WEP, TKIP or TKIP AES (WPS2Mixed) for your AP,
Samsung TVs will not support a connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi
certification specifications.
● If your AP supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the
network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Identification
Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either
mode.
● If your router, modem, or device is not certified, it may not connect to the TV
via the “Samsung Wireless LAN adapter.”◀ ▶
English
● Ensure the TV is turned on before you connect the Samsung Wireless LAN
adapter.
● Connection Methods: You can setup the wireless network connection on six
ways.
– Auto Setup (Using the Auto Network Search function)
– Manual Setup
– WPS(PBC)
– Ad Hoc
– One Foot Connection
– Plug & Access◀ ▶
English
● The Samsung Wireless LAN adapter may not be recognized when using a
connection via a USB hub or via a USB extension cable other than the cable
supplied.
■ Network Settings (Auto)
Most wireless networks have an optional security system that requires devices that
access the network to transmit an encrypted security code called an Access or
Security Key. The Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically a word or a
series of letters and numbers of a specified length you were asked to enter when
you set up security for your wireless network. If you use this method of setting up
the network connection, and have a Security Key for your wireless network, you
will have to enter the Pass Phrase during the setup process.◀ ▶
English
How to set up automatically
1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it,
follow the directions of Network Settings.
2. Select the Wireless.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
U Move E Enter R Return
Network Settings
Select the network connection type.
Wired
Wireless(general)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Set up wireless network by selecting your wireless router.
You may need to enter security key depending on the
setting of the wireless router.◀ ▶
English
3. The Network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it
displays a list of the available networks.
4. In the list of networks, press the u or d button to select a network, and then
press the ENTERE button.
N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add
Network and enter the correct Network Name (SSID) and Security key to
establish the connection.
5. If the Security screen pop-up appears, go to step 6. If you select the wireless
router which does not have security, go to step 7.◀ ▶
English
6. If the wireless router has security, enter the
Security key (Security or PIN), then select
Done.
N When you enter the Security key
(Security or PIN), use u / d / l /
r buttons on your remote to select
number/characters.
N You should be able to find the Pass
Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or
modem.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
a Previous b Done n Move E Enter R Return
Network Setting
Enter security key. 0 entered
a
g
m
s
a/A
b
h
n
t
f
l
r
x
Space
d
j
p
v
Delete
2
5
8
z
Done
c
i
o
u
F
1
4
7
y
e
k
q
w
3
6
9
0◀ ▶
English
7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done.
N If it fails to set Security key (Security or PIN), select Reset or IP Settings.
N If you want to set connection manually, select the IP Settings. Refer to
following “How to set up manually”.◀ ▶
English
■ Network Setup (Manual)
Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that
requires a Static IP address.
Getting the Network Connection Values
To get the Network connection values on most Windows computers, follow these
steps:
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status.◀ ▶
English
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab.
4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The Network connection values
are displayed.
How to set up manually
To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually, follow these steps:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 2 in the “How to set up automatically” procedure.
2. Select the IP Settings on network test screen.
3. Set IP Mode to Manual.◀ ▶
English
4. Press the d button on your remote to go to the IP Address.
5. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values. Use
the number buttons on your remote to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to
move from one entry field to another.
6. When done, select the OK.
7. The network test screen appears, and network setting is done.◀ ▶
English
■ Network Setup (WPS(PBC))
How to set up using WPS(PBC)
If your router has a WPS(PBC) button, follow these steps:
1. Go to Network Setting screen. To enter it,
follow the directions of Network Settings.
2. Select the WPS(PBC).
3. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router
within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically
acquires all the network setting values it
needs and connects to your network.
4. The network test screen appears, and
network setting is done.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
U Move E Enter R Return
Network Settings
Select the network connection type.
Wired
Wireless(general)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Connect to the wireless router easily by pressing the WPS(PBC)
button. Choose this if your wireless router supports push button
configuration(PBC).◀ ▶
English
■ Network Settings (One Foot Connection)
The One Foot Connection make you easy to connect samsung TV and samsung
wireless router by placing samsung wireless router within 1 foot(25cm) from
samsung TV. If your wireless router does not support One Foot Connection, you
must connect using one of the other methods.
N You can check for equipment that supports One Foot Connection on www.
samsung.com.◀ ▶
English
How to set up using One Foot Connection
Turn on the power of wireless router and TV.
1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it,
follow the directions of Network Settings.
2. Select the One Foot Connection.
3. Place the wireless router in parallel with the
Samsung Wireless LAN adapter giving a gap
no larger than 25cm.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
U Move E Enter R Return
Network Settings
Select the network connection type.
Wired
Wireless(general)
WPS(PBC)
One Foot
Connection
Connect to the wireless network automatically if your wireless
router supports One Foot Connection. Select this connection type
after placing the wireless router within 10 inches (25cm) of your TV.◀ ▶
English
N If One Foot Connection dose not connect your TV to your router, a pop-up
window appears on the screen notifying you of the failure. If you want to try
using One Foot Connection again, reset the wireless router, disconnect the
Samsung Wireless LAN adapter and then try again from Step 1. You can also
choose one of the other connection setup methods.◀ ▶
English
4. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done.
5. Place the wireless Router to a desired location.
N If the wireless Router settings change or you install a new wireless Router, you
must perform the One Foot Connection procedure again, beginning from Step
1.◀ ▶
English
■ Network Setting (Plug & Access)
Plug & Access function make you easy to connect samsung TV and samsung
wireless router by using USB memory stick. If your wireless router does not
support Plug & Access, you must connect using one of the other methods.
N You can check for equipment that supports Plug & Access on www.samsung.
com.
How to set up using Plug & Access function
Turn on the power of wireless router and TV.
1. Insert USB memory stick into our Samsung wireless router and checking
wireless router’s LED status (Blinking → On).
2. Then take USB memory out and insert it into Samsung TV.◀ ▶
English
3. Wait until the connection is automatically established.
N If Plug & Access does not connect your TV to your wireless router a popup window appears on the screen notifying you of the failure. If you want
to try using Plug & Access again, reset the wireless router disconnect the
Samsung Wireless LAN adapter and then try again from Step 1. You can
also choose one of the other connection setup methods.
4. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done.
5. Place the wireless router in a desired location.
N If the wireless router settings change or you install a new wireless router you
must perform the Plug & Access procedure again, beginning from Step 1.◀ ▶
English
Priority QOS
Samsung wireless Router is optimized HD AV streaming for Samsung DTV
This is our product’s distinctive function.
Samsung wireless Router can be connected with many devices, such as laptop,
mobile phone, BD player etc.
In case of connecting Samsung TV to Samsung wireless Router while other
devices are connected, Samsung wireless Router will give Samsung TV a priority
connection than other devices.
This function ensures the best streaming contents and throughput speed.
● Make your TV faster by giving priority bandwidth to your TV (on / off optional).
● By giving priority to Samsung TVs, enjoy HD content without buffering.
● Connection speed may vary based on the network environment.◀ ▶
English
■ Network Setup (Ad Hoc)
You can connect to a mobile device supporting Ad-hoc without an wireless router
through the “Samsung Wireless LAN adapter”. When connecting mobile device,
you can use files on device or connect internet using AllShare or Multimedia
function.
How to connect to new Ad-hoc
1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it, follow the directions of Network
Settings.
2. Select the Wireless.◀ ▶
English
3. When finished searching a mobile device, set the Network Name (SSID) and
Security key of the device, and then connect the network.
N If network does not operate normally, check the Network Name (SSID) and
Security key again. An incorrect Security key may cause a malfunction.
N If a device is connected once, it is displayed in Network Setting list. When
you connect it again, you can find it in network setting list.◀ ▶
English
If Your TV Fails to Connect to the Internet
Your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet because your ISP has permanently registered the MAC address (a unique identifying number) of your PC or modem, which it then
authenticates each time you connect to the Internet as a way of preventing unauthorized
access. As your TV has a different MAC address, your ISP can not authenticate its MAC address, and your TV can not connect.
To resolve this problem, ask your ISP about the procedures required to connect devices
other than a PC (such as your TV) to the Internet.
If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet, your
TV may not be able to connect to the Internet. If this is the case, you must enter your ID or
password when connecting to the Internet.
The internet connection may fail because of a firewall problem. If this is the case, contact
your Internet service provider.
If you cannot connect to the Internet even after you have followed the procedures of your
Internet service provider.◀ ▶
English
❑ Setting the Time
O MENUm → System → ENTERE
■ Time
● Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer features of the TV.
O The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button.
N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again.
– Clock Mode (Auto / Manual)
Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from a digital
channel.◀ ▶
English
N The antenna must be connected in order to set the time automatically.
Manual: Set the current time manually.
N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time set up
may not be correct. In this case, set the time manually.
– Clock Set: Set the Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute.
N Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual.
N You can set the day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing
the number buttons on the remote control.
– Time Zone (Auto / Manual): Selects your time zone.
N The option may differ depending on country.
N This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto.◀ ▶
English
Using the Sleep Timer
O MENUm → System → Time → Sleep Timer → ENTERE
● Sleep Timert: Automatically shuts off the TV after a preset period of
time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes).
N To cancel Sleep Timer, select Off.◀ ▶
English
Setting the On / Off Timer
O MENUm → System → Time → ENTERE
● On Timer 1 / On Timer 2 / On Timer 3:
Three different on timer settings can be
made. You must set the clock first.
Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday,
Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual
to set at you convenience. If you select
Manual, you can set up the day you want
to activate the timer.
N The c mark indicates the day is selected.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
TV
11 00 20
DTV 1
On Timer 1
Setup
Once
11
Source
On Time Volume
Antenna Channel
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
U Adjust L Move E Enter R Return◀ ▶
English
On Time: Set the hour and minute.
Volume: Set the desired volume level.
Source: Select TV or USB content to be played when the TV is turned on
automatically. (USB can be selected only when a USB device is connected to
the TV)
Antenna (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired antenna source.
Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel.
Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB
device containing music or photo files to be played when the TV is turned on
automatically.◀ ▶
English
N Auto Power Off (available only when the TV is turned on by Timer): The
TV will be automatically turned off after 4 hours of being left idle to prevent
overheating.
N NOTE
● If there is no music file on the USB device or the folder containing a
music file is not selected, the Timer function does not operate correctly.
● When there is only one photo file in the USB, the Slide Show will not
play.
● If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected.◀ ▶
English
● Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one
of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB
have different names.
● It is recommended that you use a USB memory stick and a multi card
reader when using On Timer. The On Timer function may not work
with USB devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made
by some manufacturers because these devices take a long time to be
recognized.◀ ▶
English
● Off Timer 1 / Off Timer 2 / Off Timer 3:
Three different off timer settings can be
made. You must set the clock first.
Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday,
Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual
to set at you convenience. If you select
Manual, you can set up the day you want
to activate the timer.
N The c mark indicates the day is selected.
Off Time: Set the hour and minute.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
00 00
Off Timer 1
Setup
Once
Off Time
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
L Move U Adjust E Enter R Return◀ ▶
English
❑ Locking Programmes
O MENUm → System → Security → ENTERE
■ Security
The PIN input screen appears, Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
● Channel Lock (Off / On): Lock channels in Channel Manager, to prevent
unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme.
N Available only when the Source is set to TV.◀ ▶
English
● Programme Rating Lock (depending on the country): Prevent unauthorized
users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme with a userdefined 4-digit PIN code. If the selected channel is locked, the “\” symbol will
be displayed.
N The items of Programme Rating Lock differs depending on the country.
● Change PIN: Change your personal ID number required to set up the TV.
● Adult Services (Off / On): You can adjust the Adult Services.
N The Adult Services is available for Freesat antenna only. ◀ ▶
English
How to watch a restricted channel
If the TV is tuned to a restricted channel, the Programme Rating Lock will block
it. The screen will go blank and the following message will appear:
This channel is blocked by Programme Rating Lock. Please enter the PIN to
unblock.◀ ▶
English
❑ Economical Solutions
■ Eco Solution
O MENUm → System → Eco Solution → ENTERE
● Energy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off) t: This
adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. If you
select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press
any button except volume button to turn on the screen.
● Eco Sensor (Off / On): To enhance your power savings; the picture settings will
automatically adapt to the light in the room.◀ ▶
English
N If you adjust the Cell Light, the Eco Sensor will be set to Off.
Min Cell Light: When Eco sensor is On, the minimum screen brightness can
be adjusted manually.
N If Eco Sensor is On, the display brightness may change (become slightly
darker or brighter) depending on the surrounding light intensity.
● No-Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): To avoid unnecessary
energy consumption, set how long you want the TV to remain on if it’s not
receiving a signal.
N Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode.
● Auto Power Off (Off / On): The TV will be automatically turned off after 4 hours
of being left idle to prevent overheating.◀ ▶
English
❑ Picture In Picture (PIP)
O MENUm → System → PIP → ENTERE
■ PIP
You can watch the TV tuner and one external video source simultaneously. PIP
(Picture-in-Picture) does not function in the same mode.◀ ▶
English
● PIP (Off / On): Activate or deactivate the PIP function.
● Channel: Select the channel for the sub-screen.
● Size (õ / ã): Select a size for the sub-picture.
● Position (ã/ – / — / œ): Select a position for the sub-picture.
● Sound Select (Main / Sub): You can choose the desired sound Main / Sub in
PIP mode.◀ ▶
English
N NOTE
● For PIP sound, refer to the Sound Select instructions.
● If you turn the TV off while watching in PIP mode, the PIP window will
disappear.
● You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly
unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke.
● While Programme Rating Lock is in operation, the PIP function cannot be
used.
● PIP Settings
Main picture Sub picture
Component, HDMI, PC TV◀ ▶
English
❑ Other Features
O MENUm → System → ENTERE
■ Language
● Menu Language: Set the menu language.
● Teletext Language: Set a desired language for teletext.
N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in
the broadcast.
● Preference (Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language /
Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary
Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language): Select a language,
which will be the default language when a channel is selected.
N The option may differ depending on country.◀ ▶
English
■ Subtitle
Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode.
● Subtitle (Off / On): Switches subtitles on or off.
● Subtitle Mode (Normal / Hearing Impaired): Sets the subtitle mode.
● Subtitle Language: Sets the subtitle language.
N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hearing Impaired
function, Preferred automatically activates even if the Hearing Impaired
mode is selected.
N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in
the broadcast.◀ ▶
English
■ Digital Text (Disable / Enable) for U.K
If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is enabled.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group): An
International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and
hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includes datalinking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and
video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology
and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV
(Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing,digital
libraries and network games.◀ ▶
English
■ Screen Burn Protection
To reduce the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with screen burn
prevention technology. The Time setting allows you to programme the time
between movement of the picture in minutes.
● Pixel Shift (Off / On): Using this function, you can minutely move pixels on the
PDP in horizontal or vertical direction to minimize after image on the screen.
N Optimum condition for pixel shift
Item TV / AV / Component / HDMI/PC
Horizontal 0~4 4
Vertical 0~4 4
Time (minute) 1~4 min 4 min◀ ▶
English
N The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size (inches) and
mode.
N This function is not available in the Screen Fit mode.
● Auto Protection Time (Off / 10 min / 20 min / 40 min / 1 hour): If the screen
remains idle with a still image for a certain period of time defined by the user,
the screen saver is activated to prevent the formation of ghost images on the
screen.
● Scrolling: This function removes after-images on the screen by moving all
the pixels on the PDP according to a pattern. Use this function when there
are remaining after images or symbols on the screen, especially when you
displayed a still image on the screen for a long time. ◀ ▶
English
N The after-image removal function has to be executed for a long time
(approximately 1 hour) to effectively remove after-images on the screen.
If the after-image is not removed after performing the function, repeat the
function again.
N Press any key on the remote control to cancel this feature.
● Side Grey (Light / Dark): When you watch TV with the screen ratio set to 4:3,
the screen is prevented from any damage by adjusting the white balance on
both extreme left and right sides.◀ ▶
English
■ General
● Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game console such as
PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by
selecting game mode.
N Precautions and limitations for game mode
– To disconnect the game console and connect another external device,
set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu.
– If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly.
N Game Mode is not available when the input source is set to TV or PC.◀ ▶
English
N After connecting the game console, set Game Mode to On. Unfortunately,
you may notice reduced picture quality.
N If Game Mode is On:
– Picture mode is set to Standard and Sound mode is set to Movie.
● Menu Transparency (Bright / Dark): Set the Transparency of the menu.
● Boot Logo (Off / On): Display Samsung logo when the TV is turned on.
● TV Name for PDP 550 and 570 Series
: Sets the TV name so you can find it easily on
a mobile device.
N If you select User Input, you can type on the TV using the OSK (On Screen
Keyboard).◀ ▶
English
■ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
For details on set up options, refer to the “What is Anynet+?” instructions.
■ DivX® Video On Demand
Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web
site and register, you can download the VOD registration file. If you play the VOD
registration using Videos under SMART HUB, the registration is completed.
N For more information on DivX® VOD, visit “http://vod.divx.com”.◀ ▶
English
■ Common Interface
● CI Menu: This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select
the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card.
● Application Info: View information on the CAM inserted into the CI slot and on
the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM
anytime whether the TV is on or off.
1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by phone.
2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the direction of the arrow.
3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common interface slot, in
the direction of the arrow so that it aligns parallel with the slot.
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel.◀ ▶
English
■ Network Remote Control (On / Off) for PDP 550 and 570 Series
Turn on / off or give permission to Samsung mobile phones devices.
You must have a Samsung Mobile phone / device which supports Network
Remote Control. For more details, refer to each device’s manual.PIP Settings◀ ▶
English
❑ Support Menu
■ e-Manual
O MENUm → Support → ENTERE
You can read the introduction and instructions about the TV features stored in your
TV.
N For the detailed information about e-Manual Screen, refer to “How to view the
e-Manual” in User Manual.◀ ▶
English
■ Self Diagnosis
O MENUm → Support → ENTERE
N Self Diagnosis might take few seconds, this is part of the normal operation of
the TV.
● Picture Test: Use to check for picture problems.
Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern,
select Yes. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call
Centre for assistance.
No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem
with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem
persists, refer to the external device’s user manual.◀ ▶
English
● Sound Test: Use the built-in melody sound to check for sound problems.
N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound
test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the Sound menu.
N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to
External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button.
Yes: If you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all during the sound
test, select Yes. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call
Centre for assistance.
No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a
problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the
problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual.◀ ▶
English
● Signal Information: (digital channels only) An HD channel’s reception quality is
either perfect or the channels are unavailable. Adjust your antenna to increase
signal strength.
● Troubleshooting: If the TV seems to have a problem, refer to this description.
N If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, contact the Samsung customer
service centre.◀ ▶
English
■ Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade can be performed by network connection or downloading the
latest firmware from “www.samsung.com.” to a USB memory device.
Current Version the software already installed in the TV.
N Software is represented as ‘Year / Month / Day_Version’.◀ ▶
English
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
Installing the Latest Version
● By USB: Insert a USB drive containing the
firmware upgrade file, downloaded from
“www.samsung.com,” into the TV. Please
be careful not to disconnect the power or
remove the USB drive until upgrades are
complete. The TV will be turned off and on
automatically after completing the firmware
upgrade. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made
will return to their default settings. We advise you to to write down your settings
so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade.
USB◀ ▶
English
● By Online for PDP 550 and 570 Series
: Upgrade the software using the Internet.
N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network
Setup, refer to the Network Settings instructions.
N If the internet connection doesn’t operate properly, the connection may be
broken. Please retry downloading. If the problem persists, download by
USB and upgrade.
● By Channel: Upgrade the software using the broadcasting signal.
N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, software
will be automatically searched and downloaded.
N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal
status.◀ ▶
English
● Alternative Software for PDP 550 and 570 Series
(backup): If there is an issue with
the new firmware and it is affecting operation, you can change the software to
the previous version.
N If the software was changed, existing software is displayed.
● Standby Mode Upgrade: A manual upgrade will be automatically performed
at selected time. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen
may be turned on slightly for the product. This phenomenon may continue for
more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is complete.
■ Contact Samsung
View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to
upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centres and how
to download products and software.
■ Contents Home
You can enjoy useful and various contents. ◀ ▶
English
❑ Using the 3D function
for PDP 490 Series and above
O MENUm → Picture → 3D → ENTERE
■ 3D
This exciting new feature enables you to view 3D content. In order to fully enjoy
this feature, you must purchase a pair of Samsung 3D Active Glasses to view
3D video. Samsung 3D Active Glasses are sold separately. For more detailed
purchasing information, contact the retailer where you purchased this TV.
Advanced Features◀ ▶
English
IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D PICTURES.
Read and understand the following safety information before using the TV’s
3D function.
[ WARNING
● Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing 3D TV such as
dizziness, nausea and headaches. If you experience any such symptom,
stop viewing 3D TV, remove 3D Active Glasses and rest.
● Watching 3D images for an extended period of time may cause eye strain. If
you feel eye strain, stop viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses and
rest.◀ ▶
English
● A responsible adult should frequently check on children who are using the
3D function. If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or
nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest.
● Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes (such as general
eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.)
● Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving
around. Using the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while moving around
may result in injuries due to running into objects, tripping, and / or falling.◀ ▶
English
● 3D Mode: Select the 3D input format.
N If you want to feel the 3D effect fully, please wear the 3D Active Glasses
first, and then select 3D Mode from the list below that provides the best 3D
viewing experience.
N When watching 3D images, turn on 3D Active Glasses.
3D Mode Operation
Off Turns the 3D function off.
2D → 3D Changes a 2D image to 3D.
Side by Side Displays two images next to each other.
Top & Bottom Displays one image above another.◀ ▶
English
N Some file format may not supported the “2D → 3D.”
N “Side by Side” and “Top & Bottom” are available when the resolution is
720p, 1080i and 1080p in DTV, HDMI and USB mode or when set to PC
and the PC is connected through an HDMI/DVI cable.
● 3D Perspective (-5~+5): Adjust overall 3D perspective of on-screen image.
● Depth (0~10): Adjust overall depth.
● L/R Change (L/R Image / R/L Image): Swap the left and right pictures.
● 3D → 2D (Off / On): Displays the image for the left eye only.
N This function is deactivated when 3D Mode set to “2D → 3D” or Off.◀ ▶
English
Resolution supported for HDMI PC mode
The resolution for HDMI PC mode is optimized to 1920 x 1080 input.
An input resolution other than 1920 x 1080 may not be displayed properly in 3D
display or full screen mode.◀ ▶
English
How to watch the 3D image
N Some 3D modes may not be available depending on the format of the image
source.
N To watch in 3D, wear 3D Active Glasses and press the power button on the
glasses.
1. Press the MENU button on your remote, use
the u or d button to select Picture, and
then press the ENTERE button.
2. Use the u or d button to select 3D, and
then press the ENTERE button.
● The displayed image may differ depending on
the model.
3D
3D Mode : Off r
3D Perspective : 0
Depth : 5
L/R Change : L/R Image
3D → 2D : Off
EEnter R Return◀ ▶
English
3. Use the u or d button to select 3D Mode, and
then press the ENTERE button.
4. Using the l or r buttons on your remote control,
select the 3D Mode of the image you want to
view.
● The displayed image may differ depending
on the model.
3D Mode
U Off L Move EEnter R Return◀ ▶
English
Supported formats and operating specifications for Standard HDMI 3D
N The 3D formats indicated below are recommended by the HDMI association
and must be supported.
Source signal format Standard HDMI 1.4 3D
1920 x 1080p @ 24 Hz x 2 1920 x 2205p @ 24 Hz
1280 x 720p @ 50 Hz x 2 1280 x 1470p @ 50 Hz◀ ▶
English
Before using 3D function...
N NOTE
● 3D Mode is set to Off automatically when accessing My Downloads
functions.
● 3D Mode is set to memorised configuration value automatically, when
changing the input source.
● Some Picture functions are disabled in 3D mode.
● PIP is not supported in 3D mode.◀ ▶
English
● 3D Active Glasses from Samsung’s previous product (IR type) or other
manufacturers may not be supported.
● When the TV is initially powered on, may take some time until the 3D display
is optimized.
● The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is any other 3D
product or electronic devices turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a
problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D
Active Glasses.◀ ▶
English
● Some files are not supported in the 2D to 3D function.
● Be sure to stay within the viewing angle and optimum TV viewing distance
when watching 3D pictures.
● Otherwise, you may not be able to enjoy proper 3D effects.
● The ideal viewing distance should be three times or more the height of the
screen. We recommend sitting with viewer’s eyes on a level with the screen.
● When you watch 3D images under flickering lighting such as a fluorescent
lamp (50Hz ~ 60Hz) or a 3 wavelength lamp, you may notice some screen
flickering. If this occurs, dim or turn off the light.◀ ▶
English
❑ About AllShare™
for PDP 550 Series and above
AllShare™ connects your TV and compatible Samsung mobile phones / devices
through a network. You can play media contents including videos, photos and
music saved on your mobile phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by
controlling them on the TV via the network.
N For more information, visit “www.samsung.com” or contact the Samsung call
centre. Mobile devices may need additional software installation. For details,
refer to each device’s user’s guide.◀ ▶
English
N If your Samsung TV connects to a non-Samsung DLNA server, a compatibility
issue may occur during video playback.
N By connecting your Samsung TV to a network via AllShare™, you can use
Samsung’s original functions as follows:
– Playback of various video formats (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, etc.)
– Video thumbnail feature
– Bookmark function (to resume video playback)
– Auto-chaptering (scene navigation)
– Digital content management
– Compatibility with various subtitle formats (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT, TTXT)
– Search with file names
– And many others
N To use the original DLNA functions of Samsung fully, it is recommended that
you use the AllShare™ software provided with your TV.◀ ▶
English
❑ Setting Up AllShare™
for PDP 550 Series and above
O MENUm → Network → AllShare Settings → ENTERE
■ AllShare Settings
● Media (On / Off): Enables or disables the
media function. When the media function is
on, Media contents play can be controlled
by a mobile phone or other devices that
support DLNA DMC.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
AllShare Settings
Media : Off ►
U Move E Enter R Return◀ ▶
English
■ Media
Shows a list of mobile phones or connected devices which have been set up with
this TV for using the Media function.
N The Media function is available in all devices which support DLNA DMC.
● Allowed / Denied: Allows/Blocks the the devices.
● Delete: Deletes the devices from the list.
N This function only deletes the name of the device from the list. If the deleted
device is turned on or tries to connect to the TV, it may appear on the list
again.◀ ▶
English
Using the Media Function
An alarm window appears informing the user that the media contents (videos, photos,
music) sent from a mobile phone will be displayed on your TV. The contents are played
automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears. If you press the RETURN or
EXIT button when the alarm window appears, the media contents are not played.
N NOTE
● If the media function executes for the first time, the warning popup window
appears. Press the ENTERE button to select Allow, then you can use Media
function on that device.◀ ▶
English
● To turn off the media contents transmission from the mobile phone, set Media
to Off in the AllShare Settings.
● Contents may not be played on your TV depending on their resolution and
format.
● The ENTERE and l / r buttons may not work depending on the type of
media content.
● Using the mobile device, you can control the media playing. For details, refer to
each mobile’s user’s guide.◀ ▶
English
❑ Setting Up Anynet+
O MENUm → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → ENTERE
■ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
To use the Anynet+ Function,
(Off / On
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
) t must be set to On.
N When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related
operations are deactivated.◀ ▶
English
■ Auto Turn Off (No / Yes)
Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn off automatically when the TV is turned off.
N If Auto Turn Off is set to Yes, running external devices will turn off at the same
time as the TV powers off.
N May not be enabled depending on the device.◀ ▶
English
What is Anynet+?t
Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that
support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used
only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung
device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.
N NOTE
● You can only control Anynet+ devices using the TV remote control, not the
buttons on the TV.
● The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs,
reselect the Anynet+ device.
● The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products.◀ ▶
English
For the method of connecting external devices , refer to the supported user manual.
N NOTE
● Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack
on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theatre.
● When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel
audio. You will only hear sound from the Home Theatre’s Front, Left and Right
speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD / Satellite Box (i.e.
Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the TV.◀ ▶
English
● You can connect only one Home Theatre.
● You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables
may not support Anynet+ functions.
● Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the standby or on
status.
● Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up
to 3 devices of the same type.◀ ▶
English
Anynet+ Menu
The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices
connected to the TV.
Anynet+ Menu Description
View TV Changes Anynet+ mode to TV broadcast mode.
Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list.
(device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected,
the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
(device_name) Tools Shows the tools menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is
connected, the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available.◀ ▶
English
Anynet+ Menu Description
(device_name) Title Menu Shows the title menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is
connected, the title menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available.
Receiver Sound is played through the receiver.◀ ▶
English
❑ Switching between Anynet+ Devices
1. Press the TOOLS button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). And then press the
ENTERE button to select Device List.
N If you cannot find a device you want, press the a button to refresh the list.
2. Select a device and press the ENTERE button. You can switch to the
selected device.
N The Device List menu will only appear when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
to On in the System menu.◀ ▶
English
● Switching to the selected device may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot
cancel the operation during the switching operation.
● If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button,
you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+
device by using the Device List.◀ ▶
English
❑ Listening through a Receiver
You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e Home Theatre) instead of the TV
Speaker.
1. Select Receiver and set to On.
2. Press the EXIT button to exit.
N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.
N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack
of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack of the TV.◀ ▶
English
N When the receiver (i.e Home Theatre) is set to On, you can hear sound
output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV (aerial)
signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the receiver. When the
source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via
HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the receiver.◀ ▶
English
❑ Troubleshooting for Anynet+
Problem Possible Solution
Anynet+ does not work. • Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system
supports Anynet+ devices only.
• Only one receiver (home theatre) can be connected.
• Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected.
• Check the Anynet+ device’s Video / Audio / HDMI cable
connections.
• Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+
setup menu.
• Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
• Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible.
• Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels,
operating My Downloads or Plug & Play (initial setup), etc.)
• When connecting or removing the HDMI cable, please make sure to
search devices again or turn your TV off and on again.
• Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on.◀ ▶
English
Problem Possible Solution
I want to start Anynet+. • Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and
check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+
Setup menu.
• Press the TOOLS button to display the Anynet+ menu and select a
menu you want.
I want to exit Anynet+. • Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu.
• Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a
non- Anynet+ device.
The message “Connecting to
Anynet+ device...” appears on
the screen.
• You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring
Anynet+ or switching to a view mode.
• Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to
view mode is complete.
The Anynet+ device does not
play.
• You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play (initial setup) is
in progress.◀ ▶
English
Problem Possible Solution
The connected device is not
displayed.
• Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions.
• Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected.
• Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+
setup menu.
• Search Anynet+ devices again.
• You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable only.
Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
• If connection is terminated because there has been a power
interruption or the HDMI cable has been disconnected, please
repeat the device scan.
The TV sound is not output
through the receiver.
• Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver.◀ ▶
English
❑ Using the My Downloads
Enjoy photos, music and / or movie files saved on
a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC)
1. Press the CONTENT button.
2. Press the u / d / l / r button to select
desired menu Videos, Photos, Music then
press the ENTERE button.
● The displayed image may differ depending on
the model.
Videos
Photos
Music
Source Watch TV
My Downloads◀ ▶
English
❑ Connecting a USB Device
1. Turn on your TV.
2. Connect a USB device containing photo,
music and/or movie files to the USB jack on
the side of the TV.
3. When USB is connected to the TV, popup
window appears. Then you can select New
device connected.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
USB◀ ▶
English
N It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files.
N Need-to-Know List before using My Downloads
● MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
● The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS.
● Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible
with this TV.
● My Downloads only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC)
devices. for PDP 550 and 570 Series
MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only
Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and
USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly
to the TV’s USB port.
● USB (HDD) is not supported. for PDP 450 and 490 Series ◀ ▶
English
● Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent
them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data
file damage or data loss.
● Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
● The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the
screen.
● The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels.
● For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message
is displayed.
● If the files are sorted by Basic View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each
folder.
● If the number of files and folders saved on a USB storage device is
approximately over 4000, the files and folders may not appear and some
folders may not be opened.◀ ▶
English
● MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot
be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports
the creation, distribution and management of the content in an integrated and
comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the
content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as
managing billings and settlements.
● If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time.
● If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be
recognized. A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V)
may not be supported.
● If an over-power warning message is displayed while you are connecting or
using a USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction.◀ ▶
English
● If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time, the
Screensaver will run.
● The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released
automatically when connected to the TV.
● If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the
files on the device may not be read.
● If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the
device is corrupted or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to
the PC, format the device and check the connection.
● If a file deleted from the PC is still found when My Downloads is run, use the
“Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC to permanently delete the file.◀ ▶
English
❑ Screen Display
Move to the desired file using the l / r / u / d buttons and then press the
ENTERE or � (Play) button. The file is played. My Downloads screen may
differ depending on the way to enter the screen.
Information: Displays the
selected content category
(Music, for example), device
(USB drive,for example),
folder/file name, page, and
sort criteria.
Contents mode / Device name:
You can select the desired
Content Category or Device.
Operation Buttons:
● { Yellow (Edit Mode): Lets you select music by checking the files you
want to play. Only available in Music.
● � / µ (Page): Move to next or previous page.
● T Tools: Displays the option menu.
● R Return: Move to the previous page or step.
File List Section:
Displays files or
folders sorted by
criteria you can
select.
{ Edit Mode T Tools R Return
Music | SUM
⁄ Folder Name > File Name
1/100 pages
Folder View
Music_3
No singer
Music_4
No singer
Music_2
No singer
Music_5
No singer
Music_6
No singer
Music_7
No singer
Music_8
No singer
Music_9
No singer
Music_10
No singer
Music_1
No Singer◀ ▶
English
■ Videos
Playing Video
1. Press the l / r / u / d button to select
the desired video in the file list.
2. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play)
button.
– The selected file name is displayed on
the top with its playing time.
– If video time information is unknown,
play time and progress bar are not displayed.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
L Jump T Tools R Return◀ ▶
English
– During video playback, you can search using l and r button.
– You can use � (REW) and µ (FF) buttons during playback.
N In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot
play the Game itself.
● Supported Subtitle Formats
Name File extension Format
MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt string-based
SubViewer .sub string-based
Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based◀ ▶
English
● Supported Video Formats
File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution
Frame rate
(fps)
Bit rate
(Mbps)
Audio Codec
*.avi
*.mkv
AVI
MKV
DivX 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
MP3 / AC3
/ LPCM /
ADPCM /
DTS Core
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
Motion JPEG 640x480 6 ~ 30 8
*.asf ASF
DivX 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
MP3 / AC3
/ LPCM /
ADPCM /
WMA
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
Motion JPEG 640x480 6 ~ 30 8
*.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA
*.mp4 MP4
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MP3 /
ADPCM /
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 AAC◀ ▶
English
File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution
Frame rate
(fps)
Bit rate
(Mbps)
Audio Codec
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 ADPCM /
AAC / HEAAC
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG
MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 / LPCM
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
AC3 / MPEG
/ LPCM /
AAC
MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
AC3 / AAC /
MP3 / DD+ /
HE-AAC
H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
VC1 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25◀ ▶
English
Video Decoder Audio Decoder
• Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1
• H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and
AVCHD are not supported.
• MPEG4 SP, ASP:
− Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max
− Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max
• GMC is not supported.
• Supports up to WMA 7, 8, 9, STD
• WMA 9 PRO does not support 2 channel excess
multi channel or lossless audio.
• WMA sampling rate 22050Hz mono is not
supported.◀ ▶
English
Other Restrictions
N NOTE
● Video content will not play, or not play correctly, if there is an error in the
content or the container.
● Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bitrate/frame rate
above the compatible Frame / sec listed in the table above.
● If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported.
● You may experience file stuttering while playing a video through a network
connection. for PDP 550 and 570 Series
● Video content can not be played, if there are many contents in one file.
● Some USB / digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player.
● When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played
smoothly.◀ ▶
English
■ Music
Playing Music
1. Press the l / r / u / d button to select
the desired Music in the file list.
2. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play)
button.
– You can use � (REW) and µ (FF)
buttons during playback. ● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
E Pause L Page T Tools R Return
Music
SUM
1/2◀ ▶
English
N Only displays the files with MP3 extension. Other file extensions are not
displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device.
N If the sound is abnormal when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer in the
Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.)◀ ▶
English
Playing selected music
1. Press the { (Edit Mode) button.
2. Select the desired music.
N The c mark appears to the left of the selected files.
3. Press the TOOLS button and select Play Selected Contents.
N You can select or deselect all music pressing the Select All / Deselect All. ◀ ▶
English
■ Photos
Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show)
1. Press the l / r / u / d button to select
the desired photo in the file list.
2. Press the ENTERE button.
● When a selected photo is displayed,
press the ENTERE button to start the
slide show.
● During the slide show, all files in the file
list will be displayed in order.
● When you press the � (Play) button in the file list, slide show will be
started immediately.
● The displayed image may differ depending on the
model.
E Pause L Previous/Next T Tools R Return
Nomal◀ ▶
English
N Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the
Background Music is set to On.
N The Background Music cannot be changed until the BGM has finished
loading.◀ ▶
English
❑ My Downloads - Additional Functions
Videos / Music / Photos Play Option menu
During playing a file, press the TOOLS button.
Category Operation Videos Music Photos
Title Search
You can move directly to another
Title. c
Time Search
You can search the movie using
l and r buttons at intervals of
10 seconds.
c
Shuffle Mode You can play the music randomly. c
Repeat Mode
You can play movie and music
files repeatedly. c c
Picture Size
You can adjust the picture size to
your preference. c◀ ▶
English
Category Operation Videos Music Photos
Picture Mode You can adjust the picture setting. c c
Sound Mode You can adjust the sound setting. c c c
Subtitle Language
You can view a subtitle. You can
select a specific language if the
subtitle file contains multiple
languages.
c
Subtitle Setting
You can play the video with
Subtitles. This function only works
if the subtitles are the same file
name as the video.
c◀ ▶
English
Category Operation Videos Music Photos
Audio
You can enjoy a video in one of
the supported languages. The
function is only enabled when
you play stream-type files which
support multiple audio formats.
c
Start Slide Show /
Pause Slide Show
You can start or pause a Slide
Show. c
Slide Show Speed
You can select the slide show
speed during the slide show. c
Background Music
You can on / off background
music when watching a Slide
Show.
c
Background Music
Setting
You can select background music
when watching a Slide Show. c◀ ▶
English
Category Operation Videos Music Photos
Zoom
You can zoom into images in full
screen mode. c
Rotate
You can rotate images in full
screen mode. c
Information
You can see detailed information
about the played file. c c c◀ ▶
English
❑ Teletext Feature
The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the
service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must
be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be
displayed.
N You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote
control.
Other Information◀ ▶
English
/
(Teletext on / mix /
off)
Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press the button twice to overlap
the Teletext mode with the current broadcasting screen. Press it one more time to exit
teletext.
8
(store)
Stores the Teletext pages.
4
(size)
Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to
the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again.
9
(hold)
Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary
pages that follow automaticially. To undo, press it again.◀ ▶
English
Colour buttons (red,
green, yellow, blue)
If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a
Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons.
Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colourcoded page is
displayed. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page,
press the corresponding coloured button.
0
(mode)
Selects the Teletext mode (LIST / FLOF).If pressed during LIST mode, switches the
mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list
using the 8 (store) button.
1
(sub-page) (size)
Displays the available sub-page.
2
(page up)
Displays the next Teletext page.◀ ▶
English
3
(page down)
Displays the previous Teletext page.
6
(index)
Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext.
5
(reveal)
Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal
screen, press it again.
7
(cancel)
Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast.◀ ▶
English
Typical Teletext page
Part Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel identity.
C Current page number or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information. FASTEXT information.◀ ▶
English
❑ Troubleshooting
If you have any questions about the TV, first refer to this list. If none of these
troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www. samsung.com,” then click on
Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back-cover of this manual.
Issues Solutions and Explanations
Picture Quality • First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your TV is
properly displaying test image. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis
- Picture Test) If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture
may caused by the source or signal.
The TV image does not look as
good as it did in the store.
• If you have an analogue cable / set top box, upgrade to a digital set
top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition)
picture quality.
• Cable / Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up.
• Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto programme.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
The picture is distorted: macro
block error, small block, dots,
pixelization
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially
in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies.
• Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a
TV issue.
• Mobile phones used close to the TV (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in
picture on analogue and digital TV.
Colour is wrong or missing. • If you’re using a component connection, make sure the component
cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose
connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen.
There is poor colour or
brightness.
• Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu (go to Picture mode /
Colour / Brightness / Sharpness)
• Adjust Energy Saving option in the TV menu (go to MENU – System –
Eco Solution – Energy Saving)
• Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings (go to MENU
- Picture - Reset Picture)◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
There is a dotted line on the
edge of the screen.
• If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9.
• Change cable / satellite box resolution.
The picture is black and white. • If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow)
to the Green jack of component input 1 on the TV.
When changing channels, the
picture freezes or is distorted or
delayed.
• If connected to a cable box, please try to reset it. (reconnect the AC
cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes)
• Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p.
Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio
is properly operating. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound
Test)
If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal.
There is no sound or the sound
is too low at maximum volume.
• Please check the volume of the device (Cable / Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray
etc) connected to your TV.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
The picture is good but there is
no sound.
• Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the Sound menu.
• If you are using an external device, make sure the audio cables are
connected to the correct audio input jacks on the TV.
• If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output
option (ex. you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to
HDMI when you have a HDMI connected to your TV).
• If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
• If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged
into it.
• Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable.
The speakers are making an
inappropriate noise.
• Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to
an audio input.
• For antenna or Cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal
level may cause sound distortion.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
No Picture, No Video
The TV turns off automatically. • Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the System menu.
• If your PC is connected to the TV, check your PC power settings.
• Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet
and the TV.
• When watching TV from an antenna or cable connection, the TV will
turn off after 10 - 15 minutes if there is no signal.
RF (Cable / Antenna) Connection
The TV is not receiving all
channels.
• Make sure the coaxial cable is connected securely.
• Please try Plug & Play (Initial setup) to add available channels to the
channel list. Go to MENU - System - Plug & Play (Initial setup) and
wait for all available channels to be stored.
• Verify the Antenna is positioned correctly.
The picture is distorted: macro
block error, small block, dots,
pixelization.
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially
with fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies.
• A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
PC Connection
A “Mode Not Supported”
message appears.
• Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches the resolutions supported
by the TV.
“PC” is always shown on the
source list, even if a PC is not
connected.
• This is normal; “PC” is always shown on the source list, regardless of
whether a PC is connected.
The video is OK but there is no
audio.
• If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on
your PC.
Network Connection for PDP 550 and 570 Series
The wireless network
connection failed.
• The Samsung Wireless USB dongle is required to use a wireless
network.
• Make sure the Network Connection is set to Wireless.
• Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP sharer (router).◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
Others
The picture won’t display in full
screen.
• HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when
displaying up scaled SD (4:3) contents.
• Black bars on the top and bottom will appear during movies that have
aspect ratios different from your TV.
• Adjust the picture size options on your external device or TV to full
screen.
Plasma TV is making humming
noise.
• Plasma TVs typically make a soft humming sound. This is normal. It’s
caused by the electrical charges that are used to create the images on
the screen.
• If the humming sound is loud, you may have set the brightness on the
TV too high. Try setting the brightness lower.
• You can also have loud humming if the back of your Plasma TV is too
close to a wall or other hard surface. Also try rerouting your connection
cables.
• Improper installation of wall mount can create excessive noise.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
Image Retention (Burn In)
Issue.
• To minimize the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with
screen burn reduction technology. Pixel Shift technology enables you
to set picture movement up / down (Vertical Line) and side to side
(Horizontal Dot).
A “Mode Not Supported”
message appears.
• Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external
device’s output resolution accordingly. Refer to the resolution settings in
the user manual.
There is a plastic smell from the
TV.
• This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
The TV Signal Information is
unavailable in the Self Diagnosis
Test menu.
• This function is only available with digital channels from an Antenna / RF
/ Coax connection.
The TV is tilted to the side. • Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it.
The channel menu is greyed
out (unavailable).
• The Channel menu is only available when the TV source is selected.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
Your settings are lost after 30
minutes or every time the TV is
turned off.
• If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture
settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode
to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play procedure. Press the SOURCE
button to select TV mode, and go to MENU → System → Plug & Play
→ ENTERE.
You have intermittent loss of
audio or video.
• Check the cable connections and reconnect them.
• Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick
cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If
mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree
connectors.
You see small particles when
you look closely at the edge of
the frame of the TV.
• This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.◀ ▶
English
Issues Solutions and Explanations
The message “Scramble signal”
or “Weak Signal / No Signal”
appears.
• If you are using a CAM CARD (CI / CI+), check that it is installed into the
common interface slot.
• If there is still a problem, pull the CAM CARD out of the TV and insert it
into the slot again.
The PIP menu is not available. • PIP functionality is only available when you are using a HDMI, PC or
Component source.
You turned the TV off 45
minutes ago, and it turned on
again.
• It is normal. The TV operates the OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself to
upgrade firmware downloaded whilst your watching TV.
There are recurrent picture
sound issues.
• Check and change the signal/source.
A reaction may occur between
the rubber cushion pads on the
base stand and the top finish of
some furniture.
• To prevent this, use felt pads on any surface of the TV that comes in
direct contact with furniture.◀ ▶
English
N Some of above pictures and functions are available at specific models only.
N You can keep your TV as optimum condition to upgrade the latest firmware on
web site (samsung.com → Support → Downloads) by USB.◀ ▶
English
❑ CONNECTIONS COMMON INTERFACE Slot
To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted.
● If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”, some
channels will display the message “Scrambled
Signal”.
● The pairing information containing a telephone
number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID the Host ID and
other information will be displayed in about 2~3
minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider.
● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating
Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated.◀ ▶
English
N NOTE
● You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider.
● When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since
dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it.
● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card.
● The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on
the model.
● “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with
your authorized dealer.◀ ▶
English
● If you have any problems, please contact a service provider.
● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current antenna settings. The
screen will be distorted or will not be seen.
● When you are watching the satellite TV, remove the “CI or CI+ CARD” of
terrestrial and cable. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen.(For
Satellite)◀ ▶
English
❑ Anti-theft Kensington Lock
The Kensington Lock is not supplied by
Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix
the system when using it in a public place.
The appearance and locking method may
differ from the illustration depending on the
manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided
with the Kensington Lock for additional
information on proper use.
N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the TV. A Kensington slot is beside the “K”
icon.
1
◀ ▶
English
To lock the product, follow these steps:
1. Wrap the Kensington Lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk
or chair.
2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the
Kensington Lock cable.
3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product 1.
4. Lock the lock.
N These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual
supplied with the locking device.
N The locking device has to be purchased separately.
N The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV
model.◀ ▶
English
❑ Licence
TheaterSound, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TheaterSound technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Lab, Inc.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.◀
English
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
licence.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified®
device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Open Source Licence Notice
In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licences are available on the product menu.
Open Source Licence Notice is written only English.
BN68-02360A-02
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Country Customer Care Centre Web Site
AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at
BELGIUM
02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/be_fr
CZECH REPUBLIC
800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
Distributor pro Českou republiku:
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK 8 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/dk
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie
FINLAND 30 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi
FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www.samsung.com/fr
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.14/Min) www.samsung.de
HUNGARY 06 - 80 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/hu
ITALIA 800 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/it
LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl
NORWAY 3 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/no
POLAND
0 801 1SAMSUNG(172678)
022 - 607 - 93 - 33
www.samsung.com/pl
PORTUGAL 808 20 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/pt
SLOVAKIA 0800 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/sk
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se
SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk
TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr
BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 -
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee
LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt
MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 -
KAZAHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 -
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 -
UKRAINE 8-800-502-0000
www.samsung.com/ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru
LCD TV
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model Serial No.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:34Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice.
License
TruSurround HD, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is
incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Digital TV Notice
1. Functionalities related to Digital TV(DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC) digital
terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible DVB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cableTV service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal.
2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVBC is that for the broadcast transmission of digital TV over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric
Programme Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) and so on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be workable at
this moment.
3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T
digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.
4. Depending on the countries/areas where this TV set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a
service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business.
5. Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with some
cable service providers.
6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre.
Precautions When Displaying a Still Image
A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen
Do not display a still image and partially still on the LCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention.
This image retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and
contrast of the screen when displaying a still image.
Watching the LCD TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the
left, right and centre of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or
a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not
covered by the Warranty.
Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images. To
prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:35English - 1
Symbol
N O T
Note One-Touch Button TOOLS Button Press
❑
GENERAL INFORMATION
Viewing the Control Panel ....................................................2
Accessories ..........................................................................2
Viewing the Connection Panel..............................................3
Remote Control ....................................................................5
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............................5
OPERATION
Viewing the menus ...............................................................6
Placing Your Television in Standby Mode.............................7
Plug & Play Feature..............................................................7
Viewing the Display ..............................................................8
CHANNEL CONTROL
Configuring the Channel Menu.............................................8
Managing Channels ...........................................................11
PICTURE CONTROL
Configuring the Picture Menu.............................................13
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display.......................15
Setting up the TV with your PC ..........................................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
SOUND CONTROL
Configuring the Sound Menu..............................................17
Selecting the Sound Mode .................................................18
SETUP
Configuring the Setup Menu...............................................19
INPUT / SUPPORT
Configuring the Input Menu ................................................22
Configuring the Support Menu............................................22
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE
Teletext Feature..................................................................24
Installing the Stand.............................................................25
Installing the Wall Mount Kit ...............................................25
Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock ................................26
Securing the Installation Space..........................................26
Securing the TV to the Wall................................................27
Troubleshooting..................................................................28
Specifications .....................................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTENTS
English
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:35English - 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Viewing the Control Panel
The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
You can use a button by pressing the side panel buttons.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use the
ENTERE button on the remote control.
2 MENU: Press to see an on-screen menu of your TV’s features.
3Y: Press to increase or decrease the volume.
In the on-screen menu, use the Y buttons as you would use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control.
4Z: Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the Z buttons as you would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons
on the remote control.
5 P (POWER): Press to turn the TV on and off.
6 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR: Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.
7 POWER INDICATOR: Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand-by mode.
8 SPEAKERS
Accessories
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Remote Control &
Batteries (AAA x 2)
Power Cord Cover-Bottom Stand Screw X 4
Stand Screw X 3
(32inch model only)
Cleaning Cloth
● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide
Please make sure the following items are included with your LCD TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
Warranty card / Safety Guide (Not available in all locations)
The items colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:36English - 3
Viewing the Connection Panel
The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
Whenever you connect an external device to your TV, make sure that power on the unit is turned off.
When connecting an external device, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theatre receiver.
When the HDMI IN jacks are connected, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the TV outputs 2 channel audio
only. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the Optical jack on the DVD / Blu-ray player or Cable / Satellite Box
directly to an Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the TV.
2 PC IN
Connect to the video output jack on your PC.
3 ANT IN
Connects to an antenna or cable TV system.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Connect to the audio output jack on your PC.
DVI audio outputs for external devices.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Connect RCA audio cables to AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding
audio in connectors on the Amplifier or DVD Home Theatre.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
[TV Side Panel]
[TV Rear Panel]
Power Input
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:37English - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an HDMI output.
No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection.
Use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack for DVI connection to an external device. Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI-HDMI adapter
(DVI to HDMI) for video connection and the PC / DVI AUDIO IN jacks for audio.
You can also use the ports to connect to a PC.
What is HDMI?
‘High Definition Multimedia interface’ allows the transmission of high definition digital video data and multiple channels of
digital audio.
The HDMI / DVI terminal supports DVI connection to an extended device with the appropriate cable (not supplied).
The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size, has the HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital
Copy Protection) coding feature installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio.
The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal colour when DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Boxes
/ Satellite receivers supporting HDMI versions older than 1.3 are connected. When connecting an older HDMI cable and
there is no sound, connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack and the audio cables to the PC / DVI AUDIO IN jacks
on the back of the TV. If this happens, contact the company that provided the DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite
receiver to confirm the HDMI version, then request a firmware update. HDMI cables that are not 1.3 may cause annoying
flicker or no screen display.
7 COMMON INTERFACE Slot
When not inserting ‘CI CARD’ in some channels, ‘Scrambled Signal’ is displayed on the screen.
The pairing information containing a telephone number, CI CARD ID, Host ID and other information will be displayed in
about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider.
When the channel information configuration has finished, the message ‘Updating Completed’ is displayed, indicating that
the channel list is now updated.
You must obtain a CI CARD from a local cable service provider. Remove the CI CARD by carefully pulling it out with your
hands since dropping the CI CARD may cause damage to it.
Insert the CI-Card in the direction marked on it.
The place of the COMMON INTERFACE Slot may be different depending on its model.
CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Connect RCA cable to an appropriate external A/V device such as VCR, DVD or Camcorder.
Connect RCA audio cables to [R-AUDIO-L] on your set and the other ends to corresponding audio out connectors on the
A/V device.
9 KENSINGTON LOCK (depending on the model)
The Kensington Lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to
use a locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model.
0 COMPONENT IN
Connect component video cables (optional) to component connector (PR, PB, Y) on the rear of your set and the other ends
to corresponding component video out connectors on the DTV or DVD.
If you wish to connect both the Set-Top Box and DTV (or DVD), you should connect the Set-Top Box to the DTV (or DVD)
and connect the DTV (or DVD) to component connector (PR, PB, Y) on your set.
The PR, PB and Y connectors on your component devices (DTV or DVD) are sometimes labelled Y, B-Y and R-Y or Y, Cb
and Cr.
Connect RCA audio cables (optional) to [R-AUDIO-L] on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding audio
out connectors on the DTV or DVD.
! EXT (RGB)
Connector
Input Output
Video Audio (L / R) RGB Video + Audio (L / R)
EXT O O O Only TV or DTV output is available.
Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCR, DVD, video game device or video disc players.
@ SERVICE
Connector for software upgrades.
–
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:37English - 5
Remote Control
You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV.
The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light.
The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
1 POWER : Television Standby
button.
2 NUMERIC BUTTONS : Press to
change the channel.
3 FAV.CH : Used to display
Favourites Channel Lists on the
screen.
4Y : Press to increase or
decrease the volume.
5 SOURCE : Press to display and
select the available video sources.
6 INFO : Press to display information
on the TV screen.
7 TOOLS : Use to quickly select
frequently used functions.
8 CH LIST : Displays the Channel List
on screen.
9 COLOURS BUTTONS : Use these
buttons in the Channel list menus
etc.
! TV : Selects the TV mode directly.
@ PRE-CH : Enables you to return
to the previous channel you were
watching.
# MUTEM: Press to temporarily cut
off the sound.
$ P
: Press to change
channels.
% MENU : Displays the main onscreen menu
^ GUIDE : Electronic Programme Guide
(EPG) display
& RETURN : Returns to the previous menu
* UP▲ / DOWN▼ / LEFT◄ / RIGHT► /
ENTERE : Use to select on-screen
menu items and change menu values.
( EXIT : Press to exit the menu.
) SUBT. : Digital subtitle display
a AD : Audio Description selection.
Teletext Functions
5 0 : Teletext mode selection (LIST /
FLOF)
6 5 : Teletext reveal
7 4 : Teletext size selection
8 8 : Teletext store
9 Fastext topic selection
0/ : Alternately select Teletext,
Double, or Mix.
! :: Exit from the Teletext display
@ 1 : Teletext sub page
$ 2 : Teletext next page
3 : Teletext previous page
% 6 : Teletext index
& 9 : Teletext hold
( 7 : Teletext cancel
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure.
2. Install two AAA size batteries.
Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the
compartment.
3. Replace the cover.
Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the
remote control for a long time.
If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following:
Is the TV power on?
Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed?
Are the batteries drained?
Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?
Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:37English - 6
OPERATION
Viewing the menus
Before using the TV, follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu in order to select
and adjust different functions.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed on the screen. Its left side has icons: Picture, Sound,
Channel , Setup, Input, Application, Support.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons.
Press the ◄ or ► button to access the icon’s sub-menu.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to items in the menu.
Press the ENTERE button to enter items in the menu.
4. Press the ▲/▼/◄/► button to change the selected items.
Press the RETURN button to return to the previous menu.
5. Press the EXIT button to exit from the menu.
Using the remote control buttons
Button Operations Button Operations
MENUm Display the main on-screen menu.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Move the cursor and select an item.
Select the currently selected item.
Confirm the setting.
RUTURNR Return to the previous menu.
EXITe Exit the on-screen menu.
Example: Setting the TV’s Brightness in the Picture Menu
Adjusting the Brightness to 80
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu.
2. Press the ENTERE button to select Picture.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Brightness.
4. Press the ENTERE button.
5. Press the ◄ or ► button until the brightness becomes 80.
6. Press the ENTERE button.
Press the EXIT button to exit from the menu.
¦
N
N
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45 ►
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return
Brightness 45
U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return
Brightness 80
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:38English -
Placing Your Television in Standby Mode
Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when you
wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example).
1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control.
The screen is turned off and a standby indicator appears on your set.
2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP button again.
Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to
unplug the set from the mains and aerial.
Plug & Play Feature
When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently.
1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. The message You can set the menu
language. is displayed.
2. Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE
button to confirm your choice.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then the ENTERE button.
We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment.
Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments.
If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the Volume
button on the TV. When the volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds.
4. Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to
confirm your choice.
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Air or Cable, then press the ENTERE button.
Air: Air antenna signal.
Cable: Cable antenna signal.
6. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the channel source to memorize. Press the ENTERE button to select Start.
Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.
Digital: Digital channels.
Analogue: Analogue channels.
When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to set a value for the digital channel search. For
more information, refer to Channel → Auto Store.
The channel search will start and end automatically.
Press the ENTERE button at any time to interrupt the memorization process.
After all the available channels are stored, the message Set the Clock Mode. is displayed.
. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then Press the ENTERE button.
If you select Manual, Set current date and time is displayed.
If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. If not, select Manual to set the clock. (refer to page
19)
8. The connection method to provide the best quality HD is offered. After confirming the method, press the ENTERE button.
9. The message Enjoy your TV! is displayed. When you have finished, press the ENTERE button.
If you want to reset this feature...
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play.
3. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0-0-0-0.
If you want to change PIN number, use the Change PIN function. (refer to page 21)
The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mode.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:38English - 8
Viewing the Display
The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings.
Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Press the INFO button on the remote control. The TV will display the channel, the type of
sound, and the status of certain picture and sound settings.
▲, ▼: You can view other channel’s information. If you want to move to the currently
selected channel, press ENTERE button.
◄, ►: You can view the desired program’s information at the current channel.
Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the display
disappears automatically.
CHANNEL CONTROL
Configuring the Channel Menu
Country
The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
Analogue Channel
You can change the country for analogue channels.
Digital Channel
You can change the country for digital channels.
Auto Store
You can scan for the frequency ranges available to you (and availability depends on your
country). Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers.
If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
Air / Cable
Antenna source to memorize
Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.
Digital: Digital channels.
Analogue: Analogue channels.
When selecting ‘Cable → Digital & Analogue’ or ‘Cable → Digital’
Provide a value to scan for cable channels.
Search Mode → Full / Network / Quick
Quick
Network ID: Displays the network identification code.
Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (Differs in each country)
Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
–
–
–
–
Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and stores them in the TV’s memory.
If you want to stop Auto Store, press the ENTERE button.
The Stop Auto Store? message will be displayed.
Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Country ►
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Now & Next Guide
Full Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:38English - 9
Manual Store
Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s memory.
If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
Digital Channel
Manual store for digital channels.
Digital Channel is only available in DTV mode.
Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.
Frequency: Set the frequency using the number buttons.
Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.
When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list.
Analogue Channel
Manual store for analogue channel.
Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9)
buttons.
Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: Sets the sound system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
Channel (When you know the number of the channel to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or
S (Cable channel). Press the ► button, then press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the required number.
You can also select the channel number directly by pressing the number (0~9) buttons.
If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required.
Search (When you do not know the channel numbers): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner scans the
frequency range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the screen.
Store (When you store the channel and associated programme number): Set to OK by pressing the ENTERE button.
Channel mode
P (Programme mode): When completing tuning, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position
numbers from P00 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode.
C (Air channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this
mode.
S (Cable channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mode.
Cable Search Option (depending on the country)
Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for cable network searches.
Frequency (Start ~ Stop): Displays the frequency for the channel.
Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may appear blank or out
of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel. The display will dynamically update as soon as new information
becomes available.
For detailed procedures on using Now & Next Guide and Full Guide, refer to the descriptions on page 10.
You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button. (To configure the Default Guide, refer to the
descriptions.)
Now & Next Guide
For the six channels indicated in the left-hand column, displays the Current programme and the Next programme information.
Full Guide
Displays the programme information as time ordered One hour segments. Two hours of programme information is displayed which
may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:38English - 10
Default Guide → Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
You can decide whether to display either the Now & Next Guide or the Full Guide when the GUIDE button on the remote control
is pressed.
Channel List
For detailed procedures on using the Channel List, refer to the ‘Managing Channels’ instructions.
You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control.
Channel Mode
When press the P >/< button, Channels will be switched within the selected channel list.
Added Ch.
Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list.
Favourite Ch.
Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list.
Fine Tune
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store
operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may have to fine tune the channel manually.
Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk ‘*’ on the right-hand side of the channel number in the
channel banner.
To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button and then press the ENTERE button.
Only Analogue TV channels can be fine tuned.
Using the Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
To... Then...
Watch a programme in the EPG list Select a programme by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button.
Exit the guide Press the blue button
If the next programme is selected, it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed. If the ENTERE button is pressed again, press
the ◄, ► button to select Cancel Schedules, the scheduling is cancelled with the clock icon gone.
View programme information Select a programme of your choice by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button.
Then press the INFO button when the programme of your choice is
highlighted. The programme title is on the upper part of the screen
centre.
Please click on INFO button for detailed information. Channel Number, Running Time, Status Bar, Parental Level, Video Quality
Information (HD / SD), Sound Modes, Subtitle or Teletext, languages of Subtitle or Teletext and brief summary of the highlighted
programme are included on the detailed information. ‘...’ will be appeared if the summary is long.
Toggle between the Now & Next Guide and
Full Guide
Press the red button repeatedly.
In Full Guide
Scrolls backwards quickly (24 hours).
Scrolls forwards quickly (24 hours).
Press the green button repeatedly.
Press the yellow button repeatedly.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Now & Next Guide
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Now Next
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Watch
INFO Information ■ Full Guide ■ Exit
Full Guide
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No Information
Freshmen O..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Now/Next ■ +24 Hours ■ Exit
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:39English - 11
Managing Channels
Using this menu, you can Add / Delete or set Favourite channels and use the programme guide
for digital broadcasts.
All Channels
Shows all currently available channels.
Added Channels
Shows all added channels.
Favourites
Shows all favourite channels.
To select the Favourites channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the remote control.
Programmed
Shows all current reserved programmes.
Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels or Favourites screen by pressing the ▲ / ▼ buttons, and pressing
the ENTERE button. Then you can watch the selected channel.
Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List
Red (Channel Type): Toggle between your TV, Radio, Data / Other and All.
Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.
Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists. You can perform the add / delete, add to Favourites / delete from
Favourites, or lock / unlock function for multiple channels at the same time. Select the required channels and press the
yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels.
TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Delete (or Add), Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), Lock (or Unlock),
Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Sort, Edit Channel Number, Select All (or Deselect All), Auto Store menu. (The
Options menus may differ depending on the situation.)
Channel Status Display Icons
A : An analogue channel.
c: A channel selected by pressing the yellow button.
* : A channel set as a Favourite.
( : A programme currently being broadcast.
\ : A locked channel.
) : A reserved programme
Channel List Option Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favourites)
Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu.
Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status.
Add / Delete
You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want.
All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels menu.
A gray-coloured channel indicates the channel has been deleted.
The Add menu only appears for deleted channels.
You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favourites menu in the
same manner.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
You can set channels you watch frequently as favourites.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the add to (or delete from) Favourite by selecting Tools
→ Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite).
The ‘*’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favourite.
All favourite channels will be shown on Favourites menu.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:39English - 12
Lock / Unlock
You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. This function is available only when the Child Lock is
set to On. (see page 21)
The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0-0-0-0. You can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
The ‘\’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked.
Timer Viewing
If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List;
even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a programme, set the current time first. (See page 19)
Only memorized channels can be reserved.
You can set the channel, day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Reserving a programme will be shown in the Programmed menu.
Digital Programme Guide and Viewing Reservation
When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Programme Guide for the channel appears. You can
reserve a programme according to the procedures described above.
Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only)
Channels can labelled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected.
The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labelled.
Edit Channel Number (digital channels only)
You can also edit the channel number by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Sort (analogue channels only)
This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using
the auto store.
Select All / Deselect All
Select All: You can select all the channels in the channel list.
Deselect All: You can deselect all the selected channels.
You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel.
Auto Store
For further details on setting up options, refer to page 8.
If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
Channel List Option Menu (in Programmed )
You can view, modify or delete a reservation.
Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu.
Change Info
Select to change a viewing reservation.
Cancel Schedules
Select to cancel a viewing reservation.
Information
Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the reservation information.)
Select All
Select all reserved programmes.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programmed All ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools E Information
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:39English - 13
PICTURE CONTROL
Configuring the Picture Menu
Mode
You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the picture mode by
selecting Tools → Picture Mode.
Dynamic
Selects the picture for high-definition in a bright room.
Standard
Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment.
Movie
Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room.
Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality.
Backlight: Adjusts the brightness of LCD back light.
Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level of the picture.
Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level of the picture
Sharpness: Adjusts the edge definition of the picture.
Colour: Adjusts colour saturation of the picture.
Tint (G/R): Adjusts the colour tint of the picture.
Select a picture mode to be adjusted first. The adjusted values are saved for each picture mode.
When you make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R), the OSD will be adjusted
accordingly.
In analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAL system, you cannot use the Tint (G/R) Function.
In PC mode, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast and Brightness.
Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the brightness level of the picture is reduced, which will
reduce the overall running cost.
Advanced Settings
Samsung’s new TVs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous models. See below to adjust detailed
picture settings.
Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode.
In PC mode, you can only make changes to Gamma and White Balance from among the Advanced Settings items.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided.
Gamma
You can adjust the Primary Colour (Red, Green, Blue) Intensity.
Colour Space
Colour Space is a colour matrix composed of red, green and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour Space to experience the
most natural colour.
Native: Native Colour Space offers deep and rich colour tone.
Auto: Auto Colour Space automatically adjusts to the most natural colour tone based on programme sources.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Advanced Settings ►
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:40English - 14
White Balance
You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: You can adjust the Colour ‘temperature’ in the light areas by
changing the values of R, G, B. Recommended for advanced users only.
Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults.
Flesh Tone
You can emphasize the pink ‘flesh tone’ in the picture.
Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
Edge Enhancement → Off / On
You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture.
Picture Options
In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone and Size from among the items in Picture Options.
Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2
You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes.
Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
Warm1 or Warm2 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie.
Size
You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the size by selecting Tools → Picture Size.
Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
16:9: Adjusts the picture size to 16:9 appropriate for DVDs or wide broadcasting.
Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3.
Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide picture (in the vertical direction) to fit the screen size.
4:3: This is the default setting for a video movie or normal broadcasting.
Screen Fit: Use the function to see the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p / 1080i) or Component (1080i) signals
are input.
Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary.
The items available may differ depending on the selected mode.
In PC Mode, only 16:9 and 4:3 mode can be adjusted.
Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours.
Wide Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the
picture up / down. Then press the ENTERE button.
Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture
up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to Select Size, then press the ENTERE button. Press
the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the ENTERE button.
After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i) or Component (1080i) mode: Select Position by pressing the ◄ or ► button. Use the
▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture.
Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, then press the ENTEREbutton. You can initialize the setting.
If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the Overscan
function.
Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
When setting the picture size to Auto Wide in a 16:9 wide TV, you can determine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS
(Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires different picture size so this function is
intended for users to select it.
16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3.
Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture vertically on screen.
4:3: Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
This function is available in Auto Wide mode.
This function is not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:40English - 15
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static
and ghosting that may appear on the screen.
When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
You can directly select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
This function is active only when the external input connects to HDMI (RGB signals).
Film Mode → Off / Auto
The TV can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality.
Film Mode is supported in TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) and HDMI(480i / 1080i).
Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel
Resets all picture settings to the default values.
Select a picture mode to be reset. The reset is performed for each picture mode.
Reset Picture Mode: Current picture values return to default settings.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be different,
depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens look
different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung
Dealer.)
1. First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu.
2. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a display dialog-box will appear.
3. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Display’ and a display dialogbox will appear.
4. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box.
The correct size setting (resolution): Optimum-1360 x 768 pixels
If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click
‘OK’ and exit the dialog box.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:40English - 16
Display Modes
Both screen position and size will vary depending on the type of PC monitor and its resolution. The resolutions in the table are
recommended.
D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input
Mode Resolution
Horizontal Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical Frequency
(Hz)
Pixel Clock Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/-
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 -/+
1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 -/+
1280 x 720 56.456 74.777 95.750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+
When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
The interlace mode is not supported.
The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported.
Setting up the TV with your PC
Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
Auto Adjustment
Auto Adjustment allows the PC screen of set to self-adjust to the incoming PC video signal.
The values of fine, coarse and position are adjusted automatically.
This function does not work in DVI-HDMI mode.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Auto Adjustment
by selecting Tools → Auto Adjustment.
Screen
Coarse / Fine
The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is
not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has
been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the centre of screen.
PC Position
Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the Vertical-Position. Press
the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position.
Image Reset
You can replace all image settings with the factory default values.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Brightness: : 45
Sharpness : 50
Auto Adjustment ►
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:40English - 1
SOUND CONTROL
Configuring the Sound Menu
Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom
You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also configure the sound
mode by selecting Tools → Sound Mode.
Standard
Selects the normal sound mode.
Music
Emphasizes music over voices.
Movie
Provides the best sound for movies.
Clear Voice
Emphasizes voice over other sounds.
Custom
Recalls your customized sound settings.
Equalizer
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences.
Mode
You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences.
Balance
Controls the balance between the right and left speakers.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment)
To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies
Reset
Resets the equalizer settings to the default values.
SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SRS TruSurround HD is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content over two
speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker playback system,
including internal television speakers. It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats.
Audio Language (digital channels only)
You can change the default value for audio languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream.
You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast.
While viewing a digital channel, this function can be selected.
Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (digital channels only)
When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed
difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function.
The Audio Format appears according to the broadcasting signal.
While viewing a digital channel, this function can be selected.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Mode : Custom ►
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Audio Language : - - -
Audio Format : - - -
Audio Description
Auto Volume : Off
Sound
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:40English - 18
Audio Description (digital channels only)
This is an auxiliary audio function that provides an additional audio track for visually challenged persons. This function handles the
Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the
Audio Description On or Off and control the volume.
Press the AD button on the remote control to select Off or On.
Audio Description → Off / On
Turn the audio description function on or off.
Volume
You can adjust the audio description volume.
Volume is active when Audio Description is set to On.
Auto Volume → Off / On
Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is
changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the
modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low.
Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker
If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier.
The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.
If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited.
Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel
You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults.
Selecting the Sound Mode
You can set the sound mode in the Tools menu. When you set to Dual l ll, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen.
Audio Type Dual 1 / 2 Default
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatic change
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatic change
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono.
This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound signal.
This function is only available in TV mode.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:40English - 19
SETUP
Configuring the Setup Menu
Menu Language
You can set the menu language.
Time
Clock
Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV.
The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button.
If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again.
Clock Mode
You can set up the current time manually or automatically.
Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast.
Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time.
Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time may not be set correctly. If this occurs, set the time
manually.
The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically.
Clock Set
You can set the current time manually.
Set up this item when you have set Clock Mode to Manual.
You can set the day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes).
The TV automatically switches to standby mode when the timer reaches 0.
To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Three different on / off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first.
On Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.)
Off Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.)
Volume: Select the desired turn on volume level.
Antenna: Select Air or Cable.
Channel: Select the desired channel.
Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual.
When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the
desired day and the c mark will appear.
You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Auto Power Off
When you set the timer On, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was
turned on by the timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a TV is
on for too long time.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Menu Language : English ►
Time
Broadcast
Security
General
Setup
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:41English - 20
Broadcast
Subtitle
You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. Use this menu to set the Subtitle Mode. Normal under the menu is the basic subtitle
and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a hearing-impaired person.
Subtitle → Off / On : Switches subtitles on or off.
Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing: Sets the subtitle mode.
Subtitle Language: Set the subtitle language.
If the programme you are watching does not support the Hard of hearing function, Normal automatically activates even
though Hard of hearing mode is selected.
English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.
You can select these options simply by pressing the SUBT. button on the remote control.
Digital Text → Disable / Enable (UK only)
If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is enabled.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the
MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video
files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including
VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing, digital libraries
and network games.
Teletext Language
You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language type.
English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.
Preference
Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language
Using this feature, users can select one of the languages. The language selected here is the default when the user selects a
channel.
If you change the language setting, the Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language
menu are automatically changed to the selected language.
The Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu show a list of languages
supported by the current channel and the selection is highlighted. If you change this language setting, the new selection is
only valid for the current channel. The changed setting does not change the setting of the Primary Subtitle Language, Primary
Audio Language, or the Primary Teletext Language of the Preference menu.
Common Interface
CI Menu
This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card.
Application Info.
This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI slot and displays it.
The Application Info inserting is about the ‘CI CARD’. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is ON or OFF.
1. Purchase the CI CAM module by visiting your nearest dealer or by phone.
2. Insert the ‘CI CARD’ into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits.
3. Insert the CAM with the ‘CI CARD’ installed into the common interface slot.
(Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the end so that it is parallel with the slot.)
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel.
CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:41English - 21
Security
Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0-0-0-0. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
Child Lock → Off / On
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by muting out video
and audio.
You can lock some channels in Channel List. (refer to page 12)
Child Lock is available only in TV mode.
Parental Lock
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by a 4-digit PIN
(Personal Identification Number) code that is defined by the user.
The Parental Lock item differs depending on the country.
When the Parental Lock is set, the ‘\’ symbol is displayed.
Allow All: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block All: Press to lock all TV ratings.
Change PIN
You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV.
If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to 0-0-0-0:
POWER(Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER(On).
General
Game Mode → Off / On
When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by
selecting the game menu.
To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, cancel game mode in the setup menu.
If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly.
Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode.
If Game Mode is On:
Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and users cannot change the mode.
Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom and users cannot change the mode. Adjust the sound using the
equalizer.
The Reset Sound function is activated. Selecting the Reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer settings to
the factory defaults.
Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto
This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night, set the
Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption.
If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off and you can only hear the sound. Press any button to get out of Picture Off.
In the Tools menu, Picture Off function is not supported.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Energy Saving option by selecting Tools →
Energy Saving.
Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High
A melody sound can be set to come on when the TV is powered On or Off.
The Melody does not play
When no sound is output from the TV because the MUTE button has been pressed.
When no sound is output from the TV because the (–) Volume button has been pressed.
When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function.
❑
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
T
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:41English - 22
INPUT / SUPPORT
Configuring the Input Menu
Source List
Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD / Blu-ray players / Satellite
receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of your choice.
Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to vi7ew an external signal source. TV
mode can be selected by pressing the TV button.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. In the
Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that are not
connected will be sorted to the bottom.
Ext. and PC always stay activated.
TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Edit Name and Information menus.
Edit Name
Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray
/ HD DVD / DMA
When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI1/DVI mode to DVI or DVI PC in
the Edit Name of the Input mode. In this case, a separate sound connection is required.
Configuring the Support Menu
Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the colour pattern on
the screen to see if the problem still exists.
Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes.
There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance.
No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem with your
external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to
the external device’s user manual.
Sound Test
If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can check the
sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the TV. ‘Does the problem still exist with this sound test?’ appears on the screen.
If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker
in the Sound menu.
The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing
the MUTE button.
Yes: If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes. There may be a problem with
the TV. Contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance.
No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check
your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual.
Signal Information (digital channels only)
Unlike analogue channels, which can vary in reception quality from ‘snowy’ to clear, digital (HDTV) channels have either perfect
reception quality or you will not receive them at all. So, unlike analogue channels, you cannot fine tune a digital channel. You can,
however, adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels.
If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength.
Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Source List
Edit Name
Input
Self Diagnosis ►
Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Support
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:41English - 23
Software Upgrade
To keep your product up-to-date with new Digital Television features then software upgrades
are periodically broadcast as part of the normal Television signal. It will automatically detect
these signals and display the software upgrade banner. You are given the option to install the
upgrade.
BY USB
Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade into TV. Please be careful to not
disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied. The TV will
turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. Please check the
firmware version after the update is completed. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to
their default (factory) settings.
We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade.
BY Channel
Upgrades the software using the broadcasting signal.
If the function is selected during the software transmission period, this function searches for available software and downloads
the software.
The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status.
Standby Mode Upgrade
To continue software upgrade with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after entering standby
mode, a manual upgrade is automatically conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be on
slightly for the LCD product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is completed.
Alternative Software
To display the software version information.
HD Connection Guide
This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HD TV.
Refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV.
Contact Samsung
View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software.
You can view the information regarding the call centre, product and software file download method.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
TV Rear Panel
USB Drive
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:42English - 24
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE
Teletext Feature
Most television stations provide written information services via Teletext. The index page of the Teletext service gives you
information on how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote
control buttons.
For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or
some pages may not be displayed.
You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
1 0 (mode)
Press to select the Teletext mode
(LIST/FLOF). If you press it in the LIST
mode, it switches into the List save
mode. In the List save mode, you can
save Teletext page into list using the
8(store) button.
2 5 (reveal)
Used to display the hidden text (answers
to quiz games, for example). To display
normal screen, press it again.
3 4 (size)
Press to display the double-size letters
in the upper half of the screen. For
lower half of the screen, press it again.
To display normal screen, press it once
again.
4 8 (store)
Used to store the Teletext pages.
5 Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/
blue)
If the FASTEXT system is used by a
broadcasting company, the different
topics covered on a Teletext page are
colour-coded and can be selected by
pressing the coloured buttons. Press
one of them corresponding to the
required. The page is displayed with
other coloured information that can be
selected in the same way. To display
the previous or next page, press the
corresponding coloured button.
6/ (Teletext on/mix)
Press to activate Teletext mode after
selecting the channel providing the
Teletext service. Press it twice to overlap
the Teletext with the current broadcasting
screen.
7 : (exit)
Exit from the Teletext display.
8 1 (sub-page)
Used to display the available sub-page.
9 2 (page up)
Used to display the next Teletext page.
0 3 (page down)
Used to display the previous Teletext
page.
! 9 (hold)
Used to hold the display on a given
page if the selected page is linked with
several secondary pages which follow on
automatically. To resume, press it again.
@ 6 (index)
Used to display the index (contents)
page at any time while you are viewing
Teletext.
# 7 (cancel)
Used to display the broadcast when
searching for a page.
The Teletext pages are organized according to six categories:
Part Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel identity.
C Current page number or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information.
FASTEXT information.
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:42English - 25
Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence, which can be accessed by:
Entering the page number
Selecting a title in a list
Selecting a coloured heading (FASTEXT system)
Teletext level supported by the TV is version 2.5 which is capable of displaying additional graphics or text.
Depending upon the transmission, blank side panels can occur when displaying Teletext.
In these cases, additional graphics or text is not transmitted.
Older TV’s which do not support version 2.5 are not capable of displaying any additional graphics or text, regardless of the
Teletext transmission.
Press the TV button to exit from the Teletext display.
Teletext 16:9, picture is 16:9
Installing the Stand
Preset: Place the Guide Stand and Cover Neck onto the stand and fasten it using the
screws. Applicable to 32inch models only.
1. Attach your LCD TV to the stand.
Two or more people should carry the TV.
Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when assembling
them.
To make sure the TV is installed on the stand at a proper level, do not apply excess
downward pressure to the upper left of right sides of the TV.
2. Fasten two screws at position 1 and then fasten two screw at position 2.
Stand the product up and fasten the screws. If you fasten the screws with the LCD TV
placed down, it may lean to one side.
Installing the Wall Mount Kit
Wall mount items (sold separately) allow you to mount the TV on the wall.
For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the
Wall Mount items. Contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mounted
bracket.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or
others if you elect to install the TV on your own.
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal
injury due to electric shock.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
¦
Back
Front
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:43English - 26
Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock
The Kensington Lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public
place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the
manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for proper use. The
locking device has to be purchased separately. The location of the Kensington Lock may be
different depending on its model.
1. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LCD TV (1) and turn it in the
locking direction (2).
2. Connect the Kensington Lock cable (3).
3. Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object.
3
1
2
Securing the Installation Space
Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.
Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept.
When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only.
If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the
product falling.
If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in
the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation.
The appearance may differ depending on the product.
When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall-mount
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:44English - 2
Securing the TV to the Wall
Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do
not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death.
Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device
for safety purposes, as follows.
To avoid the TV from falling:
1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the
screws have been firmly installed onto the wall.
You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall.
Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase
these additionally.
2. Remove the screws from the centre back of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and
then fasten the screws onto the TV again.
Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the
screws of the following specifications.
Screw Specifications
For a 17 ~ 29 Inch LCD TV: M4 X L15
For a 32 ~ 40 Inch LCD TV: M6 X L15
3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong
string and then tie the string tightly.
Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.
It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or
lower than the clamps fixed on the TV.
Untie the string before moving the TV.
4. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any
sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections,
contact a professional installer.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Wall
Wall
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:44English - 28
Troubleshooting
If you have any questions of TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit ‘www.samsung.com’
site, then click on Support or contact Call Centre on list of last page.
Issue Solution
Picture Quality
First of all, please perform the Picture Test to confirm that your TV is properly displaying
test image.
Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test
If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal.
●
TV image does not look as good
as it did in the store.
If you have an analogue Cable/Set top box, upgrade to an Box. Use HDMI or
Component cables to deliver HD picture quality.
Cable/Satellite subscriber : Try HD(High Definition) stations from channel line up.
Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto programme.
Many HD channels are upscaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents.
Adjust Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
Confirm that you are watching the TV at the minimum distance recomended based on
the size and definition of the signal you are displaying.
●
●
●
N
●
●
Picture is distorted : macroblock,
small block, dots, pixelization
Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving
pictures such as sports and action movies.
Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue.
●
●
Wrong or missing colour with
Component connection.
Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose
connections may cause colour problems or the screen will be blank.
●
Poor colour or brightness. Adjust Picture options in the TV menu. (Picture mode, Colour, Brightness,
Sharpness)
Adjust Energy Saving option in Setup menu.
Try picture reset to view the default picture setting. (Go to MENU - Picture - Picture
Reset)
●
●
●
Dotted line on the edge of screen. If picture size is set to Screen Fit, change to 16:9.
Change cable/set top box resolution.
●
●
Picture is black and white with AV
(Composite) input only.
● Connect video cable(Yellow) to Green jack of component input 1 of the TV.
Picture freezes or is distorted
when changing channels or
picture is delayed.
If connected with cable box, please try to reset cable box. (reconnect AC cord and wait
until cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.)
Set output resolution of cable box to 1080i or 720p.
●
●
Sound Quality
First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly
operating.
Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test
If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal.
●
No sound or sound is too low at
maximum volume.
Please check the volume of external device connected to your TV then, adjust the TV
volume accordingly.
●
Picture is good but no sound. Set the Speaker Select option to TV speaker in the sound menu.
Make sure audio cables from an external device are connected to correct audio input
jacks on the TV.
Check connected device’s audio output option. (ex: You may need to change your
cable box’ audio option to HDMI when you have HDMI connected to your TV.)
If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
Deactivate SRS function if you are setting the volume over 30 value.
Remove plug from headphone jack. (if available on your TV)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Noise from speaker. Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input.
For Antenna/Cable connection, check signal strength. Low signal level may cause
sound distortion.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:44English - 29
Issue Solution
No Picture, No Video
TV won’t turn on. Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV.
Make sure the wall outlet is working.
Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the remote is working
properly. If the TV turns on, it may be caused by Remote Control. To fix the Remote
problem, refer to ‘Remote control does not work’ below.
●
●
●
TV turns off automatically. Check if the Sleep Timer is set to On in the Setup menu.
If connected the TV to your PC, check your PC power settings.
Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV.
If there is no signal for about 10 ~ 15 minutes with Antenna/Cable connection, the TV
will turn off.
●
●
●
●
No picture/Video. Check cable connections.(remove and reconnect all cables of TV and external devices)
Set your external device’s (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video output to match
the connections to the TV input. For example, external device’s output: HDMI, TV’s
input: HDMI.
Make sure your connected device is powered on.
Make sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the TV
remote.
●
●
●
●
RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection
Cannot receive all channels. Make sure Antenna cable is connected securely.
Please try Plug & Play to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU -
Setup - Plug & Play and wait for all avaiable channels are stored.
Verify Antenna is positioned correctly.
●
●
●
Picture is distorted: macroblock,
small block, dots, pixelization
Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving
pictures such as sports and action movies.
Low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue.
●
●
PC Connection
‘Not Supported Mode’ message. Set your PC’s output resolution and frequency so it matches the resolutions supported
by the TV.
●
PC is always shown on source list
even if not connected.
This is normal; PC is always shown on the source list even though a PC is not
connected.
●
Video is OK but there is no audio
with HDMI connection.
● Check the audio output setting on your PC.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:44English - 30
Issue Solution
Others
Picture is not shown in full screen. Black bars on each side will be shown on HD channels when displaying upscaled SD
(4:3) contents.
Black bars on Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different
from your TV.
Adjust picture size option on your external device or TV to full screen.
●
●
●
Remote control does not work. Replace the remote control batteries with correct polarity (+ -).
Clean the transmission window located on the top of the remote.
Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away.
●
●
●
Can not control TV power or
volume with Cable/Set top box
remote control.
Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the TV. Refer to Cable/Sat
user manual for SAMSUNG TV code.
●
‘Not Supported Mode’ message. Check the supported resolution of the TV and adjust the external device’s output
resolution accordingly. Refer to resolution settings in this manual.
●
Plastic smell from TV. ● This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
TV Signal Information is
unavailable in the Self Diagnostic
Test menu.
This function is only available with digital channels with an Antenna (RF/Coax)
connection.
●
TV is tilted to right or left side. ● Remove the stand base from TV and reassemble.
Can not assemble stand base. Make sure TV is placed on flat surface. If can not remove screws from TV, please use
magnetized screw driver.
●
Channel menu is grey out.
(unavailable)
● Channel menu is only available when TV source is selected.
Your settings are lost after 30
minutes or every time TV is
turned off.
If TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30
minutes. Please change from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug &
Play procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, go to MENU → Setup
→ Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Intermittent loss of audio or video. Check cable connections and reconnect.
Can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible
enough for long term use. If wall mounting, we recommend using cables with 90
degree connectors.
●
●
You may see small particles if you
look closely at the edge of the
bezel surrounding the TV screen.
● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
‘Scramble signal’ or ‘Weak Signal/
No Signal’ with CAM CARD(CI).
Check that CAM has CI Card installed into the common interface slot.
Pull out CAM from the TV and insert into the slot again.
●
●
When turned off and 45 minutes
later, TV is turned on itself.
It is normal, the TV operate OTA (Over The Air) function itself to upgrade firmware
downloaded during watching.
●
Recurrent picture/sound issue. Check and change signal/source. ●
This TFT LCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there
may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:45English - 31
Specifications
Model Name LE26B450 LE32B450
Screen Size
(Diagonal) 26 inch 32 inch
PC Resolution
(Optimum) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz
Sound
(Output) 5W X 2 10W X 2
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Weight
With Stand 8 kg 12 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-20° C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Stand Swivel
Left / Right 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
This device is a Class B digital apparatus.
For the power supply and Power Cons
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:45Les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. Elles peuvent différer de
l’aspect réel du produit. La conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis.
Licence
TruSurround HD, SRS et le symbole sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc. La technologie
TruSurround HD est incorporée sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc.
Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques déposées
de Dolby Laboratories.
Notifications pour le téléviseur numérique
1. Les fonctions relatives au téléviseur numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux
terrestres numériques de type DVB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AVC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un service
de télévision par câble compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur local pour connaître les
possibilités de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. La norme DVBC est quant à elle prévue pour la diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions particulières,
telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program Guide - EPG), la vidéo à la demande (Video on Demand
- VOD), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Elles ne seront par conséquent pas traitées pour l'instant.
3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes DVB-T et DVB-C (août 2008), il n'est pas garanti qu'il soit
compatible avec les futures diffusions de signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C.
4. En fonction du pays ou de la région où vous vous trouvez, certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des
frais supplémentaires pour un tel service. Vous devrez aussi peut-être accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés.
5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et que
la réception des signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs.
6. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre service client Samsung.
Précautions à prendre lors de l'affichage d'une image fixe
Une image fixe peut occasionner des dommages irrémédiables à l'écran du téléviseur.
N'affichez pas d'image fixe ou partiellement fixe sur l'écran LCD pendant plus de 2 heures car cela pourrait provoquer
une rémanence de l'image à l'écran. Cette rémanence de l'image est également appelée "brûlure de l'écran". Pour l'éviter,
réduisez la luminosité et le contraste de l'écran lorsque vous affichez une image fixe.
L'affichage sur l'écran LCD du téléviseur d'images au format 4:3 pendant une période prolongée peut laisser
des traces de bordures à gauche, à droite et au centre de l'écran, dues à la différence d'émission de lumière
sur celui-ci. La lecture d'un DVD ou l'utilisation d'une console de jeu peut avoir un effet similaire sur l'écran.
Les dommages occasionnés par l'effet précité ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
L'affichage d'images fixes de jeux vidéo et d'ordinateurs pendant une période excessive peut produire des rémanences. Pour
éviter cela, réduisez la "luminosité" et le "contraste" lors de l'affichage d'images fixes.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:45Symboles
N O T
Remarque Bouton tactile Bouton TOOLS Appuyez sur
❑
INFORMATIONS GÉNÉRALES
Présentation du panneau de commande..............................2
Accessoires .........................................................................2
Présentation du panneau de branchement ..........................3
Télécommande.....................................................................5
Insertion des piles dans la télécommande ...........................5
FONCTIONNEMENT
Affichage des menus............................................................6
Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur ...............................7
Fonction Plug & Play ............................................................7
Visualisation de l’affichage ...................................................8
CONTRÔLE DES CHAÎNES
Configuration du menu des chaînes.....................................8
Gestion des chaînes ..........................................................11
CONTRÔLE D'IMAGE
Configuration du menu Image ............................................13
Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d'ordinateur (PC)....15
Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC ..............................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTRÔLE DU SON
Configuration du menu Sound............................................17
Sélection du mode son.......................................................18
CONFIGURATION
Configuration du menu Configuration.................................19
ENTRÉE / ASSISTANCE
Configuration du menu Input ..............................................22
Configuration du menu Support..........................................22
RECOMMANDATION D'UTILISATION
Fonction Télétexte..............................................................24
Montage du socle ...............................................................25
Installation du kit de montage mural...................................25
Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington .............................26
Sécurisation de l'emplacement d'installation......................26
Fixation du téléviseur au mur .............................................27
Dépannage.........................................................................28
Caractéristiques..................................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTENU
Français
Français - 1
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:45INFORMATIONS GÉNÉRALES
Présentation du panneau de commande
La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
Vous pouvez utiliser un bouton en appuyant sur les boutons du panneau latéral.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Bascule entre toutes les sources d'entrée disponibles. Dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez ce bouton de la même
façon que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande.
2 MENU : Permet d'afficher un menu à l'écran des fonctions du téléviseur.
3Y : Permet d'augmenter ou de baisser le volume.
Dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez les boutons Y de la même façon que les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande.
4Z: Permet de changer de chaîne. Dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez les boutons Z de la même façon que les
boutons ▼ et ▲ de la télécommande.
5 P (ALIMENTATION) : Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le téléviseur.
6 CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE : Dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur.
7 TÉMOIN D'ALIMENTATION : Clignote et s'éteint lorsqu'il est sous tension et s'allume en mode veille.
8 HAUT-PARLEURS
Accessoires
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Télécommande et piles
(AAA x 2)
Câble
d'alimentation
Couvercle-Fond Vis de pied X 4
Vis de pied X 3
(modèle 32 pouces
uniquement)
Chiffon de
nettoyage
● Mode d’emploi ● Carte de garantie ● Manuel de sécurité
Vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont fournis avec votre téléviseur LCD. S'il manque des éléments, contactez votre
revendeur.
Carte de garantie / Manuel de sécurité (non disponible pour tous les pays)
La couleur et la forme des éléments peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
Français - 2
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:46Présentation du panneau de branchement
La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
Lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe sur votre téléviseur, assurez-vous que celui-ci est éteint.
Lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe, faites correspondre les couleurs de la borne de connexion et du câble.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Pour raccorder un composant audio numérique tel qu'un récepteur home cinéma.
Lorsque les prises HDMI IN sont connectées, la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du téléviseur produit uniquement
un signal audio 2 voies. Pour écouter du son canal 5,1, branchez la prise optique du lecteur DVD / Blu-ray ou du
décodeur câble/Décodeur satellite directement sur un amplificateur ou sur un système home cinéma, et non sur le
téléviseur.
2 PC IN
Pour raccorder la fiche de sortie vidéo de votre PC.
3 ANT IN
Pour raccorder une antenne ou un système de câblodiffusion.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Pour raccorder la fiche de sortie audio de votre PC.
Sorties audio DVI pour périphériques externes.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Branchez les câbles audio RCA au connecteur AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] situé à l'arrière de votre poste et les autres
extrémités aux connecteurs d'entrée audio correspondants sur l'amplificateur ou le système Home Cinéma.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
Français - 3
[Panneau latéral du téléviseur]
[Panneau arrière
du téléviseur]
Entrée de
l'alimentation
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:476 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Pour raccorder la fiche HDMI d'un périphérique équipé d'une sortie HDMI.
Aucune connexion audio n'est nécessaire pour une connexion HDMI-HDMI.
Utilisez la prise HDMI IN 1(DVI) pour une connexion DVI à un périphérique externe. Utilisez un câble ou un adaptateur
DVI-HDMI pour la connexion vidéo et les prises PC / DVI AUDIO IN pour le son.
Vous pouvez également utiliser les ports pour connecter un PC.
Qu'est-ce que HDMI ?
La technologie HDMI (High Definition Multimedia interface) permet la transmission de données vidéo numériques haute
définition et de plusieurs canaux de son numérique.
Le terminal HDMI / DVI prend en charge la connexion DVI vers un périphérique raccordé avec le câble adéquat (non
fourni).
La différence entre HDMI et DVI est que le périphérique HDMI est plus petit, dispose de la fonction de codage HDCP
(High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) et prend en charge le son numérique multicanal.
Il se peut que le téléviseur n'émette aucun son et que les images s'affichent dans des couleurs anormales en cas
de connexion de lecteurs DVD / Blu-ray et décodeurs/récepteurs satellite compatibles avec des versions de HDMI
antérieures à HDMI 1.3. Si, lorsque vous branchez un câble HDMI de génération antérieure, aucun son n'est émis,
connectez le câble HDMI à la prise HDMI IN 1(DVI) et les câbles audio aux prises PC / DVI AUDIO IN situées à l'arrière
du téléviseur. Dans ce cas, contactez la société ayant fourni le lecteur DVD / Blu-ray ou le décodeur câble / récepteur
satellite afin de vérifier la version de HDMI, puis demandez une mise à jour du micrologiciel. Des câbles HDMI d'une
version autre que 1.3 peuvent provoquer un scintillement à l'écran ou une absence totale d'image.
7 Emplacement COMMON INTERFACE
Si vous n'insérez pas la carte d'interface commune (CI CARD) dans certains canaux, le message "Scrambled Signal"
s'affiche.
Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone, l'ID de la CI CARD, l'ID de l'hôte et d'autres informations
s'afficheront dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d'erreur s'affiche, contactez votre fournisseur de service.
Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les chaînes est terminée, le message "Updating Completed" s'affiche,
indiquant que la liste des chaînes est à jour.
Vous devez vous procurer une CI CARD auprès d'un fournisseur local de câblodiffusion. Extrayez la CI CARD en la tirant
délicatement. Une chute pourrait l'endommager.
Insérez la CI-Card dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci.
L'emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du modèle.
Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris en charge dans certains pays ou régions. Vérifiez auprès de votre
revendeur agréé.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Branchez un câble RCA à un périphérique externe audio/vidéo approprié tel qu'un magnétoscope, un lecteur DVD ou un
caméscope.
Branchez les câbles audio RCA sur la prise [R-AUDIO-L] du téléviseur et leur autre extrémité sur les prises de sortie
audio correspondantes du périphérique audio/vidéo.
9 Verrou KENSINGTON (en fonction du modèle)
Le verrou Kensington (en option) est un dispositif permettant de fixer physiquement le système en cas d'utilisation dans
un lieu public. Si vous désirez utiliser un dispositif de verrouillage, contactez le revendeur auquel vous avez acheté le
téléviseur.
L'emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle.
0 COMPONENT IN
Branchez les câbles vidéo de composant (en option) aux connecteurs de composant (PR, PB, Y) à l'arrière du téléviseur
et les autres extrémités aux connecteurs de sortie vidéo de composant correspondants sur le récepteur DTV ou le lecteur
DVD.
Si vous souhaitez brancher à la fois le boîtier décodeur et le récepteur DTV (ou lecteur DVD), vous devez brancher
le boîtier décodeur au récepteur DTV (ou au lecteur DVD), puis le récepteur DTV (ou lecteur DVD) au connecteur de
composant (PR, PB, Y) du téléviseur.
Les connecteurs PR, PB et Y de vos composants (récepteur DTV ou lecteur DVD) sont parfois désignés par les lettres Y,
B-Y et R-Y ou Y, Cb et Cr.
Branchez les câbles audio RCA (en option) sur la prise [R-AUDIO-L] à l'arrière du téléviseur et leur autre extrémité sur
les prises de sortie audio correspondantes du récepteur DTV ou du lecteur DVD.
! EXT (RGB)
Connecteur
Entrée Sortie
Vidéo Audio (G / D) RVB Vidéo + Audio (G / D)
EXT O O O Seule la sortie TV ou DTV est disponible.
Entrées ou sorties pour périphériques externes tels que des magnétoscopes, des lecteurs DVD, des consoles de jeux
vidéo ou des lecteurs de vidéodisques.
@ SERVICE
Connecteur pour mises à niveau logicielles.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
Français - 4
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:47Télécommande
Vous pouvez utiliser la télécommande jusqu'à une distance maximale d'environ 7 m du téléviseur.
Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande.
La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
1 POWER : Bouton de mise en veille
du téléviseur.
2 TOUCHES NUMÉRIQUES :
Permettent de changer de chaîne.
3 FAV.CH : Permet de basculer vers
vos chaînes préférées.
4Y : Permet d'augmenter ou
de baisser le volume.
5 SOURCE : Permet d'afficher et
de sélectionner les sources vidéo
disponibles.
6 INFO : Permet d'afficher des
informations sur l'écran du
téléviseur.
7 TOOLS : Permet de sélectionner
rapidement les fonctions
fréquemment utilisées.
8 CH LIST : Affiche la liste des
chaînes.
9 BOUTONS DE COULEUR : Utilisez
ces boutons dans les menus de
Liste des chaînes, etc.
! TV : Sélectionne directement le
mode TV.
@ PRE-CH : Vous permet de revenir
à la chaîne que vous regardiez
précédemment.
# MUTEM : Vous permet de couper
le son temporairement.
$ P
: Permet de changer de
chaîne.
% MENU : Affiche le menu principal à
l'écran.
^ GUIDE : Affichage du guide électronique
des programmes (EPG).
& RETURN : Revient au menu précédent
* HAUT▲ / BAS▼ / GAUCHE◄ /
DROITE► / ENTERE : Permettent
de sélectionner des options de menu
à l'écran et de modifier des valeurs de
menu.
( EXIT : Permet de quitter le menu.
) SUBT. : Affichage numérique des soustitres.
a AD : Sélection de la description audio.
Fonctions télétexte.
5 0 : Sélection du mode Télétexte (LIST/
FLOF).
6 5 : Activation du télétexte.
7 4 : Sélection de la taille du télétexte.
8 8 : Mémorisation du télétexte.
9 Sélection des rubriques Fastext
0/ : Sélection alternative de
Teletext, Double ou Mix.
! :: fermer l'affichage du télétexte.
@ 1 : Page secondaire du télétexte.
$ 2 : Page de télétexte suivante
3 : Page de télétexte précédente.
% 6 : Index du télétexte
& 9 : Pause du télétexte.
( 7 : Annulation du télétexte.
Insertion des piles dans la télécommande
1. Soulevez le couvercle au dos de la télécommande comme illustré dans la figure.
2. Placez-y deux piles AAA.
Assurez-vous que les pôles "+" et "–" des piles correspondent au schéma situé à
l'intérieur du compartiment.
3. Replacez le couvercle.
Retirez les piles et stockez-les dans un endroit frais et sec si vous n'utilisez pas la
télécommande pendant longtemps.
Si la télécommande ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez les points suivants :
Le téléviseur est-il sous tension ?
Les bornes + et - des piles ne sont-elles pas inversées ?
Les piles sont-elles déchargées ?
Le cordon d'alimentation est-il débranché ou y a-t-il une panne de courant ?
Une lampe fluorescente ou néon est-elle allumée à proximité ?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
Français - 5
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:47FONCTIONNEMENT
Affichage des menus
Avant d'utiliser le téléviseur, procédez comme suit pour apprendre à naviguer dans le menu
afin de sélectionner et de régler les différentes fonctions.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU.
Le menu principal s'affiche à l'écran. Son côté gauche contient des icônes : Image, Son,
Canal, Conf., Entrée, Application, Assistance.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l'une des icônes.
Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour accéder au sous-menu de l'icône.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer des options dans le menu.
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour entrer des options dans le menu.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲/▼/◄/► pour modifier les options sélectionnées.
Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour revenir au menu précédent.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu.
Utilisation des boutons de télécommande
Bouton Opération Bouton Opération
MENUm Afficher le menu principal à l'écran.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Déplacer le curseur pour sélectionner un
élément.
Choisir l'élément sélectionné.
Confirmer un paramétrage.
RUTURNR Revenir au menu précédent.
EXITe Fermer le menu affiché à l'écran.
Exemple : configuration de la luminosité du téléviseur dans le menu Image
Réglage de la luminosité sur 80
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Image.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler la Luminosité.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► jusqu'à ce que la luminosité soit réglée sur 80.
6. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu.
¦
N
N
Français - 6
Mode : Standard ►
Rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V / R) : V50 / R50
Image
Mode : Standard ►
Rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V / R) : V50 / R50
Image
Rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45 ►
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V / R) : V50 / R50
Paramètres avancés
Options d'image
Réinitialisation de l'image
Image
U Déplacer L Régler E Entrer R Retour
Luminosité 45
U Déplacer L Régler E Entrer R Retour
Luminosité 80
Mode : Standard ►
Rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V / R) : V50 / R50
Image
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:48Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur
Vous pouvez mettre votre téléviseur en mode Veille afin de réduire la consommation électrique. Le mode veille peut être utile si
vous souhaitez éteindre votre téléviseur temporairement (pendant un repas par exemple).
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de la télécommande.
L'écran s'éteint et un voyant de veille apparaît sur votre téléviseur.
2. Pour rallumer le téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP.
Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode Veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous êtes en vacances par exemple). Il
est conseillé de débrancher le téléviseur du secteur et de l'antenne.
Fonction Plug & Play
Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s'effectuent l'un
après l'autre de manière automatique.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER de la télécommande. Le message You can set the menu
language. s’affiche.
2. Sélectionnez la langue appropriée en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le
bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Enr. démo ou Util. domicile, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Nous recommandons de régler le téléviseur sur le mode Util. domicile pour une meilleure qualité d'image dans votre
environnement personnel.
Enr. démo n'est prévu que pour un usage en magasin.
Si l'unité est accidentellement réglée sur le mode Enr. démo et que vous souhaitez revenir au mode Util. domicile
(Standard) : Appuyez sur le bouton Volume du téléviseur. Lorsque l'affichage écran du volume apparaît, appuyez
pendant 5 secondes sur le bouton MENU du téléviseur.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays approprié en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Hertzien ou Câble, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Hertzien: Hertzien signal d'antenne.
Câble: Câble signal d'antenne.
6. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner la source de chaîne à mémoriser. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour
sélectionner Démarrer.
Numérique et Analogique : Chaînes numériques et analogiques.
Numérique : Chaînes numériques.
Analogique : Chaînes analogiques.
Lors du réglage de la source d'antenne sur Câble, une fenêtre s'affiche, qui vous permet de définir une valeur pour la
recherche de chaîne numérique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à Canal → Mémorisation Auto.
La recherche de chaînes démarre et se termine automatiquement.
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à tout moment pour interrompre la mémorisation.
Une fois toutes les chaînes disponibles mémorisées, le message Définit le mode Horloge s'affiche.
. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Auto., puis appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, Définit la date et l'heure s'affiche.
Si vous recevez un signal numérique, l'heure se règle automatiquement. Sinon, sélectionnez Manuel pour régler l'horloge
(voir page 19).
8. La méthode de connexion pour l'obtention de la meilleure qualité HD est proposée. Après avoir confirmé la méthode, appuyez
sur le bouton ENTERE.
9. Le message Profitez de votre téléviseur. s'affiche. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction...
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Conf., puis sur le
bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Plug & Play.
3. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut d'un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0.
Si vous voulez modifier le code PIN, utilisez la fonction Modifier PIN. (voir page 21).
La fonction Plug & Play est uniquement disponible en mode TV.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Français -
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:48Visualisation de l’affichage
L’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo.
Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations.
Appuyez sur le bouton INFO de la télécommande. La télévision affiche la chaîne, le type
de son et l’état de certains paramètres de son et d’image.
▲, ▼: Vous pouvez afficher des informations relatives à une autre chaîne. Pour
accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
◄, ►: Vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives au programme souhaité de la
chaîne actuelle.
Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton INFO ou attendez environ 10 secondes pour que
l’affichage disparaisse automatiquement.
CONTRÔLE DES CHAÎNES
Configuration du menu des chaînes
Pays
L'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
Canal analogique
Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes analogiques.
Canal numérique
Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes numériques.
Mémorisation Auto
Vous pouvez chercher les plages de fréquence disponibles par balayage (leur disponibilité dépend de votre pays). Il est possible
que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels.
Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche.
Hertzien / Câble
Source d'antenne à mémoriser
Numérique et Analogique : Chaînes numériques et analogiques.
Numérique : Chaînes numériques.
Analogique : Chaînes analogiques.
Lors de la sélection de ‘Câble → Numérique et Analogique’ ou de ‘Câble → Numérique’
Fournissez une valeur à rechercher pour les chaînes câblées.
Mode Rech. → Complet / Réseau / Rapide
Rapide
Network ID : affiche le code d'identification du réseau.
Fréquence : affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal (varie d'un pays à l'autre).
Modulation : affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
Taux de symbole : affiche les débits de symboles disponibles.
–
–
–
–
Cherche toutes les chaînes avec des stations de diffusion actives et les enregistre dans la mémoire du téléviseur.
Pour arrêter la mémorisation automatique, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Le message Arrêter le programme automatique ? s'affiche.
Sélectionnez Oui en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Français - 8
Pays ►
Mémorisation Auto
Mémorisation Manuelle
Option de recherche du câble
Guide Now & Next
Guide Complet
Par défaut : Guide Complet
Canal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:48Mémorisation Manuelle
Permet de chercher manuellement une chaîne et de l'enregistrer dans la mémoire du téléviseur.
Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche.
Canal numérique
Enregistrement manuel de chaînes numériques.
Canal numérique est uniquement disponible en mode DTV.
Canal : Sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des chiffres (0~9).
Fréquence : Sélectionnez la fréquence à l'aide des chiffres.
Bande passante : Sélectionnez la bande passante à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des chiffres (0~9).
Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour.
Canal analogique
Enregistrement manuel de chaînes analogiques.
Programme (numéro de programme à attribuer à une chaîne) : Sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼
ou des touches numériques (0~9).
Système de Couleur → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Sélectionnez le système de couleurs à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
Système Sonore → BG / DK / I / L: Sélectionnez le système audio à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
Canal (si vous connaissez le numéro de la chaîne à mémoriser) : Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner
C (chaîne hertzienne) ou S (chaîne câblée). Appuyez sur le bouton ►, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ ou un chiffre (0~9) pour
sélectionner le numéro de votre choix.
Vous pouvez également sélectionner le numéro de chaîne directement en appuyant sur les touches numériques (0~9).
Si aucun son ne sort ou si le son produit est anormal, sélectionnez de nouveau la norme son requise.
Recherche (lorsque vous ne connaissez pas les numéros de chaîne) : Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour lancer la
recherche. Le syntoniseur balaie la plage de fréquences jusqu'à ce que vous receviez la première chaîne ou la chaîne que
vous avez sélectionnée à l'écran.
Enr. (permet de mémoriser la chaîne et le numéro de programme correspondant) : Sélectionnez OK en appuyant sur le
bouton ENTERE.
Mode des chaînes
P (Mode Programme) : à la fin du réglage, des numéros de position compris entre P00 et P99 sont attribués aux stations
de radiodiffusion de votre région. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner un chaîne en saisissant son numéro de
position.
C (Mode chaîne hertzienne) : dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à
chacune des stations de télédiffusion.
S (Mode chaîne câblée) : dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à
chacune des chaînes câblées.
Option de recherche du câble (en fonction du pays)
Définit des options supplémentaires telles que la fréquence et le débit de symboles pour les recherches sur réseau câblé.
Fréquence (Début ~ Fin) : affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal.
Modulation : affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
Taux de symbole : affiche les débits de symboles disponibles.
Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet
Les informations relatives au guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. Des entrées de
programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison des informations diffusées sur un canal donné. L'affichage est
automatiquement actualisé dès que de nouvelles informations sont disponibles.
Pour obtenir plus de détails sur les procédures d'utilisation du Guide Now & Next et Guide Complet, reportez-vous aux
descriptions de la page 10.
Vous pouvez aussi afficher le guide en appuyant simplement sur le bouton GUIDE (pour configurer Par défaut, reportez-vous
aux descriptions).
Guide Now & Next
Pour les six canaux indiqués dans la colonne de gauche, les informations relatives au programme actuel et au programme suivant
sont affichées.
Guide Complet
Affiche le programme heure par heure. Deux heures de programme sont affichées et vous pouvez faire défiler le programme en
avançant ou en remontant dans le temps.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
Français - 9
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:48Français - 10
Par défaut → Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet
Vous pouvez choisir d'afficher le Guide Now & Next ou le Guide Complet lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton GUIDE de la
télécommande.
Liste des chaînes
Pour obtenir plus de détails sur les procédures d'utilisation de la Liste des chaînes, reportez-vous aux instructions de Managing
Channels.
Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton CH LIST de la télécommande.
Mode Canal
Appuyez sur le bouton P >/<. L’ordre des chaînes affichées change.
Chaînes ajoutées
L’ordre des chaînes change dans la liste des chaînes mémorisées.
Favoris
L’ordre des chaînes change dans la liste des chaînes favorites.
Réglage fin
Si la réception est claire, vous n'avez pas besoin d'effectuer une syntonisation fine du canal, car cette opération s'effectue
automatiquement pendant la recherche et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou distordu, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer
manuellement une syntonisation fine du canal.
Les canaux finement syntonisés qui ont été mémorisés sont repérés par un astérisque "*" placé à droite de leur numéro dans
la bannière des canaux.
Pour rétablir la syntonisation fine, sélectionnez Réin. à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
La syntonisation fine n'est possible que pour des chaînes analogiques.
Utilisation du Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet
Pour… Alors…
Regarder un programme de la liste du guide
électronique des programmes
Sélectionnez un programme à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Quitter le guide Appuyez sur le bouton bleu.
Si le programme suivant est sélectionné, il est planifié avec l'icône de l'horloge affichée. Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton
ENTERE puis sur ◄, ► pour sélectionner Annuler progr., la programmation est annulée et l'icône de l'horloge disparaît.
Voir les informations relatives aux programmes Sélectionnez un programme à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton INFO lorsque le programme de votre choix
apparaît en surbrillance.
Le titre du programme se trouve dans la partie supérieure du centre de
l'écran.
Cliquez sur le bouton INFO pour obtenir des informations détaillées. Numéro de canal, temps de fonctionnement du programme,
barre d'état, niveau de contrôle parental, informations sur la qualité vidéo (HD/SD), modes son, sous-titres ou télétexte, langue des
sous-titres ou du télétexte et bref résumé du programme en surbrillance font partie des informations détaillées. “...” s'affiche si le
résumé est long.
Choisissez entre Guide Now & Next et
Guide complet
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton rouge.
Dans le guide complet
Reculer rapidement (24 heures).
Avancer rapidement (24 heures).
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton vert.
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton jaune.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Guide Complet
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jui
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Aucune information.
Aucune information.
Aucune information.
Freshmen O..
Regarder
INFO Information ■ Main/Aprés ■ +24 Heure ■ Quitter
Guide Now & Next
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jui
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Maintenant Suivant
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Aucune information.
Aucune information.
Aucune information.
Freshmen O..
Regarder
INFO Information ■ Guide Complet ■ Quitter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:48Français - 11
Gestion des chaînes
Ce menu permet d'ajouter/supprimer ou définir des chaînes favorites et d'utiliser le guide des
programmes pour les émissions numériques.
Tous les canaux
Affiche toutes les chaînes actuellement disponibles.
Chaînes ajoutées
Affiche toutes les chaînes ajoutées.
Favoris
Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites.
Pour sélectionner les chaînes favorites que vous avez configurées, appuyez sur le bouton FAV.CH de la télécommande.
Programmé
Affiche tous les programmes actuellement réservés.
Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l'écran Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris en appuyant sur les boutons ▲ / ▼,
puis sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous pouvez alors regarder la chaîne sélectionnée.
Utilisation des boutons de couleur dans la liste des chaînes
Rouge (Type de canal) : permet de basculer entre TV, Radio, Donn/autre et Tous.
Vert (Zoom) : Agrandit ou réduit un numéro de chaîne.
Jaune (Sélect.) : Sélectionne plusieurs listes de chaînes. Vous pouvez appliquer les fonctions d'ajout/suppression,
d'ajout / suppression de favoris ou de verrouillage / déverrouillage à plusieurs chaînes à la fois. Sélectionnez les chaînes
voulues, puis appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter toutes les chaînes sélectionnées à la fois. La marque c s'affiche
à gauche des chaînes sélectionnées.
TOOLS (Outils) : affiche le menu Supprimer (ou Ajouter), Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris), Verrouil.
(ou Déverr.), Rappel de prog., Modif. Nom Canal, Tri des canaux, Modif. numéro chaîne, Sélectionner tout, (ou
Désélec. Tout), Mémorisation Auto. (Les menus Options peuvent varier en fonction de la situation.)
Icônes d'état des chaînes
A : Chaîne analogique.
c : Chaîne sélectionnée en appuyant sur le bouton jaune.
* : Chaîne définie comme favorite.
( : Programme en cours de diffusion.
\ : Chaîne verrouillée.
) : Programme réservé.
Menu d'options de la liste des chaînes (dans Tous les canaux / Chaînes ajoutées / Favoris)
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d'options.
Les éléments du menu Options peuvent varier selon l'état de la chaîne.
Ajouter / Supprimer
Vous pouvez supprimer ou ajouter une chaîne afin d'afficher les chaînes de votre choix.
Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le menu Tous les canaux.
Une chaîne grisée est une chaîne qui a été supprimée.
Le menu Ajouter s'affiche uniquement pour les chaînes supprimées.
Vous pouvez également ajouter une chaîne du menu Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris de la
même manière.
Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer des favoris
Vous pouvez définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regardez souvent.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir l'ajout aux (ou la suppression
des) favoris en sélectionnant Outils → Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris).
Le symbole "*" s’affiche et la chaîne est définie comme favorite.
Toutes les chaînes favorites apparaîtront dans le menu Favoris.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
Français - 11
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Chaînes ajoutées Tous ■ Type de Canal ■ Zoom ■ Sélectionnez T utils
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Chaînes ajoutées
Tous ■ Type de Canal ■ Zoom ■ Sélection T Outils
Supp.
Ajouter aux favoris
Verrouil.
Rappel de prog.
Modifi. nom de chaîne
Tri des canaux
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:49Français - 12
Verrouil. / Déverr.
Vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu'elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni visualisée. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si
l'option Verr Parental est définie sur Marche (Voir page 21).
L'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
Le code PIN par défaut d'un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
Le symbole "\" s'affiche et la chaîne est verrouillée.
Rappel de prog.
Si vous réservez un programme que vous souhaitez regarder, la chaîne bascule automatiquement vers la chaîne réservée dans
la liste de chaînes, même si vous êtes en train de regarder une autre chaîne. Pour réserver un programme, réglez d'abord l'heure
actuelle (Voir page 19).
Il n'est possible de réserver que des chaînes mémorisées.
Vous pouvez régler directement la chaîne, le jour, le mois, l'heure et les minutes à l'aide des touches numériques de la
télécommande.
Les programmes réservés apparaissent dans le menu Programme.
Guide des programmes numérique et affichage des réservations
Quand une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée et que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, le Guide des programmes de la chaîne
s'affiche. Vous pouvez réserver un programme en suivant les procédures décrites ci-dessus.
Modifi. nom de chaîne (chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Vous pouvez attribuer aux chaînes un libellé qui s'affiche chaque fois que vous les sélectionnez.
Les noms des chaînes numériques leur sont automatiquement attribués ; vous ne pouvez pas les modifier.
Modif. numéro chaîne (chaînes numériques uniquement)
Vous pouvez également modifier le numéro de chaîne à l'aide du pavé numérique de la télécommande.
Tri des canaux (chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Cette opération permet de changer les numéros de programme des chaînes mémorisées. Cette opération peut s'avérer
nécessaire après l'utilisation de la mémorisation automatique.
Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout
Sélectionner Tout: Vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des chaînes.
Désélec. Tout: Vous pouvez désélectionner toutes les chaînes sélectionnées.
La fonction Désélec. Tout n'est disponible que si au moins une chaîne est sélectionnée.
Mémorisation Auto
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des options, reportez-vous à la page 8.
Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr Parental, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche.
Menu d'options de la liste des chaînes (dans Programmé)
Vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une réservation.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d'options.
Infos modif.
Permet de modifier une réservation.
Annuler progr.
Permet d'annuler une réservation.
Information
Permet de visualiser une réservation (et d'en modifier les informations).
Sélectionner tout
Permet de sélectionner tous les programmes réservés.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
Français - 12
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programmé Tous ■ Zoom ■ Sélection T Outils E Information
Infos modif.
Annuler progr.
Information
Sélectionner tout
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:49Français - 13
CONTRÔLE D'IMAGE
Configuration du menu Image
Mode
Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d'image correspondant le mieux à vos besoins d'affichage.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
définir le mode d'image en sélectionnant Outils → Mde d'image.
Dynamique
Sélectionne l'image pour un affichage haute définition dans une pièce lumineuse.
Standard
Sélectionne l'image pour un affichage optimal dans un environnement normal.
Cinéma
Sélectionne l'image pour le visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre.
Rétroéclairage / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R)
Votre téléviseur offre de plusieurs options de paramétrage qui permettent de contrôler la
qualité d'image.
Rétroéclairage : Règle la luminosité du rétroéclairage de l'écran LCD.
Contraste : Règle le niveau de contraste de l'image.
Luminosité : Règle le niveau de luminosité de l'image.
Netteté : Règle la définition des bords de l'image.
Couleur : Règle la saturation de couleur de l'image.
Teinte (V/R) : Ajuste la teinte de couleur de l'image.
Sélectionnez un mode d'image à ajuster. Les valeurs ajustées sont enregistrées pour tous les modes d'image.
Lorsque vous modifiez les paramètres Rétroéclairage, Contraste, Luminosité, Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R), l'affichage
à l'écran change en conséquence.
Dans les modes analogiques TV, Ext., AV du système PAL, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte (V/R).
En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Rétroéclairage, Contraste et Luminosité.
Vous pouvez régler et Mémoriser des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
Vous pouvez réduire sensiblement l'énergie consommée en cours d'utilisation en baissant le niveau de luminosité de l'image,
de façon à diminuer le coût de fonctionnement général.
Paramètres avancés
Les nouveaux téléviseurs Samsung permettent d'effectuer des réglages d'image encore plus précis que les modèles précédents.
Le réglage des paramètres détaillés de l'image est expliqué ci-dessous.
Paramètres avancés est disponible dans les modes Standard et Cinéma.
En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Gamma et Balance blancs parmi les options de menu
Paramètres avancés.
Nuance de noir → Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre
Vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l'écran.
Contraste Dynam. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé
Vous pouvez régler le contraste de l'écran pour obtenir un résultat optimal.
Gamma
Vous pouvez régler l'intensité des couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu).
Espace couleur
Espace couleur de Couleur est une matrice de couleurs composée de rouge, de vert et de bleu. Sélectionnez votre espace de
couleur préféré et appréciez la couleur la plus naturelle.
Natif : offre une nuance de couleur profonde et riche.
Auto. : règle automatiquement la nuance de couleur la plus naturelle sur la base des sources de programme.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Français - 13
Mode : Standard ►
Rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V / R) : V50 / R50
Image
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V / R) : V50 / R50
Paramètres avancés ►
Options d'image
Réinitialisation de l'image
Image
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:49Français - 14
Balance blancs
Vous pouvez régler la température des Couleur pour que celles-ci soient plus naturelles.
Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu / Regl. Rouge / Regl. vert / Regl. bleu : vous pouvez régler la température de couleur des
zones claires en modifiant les valeurs R, G et B. Recommandé pour les utilisateurs avancés uniquement.
Réinit. : les valeurs par défaut de l'équilibrage du blanc réglé précédemment sont rétablies.
Carnation
Vous pouvez accentuer le "ton chair" de l'image.
La modification des valeurs de réglage actualise l'affichage à l'écran.
Netteté des contours → Arrêt / Marche
Vous pouvez faire ressortir les contours des objets dans l'image.
Options d'image
En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Nuance Coul. et Taille parmi les options du menu
Options d'image.
Nuance Coul. → Froide / Normal / Chaude1 / Chaude2
Vous pouvez sélectionner la nuance de couleur la plus agréable à l'œil.
Vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
Chaude1 ou Chaude2 ne sont activées que si le mode d'image est Cinéma.
Taille
Vous pouvez sélectionner la taille d'image qui correspond le mieux à vos besoins d'affichage.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir la taille en sélectionnant Outils
→ Format de l’image.
16/9 auto : règle automatiquement la taille de l'image sur le format 16:9.
16:9 : règle la taille de l'image sur 16:9 de façon appropriée pour les DVD ou la diffusion au format cinémascope.
Zoom large : agrandit l'image à une taille supérieure à 4:3.
Zoom : agrandit l'image en 16:9 (dans le sens vertical) pour l'adapter à la taille de l'écran.
4:3 : paramètre par défaut pour un film vidéo ou une diffusion normale.
Adapter écran : Permet de voir l'intégralité de l'image sans coupure lors de l'entrée de signaux HDMI (720p / 1080i) ou
Composant (1080i).
Les options de taille de l'image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d'entrée.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné.
En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés.
Vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
Une rémanence temporaire peut se produire si vous affichez une image statique pendant plus de deux heures sur l'écran du
téléviseur.
Zoom large : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le
bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l'image vers le haut ou vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE.
Zoom : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton
▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l'image vers le haut et vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton
► pour sélectionner Taille, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour augmenter ou
réduire la hauteur de l'image. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE.
Après avoir sélectionné l'option Adapter écran en mode HDMI (1080i) ou Component (1080i), sélectionnez Position à l'aide
du bouton ◄ ou ►. Utilisez le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l'image.
Réinit. : Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Réinit., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous pouvez
initialiser le réglage.
Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter écran avec l'entrée HDMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à
droite, comme avec la fonction Overscan.
Mode écran → 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3
Lorsque vous réglez la taille de l'image sur 16/9 auto sur un téléviseur 16:9, vous pouvez déterminer la taille d'affichage d'une
image 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service/service d'écran large) ou choisir de ne rien afficher pour ce format. Chaque pays européen
impose une taille d'image différente ; cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs de sélectionner la leur.
16:9 : règle l'image en mode large, c'est-à-dire en 16:9.
Zoom large : agrandit l'image à une taille supérieure à 4:3.
Zoom : agrandit la taille de l'image sur l'écran dans le sens vertical.
4:3 : règle l'image en mode normal, c'est-à-dire en 4:3.
Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode 16/9 auto.
Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en mode PC, Composant ou HDMI.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
Français - 14
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:49Français - 15
NR numérique → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto.
Si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction Digital Noise Reduction pour faciliter la réduction
d'images fantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l'écran.
Lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu'à obtention de la meilleure image possible.
Niv. noir HDMI → Normal / Bas
Vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l'écran.
Cette fonction n'est active que si l'entrée externe se connecte à HDMI (signaux RVB).
Mode Film → Arrêt / Auto.
Vous pouvez régler le téléviseur de sorte qu'il détecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de cinéma de toutes les sources et
adapte l'image pour obtenir une qualité optimale.
Mode Film n'est prise en charge que dans TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) et HDMI(480i / 1080i).
Réinitialisation de l'image → Réinitial. mode image / Annuler
Rétablit tous les paramètres des images aux valeurs par défaut.
Sélectionnez un mode d'image à rétablir. La réinitialisation est effectuée pour chaque mode d'image.
Réinitial. mode image : rétablit les paramètres par défaut pour les valeurs de l'image actuelle.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d'ordinateur (PC)
Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP)
Les paramètres d'affichage Windows indiqués ci-dessous sont valables pour ordinateur standard. Les affichages écran sur
votre PC seront probablement différents, en fonction de votre version de Windows et votre carte vidéo. Cependant, même si les
affichages réels diffèrent, les mêmes informations de configuration de base s'appliquent dans la plupart des cas. Dans le cas
contraire, contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou votre revendeur Samsung.
1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, cliquez sur "Panneau de configuration".
2. Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur "Apparence et thèmes". Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche.
3. Cliquez sur "Affichage". Une nouvelle boîte de dialogue s'affiche.
4. Cliquez sur l'onglet "Paramètres".
Réglage correct de la taille (résolution) : Optimal : 1360 x 768 pixels.
S’il existe une option de fréquence verticale sur votre boîte de dialogue des paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est "60"
ou "60 Hz". Sinon, cliquez simplement sur "OK" pour quitter la boîte de dialogue.
¦
Français - 15
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:49Français - 16
Modes d'affichage
La taille et la position de l'écran varient en fonction du type de moniteur du PC et de sa résolution. Les résolutions indiquées dans le
tableau sont recommandées.
Entrée D-Secondaire et HDMI/DVI
Mode Résolution
Fréquence horizontale
(kHz)
Fréquence verticale
(Hz)
Fréquence d'horloge pixels
(MHz)
Polarité
synchronisée
(H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI IN 1(DVI).
Le mode entrelacé n'est pas pris en charge.
Le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n'est pas standard.
Les modes Séparé et Composite sont pris en charge. Le format SOG (SVSV) n'est pas pris en charge.
Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC
Préréglage: Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode PC.
Réglage Automatique
Le réglage automatique permet l'ajustement automatique de l'écran du PC affiché sur le
téléviseur en fonction du signal vidéo entrant du PC. Les valeurs des options de réglage fin, de
réglage de base et de position sont ajustées automatiquement.
Cette fonction ne s'applique pas en mode DVI-HDMI.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
définir le réglage automatique en sélectionnant Outils → Réglage Automatique.
Ecran
Regl. Base / Regl. Prec
Lorsque vous réglez la qualité de l'image, l'objectif est d'éliminer ou de réduire les parasites visuels. Si vous ne pouvez pas
éliminer ces parasites par une syntonisation fine, réglez la fréquence (Regl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau une
syntonisation fine. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de l'image pour l'aligner au centre de l'écran.
Position du PC
Réglez la position d'affichage du PC si elle ne convient pas pour l'écran du téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler
la position verticale. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour régler la position horizontale.
Réinitialiser Image
Vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut de tous les paramètres d'image.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Français - 16
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Réglage Automatique ►
Ecran
Paramètres avancés
Options d'image
Réinitialisation de l'image
Image
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Français - 1
CONTRÔLE DU SON
Configuration du menu Sound
Mode → Standard / Musique / Cinéma / Voix claire / Personnel
Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
configurer le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Mode Son.
Standard
Sélectionne le mode son normal.
Musique
Accentue la musique par rapport aux voix.
Cinéma
Offre le meilleur son pour les films.
Voix claire
Accentue les voix par rapport aux autres sons.
Personnel
Rétablit vos paramètres de son personnalisés.
Egaliseur
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres du son en fonction de vos préférences.
Mode
Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences.
Balance
Définit la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (réglage de la bande passante)
Permet de régler le niveau de fréquences de la bande passante.
Réinit.
Rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l'égaliseur.
SRS TruSurround HD → Arrêt / Marche
Le SRS TruSurround HD est une technologie SRS brevetée qui remédie au problème de la lecture de contenu multicanal 5.1 sur
deux haut-parleurs. Le TruSurround produit un son surround virtuel excellent au moyen de n'importe quel système de lecture à
deux haut-parleurs, dont les haut-parleurs internes du téléviseur. Il est totalement compatible avec tous les formats multicanal.
Langue audio (Chaînes numériques.)
Vous pouvez modifier la langue par défaut des sous-titres et de l'audio. Affiche les informations relatives à la langue pour le flux
entrant.
Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion.
Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée pendant que vous regardez une chaîne numérique.
Format Audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Chaînes numériques.)
Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d'écho peut se produire en raison
de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction TV
Speaker (haut-parleur du téléviseur).
Le format audio s'affiche en fonction du signal diffusé.
Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée pendant que vous regardez une chaîne numérique.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Français - 1
Mode : Personnel ►
Egaliseur
SRS TruSurround HD : Arrêt
Langue audio : - - -
Format Audio : - - -
Description audio
Volume auto : Arrêt
Son
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Français - 18
Description audio (Chaînes numériques.)
Il s'agit d'une fonction audio auxiliaire qui fournit une piste audio supplémentaire à l'intention des personnes malvoyantes. Cette
fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (AD) lorsqu'il est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. Les
utilisateurs peuvent activer ou désactiver la description audio et régler le volume.
Appuyez sur le bouton AD de la télécommande pour sélectionner Arrêt ou Marche.
Description audio → Arrêt / Marche
Active ou désactive la fonction de description audio.
Volume
Permet d'ajuster le volume de la description audio.
Volume est actif lorsque Description audio est défini sur Marche .
Volume auto → Arrêt / Marche
Chaque station de télédiffusion possède ses propres conditions de signal. Il n'est donc pas facile de régler le volume chaque fois
que vous changez de chaîne. Cette fonction permet de régler automatiquement le volume du canal désiré en réduisant la sortie
son lorsque le signal de modulation est puissant ou en l'augmentant lorsque le signal est faible.
Sélection Haut-parleur → Ht-parl ext / Haut-parleur TV
Pour entendre le son par l'intermédiaire d'enceintes séparées, désactivez l'amplificateur interne.
Les boutons de volume et MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Ht-parl ext.
Si vous sélectionnez Ht-parl ext dans le menu Sélection Haut-parleur, les paramètres de son sont limités.
Réinitialisation du son → Réinitial. tout / Réinitial. mode son / Annuler
Vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut des paramètres audio.
Sélection du mode son
Vous pouvez configurer le mode son dans le menu Outils. Lorsque vous définissez Dual l ll, le mode son actuel est affiché à
l'écran.
Type d'audio Dual 1 / 2 Par défaut
Stéréo A2
Mono MONO
Changement automatique
Stéréo STEREO ↔ MONO
Double DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stéréo
Mono MONO
Changement automatique
Stéréo MONO ↔ STEREO
Double
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu'une commutation automatique se produit, passez alors en Mono.
Cette fonction n'est activée qu'en son stéréo. Elle est désactivée en mode mono.
Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode TV.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
Français - 18
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Français - 19
Configuration
Configuration du menu Configuration
Langue des menus
Permet de définir la langue des menus.
Horloge
Horloge
Le réglage de l'horloge est nécessaire pour utiliser les différentes fonctions de minuterie de la
télévision.
L'heure actuelle s'affiche chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO.
Si vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l'horloge.
Mode Horloge
L'heure en cours peut être réglée manuellement ou automatiquement.
Auto. : Définit l'heure en cours automatiquement en utilisant l'heure de la transmission numérique.
Manuel : Définit l'heure en cours d'après l'heure entrée manuellement.
En fonction de la station de diffusion et du signal diffusé, il se peut que l'heure ne soit pas réglée correctement. Si cela se
produit, réglez l'heure manuellement.
Pour que l'heure soit réglée automatiquement, l'antenne ou le câble doit être connecté.
Réglage Horloge
Vous pouvez définir l'heure en cours manuellement.
Activez cette option lorsque Mode Horloge est défini sur Manuel.
Vous pouvez régler directement le jour, le mois, l'année, l'heure et la minute en appuyant sur les touches numériques de
la télécommande.
Veille → Arrêt / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
La minuterie de mise en veille éteint automatiquement la télévision après une durée préréglée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180
minutes).
Le téléviseur passe automatiquement en mode veille lorsque la minuterie atteint 0.
Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler la minuterie de mise en veille en
sélectionnant Outils → Veille.
Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3
Vous pouvez effectuer trois paramétrages différent de la minuterie de marche/arrêt. Vous devez d'abord régler l'horloge.
Période d'activation : Sélectionnez l'heure, la minute et l'action activer/désactiver (Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages
définis, choisissez Activer.)
Période de désactivation : Sélectionnez l'heure, la minute et l'action activer/désactiver (Pour activer le minuteur selon les
réglages définis, choisissez Activer.)
Volume : Sélectionnez le niveau de volume à la mise sous tension.
Antenne : Sélectionnez Hertzien ou Câble.
Canal : Sélectionnez la chaîne désirée.
Répétition : Sélectionnez Une fois, Ts jours, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel.
Lorsque Manuel est sélectionné, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner le jour de la semaine. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE sur le jour de votre choix. Le symbole c s'affiche alors.
Vous pouvez régler l'heure, la minute et la chaîne directement à l'aide des touches numériques de la télécommande.
Mise hors tension automatique
Lorsque vous réglez la minuterie sur Marche, le téléviseur s'éteint si aucune commande n'est utilisée dans les 3 heures qui
suivent la mise sous tension par le minuteur. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque la minuterie est réglée sur
Marche ; elle permet d'éviter toute surchauffe occasionnée par une utilisation prolongée du téléviseur.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Français - 19
Plug & Play
Langue des menus: Français ►
Horloge
Diffuser
Sécurité
Général
Configuration
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Français - 20
Diffuser
Sous-titres
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les sous-titres. Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode des sous-titres. Normal sélectionne les
sous-titres de base ; Malentendants sélectionne les sous-titres pour personnes malentendantes.
Sous-titres → Arrêt / Marche: Active/désactive les sous-titres.
Mode → Normal / Malentendants: Sélectionne le mode de la fonction Sous-titres.
Langue des sous-titres: définit la Langue des sous-titres
Si le programme visionné n'offre pas de fonction Malentendants, le mode Normal est automatiquement activé, même si le
mode Malentendants est sélectionné.
L'anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée.
Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton SUBT. de la télécommande.
Texte numérique → Désactiver / Activer (Royaume-Uni uniquement)
Si le programme est diffusé avec du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le multimédia et l'hypermédia. Niveau supérieur
à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut de l'hypermédia à liaison de données tel que des images fixes, le service de caractères,
l'animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie d'interaction de l'utilisateur
en cours d'utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la demande (VOD), la télévision interactive (ITV), le
commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en réseau.
Langue du télétexte
Vous pouvez Sélectionne la langue du télétexte par type de langue.
L'anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée.
Préférence
Première Langue Audio / Deuxième Langue Audio / Langue princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres /
Première Langue Télétexte / Deuxième Langue Télétexte
Cette fonction permet de sélectionner une des langues disponibles. La langue sélectionnée ici est la langue par défaut de la
chaîne sélectionnée.
Si vous changez la langue, les options Subtitle Language, Audio Language et Teletext Language du menu Language sont
automatiquement modifiées en conséquence.
Les options Subtitle Language, Audio Language et Teletext Language du menu Language présentent une liste des langues
prises en charge par la chaîne actuelle et la langue sélectionnée est affichée en surbrillance. Si vous modifiez le paramètre de
la langue, la nouvelle sélection n'est valable que pour la chaîne actuelle. Le nouveau paramétrage n'affecte pas le réglage des
options Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language ou Primary Teletext Language du menu Preference.
Interface commune
CI Menu
Permet à l'utilisateur d'opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM.
Sélectionnez le menu CI Menu le menu PC Card.
Infos sur l’application
Contient des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans la fente CI et les affiche.
Les informations sur l'application concernent la CI CARD. Vous pouvez installer le module CAM que le téléviseur soit
allumé ou Arrêt
1. Achetez le module CI CAM chez le revendeur le plus proche ou par téléphone.
2. Insérez la CI CARD dans le module CAM, dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, jusqu'à ce qu'elle se loge en place.
3. Insérez le module CAM avec la CI CARD installée dans la fente de l'interface commune.
(Insérez le module CAM dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, à fond, de façon à ce qu'il soit parallèle à la fente.)
4. Vérifiez si une image est visible sur une chaîne à signal brouillé.
Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris en charge dans certains pays ou régions. Vérifiez auprès de votre
revendeur agréé.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
■
N
■
N
■
●
■
●
●
N
N
Français - 20
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Français - 21
Sécurité
L'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche avant l'écran de configuration. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
Verrouillage Canal → Arrêt / Marche
Cette fonction permet d'empêcher que des utilisateurs non autorisés, tels que des enfants, regardent des programmes
inappropriés, en désactivant la vidéo et l'audio.
Vous pouvez verrouiller certaines chaînes dans la liste des chaînes. (voir page 12).
Verrouillage Canal est uniquement disponible en mode TV.
Verrouillage parental
Cette fonction permet d'empêcher certains utilisateurs, par exemple des enfants, de regarder des émissions inappropriées, en les
protégeant à l'aide d’un code de 4 chiffres défini par l'utilisateur.
L’option Verrouillage parental diffère en fonction du les pays.
Lorsque le Verrouillage parental est activé, le symbole ‘\’ s’affiche.
Autor.tout : appuyez sur ce bouton pour déverrouiller toutes les évaluations TV.
Bloq. tout : appuyez sur ce bouton pour verrouiller tous les classements TV.
Modifier PIN
Vous pouvez modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur.
Si vous avez oublié le code, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l'ordre suivant, ce qui remet le code à
0-0-0-0 : POWER (Arrêt) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Marche).
Général
Mode Jeu → Arrêt / Marche
En reliant le téléviseur à une console de jeu telle que PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, vous pouvez profiter d'une expérience de jeu plus
réaliste en sélectionnant le menu de jeu.
Pour déconnecter la console de jeu et connecter un autre périphérique externe, annulez le mode Jeu dans le menu de configuration.
Si vous affichez le menu du téléviseur en mode "Mode Jeu", l'écran vacille légèrement.
Mode Jeu n'est pas disponible en mode TV et PC normal.
Si le Mode Jeu est activé :
Le mode Picture bascule automatiquement sur Standard et les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas changer de mode.
Le mode Sound bascule automatiquement sur Personnel et les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas changer de mode. Réglez le
son à l'aide de l'égaliseur.
La fonction Régler du menu Son est activée. Sélectionner la fonction Reset après avoir réglé l’égaliseur rétablit ses
paramètres par défaut.
Mode éco. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée / Auto.
Cette fonction règle la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d'énergie. Lorsque vous regardez la télévision le
soir, réglez l'option du mode Mode éco. sur Elevé pour reposer vos yeux et réduire la consommation d'énergie.
Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran s’éteint. Seul le son est émis. Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour désactiver
la fonction Image désactivée.
La function Image désactivée n’est pas prise en charge dans le menu Tools.
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir l'option d'économie d'énergie en
sélectionnant Outils → Mode éco..
Mélodie → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé
Il est possible de programmer la lecture d'une mélodie lors de la mise sous tension ou hors tension du téléviseur.
Aucune mélodie n'est lue dans les cas suivants :
Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur parce que le bouton MUTE a été actionné.
Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur parce que le bouton (–) Volume a été actionné.
Lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension par la fonction de veille.
❑
■
N
N
■
N
N
N
■
N
❑
■
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
■
N
T
■
N
–
–
–
Français - 21
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Français - 22
ENTRÉE / ASSISTANCE
Configuration du menu Input
Liste Source
Permet de sélectionner le téléviseur ou d'autres sources d'entrée externes telles que des
lecteurs DVD/Blu-ray ou des récepteurs satellite (boîtiers décodeurs) connectées au téléviseur.
Permet de sélectionner la source d'entrée de votre choix.
Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour afficher une source de signal
externe. Une pression sur le bouton TV sélectionne le mode TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI1 / DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que des périphériques externes connectés au téléviseur.
Dans Liste Source, les entrées connectées s'affichent en surbrillance en début de liste.
Les entrées non connectées s'affichent en bas de liste.
Les options Ext. et PC sont toujours activées.
TOOLS (Outils) : Affiche les menus Modif. Nom et Information.
Modif. Nom
Nommez le périphérique connecté aux prises d'entrée pour faciliter la sélection de source d'entrée.
Magnétoscope / DVD / Décodeur Câble / Décodeur satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeu / Caméscope / PC / DVI /
DVI PC / TV / IPTV/ Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
Si vous connectez un câble HDMI/DVI au port HDMI IN 1(DVI), vous devez régler le mode HDMI1/DVI sur DVI ou DVI PC
dans le champ Modif. Nom du mode Entrée. Dans ce cas, une connexion audio séparée est indispensable.
Configuration du menu Support
Diagnostic automatique
Test de l’image
Si vous pensez que l'image n'est pas optimale, exécutez le test d'image. Vérifiez la mire de
couleur à l'écran pour voir si le problème persiste.
Oui : si la mire de couleur n'apparaît pas où si elle est parasitée, sélectionnez Oui. Il se
peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Demandez de l'aide au centre d'appel de Samsung.
Non: si la mire de couleur s'affiche correctement, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut que
l'équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste,
reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe.
Test du son
Si vous pensez que le son n'est pas optimal, exécutez le test du son. Vous pouvez contrôler le
son en diffusant une mélodie préenregistrée sur le téléviseur. Le message "Le problème persiste-t-il pour ce test du son?" s'affiche
à l'écran.
Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d'effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l'option Sélection Haut-parleur
est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Sound.
La mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l'option Sélection Haut-parleurt est réglée sur Ht-parl ext ou si le son a été
désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton MUTE.
Oui : si, pendant le test du son, vous n'entendez du son que d'un haut-parleur ou pas de son du tout, sélectionnez Oui. Il se
peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Demandez de l'aide au centre d'appel de Samsung.
Non : Si vous entendez du son des haut-parleurs, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut que l'équipement externe soit défaillant.
Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe.
Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement)
À l'inverse des chaînes analogiques, dont la qualité de réception peut varier de "neigeuse" à claire, les chaînes numériques
(HDTV) présentent une qualité de réception parfaite ou bien vous ne les recevez pas. Contrairement aux chaînes analogiques,
vous ne pouvez donc pas syntoniser une chaîne numérique. Vous avez toutefois la possibilité de régler votre antenne pour
améliorer la réception des chaînes numériques disponibles.
Si l'indicateur d'intensité du signal indique que celui-ci est faible, réglez physiquement votre antenne afin d'en augmenter
l'intensité. Continuez à régler l'antenne jusqu'à ce que trouver la position offrant le signal le plus puissant.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Diagnostic automatique ►
Mise à niveau du logiciel
Guide de connexion HD
Contacter Samsung
Assistance
Liste Source
Modif. Nom
Entrée
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:50Mise à niveau du logiciel
Pour garder le produit à jour avec les nouvelles fonctions de télévision numérique, des mises
à jour logicielles sont régulièrement diffusées via le signal de télévision normal. Le téléviseur
détecte automatiquement ces signaux et affiche la bannière de mise à jour logicielle. Vous
avez le choix d'installer ou non la mise à jour.
USB
Insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB contenant la mise à niveau du microprogramme.
Veillez à ne pas couper l'alimentation ni retirer le lecteur USB pendant l'application des
mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du micrologiciel terminée, le téléviseur se met
automatiquement hors puis sous tension. Vérifiez la version du micrologiciel une fois les mises
à jour terminées. Lorsque le logiciel est mis à niveau, les paramètres vidéo et audio définis
reprennent leur valeur par défaut (usine).
Il est recommandé de noter les paramétrages afin de pouvoir les rétablir facilement après la mise à niveau.
Canal
Mise à niveau du logiciel à l'aide du signal de diffusion.
Si elle est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, cette fonction recherche le logiciel disponible et le
télécharge.
Le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l'état du signal.
Mise à niveau en mode veille
Pour poursuivre la mise à jour du logiciel en gardant le téléviseur sous tension, sélectionnez ON en appuyant sur le bouton
▲ ou ▼. Une mise à jour manuelle a lieu automatiquement 45 minutes après que l'entrée en mode veille. Étant donné que la mise
sous tension s'effectue de façon interne, il se peut que l'écran LCD s'allume légèrement. Ce phénomène peut se produire pendant
plus d'une heure, jusqu'à ce que la mise à jour logiciel soit terminée.
Autre logiciel
Affiche des informations sur la version du logiciel.
Guide de connexion HD
Ce menu indique la méthode de connexion offrant la qualité optimale pour le téléviseur haute définition.
Consultez ces informations lors de la connexion de périphériques externes au téléviseur.
Contacter Samsung
Consultez ces informations si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou si vous voulez mettre à niveau le logiciel.
Vous pouvez consulter les informations concernant le centre d'appel, le produit et la méthode de téléchargement du logiciel.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Français - 23
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Lecteur USB
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:51RECOMMANDATION D'UTILISATION
Fonction Télétexte
La plupart des chaînes de télévision offrent des services d'informations écrites via le télétexte. La page d'index du télétexte
contient des instructions sur l'utilisation du service. Vous pouvez, en outre, sélectionner différentes options à l'aide des touches de
la télécommande.
Pour que les informations du télétexte s'affichent correctement, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des
informations pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s'afficher.
Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande.
1 0 (mode)
Permet de sélectionner le mode
Télétexte (LIST/FLOF). Si vous appuyez
sur cette touche en mode LISTE, vous
basculez en mode d'enregistrement
de liste. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez
enregistrer une page de télétexte dans
une liste à l'aide du bouton
8 (mémoriser).
2 5 (révéler)
Permet d'afficher le texte masqué
(par exemple, les réponses à un
questionnaire). Pour rétablir le mode
d'affichage normal, appuyez de
nouveaux dessus.
3 4 (taille)
Permet d'afficher la moitié supérieure
de l'écran en caractères deux fois plus
grands. Pour afficher la moitié inférieure
de l'écran, appuyez de nouveau sur
cette touche. Pour rétablir le mode
d'affichage normal, appuyez dessus une
fois de plus.
4 8 (mémoriser)
Permet d'enregistrer les pages de
télétexte.
5 Boutons de couleur (rouge/vert/jaune/
bleu)
Si une société de télédiffusion utilise
le système FASTEXT, les différentes
rubriques d'une page de télétexte
sont associées à un code couleur
qui permet de les sélectionner à
l'aide des touches de couleur de
la télécommande. Appuyez sur la
touche dont la couleur correspond
à celle de la rubrique souhaitée. La
page affiche d'autres informations en
couleur que vous pouvez sélectionner
de la même manière. Pour afficher la
page précédente ou la page suivante,
appuyez sur la touche de couleur
correspondante.
6/ (télétexte actif/mixte)
Permet d'activer le mode Télétexte après
avoir choisi la chaîne diffusant le service
télétexte. Appuyez deux fois sur cette
touche pour superposer le télétexte à
l'émission en cours de diffusion.
7 : (quitter)
Quitte l'affichage du télétexte.
8 1 (page secondaire)
Permet d'afficher une page secondaire.
9 2 (page suivante)
Permet d'afficher la page de télétexte
suivante.
0 3 (page précédente)
Permet d'afficher la page de télétexte
précédente.
! 9 (verrouiller)
Permet de bloquer l'affichage sur une
page précise, si celle-ci est reliée à
plusieurs pages secondaires qui défilent
automatiquement. Pour reprendre
l'affichage de celles-ci, appuyez de
nouveau sur cette touche.
@ 6 (index)
Permet d'afficher la page d'index du
télétexte (sommaire) à tout moment.
# 7 (annuler)
Permet d'afficher le programme lors de la
recherche d'une page.
Les pages de télétexte sont organisées en six catégories :
Catégorie Contenu
A Numéro de la page sélectionnée.
B Identité de la chaîne émettrice.
C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche.
D Date et heure.
E Texte.
F Informations sur l'état.
Informations FASTEXT.
¦
N
N
Français - 24
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:51Les informations du télétexte sont souvent réparties sur plusieurs pages qui s'affichent successivement. Ces pages sont
accessibles en :
entrant le numéro de page ;
sélectionnant un titre dans une liste ;
sélectionnant un titre de couleur (système FASTEXT).
Le téléviseur prend en charge le niveau de télétexte 2.5 qui peut afficher des graphiques ou textes supplémentaires.
En fonction de la transmission, des panneaux latéraux vides peuvent apparaître lors de l'affichage du télétexte.
Dans ce cas, les graphiques ou textes supplémentaires ne sont pas transmis.
Les téléviseurs plus anciens qui ne prennent pas en charge la version 2.5 ne peuvent pas afficher les graphiques et textes
supplémentaires, indépendamment de la transmission télétexte.
Appuyez sur le bouton TV pour quitter l'affichage du télétexte.
Télétexte 16:9 - Format d'image 16:9
Montage du socle
Préréglage: Placez le support du guide et le goulot du couvercle sur le socle et fixezles à
l’aide des vis. Uniquement applicable aux modèles 32 pouces.
N
1. Fixez le téléviseur LCD sur le socle.
Le téléviseur doit être porté par au moins deux personnes.
Veillez à bien faire la distinction entre l'avant et l'arrière du socle lors de l'assemblage.
Pour être certain d'installer le téléviseur sur son socle au niveau approprié, n'exercez
pas de pression vers le bas excessive sur ses côtés supérieurs gauche et droit.
2. Insérez deux vis dans l'emplacement 1, puis deux autres dans l'emplacement 2.
Redressez le produit et serrez les vis. Si vous serrez les vis tandis que le téléviseur
LCD est couché, il se peut qu'il penche d'un côté.
N
N
N
N
Installation du kit de montage mural
Des éléments de montage mural (vendus séparément) permettent de fixer le téléviseur au
mur.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du support mural, reportez-vous aux instructions
fournies avec les éléments de montage mural. Faites appel à un technicien pour vous aider à
installer le support mural.
Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable d'un endommagement du produit
ou d'une blessure si vous choisissez d'effectuer vous-même l'installation murale.
N'installez pas le kit de montage mural lorsque le téléviseur est sous tension. Cela
pourrait entraîner une blessure par choc électrique.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Français - 25
Arrière
Avant
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:52Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington
Le verrou Kensington est un dispositif utilisé pour fixer physiquement le système en cas
d'utilisation dans un lieu public. L'aspect du verrou et la méthode de verrouillage peuvent
différer de l'illustration en fonction du fabricant. Consultez le manuel fourni avec le verrou
Kensington pour savoir comment l'utiliser correctement. Le dispositif de verrouillage est
vendu séparément. L'emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle.
1. Insérez le dispositif de verrouillage dans le logement Kensington du téléviseur LCD (1),
puis tournez-le dans le sens de verrouillage (2).
2. Branchez le câble du verrou Kensington (3).
3. Fixez le câble du verrou Kensington sur un bureau ou tout autre objet lourd inamovible.
3
1
2
Sécurisation de l'emplacement d'installation
Respectez les distances requises entre le produit et d'autres objets (p. ex. murs) pour assurer une ventilation adéquate.
Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait provoquer un incendie ou un problème avec le produit en raison de l'augmentation de la
température interne de ce dernier.
Installez le produit de manière à respecter les distances requises indiquées sur la figure.
En cas d'utilisation d'un support ou de montage mural, n'utilisez que des pièces Samsung Electronics.
L'emploi de pièces d'un autre fabricant risque d'entraîner des problèmes avec le produit ou d'occasionner des blessures
dues à la chute du produit.
L'emploi de pièces d'un autre fabricant risque d'entraîner un problème avec le produit ou de provoquer un incendie en
raison de l'augmentation de la température interne du produit due à une ventilation insuffisante.
L'aspect peut varier en fonction du produit.
Installation du produit sur un support Montage mural du produit
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
Français - 26
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:52Fixation du téléviseur au mur
Attention : Si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez en
particulier, à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait le
faire basculer et occasionner des blessures graves pouvant entraîner la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions
de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité accrue, installez le dispositif
antichute comme indiqué ci-après.
Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur :
1. Glissez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les solidement au mur. Assurez-vous que les
vis sont solidement fixées au mur.
En fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel
supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles.
Les colliers, vis et chaînettes n'étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter
séparément.
2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, glissez-les dans les
colliers, puis fixez-les de nouveau sur le téléviseur.
Il est possible que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. Dans ce cas,
achetez des vis présentant les caractéristiques suivantes.
Caractéristiques des vis
Pour un téléviseur LCD 17 à 29 pouces : M4 X L15
Pour un téléviseur LCD 32 à 40 pouces : M6 X L15
3. Reliez les bagues fixées au téléviseur et celles fixées sur le mur à l'aide de chaînettes,
puis attachez-les fermement.
Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu'il ne bascule pas vers l'arrière.
Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur
soient placés à même hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur.
Détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur.
4. Vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. Vérifiez régulièrement que
les connexions ne présentent aucun signe d'usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la
sécurité des connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Français - 2
Mur
Mur
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:53Français - 28
Dépannage
Si vous avez des questions relatives au téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces astuces de
dépannage ne s'applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site ‘www.samsung.com’, puis cliquez sur Support ou contactez le
centre d'appel dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page.
Problème Solution
Qualité de l'image
Exécutez tout d'abord le Test de l'image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur affiche correctement
l'image de test.
Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test de l'image
Si l'image de test s'affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou au signal.
●
La qualité de l'image sur le
téléviseur n'est pas aussi
bonne que dans le magasin.
Si vous êtes équipé d'un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique, procédez à une mise à
niveau. Utilisez les câbles HDMI ou Composant pour fournir une qualité d'image HD.
Abonné câble/satellite : essayez les chaînes HD (High Definition) à partir de l'alignement des canaux.
Connexion de l'antenne: essayez les chaînes HD après avoir exécuté une mémorisation
automatique.
De nombreuses chaînes HD sont mises à niveaux par rapport à du contenu
SD (Standard Definition).
Réglez la résolution de sortie vidéo du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur sur 1080i ou 720p.
Veillez à respecter la distance minimale recommandée entre vous et le téléviseur (distance
basée sur la taille et la définition du signal affiché).
●
●
●
N
●
●
L'image est déformée :
macrobloc, petit bloc, points,
pixelisation
La compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en
particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action.
Un niveau de signal faible ou une mauvaise qualité peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas
d'un problème lié au téléviseur.
●
●
Couleur incorrecte ou
manquante avec la
connexion Composant.
Vérifiez que les câbles Composant sont raccordés aux prises appropriées. Des
raccordements desserrés ou incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au niveau de la
couleur ou de l'écran (vide).
●
Luminosité ou couleur
médiocre.
Réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (mode Image, Couleur, Luminosité,
Netteté).
Réglez l'option Mode éco. dans le menu Configuration.
Essayez de réinitialiser l'image pour afficher son paramètre par défaut
(accédez à MENU - Image - Réinitialisation de l'image).
●
●
●
Ligne pointillée sur le bord
de l'écran.
Si la taille de l'image est réglée sur Adapter à l'écran, remplacez la valeur par 16:9.
Changez la résolution du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur.
●
●
L'image est en noir et
blanc avec l'entrée AV
(Composite) uniquement.
● Raccordez le câble vidéo (jaune) à la prise verte de l'entrée Composant 1 du téléviseur.
L'image se fige ou est
déformée lorsque vous
changez de chaînes ou l'image
s'affiche avec un décalage.
En cas de raccordement avec le décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser ce dernier
(rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation secteur et patientez jusqu'au démarrage du décodeur
câble. Cette opération peut durer jusqu'à 20 minutes).
Réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p.
●
●
Qualité sonore
Exécutez tout d'abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de votre téléviseur
fonctionne correctement.
Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test du son
Si le système audio fonctionne correctement, le problème lié au son peut provenir de la source ou du signal.
●
Aucun son ou son trop faible
lorsque le niveau du volume
est au maximum.
Vérifiez le volume du périphérique externe connecté à votre téléviseur, puis réglez le volume
du téléviseur en conséquence.
●
Image correcte mais
absence de son.
Réglez l'option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Sound.
Vérifiez que les câbles audio d'un périphérique externe sont raccordés aux prises d'entrée
audio appropriées du téléviseur.
Vérifiez l'option de sortie audio du périphérique connecté (par exemple : il se peut que vous deviez
remplacer l'option audio de votre décodeur câble par HDMI si vous utilisez la connexion HDMI).
Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis.
Désactivez la fonction SRS si le réglage du volume est supérieur à 30.
Retirez la fiche de la prise pour casque (si disponible sur votre téléviseur).
●
●
●
●
●
●
Bruit émis par le
haut-parleur.
Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles. Vérifiez qu'aucun câble vidéo n'est raccordé à une entrée audio.
Pour la connexion de l'antenne/du câble, vérifiez l'intensité du signal. Un niveau de signal
faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:53Français - 29
Problème Solution
Aucune image, aucune
vidéo
Le téléviseur ne s'allume
pas.
Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale
et sur le téléviseur.
Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle.
Essayez d'appuyer sur le bouton POWER du téléviseur pour vérifier que la télécommande
fonctionne correctement. Si le téléviseur s'allume, la télécommande peut être à l'origine de
cette mise sous tension. Pour résoudre le problème lié à la télécommande, reportez-vous au
problème ‘La télécommande ne fonctionne pas’ ci-après.
●
●
●
Le téléviseur s'éteint
automatiquement.
Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration.
Si vous connectez le téléviseur à votre PC, vérifiez les paramètres d'alimentation de votre
PC.
Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale
et sur le téléviseur.
En l'absence de signal pendant environ 10 à 15 minutes avec la connexion Antenne/câble,
le téléviseur s'éteint.
●
●
●
●
Aucune image/vidéo. Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles du téléviseur et des
périphériques externes et rebranchez-les).
Réglez la sortie vidéo de votre périphérique externe (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, DVD,
Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire correspondre les connexions à l'entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple,
sortie du périphérique externe : HDMI, entrée du téléviseur : HDMI.
Vérifiez que votre périphérique connecté est sous tension.
Veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur le bouton
SOURCE de la télécommande.
●
●
●
●
Connexion RF
(câble/antenne)
Impossible de recevoir
toutes les chaînes.
Vérifiez que le câble de l'antenne est raccordé correctement.
Essayez la fonction Plug & Play pour ajouter des chaînes disponibles à la liste
correspondante. Accédez à MENU - Configuration - Plug & Play et attendez que toutes les
chaînes disponibles soient mémorisées.
Vérifiez que l'antenne est positionnée correctement.
●
●
●
L'image est déformée :
macrobloc, petit bloc, points,
pixelisation
La compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en
particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action.
Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au
téléviseur.
●
●
Connexion PC
Message ‘Mode non pris en
charge’.
Réglez la fréquence et la résolution de sortie de votre PC de sorte à ce qu'il corresponde
aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur.
●
Le PC apparaît toujours
dans la liste source même
s'il n'est pas connecté.
● C'est normal ; le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas connecté.
La vidéo fonctionne
correctement mais le
système audio n'existe pas
avec une connexion HDMI.
● Vérifiez le paramètre de sortie audio de votre PC.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:53Français - 30
Problème Solution
Autres
L'image ne s'affiche pas en
plein écran.
Des barres noires s'affichent de chaque côté des chaînes HD lors de l'affichage du contenu
SD étendu (4:3).
Des barres noires s'affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format est différent de celui
de votre téléviseur.
Réglez l'option de la taille de l'image sur votre périphérique externe ou le téléviseur en plein
écran.
●
●
●
La télécommande ne
fonctionne pas.
Replacez les piles de la télécommande en respectant la polarité (+ -).
Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande située en haut de la télécommande.
Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur dans un rayon de 1,5 à
1,8 m.
●
●
●
Impossible de contrôler
l'alimentation ou le volume
du téléviseur avec la
télécommande du décodeur
câble/boîtier décodeur.
Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour faire fonctionner le
téléviseur. Consultez le manuel de l'utilisateur relatif au câble/satellite pour obtenir le code
du téléviseur SAMSUNG.
●
Message ‘Mode non pris en
charge’.
Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution de sortie du
périphérique externe en conséquence. Reportez-vous aux paramètres de résolution
indiqués dans ce manuel.
●
Odeur de plastique émise
par le téléviseur.
● Cette odeur est normale et s'atténuera au fur et à mesure.
Informations de signal
du téléviseur n'est pas
disponible dans le menu
de test du diagnostic
automatique.
Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'avec des chaînes numériques avec connexion d'antenne
(RF/coaxial).
●
Le téléviseur penche vers la
droite ou la gauche.
● Retirez la base du support du téléviseur et réassemblez-la.
Impossible d'assembler la
base du support.
Veillez à placer le téléviseur sur une surface plane. Si vous ne parvenez pas à retirer les vis
du téléviseur, utilisez un tournevis aimanté.
●
Le menu des chaînes est
grisé (non disponible).
● Le menu Canal n’est disponible que si la source du téléviseur est sélectionnée.
Vos paramètres sont perdus
après 30 minutes ou à
chaque mise hors tension
du téléviseur.
Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres de l'image et audio sont rétablis
toutes les 30 minutes. Remplacez le mode Enr. démo par le mode Util. domicile dans la
procédure Plug & Play. Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV,
accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Perte intermittente du signal
audio ou vidéo.
Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; raccordez-les au besoin.
Cette perte peut être provoquée par l'utilisation de câbles trop rigides ou épais. Veillez à
ce que les câbles soient suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long terme. En cas
d'installation murale, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser des câbles avec des connecteurs
de 90 degrés.
●
●
Il se peut que vous voyiez
de petites particules si vous
regardez de près le bord du
cadre de l'écran du téléviseur.
● Elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un défaut.
‘Signal brouillé’ ou ‘Aucun
signal/signal faible’ avec la
carte d’interface (CI) CARD
du CAM.
Vérifiez que la carte d'interface commune CI CARD est installée dans le CAM dans la fente
de l'interface commune.
Tirez le CAM du téléviseur et insérez-le de nouveau dans la fente.
●
●
45 minutes après sa mise
hors tension, le téléviseur
s'allume.
Cela est normal car le téléviseur utilise la fonction de liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à
niveau le microprogramme téléchargé pendant son utilisation.
●
Problème récurrent lié à
l'image/au son.
● Vérifiez et changez le signal/la source.
Ce téléviseur LCD TFT est équipé d'un écran constitué de sous-pixels dont la fabrication nécessite une technologie
sophistiquée. Il se peut toutefois que des points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l'écran. Ceux-ci n'ont aucune incidence sur
les performances du produit.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:53Français - 31
Caractéristiques
Nom du modèle LE26B450 LE32B450
Taille de l'écran
(diagonale) 26 pouces 32 pouces
Résolution du PC
(optimale) 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz
Son
(Sortie) 5W X 2 10W X 2
Dimensions (LxPxH)
Corps
Avec socle
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Poids
Avec socle 8 kg 12 kg
Considérations environnementales
Température de fonctionnement
Humidité en cours de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Humidité sur le lieu de stockage
10°C à 40°C (50°F à 104°F)
10 % à 80 %, sans condensation
-20°C à 45°C (-4°F à 113°F)
5 % à 95 %, sans condensation
10°C à 40°C (50°F à 104°F)
10 % à 80 %, sans condensation
-20°C à 45°C (-4°F à 113°F)
5 % à 95 %, sans condensation
Socle orientable
Gauche / droite 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
La conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
Ce périphérique est un appareil numérique de classe B.
Concernant l'alimentation et la consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l'étiquette apposée sur le produit.
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:53Die Abbildungen und Illustrationen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Information und können vom tatsächlichen Aussehen des
Geräts abweichen. Änderungen an Ausführung und technischen Daten vorbehalten.
Lizenz
TruSurround HD, SRS und das Symbol sind eingetragene Marken von SRS Labs, Inc.Die
TruSurround HD-Technologie wird unter Lizenz von SRS Labs, Inc. in das System integriert.
Hergestellt unter Lizenz der Dolby Laboratories: Dolby sowie das Doppel-D-Symbol sind Warenzeichen der
Dolby Laboratories.
Hinweis zu Digitalfernsehen
1. Die Funktionalitäten für Digital TV (DVB) stehen nur in Ländern/Regionen zur Verfügung, in denen digitale terrestrische DVBT-Signale (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AVC) gesendet werden oder in denen Sie Zugang zu einem kompatiblen Kabelfernsehdienst
mit DVB-C (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AAC) haben können. Fragen Sie Ihren örtlichen Händler, wenn Sie Informationen über die
Verfügbarkeit von DVB-T oder DVB-C in Ihrer Gegend benötigen.
2. DVB-T ist der Standard des europäischen DVB-Konsortiums für die terrestrische Versorgung mit digitalem Fernsehen,
und DVB-C ist der Standard des Konsortiums für die Versorgung mit digitalem Kabelfernsehen. Allerdings werden manche
Unterscheidungsmerkmale wie EPG (elektrische Programmzeitschrift), VOD (Video on Demand) usw. in dieser Spezifikation
nicht berücksichtigt. Deshalb können sie zum jetzigen Zeitpunkt noch nicht eingesetzt werden.
3. Zwar hält dieses Fernsehgerät die aktuellen Standards der DVB-T- und DVB-C-Spezifikationen [Version August 2008] ein,
aber es kann nicht garantiert werden, dass die Kompatibilität mit zukünftigen digitalen terrestrischen DVB-T und DBV-CSignalen gewahrt bleibt.
4. In Abhängigkeit von den Ländern/Regionen, in denen dieses Fernsehgerät eingesetzt wird, verlangen manche
Kabelfernsehanbieter zusätzliche Gebühren für solch einen Dienst, und möglicherweise wird verlangt, dass Sie den
Vertragsbedingungen des Unternehmens zustimmen.
5. Manche Digitalfernsehfunktionen sind in einigen Ländern oder Regionen möglicherweise nicht verfügbar, und bei DVB-C kann
das Gerät möglicherweise bei manchen Kabelfernsehanbietern nicht störungsfrei zusammenarbeiten.
6. Für weitere Informationen setzen Sie sich bitte mit dem SAMSUNG-Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung.
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beim Anzeigen von Standbildern
Ein Standbild kann zu einer dauerhaften Beschädigung des Bildschirms führen.
Zeigen Sie Standbilder und teilweise unbewegte Bilder nicht länger als 2 Stunden auf dem LCD-Bildschirm an, da das Bild auf
diese Weise einbrennen kann. Das Einbrennen von Standbildern wird auch als „Bildkonservierung“ bezeichnet. Sie können
das Einbrennen vermeiden, indem Sie die Helligkeit und den Kontrast des Bildschirms beim Anzeigen von Standbildern
verringern.
Der Betrieb des LCD-Monitors im Format 4:3 für einen längeren Zeitraum kann links, rechts und in der Mitte
des Monitors Spuren der Bildränder hinterlassen, die durch die unterschiedliche Lichtemission auf dem
Monitor verursacht werden. DVD- oder Spielekonsole-Wiedergabe können einen ähnlichen Effekt
verursachen. Schäden, die durch die o. g. Effekte verursacht wurden, fallen nicht unter die Garantie.
Durch das Anzeigen der Standbilder von Videospielen oder vom PC über einen gewissen Zeitraum hinaus können partielle
Nachbilder entstehen. Um diesen Effekt zu verhindern, verringern Sie Helligkeit und Kontrast, wenn Sie Standbilder anzeigen
möchten.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:54Deutsch - 1
Symbol
N O T
Hinweis Zielwahltaste TOOLS-Taste Drücken
❑
ALLGEMEINE INFORMATIONEN
Bedienfeld.............................................................................2
Zubehör................................................................................2
Anschlussfeld .......................................................................3
Fernbedienung .....................................................................5
Batterien in die Fernbedienung einsetzen............................5
BEDIENUNG
Anzeigen von Menüs............................................................6
Fernsehgerät in den Standby-Modus schalten.....................7
Plug & Play-Funktion............................................................7
Anzeigen des Bildschirmmenüs ...........................................8
SENDERSTEUERUNG
Konfigurieren des Kanalmenüs ............................................8
Verwalten von Kanälen ......................................................11
BILDSTEUERUNG
Konfigurieren des Bildmenüs..............................................13
Verwenden Ihres Computers als Computerbildschirm (PC).....15
Fernsehgerät mithilfe des PCs einstellen...........................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
AUDIOSTEUERUNG
Konfigurieren des Tonmenüs..............................................17
Tonmodus wählen...............................................................18
EINSTELLUNGEN
Konfigurieren der Menüeinstellungen.................................19
EINGANG / UNTERSTÜTZUNG
Konfigurieren des Signalquellenmenüs..............................22
Konfigurieren des Supportmenü.........................................22
EMPFEHLUNGEN FÜR DEN BETRIEB
Videotextfunktion................................................................24
Anbringen des Standfußes.................................................25
Anbringen der Wandhalterung............................................25
Kensington-Schloss als Diebstahlsicherung.......................26
Absichern des Einbaubereichs...........................................26
Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand ......................27
Fehlerbehebung .................................................................28
Technische Daten...............................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
INHALT
Deutsch
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:54Deutsch - 2
ALLGEMEINE INFORMATIONEN
Bedienfeld
Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
Sie können auch jederzeit die Tasten auf der Seitenverkleidung verwenden.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Schaltet zwischen allen verfügbaren Signalquellen um. Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie diese Taste wie die
Eingabetaste ENTERE auf der Fernbedienung verwenden.
2 MENU: Drücken Sie diese Taste, um ein Bildschirmmenü zu den Funktionen Ihres Fernsehgeräts einzublenden.
3Y: Hiermit erhöhen oder verringern Sie die Lautstärke.
Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie die Y-Schaltflächen wie die Tasten ◄ und ► auf der Fernbedienung verwenden.
4Z: Hiermit wechseln Sie den Kanal. Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie die Z-Schaltflächen wie die Tasten
▼ und ▲ auf der Fernbedienung verwenden.
5 P (Netztaste): Drücken Sie diese Taste, um das Fernsehgerät ein- und auszuschalten.
6 FERNBEDIENUNGSSENSOR: Richten Sie die Fernbedienung auf diesen Sensor am Fernsehgerät.
7 BETRIEBSANZEIGE: Beim Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts blinkt die Netzleuchte kurz und erlischt anschließend. Im
Standbymodus leuchtet die Anzeige permanent.
8 LAUTSPRECHER
Zubehör
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Fernbedienung und 2
Batterien (Typ AAA)
Netzkabel
Untere
Abdeckung
4 Schrauben Fuß
3 Schrauben Fuß
(nur 32-Zoll Modell)
Reinigungstuch
● Bedienungsanleitung ● Garantiekarte ● Sicherheitshinweise
Überprüfen Sie die Verpackung Ihres LCD-Fernsehgeräts auf Vollständigkeit. Falls Komponenten fehlen sollten, setzen Sie
sich bitte mit Ihrem Händler in Verbindung.
Garantiekarte / Sicherheitshinweise (nicht überall verfügbar)
Die Farbe und die Form der Teile kann je nach Modell unterschiedlich sein.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:55Deutsch - 3
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
Anschlussfeld
Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
Wenn Sie ein externes Gerät an das Fernsehgerät anschließen möchten, muss das Gerät unbedingt ausgeschaltet sein.
Achten Sie beim Anschließen eines externen Geräts auf die Farbcodierung: Stecker und Buchse müssen die gleiche Farbe
aufweisen.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Anschluss für ein Digitalaudio-Gerät wie z. B. ein Heimkinosystem.
Wenn die HDMI IN-Anschlüsse verbunden sind, wird über den Anschluss DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) am
Fernseher nur 2-Kanalton ausgegeben. Wenn Sie 5.1-Kanalton wünschen, müssen Sie den optischen Ausgang am DVDPlayer oder an der Kabel-/Sat-Box direkt an einen Verstärker oder ein Heimkinosystem anschließen und nicht an das
Fernsehgerät.
2 PC IN
Anschließen an den Videoausgang Ihres PCs.
3 ANT IN
Anschluss an eine Antenne oder eine Kabelfernsehanlage.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Anschließen an den Audioausgang Ihres PCs.
DVI-Audioausgänge für externe Geräte.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Verbinden Sie das eine Ende des Cinch-Audiokabels mit dem Anschluss AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] auf der Rückseite
des Geräts und das andere Ende mit den entsprechenden Audioeingängen des Verstärkers oder DVD-Heimkinosystems.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
[Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts]
[Seitenverkleidung
des Fernsehgeräts]
Netzanschluss
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:55Deutsch - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Anschließen an die HDMI-Buchse von Geräten mit HDMI-Ausgang.
Beim Anschluss von Geräten über HDMI-Schnittstelle ist keine zusätzliche Audioverbindung erforderlich.
Verwenden Sie den HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Anschluss für DVI-Verbindungen mit einem externen Gerät. Verwenden Sie ein
DVI-HDMI-Kabel oder einen DVI-HDMI-Adapter (DVI auf HDMI) für den Videoanschluss und die PC / DVI AUDIO INAnschlüsse für die Audioverbindung.
Sie können diese Anschlüsse auch verwenden, um an einen PC anzuschließen.
Was ist HDMI?
HDMI, die "hochauflösende Multimediaschnittstelle" ermöglicht die Übertragung von hochauflösenden digitalen
Videodaten und mehreren Kanälen mit Digitalaudio. Mit dem entsprechenden Kabel ermöglicht der HDMI/DVI-Anschluss
DVI-Verbindungen zu einem erweiterten Gerät (nicht mitgeliefert). Der Unterschied zwischen HDMI und DVI besteht
darin, dass ein Gerät mit HDMI kleiner ist, mit dem Kopierschutz HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection/ digitaler
Kopierschutz) ausgestattet ist und digitalen Mehrkanalton unterstützt.
Bei dem Fernsehgerät erfolgt u. U. keine Tonausgabe und das Fernsehbild weist evtl. anormale Farben auf, wenn DVD-
oder Blu-ray-Player bzw. Kabel- oder Satellitenreceiver angeschlossen werden, die HDMI-Versionen vor 1.3 unterstützen.
Beim Anschluss eines älteren HDMI-Kabels und fehlender Tonausgabe schließen Sie das HDMI-Kabel an den
HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Abschluss und die Audiokabel an die PC / DVI AUDIO IN-Anschlüsse auf der Rückseite des
Fernsehgeräts an. Wenn dies der Fall ist, erfragen Sie bei Firma, die Ihnen den DVD- oder Blu-ray-Player bzw. den
Kabel- oder Satellitenreceiver geliefert hat, die eingesetzte HDMI-Version. Anschließend fordern Sie ein Firmwareupdate
an. HDMI-Kabel für andere Versionen als 1.3 können störendes Flackern des Bildschirms verursachen oder zum völligen
Ausfall des Fernsehgeräts führen.
7 COMMON INTERFACE-Steckplatz
Ohne eingelegte "CI-Karte" zeigt das Fernsehgerät auf einigen Kanälen ein "gestörtes Signal" an.
Die Verbindungsinformationen mit Telefonnummer, Kennung der CI-Karte, Hostkennung und anderen Angaben wird
nach ungefähr 2 bis 3 Minuten angezeigt. Wenn eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt wird, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren
Dienstanbieter.
Wenn die Konfiguration der Kanalinformationen abgeschlossen ist, wird die Meldung "Udating Completed" angezeigt.
Dies bedeutet, dass die Kanalliste aktualisiert wurde.
Sie müssen die CI-Karte bei einem der örtlichen Kabelnetzbetreiber beschaffen. Ziehen Sie die CI-Karte vorsichtig mit
den Händen heraus. Sie könnte beim Herunterfallen beschädigt werden.
Die Richtung, in der Sie die Karte einlegen müssen, ist darauf mit einem Pfeil markiert.
Die Position des COMMON INTERFACE-Steckplatzes ist modellabhängig.
Zugangsmodule werden in einigen Ländern und Regionen nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie diesbezüglich Ihren offiziellen
Samsung-Händler.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Schließen Sie ein Cinch-Kabel an ein geeignetes A/V-Gerät (z. B. Videorecorder, DVD-Player oder Camcorder) an.
Verbinden Sie das eine Ende des Cinch-Audiokabels mit dem Anschluss [R-AUDIO-L] Ihres Geräts und das andere Ende
mit den entsprechenden Audioausgängen des A/V-Geräts.
9 KENSINGTON-SCHLOSS (modellabhängig)
Das (optionale) Kensington-Schloss dient zur Sicherung des Fernsehgeräts bei Verwendung an einem öffentlichen Ort.
Wenn Sie ein Schloss verwenden möchten, wenden Sie sich an den Händler, bei dem Sie das Fernsehgerät erworben
haben.
Die Position des Kensington-Schlosses ist modellabhängig.
0 COMPONENT IN
Verbinden Sie den Komponentenanschluss (PR, PB, Y) auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts mit Hilfe des (optionalen)
Komponenten-Videokabels mit den entsprechenden Komponenten-Videoausgängen des DTV- oder DVD-Geräts.
Wenn Sie sowohl die Set-Top-Box als auch ein DTV- (oder DVD)-Gerät anschließen möchten, verbinden Sie die Set-TopBox mit dem DTV- (oder DVD)-Gerät, und verbinden Sie das DTV- oder DVD-Gerät mit dem Komponentenanschluss (PR,
PB, Y) des Fernsehgeräts.
Die PR, PB und Y-Anschlüsse von Komponentengeräten (DTV oder DVD) sind manchmal mit Y, B-Y und R-Y bzw. Y, Cb
und Cr beschriftet.
Verbinden Sie den Audioausgang [R-AUDIO-L] auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts über Cinch-Audiokabel (optional)
mit dem entsprechenden Audioausgang des DTV- oder DVD-Geräts.
! EXT (RGB)
Anschluss
Eingang Ausgang
Video Audio (L / R) RGB Video + Audio (L / R)
EXT O O O Nur TV- oder DTV-Ausgang verfügbar.
Ein- und Ausgänge für externe Geräte wie z. B. Videorecorder, DVD-Player, Spielekonsolen oder Video-Disc-Player.
@ SERVICE
Anschluss für Softwareaktualisierungen.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:55Deutsch - 5
Fernbedienung
Die Reichweite der Fernbedienung beträgt ca. 7 m.
Die Leistungsfähigkeit der Fernbedienung kann durch starke Lichteinstrahlung beeinträchtigt werden.
Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
1 POWER: Standby-Taste des
Fernsehgeräts.
2 ZIFFERNTASTEN: Hiermit
wechseln Sie den Kanal.
3 FAV.CH: Drücken Sie diese Taste,
um zu Ihren Favoriten zu wechseln.
4Y : Hiermit erhöhen oder
verringern Sie die Lautstärke.
5 SOURCE: Hiermit können Sie alle
verfügbaren Videosignalquellen
anzeigen und auswählen.
6 INFO : Hiermit können Sie
Informationen auf dem
Fernsehschirm anzeigen.
7 TOOLS: Hiermit können Sie häufig
verwendete Funktionen schnell
auswählen.
8 CH LIST: Hiermit zeigen Sie die
Kanalliste auf dem Bildschirm an.
9 FARBTASTEN: Verwenden Sie
diese Tasten bei der Arbeit mit der
Senderliste usw.
! TV: Hiermit können Sie den TVModus direkt aufrufen.
@ PRE-CH: Hiermit können Sie
zum zuletzt angezeigten Kanal
wechseln.
# MUTEM: Drücken Sie diese
Taste, um den Ton vorübergehend
auszuschalten.
$ P
: Hiermit wechseln Sie
den Kanal.
% MENU: Hiermit zeigen Sie das
Bildschirmmenü an.
^ GUIDE: Hiermit zeigen Sie den
elektronischen Programmführer (EPG)
an.
& RETURN: Hiermit wechseln Sie zurück
zum vorherigen Menü
* AUF▲ / AB▼ / LINKS◄ / RECHTS►
/ ENTERE: Auswählen von Optionen
im Bildschirmmenü und Ändern von
Menüwerten.
( EXIT: Drücken Sie diese Taste, um das
Menü zu verlassen.
) SUBT. : Mit dieser Taste können Sie
Untertitel anzeigen
a AD: Auswahl der Audio-Beschreibung.
Videotextfunktionen
5 0: Videotext-Modus auswählen
(LIST / FLOF)
6 5: Verborgenen Inhalt einblenden
7 4: Videotextgröße auswählen.
8 8: Videotextseite speichern
9 Fastext-Thema auswählen
0/: Nacheinander Videotext,
Double oder Mix auswählen.
! :: Videotext beenden
@ 1 : Untergeordnete Videotextseite
$ 2 : Nächste Videotextseite
3 : Vorige Videotextseite
% 6 : Teletext-Index
& 9 : Nicht umblättern
( 7 : Teletext abbrechen
Batterien in die Fernbedienung einsetzen
1. Heben Sie die Abdeckung auf der Rückseite der Fernbedienung an, wie in der Abbildung
dargestellt.
2. Legen Sie zwei AAA-Batterien ein.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Pole der Batterien wie im Batteriefach angezeigt
ausgerichtet sind.
3. Schieben Sie die Abdeckung wieder auf die Fernbedienung.
Wenn die Fernbedienung für einen längeren Zeitraum nicht verwendet wird, nehmen Sie
die Batterien heraus, und lagern Sie sie an einem kühlen, trockenen Ort.
Sollte die Fernbedienung nicht funktionieren, überprüfen Sie Folgendes:
Ist das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet?
Wurden Plus- und Minuspol der Batterien vertauscht?
Sind die Batterien leer?
Liegt ein Stromausfall vor oder ist das Netzkabel des Fernsehgeräts nicht eingesteckt?
Befindet sich eine Leuchtstoffröhre oder ein Neonschild in der Nähe?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:56Deutsch - 6
BEDIENUNG
Anzeigen von Menüs
Vor dem ersten Einsatz des Fernsehgeräts führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, um zu
erfahren, wie Sie im Menü navigieren, um die verschiedenen Funktionen auszuwählen und
einzustellen.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU.
Das Hauptmenü wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Auf der linken Seite sehen Sie
Symbole: Bild, Ton, Sender, Einstellungen, Eingang, Anwendung, Unterstützung.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ eines der Symbole aus.
Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ oder ►, um in das Untermenü des Symbols zu wechseln.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, um im Menü zu navigieren.
Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um im Menü Eingaben vorzunehmen.
4. Ändern Sie mit den Tasten ▲/▼/◄/► die jeweils gewählte Option.
Durch Drücken der Taste RETURN gelangen Sie zurück ins vorherige Menü.
5. Drücken Sie zum Schließen des Menüs die Taste EXIT.
Die Tasten der Fernbedienung
Taste Vorgang Taste Vorgang
MENUm Bildschirmmenü anzeigen.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Cursor bewegen und Elemente
auswählen.
Markiertes Element auswählen.
Einstellung bestätigen.
RUTURNR Zurück zum vorherigen Menü.
EXITe Bildschirmmenü schließen.
Beispiel: Einstellen der Helligkeit des Fernsehgeräts im Bildmenü
Einstellen der Helligkeit auf 80
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU, um das Menü anzuzeigen.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Picture auszuwählen.
3. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Helligkeit.
4. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE.
5. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ oder ►, bis die Helligkeit auf 80 eingestellt ist.
6. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE.
Drücken Sie die Taste EXIT, um das Menü zu verlassen.
¦
N
N
Modus : Standard ►
Hinter.Licht : 7
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50 / R50
Bild
Modus : Standard ►
Hinter.Licht : 7
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50 / R50
Bild
Hinter.Licht : 7
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45 ►
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50 / R50
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bildoptionen
Bild zurücksetzen
Bild
U Navig. L Einst. E Eingabe R Zurück
Helligkeit 45
U Navig. L Einst. E Eingabe R Zurück
Helligkeit 80
Modus : Standard ►
Hinter.Licht : 7
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50 / R50
Bild
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:56Deutsch -
Fernsehgerät in den Standby-Modus schalten
Um den Stromverbrauchs zu senken, kann das Gerät in den Standby-Modus geschaltet werden. Der Standby-Modus ist nützlich,
wenn Sie das Gerät vorübergehend ausschalten möchten (z. B. während einer Mahlzeit).
1. Drücken Sie die Taste POWERP auf der Fernbedienung drücken.
Der Bildschirm wird ausgeschaltet, und auf der Vorderseite des Fernsehgeräts leuchtet die Standby-Anzeige auf.
2. Drücken Sie einfach erneut die Taste POWERP, um das Gerät wieder einzuschalten.
Der Standby-Modus ist nicht für längere Phasen der Abwesenheit gedacht (z. B. wenn Sie verreist sind). Ziehen Sie dann
sicherheitshalber den Netzstecker und das Antennenkabel.
Plug & Play-Funktion
Wenn das Fernsehgerät zum ersten Mal eingeschaltet wird, werden automatisch die
Grundeinstellungen vorgenommen.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste POWER auf der Fernbedienung. Die Meldung You can set the
menu language. wird angezeigt.
2. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Sprache mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ aus. Drücken Sie die Taste
ENTERE, um Ihre Auswahl zu bestätigen.
3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Shop Demo oder Privatgebrauch, und drücken Sie dann auf
ENTERE.
Wir empfehlen Ihnen, das Fernsehgerät im Modus Privatgebrauch zu verwenden, um das optimale Bild für den
Privatgebrauch zu erzielen.
Shop Demo ist nur geeignet, wenn das Gerät in einem Verkaufsbereich verwendet wird.
Wenn das Gerät versehentlich auf den Modus Shop Demo eingestellt wird, und Sie möchten wieder zurück zu
Privatgebrauch (Standard) wechseln, gehen Sie so vor: Drücken Sie die Lautstärketaste am Fernsehgerät. Wenn das
Menü "Volume" angezeigt wird, halten Sie die Taste MENU am Fernsehgerät 5 Sekunden lang gedrückt.
4. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Land mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ aus. Drücken Sie die Taste
ENTERE, um Ihre Auswahl zu bestätigen.
5. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Terrestrisch oder Kabel, und drücken Sie dann die Taste
ENTERE.
Terrestrisch: Terrestrisches Antennensignal.
Kabel: Kabelgebundenes Antennensignal.
6. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Signalquelle aus, die gespeichert werden soll. Drücken Sie die Taste
ENTERE, um Start auszuwählen.
Digital und Analog: Digitale und analoge Kanäle.
Digital: Digitale Kanäle.
Analog: Analoge Kanäle.
Wenn Sie das Antennensignal auf Kabel einstellen, können Sie im nächsten Schritt einen Wert für die Suche nach
Digitalkanälen eingeben. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie unter Sender → Autom. speichern.
Die Kanalsuche wird automatisch gestartet und beendet.
Zum Unterbrechen des Speichervorgangs zu einem beliebigen Zeitpunkt drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE.
Wenn Sie alle verfügbaren Kanäle gespeichert haben, wird die Meldung Uhrmodus einstellen angezeigt.
. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Auto, und drücken Sie dann
die Taste ENTERE.
Wenn Sie Manual wählen, wird Datum und Uhrzeit einstellen angezeigt.
Wenn Sie ein digitales Signal empfangen, wird die Zeit automatisch eingestellt. Anderenfalls wählen Sie Manuell, um die
Uhr zu stellen. (Informationen hierzu finden Sie auf Seite 19.)
8. Die Verbindungsmethode für optimale HD-Qualität wird vorgeschlagen. Nachdem Sie die Methode bestätigt haben, drücken
Sie die Taste ENTERE.
9. Die Meldung Gute Fernsehunterhaltung! wird angezeigt. Drücken Sie abschließend die Taste ENTERE.
So setzen Sie diese Funktion zurück:
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU, um das Menü anzuzeigen. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option
Einstellungen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE erneut, um Plug & Play auszuwählen.
3. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet 0-0-0-0.
Wenn Sie die PIN ändern möchten, verwenden Sie die Funktion PIN ändern. (Informationen hierzu finden Sie auf Seite
21.)
Die Plug & Play-Funktion gibt es nur im TV-Modus.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:56Deutsch - 8
Anzeigen des Bildschirmmenüs
Auf dem Bildschirm werden der aktuelle Kanal und bestimmte Audio/Video-Einstellungen
angezeigt.
Drücken Sie die Taste INFO, um Informationen anzuzeigen.
Drücken Sie die Taste INFO auf der Fernbedienung. Auf dem Bildschirm werden der
Kanal, der Tonmodus sowie die Werte bestimmter Bild- und Toneinstellungen angezeigt.
▲, ▼: Sie können Informationen anderer Kanäle anzeigen. Wenn Sie zum
ausgewählten Sender wechseln möchten, drücken Sie auf die ENTERE-Taste.
◄, ►: Sie können die Informationen zum aktuellen Programm dieses Senders
anzeigen.
Drücken Sie noch einmal auf die INFO-Taste und warten Sie ca. 10 Sekunden lang,
bis die Informationen automatisch angezeigt werden.
SENDERSTEUERUNG
Konfigurieren des Kanalmenüs
Land
Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
Analog Sender
Sie können das Land für Analogkanäle ändern.
Digitaler Sender
Sie können das Land für Digitalkanäle ändern.
Autom. speichern
Sie können den verfügbaren Frequenzbereich nach Sendern durchsuchen (verfügbare Sender
und Frequenzbereiche sind vom jeweiligen Land abhängig). Die automatisch zugewiesenen
Programmplätze entsprechen unter Umständen nicht den gewünschten Programmplätzen.
Wenn ein Kanal mit der Funktion Kindersicherung gesperrt wurde, wird das
Eingabefenster für die PIN geöffnet.
Terrestrisch / Kabel
Antennensignal zum Speichern auswählen
Digital und Analog: Digitale und analoge Kanäle.
Digital: Digitale Kanäle.
Analog: Analoge Kanäle.
Bei Auswahl von ‘Kabel → Digital und Analog’ oder ‘Kabel → Digital’
Wert für die Suche nach Kabelkanälen eingeben.
Suchlaufmodus → Voll / Netzwerk / Schnell
Schnell
Network ID: Anzeigen der Netzwerkkennung.
Frequenz: Hiermit zeigen Sie die Frequenz des Kanals an. (Je nach Land unterschiedlich)
Modulation: Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an.
Symbolrate: Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an.
–
–
–
–
Das Fernsehgerät durchsucht automatisch alle Kanäle mit aktiven Sendern und speichert sie im Speicher des Fernsehgeräts.
Wenn Sie die automatische Speicherung anhalten möchten, drücken Sie auf ENTERE.
Die Meldung Automatische Senderspeicherung beenden? wird angezeigt.
Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ►, um Ja auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Land ►
Autom. speichern
Manuell speichern
Suchoptionen für Kabel
Heute & Morgen
Ausführlich
Standard : Ausführlich
Sender
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:57Deutsch - 9
Manuell speichern
Hiermit wird manuell ein Kanal gesucht und dieser im Fernsehspeicher abgelegt.
Wenn ein Kanal mit der Funktion Kindersicherung gesperrt wurde, wird das Eingabefenster für die PIN geöffnet.
Digitaler Sender
Manuelles Speichern von digitalen Kanälen.
Digitaler Sender ist nur im DTV-Modus verfügbar.
Sender: Stellen Sie die Kanalnummer mit den Tasten ▲, ▼ oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9) ein.
Frequenz: Einstellen der Frequenz mithilfe der Zifferntasten.
Bandbreite: Einstellen der Bandbreite mit den Tasten ▲, ▼ oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9).
Nach Abschluss des Suchlaufs werden die Kanäle in der Kanalliste aktualisiert.
Analog Sender
Manuelles Speichern von analogen Kanälen.
Programm (der Programmplatz, der dem Sender zugewiesen werden soll) Stellen Sie den Programmplatz mit den Tasten
▲, ▼ oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9) ein.
Fernsehnorm → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Einstellen der Fernsehnorm mithilfe der Taste ▲ oder ▼.
Tonsystem → BG / DK / I / L: Einstellen des Tonsystems mithilfe der Taste ▲ oder ▼.
Sender (Wenn Ihnen die Nummer des zu speichernden Senders bekannt ist) Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten
▲ oder ▼ die Option C (terrestrischer Kanal) oder S (Kabelkanal). Drücken Sie die Taste ►, und drücken Sie dann die Tasten
▲, ▼ oder eine Zifferntaste (0~9) , um die gewünschte Nummer auszuwählen.
Die Kanalnummer können Sie auch direkt durch Drücken der Zifferntasten (0~9) auswählen.
Falls kein oder nur schlechter Ton zu hören sein sollte, wählen Sie einen anderen Audiostandard aus.
Suchlauf (Wenn Ihnen die Kanalnummern nicht bekannt sind): Drücken Sie zum Starten des Suchlaufs die Taste ▲ oder ▼.
Der Tuner durchsucht den Frequenzbereich, bis der erste Sender bzw. der ausgewählte Sender empfangen wird.
Speichern (Zum Speichern des Kanals und des zugehörigen Programmplatzes): Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um OK
zu wählen.
Kanalmodus
P (Programm-Modus): Nach Abschluss der Einstellungen sind den Sendern Ihrer Region Plätze mit den Nummern von
P00 bis P99 zugewiesen worden. In diesem Modus können Sie Sender durch Eingabe des Programmplatzes auswählen.
C (Antennenempfangsmodus): In diesem Modus können Sie Kanäle durch Eingabe der Nummer anwählen, die jedem
Antennensender zugeordnet ist.
S (Kabelkanal-Modus): In diesem Modus können Sie Sender durch Eingabe der Nummer anwählen, die jedem
Kabelsender zugeordnet ist.
Suchoptionen für Kabel (je nach Land)
Einstellen weiterer Suchoptionen für die Kanalsuche im Kabelnetz (z. B. Frequenz oder Symbolrate).
Frequenz (Start ~ Stopp): Hiermit zeigen Sie die Frequenz des Kanals an.
Modulation: Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an.
Symbolrate: Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an.
Heute & Morgen / Ausführlich
Die Informationen des elektronischen Programmführers werden von den Sendern zur Verfügung gestellt. Es kann sein, dass
Programmeinträge leer oder veraltet sind. Dies ist auf die für einen bestimmten Kanal übertragenen Informationen zurückzuführen.
Die Anzeige wird dynamisch aktualisiert, sobald neue Informationen verfügbar sind.
Detaillierte Verfahrensbeschreibungen zur Verwendung von Heute & Morgen und Ausführlich entnehmen Sie den Hinweisen
auf Seite 10.
Sie können das Programmführermenü auch durch Drücken der Taste GUIDE aufrufen. (Weitere Informationen zum
Konfigurieren des Standard finden Sie bei den entsprechenden Beschreibungen.)
Heute & Morgen
Für die sechs in der linken Spalte angezeigten Kanäle werden die aktuelle und die nächste Sendung angezeigt.
Ausführlich
Hier werden die Programminformationen in einem Zeitplan mit einer Unterteilung von jeweils 1 Stunde angezeigt. Es wird ein
Zeitfenster von 2 Stunden mit Programminformationen angezeigt. Dieses Fenster kann jedoch in der Zeit nach vorne oder nach
hinten verschoben werden.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:57Deutsch - 10
Standard → Heute & Morgen / Ausführlich
Mit der Taste GUIDE auf der Fernbedienung können Sie einstellen, ob der Heute & Morgen oder der Ausführlich angezeigt
werden soll.
Senderliste
Detaillierte Verfahrensbeschreibungen zur Verwendung der Senderliste entnehmen Sie den Beschreibungen unter 'Verwalten von
Kanälen'.
Diese Optionen können Sie auch durch Drücken der Taste CH LIST (Kanalliste) auf der Fernbedienung aufrufen.
Kanalmodus
Durch Drücken der Tasten P >/< wechseln Sie innerhalb der gewählten Kanalliste
zwischen den Kanälen.
Hinzugef. Sender
Es wird nur zwischen Kanälen der gespeicherten Kanalliste gewechselt.
Favoriten
Es wird nur zwischen Kanälen der Favoritenliste gewechselt.
Feinabstimmung
Bei klarem Empfang ist keine Feinabstimmung nötig, da diese automatisch während der Sendersuche erfolgt. Falls das Signal
jedoch schwach oder das Bild verzerrt ist, müssen Sie unter Umständen eine manuelle Feinabstimmung durchführen.
Gespeicherte feinabgestimmte Kanäle werden mit einem Sternchen "*" auf der rechten Seite der Kanalnummer im KanalBanner markiert.
Wählen Sie zum Zurücksetzen der Feinabstimmung die Option Reset aus, indem Sie zuerst die Taste ▲ oder ▼ und dann die
Taste ENTERE drücken.
Eine Feinabstimmung ist nur für Analogfernsehgeräte möglich.
Verwenden des Heute & Morgen / Ausführlich
Sie möchten... Dann...
Programm aus der Liste des Programmführers
anzeigen
Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲, ▼, ◄, ► das Programm aus.
Programmführer beenden Drücken Sie die blaue Taste.
Sobald Sie ein Programm gewählt haben, wird es zusammen mit einem Uhr-Symbol angezeigt. Nachdem Sie erneut auf ENTERE
gedrückt haben, drücken Sie auf ◄ oder ►, um die Option Annuler progr., zu wählen. Danach wird die Programmwahl aufgehoben
und das Uhr-Symbol wird entfernt
Programminformationen anzeigen Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲, ▼, ◄, ► das gewünschte Programm aus.
Drücken Sie die Taste INFO, wenn das Programm Ihrer Wahl markiert ist.
Der Programmtitel wird oben in der Mitte des Bildschirms angezeigt.
Klicken Sie auf die Taste INFO, wenn Sie genauere Informationen benötigen. Zu diesen Informationen gehören: Kanalnummer,
Programmdauer, Statusleiste, Kindersicherungsstufe, Bildqualität (HD/SD), Tonmodus, Untertitel oder Teletext, Sprache für Untertitel
oder Teletext sowie Kurzzusammenfassung des markierten Programms. ‘...’ wird ... angezeigt.
Zwischen dem Programmführer Heute & Morgen
oder Ausführlich umzuschalten
Drücken Sie wiederholt die rote Taste.
Im ausführlichen Programmführer
Schnell zurückblättern (24 Stunden).
Schnell weiterblättern (24 Stunden).
Drücken Sie mehrmals die grüne Taste.
Drücken Sie mehrmals die gelbe Taste.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Ausführlich
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Di 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Heute 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Ansehen
INFO Information ■ Akt./Näch ■ +24 Std. ■ Beenden
Heute & Morgen
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Di 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Aktuell Aktuell
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Ansehen
INFO Information ■ Ausführlich ■ Beenden
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:57Deutsch - 11
Verwalten von Kanälen
Mit diesem Menü können Sie Favoriten hinzufügen, löschen oder einstellen und den digitalen
Programmführer für Digitalsendungen verwenden.
Alle Sender
Hiermit zeigen Sie alle verfügbaren Kanäle an.
Hinzugefügte Sender
Hiermit zeigen Sie alle hinzugefügten Kanäle an.
Favorit
Hiermit zeigen Sie alle Favoritenkanäle an.
Durch Drücken der Taste FAV.CH auf der Fernbedienung aufrufen können Sie die eingerichteten Favoritenkanäle auswählen.
Programmiert
Hiermit zeigen Sie alle vorgemerkten Programme an.
Wählen Sie im Fenster Alle Sender, Hinzugefügte Sender oder Favorit einen Kanal. Drücken Sie hierzu die Tasten ▲ / ▼
und die Taste ENTERE. Nun können Sie den gewählten Kanal ansehen.
Verwenden der Farbtasten in Verbindung mit der Kanalliste.
Rot (Sendertyp): Schalten Sie zwischen TV, Radio, Daten / And. und Alle. um.
Grün (Zoom): Hiermit vergrößern oder verkleinern Sie die Kanalnummer.
Gelb (Wählen): Hiermit wählen Sie mehrere Kanallisten aus. Sie können die Funktionen zum Hinzufügen / Löschen /
Hinzufügen zu Favoriten / Löschen aus Favoriten oder Sperren / Freigeben gleichzeitig verwenden. Markieren Sie die
gewünschten Kanäle und drücken Sie die gelbe Taste, um alle markierten Kanäle zugleich einzustellen. Links neben dem
Namen des gewählten Kanals wird das Symbol c angezeigt.
TOOLS (Extras): Hiermit zeigen Sie die Menüs Löschen (oder Hinzufügen), Zu Favoriten hinzufügen (oder
Aus Favoriten löschen), Sperren (oder Freigabe), Timer-Wiedergabe, Sendernamen bearbeiten, Sortieren,
Programmplatz bearbeiten, Alle wählen (oder Alle abwählen), Autom. speichern an.(Der Inhalt des Menüs Optionen
hängt von der jeweiligen Situation ab.)
Symbole zur Anzeige des Kanalstatus
A : Ein analoger Kanal.
c: Ein Kanal, der durch Drücken der gelben Taste gewählt wurde.
* : Ein Kanal, der als Favorit eingestellt ist.
( : Ein Programm, das gerade gesendet wird.
\ : Ein gesperrter Kanal.
) : Ein vorgemerktes Programm
Optionsmenü für Kanallisten (in Alle Sender / Hinzugefügte Sender / Favorit)
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Optionsmenü zu öffnen.
Der Inhalt des Optionsmenüs hängt vom jeweiligen Kanalstatus ab.
Hinzufügen / Löschen
Sie können Kanäle löschen oder hinzufügen, damit nur die gewünschten Kanäle angezeigt
werden.
Alle gelöschten Kanäle werden im Menü Alle Sender angezeigt.
Wenn der Kanal in grauer Farbe dargestellt wird, wurde er gelöscht.
Das Menü Hinzufügen wird nur für gelöschte Kanäle angezeigt.
Sie können einen Kanal aus dem Menü Hinzugefügte Sender oder Favorit in gleicher
Weise löschen.
Zu Favoriten hinzufügen / Aus Favoriten löschen
Sie können Kanäle, die Sie häufig sehen, als Favorit festlegen.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können das Hinzufügen zu (oder Löschen aus) den
Favoriten auch durch Auswählen von Extras → Zu Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen) einstellen.
Das Symbol ‘*’ wird angezeigt, und der Kanal wird als Favorit festgelegt.
Alle Favoritenkanäle werden im Menü Favorit angezeigt.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Hinzugefügte Sender
Alle ■ Sendertyp ■ Zoom ■ Wählen T Extras
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Hinzugefügte Sender
Alle ■ Sendertyp ■ Zoom ■ Wählen T Extras
Löschen
Zu Favoriten hinzufügen
Sperren
Timer-Wiedergabe
Sendernamen bearbeiten
Sortieren
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:57Deutsch - 12
Sperren / Freigabe
Sie können einen Kanal sperren, sodass er nicht ausgewählt und angezeigt werden kann. Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, wenn
die Kindersicherung aktiviert ist (Ein). (siehe Seite 21)
Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet 0-0-0-0. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den
Befehl PIN ändern wählen.
Das Symbol ‘\’ wird angezeigt, und der Kanal wird gesperrt.
Timer-Wiedergabe
Wenn Sie ein Programm zum Anschauen vorgemerkt haben, wechselt das Fernsehgerät automatisch zum vorgemerkten Kanal in
der Kanalliste, auch wenn Sie gerade einen anderen Kanal anschauen. Um ein Programm vorzumerken, müssen Sie zuerst die
Uhrzeit einstellen. (Siehe Seite 19)
Sie können nur gespeicherte Kanäle vormerken.
Sie können Kanal, Tag, Monat, Jahr, Stunde und Minute auch direkt über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen.
Das Vormerken eines Programms wird im Menü Programmiert angezeigt.
Digitaler Programmführer und Vormerken von Sendungen
Wenn Sie einen digitalen Kanal gewählt haben und die Taste ► drücken, wird der Programmführer für diesen Kanal
angezeigt. Gehen Sie in der oben beschriebenen Weise vor, wenn Sie ein Programm vormerken möchten.
Sendernamen bearbeiten (nur Analogkanäle)
Sie können Kanäle mit Beschriftungen versehen, sodass die ersten Buchstaben des Namens immer dann angezeigt werden, wenn
Sie den Kanal wählen.
Die Namen der digitalen Sender werden automatisch zugewiesen und können nicht geändert werden.
Programmplatz bearbeiten (nur Digitalkanäle)
Sie können die Kanalnummer auch mit den Zifferntasten der Fernbedienung einstellen.
Sortieren (nur Analogkanäle)
Mit diesem Vorgang können Sie die Programmnummern gespeicherter Sender ändern. Das ist möglicherweise nach dem
automatischen Speichern von Sendern erforderlich.
Alle wählen / Alle abwählen
Alle wählen: Sie können alle Kanäle in der Kanalliste auswählen.
Alle abwählen: Nun können Sie die Auswahl aller Kanäle aufheben.
Alle abwählen können Sie nur wählen, wenn mindestens ein Kanal gewählt ist.
Autom. speichern
Weitere Informationen zum Einstellen der Optionen finden Sie auf Seite 8.
Wenn ein Kanal mit der Funktion Kindersicherung gesperrt wurde, wird das Eingabefenster für die PIN geöffnet.
Optionsmenü für Kanallisten (Vorgemerkte)
Mit dieser Menüoption können Sie eine Vormerkung anzeigen, ändern oder löschen.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Optionsmenü zu öffnen.
Info ändern
Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu ändern.
Programmierung abbrechen
Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu stornieren.
Information
Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung anzuzeigen. (Sie können auch die
Vormerkinformationen auswählen).
Alle wählen
Wählen Sie alle vorgemerkten Programme.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programmiert Alle ■ Zoom ■ Wählen T Extras E Information
Info ändern
Prog. Löschen
Information
Alle wählen
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:58Deutsch - 13
BILDSTEUERUNG
Konfigurieren des Bildmenüs
Modus
Sie können den Bildstandard auswählen, der für Ihre Sehgewohnheiten am besten geeignet
ist.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den
Bildmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Bildmodus einstellen.
Dynamisch
Wählen Sie diese Option für die Anzeige von hochauflösenden Fernsehbildern bei starker
Umgebungsbeleuchtung aus.
Standard
Wählen Sie diese Option für die optimale Anzeige von Fernsehbildern bei normaler
Umgebungsbeleuchtung aus.
Film
Wählen Sie diese Option für die optimale Anzeige von Filmen in einem abgedunkelten Zimmer.
Hinter.Licht / Kontrast / Helligkeit / Schärfe / Farbe / Farbton (G/R)
Das Gerät verfügt über mehrere Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Bildqualität:
Hinter.Licht: Hiermit stellen Sie die Helligkeit der LCD-Hintergrundbeleuchtung ein.
Kontrast: Hiermit stellen Sie den Kontrast des Bilds ein.
Helligkeit: Hiermit stellen Sie die Helligkeit des Bilds ein.
Schärfe: Hiermit stellen Sie die Kantenauflösung des Bilds ein.
Farbe: Hiermit stellen Sie die Farbsättigung des Bilds ein.
Farbton (G/R): Hiermit stellen Sie die Farbtemperatur ein.
Wählen Sie zuerst einen Bildmodus zum Anpassen. Die eingestellten Werte werden auf jeden Bildmodus angewendet.
Wenn Sie Änderungen an Hinter.Licht, Kontrast, Helligkeit, Schärfe, Farbe oder Farbton (G/R) vornehmen, wird das
Bildschirmmenü entsprechend eingestellt.
Sie können die Funktion Farbton (G/R) im Analogmodus von TV, Ext., AV des PAL-Systems nicht verwenden.
Im PC-Modus können Sie nur Hinter.Licht, Kontrast und Helligkeit einstellen.
Sie können die Einstellungen für jedes externe Gerät festlegen und speichern, das Sie an einen Eingang des Fernsehgeräts
angeschlossen haben.
Die im Betrieb verbrauchte Energiemenge geht deutlich zurück, wenn Sie die Helligkeit des Bildes reduzieren. Damit senken
Sie die Betriebskosten.
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bei den neuen Fernsehgeräten von Samsung können Sie die Bildeinstellungen noch genauer anpassen als mit den früheren
Modellen. Informationen Bildeinstellungen im Einzelnen finden Sie nachfolgend.
Erweiterte Einstellungen stehen in den Modi Standard oder Film zur Verfügung.
Im PC-Modus können von den Erweiterte Einstellungen nur Gamma und Weißabgleich eingestellt werden.
Schwarzton → Aus / Dunkel / Dunkler / Dunkelst
Sie können den Schwarzwert direkt auf dem Bildschirm auswählen, um die Bildschirmtiefe anzupassen.
Optimalkontrast → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch
Sie können den Bildschirmkontrast so anpassen, dass ein optimaler Kontrast gewährleistet ist.
Gamma
Sie können die Intensität der Primärfarbe (Rot, Grün und Blau) einstellen.
Farbraum
Der Farbraum ist eine Farbmatrix bestehend aus den Farben Rot, Grün und Blau. Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Farbraum, um
die Welt in den natürlichsten Farben zu erfahren.
Nativ: Der native Farbraum ermöglicht tiefe und lebhafte Farbtöne.
Auto: Mit dem Farbraum "Auto" wird, je nach Programmquelle, der natürlichste Farbton eingestellt.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Modus : Standard ►
Hinter.Licht : 7
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50 / R50
Bild
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50 / R50
Erweiterte Einstellungen ►
Bildoptionen
Bild zurücksetzen
Bild
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:58Deutsch - 14
Weißabgleich
Um natürlichere Bildfarben zu erhalten, können Sie die Farbtemperatur anpassen.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Sie können die Farbtemperatur in den hellen Bereichen durch
Verändern der Werte für R, G, B. einstellen. Empfohlen nur für erfahrene Benutzer.
Reset: Der zuvor angepasste Weißabgleich wird auf die Werkseinstellungen zurückgesetzt.
Hautton
Sie können im Bild den Farbton Rosa (Fleischfarbe) betonen.
Wenn Sie den Anpassungswert ändern, wird der angepasste Bildschirm aktualisiert.
Kantenglättung → Aus / Ein
Sie können die Objektbegrenzungen im Bild betonen.
Bildoptionen
Im PC-Modus können von den Bildoptionen nur Farbtemp. und Größe eingestellt werden.
Farbtemp. → Kalt / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2
Sie können den für Ihre Augen angenehmsten Farbton auswählen.
Sie können die Einstellungen für jedes externe Gerät festlegen und speichern, das Sie an einen Eingang des Fernsehgeräts
angeschlossen haben.
Warm1 oder Warm2 werden nur aktiviert, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film eingestellt ist.
Größe
Sie können ein Bildformat auswählen, das Ihren Sehgewohnheiten am besten entspricht.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können die Größe durch Auswahl von
Extras → Bildformat einstellen.
Auto Breit: Mit dieser Option stellen Sie das Bildformat automatisch auf das Seitenverhältnis 16:9 ein.
16:9: Wählen Sie diese Option aus, um als Bildformat das Seitenverhältnis 16:9 für DVDs oder Breitbildsendungen
einzustellen.
BreitZoom: Diese Option vergrößert das Bild auf mehr als 4:3.
Zoom: Wählen Sie diese Option aus, um das 16:9-Breitbild auf die volle Bildschirmbreite zu vergrößern.
4:3: Dies ist die Standardeinstellung zum Anzeigen von Videos und herkömmlichen Fernsehsendungen.
Bildschirmanpassung: Mit dieser Funktion wird das ganze Bild auch bei Versorgung mit HDMI- (720p / 1080i) oder
Component-Signalen (1080i) vollständig und ohne Beschneidung angezeigt.
Je nach Signalquelle können die Bildgrößenoptionen variieren.
Die verfügbaren Elemente können in Abhängigkeit vom ausgewählten Modus variieren.
Im PC-Modus können nur die Modi 16:9 und 4:3 eingestellt werden.
Sie können die Einstellungen für jedes externe Gerät festlegen und speichern, das Sie an einen Eingang des Fernsehgeräts
angeschlossen haben.
Es kann zu vorübergehender Bildkonservierung kommen, wenn Sie auf dem Gerät mehr als zwei Stunden lang ein
unbewegten Bild angezeigt haben.
BreitZoom: Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Position, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Mit den
Tasten ▲ oder ▼ können Sie das Bild nach oben oder nach unten verschieben. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
Zoom: Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Position, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Mit der
Taste ▲ oder ▼ können Sie das Bild nach oben oder nach unten verschieben. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Größe, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Drücken Sie die
Tasten ▲ oder ▼, um das Bild in vertikaler Richtung zu vergrößern oder zu verkleinern. Drücken Sie dann die Taste
ENTERE.
Nach Auswahl von Bildschirmanpassung im Modus HDMI (1080i) oder Component (1080i): Wählen Sie durch Drücken der
Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Position. Mit den Tasten ▲, ▼, ◄ oder ► können Sie das Bild verschieben.
Reset: Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Reset, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
Sie können die Einstellung initialisieren.
Wenn Sie die Funktion Bildschirmanpassung zusammen mit einem 720p HDMI-Signal verwenden, wird wie bei Overscan
oben, unten, links und rechts eine Zeile abgeschnitten.
Bildschirmmodus → 16:9 / BreitZoom / Zoom / 4:3
Wenn Sie die Bildgröße bei einem Fernsehgerät im 16:9-Format auf Auto Breit einstellen, können Sie bestimmen, dass das Bild
als 4:3 WSS (Breitbilddienst) oder gar nicht angezeigt werden soll. Da jedes europäische Land eine andere Bildgröße verwendet,
können die Benutzer sie damit einstellen.
16:9: Mit dieser Option stellen Sie das Breitbildformat 16:9 ein.
BreitZoom: Diese Option vergrößert das Bild auf mehr als 4:3.
Zoom: Hiermit vergrößern Sie das Bild vertikal.
4:3: Hiermit stellen Sie das Bildformat auf den Normal-Modus 4:3 ein.
Diese Funktion ist im Modus Auto Breit verfügbar.
Diese Funktion ist im Modus PC, Component oder HDMI nicht verfügbar.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:58Deutsch - 15
Digitale RM → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Auto
Wenn das vom Fernsehgerät empfangene Sendesignal schwach ist, können Sie die digitale Rauschunterdrückung aktivieren, um
ggf. statische Bilder oder Doppelbilder auf dem Bildschirm zu verringern.
Bei schwachem Signal wählen Sie diejenige der anderen Optionen, bei der das beste Bild angezeigt wird.
HDMI-Schwarzp. → Normal / Gering
Sie können direkt auf dem Bildschirm den Schwarzwert auswählen, um die Bildschirmtiefe anzupassen.
Diese Funktion ist nur bei einer Verbindung des externen Eingangs mit HDMI (RGB-Signal) aktiv.
Filmmodus → Aus / Auto
Sie können das Fernsehgerät so einstellen, dass eine Filmsignal aus allen Quellen automatisch empfangen und verarbeitet und
das Bild auf die optimale Qualität eingestellt werden kann.
Filmmodus wird bei TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) und HDMI(480i / 1080i). unterstützt.
Bild zurücksetzen → Bildmodus zurücksetzen / Storno
Setzt alle Bildeinstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.
Wählen Sie zuerst einen Bildmodus zum Zurücksetzen. Die Reset-Funktion wird für jeden Bildmodus durchgeführt.
Bildmodus zurücksetzen: Alle aktuellen Bildwerte werden auf die Standardwerte zurückgesetzt.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Verwenden Ihres Computers als Computerbildschirm (PC)
Konfigurieren Ihrer PC-Software (unter Windows XP)
Im Folgenden sind die typischen Anzeigeeinstellungen für einen Windows-Computer aufgeführt. Die von Ihrem PC angezeigten
Fenster entsprechen je nach installierter Windows-Version und verwendeter Grafikkarte möglicherweise nicht genau der
Abbildung. Dennoch sind die hier nachfolgenden grundlegenden Konfigurationsinformationen in fast allen Fällen anwendbar.
(Wenden Sie sich andernfalls an den Computerhersteller oder Samsung-Händler.)
1. Klicken Sie im Startmenü von Windows auf die Systemsteuerung.
2. Wenn das Fenster der Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Darstellung und Designs”. Ein Dialogfeld wird
geöffnet.
3. Wenn das Fenster der Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Anzeige“. Anschließend wird ein Dialogfeld
angezeigt.
4. Klicken Sie nun im Dialogfeld „Anzeige“ auf die Registerkarte „Einstellungen”.
Stellen Sie die Bildschirmauflösung auf folgenden Wert: Optimal – 1360 x 768 Pixel
Wenn das Dialogfeld eine Option für die Bildschirmfrequenz enthält, muss als Einstellung 60 oder 60 Hz ausgewählt werden.
Andernfalls klicken Sie einfach auf OK, um das Dialogfeld zu schließen.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:58Deutsch - 16
Anzeigemodi
Bildschirmposition und -größe hängen vom Typ des PC-Monitors und seiner Auflösung ab. Bei den in der Tabelle angegebenen
Auflösungen handelt es sich um die empfohlenen Auflösungen.
D-Sub- und HDMI/DVI-Eingang
Modus Auflösung
Horizontalfrequenz
(KHz)
Vertikalfrequenz (Hz) Pixeltakt (MHz)
Synchronisa
tionspolarität
(H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI IN 1(DVI) erfolgen.
Das Zeilensprungverfahren wird nicht unterstützt.
Das Fernsehgerät funktioniert möglicherweise nicht ordnungsgemäß, wenn kein Standardmodus ausgewählt wird.
Separate- und Composite-Modus werden unterstützt. SOG wird nicht unterstützt.
Fernsehgerät mithilfe des PCs einstellen
Voreinstellung: Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE (Quelle), um den Modus „PC“einzustellen.
Autom. Einstellung
Die automatische Einstellung ermöglicht eine automatische Anpassung des PC-Monitors
an das eingehende PC-Videosignal. Die Werte für „fine“, „coarse“ und „position“ werden
automatisch eingestellt.
Diese Funktion ist im DVI-HDMI-Modus nicht verfügbar.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können die
automatische Einstellung durch Auswahl von Extras → Autom. Einstellung durchführen.
PC-Bildschirm
Grob / Fein
Durch das Einstellen der Bildqualität können Bildstörungen und Rauschen beseitigt oder verringert werden. Falls sich Bildrauschen
durch die Feinabstimmung allein nicht beheben lässt, stellen Sie zunächst die Frequenz möglichst genau ein (Grob). Führen
Sie dann erneut eine Feinabstimmung durch. Nachdem Sie das Bildrauschen durch die Grob- und Feinabstimmung des Bildes
verringert haben, stellen Sie die Position des Bildes so ein, dass es auf dem Bildschirm zentriert ist.
PC-Position
Passen Sie die Position des PC-Bilds an, wenn es nicht auf das Fernsehbild passt. Stellen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die
vertikale Position ein. Stellen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die horizontale Position ein.
Bild zurücksetzen
Sie können alle Bildeinstellungen auf die werkseitig eingestellten Ausgangswerte zurücksetzen.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Autom. Einstellung ►
PC-Bildschirm
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bildoptionen
Bild zurücksetzen
Bild
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:58Deutsch - 1
AUDIOSTEUERUNG
Konfigurieren des Tonmenüs
Modus → Standard / Musik / Film / Klare Stimme / Benutzerd.
Sie können einen Audiomodus gemäß Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack einstellen.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den
Tonmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Tonmodus konfigurieren.
Standard
Auswählen des normalen Tonmodus aus.
Musik
Betont die Musik im Verhältnis zu Stimmen.
Film
Ermöglicht optimale Tonwiedergabe für Filme.
Klare Stimme
Betont Stimmen im Verhältnis zu anderen Tönen.
Benutzerd.
Abrufen ihrer benutzerdefinierten Toneinstellungen.
Equalizer
Sie können den Ton Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack anpassen.
Modus
Sie können einen Audiomodus gemäß Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack einstellen.
Balance
Steuert die Balance zwischen dem linken und dem rechten Lautsprecher.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandbreite anpassen)
Zum Einstellen der unterschiedlichen Bandbreitenfrequenzen.
Reset
Setzt die Equalizereinstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.
SRS TruSurround HD → Aus / Ein
SRS TEXT (SRS-Text) ist eine patentierte SRS-Technologie, die das Problem mit der Ausgabe von 5.1-Mehrkanalinhalten
über zwei Lautsprecher löst. Mit TruSurround kommen Sie mit jedem Stereo-System mit zwei Lautsprechern, auch den
internen Gerätelautsprechern, in den Genuss überzeugender Virtual Surround-Effekte. Es ist vollständig kompatibel mit allen
Mehrkanalformaten.
Wiedergabesprache (nur digitale Kanäle)
Sie können die Standardsprache für Audio ändern. Zeigt die Sprachinformationen für den eingehenden Audiostream an.
Sie können nur Sprachen auswählen, die auch tatsächlich übertragen werden.
Während Sie ein digitales Programm anschauen, können Sie diese Funktion auswählen.
Audioformat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (nur digitale Kanäle)
Wenn Sie für die Tonausgabe sowohl den Hauptlautsprecher als auch den Audioreceiver verwenden, kann es aufgrund der
Geschwindigkeitsunterschiede beim Dekodieren durch die beiden Systeme zu einem Echoeffekt kommen. Verwenden Sie in
diesen Fall die TV-Lautsprecher.
Entsprechend dem Sendesignal wird Audioformat angezeigt.
Während Sie ein digitales Programm anschauen, können Sie diese Funktion auswählen.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Modus : Benutzerd. ►
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Aus
Wiedergabesprache : - - -
Audioformat : - - -
Audio für Sehgeschädigte
Auto. Lautst. : Aus
Ton
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:58Deutsch - 18
Audio für Sehgeschädigte (nur Digitalkanäle)
Dies ist eine zusätzliche Audiofunktion, mit der für sehbehinderte Personen eine zusätzliche Tonspur wiedergegeben wird.
Diese Funktion verarbeitet den Audiostream für die AB (Audio-Beschreibung), sofern diese vom Sender zusammen mit dem
Vordergrundton übertragen wird. Der Benutzer kann die Audio-Beschreibung aktivieren oder deaktivieren und die Lautstärke
einstellen.
Drücken Sie die Taste AD auf der Fernbedienung, um Aus oder Ein zu wählen.
Audio für Sehgeschädigte → Aus / Ein
Hiermit schalten Sie die Funktion für Audiobeschreibungen ein und aus.
Lautstärke
Hiermit stellen Sie die Lautstärke der Audiobeschreibungen ein.
Lautstärke ist aktiv, wenn Audio für Sehgeschädigte aktiviert Ein ist.
Auto. Lautst. → Aus / Ein
Aufgrund unterschiedlicher Signalbedingungen unterscheiden sich Fernsehsender in der Lautstärke, so dass es erforderlich
sein kann, die Lautstärke beim Umschalten zwischen Sendern jedes Mal nachzuregeln. Mit der Funktion für automatische
Lautstärkeeinstellung wird die Lautstärke automatisch bei starkem Modulationssignal verringert und bei schwachem
Modulationssignal erhöht.
Lautsprecher auswählen → Ext. Lautsprecher / TV-Lautsprecher
Wenn Sie den Ton über separate Lautsprecher hören möchten, deaktivieren Sie den internen Verstärker.
Die Lautstärketasten und MUTE sind deaktiviert, wenn Lautsprecher auswählen auf Ext. Lautsprecher geschaltet ist.
Wenn Sie im Menü Lautsprecher auswählen die Option Ext. Lautsprecher wählen, werden die Audioeinstellungen
eingeschränkt.
Ton zurücksetzen → Alle zurücksetzen / Ton-Modus reset / Abbrechen
Sie können alle Audioeinstellungen wieder auf die Werkseinstellungen zurücksetzen.
Tonmodus wählen
Sie können den Tonwiedergabemodus im Menü Extras wählen. Wenn Sie Dual l ll einstellen, wird der aktuelle
Tonwiedergabemodus auf dem Bildschirm abgebildet.
Audiosystem Dual 1/2 Standard
A2-Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatischer Wechsel
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAMStereo
Mono MONO
Automatischer Wechsel
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Falls das Stereosignal schwach ist und automatisch umgeschaltet wird, sollten Sie zu mono wechseln.
Diese Funktion ist nur bei einem Stereosignal aktiviert. Bei Monosignalen ist es deaktiviert.
Diese Funktion ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:59Deutsch - 19
EINSTELLUNGEN
Konfigurieren der Menüeinstellungen
Menüsprache
Sie können die Menüsprache festlegen.
Zeit
Uhr
Die Uhr muss eingestellt werden, damit Sie die verschiedenen Timerfunktionen des
Fernsehgeräts verwenden können.
Jedes Mal, wenn Sie die Taste INFO drücken, wird die aktuelle Zeit angezeigt.
Wenn Sie das Netzkabel ziehen, müssen Sie die Uhr erneut einstellen.
Uhr-Modus
Sie können die aktuelle Zeit manuell oder automatisch einstellen.
Auto: Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit automatisch anhand der Zeit aus der digitalen Übertragung ein.
Manuell: Hiermit stellen Sie die aktuelle Zeit auf einen manuell eingestellten Wert ein.
Je nach Sendestation und Signal erfolgt die automatische Zeiteinstellung möglicherweise nicht korrekt. In diesem Fall
müssen Sie die Zeit manuell einstellen.
Der Antennen- oder Kabelanschluss muss vorhanden sein, um die Zeit automatisch einzustellen.
Zeit einstellen
Sie können die aktuelle Zeit manuell einstellen.
Konfigurieren Sie diese Option, nachdem Sie Uhr-Modus auf Manuell eingestellt haben.
Sie können Tag, Monat, Jahr, Stunde und Minute auch direkt über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen.
Sleep-Timer → Aus / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
Der Sleep-Timer schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch nach einer eingestellten Zeit (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 Minuten) aus.
Wenn die eingestellte Zeit abgelaufen ist, schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch in den Standby-Modus.
Um die Sleep-Timer-Funktion abzubrechen, wählen Sie Aus.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den Sleep-Timer durch Auswahl von Extras →
Sleep-Timer einstellen.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Sie können drei verschiedene Einstellungen für den Ein-/Ausschalttimer vornehmen. Voraussetzung dafür ist, dass Sie die Uhr
gestellt haben.
Anschaltzeit: Stellen Sie Stunde, Minute ein und aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie die Funktion. (Nachdem Sie die
gewünschten Einstellungen vorgenommen haben, aktivieren Sie den Timer, mit Aktivieren)
Ausschaltzeit: Stellen Sie Stunde, Minute ein und aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie die Funktion. (Nachdem Sie die
gewünschten Einstellungen vorgenommen haben, aktivieren Sie den Timer, mit Aktivieren)
Lautstärke: Stellen Sie die gewünschte Einschaltlautstärke ein.
TV-Empfang: Wählen Sie Terrestrisch oder Kabel.
Sender: Wählen Sie den gewünschten Kanal.
Wiederholmodus: Wählen Sie Einmal, Täglich, Mo~Fr, Mo~Sa, Sa~So oder Manuell.
Wenn Manuell gewählt ist, drücken Sie die Taste ►, um den gewünschten Wochentag einzustellen. Drücken Sie die
Taste ENTERE, wenn der gewünschte Tag markiert ist, und das Symbol c wird angezeigt.
Sie können die Stunden, Minuten und den Kanal auch über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen.
Automatisch Ausschalten
Wenn Sie den Timer aktivieren, schaltet sich das Fernsehgerät drei Stunden nach dem Einschalten durch den Timer ab,
wenn in dieser Zeit keine Funktionen verwendet wurden Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, wenn der Timer aktiviert ist, und sie
verhindert Schäden durch Überhitzung, wenn das Fernsehgerät zu lange eingeschaltet ist.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Menüsprache : Deutsch ►
Zeit
Sendungsoptionen
Sicherheit
Allgemein
Einstellungen
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:59Deutsch - 20
Sendungsoptionen
Untertitel
Sie können Untertitel aktivieren und deaktivieren. Mit diesem Menü legen Sie den Untertitelmodus fest. Die Menüoption Normal ist
die Grundeinstellung für Untertitel, und die Option Schwerhörig ist für hörgeschädigte Personen bestimmt.
Untertitel → Aus / Ein: Hiermit können Sie Untertitel aktivieren oder deaktivieren.
Modus → Normal / Schwerhörig: Hiermit können Sie den Untertitelmodus festlegen.
Untertitelsprache: Hiermit können Sie die Untertitelsprache festlegen.
Wenn das Programm, das Sie gerade sehen, die Funktion Schwerhörig nicht unterstützt, wird selbst im Modus Schwerhörig
automatisch Normal aktiviert.
Englisch ist der Standardwert in Fällen, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die Sendung nicht verfügbar ist.
Sie können diese Optionen auswählen, indem Sie einfach die Taste SUBT. auf der Fernbedienung drücken.
Digitaltext → Deaktivieren / Aktivieren (nur Großbritannien)
Wenn das Programm mit Digitaltext gesendet wird, ist diese Funktion aktiviert.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Ein internationaler Standard für Datenkompressionssysteme für Multimedia- und Hypermedia-Anwendungen. Dies ist ein
höheres Niveau als das MPEG-System, das solche datenverknüpfenden Hypertextmedien wie Standbilder, Zeichendienst,
Animations-, Grafik- und Videodateien sowie Multimediadateien umfasst. MHEG ist eine Technologie für Laufzeitinteraktion
mit dem Benutzer, und sie wird auf verschiedenen Gebieten verwendet, z. B. VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV),
EC (Electronic Commerce), Teleweiterbildung, Telekonferenzen, digitale Bibliotheken und Netzwerkspiele.
Teletextsprache
Sie können die Videotextsprache durch Auswählen des Sprachtyps einstellen.
Englisch ist der Standardwert in Fällen, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die Sendung nicht verfügbar ist.
Voreinstellung
Primäre Audiosprache / Sekundäre Audiosprache / Primäre Untertitelsprache / Sekundäre Untertitelsprache /
Primäre Videotextsprache / Sekundäre Videotextsprache
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie eine der verfügbaren Sprachen wählen. Die hier gewählte Sprache ist die Standardsprache,
wenn der Benutzer einen Kanal auswählt.
Wenn Sie die Spracheinstellung ändern, werden die Untertitelsprache, die Audiosprache und die Videotextsprache im Menü
‘Sprache’ automatisch in die gewünschte Sprache geändert.
Mit den Untermenüs für die Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Videotextsprache im Menü ‘Sprache’ zeigen Sie eine
Liste der vom aktuellen Kanal unterstützten Sprachen an, und die aktuelle Auswahl wird hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die
Spracheinstellung ändern, gilt die neue Auswahl nur für den aktuellen Kanal. Die geänderte Einstellung hat keinen Einfluss auf
die Einstellung der Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Teletext-Sprache im Menü ‘Voreinstellung’.
Common Interface
CI-Menü
Hiermit kann der Benutzer seine Auswahl in dem vom CAM-Modul bereitgestellten Menü treffen. Wählen Sie das CI-Menü
ausgehend vom Menü ‘PC Card’.
Anwendungsinformationen
Die folgenden Erklärungen gelten für den Fall, dass ein CAM-Modul in den CI-Schlitz gesteckt ist und angezeigt wird.
In den Anwendungsinformationen wird die CI-Karte beschrieben. Sie können das CAM-Modul unabhängig davon
anschließen, ob das Fernsehgerät angeschaltet ist oder nicht.
1. Sie können das CI-CAM-Modul bei Ihrem nächsten Händler oder durch telefonische Bestellung erwerben.
2. Schieben Sie die CI-Karte in Richtung des Pfeils in das CAM-Modul ein, bis sie fest sitzt.
3. Schieben Sie das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI-Karte in den CI-Steckplatz (Common Interface) hinein.
(Schieben Sie das CAM-Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis zum Anschlag, sodass es parallel mit dem Steckplatz ist.)
4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob Sie ein Bild sehen oder ein gestörtes Signal.
Zugangsmodule werden in einigen Ländern und Regionen nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie diesbezüglich Ihren offiziellen
Samsung-Händler.
❑
■
●
●
●
N
N
O
■
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:59Deutsch - 21
Sicherheit
Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur Eingabe der PIN geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet 0-0-0-0. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl
PIN ändern wählen.
Kindersicherung → Aus / Ein
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie nicht autorisierte Benutzer, z. B. Kinder, daran hindern ungeeignete Programme anzuschauen,
indem das Bild blockiert und der Ton stummgeschaltet wird.
Sie können einige der Kanäle in der Kanalliste sperren. (Informationen hierzu finden Sie auf Seite 12.)
Kindersicherung ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar.
Sicherungsstufe
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie nicht autorisierte Benutzer, z. B. Kinder, daran hindern, ungeeignete Programme anzuschauen.
Hierzu verwenden Sie eine benutzerdefinierte vierstellige PIN.
Die für Sicherungsstufe verfügbaren Elemente können in Abhängigkeit vom jeweiligen Land variieren.
Nachdem Sicherungsstufe eingestellt wurde, wird das Symbol ‘\’ angezeigt.
Alle zul.: Drücken Sie diese Taste, um alle Altersbeschränkungen aufzuheben.
Keine zul.: Drücken Sie diese Taste, um alle Altersbeschränkungen zu aktivieren.
PIN ändern
Sie können Ihre zum Einrichten des Fernsehgeräts benötigte persönliche Kennnummer ändern.
Wenn Sie den PIN-Code vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstasten in der angegebenen Reihenfolge, um die
PIN auf 0-0-0-0 zurückzusetzen: POWER (Aus) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Ei).
Allgemein
Spielemodus → Aus / Ein
Wenn Sie eine Spielekonsole wie PlayStation™ oder Xbox™ anschließen, können Sie durch Auswählen des Spielemenüs ein
realistischeres Spielerlebnis.
Wenn Sie die Spielekonsole wieder vom Gerät trennen und ein anderes externes Gerät anschließen, beenden Sie den
Spielemodus über das Einstellungsmenü.
Wenn Sie im Spielemodus das TV-Menü anzeigen, zittert das Bild leicht.
Spielemodus ist im normalen TV- und PC-Modus nicht verfügbar.
Wenn der Spielemodus aktiviert ist:
Der Bildmodus wird automatisch auf Standard eingestellt und kann vom Benutzer nicht geändert werden.
Der Bildmodus wird automatisch auf Benutzerd. eingestellt und kann vom Benutzer nicht geändert werden. Passen Sie
den Ton unter Verwendung des Equalizers an.
Die Funktion zum Zurücksetzen der Audioeinstellungen ist aktiviert. Durch Auswählen der Reset-Funktion nach dem Einstellen
des Equalizers wird die Equalizer-Einstellung auf die Werkseinstellungen zurückgesetzt.
Energiesparmod. → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Bild aus / Auto
Mit dieser Funktion stellen Sie die Helligkeit des Fernsehgeräts ein, um den Stromverbrauch zu senken. Wenn Sie nachts
fernsehen, stellen Sie Energiesparmod. auf Hoch ein, um sowohl die Augenermüdung als auch den Stromverbrauch zu senken.
Wenn Sie Bild aus wählen, wird der Bildschirm abgeschaltet und Sie können nur noch den Ton hören. Drücken Sie eine beliebige
Taste, um Bild aus zu beenden.
Im Menü Tools wird die Funktion Bild aus nicht unterstützt.
Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können zudem die Energiesparoption durch Auswahl
von Extras→ Energiesparmod. anpassen.
Melodie → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch
Es kann eine Melodie abgespielt werden, wenn der Bildschirm an- oder ausgeschaltet wird.
Die Melodie wird nicht abgespielt.
Das Fernsehgerät gibt keinen Ton aus, weil die MUTE-Taste gedrückt wurde.
Das Fernsehgerät gibt keinen Ton aus, weil die Lautstärketaste (–) gedrückt wurde.
Das Fernsehgerät wurde mit dem Sleep-Timer ausgeschaltet.
❑
N
N
■
N
N
N
N
❑
■
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
■
N
T
■
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:59Deutsch - 22
EINGANG / UNTERSTÜTZUNG
Konfigurieren des Signalquellenmenüs
Quellen
Hiermit wählen Sie, ob das Fernsehgerät mit einem Fernsehsignal versorgt wird oder
an andere externe Signaleingänge wie z. B. DVD- bzw. Blu-ray-Player oder an einen
Satellitenreceiver (Set-Top Box) angeschlossen ist. Stellen Sie die gewünschte Signalquelle
ein.
Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung, um eine externe Signalquelle
anzuzeigen. Stellen Sie mit der TV-Taste den TV-Modus ein.
TV / Ext. / AV / Komp./ PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
Sie können nur solche externen Geräte wählen, die an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen
sind. Bei Quellen werden die angeschlossenen Signalquellen hervorgehoben und am
Anfang dargestellt. Nicht angeschlossene Signalquellen werden am Ende der Liste dargestellt.
Ext. und PC bleiben immer aktiviert.
TOOLS (Extras): Anzeigen der Menüs Name bearb. und Information.
Name bearb.
Vergeben Sie Namen für die an die Eingangsbuchsen angeschlossenen Geräte, um die Auswahl der Signalquelle zu vereinfachen.
VCR / DVD / Kabel-STB / Sat-STB / PVR-STB / AV-Receiver / Spiel / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu- ray /
HD DVD / DMA
Wenn Sie ein HDMI/DVI-Kabel mit dem HDMI IN 1(DVI)-Anschluss verbinden, stellen Sie den HDMI1/DVI-Modus im Bereich
Name bearb. des Modus Eingang auf DVI oder DVI PC. In diesem Fall ist ein gesonderter Audioanschluss erforderlich.
Konfigurieren des Supportmenü
Eigendiagnose
Bildtest
Bei schlechter Bildqualität führen Sie einen Bildtest durch. Prüfen Sie das bunte Testbild auf
dem Bildschirm um festzustellen, ob das Problem weiterhin besteht.
Ja: Wenn das Testbild nicht angezeigt wird oder wenn es verrauscht ist, wählen Sie Ja.
Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit dem Fernsehgerät vor. Hilfe erhalten Sie beim
Callcenter von Samsung.
Nein: Wenn das Testbild fehlerlos angezeigt wird, wählen Sie Nein. Möglicherweise liegt
ein Problem mit Ihrer Haustechnik vor. Bitte überprüfen Sie sämtliche Anschlüsse noch
einmal. Wenn das Problem weiterhin besteht, schlagen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch für das
externe Gerät nach.
Audiotest
Bei schlechter Tonqualität führen Sie einen Audiotest durch. Sie können die Tonqualität kontrollieren, indem Sie über den
Fernseher ein im Gerät gespeicherte Melodie abspielen. Die Meldung "Besteht das Problem für diesen Audiotest weiterhin?" wird
angezeigt.
Wenn die Fernsehlautsprecher keinen Ton ausgeben, müssen Sie vor dem Audiotest sicherstellen, dass Lautsprecher
auswählen im Audiomenü auf TV-Lautsprecher eingestellt ist.
Die Melodie ist im Test auch dann zu hören, wenn Lautsprecher auswählen auf Ext. Lautsprecher eingestellt ist, oder wenn
der Ton mit der Taste MUTE stumm geschaltet wurde.
Ja: Wenn Sie den Ton beim Test nur durch einen Lautsprecher oder gar nicht hören, wählen Sie Ja. Möglicherweise liegt ein
Problem mit dem Fernsehgerät vor. Hilfe erhalten Sie beim Callcenter von Samsung.
Nein: Wenn Sie den Ton über die Lautsprecher hören können, wählen Sie Nein. Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit Ihrer
Haustechnik vor. Bitte überprüfen Sie sämtliche Anschlüsse noch einmal. Wenn das Problem weiterhin besteht, schlagen Sie
im Benutzerhandbuch für das externe Gerät nach.
Signalinformation (nur Digitalkanäle)
Im Gegensatz zu analogen Kanälen, deren Empfangsqualität von "verregnet" bis ungestört variieren kann, zeichnen sich digitale
Kanäle (HDTV) dadurch aus, dass sie entweder perfekte Empfangsqualität bieten oder gar keinen Empfang ermöglichen. Deshalb
können Sie anders als bei Analogkanälen keine Feinabstimmung vornehmen. Sie können aber Ihre Antenne so einstellen, dass
der Empfang der verfügbaren Digitalkanäle besser wird.
Wenn die Signalstärkeanzeige ein schwaches Signal anzeigt, verändern Sie die Position Ihre Antenne so, dass die
Signalstärke zunimmt. Machen Sie dies solange, bis Sie die optionale Ausrichtung mit dem stärksten Signal gefunden haben.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Eigendiagnose ►
Software-Update
HD-Anschlussplan
Samsung kontaktieren
Unterstützung
Quellen
Name bearb.
Eingang
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:30:59Deutsch - 23
Software-Update
Damit Ihr Produkt stets mit den neuesten Funktionen des Digitalfernsehens ausgerüstet
ist, werden zusammen mit dem normalen TV-Signal regelmäßig Softwareaktualisierungen
übertragen. Das Gerät erkennt diese Signale automatisch und zeigt einen Hinweis auf die
Softwareaktualisierung an. Sie haben die Wahl, ob die Aktualisierung installiert werden soll.
PER USB
Legen Sie ein USB-Laufwerk mit dem gespeicherten Firmwareupgrade in das Fernsehgerät
ein. Achten Sie beim Einspielen des Upgrades darauf, die Stromversorgung nicht zu
unterbrechen und das USB-Laufwerk nicht zu entfernen. Das Fernsehgerät wird automatisch
ab- und wieder angeschaltet, sobald das Firmwareupgrade abgeschlossen ist. Kontrollieren
Sie die Firmwareversion, wenn das Update abgeschlossen ist. Nachdem die Software aktualisiert wurde, sind die Video- und
Audioeinstellungen wieder auf die werkseitigen Standardwerte zurückgesetzt.
Wir empfehlen, diese Werte aufzuschreiben, damit Sie sie nach dem Upgrade einfach wieder einstellen können.
PER Channel
Aktualisierung der Software über das Sendesignal.
Wenn Sie diese Funktion während des Übertragungszeitraums für Software wählen, sucht die Funktion nach verfügbarer
Software und lädt sie herunter.
Die zum Herunterladen der Software erforderliche Zeit hängt vom Signalstatus ab.
Update im Standby
Um die Softwareaktualisierung mit eingeschaltetem Hauptnetz fortzusetzen, wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ „Ein“ aus. 45
Minuten nach Beginn des Standbymodus wird die manuelle Aktualisierung automatisch ausgeführt. Da intern die Stromversorgung
für das Gerät eingeschaltet ist, kann der LCD-Bildschirm leicht beleuchtet sein. Dieser Zustand kann etwas mehr als eine Stunde
andauern, bis die Softwareaktualisierung abgeschlossen ist.
Alternative Software
So zeigen Sie die Informationen zur Softwareversion an.
HD-Anschlussplan
In diesem Menü wird die Verbindungsmethode für optimale HDTV-Qualität vorgeschlagen.
Beachten Sie diese Informationen, wenn Sie externe Geräte an den Fernseher anschließen.
Samsung kontaktieren
Zeigen Sie diese Informationen an, wenn Ihr Fernseher nicht ordnungsgemäß arbeitet oder wenn Sie die Software aktualisieren
möchten.
Sie finden hier Informationen zum Callcenter, zum Gerät und zum Herunterladen der Softwaredateien.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
USB-Laufwerk
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:00Deutsch - 24
EMPFEHLUNGEN FÜR DEN BETRIEB
Videotextfunktion
Die meisten Fernsehsender bieten über Videotext Informationen an. Auf der Videotext-Indexseite finden Sie Verwendungshinweise
zum Videotext. Darüber hinaus können Sie über die Tasten der Fernbedienung nach Bedarf verschiedene Optionen einstellen.
Für die korrekte Anzeige von Videotextinformationen muss der Senderempfang einwandfrei sein. Andernfalls können
Informationen unvollständig sein oder einige Seiten nicht angezeigt werden.
Sie können die Videotextseiten durch Drücken der Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung wechseln.
1 0 (Modus)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den
Videotextmodus auszuwählen
(LISTE/FLOF) Wenn Sie diese Taste im
Modus LIST (Liste) drücken, wird in den
Listenspeichermodus umgeschaltet. Im
Listenspeichermodus können Sie mit der
Taste 8 (speichern) Videotextseiten in
einer Liste speichern.
2 5 (Anzeigen)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um
verborgenen Text anzuzeigen (z. B.
Antworten bei Quizsendungen). Drücken
Sie die Taste erneut, um den Videotext
auszublenden.
3 4 (Größe)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um Videotext
in doppelt so großen Buchstaben in
der oberen Hälfte des Bildschirms
anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie die Taste
erneut, um den Text in der unteren
Hälfte des Bildschirms anzuzeigen. Zum
Ausblenden des Videotextes drücken
Sie die Taste erneut.
4 8 (Speichern)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um
Videotextseiten zu speichern.
5 Farbtasten (rot/grün/gelb/blau)
Wenn der Sender das FASTEXT-System
verwendet, sind die verschiedenen
Themen auf den Videotextseiten farbig
gekennzeichnet und können mit den
Farbtasten auf der Fernbedienung
angewählt werden. Drücken Sie die
Farbtaste, die dem Thema entspricht,
das Sie anzeigen möchten. Die Seite
wird mit anderen farbig markierten
Informationen angezeigt, die auf
dieselbe Art ausgewählt werden
können. Drücken Sie die entsprechende
Farbtaste, um die vorherige oder
nächste Seite anzuzeigen.
6/ (Videotext an/mix)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den
Videotextmodus zu aktivieren, nachdem
Sie einen Sender ausgewählt haben, der
Videotext anbietet. Drücken Sie die Taste
zweimal, um die Videotextinformationen
gleichzeitig mit der aktuellen Sendung auf
dem Bildschirm einzublenden.
7 : (Ende)
Videotext beenden
8 1 (Unterseite)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um eine
verfügbare untergeordnete Seite
anzuzeigen.
9 2 (Weiterblättern)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die nächste
Videotextseite anzuzeigen.
0 3 (Zurückblättern)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die
vorherige Videotextseite anzuzeigen.
! 9 (Nicht blättern)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um bei einer
angezeigten Seite, die mit weiteren,
untergeordnete Seiten verknüpft ist, das
automatische Umblättern zu verhindern.
Drücken Sie zum Fortfahren die Taste
erneut.
@ 6 (Inhalt)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die
Videotext-Indexseite (Inhaltsverzeichnis)
anzuzeigen.
# 7 (Abbrechen)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um beim
Suchen nach einer Seite die Sendung
anzuzeigen.
Die Videotextseiten sind in sechs Kategorien unterteilt:
Sportergebnisse Inhalt
A Gewählte Seitennummer
B Senderkennung
C Aktuelle Seitenzahl oder Suchhinweise
D Datum und Uhrzeit
E Text
F Statusinformation
FASTEXT-Informationen
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:00Deutsch - 25
Videotextinformationen sind oft auf mehrere, aufeinander folgende Seiten verteilt, die wie folgt aufgerufen werden können:
Eingabe der Seitennummer
Auswahl eines Titels in einer Liste
Auswahl einer farbigen Überschrift (FASTEXT-System)
Das Fernsehgerät unterstützt Videotext Version 2.5. Damit können zusätzlich Graphik oder Text angezeigt werden.
Je nach Übertragungsmodus können bei der Anzeige von Videotext am linken und rechten Rand Leerbereiche vorkommen.
In diesem Fall wird keine zusätzliche Graphik oder Text übertragen.
Ältere Fernsehgeräte, die Version 2.5 nicht unterstützen, können zusätzliche Graphiken oder Texte unabhängig vom Modus
der Videotextübertragung nicht anzeigen.
Drücken Sie die Taste TV, um Videotext zu beenden.
Teletext 16:9, Bild im Format 16:9
Anbringen des Standfußes
Voreinstellung: Stellen Sie die Leitschiene und die Halterungsabdeckung auf den
Standfuß, und befestigen Sie diese mit den Schrauben. Nur für 32-Zoll-Modelle.
N
1. Verbinden Sie Ihren LCD-Fernseher mit dem Standfuß.
Der Plasmafernseher sollte von mindestens zwei Personen getragen werden.
Verwechseln Sie beim Zusammenbauen nicht die Vorder- und Rückseite des
Standfußes.
Damit sichergestellt ist, dass das Fernsehgerät auf richtiger Höhe mit dem Standfuß
verbunden wird, dürfen Sie oben links und rechts nicht zu stark auf den Fernseher
drücken.
2. Ziehen Sie zuerst die beiden Schrauben an Position 1 und dann die beiden Schrauben
an Position 2.
Stellen Sie das Gerät aufrecht hin und ziehen Sie die Schrauben fest. Wenn Sie die
Schrauben festziehen, während der LCD-Fernseher liegt, kann es passieren, dass er
seitlich geneigt ist.
N
N
N
N
Anbringen der Wandhalterung
Mit der separat erhältlichen Wandhalterung können Sie das Fernsehgerät an einer Wand
befestigen.
Detaillierte Informationen zum Montieren der Wandhalterung finden Sie in den Anweisungen,
die im Lieferumfang der Wandhalterung enthalten sind. Lassen Sie sich beim Anbringen der
Wandmontagehalterung von einem Techniker helfen.
Samsung Electronics haftet nicht für Schäden an Gerät oder Personen, wenn die Montage
vom Kunden selbst durchgeführt wird.
Installieren Sie die Wandhalterung nicht bei angeschaltetem Fernsehgerät. Sie könnten
dabei einen Stromschlag erhalten und sich verletzen.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Rückseite
Vorderseite
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:01Deutsch - 26
Kensington-Schloss als Diebstahlsicherung
Ein Kensington-Schloss dient zur physischen Sicherung des Systems bei Verwendung in
öffentlichen Bereichen. Je nach Hersteller können Aussehen und Verriegelungsverfahren
von der Abbildung abweichen. Informationen zur richtigen Anwendung entnehmen Sie bitte
der Bedienungsanleitung des Kensington-Schlosses. Das Schloss muss separat erworben
werden. Die Position des Kensington-Schlosses ist modellabhängig.
1. "Führen Sie das Schloss in den Kensington-Einschub am LCD-Fernseher ein (1), und
drehen Sie es in die Verriegelungsposition (2).
2. Schließen Sie das Kabel für das Kensington-Schloss an (3).
3. Befestigen Sie das Kensington-Schloss an einem Tisch oder einem schweren
feststehenden Objekt.
3
1
2
Absichern des Einbaubereichs
Halten Sie die erforderlichen Abstände zwischen dem Gerät und anderen Objekten (z.B. Wänden) ein, um ausreichende Lüftung
sicherzustellen.
Wenn Sie dies nicht tun, besteht die Gefahr, dass aufgrund eines Anstiegs der Temperatur im Innern des Geräts ein Brand
ausbricht oder andere Probleme mit dem Gerät auftreten.
Stellen Sie das Gerät so auf, dass die in der Abbildung gezeigten Mindestabstände eingehalten werden.
Verwenden Sie nur Teile von Samsung Electronics, wenn Sie einen Standfuß oder eine Wandhalterung einsetzen.
Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu Verletzungen
kommen, weil das Gerät herunterfällt.
Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu einem Brand
kommen, weil die Innentemperatur aufgrund schlechter Belüftung des Geräts ansteigt.
Das Aussehen kann sich je nach Gerät unterscheiden.
Aufstellen des Geräts mit dem Standfuß Installieren des Geräts mit einer Wandhalterung
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:01Deutsch - 2
Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand
Achtung: Das Fernsehgerät kann hinfallen, wenn Sie daran ziehen, es schieben oder darauf klettern. Stellen
Sie insbesondere sicher, dass sich keine Kinder an das Gerät hängen oder es aus dem Gleichgewicht bringen.
Anderenfalls könnte das Gerät umkippen und schwere Verletzungen oder den Tod verursachen. Beachten
Sie alle Anweisungen der beigefügten Sicherheitshinweise. Noch mehr Stabilität erreichen Sie, wenn Sie den
Kippschutz installieren. Gehen Sie hierzu folgendermaßen vor.
So verhindern Sie, dass das Fernsehgerät umkippt:
1. Stecken Sie die Schrauben durch die Halterungen und befestigen Sie sie fest an der
Wand. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Schrauben gut halten.
Je nach Ausführung der Wand benötigen Sie zum Befestigen weiteres Material, wie
z. B. einen Dübel.
Da die benötigten Halterungen, Schrauben und das Band nicht zum Lieferumfang
gehören, müssen Sie diese Teile gesondert erwerben.
2. Entfernen Sie die Schrauben in der Mitte auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts. Setzen
Sie diese Schrauben in die Halterungen ein und befestigen Sie die Schrauben dann
wieder am Fernsehgerät.
Die Schrauben werden möglicherweise nicht zusammen mit dem Gerät geliefert.
Kaufen Sie in diesem Fall Schrauben entsprechend den folgenden Angaben.
Daten der Schrauben
Für LCD-Fernsehgeräte von 17 – 29 Zoll: M4 X L15
Für LCD-Fernsehgeräte von 32 – 40 Zoll: M6 X L15
3. Verbinden Sie die Halterungen an der Wand und die Halterung am Fernsehgerät mit
einem festen Band miteinander und ziehen Sie das Band dann fest.
Stellen Sie das Fernsehgerät in der Nähe der Wand auf, damit es nicht nach hinten
kippen kann.
Es ist noch sicherer, wenn die Halterungen an der Wand niedriger als die
Halterungen am Fernsehgerät sind.
Lösen Sie das Band, ehe Sie den Fernsehapparat bewegen.
4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob alle Anschlüsse weiterhin fest verbunden sind. Prüfen Sie
regelmäßig die Verbindungen auf Zeichen von Ermüdung oder Versagen. Bei Zweifeln
hinsichtlich der Sicherheit Ihrer Halterung wenden Sie sich an einen professionellen
Installationsbetrieb.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Wand
Wand
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:02Deutsch - 28
Fehlerbehebung
Bei Fragen zum Fernsehen schauen Sie zuerst in dieser Liste nach. Wenn keiner dieser Tipps zur Fehlerbehebung weiterhilft,
öffnen Sie die Website 'www.samsung.com' und klicken Sie dort auf Unterstützung oder wenden Sie sich an das in der Liste auf
der letzten Seite angegebene Callcenter.
Problem Lösung
Bildqualität
Führen Sie zu allererst den Bildtest durch, um zu bestätigen, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät das
Testbild korrekt anzeigt.
Wechseln Sie zu MENU - Unterstützung - Eigendiagnose - Bildtest
Wenn das Testbild richtig angezeigt wird, kann das schlechte Bild möglicherweise durch die
Signalquelle oder das Signal verursacht sein.
●
Das Fernsehbild sieht nicht so
gut wie im Geschäft aus.
Wenn Sie einen analogen Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver verwenden, rüsten Sie diesen auf.
Verwenden Sie HDMI- oder Komponentenkabel, um HD Bildqualität zu ermöglichen.
Kabel-/Satellitenanschluss: Probieren Sie HD-Sender (HD, mit hoher Auflösung) aus der Kanalliste.
Antennenanschluss: Probieren Sie HD-Sender, nachdem Sie die Autoprogrammierung
durchgeführt haben.
Viele HD-Kanäle senden aufbereitete SD-Inhalte (Standardauflösung).
Stellen Sie den Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver auf eine Bildauflösung von 1080i oder 720p ein.
Überprüfen Sie, ob Sie beim Fernsehen den Mindestabstand entsprechend der Größe
des Fernsehers und der Auflösung des angezeigten Signals einhalten.
●
●
●
N
●
●
Das Bild ist verzerrt: Große
und kleine Blöcke, Punkte,
Pixelfehler
Durch die Kompression der Videoinhalte kann es zu Bildverzerrungen kommen,
insbesondere bei schnellen Bildern wie bei Sportsendungen und Actionfilmen.
Ein niedriger Signalpegel oder schlechte Qualität kann Bildverzerrungen verursachen.
Das ist kein Problem des Fernsehgeräts.
●
●
Falsche oder fehlende Farbe
bei Komponentenanschluss.
Vergewissern Sie sich, ob die Komponentenkabel mit den richtigen Anschlüssen
verbunden sind. Falsche oder lose Kontakte können Farbprobleme verursachen oder
dazu führen, dass auf dem Bildschirm gar kein Bild angezeigt wird.
●
Schlechte Farbwiedergabe
oder Helligkeit.
Stellen Sie die Bild-Optionen im Fernsehmenü ein. (Bild-Modus, Farbe, Helligkeit, Schärfe)
Stellen Sie die Energiesparmod.-Option im Einstellungen -Menü ein.
Versuchen Sie, die Grundstellung für das Bild wieder herzustellen, damit die
Standardbildeinstellungen verwendet werden. (Wechseln Sie zu MENU - Bild -
Bild zurücksetzen)
●
●
●
Gepunktete Linie am
Bildschirmrand.
Wenn die Bildgröße auf Bildschirmanpassung eingestellt ist, ändern Sie dies in 16:9.
Ändern Sie die Kabel-/Satellitenauflösung.
●
●
Das Bild ist nur beim AV-Eingang
(Composite) schwarzweiß.
Schließen Sie das Videokabel (Gelb) an die grüne Buchse von Komponenteneingang 1
des Fernsehgeräts an.
●
Beim Kanalwechsel friert
das Bild ein bzw. ist verzerrt,
oder die Bildanzeige erfolgt
verzögert.
Bei Anschluss an einen Kabelreceiver versuchen Sie, den Kabelreceiver zurückzusetzen.
(Schließen Sie das Netzkabel wieder an und warten Sie, bis der Kabelreceiver neu
startet. Dies kann bis zu 20 Minuten dauern)
Stellen Sie die Bildauflösung des Kabelreceivers auf 1080i oder 720p ein.
●
●
Tonqualität
Führen Sie zu allererst den Audiotest durch, um zu bestätigen, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät den
Ton korrekt ausgibt.
Wechseln Sie zu MENU - Unterstützung - Eigendiagnose - Audiotest
Wenn der Ton richtig ausgegeben wird, kann das Tonproblem möglicherweise durch die
Signalquelle oder das Signal verursacht sein.
●
Kein Ton oder Ton zu leise bei
maximaler Lautstärke.
Überprüfen Sie die Lautstärke des externen Geräts, das an Ihren Fernseher
angeschlossen ist, und stellen Sie dann die Lautstärke des Fernsehers entsprechend ein.
●
Bild ist gut, aber kein Ton. Stellen Sie die Option Lautsprecher auswählen im Tonmenü auf TV-Lautsprecher ein.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Audiokabel vom externen Gerät an die richtigen
Audioeingänge am Fernsehgerät angeschlossen sind.
Überprüfen Sie, welcher Tonausgang am angeschlossenen Gerät eingestellt ist. (Beispiel:
Sie müssen die Audioeinstellung Ihres Kabelreceivers möglicherweise in HDMI ändern,
wenn HDMI an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist).
Wenn Sie ein DVI/HDMI-Kabel verwenden, ist ein separates Audiokabel erforderlich.
Deaktivieren Sie die SRS-Funktion, wenn Sie die Lautstärke auf mehr als 30 einstellen.
Ziehen Sie den Stecker aus der Kopfhörerbuchse. (sofern an Ihrem Fernseher vorhanden)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rauschen vom Lautsprecher. Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass kein Videokabel an
einen Audioeingang angeschlossen ist.
Überprüfen Sie die Signalstärke des Antennen-/Kabelanschlusses. Ein schwaches Signal
kann Verzerrungen verursachen.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:02Deutsch - 29
Problem Lösung
Kein Bild, kein Video
Der Fernseher kann nicht
eingeschaltet werden.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem
Fernsehgerät verbunden ist.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Netzsteckdose Strom liefert.
Drücken Sie die POWER-Taste am Fernsehgerät, um zu prüfen, ob die Fernbedienung
richtig funktioniert. Wenn das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet wird, kann dies von der
Fernbedienung verursacht sein. Um das Problem mit der Fernbedienung zu beheben,
lesen Sie den Abschnitt 'Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht' weiter unten.
●
●
●
Das Fernsehgerät schaltet sich
automatisch aus.
Prüfen Sie im Menü Einstellungen , ob der Sleep-Timer eingeschaltet (Ein) ist.
Wenn das Fernsehgerät an Ihren PC angeschlossen ist, überprüfen Ihre die
Energiespareinstellungen Ihres PCs.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem
Fernsehgerät verbunden ist.
Wenn bei Antennen-/Kabelanschluss länger als 10 bis 15 Minuten kein Signal empfangen
wurde, wird das Fernsehgerät automatisch ausgeschaltet.
●
●
●
●
Kein Bild/Video. Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. (Unterbrechen Sie kurzzeitig alle
Kabelverbindungen zwischen dem Fernsehgerät und den externen Geräten)
Stellen Sie den Videoausgang Ihres externen Geräts (Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver, DVD-/Bluray-Player) so ein, dass er zur Verbindung mit dem Fernsehgerät passt. Zum Beispiel:
Ausgang des externen Geräts: HDMI, also Fernseheingang: HDMI.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass das angeschlossene Gerät angeschaltet ist.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die richtige Signalquelle für den Fernseher eingestellt ist.
Drücken Sie dazu die Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung des Fernsehers.
●
●
●
●
HF-Anschluss
(Terrestrisch/Kabel)
Es werden nicht alle Kanäle
empfangen.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Antennenkabel korrekt angeschlossen ist.
Probieren Sie es mit Plug & Play, um die verfügbaren Kanäle zur Kanalliste
hinzuzufügen. Wechseln Sie zu MENU - Einstellungen - Plug & Play und warten Sie,
bis alle verfügbaren Kanäle gespeichert sind.
Prüfen Sie, ob die Antenne korrekt angeordnet ist.
●
●
●
Das Bild ist verzerrt: Große
und kleine Blöcke, Punkte,
Pixelfehler
Durch die Kompression der Videoinhalte kann es zu Bildverzerrungen kommen,
insbesondere bei schnellen Bildern wie bei Sportsendungen und Actionfilmen.
Ein schwaches Signal kann Verzerrungen verursachen. Das ist kein Problem des
Fernsehgeräts.
●
●
PC-Verbindung
Meldung ‘Modus nicht
unterstützt’.
Stellen Sie die Ausgangsauflösung und Frequenz Ihres PCs so ein, dass sie zu den vom
Fernsehgerät unterstützten Auflösungen passt.
●
Der PC wird immer in der
Liste der Signalquellen
angezeigt, auch wenn keiner
angeschlossen ist.
Das ist normal. Der PC wird immer in der Liste der Signalquellen angezeigt, auch wenn
keiner angeschlossen ist.
●
Video ist bei HDMI-Anschluss
in Ordnung, aber es gibt
keinen Ton.
● Prüfen Sie die Einstellungen des Audioausgangs für Ihren PC.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:02Deutsch - 30
Problem Lösung
Weitere
Das Bild wird nicht als Vollbild
ausgegeben.
Bei HD-Kanälen werden auf beiden Seiten schwarze Balken angezeigt, wenn Sie
aufbereitete SD-Inhalte (4:3) wiedergeben.
Bei Filmen mit einem anderen Seitenverhältnis als am Fernsehgerät eingestellt, werden
oben und unten schwarze Balken angezeigt.
Stellen Sie die Bildgröße an Ihrem externen Gerät oder am Fernseher auf Vollbild ein.
●
●
●
Die Fernbedienung funktioniert
nicht.
Ersetzen Sie die Batterien der Fernbedienung (richtige Polung beachten).
Reinigen Sie das Sendefenster oben auf der Fernbedienung.
Zeigen Sie mit der Fernbedienung aus 1,5 bis 2 m Entfernung direkt auf das
Fernsehgerät.
●
●
●
Die Lautstärke bzw. Leistung
des Fernsehers kann mit der
Fernbedienung des Kabel-
/Satellitenreceivers nicht
reguliert werden.
Programmieren Sie die Fernbedienung des Kabel-/Satellitenreceivers so, dass
sie das Fernsehgerät anspricht. Den Code für SAMSUNG TV finden Sie in der
Bedienungsanleitung für Ihren Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver.
●
Meldung ‘Modus nicht
unterstützt’.
Überprüfen Sie die unterstützte Auflösung des Fernsehgeräts und stellen Sie die
Ausgangsauflösung des externen Geräts dementsprechend ein. Weitere Informationen
erhalten Sie im Abschnitt zum Einstellen der Auflösung in diesem Handbuch.
●
Plastikgeruch vom Fernsehen. ● Dieser Geruch ist normal und verschwindet im Lauf der Zeit.
Die Option Signalinformation
steht für das Fernsehgerät im
Menü für den Selbsttest nicht
zur Verfügung.
● Diese Funktion ist nur bei digitalen Kanälen mit Antennenanschluss (HF/Coax) verfügbar.
Das Fernsehgerät ist zur
rechten oder linken Seite
geneigt.
Lösen Sie den Sockel des Standfußes vom Fernsehgerät und wiederholen Sie die
Montage.
●
Sockel des Standfußes kann
nicht montiert werden.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät auf einer ebenen Fläche steht. Wenn Sie die
Schrauben nicht vom Fernseher lösen können, verwenden Sie einen magnetischen
Schraubendreher.
●
Das Kanalmenü wird grau
angezeigt. (nicht verfügbar)
● Das Menü Sender ist nur dann verfügbar, wenn eine TV-Signalquelle ausgewählt wurde.
Ihre Einstellungen gehen nach
30 Minuten oder bei jedem
Abschalten des Fernsehers
verloren.
Wenn das Fernsehgerät im Modus Shop Demo läuft, werden die Ton- und
Bildeinstellungen alle 30 Minuten zurückgesetzt. Wechseln Sie mit dem
Plug & Play-Prozess vom Modus Shop Demo zu Privatgebrauch. Drücken Sie
diese Taste SOURCE, um den TV-Modus auszuwählen. Wechseln Sie zu MENU →
Einstellungen → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Vorübergehender Ausfall von
Bild oder Ton.
Überprüfen und korrigieren Sie ggf. die Kabelverbindungen.
Kann durch Verwenden von übermäßig starren oder dicken Kabeln verursacht werden.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Kabel für langfristigen Gebrauch flexibel genug sind. Bei
Wandmontage empfehlen wir, Kabel mit 90 Grad-Steckern zu verwenden.
●
●
Sie erkennen möglicherweise
kleine Partikel, wenn Sie
den Rahmen um den
Fernsehbildschirm herum
genau betrachten.
● Dies ist Teil des Produktdesigns und kein Defekt.
‘Verschlüsseltes Signal’ oder
‘Kein Signal/Schwaches
Signal’ bei Einsatz einer CAMKarte (CI).
Überprüfen Sie, ob das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI-Karte in den CI-Steckplatz
(Common Interface) eingesetzt wurde.
Ziehen Sie das CAM aus dem Fernsehgerät und setzen Sie es wieder in den Steckplatz
ein.
●
●
45 Minuten nach dem
Ausschalten schaltet sich
das Fernsehgerät von selbst
wieder ein.
Das ist Normal. Das Fernsehgerät aktiviert die OTA-Funktion (Over-the-Air) Funktion
selbst, um die beim Fernsehen heruntergeladene Firmware zu aktualisieren.
●
Wiederholtes Bild-/Tonproblem. Überprüfen und ändern Sie Signal/Signalquelle. ●
Der TFT-LCD-Bildschirm enthält Unterpixel. Hierfür ist eine ausgefeilte Fertigungstechnologie erforderlich ist. Allerdings
können ein paar zu helle oder zu dunkle Pixel auf der Bildfläche zu sehen sein. Diese Pixelfehler haben keinen Einfluss auf
die Geräteleistung.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:02Deutsch - 31
Technische Daten
Modellname LE26B450 LE32B450
Bildschirmgröße
(Diagonal) 26 Zoll 32 Zoll
PC-Auflösung
(Optimal) 1360 x 768 bei 60 Hz 1360 x 768 bei 60 Hz
Ton
(Ausgang) 5W X 2 10W X 2
Abmessungen (BxTxH)
Gehäuse
Mit Fuß
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Gewicht
Mit Fuß 8 kg 12 kg
Umgebungsbedingungen
Betriebstemperatur
Luftfeuchtigkeit (bei Betrieb)
Lagerungstemperatur
Luftfeuchtigkeit (Lagerung)
10°C bis 40°C (50°F bis 104°F)
10% bis 80%, nicht kondensierend
-20°C bis 45°C (-4°F bis 113°F)
5% bis 95%, nicht kondensierend
10°C bis 40°C (50°F bis 104°F)
10% bis 80%, nicht kondensierend
-20°C bis 45°C (-4°F bis 113°F)
5% bis 95%, nicht kondensierend
Drehbarer Fuß
(Links und rechts) 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
Änderungen der technischen Daten und des Geräte-Designs vorbehalten.
Dies ist ein digitales Gerät der Klasse B.
Die technischen Daten zur benötigten Netzspannung finden Sie auf dem Etikett am Produkt.
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:02De figuren en illustraties in deze gebruikershandleiding dienen alleen ter referentie en kunnen afwijken van het werkelijke uiterlijk
van het product. Productontwerp en -specificaties kunnen zonder aankondiging worden gewijzigd.
Licentie
TruSurround HD, SRS en het -symbool zijn handelsmerken van SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround HD
-technologie valt onder licentie van SRS Labs, Inc.
Geproduceerd onder licentie van Dolby Laboratories. Dolby en het symbool met de dubbele D zijn
handelsmerken van Dolby Laboratories.
Opmerking digitale TV
1. Functionaliteit betreffende digitale tv (DVB) is alleen beschikbaar in landen of gebieden waar DVB-T-signalen (MPEG2 en
MPEG4 AVC) voor digitale televisie per zendmast worden uitgezonden of waar u toegang hebt tot een compatibele DVB-Cservice (MPEG2 en MPEG4 AAC) voor kabel-tv. Vraag aan uw plaatselijke aanbieder of u DVB-T- of DVB-C-signalen kunt
ontvangen.
2. DVB-T is de Europese DVB-consortiumstandaard voor de uitzending van digitale televisie per zendmast en DVB-C voor de
uitzending van digitale televisie over de kabel. Bepaalde speciale functies zoals EPG (Electric Program Guide), VOD (Video
on Demand) en dergelijke zijn echter niet bij deze specificatie inbegrepen. Deze werken dus mogelijk niet.
3. Hoewel dit televisietoestel aan de huidige DVB-T- en DVB-C-standaarden vanaf [augustus 2008] voldoet, kan de
compatibiliteit met toekomstige digitale DVB-T-signalen per zendmast en digitale DVB-C-signalen per kabel niet worden
gegarandeerd.
4. Afhankelijk van de landen/gebieden waar dit televisietoestel wordt gebruikt, kunnen leveranciers van kabeltelevisie
aanvullende kosten voor dergelijke services in rekening brengen en moet u wellicht akkoord gaan met hun voorwaarden en
bepalingen.
5. Bepaalde digitale televisiefuncties zijn mogelijk niet beschikbaar in bepaalde landen of regio's en DVB-C werkt mogelijk niet
goed met bepaalde leveranciers van kabelservices.
6. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met de klantenservice van SAMSUNG.
Voorzorgsmaatregelen bij weergave van stilstaand beeld
Stilstaande beelden kunnen permanente schade aan uw TV-scherm toebrengen
Laat niet langer dan 2 uur een stilstaand of gedeeltelijk stilstaand beeld op het LCD-scherm staan, dat kan namelijk
beeldretentie veroorzaken. Beeldretentie wordt ook wel inbranden genoemd. Verlaag bij de weergave van een stilstaand beeld
de helderheid en het contrast om beeldretentie te voorkomen.
Als u gedurende langere tijd naar uw LCD-tv kijkt terwijl het beeld in 4:3-formaat wordt weergegeven, kunnen
aan de linker- en rechterkant en in het midden van het scherm randen achterblijven. Dit wordt veroorzaakt
door de verschillen in lichtemissie op het scherm. Schade ontstaan door het bovengenoemde effect valt niet
onder de garantie.
Het gedurende langere tijd weergeven van stilstaande beelden van dvd’s of computerspellen kan (gedeeltelijke)
scherminbranding tot gevolg hebben. Om dit te voorkomen kunt u tijdens het weergeven van stilstaande beelden de
helderheid en het contrast verminderen.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:03Nederlands - 1
Symbool
N O T
Opmerking
Knop Eenmaal
drukken
De toets
TOOLS
Indrukken
❑
ALGEMENE INFORMATIE
Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel ....................................2
Accesoires............................................................................2
Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel .........................................3
Afstandsbediening................................................................5
Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen.........................5
BEWERKING
De menu's bekijken ..............................................................6
De TV op stand-by zetten.....................................................7
Plug & Play-functie ...............................................................7
Het scherm bekijken.............................................................8
KANALEN BEHEREN
Het Kanalenmenu gebruiken................................................8
Kanalen beheren ...............................................................11
BEELD AANPASSEN
Het beeldmenu configureren ..............................................13
Uw tv als een computermonitor (pc) gebruiken..................15
De tv instellen voor uw pc...................................................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
GELUID AANPASSEN
Het geluidsmenu configureren............................................17
De geluidsmodus selecteren ..............................................18
INSTELLINGEN
Het instellingenmenu gebruiken .........................................19
INVOER / ONDERSTEUNING
Het Invoermenu gebruiken .................................................22
Het Ondersteuningsmenu gebruiken..................................22
AANBEVELINGEN VOOR GEBRUIK
Teletekstfunctie...................................................................24
De standaard bevestigen....................................................25
De muurbevestiging installeren ..........................................25
De Kensington-slot tegen diefstal gebruiken......................26
Installatieruimte ..................................................................26
De TV vastzetten aan de wand ..........................................27
Problemen oplossen...........................................................28
Specificaties .......................................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
INHOUD
Nederlands
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:03Nederlands - 2
ALGEMENE INFORMATIE
Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel
De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van het model.
U kunt een toets gebruiken door op de knoppen op het zijpaneel te drukken.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Schakelt tussen alle beschikbare invoerbronnen. Gebruik deze toets in het schermmenu zoals u de toets
ENTERE op de afstandsbediening gebruikt.
2 MENU: Druk op deze toets om een schermmenu met de functies van de TV te openen.
3Y: Druk op deze toets om het volume harder of zachter te zetten.
Gebruik de Y-toetsen in het schermmenu zoals u de toetsen ◄ en ► op de afstandsbediening gebruikt.
4Z: Druk op deze toets om het kanaal te wijzigen. Gebruik de Z-toetsen in het schermmenu zoals u de toetsen
▼ en ▲ op de afstandsbediening gebruikt.
5 P (Energie): Druk op deze knop om de TV aan of uit te zetten.
6 AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSSENSOR: Richt de afstandsbediening op dit punt van de TV.
7 AAN/UIT-LAMPJE: Als de stroom is ingeschakeld, knippert het lampje even en gaat het vervolgens uit. In de stand-by-modus
blijft het aan.
8 LUIDSPREKERS
Accesoires
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Afstandsbediening en
batterijen (AAA x 2)
Netsnoer
Deksel
onderkant
4 schroeven
voor de voet
3 schroeven
voor de voet
(alleen 32-inch model)
Schoonmaakdoekje
● Gebruikershandleiding ● Garantiekaart ● Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Controleer of de volgende onderdelen bij uw LCD-TV zijn geleverd. Neem contact op met uw verkoper als er onderdelen ontbreken.
Garantiekaart / Veiligheidsvoorschriften (niet beschikbaar op alle locaties)
De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van het model.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:04Nederlands - 3
Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel
De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van het model.
Controleer of de TV is uitgeschakeld wanneer u hierop een extern apparaat aansluit.
Zorg bij het aansluiten van een extern apparaat ervoor dat de kleuren van de aansluiting en de kabel overeenkomen.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Maakt verbinding met een digitaal audio-element, zoals de ontvanger van een thuisbioscoop.
Wanneer de HDMI IN-ingangen zijn aangesloten, voert de DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)-aansluiting op de TV maar
audio van twee kanalen uit. Als u audio voor kanaal 5.1 wilt horen, sluit u de optische aansluiting van de dvd- of Blu-rayspeler of aftakdoos/satellietontvanger rechtstreeks aan op een versterker of thuisbioscoop, en niet op de tv.
2 PC IN
Aansluiting voor de video-uitvoer van uw computer.
3 ANT IN
Maakt verbinding met een antenne of kabeltv-systeem.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Aansluiting voor de audio-uitvoer van uw computer.
DVI-audio-uitgangen voor externe apparaten.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
luit het ene uiteinde van RCA-audiokabels aan op de uitgangen AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] aan de achterzijde van de TV
en het andere uiteinde op de corresponderende audio-ingangen van de versterker of de dvd-thuisbioscoop.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
[Achterpaneel tv]
[Zijpaneel tv]
Stroominvoer
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:04Nederlands - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Maakt verbinding met de HDMI-aansluiting van een apparaat met HDMI-uitvoer.
Voor een HDMI-naar-HDMI-verbinding is geen audioaansluiting nodig.
Gebruik de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-aansluiting voor DVI-aansluiting op extern apparaat. Gebruik een DVI-naar-HDMI-kabel of
een DVI-HDMI (DVI-naar-HDMI) voor video-aansluiting en de PC / DVI AUDIO IN-aansluitingen voor audio.
U kunt ook de poorten gebruiken voor het verbinden van een pc.
Wat is HDMI?
‘Met HDMI’ (High Definition Multimedia Interface) kunnen digitale videogegevens met een hoge definitie en meerdere
kanalen met digitale audio worden verzonden.
De HDMI/DVI-uitgang ondersteunt een DVI-aansluiting op externe apparatuur met een geschikte kabel (niet
meegeleverd).
Het verschil tussen HDMI en DVI is dat het HDMI-apparaat minder groot is, is voorzien van een functie voor HDCPcodering (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) en digitale audio van meerdere kanalen ondersteunt.
De TV geeft geluid en afbeeldingen mogelijk niet correct weer wanneer dvd-spelers/Blue-ray-spelers/aftakdozen/
satellietontvangers zijn aangesloten die oudere HDMI-versies dan versie 1.3 ondersteunen. Wanneer u een oudere
HDMI-kabel aansluit en er is geen geluid sluit u de HDMI-kabel aan op de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-aansluiting en sluit u de
geluidskabels aan op de PC / DVI AUDIO IN aansluitingen achterop de TV. Als dit gebeurt, controleert u de HDMI-versie
bij het bedrijf waar u de dvd-speler/Blue-ray-speler/aftakdoos/satellietontvanger hebt aangeschaft en vraagt u om een
firmware-update. HDMI-kabels ouder dan versie 1.3 kunnen een slechte weergave veroorzaken of zorgen dat er helemaal
geen beeld wordt weergegeven.
7 COMMON INTERFACE-sleuf
Wanneer u bij sommige kanalen geen ‘CI-kaart’ hebt geplaatst, wordt ‘Vervormd signaal’ op het scherm weergegeven.
De koppelingsgegevens met een telefoonnummer, de ID van de CI-kaart, de host-ID en andere informatie worden over
ongeveer 2-3 minuten weergegeven. Neem contact op met uw serviceprovider als er een foutbericht wordt weergegeven.
Wanneer de kanaalgegevens zijn geconfigureerd, wordt het bericht ‘Update voltooid’ weergegeven. Hiermee wordt
aangegeven dat de kanaallijst nu is bijgewerkt.
U moet een CI-kaart aanschaffen bij een lokale kabelaanbieder. Verwijder de CI-kaart door deze voorzichtig eruit te
trekken, want de kaart kan beschadigen als u deze laat vallen.
Plaats de CI-kaart in de richting die op de kaart staat gemarkeerd.
De plaats van het COMMON INTERFACE -slot kan variëren afhankelijk van het model.
CAM wordt niet ondersteund in sommige landen en regio's. Controleer dit bij uw geautoriseerde verkoper.
8 AV IN [VIDEO], [R-AUDIO-L]
Sluit een RCA-kabel aan op geschikte externe audio- of videoapparatuur, zoals een videorecorder, dvd-speler of
camcorder.
Sluit RCA-geluidskabels aan op [R-AUDIO-L] op uw systeem en sluit de andere uiteinden van de kabels aan op de
bijbehorende aansluitpunten van het A/V-apparaat.
9 KENSINGTON LOCK (afhankelijk van het model)
Het Kensington-slot (optioneel) is een vergrendeling waarmee u het systeem fysiek kunt vastzetten voor gebruik in het
openbaar. Als u een vergrendelingsapparaat wilt gebruiken, neemt u contact op met de leverancier bij wie u de tv hebt
aangeschaft.
De plaats van het Kensington-slot kan variëren afhankelijk van het model.
0 COMPONENT IN
Sluit het ene uiteinde van de videokabels (optioneel) aan op de corresponderende uitgangen (PR, PB, Y) aan de
achterzijde van de TV en het andere uiteinde op de corresponderende video-uitgangen van de DTV of dvd-speler.
Als u de settopbox en DTV (of dvd-speler) tegelijk wilt aansluiten, sluit u eerst de settopbox op de DTV (of dvd-speler)
aan en vervolgens de DTV (of dvd-speler) op de TV (PR, PB, Y).
De PR, PB- en Y-uitgangen op uw apparatuur (DTV of dvd-speler) zijn in sommige gevallen voorzien van de aanduiding Y,
B-Y en R-Y of Y, Cb en Cr.
Sluit het ene uiteinde van RCA-audiokabels (optioneel) aan op [R-AUDIO-L] aan de achterzijde van de TV en het andere
uiteinde op de corresponderende audio-uitgangen van de DTV of dvd-speler.
! EXT (RGB)
Aansluiting
Invoer Vermogen
Video Audio (L / R) RGB Video + Audio (L / R)
EXT O O O Alleen de TV-of DTV-uitgang is beschikbaar.
Ingangen of uitgangen voor externe apparaten, zoals een videorecorder, dvd-speler, spelcomputer of videodiscspeler.
@ SERVICE
Aansluiting voor software-upgrades.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:04Nederlands - 5
Afstandsbediening
U kunt de afstandsbediening gebruiken tot op een afstand van ongeveer 7 meter vanaf de tv.
Fel licht kan de werking van de afstandsbediening beïnvloeden.
De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van het model.
1 POWER : Stand-by-toets voor de
televisie.
2 CIJFERTOETSEN : Druk hierop
om het kanaal te wijzigen.
3 FAV.CH : Druk op deze toets om
naar uw favoriete kanalen te gaan.
4Y : Druk op deze toets om
het volume harder of zachter te
zetten.
5 SOURCE : Druk op deze toets om
de beschikbare videobronnen weer
te geven en te selecteren.
6 INFO : Druk op deze toets om
informatie weer te geven op het
tv-scherm.
7 TOOLS : Gebruik deze toets om
snel veelgebruikte functies te
selecteren.
8 CH LIST : Geeft de lijst met kanalen
weer op het scherm
9 GEKLEURDE TOETSEN : Gebruik
deze toetsen in de Kanalenlijst
enz.
! TV : Selecteert rechtstreeks de TVmodus.
@ PRE-CH : Hiermee kunt u
terugkeren naar het vorig kanaal
waar u naar keek.
# MUTEM: Druk op deze toets om
het geluid tijdelijk uit te schakelen.
$ P
: Druk op deze toets om
het kanaal te wijzigen.
% MENU : Geeft het hoofdmenu weer
^ GUIDE : Elektronische programmagids
(EPG) weergeven
& RETURN : Terug naar het vorige menu
* OMHOOG▲ / OMLAAG▼ / LINKS◄ /
RECHTS► / ENTERE : Gebruik deze
toets om items op schermmenu's te
selecteren en menuwaarden te wijzigen.
( EXIT : Druk op deze toets om het menu
te verlaten.
) SUBT. : Digitale ondertiteling weergeven
a AD: Selectie Audio Description.
Teletekstfuncties
5 0 : Teletekstmodus selecteren
(LIST / FLOF)
6 5 : Teletekst tonen
7 4 : Weergaveformaat voor teletekst
selecteren
8 8 : Teletekst opslaan
9 Fastext-onderwerp selecteren
0/ : Wisselen tussen Teletekst,
Dubbel of Mix.
! :: Teletekstweergave verlaten
@ 1 : Teletekst-subpagina
$ 2 : Volgende teletekstpagina
3 : Vorige teletekstpagina
% 6 : Teletekstindex
& 9 : Teletekst vastzetten
( 7 : Teletekst uitschakelen
Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen
1. Open het klepje achter op de afstandsbediening met een opwaartse beweging zoals
aangegeven in de afbeelding.
2. Plaats twee AAA-batterijen.
Zorg ervoor dat de ‘+’ en ‘-’ van de batterijen overeenkomen met de afbeelding in het
vakje.
3. Plaats het klepje weer terug.
Verwijder de batterijen en bewaar deze op een koele, droge plaats indien u de afstandsbediening langere tijd niet
gebruikt.
Controleer het volgende als de afstandsbediening niet werkt:
Is de TV ingeschakeld?
Zijn de plus- en minpolen van de batterijen tegengesteld geplaatst?
Zijn de batterijen leeg?
Is er een stroomstoring of zit de stekker niet in het stopcontact?
Schijnt er vlakbij speciaal fluorescerend licht of neonlicht?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:05Nederlands - 6
BEWERKING
De menu's bekijken
Voordat u de tv gebruikt, moet u de stappen hieronder volgen om in het menu verschillende
functies te selecteren en bij te stellen.
1. Druk op de toets MENU.
Het hoofdmenu wordt op het scherm weergegeven. De linkerkant bevat pictogrammen:
Beeld, Geluid, Kanaal, Instellingen, Invoer, Toepassing, Ondersteuning.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een van de pictogrammen te selecteren.
Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het submenu van het pictogram te openen.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om naar items in het menu te gaan.
Druk op de toets ENTERE om items in het menu in te voeren.
4. Druk op de toets ▲/▼/◄/► om te geselecteerde items aan te passen.
Druk op de toets RETURN om naar het vorige menu te gaan.
5. Druk op de toets EXIT om het menu te verlaten.
De toetsen van de afstandsbediening gebruiken
Toets Bewerking Toets Bewerking
MENUm Geeft het hoofdmenu weer.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Beweeg de cursor en selecteer een item.
Selecteer het geselecteerde item.
Bevestig de instelling.
RUTURNR Terug naar het vorige menu.
EXITe Het menu verlaten.
Voorbeeld: in het menu Picture de helderheid van de tv instellen
De helderheid op 80 zetten
1. Druk op de toets MENU om het menu weer te geven.
2. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Beeld te selecteren.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ voor het selecteren van Helderheid.
4. Druk op de toets ENTERE .
5. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► totdat de helderheid op 80 staat.
6. Druk op de toets ENTERE .
Druk op de toets EXIT om het menu te verlaten.
¦
N
N
Modus : Standaard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Beeld
Modus : Standaard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Beeld
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45 ►
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Geavanceerde instellingen
Afbeeldingsopties
Beeld resetten
Beeld
U Verpl. L Instellen E Enter R Terug
Helderheid 45
U Verpl. L Instellen E Enter R Terug
Helderheid 80
Modus : Standaard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Beeld
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:05Nederlands -
De TV op stand-by zetten
U kunt de TV op stand-by zetten om het energieverbruik te verminderen. De stand-bymodus kan handig zijn als u even wilt
stoppen met kijken (bijvoorbeeld tijdens het eten).
1. Druk op de POWERP-toets op de afstandsbediening.
Het beeld wordt uitgeschakeld en op uw tv gaat een stand-bylampje branden.
2. Druk nogmaals op de POWERP-toets.
Laat de TV niet gedurende langere tijd op stand-by staan (zoals tijdens vakanties). Haal ook de stekker uit het stopcontact
en ontkoppel de antenne.
Plug & Play-functie
Wanneer u de tv voor het eerst inschakelt, worden enkele basisinstellingen automatisch
achtereenvolgens uitgevoerd.
1. Druk op de POWER-toets op de afstandsbediening. Het bericht You can set the menu
language. wordt weergegeven.
2. Selecteer de gewenste taal door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken. Druk op de toets
ENTERE om uw keuze te bevestigen.
3. Druk op de toetsen ◄ of ► om Winkeldemo of Thuisgebruik te selecteren en vervolgens op ENTERE.
Wij raden aan om de tv in te stellen op de modus Thuisgebruik voor het beste beeld in uw thuisomgeving.
Winkeldemo is alleen bedoeld voor gebruik in winkels.
Wanneer het apparaat per ongeluk is ingesteld op de modus Winkeldemo en u wilt terug naar Thuisgebruik
(Standaard): moet u op de volumeknop op de TV drukken. Wanneer het schermmenu voor het volume wordt
weergegeven, drukt u vijf seconden op de toets MENU op de TV.
4. Druk op de toets ENTERE . Selecteer het gewenste land door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken. Druk op de toets ENTERE
om uw keuze te bevestigen.
5. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Ant of Kabel te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Ant: Antennesignaal
Kabel: Antennesignaal
6. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de kanaalbron te onthouden. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Start te selecteren.
Digitaal en Analoog: digitale en analoge kanalen.
Digitaal: Digitaal kanaal
Analoog: Analoog kanaal
Wanneer u de antennebron als Kabel instelt, kunt u de waarde voor een zoekopdracht voor digitale kanalen opgeven. Zie
voor meer informatie Kanaal→ Automatisch opslaan.
Het zoeken van de kanalen start en eindigt automatisch.
Druk op elk gewenst moment op de toets ENTERE om de opslagprocedure te onderbreken.
Nadat alle beschikbare kanalen zijn opgeslagen, wordt het bericht De modus Clock instellen weergegeven.
. Druk op de toets ENTERE . Druk op de toets▲ of ▼ om Auto te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Wanneer u Handm., selecteert, wordt Huidige datum en tijd instellen weergegeven.
Wanneer u een digitaal signaal hebt ontvangen, wordt de tijd automatisch ingesteld. Indien dit niet het geval is, kiest u
Handm. om de klok in te stellen. (zie pagina 19)
8. De verbindingsmethode voor de beste HD-kwaliteit wordt aangeboden. Druk na het bevestigen van de methode op de toets
ENTERE.
9. Het bericht Veel kijkplezier. wordt weergegeven. Wanneer u klaar bent, drukt u op de toets ENTERE.
Als u deze functie wilt resetten...
1. Druk op de toets MENU om het menu weer te geven. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Instellingen te selecteren en druk
vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
2. Druk nogmaals op de toets ENTERE om Plug & Play te selecteren.
3. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. De standaardpincode van een nieuw TV-toestel is 0-0-0-0.
Als u de pincode wilt wijzigen, gebruikt u de functie PIN wijzigen. (zie pagina 21)
De functie Plug & Play is alleen in de tv-modus beschikbaar.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:05Nederlands - 8
Het scherm bekijken
Op het scherm worden het huidige kanaal en de status van bepaalde audio-/video-instellingen
weergegeve.
Druk op de toets INFO om de informatie weer te geven.
Druk op de toets INFO op de afstandsbediening. Op de tv worden het kanaal, het type
geluid en de status van bepaalde beeld- en geluidsinstellingen weergegeven.
▲, ▼: U kunt informatie over andere kanalen bekijken. Als u naar het huidige
geselecteerde kanaal wilt gaan, drukt u op de toets ENTERE.
◄, ►: U kunt informatie over het gewenste programma op het huidige kanaal
bekijken.
Druk nogmaals op de toets INFO of wacht ongeveer 10 seconden. De weergave
verdwijnt dan automatisch.
KANALEN BEHEREN
Het Kanalenmenu gebruiken
Land
Het invoerscherm voor de pincode verschijnt. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
Analoogkanaal
U kunt het land voor analoge kanalen veranderen.
Digitaal kanaal
U kunt het land voor digitale kanalen veranderen.
Automatisch opslaan
U kunt scannen op de beschikbare frequentiebereiken (beschikbaarheid is afhankelijk van uw
land). Automatisch toegewezen programmanummers komen mogelijk niet overeen met de
feitelijke of gewenste programmanummers.
Wanneer een kanaal is vergrendeld door de functie Kinderslot, verschijnt het
invoerscherm voor de pincode.
Ant / Kabel
Antennebron onthouden
Digitaal en Analoog: digitale en analoge kanalen.
Digitaal: Digitaal kanaal
Analoog: Analoog kanaal
Bij het selecteren van ‘Kabel → Digitaal en Analoog’ of ‘Kabel → Digitaal’
Geef een waarde op voor het scannen van kabelkanalen.
Zoekmodus → Volledig / Netwerk / Snel
Snel
Netwerk-ID: Toont de identificatiecode van het netwerk.
Frequentie: Geeft de frequentie voor het kanaal weer. (Verschilt per land)
Modulatie: Geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer.
Symboolsnelheid: Geeft de beschikbare symbol rates weer.
–
–
–
–
Scant op alle kanalen met actieve uitzendstations en slaat deze op in het geheugen van de TV.
Als u Automatisch opslaan wilt stoppen, drukt u op de toets ENTERE.
Het bericht Autom. program. stoppen? wordt weergegeven.
Selecteer Ja door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Land ►
Automatisch opslaan
Handm. opslaan
Zoekoptie voor kabel
Gids voor Nu en Morgen
Volledige gids
Standaardgids : Volledige gids
Kanaal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:06Nederlands - 9
Handm. opslaan
Scant handmatig op een kanaal en slaat het op in het geheugen van de TV.
Wanneer een kanaal is vergrendeld door de functie Kinderslot, verschijnt het invoerscherm voor de pincode.
Digitaal kanaal
Handmatig opslaan voor digitale kanalen.
Digitaal kanaal is alleen beschikbaar in DTV-modus.
Kanaal: stel het kanaalnummer in met behulp van de toetsen ▲, ▼ of met de cijfertoetsen (0~9).
Frequentie: stel de frequentie in met behulp van de cijfertoetsen.
Bandbreedte: stel de bandbreedte in met behulp van de toetsen ▲, ▼ of met de cijfertoetsen(0~9).
Zodra dit is voltooid, worden de kanalen in de kanalenlijst bijgewerkt.
Analoogkanaal
Handmatig opslaan voor analoge kanalen.
Prog. (Programmanummer dat aan een kanaal wordt toegewezen): stel het programmanummer in met behulp van de toetsen
▲, ▼ of met de cijfertoetsen (0~9).
Kleursysteem → Auto/PAL/SECAM/NTSC4.43: stelt de waarde van het kleursysteem in met behulp van de toets▲ of ▼.
Geluidssysteem → BG/DK/I/L: stelt de waarde van het geluidssysteem in met behulp van de toets ▲ of ▼.
Kanaal (Als u het nummer weet van het kanaal dat u wilt opslaan): Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om C (antennekanaal) of
S (kabelkanaal) te selecteren. Druk op de toets ►, druk vervolgens op de toetsen ▲, ▼ of op de cijfertoetsen (0~9) om het
gewenste nummer te selecteren.
U kunt het kanaalnummer ook direct selecteren door de cijfertoetsen (0~9) in te drukken.
Als er geen geluid is of als het geluid is vervormd, selecteert u nogmaals de gewenste geluidsstandaard.
Zoeken (Als u de kanaalnummers niet weet): druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om met zoeken te beginnen. De tuner scant het
frequentiebereik totdat het eerste kanaal of het door u geselecteerde kanaal in beeld komt.
Opslaan (Het kanaal en het bijbehorende programmanummer opslaan): instellen op OK door de toets ENTERE in te
drukken.
Kanaalmodus
P (Programmamodus): als u klaar bent met instellen, zijn de zendstations die u kunt ontvangen, toegewezen aan de
positienummers P00 tot P99. In deze modus kunt u een kanaalnummer selecteren door het positienummer in te toetsen.
C (Antennekanaalmodus): in deze modus kunt u een kanaal selecteren door het nummer in te toetsen dat aan het
zendstation is toegewezen.
S (Kabelkanaalmodus): in deze stand kunt u een kanaal selecteren door het nummer in te toetsen dat aan het
kabelkanaal is toegewezen.
Zoekoptie voor kabel (afhankelijk van het land)
Hiermee worden extra zoekopties ingesteld zoals de frequentie en de Symboolsnelheid voor het zoeken naar een kabelnetwerk.
Frequentie (Start ~ Stop): Geeft de frequentie voor het kanaal weer.
Modulatie: Geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer.
Symboolsnelheid: Geeft de beschikbare symbol rates weer.
Gids voor Nu en Morgen / Volledige gids
De EPG (elektronische programmagids)-informatie wordt verstrekt door de kabelaanbieders. Programmavermeldingen kunnen
leeg of verouderd zijn ten gevolge van de informatie die voor een bepaald kanaal wordt uitgezonden. De weergave wordt
dynamisch bijgewerkt zodra nieuwe informatie beschikbaar is.
Zie de beschrijvingen op pagina 10 voor de uitgebreide procedures voor het gebruik van de Gids voor Nu en Morgen en
Volledige gids.
U kunt het gidsmenu ook laten weergeven door simpelweg op de toets GUIDE te drukken. (Raadpleeg de beschrijvingen om
de Standaardgids te configureren.)
Gids voor Nu en Morgen
Voor de zes kanalen in de linkerkolom wordt informatie over het huidige en volgende programma weergegeven.
Volledige gids
hiermee geeft u de programma-informatie weer als segmenten die per uur zijn gesorteerd. Er wordt programma-informatie voor
twee uur weergegeven waarin u in tijd vooruit of achteruit kunt bladeren.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:06Nederlands - 10
Standaardgids → Gids voor Nu en Morgen / Volledige gids
U kunt ofwel de Gids voor Nu en Morgen of de Volledige gids laten weergeven wanneer u de toets GUIDE op de
afstandsbediening indrukt.
Kanalenlijst
Raadpleeg de ‘Kanalen beheren’-instructies voor de uitgebreide procedures voor het gebruik van de Channel List.
U kunt deze opties eenvoudig selecteren door op de toets CH LIST op de afstandsbediening te drukken.
Kanaalmodus
Wanneer u de toets P >/< indrukt, worden de kanalen in de geselecteerde kanaallijst gewisseld.
Toegev. kan.
kanalen worden in de lijst opgeslagen kanalen gewisseld.
Favorietekanalen.
kanalen worden in de lijst favoriete kanalen gewisseld.
Fijnafstemming
Als de ontvangst goed is, hoeft u het kanaal niet verder af te stellen omdat dat tijdens het zoeken en opslaan automatisch is
gebeurd. Is het signaal echter zwak of vervormd, dan kunt u het kanaal handmatig fijner afstemmen.
Opgeslagen kanalen die handmatig fijner zijn afgesteld, zijn gemarkeerd met een asterisk * rechts van het kanaalnummer in
de kanaalbalk.
Wanneer u de fijnafstemming wilt resetten, selecteert u Reset door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken en vervolgens op de toets
ENTERE te drukken.
Alleen analoge tv-kanalen kunnen fijn worden afgestemd.
De Gids voor Nu en Morgen / Volledige gids
Wat wilt u doen? Zo moet het:
Een programma in de EPG-lijst bekijken Selecteer een programma door op de toets ▲, ▼, ◄, ► te drukken.
De gids verlaten Druk op de blauwe toets
Wanneer het volgende programma wordt geselecteerd, is dit gepland terwijl het klokpictogram wordt weergegeven. Wanneer de
toets ENTERE opnieuw wordt ingedrukt, druk dan op de ◄, ►-toets om Progr. annuleren te selecteren. De planning wordt
geannuleerd en het klokpictogram verdwijnt.
Programma-informatie weergeven Selecteer het gewenste programma door op de toets ▲, ▼, ◄, ► te drukken.
Druk vervolgens op de toets INFO wanneer het door u gekozen programma
wordt geselecteerd.
De programmatitel bevindt zich boven het midden van het scherm.
Klik op de toets INFO voor uitgebreide informatie. De gedetailleerde informatie bevat het kanaalnummer, de speelduur, de
statusbalk, de leeftijdsbeperking, de videokwaliteit (HD/SD), geluidsmodi, ondertiteling of teletekst, talen voor ondertiteling of
teletekst, en een korte samenvatting van het geselecteerde programma. “...” wordt weergegeven als de samenvatting te lang is.
Schakelen tussen Gids voor Nu en Morgen en
Volledige gids
Druk herhaaldelijk op de rode toets.
In Volledige gids
Hiermee bladert u snel terug (24 uur).
Hiermee bladert u snel vooruit (24 uur).
Druk herhaaldelijk op de groene toets.
Druk herhaaldelijk op de gele toets.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Volledige gids
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Di 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Vandaag 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Bekijken
INFO Informatie ■ Nu/Volgend ■ +24 uur ■ Sluiten
Gids voor Nu en Morgen
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Di 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Actueel Volgende
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Bekijken
INFO Informatie ■ Volledige gids ■ Sluiten
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:06Nederlands - 11
Kanalen beheren
Met dit menu kunt u favoriete kanalen toevoegen of verwijderen en de programmagids voor
digitale uitzendingen gebruiken.
Alle kanalen
Toont alle momenteel beschikbare kanalen.
Toegevoegde kanalen
Toont alle toegevoegde kanalen.
Voorkeurskanalen
Toont alle favoriete kanalen.
Druk op de afstandsbediening op de toets FAV.CH om de favoriete kanalen die u hebt ingesteld te selecteren.
Geprogrammeerd
Toont alle momenteel gereserveerde programma’s.
Selecteer een kanaal in het scherm Alle kanalen , Toegevoegde kanalen of Voorkeurskanalen door op de toetsen ▲ / ▼ te
drukken en door op de toets ENTERE te drukken. Vervolgens kunt u naar het geselecteerde kanaal kijken.
De gekleurde toetsen met de Channel List gebruiken
Rood (Type kanaal): Schakel tussen TV, Radio, Data / overig en Alles.
Groen (Zoom): Vergroot of verkleint een kanaalnummer.
Geel (Keuze): Selecteert meerdere kanaallijsten. U kunt de functies toevoegen / Verwijderen, Toevoegen als Favoriet /
Verw. uit Favorieten of Vergrend./ Slot uit tegelijkertijd voor meerdere kanalen uitvoeren. Selecteer de gewenste kanalen.
Druk op de gele toets om alle geselecteerde kanalen tegelijkertijd te selecteren. Het symbool c verschijnt links van de
geselecteerde kanalen.
TOOLS (Extra): Het menu Verwijderen (of Toevoegen), Toevoegen als Favoriet (of Verw. uit Favorieten), Vergrend.
(of Slot uit), Timerweergave, Kanaalnaam bewerken, Sorteren, Kanaalnummer wijzigen, Alles select. (of Niets
select.), Automatisch opslaan wordt weergegeven. (De optiemenu’s kunnen verschillen, afhankelijk van de situatie.)
Pictogrammen kanaalstatus worden weergegeven
A : Een analoog kanaal.
c: Selecteer een kanaal door op de gele toets te drukken.
* : Een kanaal als favoriet instellen.
( : Een programma dat momenteel wordt uitgezonden.
\ : Een vergrendeld kanaal.
) : Een gereserveerd programma
Optiemenu kanaallijst (in Alle kanalen/Toegevoegde kanalen/Voorkeurskanalen)
Druk op de toets TOOLS om de menuoptie te gebruiken.
Menuopties kunnen, afhankelijk van de kanaalstatus, verschillen.
Toevoegen / Verwijderen
U kunt een kanaal toevoegen of verwijderen uit de weergave van de door u gewenste
kanalen.
Alle verwijderde kanalen worden getoond op het menu Alle kanalen.
Een grijs gekleurd kanaal geeft aan dat het kanaal is verwijderd.
Het menu Toevoegen verschijnt alleen bij verwijderde kanalen.
U kunt ook op dezelfde manier een kanaal verwijderen uit het menu Toegevoegde
kanalen of Voorkeurskanalen.
Toevoegen als Favoriet / Verw. uit Favorieten
U kunt kanalen die u veelvuldig bekijkt, instellen als favorieten.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt ook items aan uw favorieten toevoegen (of daaruit
verwijderen) door Extra → Toevoegen als Favoriet(of Verw. uit Favorieten) te selecteren.
Het symbool ‘*’ wordt weergegeven en het kanaal wordt ingesteld als favoriet.
Alle favoriete kanalen worden getoond op het menu Voorkeurskanalen.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Toegevoegde kanalen
Alles ■ Type kanaal ■ Zoom ■ Keuze T Extra
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Toegevoegde kanalen
Alles ■ Type kanaal ■ Zoom ■ Keuze T Extra
Verwijderen
Toevoegen als Favoriet
Vergrend.
Timerweergave
Kanaalnaam bewerken
Sorteren
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:06Nederlands - 12
Vergrend. / Slot uit
U kunt een kanaal vergrendelen, zodat het kanaal niet geselecteerd en bekeken kan worden. Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar
wanneer Kinderslot is ingesteld op Aan. (zie pagina 21)
Het invoerscherm voor de pincode verschijnt. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
De standaardpincode van een nieuw TV-toestel is 0-0-0-0. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door PIN wijzigen uit het menu te
selecteren.
Het symbool \ wordt weergegeven en het kanaal wordt vergrendeld.
Timerweergave
Wanneer u een programma dat u wilt bekijken, reserveert, schakelt het kanaal automatisch naar het gereserveerde kanaal in de
kanaallijst, zelfs wanneer u een naar een ander kanaal kijkt. Stel eerst de huidige tijd in om een programma te reserveren. (Zie
pagina 19)
Alleen kanalen in het geheugen kunnen worden gereserveerd.
U kunt dag, maand, jaar, uur of minuut ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening instellen.
Een programma reserveren wordt getoond in het menu Geprogrammeerd.
Digitale programmagids en kijkreservering
Wanneer een digitaal kanaal is geselecteerd en u op de toets ► drukt, verschijnt de programmagids voor het kanaal. U kunt
een programma reserveren volgens de hierboven beschreven procedures.
Kanaalnaam bewerken (alleen analoge kanalen)
Kanalen kunnen worden voorzien van een aanduiding, zodat de corresponderende letters verschijnen wanneer het kanaal wordt
geselecteerd.
De namen van de digitale zendkanalen worden automatisch toegewezen en kunnen niet van een aanduiding worden voorzien.
Kanaalnummer wijzigen (alleen digitale kanalen)
U kunt het kanaalnummer ook bewerken door op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening te drukken.
Sorteren (alleen analoge kanalen)
Hiermee kunt u de programmanummers van de opgeslagen kanalen wijzigen. Deze bewerking kan nodig zijn na gebruik van de
functie kanalen automatisch opslaan.
Alles select. / Niets select.
Alles select.: u kunt alle kanalen in de kanalenlijst selecteren.
Niets select.: U kunt de selectie van alle kanalen uitschakelen.
U kunt alleen Niets select. kiezen wanneer er een kanaal is geselecteerd.
Automatisch opslaan
Zie pagina 8 voor meer informatie over het instellen.
Wanneer een kanaal is vergrendeld door de functie Kinderslot, verschijnt het invoerscherm voor de pincode.
Optiemenu Channel List (in Programmed)
U kunt een reservering bekijken, bewerken of verwijderen.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om de menuoptie te gebruiken.
Info wijzigen
Selecteren om een reservering te bekijken.
Progr. annuleren
Selecteren om een reservering te annuleren.
Informatie
Selecteren om een kijkreservering weer te geven. (U kunt de reserveringsinformatie ook
wijzigen.)
Alles select.
Alle gereserveerde programma’s selecteren.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 [ENG]The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Geprogrammeerd Alle ■ Zoom ■ Keuze T Extra E Informatie
Info wijzigen
Progr. annuleren
Informatie
Alles select.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:07Nederlands - 13
BEELD AANPASSEN
Het beeldmenu configureren
Modus
U kunt het beeld selecteren dat het beste overeenkomt met uw wensen.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de beeldmodus ook instellen door Extra →
Beeldmodus te selecteren.
Dynamisch
Hiermee stelt u het beeld in voor hoge definitie in een lichte ruimte.
Standaard
Hiermee stelt u het beeld in voor optimale weergave in een normale omgeving.
Film
Hiermee stelt u het beeld in voor weergave van films in een donkere ruimte.
Backlight / Contrast / Helderheid / Scherpte / Kleur / Tint (G/R)
Uw tv heeft verschillende instelmogelijkheden waarmee u de beeldkwaliteit kunt beheren.
Backlight: hierdoor wordt de helderheid van de LCD-achtergrondverlichting aangepast.
Contrast: hierdoor wordt het contrastniveau aangepast.
Helderheid: hierdoor wordt de helderheid van het beeld aangepast.
Scherpte: hierdoor wordt de randdefinitie van het beeld aangepast.
Kleur: hierdoor wordt de kleurintensiteit van het beeld aangepast.
Tint (G/R): hierdoor wordt de tint van de kleur van het beeld aangepast.
Selecteer eerst een beeldmodus die u wilt aanpassen. De aangepaste waarden worden voor iedere beeldmodus aangepast.
Wanneer u wijzigingen aanbrengt bij Backlight, Contrast, Helderheid, Scherpte, Kleur of Tint (G/R), wordt de OSD
dienovereenkomstig aangepast.
In analoog TV-, Ext.- en AV-modi van het PAL-systeem kunt u de functie Tint (G/R) niet gebruiken.
In de pc-modus kunt u alleen wijzigingen aanbrengen in Backlight, Contrast en Helderheid.
De instellingen voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangesloten op een ingang op de tv kunnen worden aangepast en
opgeslagen.
De hoeveelheid verbruikte energie kan sterk worden verminderd als de helderheid van het beeld wordt teruggebracht. Zo
worden de algemene verbruikskosten ook lager.
Geavanceerde instellingen
Bij deze nieuwe Samsung-tv kunt u zelfs meer precieze beeldinstellingen maken dan bij voorgaande modellen. Zie hieronder voor
het gedetailleerd instellen van het beeld.
Geavanceerde instellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar in de modi Standaard en Film.
In de pc-modus kunt u alleen wijzigingen aanbrengen in Gamma en Witbalans van de items uit het menu Geavanceerde
instellingen.
Zwarttinten → Uit / Donker / Donkerder / Donkerst
U kunt het zwartniveau op het scherm selecteren om de schermdiepte aan te passen.
Dynamisch contrast → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog
U kunt het schermcontrast aanpassen zodat u een optimaal contrast verkrijgt.
Gamma
U kunt de intensiteit van de primaire kleuren aanpassen (rood, groen, blauw).
Kleurruimte
Color Space is een kleurenmatrix opgebouwd uit rood, groen en blauw. Selecteer de Color Space van uw voorkeur om een zo
natuurgetrouw mogelijke kleurweergave te verkrijgen.
Eigen: Native Colour Space biedt diepe en levendige kleurnuances.
Auto: bij de instelling Auto worden de kleuren automatisch en natuurlijk aangepast op basis van de programmabron.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Modus : Standaard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Beeld
Kleur : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Geavanceerde instellingen ►
Afbeeldingsopties
Beeld resetten
Beeld
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:07Nederlands - 14
Witbalans
U kunt de kleurtemperatuur aanpassen voor meer natuurlijke beeldkleuren.
R-basis / G-basis / B-basis / R-niveau / G-niveau / B-niveau: U kunt alleen de kleurtemperatuur in de lichte gebieden
bijstellen door de waarden voor R, G, B te wijzigen. Alleen aanbevolen voor gevorderde gebruikers.
Reset: de fabrieksinstellingen van de aangepaste witbalans worden hersteld.
Huidkleur
U kunt de roze huidskleurtinten in het beeld benadrukken.
Als u de waarde van de aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het aangepaste scherm vernieuwd.
Randverbetering → Uit / Aan
U kunt randen van objecten benadrukken in het beeld.
Afbeeldingsopties
In pc-modus kunt u alleen in de opties voor Kleur tint en Formaat uit de items in de Afbeeldingsopties wijzigingen
aanbrengen.
Kleur tint → Koel / Normaal / Warm1 / Warm2
U kunt kiezen welke kleurtint u het prettigst vindt.
De instellingen voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangesloten op een ingang op de tv kunnen worden aangepast en
opgeslagen.
Warm1 of Warm2 is alleen ingeschakeld in de modus Film.
Afmet
U kunt het beeldformaat selecteren dat het beste overeenkomt met uw wensen.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de beeldgrootte ook instellen door Extra→ Beeldformaat
te selecteren.
Auto-breed: Hierdoor wordt het beeldformaat automatisch aangepast aan het beeldformaat 16:9.
16:9: hiermee stelt u het beeldformaat in op 16:9, geschikt voor dvd’s of breedbeelduitzendingen.
Breedbeeldzoom: Vergroot het formaat van het beeld verder dan 4:3.
Zoom: hiermee vergroot u het 16:9-breedbeeldformaat (in verticale richting) zodat het in het beeld past.
4:3: dit is de standaardinstelling voor een videofilm of bij normale uitzendingen.
Volledig scherm: Gebruik deze functie om het volledige, niet-afgekapte beeld weer te geven wanneer er een
HDMI- (720p / 1080i) of Component-signaal (1080i) wordt ontvangen.
Afhankelijk van de ingangsbron kunnen de opties voor beeldformaat variëren.
De beschikbare onderdelen kunnen, afhankelijk van de geselecteerde modus, verschillen.
In de pc-modus kunnen alleen de modi 16:9 en 4:3 worden aangepast.
De instellingen voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangesloten op een ingang op de tv kunnen worden aangepast en
opgeslagen.
Er kan tijdelijke beeldretentie optreden wanneer er langer dan twee uur een statisch beeld op de tv wordt weergegeven.
Breedbeeldzoom: Druk op de toets ► om Positie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Gebruik de toets
▲ of ▼ om het scherm naar boven of beneden te verplaatsen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Zoom: Druk op de toets ► om Positie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Gebruik de toets ▲ of ▼ om
het beeld naar boven of beneden te verplaatsen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Druk op de toets ► om Formaat
te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om het beeldformaat in verticale richting te
vergroten of te verkleinen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Na het selecteren van Volledig scherm in de modus HDMI (1080i) of Component (1080i): Selecteer Positie door op de toets
◄ of ► te drukken. Gebruik de toetsen ▲, ▼, ◄ of ► om de afbeelding te verplaatsen.
Reset: Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Reset te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. U kunt de instelling
initialiseren.
Als u de functie Volledig scherm gebruikt met een ingangssignaal HDMI 720p, wordt 1 kaderlijn verwijderd aan de bovenkant,
onderkant, linkerkant en rechterkant zoals in de functie Overscan.
Schermmodus → 16:9 / Breedbeeldzoom / Zoom / 4:3
Wanneer u het beeldformaat op een tv met een breedte van 16:9 instelt op Auto-breed, kunt u het gewenste beeldformaat
instellen op 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) of niets. Omdat er voor elk land in Europa een ander beeldformaat geldt, is deze
functie bedoeld om het juiste beeldformaat te kiezen.
16:9: stelt het beeld in op de 16:9 breedbeeldmodus.
Breedbeeldzoom: Vergroot het formaat van het beeld verder dan 4:3.
Zoom: hiermee vergroot u het beeld verticaal op het scherm.
4:3: stelt het beeld in op de 4:3 normale modus.
Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de modus Auto-breed.
Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus PC, Component of HDMI.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:07Nederlands - 15
Dig. ruisfilter → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog / Auto
Als het ontvangen tv-signaal zwak is, kunt u de functie Digital Noise Reduction activeren om statische ruis en echobeelden die
mogelijk op het scherm verschijnen, te verminderen.
Als het signaal zwak is, selecteert u één van de andere opties totdat de afbeelding het best wordt weergegeven.
HDMI-zwartniveau → Normaal / Laag
U kunt direct het zwartniveau op het scherm selecteren om de schermdiepte aan te passen.
Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar wanneer de externe ingang is verbonden met HDMI (RGB-signalen).
Filmmodus → Uit / Auto
De tv kan worden ingesteld om filmsignalen van alle bronnen automatisch te herkennen en te verwerken en om het beeld aan te
passen voor optimale kwaliteit.
Filmmodus wordt ondersteund in TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) en HDMI(480i / 1080i).
Beeld resetten → Beeldmodus resetten / Annulerenl
Hiermee reset u alle fabrieksinstellingen.
Selecteer een beeldmodus om te resetten. Het resetten wordt voor elke beeldmodus uitgevoerd.
Beeldmodus resetten: De huidige beeldwaarden worden vervangen door de standaardwaarden.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Uw tv als een computermonitor (pc) gebruiken
Software configureren (gebaseerd op Windows XP)
Hieronder ziet u de Windows-beeldscherminstellingen voor een standaardcomputer. De vensters op uw computer kunnen
enigszins afwijken, afhankelijk van de versie van Windows en de geïnstalleerde videokaart. Maar ook dan zijn in de meeste
gevallen dezelfde basisinstallatiegegevens van toepassing. (Neem contact op met de computerfabrikant of Samsung-leverancier
als dit niet het geval is.)
1. Klik eerst op het ‘configuratiescherm’ in het menu Start van Windows.
2. Wanneer het venster configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Beeldscherm’ om een dialoogvenster voor het beeldscherm te
openen.
3. Wanneer het configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Weergave’ om een dialoogvenster voor het beeldscherm te openen.
4. Selecteer het tabblad ‘Instellingen’ in het dialoogvenster.
Geef de juiste resolutie voor de monitor op: Optimaal: 1360 x 768 pixels
Als het dialoogvenster een optie bevat voor het instellen van de verticale frequentie, is de juiste waarde ‘60’ of ‘60 Hz’. Klik
anders op ‘OK’ om het dialoogvenster te sluiten.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:07Nederlands - 16
Weergavemodi
Zowel de beeldpositie als de beeldgrootte varieert afhankelijk van het type monitor en de bijbehorende resolutie. De resoluties in de
tabel worden aangeraden.
D-Sub en HDMI/DVI Invoer
Modus Resolutie
Horizontale frequentie
(KHz)
Verticale frequentie
(Hz)
Pixel Clockfrequentie
(MHz)
Sync-polariteit
(H / V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelverbinding, moet u de HDMI IN 1(DVI) -aansluiting gebruiken.
De interlace-modus wordt niet ondersteund.
De tv werkt mogelijk niet normaal als een afwijkend videoformaat wordt geselecteerd.
De Separate- en Composite-modi worden ondersteund. SOG wordt niet ondersteund.
De tv instellen voor uw pc
Vooraf instellen: druk op de toets SOURCE om de pc-modus te selecteren.
Autom. afstellen
Via Autom. afstellen wordt het pc-scherm van de tv automatisch aangepast op het
binnenkomende pc-videosignaal. De waarden voor fijnheid, grofheid en positie worden
automatisch aangepast.
Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de DVI-HDMI-modus.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt Autom. afstellen ook
instellen door Extra → Autom. afstellen te kiezen.
Scherm
Grof / Fijn
U past de beeldkwaliteit aan om beeldruis te verwijderen of te verminderen. Als de ruis niet verdwijnt door het kanaal nauwkeurig
af te stemmen, stel dan de frequentie zo goed mogelijk in (Grof) en voer opnieuw de instelling Fine-tune uit. Stel het beeld
opnieuw in het midden van het scherm in nadat de ruis is verminderd.
Positie pc
Pas de positie van het pc-scherm aan als deze niet gelijk is aan het tv-scherm. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de verticale positie
aan te passen. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de horizontale-positie aan te passen.
Beeld resetten
U kunt alle beeldinstellingen vervangen door fabrieksinstellingen.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Autom. afstellen ►
Scherm
Geavanceerde instellingen
Afbeeldingsopties
Beeld resetten
Beeld
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:07Nederlands - 1
GELUID AANPASSEN
Het geluidsmenu configureren
Modus → Standaard / Muziek / Film / Heldere spraak / Aangepast
U kunt een geluidsmodus selecteren die bij uw persoonlijke voorkeuren past.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het geluid ook
instellen door Extra → Geluidmodus te selecteren.
Standaard
Selecteert de normale geluidsmodus.
Muziek
Geeft voorrang aan muziek ten opzichte van stemmen.
Film
Geeft optimaal geluid voor films.
Heldere spraak
Geeft voorrang aan stemmen ten opzichte van muziek.
Aangepast
Herstelt uw aangepaste geluidsinstellingen.
Toonregeling
U kunt de geluidsinstellingen aanpassen aan uw persoonlijke voorkeuren.
Modus
U kunt een geluidsmodus selecteren die bij uw persoonlijke voorkeuren past.
Balans
Regelt de balans tussen de linker- en de rechterspeakers.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Aanpassing bandbreedte)
Het niveau van verschillende bandbreedtes aanpassen
Reset
Standaardinstellingen van de equalizer resetten.
SRS TruSurround HD → Uit / Aan
TruSurround HD is een gepatenteerde SRS-technologie die het probleem oplost dat ontstaat wanneer 5,1-multikanaalgeluid via
twee luidsprekers wordt afgespeeld. TruSurround produceert een meeslepend, virtueel surroundgeluid via ieder afspeelsysteem
met twee luidsprekers, waaronder ook interne luidsprekers van de televisie. Het is volledig compatibel met alle vormen van
multichannel.
Gesproken taal (alleen digitale kanalen)
U kunt de standaardwaarde voor audiotalen wijzigen. Hiermee geeft u de taalinformatie voor het inkomende signaal weer.
U kunt alleen een taal selecteren uit de talen waarin wordt uitgezonden.
Deze functie kan worden geselecteerd terwijl u naar een digitaal kanaal kijkt.
Geluidsformaat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (alleen digitale kanalen)
Wanneer de hoofdluidspreker en de audio-ontvanger beide geluid voortbrengen, kan er echo optreden omdat geluid in de
hoofdluidspreker en de audio-ontvanger niet op gelijke snelheid wordt gedecodeerd. Gebruik in dat geval de functie tv-luidspreker.
Het geluidsformaat wordt weergegeven overeenkomstig het uitzendsignaal.
Deze functie kan worden geselecteerd terwijl u naar een digitaal kanaal kijkt.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Modus : Aangepast ►
Toonregeling
SRS TruSurround HD : Uit
Gesproken taal : - - -
Geluidsformaat : - - -
Audiobeschrijving
Auto Volume : Uit
Geluid
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:07Nederlands - 18
Audiobeschrijving (alleen digitale kanalen)
Dit is een ondersteunende geluidsfunctie die een aanvullend geluidsspoor laat horen voor blinden en slechtzienden. Deze functie
verwerkt het geluidsspoor (Audio Stream) voor de AD (Audio Description), wanneer dat samen met het hoofdgeluid (Main audio)
wordt uitgezonden. Gebruikers kunnen de Audio Description Aan of Uit zetten en het volume bepalen.
Druk op de toets AD op de afstandsbediening om Uit of Aan te selecteren.
Audiobeschrijving → Uit / Aan
De geluidsbeschrijving aan-of uitzetten.
Volume
U kunt het volume van de geluidsbeschrijving aanpassen.
Volume is actief wanneer Audiobeschrijving is ingesteld op Aan.
Auto Volume → Uit / Aan
Elk zendstation kent andere signaalkenmerken, waardoor het lastig kan zijn het volume steeds opnieuw in te stellen wanneer
u van kanaal verandert. Met deze functie kunt u het volume van het gewenste kanaal automatisch laten instellen. Bij een hoog
modulatiesignaal wordt de geluidsweergave verlaagd en bij een laag modulatiesignaal wordt de geluidsweergave verhoogd.
Luidspreker selecteren → Ext. luidspreker / TV-luidspreker
Indien u het geluid door aparte luidsprekers wilt horen, schakelt u de interne versterker uit.
De volumetoetsen en de toets MUTE zijn niet in werking wanneer Luidspreker selecteren is ingesteld op Ext. luidspreker.
Wanneer u Ext. luidspreker selecteert in het menu Luidspreker selecteren worden de geluidsinstellingen beperkt.
Geluid resetten → Alles resetten / Geluidsmodus resetten Reset geluidsm. / Annuleren
U kunt de geluidsinstellingen resetten naar de fabrieksinstellingen.
De geluidsmodus selecteren
U kunt de geluidsmodus instellen in het menu Extra. Wanneer u de optie Dual l ll instelt, wordt de huidige geluidsmodus op het
scherm weergegeven.
Type geluid Dual 1 / 2 Standaard
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatisch wijzigen
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatisch wijzigen
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Wanneer het stereosignaal te zwak is en er automatische zenderverdringing optreedt, kunt u beter naar mono overschakelen.
Deze functie wordt alleen geactiveerd in stereogeluidssignaal. Het wordt gedeactiveerd in monogeluidssignaal.
Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de tv-modus.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:08Nederlands - 19
INSTELLINGEN
Het instellingenmenu gebruiken
Taalkeuze
U kunt de menutaal instellen.
Tijd
Klok
Het is noodzakelijk de klok in te stellen om de verschillende functies van de tv te kunnen
gebruiken.
De huidige tijd wordt telkens weergegeven wanneer u op de toets INFO drukt.
Als u de voedingskabel hebt losgekoppeld, moet u de klok opnieuw instellen.
Klokmodus
U kunt de huidige tijd handmatig of automatisch instellen.
Auto: hierdoor wordt de huidige tijd automatisch ingesteld door de tijd van de digitale uitzending te gebruiken.
Handm.: hierdoor wordt de huidige tijd handmatig op een bepaalde tijd ingesteld.
Afhankelijk van de zender en het signaal wordt de tijd wellicht niet juist ingesteld. Als dit gebeurt, stelt u de tijd handmatig
in.
De antenne of kabel moet aangesloten zijn om de tijd automatisch in te kunnen stellen.
Klok instellen
U kunt de huidige tijd handmatig instellen.
Stel dit item in wanneer u Klokmodus op Handm. hebt ingesteld.
U kunt de dag, de maand, het jaar, het uur en de minuut ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening
instellen.
Slaaptimer → Uit / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
De functie sleep timer schakelt automatisch uit na een van tevoren ingestelde tijd (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 en 180 minuten).
De tv schakelt automatisch over op stand-by wanneer de timer 0 bereikt.
Om de functie Slaaptimer te annuleren, selecteert u Uit.
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de sleep timer ook instellen door Extra → Slaaptimer te
selecteren.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
U kunt drie verschillende timerinstellingen opgeven. U moet eerst de klok instellen.
Inschakeltijd: het uur en de minuut instellen en activeren / deactiveren. (Als u de timer met de gewenste instelling wilt
activeren, kiest u Activeren.)
Uitschakeltijd: het uur en de minuut instellen en activeren / deactiveren. (Als u de timer met de gewenste instelling wilt
activeren, kiest u Activeren.)
Volume: kies het volume waarop de tv wordt aangezet.
Antenne: Selecteer Ant of Kabel.
Kanaal: selecteer het gewenste kanaal.
Herhalen: Selecteer Eenmaal, Dagelijks, Ma~Vr, Ma~Za, Za~Zo of Handm..
Wanneer Handm. is geselecteerd, kunt u op de toets ► drukken om de gewenste dag te selecteren. Druk op de toets
ENTERE op de gewenste dag en het c -symbool verschijnt.
U kunt de uren en minuten ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening instellen.
Automatisch uitschakelen
Als u de timer instelt op aan, schakelt de televisie uiteindelijk uit wanneer binnen 3 uur na het automatisch inschakelen van
het toestel geen toets wordt ingedrukt. Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de timermodus aan. Met deze functie wordt
oververhitting tegengegaan, wat kan gebeuren als het toestel te lang ingeschakeld blijft staan.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Taalkeuze : Nederlands ►
Tijd
Uitzenden
Beveiliging
Algemeen
Instellingen
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:08Nederlands - 20
Uitzenden
Ondertiteling
U kunt de ondertiteling activeren en deactiveren. Gebruik dit menu om de modus Subtitle in te stellen. Normaal in dit menu is
basisondertiteling en Slechthorenden is ondertiteling voor doven en slechthorenden.
Ondertiteling → Uit / Aan: Schakelt ondertitels in of uit.
Modus → Normaal / Slechthorenden: stelt de ondertitelingsmodus in.
Ondertitelingstaal: stelt de ondertitelingstaal in.
Wanneer u naar een programma kijkt dat de functie Slechthorenden niet ondersteunt, wordt Normaal automatisch
geactiveerd, zelfs wanneer de modus Slechthorenden is geselecteerd.
Engels is de standaardtaal als de geselecteerde taal niet beschikbaar is in de uitzending.
U kunt deze opties eenvoudig selecteren door op de toets SUBT.op de afstandsbediening te drukken.
Digitale tekst → Deactiveren / Activeren (alleen UK)
Als het programma wordt uitgezonden met digitale tekst, is deze functie ingeschakeld.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Een internationale standaard voor gegevenscoderingssystemen die in multimedia en hypermedia worden gebruikt. Gegevens
worden gecodeerd op een hoger niveau dan het MPEG-systeem, waaronder hypermedia voor gegevenskoppeling, zoals
stilstaande beelden, tekstservice, animatie, beeld- en videobestanden en multimediagegevens. MHEG is een technologie
voor interactie met de gebruiker tijdens runtime en wordt toegepast op verschillende gebieden, waaronder VOD (Video On
Demand), ITV (interactieve tv), EC (e-commerce), afstandsonderwijs, telefonische vergaderingen, digitale bibliotheken en
netwerkspellen.
Teleteksttaal
U kunt de taal voor teletekst instellen door deze te selecteren.
Engels is de standaardtaal als de geselecteerde taal niet beschikbaar is in de uitzending.
Voorkeur
Eerste taal voor audio / weede taal voor audio / Eerste taal ondertitel / Tweede taal ondertitel / Eerste taal teletekst /
Tweede taal teletekst
Met deze functie kunnen gebruikers een van de talen selecteren. De geselecteerde taal wordt standaard gebruikt wanneer u
een kanaal selecteert.
Als u de taalinstelling wijzigt, worden de Ondertitelingstaal, Gesproken taal en Teleteksttaal in het menu Taalkeuze
automatisch gewijzigd in de geselecteerde taal.
Met Ondertitelingstaal, Gesproken taal en Teleteksttaal in het menu Taalkeuze geeft u een lijst weer met talen die door het
huidige kanaal worden ondersteund. De geselecteerde taal is gemarkeerd. Als u deze taalinstelling wijzigt, is de nieuwe
selectie alleen geldig voor het huidige kanaal. De gewijzigde instelling is niet van invloed op de instellingen voor Eerste taal
ondertitel, Eerste taal voor audio, of Eerste taal teletekst van het menu Preference.
Algemene interface
CI-menu
Hiermee kunt u het CAM-menu selecteren.
Selecteer het CI Menu op basis van het menu PC Card.
Toepassingsinfo
Met deze optie geeft u informatie over een CAM in de CI-sleuf weer.
Application Info heeft betrekking op de CI-kaart. U kunt de CAM altijd installeren, ongeacht of de tv is in- of uitgeschakeld.
1. De CI CAM-module kunt u verkrijgen bij uw lokale leverancier of door deze telefonisch te bestellen.
2. Duw de CI-kaart in de CAM in de richting van de pijl op zijn plaats.
3. Plaats de CAM met de CI-kaart in de sleuf voor de algemene interface.
(Duw de CAM in de richting van de pijl volledig in de sleuf.)
4. Controleer of u een beeld op een kanaal met een vervormd signaal kunt bekijken.
CAM wordt niet ondersteund in sommige landen en regio's. Controleer dit bij uw geautoriseerde verkoper.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:08Nederlands - 21
Beveiliging
Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is 0-0-0-0. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door PIN wijzigen uit het menu te
selecteren.
Kinderslot → Uit / Aan
Met deze functie kunt u door middel van het uitschakelen van beeld en geluid voorkomen dat onbevoegde gebruikers, zoals
kinderen, ongepaste programma’s bekijken.
U kunt sommige kanalen in de kanalenlijst vergrendelen. (zie pagina 12)
Kinderslot is alleen beschikbaar in de tv-modus.
Kinderslot
Door een pincode (persoonlijk identificatienummer) van vier cijfers in te stellen, kunt u met deze functie voorkomen dat
onbevoegde gebruikers, zoals kinderen, ongeschikte programma’s bekijken.
Het item Kinderslot verschilt per land.
Wanneer Kinderslot is ingesteld, wordt het symbool ‘\’ weergegeven.
Alles mag: druk hierop om alle tv-ratings (leeftijdsbeperkingen) te ontgrendelen.
Alles blok: druk hierop om alle tv-ratings (leeftijdsbeperkingen) te vergrendelen.
PIN wijzigen
U kunt uw pincode die voor het instellen van de tv is vereist, wijzigen.
Als u de pincode bent vergeten, drukt u achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen van de afstandsbediening zodat de pincode
opnieuw wordt ingesteld op 0-0-0-0: POWER (Uit) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Aan).
Algemeen
Spelmodus → Uit / Aan
Wanneer u een spelcomputer aansluit, zoals PlayStation™ of Xbox™, kunt u een realistischere spelervaring krijgen door het menu
Game te selecteren.
Annulleer de game-modus in het instellingenmenu om de spelcomputer los te koppelen en een ander extern apparaat aan te
sluiten.
Als u het tv-menu weergeeft in de Spelmodus, zal het beeld een beetje trillen.
Spelmodus is niet beschikbaar in de normale TV- en PC-modi.
Als Spelmodus op Aan staat:
wordt de beeldmodus automatisch gewijzigd naar Standaard en kan de gebruiker de modus niet wijzigen.
wordt de geluidsmodus automatisch gewijzigd naar Aangepast en kan de gebruiker de modus niet wijzigen. Pas het
geluid aan met de equalizer.
De functie Reset Sound is geactiveerd. Als u de functie Reset selecteert na het instellen van de equalizer, worden de
standaardinstellingen van de equalizer hersteld.
Spaarstand → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog / Beeld uit / Auto
Met deze functie kunt u de helderheid van de tv aanpassen om het energieverbruik te verminderen. Wanneer u ‘s avonds tv kijkt,
kunt u de modus Spaarstand op Hoog zetten. Zo kunt u voorkomen dat uw ogen vermoeid raken en tevens besparen op het
energieverbruik.
Als u de optie Beeld uit selecteert, wordt het scherm uitgeschakeld en hoort u slechts het geluid. Druk op een willekeurige toets
om Beeld uit ongedaan te maken.
In het menu Tools wordt de functie Beeld uit niet ondersteund..
Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de optie Spaarstand ook instellen door
Extra→ Spaarstand te selecteren.
Melodie → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog
U kunt een melodie instellen om af te laten spelen bij het in- of uitschakelen van de tv.
De melodie wordt niet afgespeeld
Wanneer er geen geluid wordt weergegeven omdat de toets MUTE is ingedrukt.
Wanneer er geen geluid wordt weergegeven omdat de volumetoets (–) is ingedrukt.
Wanneer de tv door de functie sleep timer is uitgeschakeld.
❑
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
T
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:08Nederlands - 22
INVOER / ONDERSTEUNING
Het Invoermenu gebruiken
Bronlijst
Hiermee kunt u de tv of andere externe ingangsbronnen zoals dvd-spelers, Blu-ray-spelers
en satellietontvangers die aangesloten zijn op de tv, selecteren. Hiermee kunt u de gewenste
ingangsbron selecteren.
Druk op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening om een externe signaalbron weer te
geven. U kunt de modus TV selecteren door op de toets TV te drukken.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI1 / DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
U kunt alleen de externe apparaten selecteren die op de tv zijn aangesloten. In de
Bronlijst worden aangesloten ingangen gemarkeerd en bovenaan de lijst geplaatst.
Ingangen die niet zijn aangesloten, worden onderaan de lijst geplaatst.
Ext. en PC blijven altijd geactiveerd.
TOOLS (Extra): Geeft de menu’s Naam wijzigen en Informatie weer.
Naam wijzigen
Geef het apparaat aangesloten op de ingangen een naam om de selectie van ingangsbron makkelijker te maken.
VCR / DVD / Kabel STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV-ontvanger / Spelcomputer / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV /
IPTV / Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
Wanneer u een HDMI/DVI-kabel op de HDMI IN 1(DVI)-poort aansluit, dient u de modus HDMI1/DVI in de Naam wijzigen van
de modus Invoer in te stellen op DVI of DVI PC. In dit geval is een afzonderlijke geluidsverbinding vereist.
Het Ondersteuningsmenu gebruiken
Zelfdiagnose
Het beeld testen
Als u denkt een probleem te hebben met het beeld voert u de Picture test uit. Controleer het
kleurenpatroon onderin het beeld om te bepalen of het probleem nog aanwezig is.
Ja: Als het testpatroon niet wordt weergegeven of als er ruis optreedt in het testpatroon
kiest u Ja. Er kan een probleem zijn met de tv. Neem contact op met het belcentrum van
Samsung voor hulp.
Nee: als het testpatroon juist wordt weergegeven kiest u Nee. Er kan een probleem zijn
met uw externe apparatuur. Controleer uw aansluitingen. Als het probleem zich blijft
voordoen, raadpleegt u de gebruikershandleiding van het extern apparaat.
Het geluid testen
Als u denkt een probleem te hebben met het geluid voert u de Sound test uit. U kunt het
geluid controleren door een ingebouwd melodiegeluid af te spelen via de tv. Het bericht ‘Blijft het probleem zich voordoen bij de
geluidstest?’ verschijnt op het scherm.
Als u geen geluid hoort via de luidsprekers van de tv controleert u voordat u de Sound test uitvoert of Luidspreker selecteren
is ingesteld op TV-luidspreker in het menu Geluid.
Het melodie kunt u zelfs tijdens de test horen als Luidspreker selecteren is ingesteld op Ext. luidspreker of als het geluid is
gedempt doordat de toets MUTE is ingedrukt op de afstandsbediening.
Ja: Als u tijdens de Sound test alleen geluid hoort uit één luidspreker of helemaal geen geluid hoort, kiest u Ja. Er kan een
probleem zijn met de tv. Neem contact op met het belcentrum van Samsung voor hulp.
Nee: Als u geluid hoort uit de luidsprekers, kiest u Nee. Er kan een probleem zijn met uw externe apparatuur. Controleer uw
aansluitingen. Als het probleem zich blijft voordoen, raadpleegt u de gebruikershandleiding van het extern apparaat.
Signaalinformatie (alleen digitale kanalen)
De ontvangstkwaliteit van analoge kanalen kan variëren van 'geruis' tot helder, maar digitale (HDTV)-kanalen hebben altijd
perfecte ontvangst. Zo niet dan ontvangt u de kanalen helemaal niet. In tegenstelling tot analoge kanalen kunt u digitale kanalen
dus niet verder afstellen. U kunt daarentegen wel uw antenne afstellen om de ontvangst van de beschikbare digitale kanalen te
verbeteren.
Als de signaalsterktemeter aangeeft dat het signaal zwak is, verstelt u uw antenne handmatig om de signaalsterkte te
versterken. Blijf de antenne bijstellen totdat u de positie vindt met de sterkste signaal.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Zelfdiagnose ►
Software Upgrade
Handleiding HD-verbindingen
Contact opnemen met Samsung
Ondersteuning
Bronlijst
Naam wijzigen
Invoer
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:08Nederlands - 23
Software upgrade
Regelmatig worden software-upgrades verzonden met het normale televisiesignaal om uw
product synchroon te laten lopen met de nieuwe mogelijkheden van digitale televisie. Deze
signalen worden automatisch gedetecteerd, waarna de balk voor software-upgrades wordt
weergegeven. U krijgt de optie om de upgrade te installeren.
Via USB
Plaats een USB-geheugenschijf met de firmware-upgrade in de tv. Let op dat u tijdens het
toevoegen van upgrades het apparaat niet uitschakelt of de USB-geheugenschijf verwijdert.
Na voltooiing van het upgraden van de firmware schakelt de tv automatisch uit en aan.
Controleer de firmwareversie nadat de update is voltooid. Wanneer de software is bijgewerkt,
keren de video- en audio-instellingen die u heeft gemaakt terug naar de standaard(fabrieks)instellingen.
Wij raden u aan uw instellingen te noteren, zodat u deze eenvoudig kunt herstellen na de upgrade.
Via kanaal
Hiermee worden upgrades voor de software die het gebruik maakt van het uitzendkanaal uitgevoerd.
Als de functie tijdens de softwareoverdracht wordt geselecteerd, zoekt de functie naar beschikbare software en downloadt het
deze.
De benodigde tijd voor het downloaden van de software wordt door de signaalstatus bepaald.
Upgrade standby-modus
Selecteer On door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken om de software-upgrade voort te zetten terwijl de stroom is ingeschakeld.
45 minuten nadat de tv op stand-by is gezet, wordt automatisch een handmatige upgrade uitgevoerd. Omdat de tv intern wordt
ingeschakeld, kan dit ertoe leiden dat op de LCD-tv vage beelden verschijnen. Dit kan meer dan een uur duren totdat de softwareupgrade is voltooid.
Alternatieve software
Hierdoor wordt informatie over de softwareversie weergeven.
Handleiding HD-verbindingen
Dit menu geeft de verbindingsmethode weer die de beste kwaliteit biedt voor de HD-tv.
Raadpleeg deze informatie wanneer u externe apparaten op de tv aansluit.
Contact opnemen met Samsung
Bekijk deze informatie wanneer uw tv niet naar behoren werkt of wanneer u de software wilt bijwerken.
U kunt de informatie over het belcentrum, het product en de downloadmethode van softwarebestanden bekijken.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Achterpaneel tv
USB-geheugenschijf
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:09Nederlands - 24
AANBEVELINGEN VOOR GEBRUIK
Teletekstfunctie
De meeste televisiekanalen bieden tekstinformatiediensten via teletekst. Op de indexpagina van de teletekstdienst vindt
u informatie over het gebruik van de dienst. Ook kunt u naar wens verschillende opties selecteren met de toetsen op de
afstandsbediening.
Voor een juiste weergave van teletekstinformatie is een stabiele kanaalontvangst vereist. Anders kan bepaalde informatie
ontbreken of worden bepaalde pagina’s niet weergegeven.
U kunt de teletekstpagina’s veranderen met de numerieke toetsen op de afstandsbediening.
1 0 (modus)
Druk op deze toets om de
teletekstmodus (LIST/FLOF) te
selecteren. Als u in de LIST-modus
op deze toets drukt, schakelt u over
naar de modus Opslaan in lijst. In deze
modus kunt u met behulp van de toets
8(opslaan) teletekstpagina’s in een
lijst opslaan.
2 5 (tonen)
Druk op deze toets om verborgen tekst
weer te geven (bijvoorbeeld antwoorden
op quizvragen). Druk nogmaals op deze
toets om terug te keren naar de normale
weergave.
3 4 (formaat)
Druk op deze toets om de tekst in de
bovenste helft van het scherm op dubbel
formaat weer te geven. Druk nogmaals
op deze toets om de tekst in de onderste
helft van het scherm op dubbel formaat
weer te geven. Druk nogmaals op deze
knop om terug te keren naar de normale
weergave.
4 8 (opslaan)
Hiermee kunt u teletekstpagina’s
opslaan.
5 Gekleurde toetsen (rood/groen/geel/
blauw)
Als een zendstation gebruikmaakt
van het FASTEXT-systeem, worden
de verschillende onderwerpen op een
teletekstpagina van een kleurcodering
voorzien, die u kunt selecteren met
behulp van de gekleurde toetsen.
Druk op de gewenste toets. De pagina
wordt weergegeven met aanvullende
kleurcodegegevens, die op dezelfde
wijze kunnen worden geselecteerd.
Om de vorige of volgende pagina weer
te geven drukt u op de toets met de
overeenkomstige kleur.
6/ (Teletekst aan/mix)
Druk op deze toets om teletekst te
activeren nadat u het kanaal dat
de teletekstdienst aanbiedt, hebt
geselecteerd. Druk tweemaal op deze
knop om het huidige televisiebeeld over
de teletekstpagina heen weer te geven.
7 : (sluiten)
De teletekstweergave verlaten.
8 1 (subpagina)
Druk op deze toets om de beschikbare
subpagina’s weer te geven.
9 2 (volgende pagina)
Druk op deze toets om de volgende
teletekstpagina weer te geven.
0 3 (vorige pagina)
Druk op deze toets om de vorige
teletekstpagina weer te geven.
! 9 (vastzetten)
Druk op deze toets als u een roulerende
pagina wilt vastzetten. Druk nogmaals op
deze toets om het rouleren te hervatten.
@ 6 (index)
Druk op deze toets voor weergave van de
indexpagina (inhoudspagina) tijdens het
gebruik van teletekst.
# 7 (annuleren)
Hiermee bekijkt u de uitzending wanneer
u een pagina zoekt.
De teletekstpagina’s zijn in zes categorieën verdeeld:
Onderdeel Inhoud
A Geselecteerd paginanummer.
B Aanduiding zendstation.
C Huidig paginanummer of zoekindicaties.
D Datum en tijd.
E Tekst.
F Statusinformatie.
FASTEXT-informatie.
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:09Nederlands - 25
Teletekstinformatie is vaak verdeeld over verschillende pagina’s die achtereenvolgens worden weergegeven. U kunt
rechtstreeks naar deze pagina’s gaan door:
het paginanummer in te voeren
een titel in een lijst te selecteren
een gekleurde kop te selecteren (FASTEXT-systeem)
Het teletekstniveau dat door de TV wordt ondersteund, is versie 2.5. Hiermee kunnen extra beelden en tekst worden
weergegeven.
Afhankelijk van de transmissie kunnen er lege panelen aan de zijkant worden weergegeven wanneer teletekst wordt
weergegeven.
In die gevallen worden er geen extra beelden of tekst verzonden.
Oudere TV’s die versie 2.5 niet ondersteunen, kunnen geen extra beelden of tekst weergeven, ongeacht de
teleteksttransmissie.
Druk op de toets TV om de teletekstweergave te verlaten.
Teletext 16:9, beeld is 16:9
De standaard bevestigen
Eerst doen: plaats de richtvoet en dekselkraag op de voet en maak deze met de
schroeven vast. Geldt alleen voor het 32-inch model.
N
1. Bevestig uw LCD-tv aan de standaard.
De tv moet door twee of meer mensen worden gedragen.
Zorg dat u weet welke kant de voorkant en welke kant de achterkant van de standaard
is.
Om te zorgen dat de tv op de juiste manier op de standaard is bevestigd, dient u niet
te veel druk naar beneden uit te oefenen op de linker- en rechterbovenkanten van de
tv.
2. Gebruik twee schroeven op positie 1 en twee schroeven op positie 2.
Zet het product staand neer en draai de schroeven vast. Als u de schroeven vastdraait
terwijl de LCD-tv nog ligt, kan het naar een kant kantelen.
N
N
N
N
De muurbevestiging installeren
Met de onderdelen voor muurbevestiging (apart verkrijgbaar) kunt u de TV aan de muur
bevestigen.
Zie de instructies bij de onderdelen voor muurbevestiging als u wilt weten hoe u de
muurbevestiging installeert. Neem contact op met een technicus voor hulp alvorens de
muurbeugel te bevestigen.
Samsung Electronics is niet verantwoordelijk voor schade aan het product of voor
verwondingen die u zelf of anderen oplopen wanneer u besluit de TV zelfstandig te
installeren.
Monteer de muurbevestiging niet terwijl de TV is ingeschakeld. Dit kan resulteren in
persoonlijk letsel door elektrische schokken.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Achterkant
Voorkant
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:10Nederlands - 26
De Kensington-slot tegen diefstal gebruiken
Het Kensington-slot is een vergrendeling waarmee u het systeem fysiek kunt vastzetten
voor gebruik in het openbaar. Afhankelijk van de fabrikant, kan het uiterlijk en de
vergrendelmethode enigszins afwijken van de afbeelding. Raadpleeg de handleiding bij het
Kensington-slot voor correct gebruik. De vergrendeling moet apart worden aangeschaft. De
plaats van het Kensington-slot kan variëren afhankelijk van het model.
1. Plaats het vergrendelingsapparaat in het Kensington-slot op de LCD-tv (1) en draai
deze in de vergrendelingsrichting (2).
2. Sluit de Kensington-vergrendelingskabel aan (3).
3. Maak het Kensington-slot vast aan een bureau of een ander zwaar voorwerp dat niet
kan worden verplaatst.
3
1
2
Installatieruimte
Bewaar de nodige afstand tussen het product en andere objecten (bijv. muren) zodat er een goede ventilatie mogelijk is.
Wanneer u dat niet doet, kunnen er door een stijging van de interne temperatuur brand of problemen bij het product ontstaan.
Plaats het product op zo’n manier dat de in de afbeelding aangegeven vereiste afstanden worden aangehouden.
Bij gebruik van een voet of muurbevestiging mogen er alleen onderdelen worden gebruikt die door Samsung Electronics zijn
geleverd.
Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot lichamelijk
letsel doordat het product valt.
Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot brand
vanwege een door een slechte ventilatie gestegen interne temperatuur.
Het uiterlijk van het product kan van het afgebeelde apparaat afwijken.
Bij installatie van het product met een voet Bij installatie van het product met een muurbevestiging
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:10Nederlands - 2
De TV vastzetten aan de wand
Let op: Als u duwt of trekt aan de TV of op de TV klimt, kan deze vallen. Zie er met name op toe dat uw kinderen
niet aan de TV gaan hangen of deze uit balans brengen; De TV kan dan omvallen, hetgeen verwondingen
kan veroorzaken of zelfs fatale gevolgen kan hebben. Neem alle voorzorgsmaatregelen die in de bijgesloten
veiligheidsfolder worden genoemd. Om veiligheidsredenen is het raadzaam de antivalvoorziening te installeren
om de stabiliteit van het toestel te verhogen.
Voorkomen dat de TV valt:
1. Plaats de schroeven in de beugels en bevestig deze stevig aan de wand. Controleer of
de schroeven stevig in de wand zijn gedraaid.
Afhankelijk van het wandtype hebt u mogelijk aanvullend materiaal nodig om het
geheel te verankeren.
De benodigde beugels, schroeven en draad worden niet meegeleverd. Deze
moeten apart worden aangeschaft.
2. Verwijder de schroeven in het midden aan de achterkant van de tv, steek de schroeven
door de beugels en draai de schroeven weer vast in de tv.
Het is mogelijk dat de schroeven niet bij het product worden meegeleverd. In dat
geval moet u schroeven met de volgende specificaties aanschaffen.
Specificaties van de schroeven
Voor een LCD TV van 43-74 cm: M4 X L15
Voor een LCD TV van 81-102 cm: M6 X L15
3. Verbind de beugels die aan de TV zijn bevestigd met een sterke draad aan de beugels
die aan de wand zijn bevestigd en knoop de draad stevig vast.
Plaats de TV dicht bij de wand zodat deze niet achterover kan vallen.
Het is veilig de draad zodanig aan te brengen dat de beugels die aan de wand zijn
bevestigd zich boven de beugels op de TV of op gelijke hoogte daarmee bevinden.
Haal de draad los voordat u de TV verplaatst.
4. Controleer of alle bevestigingen goed zijn aangebracht. Controleer de
bevestigingspunten regelmatig op tekenen van moeheid of verzwakking. Neem in geval
van twijfel over de veiligheid van de bevestiging contact op met een professionele
installateur.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Wand
Wand
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:11Nederlands - 28
Problemen oplossen
Als u vragen hebt over uw tv, raadpleegt u eerst deze lijst. Als geen van deze tips voor probleemoplossing van toepassing is,
brengt u een bezoek aan de website www.samsung.com en klikt u vervolgens op Support. U kunt echter ook contact opnemen met
het Call Center in de lijst op de laatste pagina.
Probleem Oplossing
Beeldkwaliteit
Voer als eerste de functie Het beeld testen uit om te controleren of het testbeeld correct
wordt weergegeven op uw tv.
Ga naar MENU - Ondersteuning - Zelfdiagnose - Het beeld testen
Als het testbeeld correct wordt weergegeven, wordt het slechte beeld mogelijk veroorzaakt
door de bron of het signaal.
●
Het tv-beeld ziet er niet zo fraai
uit als in de winkel.
Als u over een analoge kabl/set-top box beschikt, voert u een upgrade uit naar een box.
Gebruik HDMI- of Component-kabel om beelden van HD-kwaliteit weer te geven.
Kabel/satellietontvanger: Probeer HD-zenders (High Definition) weer te geven vanuit de
zenderlijst.
Antenneverbinding: Probeer HD-zenders weer te geven nadat u de automatische
zenderprogrammering hebt uitgevoerd.
Bij veel HD-zenders is sprake van het opschalen van SD-inhoud (Standard Definition).
Stel de resolutie voor de video-uitvoer van de kabel-/set-top box in op 1080i of 720p.
Controleer of u vanaf de minimaal aanbevolen afstand naar de tv kijkt op basis van het
formaat en de definitie van het signaal dat wordt weergegeven.
●
●
●
N
●
●
Beeld is vervormd:
macroblok, klein blok, puntjes,
pixelvorming
Compressie van video-inhoud kan tot beeldvervorming leiden met name bij uitzendingen
met snelle bewegingen, zoals sportprogramma's en actiefilms.
Een laag signaalniveau of slechte signaalkwaliteit kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken. Er is
hierbij geen sprake van een probleem met de tv.
●
●
Onjuiste of ontbrekende kleuren
bij Component-verbinding.
Zorg ervoor dat de Component-kabels op de juiste ingangen zijn aangesloten. Onjuiste of
losse verbindingen kunnen kleurproblemen veroorzaken of resulteren in een leeg scherm.
●
Problemen met kleur of
helderheid.
Pas de opties voor Beeld aan in het tv-menu. (Beeld, Kleur, Helderheid, Scherpte)
Pas de optie Spaarstand aan in het menu Instellingen.
Zet het beeld terug op de standaardbeeldinstelling. (Ga naar MENU - Beeld - Beeld resetten)
●
●
●
Stippellijn aan de rand van het
scherm.
Als het beeldformaat is ingesteld op Volledig scherm, wijzigt u deze in 16:9.
Wijzig de resolutie van de kabel-/set-top box.
●
●
Beeld is zwart-wit met alleen
AV-invoer (Composite).
● Sluit de videokabel (geel) aan op de groene aansluiting van Component-ingang 1 van de tv.
Beeld blijft hangen of is
vervormd bij het veranderen
van zender of het beeld wordt
met vertraging weergegeven.
Probeer, bij verbinding met een kabelbox de kabelbox te resetten. (Sluit het netsnoer opnieuw
aan en wacht totdat de kabelbox opnieuw is opgestart. Dit kan tot 20 minuten duren.)
Stel de uitvoerresolutie van de kabelbox in op 1080i of 720p.
●
●
Geluidskwaliteit
Voer als eerste de functie Het geluid testen uit om te controleren of het geluid van uw tv
correct werkt.
Ga naar MENU - Ondersteuning - Zelfdiagnose - Het geluid testen
Als het geluid in orde is, wordt het geluidsprobleem mogelijk veroorzaakt door de bron of het
signaal.
●
Er klinkt geen geluid of het
geluid is te zacht op het
maximale volume.
Controleer het volume van externe apparaten die zijn aangesloten op de tv en pas
vervolgens het tv-volume aan.
●
Beeld is goed maar er klinkt
geen geluid.
Stel de optie Luidspreker selecteren in op TV-luidspreker in het geluidsmenu.
Controleer of de audiokabels van een extern apparaat zijn aangesloten op de juiste
geluidsaansluitingen op de tv.
Controleer de optie voor audio-uitvoer op aangesloten apparaten. (Bijvoorbeeld: mogelijk
moet u de geluidsoptie van uw kabelbox wijzigen in HDMI als u een HDMI-kabel hebt
aangesloten op uw tv.)
Als u gebruikmaakt van een DVI-naar-HDMI-kabel, is een aparte audiokabel vereist.
Schakel de SRS-functie uit als u het volume instelt op een waarde hoger dan 30.
Verwijder de stekker uit de hoofdtelefoonaansluiting. (Indien deze beschikbaar is op uw tv.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Er klinkt ruis uit de luidspreker. Controleer de kabelverbindingen. Controleer of er geen videokabel is aangesloten op een
audio-ingang.
Controleer de signaalsterkte bij een antenne-/kabelverbinding. Een laag signaalniveau
kan leiden tot vervorming van het geluid.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:11Nederlands - 29
Probleem Oplossing
Geen beeld, geen video
Tv kan niet worden
ingeschakeld.
Controleer of het netsnoer stevig in het stopcontact zit.
Controleer of het stopcontact werkt.
Druk op de POWER-knop op de tv om te controleren of de afstandsbediening correct
werkt. Als de tv nu wel wordt ingeschakeld, kan het probleem bij de afstandsbediening
liggen. U kunt het probleem met de afstandsbediening oplossen aan de hand van het
gedeelte 'Afstandsbediening werkt niet' hieronder.
●
●
●
De vt wordt automatisch
uitgeschakeld.
Controleer of de functie Slaaptimer is ingesteld op Aan in het menu Instellingen.
Als de tv is aangesloten op uw pc, controleert u de stroominstellingen voor uw pc.
Controleer of het netsnoer stevig in het stopcontact zit.
De tv wordt uitgeschakeld als gedurende 10 tot 15 minuten geen signaal wordt ontvangen
bij een antenne-/kabelverbinding.
●
●
●
●
Geen beeld/video. Controleer de kabelverbindingen (verwijder alle kabels van tv en externe apparaten en
sluit ze vervolgens weer aan).
Verbind de video-uitgang van uw externe apparaat (kabel-/set-top box, dvd, Blu-ray, enz.)
met de ingang van de tv. Bijvoorbeeld, uitgang externe apparaat: HDMI, ingang tv: HDMI.
Controleer of het aangesloten apparaat is ingeschakeld.
Selecteer de juiste bron voor de tv door op de knop SOURCE op de afstandsbediening
van de tv te drukken.
●
●
●
●
RF-verbinding
(kabel/antenne)
Niet alle zenders kunnen
worden ontvangen.
Zorg dat de antennekabel stevig is aangesloten.
Voer de functie Plug & Play uit om beschikbare zenders toe te voegen aan de zenderlijst.
Ga naar MENU - Instellingen - Plug & Play en wacht totdat alle beschikbare zenders
zijn opgeslagen.
Controleer of de antenna correct is gepositioneerd.
●
●
●
Beeld is vervormd:
macroblok, klein blok, puntjes,
pixelvorming
Compressie van video-inhoud kan tot beeldvervorming leiden met name bij uitzendingen
met snelle bewegingen, zoals sportprogramma's en actiefilms.
Een laag signaalniveau kan leiden tot vervorming van het beeld. Er is hierbij geen sprake
van een probleem met de tv.
●
●
Pc-verbinding
Melding ‘Niet ondersteund.’. Stel de uitvoerresolutie en frequentie van uw pc zodanig in dat deze overeenkomen met
de resoluties die door de tv worden ondersteund.
●
De pc wordt altijd
weergegeven in de lijst met
bronnen, ook als deze niet is
aangesloten.
Dit is normaal. De pc wordt altijd weergegeven in de lijst met bronnen, ook als deze niet
is aangesloten.
●
Video is in orde maar er is
geen audio beschikbaar bij een
HDMI-verbinding.
● Controleer de instelling voor de audio-uitvoer op uw pc.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:11Nederlands - 30
Probleem Oplossing
Overige
Beeld wordt niet op volledig
scherm weergegeven.
Er worden zwarte balken aan elke kant weergegeven bij HD-zender bij weergave van
opgeschaalde SD-inhoud (4:3).
Er worden zwarte balken weergegeven aan de boven- en onderkant bij films met een
beeldverhouding die afwijkt van de beeldverhouding van uw tv.
Stel de optie voor het beeldformaat op uw externe apparaat of tv in op volledig scherm.
●
●
●
Afstandsbediening werkt niet. Vervang de batterijen van de afstandsbediening. Let hierbij op de correcte polariteit (+ -).
Reinig het transmissievenster aan de bovenkant van de afstandsbediening.
Wijs met de afstandsbediening rechtstreeks naar de tv vanaf een afstand van 1,5 tot 2
meter.
●
●
●
Kan de tv niet in- of
uitschakelen of het
volume bijstellen met de
afstandsbediening voor de
kabel-/set-top box.
Programmeer de afstandsbediening voor de kabel-/set-top box zodanig dat deze werkt
voor de tv. Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding van uw kabel/satellietontvanger voor de
tv-code van SAMSUNG.
●
Melding ‘Niet ondersteund.’. Controleer de ondersteunde resolutie van de tv en pas de uitvoerresolutie van het externe
apparaat hierop aan. Raadpleeg de resolutie-instellingen in deze handleiding.
●
Plasticgeur van tv. ● Deze geur is normaal en verdwijnt na verloop van tijd.
TV Signaalinformatie is niet
beschikbaar in het menu Self
Diagnostic Test.
Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar voor digitale zenders me teen antenneverbinding (RF/
coax) (Ant of Kabel).
●
Tv helt over naar rechter- of
linkerkant.
● Verwijder de standaardvoet van de tv en monteer deze opnieuw.
Kan de standaardvoet niet
monteren.
Controleer of de tv op een vlakke ondergrond staat. Als u de schroeven van de tv niet los
krijgt, gebruikt u een gemagnetiseerde schroevendraaier.
●
Het menu Channel wordt
grijs weergegeven. (Niet
beschikbaar.)
● Kanaal is alleen beschikbaar als een tv-bron is geselecteerd (Antenna of Cable).
Na 30 minuten of telkens
wanneer de tv wordt
uitgeschakeld gaan uw
instellingen verloren.
Als de tv zich in de modus Winkeldemo bevindt, worden de audio- en beeldinstellingen
elke 30 minuten gereset. Schakel van de modus Winkeldemo over naar de modus
Thuisgebruik in de procedure Plug & Play. Druk op de knop SOURCE om de modus
TV te selecteren, ga naar MENU → Instellingen → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Met tussenpozen valt het
geluid of beeld weg.
Controleer de kabelverbindingen en sluit deze opnieuw aan.
Kan zich voordoen als gebruik wordt gemaakt van al te stugge of dikke kabels. Zorg
ervoor dat de kabels flexibel genoeg zijn voor langdurig gebruik. Bij wandmontage
adviseren wij gebruik te maken van kabels met connectoren die een hoek van 90 graden
maken.
●
●
U ziet mogelijk kleine deeltjes
als u dichtbij de rand het
televisiescherm kijkt.
● Dit maakt deel uit van het productontwerp en is geen defect.
‘Gecodeerd signaal’ of
‘Geen signaal/zwak signaal’
met CAM CARD(CI).
Controleer of de CI-kaart is geïnstalleerd in de COMMON INTERFACE-sleuf van de CAM.
Trek de CAM uit de tv en plaats deze opnieuw in de desbetreffende sleuf.
●
●
Als de tv wordt uitgeschakeld,
schakelt deze zich 45 minuten
later automatisch zelf weer in.
Dit is normaal. De tv maakt zelfstandig gebruik van de OTA-functie (Over The Air) om een
upgrade uit te voeren van firmware die tijdens het kijken is gedownload.
●
Herhaald optredend
beeld-/geluidsprobleem.
● Controleer het signaal of de bron en wijzig deze indien nodig.
Dit TFT LCD-panel gebruikt een paneel met subpixels die met geavanceerde technologie zijn geproduceerd. Het scherm kan
echter enkele heldere of donkere pixels bevatten. Deze pixels zijn niet van invloed op de prestaties van het product.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:11Nederlands - 31
Specificaties
Modelnaam LE26B450 LE32B450
Schermformaat
(Diagonaal) 26 inch 32 inch
Pc-resolutie
(Optimaal) 1360 x 768 bij 60Hz 1360 x 768 bij 60Hz
Geluid
(Uitgang) 5W X 2 10W X 2
Afmetingen (BxHxD)
Behuizing
Met voet
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Gewicht
Met voet 8 kg 12 kg
Omgevingsvereisten
Gebruikstemperatuur
Gebruiksvochtigheid
Opslagtemperatuur
Opslagvochtigheid
10 °C tot 40 °C (50°F tot 104°F)
10% tot 80%, niet-condenserend
-20°C tot 45°C (-4°F tot 113°F)
5% tot 95%, niet-condenserend
10 °C tot 40 °C (50°F tot 104°F)
10% tot 80%, niet-condenserend
-20°C tot 45°C (-4°F tot 113°F)
5% tot 95%, niet-condenserend
Draaivoet
Links/rechts 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
Vormgeving en specificaties kunnen zonder kennisgeving worden gewijzigd.
Dit is een digitaal apparaat van klasse B.
Zie voor informatie over de stroomvoorziening en het energieverbruik het etiket op het product.
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:11Le figure e le illustrazioni presenti in questo Manuale dell’utente sono fornite unicamente a titolo di riferimento e possono differire
da quelle del prodotto attuale. Le specifiche e il design del prodotto possono variare senza preavviso.
Licenza
TruSurround HD, SRS e il simbolo sono marchi di SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnologia TruSurround HD è
utilizzata su licenza di SRS Labs, Inc.
Prodotto su licenza di Dolby Laboratories. Dolby e il simbolo della doppia D sono marchi di Dolby
Laboratories.
Avviso relativo alla trasmissione TV digitale
1. Le funzioni relative alla trasmissione televisiva digitale (DVB) sono disponibili solo nei paesi o nelle aree in cui vengono
trasmessi segnali digitali terrestri DVB-T (MPEG2 E MPEG4 AVC) o laddove l'utente abbia la possibilità di accedere a un
servizio TV via cavo DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC) compatibile. Verificare con il rivenditore locale la possibilità di ricevere
segnali DVB-T o DVB-C.
2. DVB-T è lo standard del consorzio europeo DVB per la trasmissione della televisione digitale terrestre mentre DVB-C è lo
standard per la trasmissione della televisione digitale via cavo. Tuttavia, alcune funzioni quali EPG (Electric Program Guide),
VOD (Video on Demand) e altre non sono incluse in queste specifiche. Per questo motivo, al momento non sono disponibili.
3. Sebbene questo apparecchio TV soddisfi i più recenti standard DVB-T e DVB-C, [Agosto, 2008], la compatibilità con future
trasmissioni digitali via cavo DVB-C e terrestri DVB-T non può essere garantita.
4. In base al paese o all'area in cui si utilizza questo televisore, alcuni fornitori di trasmissioni TV via cavo potrebbero applicare
una tariffa aggiuntiva per tali servizi e richiedere all'utente di accettare i termini e le condizioni della loro offerta.
5. Alcune funzioni della trasmissione TV digitale potrebbero non essere disponibili in alcuni paesi o regioni e DVB-C potrebbe
non funzionare correttamente con alcuni fornitori di servizi via cavo.
6. Per maggiori informazioni contattare il locale centro assistenza clienti SAMSUNG.
Precauzioni da adottare quando si visualizza un'immagine fissa
Un'immagine fissa può causare danni permanenti allo schermo TV
Non visualizzare un’immagine fissa o parzialmente fissa sul pannello LCD per oltre 2 ore poiché può causare la ritenzione
dell’immagine sullo schermo. Il fenomeno di ritenzione dell’immagine è anche noto come “bruciatura dello schermo”. Per
evitare il fenomeno di ritenzione dell’immagine, ridurre il grado di luminosità e contrasto dello schermo quando si visualizza
un’immagine fissa.
Su un TV LCD, l’uso del formato 4:3 per un periodo di tempo prolungato può lasciare traccia dei bordi sulla
parte sinistra, destra e centrale del video a causa delle differenti emissioni luminose dello schermo. La
riproduzione di un DVD o l’uso di una console per videogiochi può causare effetti analoghi sullo schermo.
Questo tipo di danni non è coperto dalla Garanzia.
La visualizzazione prolungata di immagini fisse da videogiochi e PC può causare immagini residue parziali. Per evitare questo
problema, ridurre la ‘luminosità’ e il ‘contrasto’ mentre si visualizzano immagini fisse.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tutti i diritti riservati.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:12Italiano - 1
Simbolo
N O T
Nota Tasto One-Touch Tasto TOOLS Premere
❑
INFORMAZIONI GENERALI
Pannello di controllo .............................................................2
Accessori..............................................................................2
Pannello dei collegamenti.....................................................3
Telecomando ........................................................................5
Installazione delle batterie nel telecomando.........................5
FUNZIONAMENTO
Visualizzazione dei menu.....................................................6
Attivazione modalità standby................................................7
Funzioni Plug & Play ............................................................7
Visualizzazione del display...................................................8
CONTROLLO CANALE
Configurazione del menu Canal ...........................................8
Gestione dei canali ............................................................11
CONTROLLO DELL'IMMAGINE
Configurazione del menu Immagine...................................13
Uso del televisore come uno schermo PC .........................15
Configurazione del televisore con il PC..............................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTROLLO AUDIO
Configurazione del menu audio..........................................17
Selezione della modalità audio...........................................18
IMPOSTAZIONE
Configurazione del menu Setup .........................................19
INGRESSI / SUPPORTO
Configurazione del menu Ingressi......................................22
Configurazione del menu Supporto....................................22
RACCOMANDAZIONI PER L'USO
Funzione Teletext ...............................................................24
Installazione del piedistallo.................................................25
Installazione del Kit di montaggio a parete.........................25
Uso del blocco antifurto Kensington...................................26
Messa in sicurezza della posizione di installazione............26
Fissaggio del televisore alla parete ....................................27
Risoluzione dei problemi ....................................................28
Specifiche...........................................................................31
Diagrammi a blocchi...........................................................32
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTENUTI
Italiano
Questo apparecchio è fabbricato in conformità al
D.M.28.08.95 n.548 ed in particolare a quanto specificato nell
Art.2, comma 1. Questo apparecchio è fabbricato nella U.E.
in conformità al D.M.28.08.95 n.548 Art.2, comma 1 ed al
D.M.26.03.92 Art.1
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:12Italiano - 2
INFORMAZIONI GENERALI
Pannello di controllo
La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello.
E' possibile utilizzare i pulsanti sul pannello laterale.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE Alterna tutte le sorgenti d’ingresso disponibili. Nel menu a video, utilizzare questo tasto come si usa il tasto
ENTERE del telecomando.
2 MENU Premere per visualizzare il menu a video con le funzioni del televisore.
3Y: Premere per aumentare o diminuire il volume.
Nel menu a video, utilizzare i tasti Y così come si usano i tasti ◄ e ► del telecomando.
4Z: Premere per cambiare canale. Nel menu a video, utilizzare i tasti Z così come si usano i tasti
▼ e ▲ del telecomando.
5 P (ALIMENTAZIONE): Premere per accendere e spegnere il televisore.
6 SENSORE DEL TELECOMANDO: Puntare il telecomando in direzione di questo punto sul televisore.
7 INDICATORE DI ALIMENTAZIONE: Lampeggia e si spegne quando l’alimentazione è attiva, si accende in modalità standby.
8 ALTOPARLANTI
Accessori
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Telecomando e
batterie
(2 tipo AAA)
Cavo di
alimentazione
CoperchioFondo
Vite del
piedistallo X4
Vite del piedistallo X3
(solo modello da 32 pollici)
Panno per la
pulizia
● Istruzioni per l'utente ● Scheda di garanzia ● Guida alla sicurezza
Controllare che nella confezione del TV LCD siano contenuti i seguenti componenti. Se qualsiasi componente risultasse
mancante, contattare il rivenditore.
Scheda di garanzia / Guida alla sicurezza (Non disponibili in tutte le sedi)
La forma e il colore dei componenti possono variare in base al modello.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:13Italiano - 3
Pannello dei collegamenti
La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello.
Quando si collega un dispositivo esterno al televisore, assicurarsi che l’alimentazione dell’unità sia scollegata.
Quando si collega un dispositivo esterno, far corrispondere il colore del terminale di collegamento a quello del cavo.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Collega a un componente Digital Audio quale un ricevitore Home theatre.
Se i jack HDMI IN sono collegati, il jack DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisore trasporta solo il segnale di due
canali audio. Per avere un audio a 5.1 canali, collegare il jack ottico del lettore DVD / Blu-ray o dell’STB satellitare/via
cavo direttamente a un amplificatore o all’Home Theatre, non al televisore.
2 PC IN
Collegare al jack di uscita video del PC.
3 ANT IN
Collega a un sistema TV via cavo o antenna.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Collegare al jack di uscita audio del PC.
Uscite audio DVI per dispositivi esterni.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Collegare i cavi audio RCA a AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] sul retro dell’apparecchiatura e le altre estremità ai connettori
audio corrispondenti dell’amplificatore o dell’impianto DVD Home Theater.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
[Pannello posteriore del televisore]
[Pannello laterale
del televisore]
Ingresso
alimentazione
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:13Italiano - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Collega al jack HDMI di un dispositivo con uscita HDMI.
Non è necessario un ulteriore collegamento audio per la connessione HDMI-HDMI.
Utilizzare il jack HDMI IN 1(DVI) per il collegamento DVI a un dispositivo esterno. Utilizzare un cavo o un adattatore DVIHDMI per la connessione video e jack PC / DVI AUDIO IN per l'audio.
E' inoltre possibile utilizzare le porte per connettersi a un PC.
Che cosa significa HDMI?
‘High Definition Multimedia interface’ permette la trasmissione di dati video digitali ad alta definizione e audio digitale a
canali multipli.
Il terminale HDMI/DVI supporta il collegamento DVI a una periferica estesa con un cavo appropriato (non fornito).
La differenza tra HDMI e DVI è che il dispositivo HDMI è di dimensioni più piccole, dispone della funzione di codifica
HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) installata, e supporta audio digitale multicanale.
Se sono collegati lettori DVD / Blu-ray / ricevitori via cavo / ricevitori satellitari che supportano versioni HDMI precedenti
alla 1.3, il televisore potrebbe non riprodurre l’audio e le immagini visualizzate potrebbero presentare colori anomali.
Quando si collega un cavo HDMI di una versione precedente e non c’è audio, collegare il cavo HDMI al jack
HDMI IN 1(DVI) e i cavi audio ai jack PC / DVI AUDIO IN sul retro del televisore. In questo caso, contattare la società
fornitrice del lettore DVD / Blu-ray / ricevitore via cavo / ricevitore satellitare per verificare la versione HDMI, quindi
richiedere un aggiornamento del firmware. I cavi HDMI che non supportano la versione 1.3 possono causare sfarfallio o
mancanza di immagini a schermo.
7 COMMON INTERFACE Slot
Se per alcuni canali non si inserisce la ‘SCHEDA CI’, il messaggio ‘Scramble Signal’ (Segnale criptato) viene visualizzato
sullo schermo.
Le informazioni di pairing che contengono un numero telefonico, l’ID della SCHEDA CI, l’ID host e altri dati, verranno
visualizzate entro 2~3 minuti. Se viene visualizzato un messaggio di errore, contattare il service provider.
Quando la configurazione delle informazioni relative al canale è stata completata, viene visualizzato il messaggio
‘Updating Completed’ (Completato aggiornamento), a indicare che l’elenco dei canali è stato aggiornato.
È necessario richiedere una SCHEDA CI al service provider locale. Estrarre con delicatezza la scheda CI tirandola con le
dita; fare attenzione a non farla cadere poiché potrebbe subire danni.
Inserire la scheda CI nella direzione indicata sulla scheda stessa.
La posizione del blocco COMMON INTERFACE può variare a seconda del modello.
Il modulo CAM non è supportato in alcune nazioni e regioni; controllare con il rivenditore autorizzato di zona.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Collegare il cavo RCA a un dispositivo A/V esterno appropriato quale un videoregistratore, un DVD o una videocamera.
Collegare i cavi audio RCA a [R-AUDIO-L] sull’apparecchio e gli altri terminali ai corrispondenti connettori di uscita audio
sul dispositivo A/V.
9 BLOCCO KENSINGTON (a seconda del modello)
Il blocco Kensington (opzionale) è un dispositivo usato per assicurare fisicamente il sistema quando viene utilizzato in
un luogo pubblico. Se si desidera utilizzare un dispositivo di blocco, contattare il punto vendita in cui si è acquistato il
televisore.
La posizione del blocco Kensington può variare a seconda del modello.
0 COMPONENT IN
Collegare i cavi video component (opzionali) al connettore del componente (PR, PB, Y) sul retro dell'apparecchiatura e ai
corrispondenti connettori di uscita video del DTV o DVD.
Se si desidera collegare il Set-Top Box e il DTV (o DVD), effettuare il collegamento tra i due dispositivi, quindi collegare il
DTV (o DVD) al rispettivo connettore (PR, PB, Y) sull’apparecchiatura.
I connettori PR, PB e Y dei componenti (DTV o DVD) sono talvolta etichettati con Y, B-Y e R-Y o Y, Cb e Cr.
Collegare i cavi audio RCA (opzionali) a [R-AUDIO-L] sul retro dell’apparecchiatura e ai corrispondenti connettori di
uscita audio sul DTV o DVD.
! EXT (RGB)
Connettore
Entrée Uscita
Video Audio (L / R) RGB Video + Audio (L / R)
EXT O O O Solo l'uscita TV o DTV è disponibile.
Ingressi e uscite di dispositivi esterni quali videoregistratori, DVD, periferiche di gioco o lettori di dischi video.
@ SERVICE
Connettore per aggiornamento software.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:13Italiano - 5
Telecomando
Il telecomando è utilizzabile fino a una distanza di 7 metri dal televisore.
Una illuminazione troppo intensa può avere conseguenze sulle prestazioni del telecomando.
La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello.
1 POWER: Tasto di standby del
televisore.
2 TASTI NUMERICI: Premere per
cambiare canale.
3 FAV.CH: Premere per passare ai
canali preferiti.
4Y: Premere per aumentare
o diminuire il volume.
5 SOURCE: Premere per visualizzare
e selezionare le sorgenti video
disponibili.
6 INFO : Premere per visualizzare le
informazioni sullo schermo TV.
7 TOOLS: Per selezionare
rapidamente le funzioni più
frequentemente utilizzate.
8 CH LIST: Visualizza l'elenco canali
a schermo
9 TASTI NUMERICI: Utilizzare questi
tasti nel menu Elenco canali ecc.
! TV: Seleziona direttamente la
modalità TV.
@ PRE-CH : Consente di tornare
al canale precedentemente
visualizzato.
# MUTEM: Premere per escludere
temporaneamente l'audio.
$ P
: Premere per cambiare
canale.
% MENU: Visualizza il menu a video
principale.
^ GUIDE: Visualizzazione della Guida
elettronica dei programmi (EPG,
Electronic Program Guide)
& RETURN: Ritorna al menu precedente.
* SU ▲ / GIU' ▼ / SINISTRA ◄ /
DESTRA ► / ENTERE: Utile per
selezionare i menu OSD e modificarne i
valori impostati.
( EXIT: Premere per uscire dal menu.
) SUBT. : Visualizzazione sottotitoli digitali
a AD: Selezione Descrizione audio.
Funzioni Teletext
5 0 : Selezione della modalità Teletext
(LIST/FLOF)
6 5 : Visualizzazione Teletext
7 4 : Selezione formato Teletext
8 8 : Negozio Teletext
9 Selezione argomento Fastext
0/ : Seleziona alternativamente le
modalità Teletext, Double o Mix.
! :: Uscita dalla schermata Teletext
@ 1 : Pagina secondaria Teletext
$ 2 : Pagina Teletext successiva
3 : Pagina Teletext precedente
% 6 : Indice Teletext
& 9 : Mantieni Teletext
( 7 : Annuler Teletext
Installazione delle batterie nel telecomando
1. Sollevare il coperchio sul retro del telecomando come mostrato in figura.
2. Installare le due batterie AAA.
Fare corrispondere i poli ‘+’ e ‘–’ delle batterie con lo schema riportato all’interno del
vano.
3. Riposizionare il coperchio.
Se si prevede di non utilizzare il telecomando per un periodo di tempo prolungato,
rimuovere le batterie e riporle in un luogo asciutto e fresco.
Se il telecomando non funziona, effettuare il seguente controllo:
Il televisore è acceso?
I poli - e + delle batterie sono invertiti?
Le batterie sono esaurite?
Si è verificata una interruzione di corrente o il cavo di alimentazione è scollegato?
È presente una luce a fluorescenza speciale o un neon nelle vicinanze?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:14Italiano - 6
FUNZIONAMENTO
Visualizzazione dei menu
Prima di utilizzare il televisore, seguire questi passaggi per imparare a navigare tra i menu,
selezionando e regolando le diverse funzioni.
1. Premere il tasto MENU.
Il menu principale viene visualizzato a schermo. Sulla sinistra sono visibili le seguenti
icone: Immagine, Son, Canal , Configuration, Entrée, Application, Assistance.
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare una delle icone.
Premere ◄ o ► per accedere ai sotto menu dell'icona.
3. Premere ▲ o ▼ per spostarsi sulle voci dei menu.
Premere ENTERE per accedere alle voci dei menu.
4. Premere ▲/▼/◄/► per modificare le voci selezionate.
Premere RETURN per tornare al menu precedente.
5. Premere EXIT per uscire dal menu.
Uso dei tasti del telecomando
Tasto Operazioni Tasto Operazioni
MENUm Visualizza il menu a video principale.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Sposta il cursore e seleziona una voce.
Seleziona la voce correntemente
selezionata.
Conferma l'impostazione.
RUTURNR Ritorna al menu precedente.
EXITe Esce dal menu a video.
Esempio: Impostazione della luminosità dello schermo TV nel menu Immagine
Regolazione della luminosità a 80
1. Premere il tasto MENU per visualizzare il menu.
2. Premere ENTERE per selezionare Immagine.
3. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Luminosità.
4. Premere ENTERE.
5. Premere ◄ o ► fino a quando il valore della luminosità viene impostato su 80.
6. Premere ENTERE.
Premere EXIT per uscire dal menu.
¦
N
N
Modalità : Standard ►
Retroillumin : 7
Contrasto : 95
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50 / R50
Immagine
Modalità : Standard ►
Retroillumin : 7
Contrasto : 95
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50 / R50
Immagine
Retroillumin : 7
Contrasto : 95
Luminosità : 45 ►
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50 / R50
Impostazioni avanzate
Opzioni immagine
Reset immagine
Immagine
U Sposta L Regola E Conferma R Ritorno
Luminosità 45
U Sposta L Regola E Conferma R Ritorno
Luminosità 80
Modalità : Standard ►
Retroillumin : 7
Contrasto : 95
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50 / R50
Immagine
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:14Italiano -
Attivazione modalità standby
E' possibile attivare la modalità standby del televisore per ridurre il consumo di corrente. La modalità standby è particolarmente
utile quando si desidera disattivare temporaneamente il televisore (ad esempio durante i pasti).
1. Premere POWERP sul telecomando.
Lo schermo si spegne e sull’apparecchio compare la spia di standby.
2. Per riattivare il televisore, premere nuovamente il tasto POWERP.
Non lasciare il televisore in modalità standby per lunghi periodi di tempo (partendo per le vacanze ad esempio).
E' consigliabile scollegare il cavo di alimentazione e il cavo dell'antenna dalle prese a muro.
Funzioni Plug & Play
Se il televisore viene acceso per la prima volta, alcune impostazioni di base vengono
visualizzate automaticamente e in sequenza.
1. Premere POWER sul telecomando. Viene visualizzato il Message You can set the menu
language.
2. Selezionare la Lingua desiderata premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼. Premere ENTERE per
confermare la scelta.
3. Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare Demo Negozio o Uso dom., quindi premere ENTERE.
Si consiglia di impostare la modalità TV su Uso dom. per ottenere la migliore qualità dell’immagine in un ambiente
domestico.
Demo Negozio è intesa solo per un uso commerciale del prodotto.
Se l’unità è stata accidentalmente impostata sulla modalità Demo Negozio e si desidera tornare alla modalità
Uso dom. (Standard): Premere il tasto Volume del televisore. Quando il menu OSD Volume viene visualizzato, tenere
premuto il tasto MENU del televisore per 5 secondi.
4. Premere ENTERE. Selezionare la nazione desiderata premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼. Premere ENTERE per confermare la
scelta.
5. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Antenna o Cavo, quindi premere ENTERE.
Antenna: segnale antenna via etere.
Cavo: segnale antenna via cavo.
6. Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼ per selezionare i canali da memorizzare. Premere ENTERE per selezionare Avvio.
Digitale e Analogico: Canali digitali e analogici.
Digitale: Canale digitale
Analogico: Canale analogico
Quando si imposta la sorgente antenna su Cavo, viene visualizzata una procedura che consente di impostare un valore
per la ricerca dei canali digitali. Per ulteriori Information, vedere Canale→ Memorizzazione auto.
La ricerca dei canali inizia e termina in modo automatico.
Premere ENTERE in qualsiasi momento per interrompere il processo di memorizzazione.
Una volta memorizzati tutti i canali disponibili, viene visualizzato il messaggio Imposta la modalità Orologio.
. Premere ENTERE. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Auto., quindi premere ENTERE.
Selezionando Manuale, Imposta la data e l'ora correnti..
Ricevendo un segale digitale, l’orario verrà impostato automaticamente. In caso contrario, selezionare Manuale per
impostare l’orologio. (vedere pag. 19)
8. La modalità di connessione in grado di offrire la migliore qualità HD possibile. Dopo aver confermato la modalità, premere
ENTERE.
9. Viene visualizzato il Messag Buon divertimento.. Al termine, premere ENTERE
Per reimpostare questa funzione...
1. Premere il tasto MENU per visualizzare il menu. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Impost, quindi premere ENTERE.
2. Premere nuovamente ENTERE per selezionare Plug & Play.
3. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è 0-0-0-0.
Per cambiare il codice PIN, utilizzare la funzione Cambia PIN. (vedere pag. 21)
La funzione Plug & Play è disponibile solo in modalità TV.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:14Italiano - 8
Visualizzazione del display
Il display identifica il canale corrente e lo stato di determinate impostazioni audio e video.
Premere il tasto INFO per visualizzare le informazioni.
Premere INFO sul telecomando. Il televisore visualizzerà il canale, il tipo di audio e lo
stato di determinate impostazioni immagine e audio.
▲, ▼: E’ possibile visualizzare altre informazioni relative al canale. Se si desidera
spostarsi sul canale selezionato, premere ENTERE.
◄, ►: E’ possibile visualizzare le informazioni del programma desiderato sul canale
corrente.
Premere nuovamente INFO o attendere 10 secondi finché il display scomparirà
automaticamente.
CONTROLLO CANALE
Configurazione del menu Canal
Nazione
Comparirà la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.
Canale analogico
Vous pouvez changer le pays pour les chaînes analogiques.
Canale digitale
Vous pouvez changer le pays pour les chaînes numériques.
Memorizzazione auto
È possibile effettuare la scansione delle gamme di frequenza disponibili (in base alla nazi one). I numeri di programma assegnati
automaticamente potrebbero non corrispondere ai numeri di programma effettivi o desiderati.
Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante la funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserimento del PIN.
Antenna / Cavo
Sorgente antenna per la memorizzazione
Digitale e Analogico: Canali digitali e analogici.
Digitale: Canale digitale.
Analogico: Canale analogico
Quando si seleziona ‘Cavo → Digitale e Analogico’ o ‘Cavo → Digitale’
Inserire un valore per ricercare i canali via cavo.
Mod ricerca → Completa / Rete / Rapida
Rapide
Network ID: Visualizza il codice di identificazione del network.
Frequenza: Visualizza la Fréquence del canale. (Varia in base alla nazione)
Modulazione: Visualizza i valori di Modulation disponibili.
Symbol Rate: Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.
–
–
–
–
Scorrere tutti i canali per le stazioni emittenti attive e memorizzarle nella memoria del televisore.
Per interrompere la funzione Memorizzazione auto, premere ENTERE.
Verrà visualizzato il messaggio Interrompere Memorizzazione auto?.
Selezionare Sì premendo ◄ o ► quindi premere ENTERE.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Nazione ►
Memorizzazione auto
Memorizzazione manuale
Opzione ricerca via cavo
Guida Ora & Seguente
Guida Completa
Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa
Canale
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:15Italiano - 9
Memorizzazione manuale
Ricerca un canale manualmente e lo memorizza nella memoria TV.
Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante le funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserimento del PIN.
Canale digitale
Memorizzazione manuale di un canale digitale.
Canale digitale è disponibile solo in DTV mode.
Canale: Impostare il numero del canale mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9).
Frequenza: Impostare la frequenza utilizzando i tasti numerici.
Larg. di banda: Impostare la larghezza di banda mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9).
Al termine, i canali vengono aggiornati nell'elenco dei canali.
Canale analogico
Mémorisation manuelle d'un canal analogique.
Programma (Numero di Programme da assegnare a un canale): Impostare il numero del programma mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o
i tasti numerici (0~9).
Sistema colore → Auto./ PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Impostare il sistema colore utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.
Sistema audio → BG / DK / I / L: Impostare il sistema audio utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.
Canale (Quando si conosce il numero del canale da memorizzare): Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare C (Antenna Canale) o
S (Cavo Canale). Premere il tasto ►, quindi premere ▲, ▼ o un tasto numerico (0~9) per selezionare il numero desiderato.
E’ anche possibile selezionare direttamente il numero del canale premendo i tasti numerici (0~9).
Se l’audio è anomalo o assente, riselezionare lo standard audio richiesto.
Ricerca (Quando non si conosce il numero del canale): Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per avviare la ricerca. Il sintonizzatore effettua
la scansione della gamma di frequenza fino a quando appare il primo canale o il canale selezionato.
Memo (Quando si memorizza il canale e il numero di programma corrispondente): Impostare su OK premendo ENTERE.
Modalità Canale
P (modalità Programma): Una volta completata la sintonizzazione, alle emittenti della propria area viene assegnato
un numero compreso tra P00 e P99. In questa modalità, è possibile selezionare un canale digitando il numero
corrispondente.
C (modalità Antenna): È possibile selezionare un canale immettendo in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascuna
emittente.
S (modalità Cavo): E’ possibile selezionare un canale immettendo in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascun
canale via cavo.
Opzione ricerca via cavo (in base alla nazione)
Imposta ulteriori opzioni di ricerca quali frequenza e symbol rate per ricerche network via cavo.
Frequenza (Iniziale ~ Finale): Visualizza la Fréquence del canale.
Modulazione: Visualizza i valori di Modulationdisponibili.
Symbol Rate: Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.
Guida Ora & Seguente / Guida Completa
Le informazioni EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) sono fornite dall’emittente. Le voci relative ai programmi potrebbero risultare
vuote o non aggiornate, a seconda delle informazioni trasmesse dall'emittente su un determinato canale. La schermata viene
aggiornata automaticamente non appena sono disponibili nuove informazioni.
Per le procedure dettagliate sull’uso di Guida Ora & Seguente e Guida Completa, vedere le descrizioni a pagina 10.
È anche possibile visualizzare il menu della guida semplicemente premendo il tasto GUIDE. (Per configurare la
Guida Predefinita, vedere le relative descrizioni.)
Guida Ora & Seguente
Per i sei canali indicati nella colonna a sinistra, mostra le informazioni sul programma corrente e sul programma successivo.
Guida Completa
Visualizza la informazioni sui programmi ordinate in segmenti di un’ora. Sono comprese due ore di programmi che è possibile
scorrere in avanti o indietro.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:15Italiano - 10
Guida Predefinita → Guida Ora & Seguente / Guida Completa
Vous pouvez choisir d'afficher le Guida Ora & Seguente le Guida Completa en appuyant sur le bouton GUIDE de la
télécommande.
Elenco canali
Per le istruzioni dettagliate sull’uso di Elenco canali, vedere la sezione ‘Gestione dei canali’.
È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicemente premendo il tasto CH LIST sul telecomando.
Mod. Canale
Premendo il tasto P >/<, si passerà da un canale all’altro dell’elenco dei canali.
Canali aggiunti
I canali verranno attivati secondo l’elenco canali memorizzato.
Preferiti
I canali verranno attivati secondo l’elenco canali preferiti.
Sintonia fine
Se la ricezione è chiara, non è necessario sintonizzare il canale poiché questa operazione viene effettuata automaticamente
durante le operazioni di ricerca e memorizzazione. Se tuttavia il segnale risulta debole o distorto, può essere necessario
sintonizzare il canale manualmente.
I canali sintonizzati e memorizzati sono evidenziati da un asterisco ‘*’ alla destra del numero del canale nel relativo riquadro.
Per reimpostare la sintonia, selezionare Reset premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼ , quindi premere ENTERE.
E' possibile sintonizzare solo i canali TV analogici.
Uso della Guida Ora & Seguente / Guida Completa
Per... Eseguire...
Guardare un programma nell'elenco EPG Selezionare il programma premendo il tasto ▲, ▼, ◄, ► .
Uscire dalla guida Premere il tasto blu.
Se si seleziona il programma successivo, appare l’icona dell’orologio che indica la visione programmata. Premendo nuovamente il
tasto ENTERE, premere il tasto ◄, ► per selezionare Annulla Programmazioni, la programmazione verrà annullata e il simbolo
a forma di orologio sparirà.
Visualizzare le informazioni su un programma Selezionare il programma desiderato premendo il tasto ▲, ▼, ◄, ► .
Premere il tasto INFO quando il programma desiderato è evidenziato.
Il titolo del programma appare in alto al centro dello schermo.
Cliccare sul tasto INFO per ottenere maggiori informazioni. Le informazioni dettagliate includono numero del canale, durata, barra di
stato, livello d'età impostato per il programma, informazioni sulla qualità video (HD/SD), modalità audio, sottotitoli o teletext, lingua
dei sottotitoli o del teletext e una breve descrizione del programma evidenziato. ‘...’ appare quando la descrizione è molto lunga.
Alternare la Guida Ora & Seguente e la
Guida Completa
Premere ripetutamente il tasto rosso.
In Guida Completa
Scorrere velocemente indietro (24 ore).
Scorrere velocemente avanti (24 ore).
Premere ripetutamente il tasto verde.
Premere ripetutamente il tasto giallo.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Guida Completa
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Giu
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Oggi 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Guarda
INFO Informazioni ■ Ora/Segu ■ +24 Ora ■ Esci
Guida Ora & Seguente
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Giu
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Attuale Successivo
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Guarda
INFO Informazioni ■ Guida Completa ■ Esci
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:15Italiano - 11
Gestione dei canali
Usando questo menu è possibile aggiungere, eliminare o impostare i canali preferiti e
utilizzare la guida dei programmi per le trasmissioni digitali.
Tutti i Canali
Mostra tutti i canali attualmente disponibili.
Canali aggiunti
Mostra tutti i canali aggiunti.
Preferiti
Mostra tutti i canali preferiti.
Per selezionare i canali preferiti impostati, premere FAV.CH sul telecomando.
Programmato
Mostra tutti i canali prenotati.
Selezionare un Canal nella schermata Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées o Favoris premendo i tasti ▲ / ▼, quindi
premere ENTERE. Ora è possibile guardare il canale selezionato.
Uso dei tasti colorati nell'elenco dei canali
Rosso (Tipo canale): Alterna tra TV, Radio, Dati / Autres e Tutto.
Verde (Zoom): Ingrandisce o riduce il numero di un canale.
Giallo (Selezione): Seleziona più elenchi di canali. E’ possibile utilizzare contemporaneamente le funzioni aggiungi /
cancella, aggiungi a preferiti / elimina da preferiti, o blocco / sblocco per più canali. Selezionare i canali desiderati e
premere il tasto giallo per impostare tutti i canali selezionati contemporaneamente. Il simboloc compare a sinistra dei
canali selezionati.
TOOLS (Strumenti): Visualizza i menu Elimina (o Aggiungi), Aggiungi a Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), Blocco.
(o Sblocco.), Timer visione, Modifica nome canale, Ordina, Modifica numero canale, Seleziona tutto, (o Deselez
tutto), Memorizzazione auto. (Il menu Options può essere diverso in base alla situazione).
Icone sullo stato del canale
A : Canale analogico.
c: Canale selezionato mediante il tasto giallo.
* : Canale impostato come preferito.
( : Programma attualmente trasmesso.
\ : Canale bloccato.
) : Programma prenotato
Liste des chaînes Option (in Tutti i Canali / Canali aggiunti / Preferiti)
Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il menu Option.
Gli elementi del menu Option possono differire in base allo stato del canale.
Ajouter / Supprimer
E' possibile eliminare o aggiungere un canale per visualizzare i canali desiderati.
Tutti i canali eliminati saranno visibili nel menu Tutti i Canali.
Se il canale in elenco è evidenziato in grigio, significa che il canale è stato eliminato.
Il menu Aggiungi viene visualizzato solo per i canali eliminati.
E’ anche possibile eliminare un canale nel menu Canali aggiunti o Preferiti allo stesso
modo.
Aggiungi a Preferiti/ Elimina da Preferiti
I canali che si guardano più di frequente possono essere impostati come preferiti.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E' inoltre possibile impostare
aggiunte (o cancellazioni) tra i canali Preferiti selezionando Strumenti → Aggiungi a Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti).
Il simbolo ‘*’ verrà evidenziato e il canale verrà impostato come preferito.
Tutti i canali preferiti saranno visibili nel menu Preferiti.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canali aggiunti
Tutto ■ Tipo canale ■ Zoom ■ Selezione TStrumenti
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canali aggiunti Tutto ■ Tipo canale ■ Zoom ■Selezione TStrumenti
Cancella
Aggiungi a Preferiti
Blocco
Timer per visione
Modifica nome canale
Ordina
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:16Italiano - 12
Blocco / Sblocco
E’ possibile bloccare un canale in modo che non possa essere selezionato e visualizzato. Questa funzione è disponibile solo
quando la funzione Blocco canali è impostata su On. (vedere pag. 21)
Comparirà la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.
Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è 0-0-0-0. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Modifier PIN nel menu.
Verrà visualizzato il simbolo ‘\’ e il canale verrà bloccato.
Timer per visione
Se si è effettuata la prenotazione di un canale, all’ora stabilita verrà visualizzato il canale prenotato anche durante la visione di un
altro canale contenuto nell'Elenco canali. Per prenotare un programma, impostare prima l’orario corrente. (Vedere pag. 19)
E' possibile prenotare solo i canali memorizzati.
È possibile impostare il canale, il giorno, il mese, l'anno,l'ora e i minuti premendo direttamente i tasti numerici del
telecomando.
Durante le prenotazione di un programma comparirà il menu Programmato.
Digital Programme Guide e Visualizzazione prenotazione
Selezionando un canale digitale e premendo il tasto ►, comparirà la Guida ai programmi. Per prenotare un programma
seguire le procedure descritte sopra.
Modifica nome canale (solo canali analogici)
Ai canali è possibile attribuire un nome in modo da visualizzarlo durante la visione.
I nomi dei canali digitali trasmessi vengono automaticamente assegnati e non possono essere modificati.
Modifica numero canale (solo canali digitali)
È anche possibile impostare il numero di canale premendo i tasti numerici sul telecomando.
Ordina (solo Canale analogico)
Questa operazione consente di modificare i numeri di programma dei canali memorizzati. Questa operazione può essere
necessaria dopo la memorizzazione automatica dei canali.
Seleziona tutto / Deselez tutto
Seleziona tutto: Seleziona tutti i canali presenti nell'elenco dei canali.
Deselez tutto: E' possibile selezionare e deselezionare tutti i canali selezionati.
E’ possibile selezionare Deselez tutto solo quando è stato selezionato almeno un canale.
Memorizzazione auto
Per ulteriori informazioni sull'impostazione delle opzioni, vedere pag. 8.
Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante la funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserimento del PIN.
Menu Liste des chaînes Option (in Programmé)
E' possibile visualizzare, modificare o annullare una prenotazione.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il menu Option.
Modifica info
Selezionare questa funzione per modificare una prenotazione.
Annulla Program
Selezionare questa funzione per annullare una prenotazione.
Informazioni
Selezionare questa funzione per visualizzare una prenotazione. (E' anche possibile modificare
le informazioni relative alla prenotazione.)
Seleziona tutto
Selezionare tutti i programmi prenotati.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizzatore
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programmato Tutto ■ Zoom ■ Seleziona T Strumenti E Informazioni
Modifica info.
Annulla Program
Informazioni
Seleziona tutto
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:16Italiano - 13
CONTROLLO DELL'IMMAGINE
Configurazione del menu Immagine
Modalità
È possibile selezionare il tipo di immagine che più corrisponde alle proprie esigenze.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E' anche possibile impostare
la modalità dell'immagine selezionando Strumenti → Modalità immagine.
Dinamica
Imposta l’immagine da visualizzare in alta definizione in un ambiente luminoso.
Standard
Imposta l’immagine per una visualizzazione ottimale in condizioni di luce normali.
Film
Imposta l'immagine per una visualizzazione confortevole in un ambiente buio.
Retroillumin / Contrasto / Luminosità / Nitidezza / Colore / Tinta (V/R)
Il televisore ha diverse opzioni che consentono di controllare la qualità dell'immagine.
Retroillumin: Regola la luminosità della retroilluminazione dell’LCD.
Contrasto: Regola il livello di contrasto dell'immagine.
Luminosità: Regola il livello di luminosità dell’immagine.
Nitidezza: Regola la definizione dei bordi dell'immagine.
Colore: Regola la saturazione dei colori dell'immagine.
Tinta (V/R): Regola la tonalità delle tinte dell'immagine.
Seleziona per prima una modalità dell'immagine da regolare. Per ogni modalità dell’immagine vengono memorizzati i valori
modificati.
Apportando le modifiche ai valori Retroillumin, Contrasto, Luminosità, Nitidezza, Colore o Tinta (V/R), il menu OSD verrà
regolato di conseguenza.
Nelle modalità analogiche TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAL, non è possibile utilizzare la funzione Tinta (V/R).
In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Retroillumin, Contrasto e Luminosità.
Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV.
E' possibile ridurre significativamente il consumo di energia, e i costi ad esso associati, diminuendo la luminosità dello
schermo.
Impostazioni avanzate
I nuovi TV Samsung permettono di impostare ancora più precisamente la visualizzazione delle immagini rispetto ai modelli
precedenti. Per eseguire le impostazioni particolareggiate vedere più avanti.
Impostazioni avanzate è disponibile in modalità Standard o Film.
In Mode PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Gamma e Bilan bianco tra le opzioni della voce Impostazioni avanzate.
Tonalità nero → Off / Scuro / Più scura / Extra scura
Consente di selezionare il livello di nero dello schermo per regolare la profondità dell'immagine.
Contrasto Dinamico → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta
Consente di regolare in modo ottimale il livello di contrasto dello schermo.
Gamma
Consente di regolare l’intensità dei colori primari (rosso, verde, blu).
Spazio colore
Colour Space è la matrice di colori composta dai colori rosso, verde e blu. Per scoprire lo straordinario mondo dei colori naturali
basta selezionare lo spazio colore preferito.
Nativa: Native Colour Space offre tonalità di colore ricche e profonde.
Auto: Auto Colour Space regola automaticamente la tonalità più naturale dei colori basata sulle sorgenti del programma.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Modalità : Standard ►
Retroillumin : 7
Contrasto : 95
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50 / R50
Immagine
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50 / R50
Impostazioni avanzate ►
Opzioni immagine
Reset immagine
Immagine
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:16Italiano - 14
Bilan bianco
Consente di regolare la temperatura del colore per ottenere immagini più naturali.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: E' possibile regolare la ‘temperatura’ del colore nelle aree chiare
modificando i valori R, G, B. Si consiglia di far eseguire questa regolazione solo da utenti esperti.
Reset: Consente di ripristinare i valori predefiniti di bilanciamento del bianco.
Incarnato
E’ possibile enfatizzare il tono ‘incarnato’ dell’immagine.
Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo viene automaticamente regolato di conseguenza.
Migliora imm bordi → Off / On
E' possibile enfatizzare i contorni degli oggetti dell'immagine.
Opzioni immagine
In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Toni colore e Formato tra le opzioni della voce Opzioni immagine.
Toni colore → Freddo / Normale / Caldo1 / Caldo2
È possibile selezionare il tono del colore ottimale per la propria vista.
Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV.
Caldo1 o Caldo2 vengono attivate solo quando la modalità dell'immagine è Film.
Formato
È possibile impostare la dimensione dell’immagine che più si adatta alle proprie esigenze.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile impostare l’immagine selezionando Formato
→ Formato immagine.
Automatico: Regola automaticamente la dimensione dell'immagine su un formato 16:9.
16:9: Regola la dimensione dell’immagine su 16:9, un valore appropriato per visualizzare DVD o trasmissioni panoramiche.
Wide Zoom: Aumenta le dimensioni dell’immagine a oltre 4:3.
Zoom: Ingrandisce il formato 16:9 (in senso verticale) per adattarlo alle dimensioni dello schermo.
4:3: Questa è l’impostazione predefinita per un filmato video o una trasmissione normale.
Adatta a schermo: Utilizzare questa funzione per visualizzare l’immagine completa senza tagli con segnali
HDMI (720p / 1080i) o Component (1080i).
A seconda del tipo di sorgente di ingresso, le opzioni relative alla dimensione dell'immagine possono variare.
Le voci disponibili variano in base alla modalità selezionata.
In modalità PC, è possibile regolare solo i formati 16:9 e 4:3.
Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV.
Se si visualizza una immagine fissa per oltre due ore, sullo schermo potrebbe apparire una immagine residua temporanea.
Wide Zoom: Premere il tasto ► per selezionare Position, quindi premere ENTERE. Per spostare la schermata in alto o in
basso, utilizzare il tasto ▲ o ▼ . Quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.
Zoom: Premere il tasto ► per selezionare Position, quindi premere ENTERE. Per spostare l’immagine in alto o in basso,
utilizzare il tasto ▲ o ▼ . Quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Premere il tasto ► per selezionare Formato, quindi premere
ENTERE. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per aumentare o ridurre la dimensione dell’immagine in direzione verticale. Quindi
premere il tasto ENTERE.
Dopo aver selezionato l’opzione Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i) o Component (1080i): Selezionare Posizione premendo il tasto
◄ o ►. Utilizzare il tasto ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► per spostare l’immagine.
Reset: Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Reset, quindi premere ENTERE. E' possibile azzerare le impostazioni.
Usando la funzione Screen Fit con un ingresso HDMI 720p, 1 riga verrà tagliata all’inizio, alla fine, a sinistra e a destra come
nella funzione Overscan.
Mod schermo → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
Quando si imposta la dimensione dell’immagine su Automatico su un televisore con formato wide 16:9, è possibile determinare o
meno le dimensioni dell’immagine da visualizzare nel formato 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service). Ogni nazione europea richiede un
formato dell’immagine diverso e questa funzione deve essere quindi selezionata dall’utente.
16:9: Imposta l’immagine sul formato wide 16:9.
Wide Zoom: Aumenta le dimensioni dell’immagine a oltre 4:3.
Zoom: Ingrandisce verticalmente la dimensione dell'immagine sullo schermo.
4:3: Imposta l’immagine sul formato 4:3.
Questa funzione è disponibile in modalità Automatico.
Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità PC, Component o HDMI.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:16Italiano - 15
Digital NR → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta / Auto
Se il segnale ricevuto dal televisore è debole, è possibile attivare la funzione Digital Noise Reduction per ridurre i disturbi statici e
l’effetto ‘ghosting’ sullo schermo.
Se il segnale è debole, selezionare una delle altre opzioni disponibili fino a ottenere la migliore qualità visiva.
Livello di nero HDMI → Normale / Basso
Consente di selezionare direttamente il livello di nero sullo schermo per regolarne la profondità.
Questa funzione si attiva solo quando l’ingresso esterno è collegato a HDMI (segnali RGB).
Modalità Film → Off / Auto
Il televisore può essere impostato automaticamente nel senso desiderato, per elaborare i segnali dei film provenienti da tutte le
sorgenti e per regolare l'immagine in modo da ottenere una visualizzazione ottimale.
Modalità Film è supportata in modalità TV, AV, Comp.(480i / 1080i) e HDMI(480i / 1080i).
Reset immagine → Azzera modalità immagine / Annulla
Ripristina tutte le impostazione dell'immagine ai valori predefiniti.
Seleziona una modalità dell’immagine da reimpostare. Viene eseguita la funzione Reset per ogni modalità dell’immagine.
Azzera modalità immagine: I valori dell'immagine corrente tornano alle impostazioni predefinite.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Uso del televisore come uno schermo PC
Impostazione del software del PC (basato su Windows XP)
Di seguito vengono illustrate le impostazioni di visualizzazione di Windows per un PC tipico. Le schermate visualizzate sul PC
possono differire in base alla versione di Windows e alla scheda video installate. Nel caso le schermate risultassero differenti,
le stesse informazioni di base per la configurazione sono applicabili in quasi tutti i casi. (In caso contrario, contattare la casa
costruttrice del computer oppure un rivenditore Samsung.)
1. Fare clic sul ‘Pannello di controllo’ nel menu Start di Windows.
2. Quando appare la finestra del pannello di controllo, fare clic su ‘Aspetto e temi’. Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo.
3. Quando appare la finestra del pannello di controllo, fare clic su ‘Schermo’. Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo.
4. Fare clic sulla scheda ‘Impostazioni’ nella finestra di dialogo.
Impostazione della corretta dimensione (risoluzione) Ottimale: 1360 x 768 pixel
Se la finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni contiene un’opzione relativa alla frequenza verticale, il valore corretto è ‘60’ o ‘60
Hz’. In caso contrario, fare clic su ‘OK’ e uscire dalla finestra di dialogo.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:16Italiano - 16
Modalità di visualizzazione
La posizione e la dimensione dello schermo variano in base al tipo di schermo del PC e alla relativa risoluzione. Le risoluzioni incluse
nella tabella sono consigliate.
Ingresso D-Sub e HDMI/DVI
Modalità Risoluzione
Frequenza orizzontale
(KHz)
Frequenza verticale
(Hz)
Frequenza di clock dei
pixel (MHz)
Polarità sync
(O/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Quando si effettua una connessione mediante cavo HDMI/DVI, è necessario utilizzare il jack HDMI IN 1(DVI).
La modalità interlacciata non è supportata.
Questo dispositivo potrebbe non funzionare correttamente se si seleziona un formato video non standard.
Le modalità Separate e Composite sono supportate. Il formato SOG non è supportato.
Configurazione del televisore con il PC
Preimpostazione: Premere il tasto SOURCE per selezionare la modalità PC.
Regolazione auto
La regolazione automatica consente allo schermo del PC di adattarsi automaticamente al
segnale video PC in ingresso. I valori delle opzioni Fine, Coarse e Position vengono regolati
automaticamente.
Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità DVI-HDMI.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile impostare
la funzione Regolazione auto selezionando Strumenti → Regolazione auto.
Schermo
Grossa / Fine
Lo scopo della regolazione della qualità dell’immagine è quello di eliminare o ridurre eventuali disturbi di visualizzazione. Se non si
riesce a eliminare il disturbo cambiando sintonizzazione, regolare la frequenza nel modo migliore possibile (Grossa) ed eseguire
nuovamente la sintonizzazione fine. Una volta ridotto il disturbo, regolare l’immagine in modo che sia perfettamente centrata sullo
schermo.
Posizione PC
Regolare la posizione dello schermo del PC se non si adatta allo schermo del televisore. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per regolare la
posizione verticale. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per regolare la posizione orizzontale.
Reset immagine
È possibile sostituire tutte le impostazioni dell'immagine ripristinando i valori di fabbrica.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Regolazione auto ►
Schermo
Impostazioni avanzate
Opzioni immagine
Reset immagine
Immagine
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:17Italiano - 1
CONTROLLO AUDIO
Configurazione del menu audio
Modalità → Standard / Musica / Film / Voce cristallina / Personalizza
E’ possibile selezionare una modalità audio per soddisfare le proprie preferenze.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile impostare
la modalità audio selezionando Strumenti → Modalità audio.
Standard
Seleziona la modalità audio normale.
Musica
Enfatizza musica e voci.
Film
Offre la migliore qualità audio per la visione di film.
Voce cristallina
Enfatizza voci e altri suoni.
Personalizza
Richiama le impostazioni audio personalizzate.
Equalizzatore
Le impostazioni audio possono essere regolate in base alle proprie preferenze personali.
Modalità
E’ possibile selezionare una modalità audio per soddisfare le proprie preferenze.
Bilanciamento
Controlla il bilanciamento degli altoparlanti sinistro e destro.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Regolazione ampiezza di banda)
Per regolare il livello delle diverse frequenze di larghezza di banda.
Reset
Ripristina le impostazione predefinite dell’equalizzatore.
SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SRS TruSurround HD è una tecnologia SRS brevettata che risolve il problema della riproduzione di contenuti multicanale 5.1 su
due altoparlanti. TruSurround offre una straordinaria esperienza Surround Sound virtuale attraverso un sistema di riproduzione a
due altoparlanti, inclusi gli altoparlanti interni del televisore. È pienamente compatibile con tutti i formati multicanale.
Lingua audio (solo canali digitali)
È possibile modificare la lingua predefinita. Visualizza le informazioni sulla lingua relative alla trasmissione in corso.
E' possibile selezionare solo una delle lingue trasmesse.
Durante la visione di un canale digitale, è possibile selezionare questa funzione.
Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (solo canali digitali)
Quando l’audio è generato sia dall’altoparlante principale sia dal ricevitore audio, potrebbe prodursi un effetto di eco a causa della
diversa velocità di decodifica dei due dispositivi. In questo caso, attivare la funzione TV Speaker.
Il formato audio dipende dal segnale trasmesso dall'emittente.
Durante la visione di un canale digitale, è possibile selezionare questa funzione.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Modalità : Personalizza ►
Equalizzatore
TruSurround HD SRS : Off
Lingua audio : - - -
Formato audio : - - -
Descrizione audio
Volume auto : Off
Suono
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:17Italiano - 18
Descrizione audio (solo canali digitali)
Questa funzione audio ausiliaria fornisce una traccia audio aggiuntiva per aiutare le persone con problemi visivi. Questa funzione
gestisce il flusso audio per l’opzione AD (Audio Description), quando è trasmesso insieme all’Audio principale dall'emittente. Gli
utenti possono attivare o disattivare la funzione Audio Description selezionando On o Off e regolarne il volume.
Premere il tasto AD sul telecomando per selezionare Spenta o On.
Descrizione audio → Off / On
Attiva e disattiva la funzione Audio Description.
Volume
E’ possibile regolare il volume della funzione Audio Description.
Volume è attivo quando la funzione Descrizione audio è impostata su On.
Volume auto → Off / On
Le condizioni del segnale variano a seconda dell’emittente, ma non è pratico regolare il volume ogni volta che si cambia canale.
Questa funzione consente di regolare automaticamente il volume del canale desiderato diminuendo il livello dell’uscita audio
quando il segnale di modulazione è alto, oppure aumentando il livello dell’uscita audio quando il segnale di modulazione è basso.
Selezione altoparlante → Altoparlante est / Altoparlante TV
Se si desidera ascoltare l'audio da altoparlanti separati, annullare l'amplificatore interno.
I tasti di regolazione del volume e il tasto MUTE non sono attivi quando Selezione altoparlante è impostato su
Altoparlante est.
Selezionando Altoparlante est nel menu Selezione altoparlante, le impostazioni dell’audio saranno limitate.
Reset impostazioni audio → Azzera tutto / Azz mod audio / Annulla
E' possibile ripristinare le impostazioni audio ai valori di fabbrica.
Selezione della modalità audio
E’ possibile impostare la modalità audio nel menu Strumenti. Quando si imposta la modalità Dual l ll, la modalità audio corrente
viene visualizzata sullo schermo.
Tipo di audio Dual 1 / 2 Predefinito
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Cambio automatico
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
Stereo
NICAM
Mono MONO
Cambio automatico
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Se il segnale stereo è debole e si verifica un cambio automatico, passare alla modalità Mono.
Questa funzione è attiva solo con segnale audio stereo. Al contrario, non è attiva con segnale audio mono.
Questa funzione è disponibile solo in modalità TV.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:17Italiano - 19
IMPOSTAZIONE
Configurazione del menu Setup
Lingua menu
E' possibile impostare la lingua dei menu.
Ora
Orologio
L’impostazione dell’orologio è necessaria per utilizzare le varie funzioni di timer del televisore.
L’ora corrente appare ogni volta che si preme il tasto INFO.
Se il cavo di alimentazione viene scollegato, è necessario impostare nuovamente
l’orologio.
Modalità orologio
E’ possibile impostare manualmente o automaticamente l’orario corrente.
Auto: Imposta automaticamente l’orario corrente utilizzando l’orario inviato dalla trasmissione digitale.
Manuale: Imposta manualmente l’ora corrente.
In base all'emittente e al segnale, la funzione dell'impostazione automatica dell'orario potrebbe non essere corretta. In
questo caso, impostare l'orario manualmente.
La connessione Antenna o Cavo deve consentire l'impostazione automatica dell'orario.
Imposta Ora
È possibile impostare manualmente l’ora corrente.
Configurare questa voce una volta impostata la funzione Modalità orologio su Manuale.
È possibile impostare il giorno, il mese, l’anno, l’ora e i minuti premendo direttamente i tasti numerici del telecomando.
Timer stand-by → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
Il timer di spegnimento disattiva automaticamente il televisore dopo il tempo impostato (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minuti).
Quando il timer raggiunge lo 0 il televisore passa automaticamente in modalità Standby.
Per annullare la funzione Timer stand-by selezionare Off.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile impostare il timer di standby selezionando
Strumenti → Timer stand-by.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Possono essere impostate tre diverse opzioni del Timer. E' prima necessario impostare l’orologio.
Orario TV on: Impostare l’ora e i minuti e premere Attiva / Disattiva. (Per attivare il timer con l'impostazione desiderata,
selezionare Attiva.)
Orario TV off: Impostare l’ora e i minuti e premere Attiva / Disattiva. (Per attivare il timer con l'impostazione desiderata,
selezionare Attiva.)
Volume: Selezionare il livello di volume desiderato per l'accensione del dispositivo.
Antenna: Selezionare Antenna o Cavo.
Canale: Selezionare il canale desiderato.
Ripetizione: Selezionare Una volta, Ogni gg, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sab, Sab~Dom, o Manuale.
Quando viene selezionato Manuale, premere il tasto ► per impostare il giorno della settimana. Premere il tasto
ENTERE sul giorno desiderato per visualizzare un simbolo c.
È possibile impostare l’ora, i minuti e il canale anche premendo i tasti numerici del telecomando.
Spegnimento automatico
Quando il televisore si accende attraverso il timer impostato su acceso, si spegne automaticamente se per tre ore non viene
premuto alcun tasto di controllo. Questa funzione è disponibile solo se il timer è impostato su acceso e impedisce l’eventuale
surriscaldamento del televisore dovuto a un periodo di accensione troppo lungo.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Lingua menu : Italiano ►
Ora
Trasmissione
Sicurezza
Generale
Impostazione
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:17Italiano - 20
Trasmissione
Sottotitoli
È possibile attivare e disattivare i sottotitoli. Utilizzare questo menu per impostare la modalità sottotitoli. Normale rappresenta il
sottotitolo di base mentre Non udenti è il sottotitolo per le persone con problemi uditivi.
Sottotitoli → Off / On: Attiva e disattiva i sottotitoli.
Modalità → Normale / Non udenti: Imposta la modalità dei sottotitoli.
Lingua Sottotitoli: Imposta la lingua dei sottotitoli.
Se il programma che si sta guardando non supporta la funzione Non udenti si attiva automaticamente l’opzione Normale
anche se è selezionata la modalità Non udenti.
L’inglese è la lingua predefinita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la lingua selezionata.
È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicemente premendo il tasto SUBT. sul telecomando.
Testo digitale → Disattiva / Attiva (solo RU)
Se il programma è trasmesso con testo digitale, questa funzione è attivata.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Uno standard internazionale per i sistemi di codifica dei dati multimediali e ipermediali. È un sistema più complesso rispetto al
formato MPEG in quanto include collegamenti a dati ipermediali come immagini fisse, servizi di caratteri, animazione, grafica
e file video, oltre ai dati multimediali. MHEG è una tecnologia interattiva con vari campi di applicazione, come sistemi VOD
(Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), teleformazione, teleconferenza, librerie digitali e giochi
di rete.
Lingua Teletext
E' possibile impostare la lingua del Teletext.
L’inglese è la lingua predefinita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la lingua selezionata.
Preferenze
Lingua principale audio / Lingua secondaria audio / Lingua princip sottotitoli / Lingua second sottotitoli /
Lingua principale Teletext / Lingua secondaria Teletext
Mediante questa funzione, gli utenti sono in grado di selezionare una delle lingue disponibili. La lingua selezionata viene
impostata automaticamente durante la selezione di un canale.
Modificando l’impostazione della lingua, le opzioni Lingua del sottotitolo, Lingua audio e Lingua Teletext del Lingua vengono
automaticamente impostate sulla lingua selezionata
Le opzioni Lingua Sottotitoli, Lingua audio, e Lingua Teletext del Lingua mostrano l’elenco delle lingue supportate dal canale
corrente, dove l’opzione corrente appare evidenziata. Se si modifica una di queste opzioni, la nuova lingua viene applicata
solo al canale corrente. La nuova impostazione non viene invece applicata alle opzioni Lingua principale sottotitoli, Lingua
principale audio o Lingua principale Teletext del menu Preference.
Interfaccia comune
Menu CI
Questa modalità permette all’utente di accedere al menu del modulo CAM.
Selezionare Menu CI in base alla scheda PC.
Info sull’applicazione
Contiene informazioni sul modulo CAM inserito nello slot CI e le visualizza.
Le informazioni sull’applicazione sono relative alla scheda CI. È possibile installare il modulo CAM in qualsiasi momento
sia mentre il televisore è acceso sia mentre è spento.
1. Acquistare il modulo CI CAM presso il rivenditore locale più vicino o via telefono.
2. Inserire la scheda CI nel modulo CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia.
3. Inserire il modulo CAM con la scheda CI installata nello slot common interface.
(Inserire completamente il CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia in modo che risulti parallelo allo slot.)
4. Verificare la visione dell’immagine su un canale a segnale criptato.
Il modulo CAM non è supportato in alcune nazioni e regioni; controllare con il rivenditore autorizzato di zona.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:17Italiano - 21
Sicurezza
Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.
Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è 0-0-0-0. E' possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu.
Blocco canali → Off / On
Tramite questa funzione è possibile impedire agli utenti non autorizzati, ad esempio i bambini, di guardare programmi non adatti a
loro, annullando il video e azzerando l’audio.
E’ possibile bloccare alcuni canali nell’elenco dei canali. (vedere pag. 12)
Blocco canali è disponibile solo in modalità TV.
Blocco Canale
Questa funzione consente di immettere un codice PIN di identificazione personale a 4 cifre definito dall’utente per impedire agli
utenti non autorizzati, come ad esempio i bambini, di vedere programmi non adatti a loro.
La voce Blocco Canale può essere diversa in base alla nazione.
Una volta impostata la funzione Blocco Canale, verrà visualizzato il simbolo ‘\’.
Cons tutto: Premere per sbloccare tutte le classificazioni dei canali TV.
Bloc tutto: Premere per bloccare tutte le classificazioni dei canali TV.
Cambia PIN
E' possibile modificare il numero ID necessario per configurare il televisore.
Qualora si sia dimenticato il codice PIN, premere i tasti del telecomando nella sequenza seguente per ripristinare il codice PIN
predefinito 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (On).
Generale
Modalità gioco → Off / On
Durante la connessione a una console per videogiochi come PlayStation™ o Xbox™, il gioco sarà più realistico selezionando il
relativo menu.
Per scollegare una console per videogiochi e collegare un altro dispositivo esterno, annullare la modalità gioco nel menu di
impostazione.
Visualizzado il menu TV in Modalità gioco si potrebbe verificare un leggero sfarfallio.
Modalità gioco non è disponibile in modalità TV e PC.
Se Modalità gioco è acceso:
La modalità Immagine viene impostata automaticamente su Standard e l'utente non può modificarla.
La modalità Suono viene impostata automaticamente su Personalizza e l'utente non può modificarla. Regolare l'audio
mediante l'equalizzatore.
La funzione Reset Suono viene attivata. La selezione della funzione Reset dopo l’impostazione dell’equalizzatore ripristina le
impostazione di fabbrica dell’equalizzatore.
Risp. energia → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta / Immagine off / Auto
Questa funzione regola la luminosità del televisore in modo da ridurre il consumo di energia. Durante la visione notturna del
televisore, impostare l’opzione della modalità Risp. energia su Alta in modo da ridurre l’affaticamento degli occhi oltre al consumo
energetico.
Selezionando Immagine off, lo schermo si spegne lasciando attivo solo l’audio. Premere un tasto qualsiasi per uscire dalla
modalità Immagine off.
Nel menu Tools, la funzione Immagine off non è supportata.
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile impostare l’opzione Energy Saving
selezionando Strumenti→ Risp. energia.
Melodia → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta
E' possibile impostare una melodia da attivare a ogni accensione o spegnimento del monitor.
La modalità Melody non funziona
Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto MUTE.
Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto (–) Volume.
Se il televisore è stato spento mediante la funzione Sleep Timer.
❑
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
T
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:17Italiano - 22
INGRESSI / SUPPORTO
Configurazione del menu Ingressi
Elenco sorgenti
Questa funzione viene usata per selezionare il televisore o un'altra sorgente di ingresso come
un lettore DVD/Blu-ray o un ricevitore satellitare (Set-Top Box) collegato al televisore. Utilizzare
la funzione per selezionare la sorgente di ingresso desiderata.
Premere il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando per visualizzare una sorgente del segnale
esterna. La modalità TV può essere selezionata premendo il tasto TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
E’ possibile scegliere solo i dispositivi esterni collegati al televisore. In Elenco sorgenti,
gli ingressi collegati verranno evidenziati e ordinati in cima all'elenco. Gli ingressi non
collegati verranno ordinati in fondo all’elenco.
Ext. e PC rimangono sempre attive.
TOOLS (Strumenti): Visualizza i menu Modifica Nome e Informazioni.
Modifica Nome
Assegnare un nome al dispositivo collegato ai jack di ingresso per semplificare la selezione della sorgente di ingresso.
VCR / DVD / STB cavo / STB satellite / STB PVR / Ricevitore AV / Giochi / Videocamera / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
Quando si collega un cavo HDMI/DVI a una porta HDMI IN 1 (DVI), è necessario impostare la modalità HDMI1/DVI su DVI o
DVI PC nel campo Modifica Nome della modalità Ingressi. In questo caso, è necessaria una connessione audio separata.
Configurazione del menu Supporto
Auto diagnosi
Test immagine
In caso di problemi di visualizzazione dell'immagine, eseguire il test pertinente. Verificare il
color pattern sullo schermo per vedere se il problema persiste.
Sì: Se il test pattern non compare oppure presenta disturbi, selezionare Sì. Potrebbe
essersi verificato un problema con il televisore. Contattare il call center Samsung per
richiedere assistenza.
No: Se il test pattern è visualizzato correttamente, selezionare No. Potrebbe essersi
verificato un problema con i dispositivi esterni. Controllare lo stato dei collegamenti. Se il
problema persiste, consultare il manuale dell'utente dei dispositivi esterni.
Test audio
In caso di problemi di audio, eseguire il test pertinente. Controllare l'audio riproducendo un test
melodico attraverso le casse del televisore. Il messaggio ‘Il problema riscontrato con il test audio persiste?’ viene visualizzato sullo
schermo.
Se non c'è ritorno audio dagli altoparlanti del televisore, prima di eseguire il test verificare che Selezione altoparlante sia
impostato su Altoparlante TV nel menu Suono.
E' possibile ascoltare la melodia durante il test anche se Selezione altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante est oppure
l'audio è stato disattivato mediante la pressione del tasto MUTE.
Sì: Se durante l'esecuzione del test audio il suono proviene da un solo altoparlante, selezionare Sì. Potrebbe essersi verificato
un problema con il televisore. Contattare il call center Samsung per richiedere assistenza.
No: Se è possibile ascoltare il suono dagli altoparlanti, selezionare No. Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con i
dispositivi esterni. Controllare lo stato dei collegamenti. Se il problema persiste, consultare il manuale dell'utente dei dispositivi
esterni.
Informazioni sul segnale (solo canali digitali)
Diversamente dai canali analogici, la cui qualità di ricezione può variare da ‘molto disturbata' a 'chiara', i canali digitali (HDTV)
sono caratterizzati da una perfetta qualità oppure dalla totale mancanza di ricezione. Non è quindi possibile sintonizzare i canali
digitali. Per migliorare la ricezione dei canali digitali disponibili è tuttavia possibile regolare l'antenna.
Se il misuratore della potenza del segnale indica che il segnale è debole, regolare fisicamente l'antenna per aumentare il
segnale. Continuare a regolare l'antenna fino a trovare la posizione migliore per ricevere il segnale in modo ottimale.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Auto diagnosi ►
Aggiornamento software
Guida alla connessione HD
Contattare Samsung
Supporto
Elenco sorgenti
Modifica Nome
Entrée
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:18Italiano - 23
Aggiornamento software
Gli aggiornamenti del prodotto, contenenti le nuove funzionalità della televisione digitale,
vengono trasmessi periodicamente tramite il normale segnale televisivo. Il prodotto rileva
automaticamente questi segnali e visualizza la finestra di aggiornamento del software. E' quindi
possibile avviare l’installazione degli aggiornamenti.
Tramite USB
Inserire un’unità USB contenente l’aggiornamento del firmware nel televisore. Fare attenzione
a non disattivare l'alimentazione o rimuovere l'unità USB mentre l'aggiornamento è in
corso. Al termine dell'aggiornamento del firmware, il televisore si spegnerà e riaccenderà
automaticamente. Verificare la versione del firmware al termine dell'aggiornamento. Al termine
dell'aggiornamento del software, le impostazioni video e audio modificate torneranno alle impostazioni predefinite di fabbrica.
Si consiglia di scrivere le impostazioni in modo da poterle facilmente ripristinare dopo l’aggiornamento.
Tramite canale
Aggiorna il software mediante il segnale trasmesso.
Se la funzione viene selezionata durante la trasmissione software, questa funzione ricerca il software disponibile e ne scarica
gli aggiornamenti.
Il tempo necessario per scaricare il software è determinato dallo stato del segnale.
Aggiornamento mod Standby
Per continuare l’aggiornamento software anche quando l’alimentazione principale è attiva, selezionare acceso premendo il tasto
▲ o ▼ . 45 minuti dopo l’ingresso in modalità Standby, viene effettuato un aggiornamento manuale. Poiché l’alimentazione
dell’unità si attiva internamente, lo schermo LCD potrà attivarsi per breve tempo. Questo fenomeno può continuare per più di
un’ora, fino al termine dell’aggiornamento software.
Software alternativo
Per visualizzare le informazioni relative alla versione del software.
Guida alla connessione HD
Questo menu presenta la modalità di connessione in grado di offrire la qualità ottimale per i televisori HD.
Consultare queste informazioni durante la connessione di dispositivi esterni al televisore.
Contattare Samsung
Fare riferimento a queste informazioni in caso di funzionamento anomalo del televisore o se si desidera aggiornare il software.
E' possibile visualizzare le informazioni relative a call centre, prodotto e metodo di scaricamento del software.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Pannello posteriore del televisore
Unità USB
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:18Italiano - 24
RACCOMANDAZIONI PER L'USO
Funzione Teletext
La maggior parte delle emittenti televisive fornisce servizi informativi tramite il servizio Teletext. La pagina dell’indice del servizio
Teletext contiene informazioni sull’uso del servizio. Inoltre, è possibile selezionare varie opzioni tramite i tasti del telecomando.
Per visualizzare correttamente le informazioni del servizio Teletext, è necessario che la ricezione del canale sia stabile.
In caso contrario, alcune informazioni potrebbero essere perse o alcune pagine potrebbero non essere visualizzate
correttamente.
E’ possibile cambiare le pagine Teletext premendo i tasti numerici sul telecomando.
1 0 (Modalità)
Premere questo tasto per selezionare
la modalità Teletext (LIST/FLOF).
Premendo questo tasto nella
modalità LIST, si attiva la modalità
di memorizzazione dell’elenco. In
modalità di salvataggio Elenco, è
possibile memorizzare la pagina Teletext
all’interno di un elenco utilizzando il
tasto 8 (memorizza).
2 5 (scopri)
Consente di visualizzare il testo
nascosto (risposte a quiz, ad
esempio). Per tornare alla modalità di
visualizzazione normale, premere di
nuovo il tasto.
3 4 (dimensione)
Premere questo tasto per raddoppiare
le dimensioni dei caratteri nella metà
superiore dello schermo. Premere di
nuovo il tasto per ingrandire i caratteri
nella metà inferiore dello schermo. Per
tornare alla modalità di visualizzazione
normale, premere di nuovo il tasto.
4 8 (memorizza)
Utilizzato per memorizzare le pagine
Teletext.
5 Tasti colorati (rosso/verde/giallo/blu)
Se una emittente usa il sistema
FASTEXT, i vari argomenti trattati in
una pagina Teletext vengono codificati
in base ai colori e possono essere
selezionati premendo i relativi tasti
colorati. Premere il tasto il cui colore
corrisponde a quello dell’argomento
desiderato. La pagina viene visualizzata
con altre informazioni colorate che
possono essere selezionate allo stesso
modo. Per visualizzare la pagina
successiva o precedente, premere il
tasto colorato corrispondente.
6/ (Teletext on/mix)
Premere questo tasto per attivare la
modalità Teletext dopo avere selezionato
un canale che fornisce questo tipo di
servizio. Premere di nuovo il tasto per
sovrapporre le informazioni del servizio
Teletext alla trasmissione corrente.
7 : (esci)
Esce dalla visualizzazione del servizio
Teletext.
8 1 (pagina secondaria)
Visualizza la pagina secondaria
disponibile.
9 2 (pagina su)
Consente di visualizzare la pagina
Teletext successiva.
0 3(pagina giù)
Consente di visualizzare la pagina
Teletext precedente.
! 9 (mantieni)
Consente di mantenere visualizzata
una pagina, se la pagina è collegata
a più pagine secondarie che scorrono
automaticamente. Premerlo nuovamente
per riprendere la visualizzazione.
@ 6 (indice)
In modalità Teletext, premere questo tasto
in qualsiasi momento per visualizzare la
pagina dell’indice (contenuti).
# 7 (annulla)
Utilizzato per visualizzare le stazioni
emittenti durante la ricerca di una pagina.
Le pagine Teletext sono organizzate in base a sei categorie:
Parte Contenuti
A Numero della pagina selezionata.
B Identità della stazione emittente.
C Numero della pagina corrente o stato della ricerca.
D Data e ora.
E Testo.
F Informazioni sullo stato.
Informazioni FASTEXT.
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:18Italiano - 25
Le informazioni del servizio Teletext sono spesso suddivise su più pagine visualizzate in sequenza alle quali è possibile
accedere come segue:
Digitando il numero di pagina
Selezionando un titolo in un elenco
Selezionando un’intestazione colorata (sistema FASTEXT)
Il servizio Teletext supportato dal televisore è la versione 2.5 che consente di visualizzare ulteriori elementi grafici o di testo.
In base alla trasmissione, possono comparire bande laterali vuote durante la visualizzazione del servizio Teletext.
In questo caso, non verranno trasmessi ulteriori elementi grafici o di testo.
I televisori meno recenti che non supportano la versione 2.5 non sono in grado di visualizzare alcun elemento grafico o di
testo aggiuntivo, a prescindere dal tipo di trasmissione Teletext.
Premere il tasto TV per uscire dal servizio Teletext.
Teletext 16:9, immagine in formato 16:9
Installazione del piedistallo
Preimpostazione: Collocare la guida del piedistallo e il collare della copertura sul
piedistallo e avvitarli usando le viti fornite. Solo per il modello da 32 pollici.
N
1. Assemblare il TV LCD al piedistallo.
Il televisore deve essere sorretto da due o più persone.
Prima di assemblare le due parti, controllare se il lato del piedistallo (anteriore/
posteriore) è quello corretto.
Per installare il televisore sul piedistallo a un'altezza corretta, non applicare una forza
eccessiva verso il basso sui lati superiori del televisore.
2. Avvitare due viti nella posizione 1, quindi avvitare altre due viti nella posizione 2.
Raddrizzare il prodotto e serrare le viti. Avvitando le viti con lo schermo LCD
appoggiato sul piano, una volta sollevato il prodotto potrebbe risultare inclinato su un
lato.
N
N
N
N
Installazione del Kit di montaggio a parete
Gli articoli del kit di montaggio a parete (venduti separatamente) consentono di montare il
televisore alla parete.
Per informazioni dettagliate sull’installazione del kit di montaggio a parete, consultare le
istruzioni fornite insieme agli articoli del kit. Contattare un tecnico per richiedere assistenza
quando si monta la staffa a parete.
Samsung Electronics non può essere ritenuta responsabile per qualsiasi danno al prodotto o
infortuni causati da una installazione autonoma del televisore da parte dell’utente.
Non installare il Supporto a parete mentre il televisore è acceso. In caso contrario,
potrebbero verificarsi incidenti con lesioni personali causate da scosse elettriche.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Retro
Fronte
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:19Italiano - 26
Uso del blocco antifurto Kensington
Il blocco Kensington è un dispositivo usato per fissare fisicamente il sistema quando viene
utilizzato in un luogo pubblico. L’aspetto del dispositivo e il metodo di blocco possono
variare in base alla marca del prodotto. Per informazioni sull’uso, consultare il manuale
fornito insieme al blocco Kensington. Il dispositivo di blocco è in vendita separatamente. La
posizione del blocco Kensington può variare a seconda del modello.
1. Inserire il dispositivo nell’alloggiamento del blocco Kensington sul TV LCD (1) e
ruotarlo nella direzione di chiusura (2).
2. Collegare il cavo del blocco Kensington (3).
3. Fissare il blocco Kensington a un tavolo o un altro oggetto pesante.
3
1
2
Messa in sicurezza della posizione di installazione
Mantenere le distanze necessarie tra il prodotto e gli altri elementi presenti (per esempio le pareti) per garantire un’adeguata
ventilazione.
La mancata osservanza di tale precauzione può comportare un pericolo d’incendio o un malfunzionamento a causa del
surriscaldamento del prodotto.
Installare il prodotto mantenendo le distanze indicate in figura.
Quando si usa un piedistallo o un sistema di montaggio a parete, utilizzare solo le parti fornite da Samsung Electronics.
L’uso di parti di altre marche può causare un malfunzionamento o lesioni provocate da una eventuale caduta del prodotto.
L’uso di parti di altre marche può comportare un malfunzionamento o un pericolo di incendio per il surriscaldamento del
prodotto a causa di una ventilazione inadeguata.
L’aspetto del prodotto può variare a seconda del modello.
Durante l’installazione del prodotto con un piedistallo Durante l’installazione del prodotto con un sistema di montaggio a parete
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:20Italiano - 2
Fissaggio del televisore alla parete
Attenzione: Tirare, spingere o arrampicarsi sul televisore sono azioni che possono provocarne la caduta.
Si raccomanda di non far giocare i bambini con il televisore poiché potrebbero appendersi ad esso
destabilizzandolo; se ciò dovesse verificarsi, il televisore potrebbe cadere provocando lesioni personali gravi
e perfino mortali. Seguire tutte le precauzioni di sicurezza descritte della documentazione allegata. Per una
maggiore stabilità e sicurezza del prodotto, installare il dispositivo anticaduta come segue.
Per evitare una eventuale caduta del televisore:
1. Avvitare saldamente i ganci alla parete. Verificare che le viti di fissaggio siano ben
serrate.
A seconda del tipo di parete, potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare anche un fisher.
Poiché i ganci, le viti e il cavo di sicurezza non sono forniti in dotazione, è
necessario acquistare tali materiali separatamente.
2. Rimuovere le viti dal centro del pannello posteriore del televisore, inserirle nei ganci e
quindi avvitarle nuovamente al televisore.
Le viti potrebbero non essere fornite insieme al prodotto. In questo caso, acquistare
le viti separatamente in base alle specifiche qui riportate.
Specifiche delle viti
Per un TV LCD da 17 ~ 29 pollici: L15 viti M4
Per un TV LCD da 32 ~ 40 pollici: L15 viti M6
3. Collegare i ganci fissati al televisore a quelli fissati alla parete utilizzando un cavo
resistente, quindi legarlo strettamente.
Installare il televisore il più possibile vicino alla parete in modo che non possa
cadere all’indietro.
Collegare il cavo in modo che i ganci fissati alla parete si trovino allineati o
leggermente più in basso di quelli fissati al televisore.
Slegare il cavo prima di spostare il televisore.
4. Accertarsi che tutte le connessioni siano adeguatamente fissate. Controllare
periodicamente le connessioni per verificarne l’eventuale usura o rottura. Per qualsiasi dubbio relativo alla sicurezza delle
connessioni effettuate, contattare un installatore specializzato.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Parete
Parete
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:20Italiano - 28
Risoluzione dei problemi
In caso di domande sul funzionamento del televisore, consultare per prima cosa l'elenco sottostante. Se nessuno dei consigli
sottoriportati si dimostra utile per risolvere il problema, visitare il sito ‘www.samsung.com’, quindi fare clic sulla voce Support
(Assistenza), oppure chiamare il numero del Call Center riportato in ultima pagina.
Problema Soluzione
Qualità dell'immagine
Per prima cosa, eseguire il Test immagine per confermare che il televisore sia in grado di
visualizzare correttamente l'immagine di prova.
Quindi, selezionare MENU - Supporto - Auto diagnosi - Test immagine
Se l'immagine di prova viene visualizzata correttamente, la scarsa qualità dell'immagine
potrebbe essere causata dalla sorgente o dal segnale.
●
La qualità dell'immagine non
sembra all'altezza di quella vista
in negozio.
Se si dispone di un ricevitore via cavo analogico/satellitare, eseguirne l'aggiornamento.
Utilizzare cavi HDMI o Component per ottenere una qualità dell'immagine HD.
Abbonato servizi cavo/satellite: Provare le stazioni HD (High Definition) disponibili
attraverso la griglia dei programmi (channel line up).
Connessione Antenna: Provare le stazioni HD dopo avere eseguito il programma
automatico.
Molti canali HD trasmettono contenuti SD (Standard Definition) aggiornati.
Impostare la risoluzione di uscita video del ricevitore via cavo/satellitare su 1080i o 720p.
Verificare di stare guardando il televisore alla distanza minima raccomandata basata
sulla dimensione dello schermo e la definizione del segnale visualizzato.
●
●
●
N
●
●
L'immagine è distorta: sono visibili
blocchi grandi, blocchi piccoli,
punti e pixel
La compressione di contenuti video può causare la distorsione dell'immagine
specialmente nel caso di immagini caratterizzate da movimenti rapidi, come per
esempio eventi sportivi o film d'azione.
Un segnale debole o di scarsa qualità può causare la distorsione dell'immagine.
Questo non è un problema del televisore.
●
●
Con una connessione Component il
colore risulta incongruo o mancante.
Verificare che i cavi Component siano connessi ai rispettivi jack. Connessioni allentate
o non corrette possono causare problemi di colore o una schermata vuota.
●
Colore o luminosità delle
immagini scadente.
Regolare le opzioni Immagine nel menu TV. (La modalità Immagine, Colore,
Luminosità, Nitidezza)
Regolare l'opzione Risp. energia nel menu Impostazione.
Provare a reimpostare l'immagine visualizzandola con le impostazioni predefinite.
(Selezionare MENU - Immagine - Reset immagine)
●
●
●
E' visibile una linea punteggiata
sul bordo dello schermo.
Se la dimensione dell'immagine è impostata su Adatta a schermo, modificarla
selezionando 16:9.
Cambiare la risoluzione del ricevitore via cavo/satellitare.
●
●
L'immagine risulta in bianco e
nero solo in caso di ingresso AV
(Composite).
● Collegare un cavo video (giallo) al jack verde dell'ingresso component 1 del televisore.
Quando si cambiano i canali,
l'immagine risulta ferma, distorta
o in ritardo.
Se il televisore è connesso a un ricevitore via cavo, reimpostare il ricevitore.
(Riconnettere il cavo CA e attendere fino al riavvio del ricevitore. L'operazione
potrebbe richiedere fino a 20 minuti di tempo)
Impostare la risoluzione di uscita del ricevitore via cavo su 1080i o 720p.
●
●
Qualità audio
Per prima cosa, eseguire il Test audio per confermare che l'impianto audio del televisore
funzioni in modo appropriato.
Quindi, selezionare MENU - Supporto - Auto diagnosi - Test audio
Se l'audio viene riprodotto correttamente, il problema potrebbe essere causato dalla
sorgente o dal segnale.
●
L'audio non viene riprodotto
oppure il livello del volume risulta
troppo basso anche se impostato
al valore massimo.
Verificare il volume del dispositivo esterno collegato al televisore, quindi regolare il
volume del televisore di conseguenza.
●
L'immagine è buona ma senza
audio.
Impostare l'opzione Selezione altoparlante su Altoparlante TV nel menu audio.
Verificare che i cavi audio provenienti dal dispositivo esterno siano connessi ai
rispettivi jack audio sul televisore.
Verificare l'opzione di uscita audio del dispositivo. (es. Potrebbe essere necessario
cambiare l'opzione del ricevitore via cavo in HDMI in caso di collegamento HDMI al TV.)
Se si usa un cavo DVI-HDMI, è necessario utilizzare un cavo audio separato.
Disattivare la funzione SRS se è stato impostato il volume oltre il valore 30.
Scollegare lo spinotto dal jack della cuffia. (se disponibile sul televisore)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rumore proveniente
dall'altoparlante.
Verificare le connessioni dei cavi. Verificare che il cavo video non sia connesso a un
ingresso audio.
Per le connessioni Antenna/Cavo, verificare l'intensità del segnale. Un segnale basso
può causare la distorsione dell'audio.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:21Italiano - 29
Problema Soluzione
Nessuna immagine, video spento
Il televisore non si accende. Verificare che la spina del cavo di alimentazione CA sia correttamente collegata a una
presa a muro.
Accertarsi che la presa a muro sia funzionante.
Premere il tasto POWER sul televisore per verificare che il telecomando funzioni
correttamente. Se il televisore si accende, il problema potrebbe essere causato
dal telecomando. Per risolvere il problema causato dal telecomando, consultare il
paragrafo sottostante ‘Il telecomando non funziona’.
●
●
●
Il televisore si spegne
automaticamente.
Verificare che l'opzione Timer stand-by sia impostata su On nel menu Impostazione.
Se il televisore è collegato al PC, verificare le impostazioni di alimentazione del PC.
Verificare che la spina del cavo di alimentazione CA sia correttamente collegata a una
presa a muro e il televisore sia acceso.
Se il televisore non riceve segnale per circa 10 ~ 15 minuti con una connessione
Antenna/Cavo, il televisore si spegne.
●
●
●
●
Nessuna immagine/Video. Verificare le connessioni dei cavi. (Scollegare e ricollegare tutti i cavi del televisore e
dei dispositivi esterni)
Impostare l'uscita video del dispositivo esterno (ricevitore via cavo/satellitare, lettore
DVD, Blu-ray, ecc) in modo che la connessione corrisponda all'ingresso del televisore.
Per esempio, uscita del dispositivo esterno: HDMI, ingresso TV: HDMI.
Verificare che il dispositivo collegato sia acceso.
Selezionare la corretta sorgente del televisore premendo il tasto SOURCE sul
telecomando TV.
●
●
●
●
Connessione RF (Cavo/Antenna)
Impossibile ricevere tutti i canali. Verificare che il cavo dell'antenna sia correttamente collegato.
Provare a impostare Plug & Play per aggiungere i canali disponibili all'elenco canali.
Selezionare MENU - Impostazione - Plug & Play e attendere che tutti i canali
disponibili vengano memorizzati.
Verificare che l'antenna sia posizionata correttamente.
●
●
●
L'immagine è distorta: sono visibili
blocchi grandi, blocchi piccoli,
punti e pixel
La compressione di contenuti video può causare la distorsione dell'immagine
specialmente nel caso di immagini caratterizzate da movimenti rapidi, come per
esempio eventi sportivi o film d'azione.
Un segnale basso può causare la distorsione dell'immagine. Questo non è un
problema del televisore.
●
●
Connessione PC
Messaggio ‘Modo non
supportato’.
Impostare la risoluzione di uscita e la frequenza del PC in modo che corrispondano
alle risoluzioni supportate dal televisore.
●
Nell'elenco sorgenti, il PC è
sempre evidenziato anche se non
è connesso.
E' normale; nell'elenco sorgenti, il PC risulta sempre evidenziato anche quando non è
collegato.
●
La riproduzione del video è
corretta ma manca l'audio con
una connessione HDMI.
● Verificare l'impostazione di uscita audio sul PC.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:21Italiano - 30
Problema Soluzione
Altri
L'immagine non viene riprodotta a
pieno schermo.
Quando si guardano contenuti SD (4:3) aggiornati per la trasmissione su canali HD,
appaiono barre nere su ogni lato dello schermo.
Quando vengono trasmessi film con un rapporto d'immagine diverso da quello del
televisore, appaiono barre nere sui lati superiore e inferiore dello schermo.
Regolare la dimensione dell'immagine sul dispositivo esterno o sul televisore per
visualizzare l'immagine a pieno schermo.
●
●
●
Il telecomando non funziona. Sostituire le batterie del telecomando rispettando la polarità (+ -).
Pulire la finestra di trasmissione posizionata in cima al telecomando.
Puntare il telecomando direttamente verso il televisore a una distanza di 1,5~2 metri.
●
●
●
Impossibile controllare il volume
o le funzioni di accensione/
spegnimento del televisore con
il telecomando del ricevitore via
cavo/satellitare.
Programmare il telecomando del ricevitore via cavo/satellitare in modo che possa
controllare le funzioni del televisore. Consultare il manuale dell'utente del ricevitore via
cavo/satellitare per il codice TV SAMSUNG.
●
Messaggio ‘Modo non
supportato’.
Verificare la risoluzione del televisore supportata e regolare di conseguenza la
risoluzione di uscita del dispositivo esterno. Consultare la sezione di questo manuale
relativa all'impostazione della risoluzione.
●
Il televisore emana odore di
plastica.
● E' normale avvertire questo odore che tuttavia svanirà nel corso del tempo.
TV Informazioni sul segnale
non è disponibile nel menu Self
Diagnostic Test.
Questa funzione è disponibile solo con canali digitali e connessione antenna
(RF/Coax).
●
Il televisore è inclinato verso
destra o sinistra.
● Rimuovere il piedistallo dal televisore quindi rimontarlo.
Impossibile montare il piedistallo. Verificare che il televisore sia posizionato su una superficie piana. Se non si riesce a
rimuovere le viti dal televisore, utilizzare un cacciavite con punta magnetica.
●
Il menu dei canali (Channel) è in
colore grigio. (non disponibile)
● Il menu Canale è disponibile solo se è selezionata la sorgente del televisore.
Le impostazioni andranno
perse dopo 30 minuti o a ogni
spegnimento del televisore.
Se il televisore è in modalità Demo Negozio, ogni 30 minuti verranno azzerate le
impostazioni audio e immagine. Commutare la modalità Demo Negozio in
Uso dom. secondo la procedura Plug & Play. Premere il tasto SOURCE per
selezionare la modalità TV, quindi selezionare MENU → Impostazione →
Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Perdita intermittente di segnale
audio o video.
Verificare le connessioni e ricollegare i cavi.
Questo problema potrebbe essere causato dall'uso di cavi troppo grossi o rigidi.
Verificare che i cavi siano sufficientemente flessibili da consentire un uso prolungato nel
tempo. In caso di montaggio a parete, si consiglia di utilizzare cavi con connettori da 90°.
●
●
Guardando da vicino il bordo
della cornice dello schermo del
televisore è possibile notare delle
piccole particelle.
● Ciò non costituisce un difetto ma fa parte del design del prodotto.
‘Segnale criptato’ o ‘Segnale
mancante/Segnale debole’ con la
scheda (CI) CAM.
Verificare che nel modulo CAM la SCHEDA CI sia installata nell'alloggiamento
common interface.
Estrarre il modulo CAM dal televisore e inserirlo nuovamente nell'alloggiamento.
●
●
Una volta spento, dopo 45
minuti il televisore si riaccende
automaticamente.
Ciò è normale, il televisore è dotato della funzione OTA (Over The Air) che permette di
aggiornare il firmware scaricato durante la visione del televisore.
●
Immagini/audio ricorrenti. ● Verificare e modificare il segnale/la sorgente.
Lo schermo LCD TFT usa un pannello composto da sotto pixel che richiedono una speciale tecnologia di produzione. Tuttavia,
alcuni pixel potrebbero risultare più luminosi o più scuri. Questo fenomeno non ha alcun impatto sulle prestazioni del prodotto.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:21Italiano - 31
Specifiche
Nome modello LE26B450 LE32B450
Dimensione schermo
(Diagonale) 26 poll. 32 poll.
Risoluzione PC
(Ottimale) 1360 x 768 a 60Hz 1360 x 768 a 60Hz
Audio
(Uscita) 2 x 5W 2 x 10W
Dimensioni (LarxProxAlt)
Corpo
Con piedistallo
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Peso
Con piedistallo 8 kg 12 kg
Caratteristiche ambientali
Temperatura di esercizio
Umidità di esercizio
Temperatura di stoccaggio
Umidità di stoccaggio
Da 10°C a 40°C (da 50 °F a 104 °F)
Dal 10% all'80%, senza condensa
Da -20°C a 45°C (da -4 °F a 113 °F)
Dal 5% al 95%, senza condensa
Da 10°C a 40°C (da 50 °F a 104 °F)
Dal 10% all'80%, senza condensa
Da -20°C a 45°C (da -4 °F a 113 °F)
Dal 5% al 95%, senza condensa
Piedistallo ruotabile
(Sinistra / Destra) 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
Design e specifiche sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso.
Questo prodotto è un’apparecchiatura digitale di Classe B.
Per l’alimentazione elettrica e il consumo di corrente, consultare l’etichetta apposta al prodotto.
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:21Italiano - 32
Diagrammi a blocchi
LANGIS LAMRON C2I SUB OIDUA OEDIV
HDMI 1,2,3
COMPONENT
Audio AMP
NTP3200
L
Speaker
R
ANT
DTV NIM Tuner
ATV Half Tuner
PC
Input Jack
SPDIF out
PCMCIA
SIDE AV
EXT_out
Display Panel
FHD 1920x1080
Or
HD 1366x768
MSTAR
Saturn4
(371-BGA)
Micom
3D Comb
Multi Decoder
(NTSC/PAL/SECAM
MPEG-2 AV/4/H.264)
De-interlacer
Scaler
LVDS Out
(10bit-dual)
Caption/TTX
10bit Process
Sound Process
USB 2.0
SXGA Output
HDMI 1.3 X 3
USB
(Down Load)
TS
SIF
CVBS
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
R,G,B,H/V Sync
I2S
LVDS
Sub Micom
DDR2
Flash Memory
64MB * 2
EEPROM
AT24C512
MX25L6405
EXT
CEC
RX/TX
RGB/FB
CVBS
FUNCTION KEY IR / Key
iDTV
ATV
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 32 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:21Questa pagina è stata lasciata
intenzionalmente vuota.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 33 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:22Las figuras y las ilustraciones de este Manual del usuario se proporcionan como referencia solamente y pueden ser diferentes
del aspecto real del producto. El diseño y las especificaciones del producto están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso.
Licencia
TruSurround HD, SRS y el símbolo son marcas registradas de SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnología
TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo licencia de SRS Labs, Inc.
Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas comerciales de
Dolby Laboratories.
Nota sobre la TV digital
1. Las funciones relacionadas con la TV digital (DVB) sólo están disponibles en países o regiones donde se emitan señales
terrestres digitales DVB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AVC) o donde se tenga acceso a servicios de televisión por cable compatibles
con DVB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si puede recibir señales DVB-T o
DVB-C.
2. DVB-T es una norma del consorcio europeo para la transmisión de la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la
transmisión de la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, en esta especificación no se incluyen algunas funciones
diferenciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica de programas), VOD (Vídeo a la carta) y otras. Por ello, en estos momentos aún
no están disponibles.
3. Este equipo de televisión cumple las más actuales normas de DVB-T y DVB-C, de [agosto de 2008], pero no se garantiza la
compatibilidad con futuras emisiones de televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C.
4. Según los países o regiones donde se utilice este equipo de TV, algunos proveedores de la televisión por cable pueden
cobrar un pago adicional por este servicio y pueden exigir al usuario su aceptación de los términos y condiciones de su
empresa.
5. Algunas funciones de televisión digital pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países o regiones y DVB-C o puede no
funcionar correctamente con algunos proveedores del servicio de cable.
6. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con su centro de atención al cliente de SAMSUNG.
Precauciones al mostrar en la pantalla una imagen fija
La imagen fija puede causar daños permanentes en la pantalla del televisor.
No muestre una imagen fija ni parcialmente fija en la pantalla LCD durante más de 2 horas, ya que se podría producir una
retención de la imagen en la pantalla. Este fenómeno de retención de imágenes también se denomina “quemadura de
pantalla”. Para evitar que se produzca esa persistencia de la imagen, reduzca el nivel de brillo y de contraste de la pantalla
cuando muestre imágenes fijas.
El uso del televisor LCD en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las
partes izquierda, derecha y central de la pantalla debido a las diferencias en la emisión lumínica de la
pantalla. Reproducir un DVD o una videoconsola puede causar un efecto similar en la pantalla. La garantía
no cubre estos daños.
Ver imágenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante más tiempo del indicado puede producir imágenes fantasma parciales. Para
evitar este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imágenes fijas.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Reservados todos los derechos.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:22Español - 1
Símbolo
N O T
Nota
Botón de una
pulsación
Botón TOOLS Pulsar
❑
INFORMACIÓN GENERAL
Aspecto general del panel de control ...................................2
Accesorios............................................................................2
Aspecto general del panel de conexiones............................3
Mando a distancia ................................................................5
Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia ..................5
FUNCIONAMIENTO
Visualización de los menús ..................................................6
Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera........................7
Función Plug & Play .............................................................7
Visualización de la pantalla ..................................................8
CONTROL DE LOS CANALES
Configuración del menú de canales .....................................8
Gestión de los canales ......................................................11
CONTROL DE LA IMAGEN
Configuración del menú de imagen....................................13
Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC)....15
Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador .................................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTROL DEL SONIDO
Configuración del menú de sonido.....................................17
Selección del modo de sonido............................................18
CONFIGURACIÓN
Configuración del menú de configuración ..........................19
ENTRADA / ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA
Configuración del menú de entrada ...................................22
Configuración del menú de ayuda......................................22
RECOMENDACIONES DE USO
Función de teletexto ...........................................................24
Instalación del soporte........................................................25
Instalación del equipo de montaje en la pared...................25
Uso del bloqueo Kensington antirrobos..............................26
Seguridad en el espacio de instalación..............................26
Fijación del televisor a la pared..........................................27
Solución de problemas.......................................................28
Especificaciones.................................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTENIDO
Español
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:22Español - 2
INFORMACIÓN GENERAL
Aspecto general del panel de control
El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
Puede usar un botón si pulsa los botones del panel lateral.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles. En el menú en pantalla, utilice este botón de igual
modo que el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia.
2 MENU: Púlselo para ver un menú en pantalla con las opciones del televisor.
3Y: Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen.
En el menú en pantalla, utilice estos botones Y de igual modo que los botones ◄ y ► del mando a distancia.
4Z: Permiten cambiar de canal. En el menú en pantalla, utilice estos botones Z de igual modo que los botones
▼ y ▲ del mando a distancia.
5 P (ENCENDIDO): Púlselo para encender o apagar el TV.
6 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA: El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor.
7 INDICADOR DE ALIMENTACIÓN: Parpadea y se apaga cuando se enciende el aparato y se ilumina en el modo en espera.
8 ALTAVOCES
Accesorios
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Mando a distancia y
pilas (AAA x 2)
Cable de
alimentación
Cubierta del
agujero inferior
Tornillos del
soporte x 4
Tornillos del soporte x 3
(sólo para el modelo de 32
pulgadas)
Paño de
limpieza
● Manual de instrucciones ● Tarjeta de garantía ● Guía de seguridad
Asegúrese de que los siguientes elementos se incluyen con el televisor de pantalla LCD. Si falta alguno, póngase en contacto
con su distribuidor.
Tarjeta de garantía/Guía de seguridad (no disponible en todos los lugares)
El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar según el modelo.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:23Español - 3
Aspecto general del panel de conexiones
El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
Cada vez que conecte un dispositivo externo al televisor, compruebe que la unidad esté desconectada de la alimentación.
Cuando conecte un dispositivo externo, debe hacer coincidir los colores del terminal de conexión y del cable.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Se conecta a un componente de audio digital como un receptor del sistema Home Cinema.
Cuando los terminales HDMI IN están conectados, el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisor genera
sólo 2 salidas de canales de audio. Para escuchar el audio de 5.1 canales, conecte el terminal Optical del reproductor
de DVD/Blu-ray o del decodificador de cable/satélite directamente a un amplificador o a un sistema Home Cinema, no al
televisor.
2 PC IN
Se conecta al terminal de salida de vídeo del PC.
3 ANT IN
Se conecta a un sistema de televisión por cable o antena.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Se conecta al terminal de salida de audio del PC.
Salidas de audio DVI para dispositivos externos.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Conecte los cables de audio RCA al terminal AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] de la parte posterior del aparato y los otros
extremos a los conectores de entrada de audio correspondientes en el amplificador o sistema de cine en casa en DVD.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
[Panel posterior del TV]
[Panel lateral del
televisor]
Entrada de
alimentación
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:23Español - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Se conecta al terminal HDMI de un dispositivo con una salida HDMI.
No se necesita conexión de sonido para una conexión de HDMI a HDMI.
Use el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) para la conexión de DVI a un dispositivo externo. Use un cable de DVI a HDMI o un
adaptador DVI-HDMI (de DVI a HDMI) para la conexión de vídeo y los terminales PC / DVI AUDIO IN para el audio.
También puede usar los puertos para conectarse a un PC.
¿Qué es HDMI?
‘High Definition Multimedia interface’ permite la transmisión de los datos de vídeo digital de alta definición y varios
canales de sonido digital.
El terminal HDMI/DVI admite la conexión DVI con un dispositivo ampliado mediante el cable apropiado (no suministrado).
La diferencia entre los dispositivos HDMI y DVI es que el HDMI es más pequeño, tiene instalada la función de
codificación HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) y es compatible con el sonido digital de varios canales.
Puede que el televisor no proporcione salida de sonido y muestre imágenes con colores anómalos si hay conectados
reproductores de DVD/Blu-ray o receptores de cable/satélite que admiten versiones de HDMI anteriores a la versión 1.3.
Si se conecta un cable antiguo HDMI y no hay sonido, conecte el cable HDMI al terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) y los cables de
audio a los terminales PC / DVI AUDIO IN de la parte posterior del televisor. Si ocurriera esto, póngase en contacto con
la empresa que suministró el reproductor de DVD/Blu-ray o receptor de televisión por cable o satélite para confirmar la
versión HDMI y, a continuación, solicite una actualización del firmware. Los cables HDMI que no sean 1.3 pueden causar
molestos parpadeos o que no se muestre la pantalla.
7 Ranura COMMON INTERFACE
Si no se inserta una ‘TARJETA CI’ con algunos canales, en la pantalla aparece ‘Señal codificada’.
En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá en la pantalla la información del enlace que contiene un número telefónico, un identificador
de TARJETA CI, un identificador del sistema y demás información. Si aparece un mensaje de error, póngase en contacto
con su proveedor de servicios.
Si ha terminado la configuración de la información del canal, aparecerá el mensaje ‘Actualiz. completa’, que indica que la
lista de canales ya se ha actualizado.
Debe obtener una TARJETA CI en un proveedor local de servicios. Para retirar la TARJETA CI, extráigala
cuidadosamente con los dedos, puesto que si cae al suelo se puede dañar.
Inserte la tarjeta CI en la dirección marcada sobre ella.
La ubicación de la ranura COMMON INTERFACE puede variar según los modelos.
El módulo CAM no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Conecte el cable RCA a un dispositivo A/V externo adecuado, como, por ejemplo, un vídeo, un DVD o una cámara de
vídeo.
Conecte los cables de sonido RCA al terminal [R-AUDIO-L] del aparato y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida
de sonido correspondientes en el dispositivo A/V.
9 BLOQUEO KENSINGTON (según el modelo)
El bloqueo Kensington (opcional) es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar físicamente el sistema cuando se utiliza en un
sitio público. Si desea usar un dispositivo de bloqueo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor donde adquirió el televisor.
La ubicación del Bloqueo Kensington puede variar según los modelos.
0 COMPONENT IN
Conecte los cables de vídeo de componentes (opcionales) al conector de componentes (PR, PB, Y) de la parte posterior
del equipo y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida de vídeo de los componentes correspondientes en el DTV o
DVD.
Si desea conectar tanto el decodificador como el DTV (o DVD), deberá conectar el decodificador al DTV (o DVD) y
conectar el DTV (o DVD) al conector de componentes (PR, PB, Y) de su aparato.
Los conectores PR, PB e Y de los dispositivos de componentes (DTV o DVD) algunas veces están etiquetados como Y,
B-Y y R-Y o Y, Cb y Cr.
Conecte los cables de audio RCA (opcionales) al terminal [R-AUDIO-L] de la parte posterior del aparato y los otros
extremos a los conectores de salida de audio correspondientes en el DTV o DVD.
! EXT (RGB)
Conector
Entrada Salida
Vídeo Audio (I / D) RGB Vídeo + Audio (I / D)
EXT O O O Sólo está disponible la salida de TV o DTV.
Terminales de entrada o salida para dispositivos externos, como aparatos de vídeo, reproductores de DVD, consolas de
videojuegos o reproductores de videodiscos.
@ SERVICE
Conector para la actualización del software.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:24Español - 5
Mando a distancia
Puede utilizar el mando a una distancia del televisor de hasta 7 metros.
El exceso de luz puede influir en el rendimiento del mando a distancia.
El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
1 POWER: Botón de suspensión del
televisor.
2 BOTONES NUMÉRICOS:
Permiten cambiar de canal.
3 FAV.CH : Permite cambiar a los
canales favoritos.
4Y : Púlselos para subir o
bajar el volumen.
5 SOURCE : Púlselo para mostrar
y seleccionar las fuentes de vídeo
disponibles.
6 INFO : Púlselo para mostrar
información en la pantalla.
7 TOOLS: Se usa para seleccionar
rápidamente las funciones que se
usan con mayor frecuencia.
8 CH LIST : Muestra la lista de
canales en la pantalla.
9 BOTONES DE COLORES: Use
estos botones en la Lista de
canales, menús, etc.
! TV: Selecciona directamente el
modo TV.
@ PRE-CH : Permite volver al
canal que se ha estado viendo
anteriormente.
# MUTEM: Púlselo para cortar
temporalmente el sonido.
$ P
: Permiten cambiar de
canal.
% MENU : Muestra el menú principal
en pantalla.
^ GUIDE : Visualización de la Guía
electrónica de programas (EPG).
& RETURN : Vuelve al menú anterior
* ARRIBA▲ / ABAJO▼ / IZQUIERDA◄
/ DERECHA► / ENTERE: Úselo para
seleccionar los elementos del menú
en la pantalla y cambiar los valores del
menú.
( EXIT: Púlselo para salir del menú.
) SUBT. : Visualización de subtítulos
digitales
a AD: Selección de la descripción de
audio.
Funciones de teletexto
5 0 : Selección del modo de teletexto
(LIST/FLOF)
6 5 : Mostrar el teletexto
7 4 : Selección del tamaño del teletexto
8 8 : Guardar teletexto
9 Selección de tema de Fastext
0/ : Selecciona alternativamente
Teletext, Double o Mix.
! :: Sale de la pantalla de teletexto
@ 1 : Página secundaria del teletexto
$ 2 : Página siguiente del teletexto
3 : Página anterior del teletexto
% 6 : Índice del teletexto
& 9 : Retener teletexto
( 7 : Cancelar teletexto
Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia
1. Levante la tapa de la parte posterior del mando a distancia, como se muestra en la ilustración.
2. Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AAA.
Respete los extremos ‘+’ y ‘–’ de las pilas que se indican en el diagrama del interior del
compartimiento.
3. Vuelva a poner la tapa.
Saque las pilas y guárdelas en un lugar fresco y seco si no va a utilizar el mando a
distancia durante un período de tiempo prolongado.
Si el mando a distancia no funciona, haga estas comprobaciones:
¿Está encendido el televisor?
¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos de las pilas?
¿Se han agotado las pilas?
¿Ha habido un corte de luz o el cable está desenchufado?
¿Hay un fluorescente o un neón a poca distancia?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:24Español - 6
FUNCIONAMIENTO
Visualización de los menús
Antes de usar el televisor, siga estos pasos para saber cómo desplazarse por el menú, con el
fin de seleccionar y ajustar las diferentes funciones.
1. Pulse el botón MENU.
Aparece el menú principal en la pantalla. Hay iconos en el lado izquierdo: Imagen,
Sonido, Canal, Configuración, Entrada, Aplicación, Asistencia técnica.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar uno de los iconos.
Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para acceder al submenú del icono.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ir a los elementos del menú.
Pulse el botón ENTERE para acceder a los elementos del menú.
4. Pulse el botón ▲/▼/◄/► para cambiar los elementos seleccionados.
Pulse el botón RETURN para volver al menú anterior.
5. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir del menú.
Uso de los botones del mando a distancia
Botón Operaciones Botón Operaciones
MENUm Mostrar el menú principal en pantalla.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Mover el cursor y seleccionar un
elemento.
Elegir el elemento seleccionado.
Confirmar la configuración.
RUTURNR Volver al menú anterior.
EXITe Salir del menú en pantalla.
Ejemplo: Configuración del brillo del televisor en el menú Picture
Ajuste del brillo a 80
1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú.
2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Imagen.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Brillo.
4. Pulse el botón ENTERE.
5. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► hasta que el brillo llegue a 80.
6. Pulse el botón ENTERE.
Pulse el botón EXIT para salir del menú.
¦
N
N
Modo : Estándar ►
Luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Imagen
Modo : Estándar ►
Luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Imagen
Luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45 ►
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
U Mover L Ajustar E Entrar R Volver
Brillo 45
U Mover L Ajustar E Entrar R Volver
Brillo 80
Modo : Estándar ►
Luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Imagen
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:24Español -
Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera
El aparato puede ponerse en modo de espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo de espera es muy útil si desea
interrumpir la visualización momentáneamente (durante la comida, por ejemplo).
1. Pulse el botón POWERP del mando a distancia.
La pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador de modo de espera en el equipo.
2. Para volver a encenderlo, sólo tiene que volver a pulsar el botón POWERP.
No deje el aparato en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando está de vacaciones, por ejemplo). Lo
mejor es desenchufar el aparato de la red eléctrica y de la antena.
Función Plug & Play
Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativamente de
forma automática.
1. Pulse el botón POWER del mando a distancia. Aparece el mensaje
You can set the menu language..
2. Seleccione el idioma con los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la
elección.
3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo tienda o Uso doméstico y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Es recomendable configurar el televisor en el modo Uso doméstico para obtener la mejor imagen en un entorno
doméstico.
Demo tienda sólo es necesario en los entornos comerciales.
Si accidentalmente se configura la unidad en el modo Demo tienda y se desea volver a Uso doméstico (Estándar):
Pulse el botón del volumen del televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSD del volumen, mantenga pulsado el botón MENU del
televisor durante 5 segundos.
4. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Seleccione el país pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la
elección.
5. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aérea o Cable y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Aérea: señal de la antena Aérea.
Cable: señal de la antena de Cable.
6. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la fuente de canal que desea memorizar. Pulse el botón ENTERE para
seleccionar Empezar.
Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos.
Digital: Canales digitales.
Analógico: Canales analógicos.
Al configurar la fuente de antena en Cable, se muestra un paso para permitirle configurar un valor para la búsqueda de
canales digitales. Para obtener más información, consulte Canal → Guardado automático.
La búsqueda de canales se iniciará y terminará automáticamente.
Pulse el botón ENTERE en cualquier momento para interrumpir el proceso de memorización.
Una vez memorizados todos los canales disponibles, se muestra el mensaje Configurar el modo del reloj..
. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Si se selecciona Manual, Configura la fecha y la hora actuales se muestra.
Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticamente. En caso negativo, seleccione Manual para ajustar
el reloj. (consulte la página 19)
8. Se ofrece el método de conexión para proporcionar alta definición de la mejor calidad. Después de confirmar el método, pulse
el botón ENTERE.
9. Aparecerá el mensaje Disfrute de su televisor. Cuando termine, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Si desea reiniciar esta función...
1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el
botón ENTERE.
2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.
3. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0.
Si desea cambiar el número PIN, utilice la función Cambiar PIN. (consulte la página 21)
La función Plug & Play está disponible sólo en el modo TV.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:25Español - 8
Visualización de la pantalla
La pantalla identifica el canal actual y el estado de algunos ajustes de audio-vídeo.
Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información.
Pulse el botón INFO del mando a distancia. El televisor mostrará el canal, el tipo de
sonido y el estado de ciertos ajustes de imagen y sonido.
▲, ▼: Puede ver otra información del canal. Si desea ir al canal actualmente
seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE.
◄, ►: Puede ver la información de programas del canal actual.
Pulse el botón INFO otra vez o espere unos 10 segundos; la información
desaparecerá automáticamente.
CONTROL DE LOS CANALES
Configuración del menú de canales
País
Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4
dígitos.
Canal analógico
Se puede cambiar el país de los canales analógicos.
Canal digital
Se puede cambiar el país de los canales digitales.
Guardado automático
Se puede explorar los rangos de frecuencia disponibles (la disponibilidad depende del país). Puede que los números de programa
asignados automáticamente no correspondan a los números de programa reales o deseados.
Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
Aérea / Cable
Fuente de antena que guardar
Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos.
Digital: Canales digitales.
Analógico: Canales analógicos.
Al seleccionar ‘Cable → Digital y Analógico’ o ‘Cable → Digital’
Proporcione un valor para explorar los canales de cable.
M. Búsqueda → Completa / Red / Rápida
Rápida
ID red: Muestra el código de identificación de la red.
Frecuencia: Muestra la frecuencia del canal. (Es diferente en cada país)
Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
–
–
–
–
Busca todos los canales de las emisoras activas y los memoriza en el televisor.
Si desea detener el guardado automático, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Aparece el mensaje ¿Detener programación automática?.
Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Sí y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
País ►
Guardado automático
Guardado manual
Opción de búsqueda de cable
Guía actual y próxima
Guía completa
Guía predeterminada : Guía completa
Canal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:25Español - 9
Guardado manual
Busca un canal manualmente y lo memoriza en el televisor.
Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
Canal digital
Almacenamiento manual de canales digitales.
Canal digital sólo está disponible en el modo de TV digital.
Canal: Establezca el número del canal con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).
Frecuencia: Establezca la frecuencia con los botones numéricos.
Ancho de banda: Establezca el ancho de banda con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).
Una vez finalizada, la lista de canales se actualiza automáticamente.
Canal analógico
Almacenamiento manual de canales analógicos.
Programa (número de programa que asignar a un canal): Establezca el número del programa con los botones ▲, ▼ o
numéricos (0~9).
Sistema de color→ Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Establezca el sistema del color con los botones ▲ o ▼.
Sistema de sonido → BG / DK / I / L: Establezca el sistema del sonido con los botones ▲ o ▼.
Canal (si conoce el número de canal que desea guardar): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar C (canal aéreo) o
S (canal por cable). Pulse el botón ► y después ▲, ▼ o los botones numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar el número que desee.
También puede seleccionar el número de canal directamente pulsando los botones numéricos (0~9).
Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar de sonido adecuado.
Buscar (si no se conoce el número de los canales): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para iniciar la búsqueda. El sintonizador
explora el rango de frecuencia hasta que se recibe en la pantalla el primer canal o el canal que se ha seleccionado.
Guardar (cuando guarde el canal y el número de programa asociado): Establezca OK pulsando el botón ENTERE.
Modo de canal
P (modo de programa): Al finalizar la sintonización, las estaciones de emisión de su zona se habrán asignado a los
números de posición comprendidos entre P00 y P99. Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número de posición en
este modo.
C (modo de canal aéreo): Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada emisora aérea en este
modo.
S (modo de canal por cable): Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada canal por cable en
este modo.
Opción de búsqueda de cable (según el país)
Establece opciones adicionales de búsqueda, como la frecuencia y la velocidad de símbolo para la búsqueda de red por cable.
Frecuencia (Empezar ~ Stop): Muestra la frecuencia del canal.
Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa
La información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. Las entradas de los programas
pueden aparecer vacías u obsoletas, según la información proporcionada por un canal determinado. La pantalla se actualiza
dinámicamente tan pronto como hay nueva información disponible.
Para obtener una descripción detallada sobre el uso de Guía actual y próxima y Guía completa, consulte la página 10.
También puede ver el menú de la guía pulsando el botón GUIDE. (Para configurar la Guía predeterminada, siga las
instrucciones.)
Guía actual y próxima
Se muestra la información del programa actual y siguiente de los seis canales señalados en la columna izquierda.
Guía completa
Muestra la información de los programas ordenados por hora en segmentos de una hora. Muestra la información de dos horas de
programa que se puede desplazar adelante o atrás en el tiempo.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:25Español - 10
Guía predeterminada → Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa
Puede decidir que se muestre la Guía actual y próxima o la Guía completa cuando se pulsa el botón GUIDE del mando a
distancia.
Lista de canales
Para obtener una descripción detallada sobre el uso de la Lista de canales, consulte las instrucciones de 'Gestión de los
canales'.
Puede seleccionar estas opciones simplemente pulsando el botón CH LIST del mando a distancia.
Modo Canal
Cuando se pulsa el botón P >/< se cambian los canales en la lista de canales seleccionados.
Canales añadidos
Los canales se cambian en la lista de canales memorizados.
Canales favoritos
Los canales se cambian en la lista de canales favoritos.
Sintonización fina
Si la recepción es clara, no tiene que realizar la sintonización fina del canal, ya que esta operación se hace de forma automática
durante la búsqueda y la memorización. Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, puede que deba realizar manualmente la
sintonización fina del canal.
Los canales que se han ajustado con sintonización fina se marcan con un asterisco ‘*’ a la derecha del número de canal en la
banda del canal.
Para reiniciar la sintonía fina, seleccione Rest. pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Sólo puede ajustarse la sintonización de los canales de televisión analógicos.
Uso de Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa
Para... Debe...
Ver un programa en la lista EPG Seleccionar una posición pulsando los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Salir de la guía Pulsar el botón azul
Si el programa siguiente está seleccionado, se concreta con un icono de reloj. Si se vuelve a pulsar el botón ENTERE y se pulsa
los botones ◄, ► para seleccionar la Cancelar progr., la programación se cancela y el icono del reloj desaparece.
Ver información de los programas Seleccionar un programa pulsando los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
A continuación pulse el botón INFO cuando se resalte el programa
deseado.
El título del programa se muestra en la parte superior del centro de la
pantalla.
Pulse el botón INFO para obtener información detallada. En la información detallada se incluye el número del canal, la hora de
ejecución, la barra de estado, el nivel del control paterno, la información de calidad del vídeo (HD/SD), los modos de sonido,
subtítulos o teletexto, los idiomas de los subtítulos o del teletexto y un resumen breve del programa seleccionado. ‘...’ se muestra si
el resumen es largo.
Intercambiar entre Guía actual y próxima o
Guía completa
Pulsar el botón rojo varias veces.
En Guía completa
Desplazarse rápidamente hacia atrás (24 horas).
Desplazarse rápidamente hacia adelante (24 horas).
Pulsar el botón verde varias veces.
Pulsar el botón amarillo varias veces.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Guía completa
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Hoy 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No information
No information
No information
Freshmen O..
Ver
INFO Información ■ actual/próxima ■ +24 Horas ■ Salir
Guía actual y próxima
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Actual Siguiente
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No information
No information
No information
Freshmen O..
Ver
INFO Información ■ Guía completa ■ Salir
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:25Español - 11
Gestión de los canales
Con este menú puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la
guía de programas de las emisoras digitales.
Todos los canales
Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualmente.
Canales añadidos
Muestra todos los canales añadidos.
Favoritos
Muestra todos los canales favoritos.
Para seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón FAV.CH del mando a distancia.
Programado
Muestra todos los programas actualmente reservados.
Seleccione un canal en las pantallas Todos los canales, Canales añadidos o Favoritos con los botones ▲ / ▼ y pulse el
botón ENTERE. A continuación puede ver el canal seleccionado.
Uso de los botones de colores en la lista de canales
Rojo (Tipo de canal): Cambiar entre TV, Radio, Datos / Otr y Todos.
Verde (Zoom): Aumenta o reduce un número de canal.
Amarillo (Selección ): Selecciona varias listas de canales. Puede realizar las funciones de añadir, borrar, añadir a
favoritos, borrar de favoritos, bloquear o desbloquear con varios canales al mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que
desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo. Aparece la marca c a la
izquierda de los canales seleccionados.
TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Borrar (o Añadir), Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Bloquear
(o Desbloquear), Visual. con temp, Modificac. nombre canal, Ordenar,Modificac. número canal, Seleccionar
todos, (o Deselecc. todos), Guardado automático. (Los menús de las opciones pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la
situación.)
Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal
A : Canal analógico.
c: Canal seleccionado al pulsar el botón amarillo.
* : Canal configurado como favorito.
( : Programa que se está emitiendo.
\ : Canal bloqueado.
) : Programa reservado
Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Todos los canales / Canales añadidos / Favoritos)
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú de opciones.
Los elementos del menú de opciones pueden variar según el estado del canal.
Añadir / Borrar
Puede suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee.
Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán en el menú Todos los canales.
Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha suprimido.
El menú Añadir sólo aparece con los canales borrados.
También puede borrar un canal en los menús Canales añadidos o Favoritos de la
misma manera.
Añadir a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos
Puede configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecuencia.
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer el
canal favorito que añadir o suprimir si selecciona Herramientas → Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos).
Se mostrará el símbolo ‘*’ y el canal se configurará como favorito.
Todos los canales seleccionados se mostrarán en el menú Favoritos.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canales añadidos Todos ■ Tipo de canal ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canales añadidos Todos ■ Tipo de canal ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas
Borrar
Añadir a Favoritos
Bloquear
Visualiz. con temporiz.
Modificac. nombre canal
Ordenar
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:26Español - 12
Bloquear / Desbloquear
Se puede bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. Está función está disponible sólo cuando Segur. niños
está configurado como Act.. (consulte la página 21)
Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos.
El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Change PIN en el
menú.
Se muestra el símbolo ‘\’ y el canal queda bloqueado.
Visualiz. con temporiz.
Si reserva un programa que desea ver, el canal se cambia automáticamente al canal reservado en la lista de canales aunque esté
viendo otro canal. Para reservar un programa, en primer lugar debe configurar la hora actual. (Consulte la página 19)
Sólo se pueden reservar los canales memorizados.
Puede ajustar el canal, el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a
distancia.
La reserva de un programa se muestra en el menú Programa.
Guía de programas digitales y reserva de visualización
Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ► aparece la guía de programas del canal. Se puede reservar un
programa mediante el procedimiento descrito anteriormente.
Modificac. nombre canal (sólo canales analógicos)
Los canales se pueden etiquetar con el propósito de que al seleccionar éstos se pueda ver su nombre.
Los nombres de los canales digitales se asignan automáticamente y no se pueden etiquetar.
Modificac. número canal (sólo canales digitales)
También puede editar el número del canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
Ordenar (sólo canales analógicos)
Esta operación permite cambiar los números de programa de los canales memorizados. Puede que sea necesario realizarla
después de la memorización automática.
Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo
Seleccionar todos: Puede seleccionar todos los canales de la lista.
Deseleccionar todo: Puede anular la selección de todos los canales.
Sólo se puede seleccionar Deseleccionar todo si hay canales seleccionados.
Guardado automático
Si desea más detalles sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte la página 8.
Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Programmed)
Se puede ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva.
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú de opciones.
Cambiar información
Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva de visualización.
Cancelar progr.
Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva de visualización.
Información
Selecciónelo para ver una reserva de visualización. (También se puede cambiar la
información de reserva.)
Seleccionar todos
Seleccionar todos los programas reservados.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programado Todos ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas E Información
Cambiar información
Cancelar progr.
Información
Seleccionar todos
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:26Español - 13
CONTROL DE LA IMAGEN
Configuración del menú de imagen
Modo
Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualización.
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el
modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Modo imagen.
Dinámico
Selecciona la alta definición en la imagen, en una habitación luminosa.
Estándar
Selecciona la visualización óptima de la imagen, en un entorno normal.
Película
Selecciona la visualización para ver películas en una sala oscura.
Luz de fondo / Contraste / Brillo / Nitidez / Color / Matiz (V/R)
El televisor tiene varias opciones de configuración que permiten controlar la calidad de la
imagen.
Luz de fondo: Ajusta el brillo de la luz de fondo de la pantalla LCD.
Contraste: Ajusta el nivel del contraste de la imagen.
Brillo: Ajusta el nivel del brillo de la imagen.
Nitidez: Ajusta la definición de los bordes de la imagen.
Color: Ajusta la saturación del color de la imagen.
Matiz (V/R): Ajusta el matiz del color de la imagen.
Seleccione el modo de imagen que desee ajustar en primer lugar. Los valores ajustados se guardan para cada modo de
imagen.
Cuando se cambian Luz de fondo, Contraste, Brillo, Nitidez, Color o Matiz (V/R), la presentación en la pantalla OSD se
ajusta consecuentemente.
En los modos analógicos TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAL no se puede utilizar la función Matiz (V/R).
En el modo PC, sólo se pueden realizar cambios en las opciones Luz de fondo, Contraste y Brillo.
La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
La energía consumida durante el uso se puede reducir significativamente si se disminuye el nivel del brillo de la imagen, lo
cual reduce el costo total de funcionamiento.
Configuración avanzada
Los nuevos televisores Samsung permiten una configuración más precisa aun de la imagen que los modelos anteriores. Consulte
más adelante cómo realizar una configuración detallada.
Configuración avanzada está disponible en los modos Estándar o Película.
En el modo PC, sólo se pueden cambiar Gamma y Balance de blanco entre los elementos de Configuración avanzada.
Tono del negro → Des. / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro
Se puede seleccionar el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta.
Contraste dinám. → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto
Se puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo.
Gamma
Se puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde, azul).
Gama de colores
La gama de colores es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su gama favorita de color y disfrute de
unos colores auténticamente naturales.
Original: Proporciona tonos de color profundos y ricos.
Auto: Ajusta automáticamente al tono de color más natural de acuerdo con las fuentes del programa.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Modo : Estándar ►
Luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Imagen
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Configuración avanzada ►
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:26Español - 14
Balance de blanco
Se puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores más naturales.
Rojo - / Verde - / Azul - / Rojo + / Verde + / Azul +: Puede ajustar la ‘temperatura’ del color en las áreas claras si cambia los
valores de R, G, B. Sólo se recomienda para los usuarios avanzados.
Rest.: El balance de blanco anteriormente ajustado se restablecerá con los valores predefinidos de fábrica.
Tono de piel Tono piel
Permite acentuar el ‘Tono de piel Tono piel’ rosado de las imágenes.
Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada.
Mejora del borde → Des. / Act.
Permite acentuar los bordes de los objetos en las imágenes.
Opciones de imagen
En el modo PC sólo se pueden hacer cambios en los elementos Tono color y Tamaño del menú Opciones de imagen.
Tono color → Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2
Puede seleccionar el tono de color que le resulte más cómodo para la vista.
La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
Cálido1 o Cálido2 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo de imagen es Película.
Tamaño
Puede seleccionar el tamaño de imagen que mejor se adapte a sus requisitos de visualización.
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el tamaño seleccionando Herramientas
→ Tamaño de imagen.
Ancho auto.: Ajusta automáticamente el tamaño de la imagen a la relación de aspecto de la pantalla 16:9.
16:9: Ajusta el tamaño de la imagen a 16:9, adecuado para ver los DVD o las emisiones en formato ancho.
Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3.
Zoom: Amplía la imagen ancha de 16:9 (en sentido vertical) para que la imagen ocupe el tamaño de la pantalla.
4:3: Es la configuración predeterminada para una película de vídeo o una emisión normal.
Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla: Use la función para ver la imagen completa sin cortes cuando la entrada de la señal sea
HDMI (720p / 1080i) o Componente (1080i).
Según la fuente de entrada, las opciones de tamaño de la imagen pueden variar.
Las opciones disponibles pueden diferir según el modelo seleccionado.
En el modo PC, sólo se pueden ajustar los modos 16:9 y 4:3.
La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
Puede producirse una retención temporal de imagen cuando se ve una imagen estática durante más de dos horas.
Zoom ancho: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones
▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE.
Zoom: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones
▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ► para
seleccionar Tamaño y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el tamaño
de la imagen en dirección vertical. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE.
Después de seleccionar Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla en los modos HDMI (1080i) o Component (1080i): Seleccione
Posición con los botones ◄ o ►. Use los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imagen.
Rest.: Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Rest. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede inicializar la
configuración.
Si se usa la función Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla con la entrada HDMI 720p, en los laterales superior, inferior,
izquierdo y derecho de la pantalla se cortará 1 línea como en la función de sobreexploración.
Modo Pantalla → 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3
Cuando se configura el tamaño de la imagen como Ancho auto. en un televisor panorámico 16:9, se puede determinar el tamaño
de la imagen para ver una imagen en pantalla panorámica 4:3 WSS o ninguna. Cada país europeo exige un tamaño de imagen
diferente, de modo que esta función está concebida con la intención de que los usuarios la seleccionen.
16:9: Ajusta la imagen al modo panorámico 16:9.
Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3.
Zoom: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen verticalmente en la pantalla.
4:3: Ajusta la imagen al modo normal 4:3.
Esta función está disponible en el modo Ancho auto..
Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Componente o HDMI.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:26Español - 15
Digital NR → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto
Si la señal de emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, puede activarse la función Digital Noise Reduction para reducir la estática y
las imágenes superpuestas que pueden aparecer en la pantalla.
Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna de las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imagen de mejor calidad.
N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo
Se puede seleccionar directamente el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta.
Esta función sólo está activa cuando se conecta la entrada externa a HDMI (señales RGB).
Modo de película → Des. / Auto
El televisor se puede configurar para que perciba y procese automáticamente las señales de película de todas las fuentes y ajuste
la mejor calidad de imagen.
Modo de película es compatible con TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i/1080i) y HDMI(480i/1080i).
Reinicio de la imagen → Rest. modo imagen / Cancelar
Restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados.
Seleccione un modo de imagen que desee restaurar. La restauración se realiza en cada modo de imagen.
Rest. modo imagen: Los valores actuales de la imagen vuelven a la configuración predeterminada.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC)
Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP)
A continuación se muestra la configuración de pantalla de Windows para un ordenador típico. Probablemente la pantalla real de
su PC sea distinta, según la versión concreta de Windows y de la tarjeta de vídeo que tenga. Aunque las pantallas reales sean
diferentes, la información de configuración básica que se aplica en casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario, póngase
en contacto con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.)
1. Primero, haga clic en ‘Panel de control’ en el menú Inicio de Windows.
2. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Apariencia y temas’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo.
3. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Pantalla’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo.
4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ en el cuadro de diálogo.
Configuración correcta del tamaño (resolución): óptima 1360 x 768 píxeles
Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración de la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o
‘60 Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic en ‘OK’ y salga del cuadro de diálogo.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:26Español - 16
Modos de pantalla
Tanto la posición en la pantalla como el tamaño varían dependiendo del tipo de monitor del PC y de su resolución. Se recomiendan las
resoluciones de la tabla.
Entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI
Modo Resolución
Frecuencia horizontal
(KHz)
Frecuencia vertical
(Hz)
Frecuencia de reloj de
píxeles (MHz)
Polaridad
sincr. (H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI).
No se admite el modo entrelazado.
El aparato puede funcionar incorrectamente si se selecciona un formato de vídeo que no sea estándar.
Los modos Independiente y Compuesto no se admiten. SOG no se admite.
Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador
Preselección: Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo PC.
Ajuste automático
Esta función permite que la pantalla de PC del equipo se ajuste automáticamente a la señal de
vídeo del PC. Los valores fino, grueso y posición se ajustan automáticamente.
Esta función no se puede utilizar en modo DVI-HDMI.
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar esta
opción seleccionando Herramientas → Ajuste automático.
Pantalla
Grueso / Fino
El objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido
no se elimina mediante la sintonización fina, ajuste la frecuencia lo mejor que pueda (Grueso) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización
fina. Después de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla.
Posición de PC
Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del TV. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ajustar la posición
vertical. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para ajustar la posición horizontal.
Restablecer imagen
Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fábrica.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Ajuste automático ►
Pantalla
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:27Español - 1
CONTROL DEL SONIDO
Configuración del menú de sonido
Modo → Estándar / Música / Película / Voz clara / Personal
Se puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste mejor a las preferencias personales.
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el
modo de sonido seleccionando Herramientas → Modo de sonido.
Estándar
Selecciona el modo de sonido normal.
Música
Refuerza la música por encima de las voces.
Película
Ofrece el mejor sonido para películas.
Voz clara
Refuerza la voz sobre otros sonidos.
Personal
Mantiene los valores personalizados del sonido.
Ecualizador
Es posible ajustar los parámetros del sonido según las preferencias personales.
Modo
Se puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste mejor a las preferencias personales.
Balance
Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (ajuste de ancho de banda)
Para ajustar el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de ancho de banda
Rest.
Restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados del ecualizador.
SRS TruSurround HD → Des. / Act.
SRS TruSurround HD es una tecnología SRS patentada que solventa el problema de reproducir contenido multicanal 5.1 en dos
altavoces. TruSurround proporciona una experiencia de sonido virtual convincente a través de cualquier sistema de reproducción
con dos altavoces, incluso con los altavoces internos del televisor. Es totalmente compatible con todos los formatos multicanal.
Idioma de audio (sólo canales digitales)
Se pueden cambiar los valores predeterminados para los idiomas del audio. Muestra la información del idioma para el flujo de
entrada.
Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora.
Cuando se visualiza un canal digital se puede seleccionar esta opción.
Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (sólo canales digitales)
Cuando el sonido se emite desde un altavoz principal y un receptor de audio, se puede originar un sonido de eco debido a las
diferencias en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio. En tales casos, use la función
Altavoz de TV.
El formato de audio aparece según el tipo de señal de emisión.
Cuando se visualiza un canal digital se puede seleccionar esta opción.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Modo : Personal ►
Ecualizador
SRS TruSurround HD : Des.
Idioma de audio : - - -
Formato audio : - - -
Descripción de audio
Volumen automático : Des.
Sonido
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:27Español - 18
Descripción de audio (sólo canales digitales)
Es una función auxiliar de audio que proporciona una pista de audio adicional para personas con problemas de vista. Esta función
maneja el flujo de audio de AD (Descripción de audio) cuando se envía desde el emisor con el audio principal. Los usuarios
pueden activar o desactivar la descripción de audio y controlar el volumen.
Pulse el botón AD del mando a distancia para seleccionar Des. o Act..
Descripción de audio → Des. / Act.
Activa o desactiva la función de descripción del audio.
Volumen
Se puede ajustar el volumen de la descripción de audio.
Volumen está activo cuando Descripción de audio se configura como Act..
Volumen automático → Des. / Act.
Cada emisora tiene sus propias condiciones de señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volumen cada vez que se cambia de canal.
Esta función permite ajustar automáticamente el volumen de un canal disminuyendo la salida de sonido cuando la señal de
modulación es alta o aumentando la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es baja.
Seleccionar altavoz → Altavoz externo / Altavoz de TV
Si desea usar unos altavoces independientes, cancele el amplificador interno.
Los botones del volumen y MUTE no funcionan cuando Seleccionar altavoz está configurado como Altavoz externo.
Si se selecciona Altavoz externo en el menú Seleccionar altavoz se limita la configuración del sonido.
Reinicio del sonido → Restablecer todo / Rest. m. sonido / Cancelar
Puede restaurar la configuración del sonido con los valores predeterminados de fábrica.
Selección del modo de sonido
Puede definir el modo de sonido en el menú Herramientas. Cuando se configura Dual l ll, el modo de sonido actual se muestra
en la pantalla.
Tipo de audio Dual 1 / 2 Predeterminado
A2 estéreo
Mono MONO
Cambio automático
Estéreo ESTÉREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
estéreo
Mono MONO
Cambio automático
Estéreo MONO ↔ ESTÉREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Si la señal de estéreo es débil y el modo cambia de forma automática, cambie a mono.
Esta función sólo está activa en la señal de sonido estéreo. Está desactivada en la señal de sonido monoaural.
Esta función sólo está disponible en el modo TV.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:27Español - 19
CONFIGURACIÓN
Configuración del menú de configuración
Idioma del menú
Se puede configurar el idioma de los menús.
Hora
Reloj
Para usar las diferentes funciones del temporizador del televisor es necesario configurar el
reloj.
La hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO.
Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo.
Modo de reloj
Se puede configurar la hora actual manual o automáticamente.
Auto: Configure la hora automáticamente mediante la información de la hora de la emisión digital.
Manual: Configure la hora actual manualmente.
Según la emisora y la señal, la hora automática no se puede ajustar correctamente. En tal caso, debe hacerlo
manualmente.
La antena y el cable se deben conectar para ajustar la hora automáticamente.
Ajustar hora
Puede ajustar la hora actual manualmente.
Establezca este elemento cuando configure Modo de reloj como Manual.
Puede ajustar el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a
distancia.
Temp. desc. → Des. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
El temporizador de desconexión apaga automáticamente el televisor después de un período prefijado (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180
minutos).
Cuando el temporizador llega a 0, el televisor pasa al modo de espera de forma automática.
Para cancelar la función Temp. desc. seleccione Des..
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el temporizador seleccionando
Herramientas → Temp. desc..
Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3
La activación y desactivación del temporizador se puede configurar de tres maneras. Debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar.
Hora encendido: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador
con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.)
Hora apagado: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador
con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.)
Volumen: Seleccione el nivel de volumen deseado.
Antena: Selecc. Aérea o Cable.
Canal: Permite seleccionar el canal deseado.
Repetir: Seleccione Una vez, Cada día, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual.
Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día de la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el
día deseado y aparecerá la marcac.
Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
Apagado automático
Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, después de que el
temporizador lo haya puesto en marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible si el temporizador está activado y evita el
recalentamiento que se puede producir si el televisor está encendido durante demasiado tiempo.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Idioma del menú : Español ►
Hora
Emisión
Seguridad
General
Configuración
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:27Español - 20
Emisión
Subtítulos
Se pueden activar o desactivar los subtítulos. Use este menú para configurar el modo de subtítulo. Normal es la opción básica y
Duro de oído es la opción para personas con problemas de audición.
Subtítulos → Des. / Act.: Activa o desactiva los subtítulos.
Modo → Normal / Duro de oído: Establece el modo de los subtítulos.
Idioma de los subtítulos: Establece el idioma de los subtítulos.
Si el programa que se está viendo no admite la opción Duro de oído, automáticamente se activa Normal aunque se
seleccione Duro de oído.
El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas.
Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón SUBT del mando a distancia.
Texto digital → Inhabilitar / Habilitar (sólo RU)
Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está activada.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group-Grupo de expertos para la codificación de la
información hipermedia y multimedia)
Es una norma internacional para los sistemas de codificación de datos que se utilizan en hipermedia y multimedia. Es un
nivel superior al sistema MPEG que incluye hipermedia vinculado a datos, como imágenes fijas, servicios de caracteres,
animaciones, gráficos y archivos de vídeo así como datos multimedia. MHEG es una tecnología de interacción de tiempo de
ejecución del usuario que se aplica en varios campos, como VOD (vídeo a la carta), ITV (televisión interactiva), EC (comercio
electrónico), educación a distancia, teleconferencias, bibliotecas digitales y juegos de red.
Idioma del teletexto
Se puede configurar el idioma del teletexto seleccionando el tipo de idioma.
El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas.
Preferencia
Idioma principal audio / Idioma secundario audio / Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos /
Idioma principal del teletexto / Idioma secundario del teletexto
Con esta función los usuarios pueden seleccionar uno de los idiomas. El idioma seleccionado aquí se convierte en el
predeterminado cuando se selecciona un canal.
Si se cambia la configuración del idioma, las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú de
idioma se cambian automáticamente al idioma seleccionado.
Las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio y del teletexto, del menú de idioma, muestran una lista de los idiomas
admitidos en el canal actual y la selección se resalta. Si cambia la configuración del idioma, ésta sólo es válida en el canal
actual. Los cambios de configuración no afectan a las opciones de idioma principal de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto
del menú de preferencias.
Interfaz común
Menú CI
Permite al usuario realizar selecciones en el menú CAM proporcionado. Seleccione el menú CI según el menú de la tarjeta
PC.
Info. sobre la aplicación
La interfaz común contiene y muestra información acerca del CAM insertado en la ranura CI.
La información de la aplicación insertada se refiere a la TARJETA CI. La instalación del CAM puede efectuarse con el
televisor encendido o apagado.
1. Puede adquirir el módulo del CAM de CI por teléfono o en el distribuidor más cercano a su domicilio.
2. Inserte la TARJETA CI en el CAM siguiendo la dirección de la flecha hasta que encaje.
3. Inserte el CAM con la TARJETA CI instalada en la ranura para interfaz común.
(Inserte el CAM, siguiendo la dirección de la flecha, hasta el fondo, de modo que quede paralelo a la ranura.)
4. Compruebe si se ven imágenes en un canal de señal codificada.
El módulo CAM no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:27Español - 21
Emisión
Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su código
PIN de 4 dígitos.
El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú.
Segur. niños → Des. / Act.
Esta función permite bloquear el vídeo y el audio para evitar que los usuarios no autorizados (por ejemplo, los niños) puedan ver
programas poco recomendables.
Se pueden bloquear algunos canales en la lista de canales. (Consulte la página 12.)
Segur. niños sólo está disponible en el modo TV.
Bloqueo paterno
Con esta función se puede impedir por medio de un código PIN (número de identificación personal) de 4 dígitos definido por el
usuario que personas no autorizadas, como los niños, vean programas inadecuados.
El elemento Bloqueo paterno difiere según el país.
Una vez establecido Bloqueo paterno, se muestra el símbolo ‘\’.
Perm. todo: Se pulsa para desbloquear todos los programas de televisión.
Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloquear todos los programas de televisión.
Cambiar PIN
Se puede cambiar el número ID personal necesario para configurar el televisor.
Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar el PIN a
0-0-0-0 : POWER (Des.) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Act.).
General
Modo Juego → Des. / Act.
Cuando se conecta una videoconsola como PlayStation™ o Xbox™, se puede experimentar una sensación más realista al
seleccionar el menú de juegos.
Para desconectar la videoconsola y conectar otro dispositivo externo, cancele el modo de juegos en el menú de
configuración.
Si visualiza el menú de TV en el Modo Juego la pantalla tiembla ligeramente.
Modo Juego no está disponible en los modos normales de TV y PC.
Si Modo Juego está activado:
El modo de imagen se cambia automáticamente a Estándar y los usuarios no pueden cambiar el modo.
El modo de sonido se cambia automáticamente a Personal y los usuarios no pueden cambiar el modo. Ajuste el sonido
con el ecualizador.
La función para establecer el sonido está activada. Si selecciona la función de restablecer el sonido después de configurar el
ecualizador, la configuración de éste recupera los parámetros predeterminados de fábrica.
Ahorro energía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Imagen desact. / Auto
Esta función ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si desea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste la
opción del modo Ahorro energía en Modo; sus ojos se lo agradecerán y, además, reducirá el consumo de energía.
Si se selecciona Imagen desact., la pantalla se apaga y sólo se puede oír el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón para salir de
Imagen desact..
En el menú Tools, la función Imagen desact. no se admite..
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar esta opción seleccionando
Herramientas→ Ahorro energía.
Melodía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto
Se puede establecer un sonido de melodía que se oiga cuando el televisor se encienda o se apague.
La melodía no se reproduce
Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MUTE.
Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha pulsado el botón del volumen (–).
Cuando la función de temporizador ha apagado el televisor.
❑
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
T
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:27Español - 22
ENTRADA / ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA
Configuración del menú de entrada
Fuentes
Úselo para seleccionar TV u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de DVD/
Blu-ray o receptores de cable y satélite (decodificadores), conectados al televisor. Permite
seleccionar la fuente de entrada que se prefiera.
Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de señal externa. El
modo TV se puede seleccionar pulsando el botón TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
Puede elegir solamente los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor. En
Fuentes, las entradas conectadas se resaltan y se ordenan en la parte superior. Las
entradas que no están conectadas se ordenan en la parte inferior.
Ext. y PC siempre permanecen activados.
TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Editar nombre e Información.
Editar nombre
Dé un nombre al dispositivo conectado en las tomas de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo de
entrada.
Vídeo / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Videocámara / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
Cuando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVI al puerto HDMI IN 1(DVI), se debe establecer el modo HDMI1/DVI como DVI o
DVI PC en Editar nombre del modo Entrada. En este caso, se necesita una conexión de sonido independiente.
Configuración del menú de ayuda
Autodiagnóstico
Prueba de imagen
Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efectúe la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el
patrón del color en la pantalla para ver si persiste el problema.
Sí: Si el patrón de prueba no aparece o si hay ruido en el patrón de prueba, seleccione Sí.
Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio
de Samsung.
No: Si el patrón de prueba se muestra correctamente, seleccione No. Puede haber un
problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si persiste el problema,
consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo.
Prueba de sonido
Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efectúe la prueba de sonido. Compruebe
el sonido reproduciendo una melodía en el televisor. En la pantalla se muestra ‘¿El problema aún existe con esta prueba de
sonido?’.
Si no oye sonido en los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido, asegúrese de que Seleccionar altavoz
esté configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido.
La melodía se oirá durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido como Altavoz externo o se haya
silenciado el sonido con el botón MUTE.
Sí: Si durante la prueba de sonido sólo oye sonido desde un altavoz o no oye ningún sonido, seleccione Sí. Puede haber un
problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio de Samsung.
No: Si oye sonido desde los altavoces, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las
conexiones. Si persiste el problema, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo.
Información de señal (sólo canales digitales)
A diferencia de los canales analógicos, en los que puede variar la calidad de la recepción desde 'con nieve' hasta nítida, los
canales digitales (HDTV) tienen una calidad de recepción perfecta o no hay recepción. Por ello, a diferencia de los canales
analógicos, no se puede realizar una sintonización fina de un canal digital. Se puede, no obstante, ajustar la antena para mejorar
la recepción de los canales digitales disponibles.
Si el medidor de la intensidad de la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la antena para aumentar la intensidad de la señal.
Siga ajustando la antena hasta que encuentre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Autodiagnóstico ►
Software superior
Guía de conexión HD
Contacto con Samsung
Asistencia técnica
Fuentes
Editar nombre
Entrada
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:28Español - 23
Software superior
Para mantener el producto actualizado con las nuevas funciones de la televisión digital
se envían periódicamente actualizaciones de software como parte de la señal normal
de televisión. Automáticamente se detectan estas señales y se muestra una pantalla de
actualización del software. Se presenta la opción de instalar la actualización.
POR USB
Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualización del firmware en el televisor. No
desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la unidad USB mientras se aplican las actualizaciones.
El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar la
actualización del firmware. Después de realizar la actualización compruebe la versión del
firmware. Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración de vídeo y audio que se haya
efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada (de fábrica).
Es aconsejable anotar la configuración para recuperarla fácilmente después de la actualización.
Por canal
Actualiza el software a través de una señal de emisión.
Si selecciona esta función durante la fase de transmisión del software, busca el software disponible y lo descarga.
El tiempo necesario para la descarga del software lo determina el estado de la señal.
Modo suspensión
Para continuar con la actualización del software con el conmutador de encendido principal activado, actívelo pulsando los
botones ▲ o ▼. 45 minutos después de haber entrado en el modo de suspensión, se inicia automáticamente una actualización
manual. Dado que la alimentación de la unidad está activada internamente, la pantalla LCD puede encenderse ligeramente. Este
fenómeno puede durar 1 hora mientras la actualización del software se completa.
Software alternativo
Para mostrar la información de la versión del software.
Guía de conexión HD
Este menú presenta el método de conexión que ofrece una calidad óptima para la televisión de alta definición.
Consulte esta información cuando conecte dispositivos externos al TV.
Contacto con Samsung
Consulte esta información si el televisor no funciona adecuadamente o si desea actualizar el software.
Puede ver la información relacionada con el centro de servicio, el producto y el método de descarga de archivos de software.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Panel posterior del TV
Unidad USB
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:28Español - 24
RECOMENDACIONES DE USO
Función de teletexto
La mayoría de los canales de televisión proporcionan servicios de información escrita mediante el teletexto. La página de índice
de dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso de éste. Asimismo, se pueden seleccionar diversas opciones mediante el
mando a distancia para ajustar el servicio a las necesidades del usuario.
Para que la información del teletexto se visualice correctamente, la recepción del canal debe ser estable. En caso contrario,
puede perderse información o algunas páginas pueden no visualizarse.
Puede cambiar páginas de teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
1 0 (modo)
Se utiliza para seleccionar el modo
de teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Si lo pulsa
en el modo LIST, cambia al modo de
guardar lista. En dicho modo se puede
guardar la página de teletexto en la lista
mediante el botón 8 (guardar).
2 5 (mostrar)
Se usa para mostrar el texto oculto
(respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo).
Púlselo de nuevo para volver a la
presentación normal.
3 4 (tamaño)
Se utiliza para mostrar caracteres de
doble tamaño en la parte superior de la
pantalla. Si desea mostrarlos también
en la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el
botón. Púlselo de nuevo una vez para
volver a la presentación normal.
4 8 (guardar)
Se utiliza para guardar las páginas del
teletexto.
5 Botones de colores (rojo/verde/
amarillo/azul)
Si una emisora utiliza el sistema
FASTEXT, los distintos temas
cubiertos en una página de teletexto
se codificarán en color y podrá
seleccionarlos pulsando los botones
de color. Pulse el correspondiente al
tema deseado. La página muestra otra
información con código de color que se
puede seleccionar de la misma forma.
Pulse el botón del color correspondiente
para ver la página anterior o la
siguiente.
6 / (activar teletexto/mezcla)
Se utiliza para activar el modo de
teletexto tras seleccionar el canal que
proporciona el servicio. Pulse dos veces
para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla
de emisión actual.
7 : (salir)
Sale de la visualización de teletexto.
8 1 (página secundaria)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página
secundaria disponible.
9 2 (avanzar página)
Se utiliza para mostrar la siguiente
página de teletexto.
0 3 (retroceder página)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página anterior
de teletexto.
! 9 (retener)
Se utiliza para retener la presentación
en una página determinada si ésta está
enlazada con varias páginas secundarias
que se muestran automáticamente. Para
reanudar, vuelva a pulsar el botón.
@ 6 (índice)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página de
índice (contenido) en cualquier momento
durante la visualización de teletexto.
# 7 (cancelar)
Se utiliza para visualizar la emisión
cuando se busca una página.
Las páginas de teletexto se organizan en seis categorías:
Parte Contenido
A Número de página seleccionado.
B Identidad del canal.
C Número de página actual o indicaciones de la búsqueda.
D Fecha y hora.
E Texto.
F Información de estado.
Información FASTEXT.
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:28Español - 25
La información de teletexto se suele dividir en varias páginas que aparecen en secuencia y a las que se puede acceder:
Introduciendo el número de página.
Seleccionando un título de la lista.
Seleccionando un encabezado de color (sistema FASTEXT).
El nivel de teletexto que admite el televisor es la versión 2.5, capaz de mostrar texto o gráficos adicionales.
Según la transmisión, puede haber paneles laterales en blanco al mostrar el teletexto.
En estos casos, el texto o los gráficos adicionales no se transmiten.
Los televisores más antiguos que no admiten la versión 2.5 no son capaces de mostrar texto o gráficos adicionales,
independientemente de la transmisión de teletexto.
Pulse el botón TV para salir de la visualización de teletexto.
Con el teletexto 16:9, la imagen es 16:9
Instalación del soporte
Preparación: Coloque el soporte de la guía y el cuello de la cubierta en el soporte y, a
continuación, fíjelo mediante los tornillos. Sólo aplicable a los modelos (modelos de 32
pulgadas).
N
1. Monte el TV de pantalla LCD en el soporte.
Se necesitan dos o más personas para trasladar el televisor.
Para realizar el montaje debe tener en cuenta cuál es la parte frontal y cuál la
posterior del soporte.
Para asegurar que el televisor esté instalado sobre el soporte al nivel adecuado, no
ejerza una excesiva presión sobre la parte superior del lateral izquierdo o derecho del
televisor.
2. Atornille dos tornillos en la posición 1 y otros dos en la posición2.
Levante el producto y apriete los tornillos. Si aprieta los tornillos sin levantar el
televisor, éste puede inclinarse hacia uno de los lados.
N
N
N
N
Instalación del equipo de montaje en la pared
Los elementos del montaje en la pared (se venden por separado) permiten instalar el
televisor en una pared.
Si desea más información sobre la instalación de los componentes para montaje en la pared,
consulte las instrucciones que se facilitan con dichos elementos. Si necesita ayuda con la
instalación del soporte mural, póngase en contacto con un técnico.
Samsung Electronics no se hace responsable de los daños causados al producto o al usuario
si éste ha efectuado la instalación del televisor.
No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor está encendido. Se podría
producir una descarga eléctrica con riesgo de causar lesiones personales.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Parte
posterior
Parte frontal
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:29Español - 26
Uso del bloqueo Kensington antirrobos
El bloqueo Kensington es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar físicamente el sistema
cuando se utiliza en un sitio público. El aspecto y el método de bloqueo pueden ser
diferentes a los que se muestran en la ilustración según el fabricante. Consulte el manual
proporcionado con el bloqueo Kensington para utilizarlo correctamente. El dispositivo de
bloqueo debe adquirirse por separado. La ubicación del bloqueo Kensington puede variar
según los modelos.
1. Introduzca el dispositivo de bloqueo en la ranura Kensington del TV LCD (1) y gírelo
en la dirección de bloqueo (2).
2. Conecte el cable del bloqueo Kensington (3).
3. Fije el bloqueo Kensington a la mesa o a un objeto estático pesado.
3
1
2
Seguridad en el espacio de instalación
Mantenga la distancia requerida entre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, paredes) para asegurar la ventilación adecuada.
En caso contrario, se podría producir un incendio por un incremento de la temperatura interna del producto.
Instale el producto a la distancia requerida como se muestra en la ilustración.
Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por Samsung Electronics.
Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con
el riesgo de cuasar lesiones personales.
Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría incendiar
por el incremento de la temperatura interior debido a una mala ventilación.
El aspecto puede variar según el producto.
Instalación del producto sobre un soporte Instalación del producto en un montaje mural
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:30Español - 2
Fijación del televisor a la pared
Precaución: Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de él puede provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los
niños no se cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves
o incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para
mejorar la estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación.
Para impedir que el televisor se caiga:
1. Apriete firmemente las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese de que los
tornillos estén bien afirmados en la pared.
Según el tipo de pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje.
Las grapas, los tornillos y la cadena no se suministran con el producto; deberá
adquirirlos por separado.
2. Quite los tornillos de la parte central posterior del televisor y con ellos monte las grapas
en el televisor.
Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos. En tal caso debe adquirirlos
por separado con estas especificaciones.
Especificaciones de los tornillos
Televisores LCD de 17-29 pulgadas: M4 x L15
Televisores LCD de 32-40 pulgadas: M6 x L15
3. Monte una cadena fuerte entre las grapas del televisor y de la pared de manera que
quede bien tensada.
Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para evitar que caiga hacia atrás.
Las grapas de la pared han de estar a la misma o a menor altura que las grapas
del televisor.
Cuando desee mover el televisor deberá aflojar la cadena.
4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bien aseguradas. Compruébelas
periódicamente para detectar cualquier signo de fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre
la seguridad de la instalación, póngase en contacto con un instalador profesional.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Pared
Pared
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:30Español - 28
Solución de problemas
Si tiene algún problema con el televisor, consulte esta lista en primer lugar. Si ninguno de los consejos funciona, visite ‘www.
samsung.com’ y haga clic en Support o llame al centro de atención al cliente que encontrará en la lista de la última página.
Problema Solución
Calidad de la imagen
En primer lugar, ejecute Prueba de imagen para confirmar que el televisor muestra
correctamente la imagen de prueba.
Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de imagen
Si la imagen de la prueba se muestra correctamente, la imagen deficiente puede provenir
de la fuente o la señal.
●
La imagen del televisor no se ve
tan bien como en la tienda.
Si tiene un receptor de cable/decodificador analógico, cambie a un decodificador. Utilice
cables HDMI o de componentes para conseguir la mejor calidad de imagen de alta definición.
Suscriptor de cable/satélite: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) de la oferta
de canales.
Conexión de antena: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) después de ejecutar
la programación automática.
Muchos canales de alta definición (HD) mejoran los contenidos SD (definición estándar).
Ajuste la resolución de la salida de vídeo del receptor de cable/decodificador en 1080i o 720p.
Compruebe que está viendo la televisión a la distancia mínima recomendada según el
tamaño y la definición de la señal que está visualizando.
●
●
●
N
●
●
La imagen se ve distorsionada:
macrobloques, microbloques,
puntos, pixelización
La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas
especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las
películas de acción.
Un nivel de señal débil o de mala calidad puede causar imágenes distorsionadas.
No es un problema del televisor.
●
●
Color de mala calidad o no
hay color en la conexión de
componentes.
Compruebe que los cables de los componentes estén conectados en los terminales
correctos. Las conexiones incorrectas o sueltas pueden originar problemas en el color
o que la pantalla se quede en blanco.
●
Color o brillo de mala calidad. Ajuste las opciones de Imagen en el menú del TV (modo Imagen, Color, Brillo,
Nitidez)
Ajuste la opción Ahorro energía en el menú Configuración.
Intente reiniciar la imagen para ver la configuración de imagen predeterminada. (Vaya
a MENU - Imagen - Reinicio de la imagen)
●
●
●
Línea de puntos en el borde la
pantalla.
Si el tamaño de la imagen está establecido en Ajuste pantalla, cámbielo a 16:9.
Cambie la resolución del receptor de cable/decodificador.
●
●
La imagen se ve sólo en blanco y
negro en la entrada AV (compuesto).
Conecte el cable de vídeo (amarillo) en el terminal verde de la entrada 1 de
componentes del televisor.
●
Imágenes congeladas o
distorsionadas al cambiar de canal o
retraso en la aparición de la imagen.
Si se ha conectado un decodificador de cable, intente reiniciarlo. (Vuelva a conectar el cable
de alimentación y espere a que el decodificador se reinicie. Puede tardar hasta 20 minutos.)
Establezca la resolución de salida del decodificador de cable en 1080i o 720p.
●
●
Calidad del sonido
En primer lugar, ejecute Prueba de sonido para confirmar que el audio del televisor
funciona correctamente.
Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de sonido
Si el audio es correcto, el problema del sonido puede provenir de la fuente o la señal.
●
No se percibe ningún sonido, o muy
bajo, con el volumen al máximo.
Compruebe el volumen del dispositivo externo conectado al televisor y ajuste el
volumen del televisor según sea más conveniente.
●
La imagen es buena pero no hay
sonido.
Establezca la opción Seleccionar altavoz en Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido.
Compruebe que los cables de audio del dispositivo externo estén conectados a los
terminales de entrada de audio correctos del televisor.
Compruebe la opción de salida de audio del dispositivo conectado. (Por ejemplo,
quizás deba cambiar la opción de audio del decodificador de cable a HDMI si tiene
conectado HDMI al televisor.)
Si se utiliza un cable DVI a HDMI, se necesita un cable de audio independiente.
Desactive la función SRS si va a ajustar el volumen a un valor superior a 30.
Desconecte el terminal de los auriculares (si es posible en su televisor)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Se oye ruido en el altavoz. Compruebe las conexiones de los cables Compruebe que el cable de vídeo no esté
conectado en una entrada de audio.
En la conexión de antena/cable, compruebe la intensidad de la señal. Un nivel de
señal débil puede causar sonido distorsionado.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:31Español - 29
Problema Solución
No hay imagen, ni vídeo
El televisor no se enciende. Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared
y en el televisor.
Compruebe que la toma de la pared funciona.
Pulse el botón POWER del televisor para asegurarse de que el mando a distancia
funciona adecuadamente. Si el televisor se enciende, puede ser debido al mando a
distancia. Para solucionar el problema del mando a distancia, consulte 'El mando a
distancia no funciona' a continuación.
●
●
●
El televisor se apaga
automáticamente.
Compruebe si Temp. de desc. está establecido como Act. en el menú
Configuración.
Si el televisor está conectado a un PC, compruebe la configuración de la alimentación
de éste.
Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared
y en el televisor.
Si no hay señal durante unos de 10~15 minutos en la conexión de antena/cable, el
televisor se apagará.
●
●
●
●
No hay imagen/vídeo. Compruebe las conexiones de los cables (desconecte y vuelva a conectar todos los
cables del televisor y de los dispositivos externos).
Establezca la salida de vídeo de los dispositivos externos (receptor de cable/
decodificador, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) de modo que coincida con las conexiones de la
entrada de TV. Por ejemplo, salida del dispositivo externo: HDMI, entrada del TV:
HDMI.
Compruebe que el dispositivo externo esté encendido.
Asegúrese de seleccionar la fuente correcta del TV pulsando el botón SOURCE del
mando a distancia del televisor.
●
●
●
●
Conexión RF (cable/antena)
No se reciben todos los canales. Compruebe que el cable de antena esté firmemente conectado.
Ejecute Plug & Play para añadir los canales disponibles a la lista de canales. Vaya
a MENU - Configuración - Plug & Play y espere hasta que se guarden todos los
canales disponibles.
Compruebe la posición de la antena.
●
●
●
La imagen se ve distorsionada:
macrobloques, microbloques,
puntos, pixelización
La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas
especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las
películas de acción.
Un nivel de señal débil puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del
televisor.
●
●
Conexión del PC
Mensaje ‘Modo no compatible’. Establezca la frecuencia y la resolución de salida del PC de modo que coincida con la
resolución admitida por el televisor.
●
El PC siempre aparece en la
lista de fuentes aunque no esté
conectado.
Esto es normal; el PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no esté
conectado.
●
El vídeo es correcto pero no se
oye el audio con una conexión
HDMI.
● Compruebe la configuración de la salida de audio del PC.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:31Español - 30
Problema Solución
Otros
La imagen no se muestra en
pantalla completa.
En cada lado se muestran barras negras en los canales de alta definición cuando se
muestran contenidos SD mejorados (4:3).
Barras negras en las partes inferior y superior cuando se ven películas que tienen
diferentes formatos que el televisor.
Ajuste la opción del tamaño de imagen del dispositivo externo o del televisor al modo
de pantalla completa.
●
●
●
El mando a distancia no funciona. Sustituya la pilas del mando a distancia con la polaridad correcta (+ -).
Limpie la ventana de transmisión que se encuentra en la parte superior del mando a
distancia.
Apunte con el mando a distancia directamente al televisor desde una distancia de 1,5
-2 metros.
●
●
●
No se puede controlar la
alimentación o el volumen
del televisor con el mando a
distancia del receptor de cable/
decodificador.
Programe el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/decodificador para que haga
funcionar el televisor. Consulte el manual del decodificador de cable/satélite para
conocer el código del TV SAMSUNG.
●
Mensaje ‘Modo no compatible’. Compruebe la resolución admitida del televisor y ajuste consecuentemente la
resolución de salida del dispositivo externo. Consulte la configuración de la resolución
en este manual.
●
Olor a plástico en el televisor. ● Este olor es normal y desaparece con el tiempo.
La Información de señal del
televisor no está disponible
en el menú de prueba de
autodiagnóstico.
Esta función sólo está disponible en los canales digitales con las conexiones de
antena (RF/coaxial).
●
El televisor está inclinado hacia la
izquierda o hacia la derecha.
● Retire la base del soporte de televisor y vuelva a montarla.
No se puede montar la base del
soporte.
Compruebe que el televisor esté instalado sobre una superficie plana. Si no puede
quitar los tornillos del televisor, utilice un destornillador magnetizado.
●
El menú del canal se ve de color
gris (no disponible).
● El menú Canal sólo está disponible cuando está seleccionada la fuente TV.
La configuración se pierde
después de 30 minutos o cada
vez que se apaga el televisor.
Si el televisor está en el modo Demo tienda, la configuración del audio y la imagen
se restablecerá cada 30 minutos. Debe cambiar el modo Demo tienda al modo
Uso doméstico en el procedimiento Plug & Play. Pulse el botón SOURCE para
seleccionar TV, vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Pérdida intermitente del audio o
del vídeo.
Compruebe las conexiones de los cables y vuelva a conectarlos.
Se puede deber a que los cables son demasiado rígidos o gruesos. Debe asegurarse
de que los cables sean lo suficientemente flexibles para un largo periodo de uso. En
un montaje mural, es aconsejable utilizar cables con conectores de 90 grados.
●
●
Puede ver pequeñas partículas si
mira de cerca el borde biselado
de la pantalla del televisor.
● Esto es una particularidad del diseño del producto y no es un defecto.
‘Señal codificada’ o
‘Sin señal/Señal débil’ con
TARJETA (CI) en CAM.
Compruebe que el CAM tenga la tarjeta CI instalada en la ranura para interfaz común.
Retire el CAM del televisor e insértelo de nuevo en la ranura.
●
●
El televisor se enciende por su
cuenta cuando lleva 45 minutos
apagado.
Esto es normal, ya que el televisor ejecuta la función OTA (en el aire) por sí solo a fin
de actualizar el firmware descargado mientras se veía la televisión.
●
Problema de imagen/sonido
recurrente.
● Compruebe y cambie la señal/fuente.
El panel LCD TFT utiliza un panel que consta de píxeles de ínfimo tamaño que requieren de una tecnología altamente
sofisticada para su fabricación. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros en la pantalla.
Estos píxeles no influirán en el rendimiento del aparato.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:31Español - 31
Especificaciones
Nombre del modelo LE26B450 LE32B450
Tamaño de pantalla
(Diagonal) 26 pulg 32 pulg
Resolución de PC
(Óptima) 1360 x 768 a 60Hz 1360 x 768 a 60Hz
Sonido
(Salida) 5W X 2 10W X 2
Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al)
Cuerpo principal
Con el soporte
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Peso
Con el soporte 8 kg 12 kg
Consideraciones medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
10 °C a 40 °C (50 °F a 104 °F)
10% al 80%, sin condensación
-20 °C a 45 °C (-4 °F a 113 °F)
5% al 95%, sin condensación
10 °C a 40 °C (50 °F a 104 °F)
10% al 80%, sin condensación
-20 °C a 45 °C (-4 °F a 113 °F)
5% al 95%, sin condensación
Soporte giratorio
izquierda/derecha 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
El diseño y las especificaciones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso.
Este dispositivo es un aparato digital de la Clase B.
Para conocer la fuente de alimentación y el consumo de energía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto.
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:31As imagens e ilustrações neste manual do utilizador servem apenas de referência e podem ser diferentes do produto real.
O design e as especificações do produto podem ser alterados sem aviso prévio.
Licença
TruSurround HD, SRS e símbolo são marcas comerciais da SRS Labs, Inc. A tecnologia
TruSurround HD está incorporada na licença da SRS Labs, Inc.
Fabricado sob a licença da Dolby Laboratories. Dolby e o símbolo de duplo D são marcas comerciais da
Dolby Laboratories.
Aviso sobre a televisão digital
1. As funcionalidades relacionadas com a televisão digital (DVB) apenas estão disponíveis em países/áreas onde os sinais
digitais terrestres DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) sejam transmitidos, ou onde consiga aceder a um serviço de televisão por
cabo compatível com DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC). Confirme com o seu representante local a possibilidade de receber
sinal DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T é a norma de consórcio europeia DVB para a transmissão de televisão digital terrestre e DVB-C é a norma para a
transmissão de televisão digital por cabo. Existem, contudo, algumas funções diferenciadas como o EPG (Guia electrónico de
programação), VOD (Vídeo a pedido), entre outras, que não estão incluídas nesta especificação. Por esse motivo, não são
suportadas de momento.
3. Embora este televisor cumpra as mais recentes normas DVB-T e DVB-C [Agosto de 2008], não é possível garantir a
compatibilidade com as futuras transmissões digitais terrestres DVB-T e transmissões digitais por cabo DVB-C.
4. Dependendo do país/área onde este televisor é utilizado, alguns fornecedores de televisão por cabo podem cobrar uma taxa
adicional por esses serviços e poderá ser necessário concordar com os termos e condições dos seus negócios.
5. Algumas funções da televisão digital podem estar indisponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o DVB-C poderá não funcionar
correctamente com alguns fornecedores de serviços por cabo.
6. Para mais informações, contacte o centro local de assistência ao cliente da SAMSUNG.
Precauções a ter ao ver imagens fixas
Uma imagem fixa pode danificar permanentemente o ecrã do televisor
Uma imagem fixa e parcialmente fixa não deve permanecer no painel LCD durante mais do que 2 horas pois pode provocar
uma retenção de imagem no ecrã. Esta retenção de imagem também é conhecida como “queimadura de ecrã”. Para evitar a
retenção de imagem, diminua o grau de brilho e de contraste do ecrã ao visualizar uma imagem fixa.
A utilização do televisor LCD no formato 4:3 durante um longo período de tempo pode deixar vestígios de
margens na parte esquerda, direita e central do ecrã, devido a diferenças de emissão de luz. Reproduzir um
DVD ou ligar uma consola de jogos pode causar efeitos semelhantes no ecrã. Os danos causados pelo
efeito acima mencionado não são cobertos pela garantia.
A visualização de imagens fixas de jogos de vídeo ou de PC durante um longo período de tempo pode produzir pós-imagens
parciais. Para evitar este efeito, reduza o ‘brilho’ e o ‘contraste’ quando visualizar imagens fixas.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Todos os direitos reservados.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:31Português - 1
Símbolo
N O T
Nota Tecla rápida Botão TOOLS Carregue
❑
INFORMAÇÃO GERAL
Apresentação do painel de controlo.....................................2
Acessórios............................................................................2
Apresentação do painel de ligação ......................................3
Telecomando ........................................................................5
Colocar pilhas no telecomando ............................................5
FUNCIONAMENTO
Aceder aos menus................................................................6
Definir o televisor para modo de espera...............................7
Função Plug & Play..............................................................7
Visualização no ecrã ............................................................8
CONTROLO DOS CANAIS
Configurar o menu Canais....................................................8
Gerir canais .......................................................................11
CONTROLO DA IMAGEM
Configurar o menu Imagem................................................13
Utilizar o televisor como monitor de computador (PC).......15
Configurar o televisor com o PC.........................................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTROLO DO SOM
Configurar o menu Som .....................................................17
Seleccionar o modo de Som ..............................................18
CONFIGURAÇÃO
Definir o menu Configurar ..................................................19
ENTRADA / SUPORTE
Configurar o menu de Entrada ...........................................22
Configurar o menu Suporte ................................................22
RECOMENDAÇÕES PARA A UTILIZAÇÃO
Funcionalidade de teletexto................................................24
Instalar a base....................................................................25
Instalar o kit de montagem na parede................................25
Utilizar o Bloqueio anti-roubo Kensington ..........................26
Manter um espaço de instalação seguro............................26
Fixar o televisor à parede...................................................27
Resolução de problemas....................................................28
Características técnicas .....................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CONTEúDO
Português
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:32Português - 2
INFORMAÇÃO GERAL
Apresentação do painel de controlo
A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
Pode utilizar um botão, carregando num dos botões do painel lateral.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada disponíveis. No menu no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o
botão ENTERE do telecomando.
2 MENU: carregue para ver o menu das funções do televisor no ecrã.
3Y: carregue para aumentar ou diminuir o volume.
No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões Y tal como utiliza os botões ◄ e ► do telecomando.
4Z: carregue para mudar de canal. No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões Z tal como utiliza os botões
▼ e ▲ do telecomando.
5 P (Ligar/Desligar): Carregue para ligar e desligar o televisor.
6 SENSOR DO TELECOMANDO: aponte o telecomando para este ponto no televisor.
7 INDICADOR DE CORRENTE: pisca e apaga-se quando o aparelho está ligado, e acende-se quando está no modo de
espera.
8 ALTIFALANTES
Acessórios
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Telecomando e
pilhas
(2 pilhas AAA)
Cabo de
alimentação
Tampa da parte
inferior
4 parafusos para
base
3 parafusos para base
(apenas para os modelos de
32 polegadas)
Pano de limpeza
● Manual do utilizador ● Cartão de garantia ● Manual de segurança
Verifique se os seguintes acessórios estão incluídos no televisor LCD. Se faltar algum dos acessórios, contacte o revendedor.
Cartão de garantia / Manual de segurança (não estão disponíveis em todos os locais)
A cor e a forma dos acessórios podem variar consoante o modelo.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:32Português - 3
Apresentação do painel de ligação
A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
Antes de ligar um dispositivo externo ao televisor, este tem de estar desligado.
Quando ligar um dispositivo externo, faça a correspondência de cores entre o terminal e o respectivo cabo.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Estabelece a ligação com um componente de Áudio Digital, tal como um receptor Home theatre.
Quando as tomadas HDMI IN estiverem ligadas, a tomada DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) do televisor disponibiliza
apenas som de 2 canais. Se quiser ouvir áudio de 5.1 canais, ligue a tomada Óptica ao leitor de DVD / Blu-ray ou da box
de Televisão por cabo/ Satélite directamente a um Amplificador ou Home Theatre e não ao televisor.
2 PC IN
Ligar à tomada de saída de áudio e de vídeo no PC.
3 ANT IN
Estabelece a ligação com uma antena ou sistema de televisão por cabo.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Ligar à tomada de saída de áudio no PC.
Saídas de áudio DVI para dispositivos externos.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Ligar os cabos de áudio RCA a AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] na parte de trás do televisor, e as outras extremidades aos
conectores correspondentes de entrada de áudio no Amplificador ou num sistema de Home Theatre.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
[Painel posterior do televisor]
[Painel lateral
do televisor]
Entrada de
energia
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:33Português - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Estabelece a ligação à tomada HDMI de um dispositivo com uma saída HDMI.
Não é necessária nenhuma ligação de som adicional para a ligação HDMI a HDMI.
Utilize a tomada HDMI IN 1(DVI) para a ligação DVI a um dispositivo externo. Utilize um cabo DVI para HDMI ou um
adaptador de DVI-HDMI (DVI para HDMI) para uma ligação de vídeo e as tomadas PC / DVI AUDIO IN para áudio.
É também possível utilizar as portas para ligar a um PC.
O que é HDMI?
‘High Definition Multimedia interface’ permite a transmissão de dados de vídeo digital de alta definição e de som digital
multi-canal.
O terminal HDMI/DVI suporta uma ligação DVI a um dispositivo alargado, com o cabo adequado (não fornecido).
HDMI e DVI diferem pois o dispositivo HDMI é mais pequeno, tem a função de codificação HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital
Copy Protection) instalada e suporta som digital multi-canal.
O televisor pode não emitir som e as imagens podem ser apresentadas com cores estranhas quando estão ligados
leitores de DVD ou Blu-ray/boxes de televisão por cabo/receptores de satélite que suportem versões HDMI anteriores
à 1.3. Se ligar um cabo HDMI mais antigo e não ouvir som, ligue o cabo HDMI à tomada HDMI IN 1(DVI) e os cabos de
áudio às tomadas PC / DVI AUDIO IN na parte de trás do televisor. Se isto acontecer, contacte a empresa fornecedora
do leitor de DVD ou Blu-ray/box de televisão por cabo/receptor de satélite para confirmar a versão HDMI e depois peça
uma actualização de firmware. Os cabos HDMI de versões anteriores à 1.3 podem provocar imagens tremidas ou fazer
com que não sejam apresentadas imagens no ecrã.
7 Ranhura COMMON INTERFACE
Ao não introduzir o "CI CARD" em determinados canais, a mensagem "Sinal codificado" é apresentada no ecrã.
As informações de associação incluindo um número de telefone, ID do CI CARD, ID do anfitrião e outras informações
são apresentadas cerca de 2 a 3 minutos depois. Se for apresentada uma mensagem de erro, contacte o seu fornecedor
de serviços.
Assim que concluir a configuração das informações dos canais, a mensagem "Actualização concluída" é apresentada,
indicando que a lista de canais já está actualizada.
Tem de solicitar um CI CARD ao fornecedor de serviços por cabo local. Retire o CI CARD puxando-o com cuidado para
não o deixar cair e danificá-lo.
Introduza o CI Card na direcção indicada.
A localização da Ranhura COMMON INTERFACE pode ser diferente consoante o modelo.
Uma vez que CAM não é suportado nalguns países e regiões, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor
autorizado.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Ligar um cabo RCA a um dispositivo de A/V externo adequado, como por exemplo, um videogravador, um leitor de DVD
ou uma câmara de vídeo.
Ligar os cabos de áudio RCA a [R-AUDIO-L] no televisor e as outras extremidades aos conectores de saída de áudio
correspondentes no dispositivo A/V.
9 DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEIO KENSINGTON (consoante o modelo)
O dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington (opcional) serve para fixar fisicamente o sistema quando utilizado em locais
públicos. Se quiser utilizar um dispositivo de bloqueio, contacte o revendedor onde adquiriu o televisor.
A localização do dispositivo de Bloqueio Kensington pode ser diferente consoante o modelo.
0 COMPONENT IN
Ligar os cabos de vídeo de componente (opcionais) ao conector de componente (PR, PB, Y) na parte de trás do televisor,
e as outras extremidades aos conectores correspondentes de saída de vídeo no DTV ou no leitor de DVD.
Para ligar o Set-Top Box e o DTV (ou o leitor de DVD), deve ligar o Set-Top Box ao DTV (ou ao leitor de DVD) e o DTV
(ou o leitor de DVD) ao conector de componente (PR, PB, Y) no televisor.
Os conectores PR, PB e Y dos dispositivos para componentes (DTV ou leitor de DVD) são por vezes identificados como Y,
B-Y e R-Y ou Y, Cb e Cr.
Ligar os cabos de áudio RCA (opcionais) a [R-AUDIO-L] na parte de trás do televisor, e as outras extremidades aos
conectores correspondentes de saída de áudio no DTV ou no leitor de DVD.
! EXT (RGB)
Conector
Entrada Saída
Vídeo Áudio (E / D) RGB Vídeo + Áudio (E / D)
EXT O O O Apenas está disponível a saída TV ou DTV.
Entradas ou saídas para dispositivos externos, tais como videogravadores, consolas de jogos ou leitores de DVD.
@ SERVICE
Conector para actualizações de software.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:33Português - 5
Telecomando
Pode utilizar o telecomando até aproximadamente 7 metros de distância do televisor.
O funcionamento do telecomando pode ser afectado por luzes fortes.
A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
1 POWER : botão Standby do
televisor.
2 BOTÕES NUMÉRICOS : carregue
para mudar de canal.
3 FAV.CH : carregue para aceder aos
canais favoritos.
4Y : carregue para aumentar
ou diminuir o volume.
5 SOURCE : carregue para
seleccionar as fontes de vídeo
disponíveis.
6 INFO : carregue para apresentar
informações no ecrã do televisor.
7 TOOLS : utilize para seleccionar
funções frequentemente utilizadas.
8 CH LIST : apresenta a Lista de
canais no ecrã
9 BOTÕES COLORIDOS : utilize nos
menus da Lista canais, etc.
! TV : selecciona o modo TV
directamente.
@ PRE-CH : permite-lhe regressar ao
canal estava a ver anteriormente.
# MUTEM: carregue para tirar o som
ao televisor.
$ P
: carregue para mudar
de canal.
% MENU : apresenta o menu principal
no ecrã.
^ GUIDE : visualização do Guia de
programação electrónico (EPG)
& RETURN : volta ao menu anterior
* PARA CIMA▲ / PARA BAIXO▼ /
ESQUERDA◄ / DIREITA► / ENTERE
: utilize para seleccionar as opções de
menu no ecrã e alterar os respectivos
valores.
( EXIT : carregue para sair do menu.
) SUBT. : visualização de legendas
digitais
a AD : Selecção da descrição áudio.
Funções de teletexto
5 0 : selecção do modo de Teletexto
(LIST / FLOF)
6 5 : mostrar teletexto
7 4 : selecção de tamanho de teletexto
8 8 : memorizar teletexto
9 Selecção de tópicos Fastext
0/ : seleccionar alternadamente
Teletexto, Dobragem, ou Sobreposto.
! :: sair da visualização de teletexto
@ 1 : página secundária de teletexto
$ 2 : página seguinte do teletexto
3 : página anterior do teletexto
% 6 : índice do teletexto
& 9 : modo de espera de teletexto
( 7 : cancelar teletexto
Colocar pilhas no telecomando
1. Levante a tampa na parte de trás do telecomando tal como apresentado na figura.
2. Coloque duas pilhas de tamanho AAA.
Faça corresponder os pólos ‘+’ e ‘–’ das pilhas com o diagrama existente no
compartimento.
3. Volte a colocar a tampa.
Se não tencionar utilizar o telecomando durante muito tempo, retire as pilhas e guardeas num local fresco e seco.
Se o telecomando não funcionar, verifique os itens abaixo:
O televisor está ligado?
Os pólos + e - das pilhas estão invertidos?
As pilhas estão gastas?
Houve um corte de energia ou o cabo de alimentação está desligado?
Há alguma lâmpada fluorescente especial ou luz de néon por perto?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:33Português - 6
FUNCIONAMENTO
Aceder aos menus
Antes de utilizar o televisor, siga os passos seguintes para saber como navegar no menu e
seleccionar ou ajustar diferentes funções.
1. Carregue no botão MENU.
O menu principal aparece no ecrã. No lado esquerdo estão alguns ícones: Imagem, Som,
Canal, Configurar, Entrada., Aplicação, Assistência.
2. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dos ícones.
Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para aceder aos ícones do menu secundário.
3. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para percorrer as opções do menu.
Carregue no botão ENTERE para introduzir opções no menu.
4. Carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/► para alterar as opções seleccionadas.
Carregue no botão RETURN para voltar ao menu anterior.
5. Carregue no botão EXIT para sair do menu.
Utilizar os botões do telecomando
Botão Acção Botão Acção
MENUm Mostrar o menu principal no ecrã.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Movimentar o cursor e seleccionar uma
opção.
Seleccionar a opção actualmente
seleccionada.
Confirmar a definição.
RUTURNR Voltar ao menu anterior.
EXITe Sair do menu no ecrã.
Exemplo: Definir o brilho do televisor no menu Imagem
Ajustar o brilho para 80
1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o menu.
2. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Imagem.
3. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Brilho.
4. Carregue no botão ENTERE.
5. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► até o nível de brilho ser 80.
6. Carregue no botão ENTERE.
Carregue no botão EXIT para sair do menu.
¦
N
N
Modo : Standard ►
Retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Imagem
Modo : Standard ►
Retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Imagem
Retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45 ►
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Definições avançadas
Opções de imagem
Reposição de imagem
Imagem
U Mover L Ajustar E Enter R Voltar
Brilho 45
U Mover L Ajustar E Enter R Voltar
Brilho 80
Modo : Standard ►
Retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Imagem
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:34Português -
Definir o televisor para modo de espera
Pode definir o seu televisor para o modo de espera, para reduzir o consumo de energia. O modo de espera é útil quando precisa
e interromper a visualização temporariamente (por exemplo, durante a refeição).
1. Carregue no botão POWERP no telecomando.
O ecrã apaga-se e aparece o indicador luminoso do modo de espera no televisor.
2. Para voltar a ligar o televisor, basta carregar no botão POWERP novamente.
Não deixe o televisor em modo de espera durante longos períodos de tempo (por exemplo, quando vai de férias).
Aconselha-se que desligue o televisor da corrente eléctrica e da antena.
Função Plug & Play
Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas de forma
automática e subsequente.
1. Carregue no botão POWER no telecomando. Aparece a mensagem You can set the
menu language..
2. Seleccione o idioma apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão
ENTERE para confirmar a escolha.
3. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Demo Loja ou Uso Doméstico e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
Recomendamos a configuração do televisor para o modo Uso Doméstico de modo a usufruir da melhor imagem em sua
casa.
Demo Loja destina-se apenas para locais de venda a retalho.
Se o televisor for acidentalmente configurado para o modo Demo Loja e quiser voltar ao modo Uso Doméstico
(Standard): carregue no botão de volume no televisor. Quando aparecer o OSD de volume, carregue sem largar o botão
MENU no televisor durante 5 segundos.
4. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o país apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE
para confirmar a escolha.
5. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Antena ou Cabo e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
Antena: Sinal de Antena.
Cabo: Sinal de Cabo.
6. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a fonte do canal a memorizar. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar
Iniciar.
Digital e Analógico: canais digitais e analógicos.
Digital: canais digitais.
Analógico: canais analógicos.
Ao definir a fonte de antena para Cabo, pode definir um valor para a procura de canais digitais. Para mais informações,
consulte Canal→ Memor. auto..
A procura de canais começa e termina automaticamente.
Carregue no botão ENTERE a qualquer altura para interromper o processo de memorização.
Depois de todos os canais disponíveis terem sido memorizados, a mensagem Ajustar o Modo Relógio é apresentada.
. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Auto. e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
Se seleccionar Manual, Ajustar data e hora actuais é apresentado.
Se receber um sinal digital, a hora será definida automaticamente. Se esta não for apresentada, seleccione Manual para
acertar o relógio. (consulte a página 19)
8. O método de ligação para oferecer a melhor qualidade HD é fornecido. Depois de confirmar o método, carregue no botão
ENTERE.
9. A Mensag. Desfrute do seu televisor. é apresentada. Quando tiver terminado, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Se quiser repor esta função...
1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o menu. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Configurar e em seguida
no botão ENTERE.
2. Carregue novamente no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.
3. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é 0-0-0-0.
Se quiser alterar o número PIN, utilize a função Alterar PIN. (consulte a página 21)
A função Plug & Play só está disponível no modo TV.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:34Português - 8
Visualização no ecrã
A visualização no ecrã identifica o canal actual e o estado de determinadas definições de
áudio-vídeo.
Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações.
Carregue no botão INFO no telecomando. O canal, o tipo de som e o estado de
determinadas definições de imagem e som são apresentados no televisor.
▲, ▼: pode visualizar outras informações do canal. Se quer passar para o canal
actualmente seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE.
◄, ►: pode visualizar as informações do programa pretendido no canal actual.
Carregue novamente no botão INFO ou espere aproximadamente 10 segundos e o
ecrã desaparece automaticamente.
CONTROLO DOS CANAIS
Configurar o menu Canais
País
É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4
dígitos.
Canal analógico
Pode alterar o país nos canais analógicos.
Canal digital
Pode alterar o país nos canais digitais.
Memor. auto.
Pode procurar os intervalos de frequência disponíveis (a disponibilidade depende do país em que se encontra). Os números de
programas atribuídos automaticamente podem não corresponder aos números de programas existentes ou pretendidos.
Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada.
Antena / Cabo
Fonte de antena a memorizar
Digital e Analógico: canais digitais e analógicos.
Digital: canais digitais.
Analógico: canais analógicos.
Ao seleccionar ‘Cabo→ Digital e Analógico’ ou ‘Cabo→ Digital’
Indique um valor para procurar canais de cabo.
Modo de procura → Completa / Rede / Rápida
Rápida
ID de rede: apresenta o código de identificação de rede.
Frequência: apresenta a frequência para o canal. (Difere de país para país)
Modulação: apresenta os valores de modulação disponíveis.
Taxa de símbolos: apresenta as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
–
–
–
–
Procura todos os canais com estações de transmissão activas e guarda-os na memória do televisor.
Se pretende parar a Memorização automática, carregue no botão ENTERE.
A mensagem Parar a programação automática? será apresentada.
Seleccione Sim carregando nos botões ◄ ou ► e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
País ►
Memor. auto.
Memor. manual
Opção de Procura por Cabo
Guia act. e posterior
Guia completo
Guia predef. : Guia completo
Canal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:34Português - 9
Memor. manual
Procura o canal manualmente e guarda-o na memória do televisor.
Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada.
Canal digital
Memorização manual dos canais digitais.
Canal digital só está disponível no modo DTV.
Canal: defina o número do canal utilizando o botão ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).
Frequência: defina a frequência utilizando os botões numéricos.
Largura banda: defina a banda utilizando o botão ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).
Quando concluído, os canais são actualizados na lista de canais.
Canal analógico
Memorização manual dos canais analógicos.
Programa (Número do programa a ser atribuído a um canal): define o número do programa utilizando os botões ▲,▼ ou
numéricos (0~9).
Sistema cores → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: define os valores do sistema de cores utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.
Sistema som → BG / DK / I / L: define os valores do sistema de som utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.
Canal(Se souber o número do canal a memorizar): carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar C (Canal de antena) ou
S (Canal de cabo). Carregue no botão ► e em seguida, nos botões ▲, ▼ ou numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar o número
pretendido.
Também pode seleccionar o número do canal directamente ao carregar nos botões numéricos (0~9).
Se não ouvir som ou se este não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão de som pretendido.
Busca (Se não souber os números dos canais): carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para iniciar a procura. O sintonizador procura a
amplitude de frequências até aparecer no ecrã o primeiro canal, ou o canal seleccionado.
Memorizar (Quando memoriza o canal e o número do programa associado): defina para OK carregando no botão
ENTERE.
Canal Modo
P (Modo de programa): ao concluir a sintonização, já terão sido atribuídos números de posição (de P00 a P99) às
estações emissoras da sua área. Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número da posição neste modo.
C (Modo de canal de antena): pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada estação emissora
neste modo.
S (Modo de canal de cabo): pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada canal de cabo neste
modo.
Opção de Procura por Cabo (dependendo do país)
Define opções de procura adicionais, como a frequência e a taxa de símbolos, para procuras de rede por cabo.
Frequência (Iniciar ~ Parar): apresenta a frequência para o canal.
Modulação: apresenta os valores de modulação disponíveis.
Taxa de símbolos: apresenta as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo
As informações do EPG (Guia de programação electrónico) são fornecidas pelas estações emissoras. Pode haver entradas de
programas em branco ou desactualizadas em consequência da transmissão de informações de um determinado canal. O ecrã é
actualizado de forma dinâmica à medida que novas informações ficam disponíveis.
Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utilização de Guia act. e posterior e Guia completo, consulte as descrições na
página 10.
Também pode aceder ao menu do guia carregando no botão GUIDE. (Para configurar o Guia predef., consulte as
descrições.)
Guia act. e posterior
Mostra informações sobre o programa actual e o posterior em relação aos seis canais indicados na coluna do lado esquerdo.
Guia completo
Apresenta as informações sobre os programas de hora em hora. São apresentadas informações de duas horas de programação,
que pode percorrer para a frente ou para trás no tempo.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:35Português - 10
Guia predef. → Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo
Pode decidir entre apresentar o Guia act. e posterior ou o Guia completo ao carregar no botão GUIDE do telecomando.
Lista canais
Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utilização de Lista canais,consulte as instruções de ‘Gerir canais’.
Pode seleccionar estas opções ao carregar no botão CH LIST no telecomando.
Modo Canal
Quando carrega no botão P >/<, os canais são alterados de acordo com a lista de canais seleccionados.
Canais adicionados
os canais alternam de acordo com a lista de canais memorizados.
Canais favoritos
os canais alternam de acordo com a lista de canais favoritos.
Sintonia fina
Se a recepção for nítida, não precisa de fazer a sintonização fina do canal, uma vez que é feita automaticamente durante a
procura e memorização. No entanto, se o sinal for fraco ou estiver distorcido, pode ser necessário fazer uma sintonização fina
manual dos canais.
Os canais memorizados onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina estão marcados com um asterisco ‘*’ no lado direito do
número do canal na banda de canais.
Para repor a sintonização fina, seleccione Reiniciar carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼ e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
A sintonização fina apenas pode ser utilizada nos canais analógicos.
Utilizar o Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo
Para... Escolha...
Ver um programa da lista EPG Seleccionar um programa carregando nos botões ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Sair do guia Carregar no botão azul
Se seleccionar o programa seguinte, este fica agendado com o ícone de relógio visível. Se carregar de novo no botão ENTERE,
carregue nos botões ◄, ► para seleccionar Cancelar planos. Os agendamentos são cancelados e o ícone do relógio desaparece.
Ver as informações dos programas Seleccionar um programa à sua escolha, carregando nos botões
▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Carregue depois no botão INFO quando o programa que escolheu estiver
realçado.
O nome do programa é apresentado na parte de superior do centro do ecrã.
Carregue no botão INFO para obter informações detalhadas. Nas informações detalhadas estão incluídos aspectos como o Número
do canal, Duração do programa, Barra de estado, Autoridade parental, Informação sobre a qualidade de vídeo (HD / SD), Modos
de som, Legendas ou Teletexto, Idiomas das legendas ou do teletexto, e um breve resumo sobre o programa realçado. ‘...’ é
apresentado se o resumo for demasiado longo.
Alternar entre Guia act. e posterior e
Guia completo
Carregar várias vezes no botão vermelho.
No Guia completo
Andar rapidamente para trás (24 horas).
Andar rapidamente para a frente (24 horas).
Carregar várias vezes no botão verde.
Carregar várias vezes no botão amarelo.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Guia completo
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Hoje 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Ver
INFO Informação ■ Act./Post ■ +24 Horas ■ Sair
Guia act. e posterior
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Agora Seguinte
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Ver
INFO Informação ■ Guia completo ■ Sair
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:35Português - 11
Gerir canais
Ao utilizar este menu, pode Adicionar / Eliminar ou definir os canais Favoritos e utilizar o guia
de programas para transmissões digitais.
Todos os canais
Mostra todos os canais disponíveis.
Canais adicionados
Mostra todos os canais adicionados.
Favoritos
Mostra todos os canais favoritos.
Para seleccionar os canais definidos como Favoritos, carregue no botão FAV.CH do telecomando.
Programado
Mostra todos os programas actualmente reservados.
Seleccione um canal no ecrã Todos os canais, Canais adicionados ou Favoritos carregando nos botões ▲ / ▼ e em
seguida no botão ENTERE. Pode então ver o canal seleccionado.
Utilizar os botões coloridos com a Lista de canais
Vermelho (Canal Tipo): Alternar entre TV, Rádio, Dados / Outros e Todas.
Verde (Zoom): Aumenta ou diminui o número de um canal.
Amarelo (Selecionar): selecciona várias listas de canais. Pode executar as funções adicionar / eliminar, adicionar aos
Favoritos / eliminar dos Favoritos ou bloquear / desbloquear para vários canais ao mesmo tempo. Seleccione os canais
pretendidos e carregue ao mesmo tempo no botão amarelo para definir todos os canais seleccionados. A marca c é
apresentada à esquerda dos canais seleccionados.
TOOLS (Ferramentas): Apresenta o menu Apagar (ou Adicionar), Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos
favoritos), Bloquear (ou Desbloq.), Visual. Temporizador, Editar nome, Ordenar, Edição do Canal nº, Selec. Todos
(ou Anular selecção), Memor. auto.. (O menu Opções pode variar consoante a situação.)
Ícones do ecrã sobre o estado do canal
A : um canal analógico.
c : um canal seleccionado ao carregar no botão amarelo.
* : um canal definido como Favorito.
( : um programa que está a ser transmitido.
\ : um canal bloqueado.
) : um programa reservado
Menu Opções de lista de canais (em Todos os canais / Canais adicionados / Favoritos)
Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu de opções.
O menu de opções pode variar dependendo do estado do canal.
Adicionar / Apagar
Pode eliminar ou adicionar um canal a ser apresentado nos canais pretendidos.
Todos os canais eliminados são apresentados no menu Todos os canais.
Um canal a cinzento indica que este foi eliminado.
O menu Adicionar só é apresentado para canais eliminados.
Também pode, do mesmo modo, eliminar um canal do menu Canais adicionados ou
Favoritos.
Adicionar aos favoritos / Apagar dos favoritos
Pode definir os canais que vê frequentemente como favoritos.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a função adicionar aos (ou eliminar
dos) Favoritos, seleccionando Ferramentas→ Adicionar aos favoritos(ou Apagar dos favoritos).
O símbolo ‘*’ é apresentado e o canal é definido como favorito.
Todos os canais favoritos são apresentados no menu Favoritos.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canais adicionados Todos ■ Canal Tipo ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canais adicionados Todos ■ Canal Tipo ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas
Apagar
Adicionar aos favoritos
Bloquear
Visual. Temporizador
Editar nome de canal
Ordenar
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:35Português - 12
Bloquear / Desbloq.
Pode bloquear um canal para que o mesmo não seja nem seleccionado nem visualizado. Esta função está disponível apenas
quando Bloq. crianças está definido para Lig.. (consulte a página 21)
É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos.
O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é 0-0-0-0. Pode alterar o PIN, seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN no menu.
O símbolo “\” é apresentado e o canal é bloqueado.
Visual. Temporizador
Se reservar um programa que queira assistir, o televisor muda automaticamente para o canal da lista onde tinha reservado
o programa, mesmo que esteja a visualizar outro canal. Para reservar um programa, defina em primeiro lugar a hora actual.
(Consulte a página 19)
Apenas canais memorizados podem ser reservados.
Pode definir directamente o canal, o dia, o mês, o ano, a hora e o minuto, ao carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
A reserva de um programa é apresentada no menu Programa.
Guia de programas digitais e Reservas de visualização
Se carregar no botão ►, quando seleccionar um canal digital, o Guia de programas desse canal é apresentado. Pode
reservar um programa se seguir os procedimentos descritos acima.
Editar nome de canal (apenas canais analógicos)
Os canais podem ser etiquetados de modo a que as letras que os definem sejam apresentadas quando os mesmos são
seleccionados.
Os nomes dos canais digitais são atribuídos automaticamente e não podem ser etiquetados.
Edição do Canal nº (apenas canais digitais)
Pode também editar o número do canal se carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Ordenar (apenas canais analógicos)
Esta operação permite alterar os números de programa dos canais memorizados. Esta operação pode ser necessária depois de
utilizar a memorização automática.
Selec. Todos / Anular selecção
Selec. Todos: pode seleccionar todos os canais da lista de canais.
Anular selecção: pode retirar a selecção a todos os canais anteriormente seleccionados.
Apenas pode seleccionar Anular selecção quando existe um canal seleccionado.
Memor. auto.
Para mais informações sobre a configuração das opções, consulte a página 8.
Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada.
Menu de opções de lista de canais (em Programado)
Pode visualizar, modificar ou eliminar uma reserva.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu de opções.
Alterar informações
Seleccione esta opção para alterar uma reserva em visualização.
Cancelar planos
Seleccione esta opção para cancelar uma reserva em visualização.
Informação
Seleccione esta opção para visualizar uma reserva em visualização. (Também pode alterar as
informações de reserva.)
Selec. Todos
Seleccione todos os programas reservados.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programado Todos ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas E Informação
Alterar informações
Cancelar planos
Informação
Selec. Todos
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:35Português - 13
CONTROLO DA IMAGEM
Configurar o menu Imagem
Modo
Pode seleccionar o tipo de imagem que melhor se adeqúe aos seus requisitos de visualização.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o
modo de imagem ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Imagem Modo.
Dinâmico
Selecciona a imagem para que seja exibida com alta definição numa sala clara.
Standard
Selecciona a imagem para que seja exibida em condições ideais num ambiente normal.
Filme
Selecciona a imagem para a visualização de filmes numa sala escura.
Retroiluminação / Retroiluminação / Brilho / Nitidez / Cor / Matiz (Vd/Vm)
O televisor tem várias opções de definição que permitem controlar a qualidade da imagem.
Retroiluminação: ajusta o brilho da retro-iluminação do LCD.
Contraste: ajusta o nível de contraste da imagem.
Brilho: ajusta o nível de brilho da imagem
Nitidez: ajusta a definição das extremidades da imagem.
Cor: ajusta a saturação da cor da imagem.
Matiz (Vd/Vm): ajusta a matiz da cor da imagem.
Seleccione o modo de imagem a ser ajustado em primeiro lugar. Os valores de ajuste são gravados para cada modo de
imagem.
Quando faz alterações a Retroiluminação, Contraste, Brilho, Nitidez, Cor ou Matiz (Vd/Vm), o OSD ajusta-se em
conformidade.
Nos modos TV, Ext., AV analógicos do sistema PAL, não pode utilizar a função Matiz (Vd/Vm).
No modo PC, apenas pode fazer alterações a Retroiluminação, Contraste e Brilho.
As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
O consumo de energia durante a utilização pode ser reduzido de forma significativa se o nível de brilho da imagem for
reduzido, o que significa uma redução no custo geral de funcionamento.
Definições avançadas
O novo televisor da Samsung permite-lhe definir de modo mais preciso as imagens do que os modelos anteriores. Veja abaixo
como ajustar as definições detalhadas das imagens.
Definições avançadas está disponível no modo Standard ou Filme.
No modo PC, apenas pode fazer alterações a Gama e Equilíb. branco de entre as opções Definições avançadas.
Tonalidade de preto → Deslig. / Escuro / Mais escuro / Muito escuro
Pode seleccionar o nível de preto no ecrã para ajustar a intensidade.
Contraste dinâm. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto
Pode ajustar o contraste do ecrã até obter o contraste ideal.
Gama
Pode ajustar a intensidade das Cores primárias (vermelho, verde, azul).
Matriz de cores
A Matriz de cores é um esquema de cores composto por vermelho, verde e azul. Seleccione a sua Matriz de cores favorita para
obter uma cor mais natural.
Nativo: a Matriz de cores nativa fornece uma tonalidade mais rica e profunda.
Auto.: a Matriz de cores automática ajusta automaticamente a tonalidade de cor mais natural com base em fontes de
programa.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Modo : Standard ►
Retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Imagem
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Definições avançadas ►
Opções de imagem
Reposição de imagem
Imagem
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:36Português - 14
Equilíb. branco
Pode ajustar a temperatura da cor de modo a obter imagens com cores mais naturais.
Vrm-Offset / Verde-Offset / Azul-Offset / Vrm-Gain / Verde-Gain / Azul-Gain: Pode ajustar a "temperatura" da cor nas
áreas claras alternando os valores R (vermelho), G (verde) e B (azul). Recomendado apenas para utilizadores avançados.
Reiniciar: o equilíbrio do branco ajustado anteriormente volta às predefinições.
Tom de pele
Pode realçar o tom de pele na imagem.
Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada a actualização do ecrã.
Melhor. extremid. → Deslig. / Lig.
Pode realçar os limites dos objectos na imagem.
Opções de imagem
No modo PC, apenas pode efectuar alterações a Tonalidade e Tamanho de entre as opções em Opções de imagem”.
Tonalidade → CoresFr / Normal / C. quentes1 / C. quentes2
Pode seleccionar a tonalidade mais confortável para si.
As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
C. quentes1 ou C. quentes2 apenas estão activados quando o modo de imagem é Filme.
Tamanho
Pode seleccionar o tamanho de imagem que melhor se adeqúe aos seus requisitos de visualização.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o tamanho ao seleccionar
Ferramentas → Imagem Tamanho.
Wide Automático: ajusta automaticamente o tamanho da imagem para o formato 16:9.
16:9: ajusta o tamanho da imagem para 16:9, apropriado para DVD ou transmissão em banda larga.
Zoom amplo: aumenta o tamanho da imagem para mais de 4:3.
Zoom: amplia a imagem de formato 16:9 (na direcção vertical) para se ajustar ao tamanho do ecrã.
4:3: esta é a predefinição para um filme de vídeo ou para uma transmissão normal.
Ajustar ao ecrã: Utilize esta função para ver a imagem inteira sem cortes durante a recepção dos sinais
HDMI (720p / 1080i) ou Componente (1080i).
As opções de tamanho da imagem podem variar consoante a fonte de entrada.
As opções disponíveis podem variar consoante o modo seleccionado.
No modo PC, apenas os modos 16:9 e 4:3 podem ser ajustados.
As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
Pode ocorrer uma retenção temporária da imagem ao visualizar uma imagem fixa por um período superior a duas horas.
Zoom amplo: carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. carregue nos
botões ▲ ou ▼ para mover a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Zoom: carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. carregue nos botões
▲ ou ▼ para deslocar a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão
► para seleccionar Tamanho e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para ampliar ou reduzir o
tamanho da imagem na vertical. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Depois de seleccionar Ajustar ao ecrã nos modos HDMI (1080i) ou Componente (1080i): seleccione Posição carregando
nos botões ◄ ou ►. Utilize os botões ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► para mover a imagem.
Reiniciar: carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Reiniciar e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Pode inicializar a
definição.
Se utilizar a função Ajustar ao ecrã com uma entrada HDMI 720p, é cortada uma linha na parte de cima, na parte de baixo, à
esquerda e à direita como na função de Procura.
Modo de ecrã → 16:9 / Zoom amplo / Zoom / 4:3
Ao definir o tamanho da imagem para Wide Automático num televisor panorâmico 16:9, pode determinar o tamanho que
pretende ver imagem 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou nenhuma. Cada país europeu requer um tamanho de imagem diferente
pelo que esta função permite aos utilizadores seleccionar o tamanho.
16:9: define a imagem para o modo panorâmico 16:9.
Zoom amplo: aumenta o tamanho da imagem para mais de 4:3.
Zoom: aumenta o tamanho da imagem na vertical.
4:3: define a imagem para o modo normal 4:3.
Esta função está disponível no modo Wide Automático.
Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Componente ou HDMI.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:36Português - 15
NR Digital → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Auto.
Se o sinal de transmissão recebido pelo seu televisor for fraco, pode activar a função de Redução do ruído digital para ajudar a
diminuir os efeitos da electricidade estática ou de fantasma que possam aparecer no ecrã.
Se o sinal for fraco, seleccione uma das outras opções até que apareça no ecrã a melhor imagem.
Nv.pr.HDMI → Normal / Baixo
Pode seleccionar directamente o nível de preto no ecrã para ajustar a intensidade.
Esta função apenas está activa quando ligar a entrada externa a HDMI (sinais RGB).
Modo Filme → Deslig. / Auto.
O televisor pode ser definido para detectar e processar automaticamente sinais de filme de todas as fontes, e ajustar a imagem a
uma qualidade ideal.
Modo Filme é suportado em TV, AV, COMPONENTE(480i / 1080i) e HDMI(480i / 1080i).
Reposição de imagem → Repor modo de imagem / Cancelar
Repõe os valores predefinidos das definições de imagem.
Seleccione o modo de imagem a ser reposto. A reposição é feita para cada modo de imagem.
Repor modo de imagem: Os valores actuais da imagem voltam para a predefinição de fábrica.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Utilizar o televisor como monitor de computador (PC)
Configurar o software do PC (com base em Windows XP)
As definições de visualização do Windows num computador normal são apresentadas abaixo. Os ecrãs que aparecem no monitor
do seu PC são provavelmente diferentes, dependendo da sua versão do Windows e da placa de vídeo. Contudo, mesmo que
os ecrãs sejam diferentes, em quase todos os casos, aplicam-se as mesmas informações de configuração básicas. (Se tal não
acontecer, contacte o fabricante do computador ou um revendedor Samsung.)
1. Em primeiro lugar, clique em "Painel de controlo" no menu Iniciar do Windows.
2. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em "Aspecto e Temas" e surgirá uma janela de diálogo.
3. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘"Visualização" e surgirá uma janela de diálogo.
4. Navegue pelo separador "Definições" na janela de diálogo de visualização.
Definição de tamanho correcta (resolução): óptima - 1360 x 768 pixels
Se existir uma opção de frequência vertical na janela de diálogo das definições da visualização, o valor correcto é "60" ou "60
Hz". Se não for o caso, basta clicar em ‘"OK" e sair da caixa de diálogo.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:36Português - 16
Modos de visualização
A posição e o tamanho do ecrã variam de acordo com o tipo de monitor do PC e a respectiva resolução. Recomendam-se as
resoluções apresentadas na tabela.
Entrada D-Sub e HDMI/DVI
Modo Resolução
Frequência horizontal
(KHz)
Frequência vertical
(Hz)
Frequência do relógio em
pixels (MHz)
Polaridade de
sincronização
(H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Quando utilizar uma ligação de cabo HDMI/DVI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 1(DVI).
O modo entrelaçado não é suportado.
O aparelho pode não funcionar correctamente se for seleccionado um formato de vídeo não padrão.
São suportados os modos Separado e Composto. SOG não é suportado.
Configurar o televisor com o PC
Predefinição: carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo PC.
Ajuste auto.
O Ajuste automático permite que o monitor do PC se ajuste automaticamente ao sinal de vídeo
recebido de um PC. Os valores fino, grosso e posição são ajustados automaticamente.
Esta função não está disponível no modo DVI-HDMI.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o
Ajuste automático ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Ajuste auto..
Ecrã
Grosso / Fino
O objectivo do ajuste da qualidade da imagem é o de remover ou reduzir o ruído da imagem.
Se não conseguir retirar o ruído fazendo apenas a sintonização fina, ajuste a frequência o melhor possível (Grosso) e volte a
fazer a sintonização fina. Depois de reduzido o ruído, volte a ajustar a imagem de forma a ficar alinhada no centro do ecrã.
Posição do PC
Pode ajustar a posição do ecrã do PC se esta não se ajustar por completo ao televisor. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para ajustar
a Posição vertical. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para ajustar a Posição horizontal.
Repor imagem
Pode substituir todas as definições da imagem pelos valores predefinidos.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Ajuste auto. ►
Ecrã
Definições avançadas
Opções de imagem
Reposição de imagem
Imagem
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:36Português - 1
CONTROLO DO SOM
Configurar o menu Som
Modo → Standard / Música / Filme / Voz nítida / Personal.
Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode
configurar o modo de som se seleccionar Ferramentas → Modo Som.
Standard
Selecciona o modo de som normal.
Música
Dá ênfase à música em detrimento das vozes.
Filme
Proporciona a melhor qualidade de som para filmes.
Voz nítida
Dá ênfase à voz, em detrimento de outros sons.
Personal.
Memoriza as suas definições de som.
Equalizador
Pode ajustar as definições de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
Modo
Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
Balanço
Controla o equilíbrio entre os altifalantes esquerdo e direito.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste de banda larga)
Para ajustar o nível de diferentes frequências de largura de banda
Reiniciar
Repõe os valores predefinidos do equalizador.
SRS TruSurround HD → Deslig. / Lig.
TruSurround HD é uma tecnologia patenteada da SRS que permite reproduzir conteúdos 5.1 multi-canais apenas com dois
altifalantes. A tecnologia TruSurround proporciona um excelente som surround virtual, através de qualquer sistema de reprodução
com dois altifalantes, incluindo os altifalantes internos de televisores. É totalmente compatível com todos os formatos multi-canal.
Idioma de áudio (apenas canais digitais)
Pode alterar o valor predefinido dos idiomas de áudio. Apresenta as informações do idioma da transmissão a ser recebida.
Apenas pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponíveis pela transmissão.
Quando estiver a ver um canal digital, pode seleccionar esta função.
Formato áudio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (apenas canal digital)
Se o som for emitido tanto pelo altifalante principal como pelo receptor de áudio, pode ouvir-se um eco devido à diferença na
velocidade de descodificação entre o altifalante principal e o receptor de áudio. Neste caso, utilize a função Altifalante do televisor.
O Formato de áudio é apresentado consoante o sinal de transmissão.
Quando estiver a ver um canal digital, pode seleccionar esta função.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Modo : Personal. ►
Equalizador
SRS TruSurround HD : Deslig.
Idioma de áudio : - - -
Formato áudio : - - -
Descrição áudio
Volume auto. : Deslig.
Som
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:36Português - 18
Descrição áudio (apenas canais digitais)
Esta é uma função auxiliar de áudio que fornece uma faixa de áudio adicional para pessoas com deficiências visuais. Esta função
gere o Fluxo de áudio para o AD (Descrição de áudio), quando é enviado pelo transmissor juntamente com o Áudio principal. Os
utilizadores podem ligar ou desligar a Descrição de áudio e regular o volume.
Carregue no botão AD no telecomando para seleccionar Deslig. ou Lig..
Descrição áudio → Deslig. / Lig.
Ligue e desligue a função de descrição de áudio.
Volume
Pode regular o volume da descrição de áudio.
Volume está activo quando Descrição áudio está definido Lig..
Volume auto. → Deslig. / Lig.
Cada estação emissora tem condições de sinal específicas e, por isso, não é fácil regular o volume sempre que muda de canal.
Esta função permite regular automaticamente o volume do canal pretendido, baixando o som quando o sinal de modulação está
alto, ou aumentando o som quando o sinal de modulação está baixo.
Seleccionar Altifalante → Altifalante Exter. / Altifalante do tv.
Se quiser ouvir som através de altifalantes separados, cancele o amplificador interno.
Os botões de volume e MUTE não funcionam Seleccionar Altifalante está definido para Altifalante Exter..
Se seleccionar Altifalante Exter.1 no menu Seleccionar Altifalante, as definições de som são limitadas.
Reposição de som → Repor tudo / Repor modo de som / Cancelar
Pode repor as definições de Som predefinidas.
Seleccionar o modo de Som
Pode configurar o modo de som no menu Ferramentas. Quando define para Dual l ll, é apresentado no ecrã o modo de som
actual.
Tipo de áudio Dual 1 / 2 Predefinido
Estéreo A2
Mono MONO
Mudança automática
Estéreo ESTÉREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Estéreo
Mono MONO
Mudança automática
Estéreo MONO ↔ ESTÉREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Se o sinal de estéreo for fraco e ocorrer uma mudança automática, mude para o modo mono.
Está função apenas está activa no sinal de som estéreo. Está desactivada no sinal de som mono.
Esta função apenas está disponível no modo TV.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:37Português - 19
CONFIGURAÇÃO
Definir o menu Configurar
Idioma do Menu
Pode definir o idioma do menu.
Tempo
Relógio
Tem de acertar o relógio de modo a que possa utilizar todas as funcionalidades do
temporizador do televisor.
A hora actual é apresentada sempre que carregar no botão INFO.
Se desligar o cabo de alimentação, tem de acertar novamente o relógio.
Modo Relógio
Pode definir a hora actual de forma manual ou automática.
Auto.: defina automaticamente a hora actual, utilizando a hora da transmissão digital.
Manual: defina manualmente a hora actual para uma hora específica.
Consoante a estação de transmissão e o sinal, a hora actual pode não ser acertada correctamente. Se tal acontecer,
acerte a hora manualmente.
A antena ou cabo devem estar ligados para que a hora seja acertada automaticamente.
Ajuste o Relógio
Pode definir manualmente a hora actual.
Configure esta opção ao ter definido Modo Relógio para Manual.
Pode definir directamente o dia, o mês, o ano, a hora e o minuto, ao carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Temporizador → Deslig. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
O temporizador desliga automaticamente o televisor após o tempo predefinido (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minutos).
O televisor passa automaticamente para o modo de espera quando o temporizador atinge o 0.
Para cancelar a função Temporizador, seleccione Deslig..
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o temporizador ao seleccionar
Ferramentas → Temporizador.
Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3
Pode configurar três definições diferentes para ligar/desligar através do temporizador. Em primeiro lugar, deve acertar o relógio.
Ligar à hora definida: defina a hora, o minuto e activar / desactivar. (Para activar o temporizador com a definição escolhida,
defina para Activate.)
Desligar à hora definida: defina a hora, o minuto e activar / desactivar. (Para activar o temporizador com a definição
escolhida, defina para Activate.)
Volume: seleccione o nível do volume para quando o televisor é ligado.
Antena: Seleccione Antena ou Cabo.
Canal: seleccione o canal pretendido.
Repetir: Seleccione Uma vez, Diaria., Seg~Sex, Seg~Sáb, Sáb~Dom, ou Manual.
Quando Manual está seleccionado, carregue no botão ► para seleccionar o dia da semana pretendido. Carregue no
botão ENTERE sobre o dia pretendido e será apresentada a marca c.
Pode acertar as horas, os minutos e o canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Desligar automaticamente
Quando o programar o temporizador para Ligado, o televisor acabará por se desligar se não carregar em nenhum comando
durante 3 horas depois de o temporizador ter ligado o televisor. Esta função apenas está disponível no modo Ligado do
temporizador e permite evitar sobreaquecimentos, que podem ocorrer se o televisor permanecer ligado durante muito tempo.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Idioma do Menu : Português ►
Tempo
Transmissão
Segurança
Geral
Configurar
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:37Português - 20
Transmissão
Legenda
Pode activar e desactivar as legendas. Utilize este menu para definir o modo de Legendas. Normal no menu refere-se às
legendas normais e Surdos são as legendas para pessoas com deficiências auditivas.
Legenda → Deslig./ Lig.: activa ou desactiva as legendas.
Modo → Normal / Surdos: define o modo de legenda.
Idioma das legendas: define o idioma da legenda.
Se o programa que estiver a ver não suportar a função Surdos, a opção Normal é automaticamente activada, mesmo que o
modo Surdos esteja seleccionado.
O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão.
Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão SUBT. do telecomando.
Texto digital → Desactivar / Activar (Apenas Reino Unido)
Se o programa for transmitido com texto digital, esta função é activada.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
É uma norma internacional para sistemas de codificação de dados utilizada em multimédia e hipermédia. Funciona a um nível
mais elevado do que o sistema MPEG, incluindo hipermédia de ligação de dados, como imagens fixas, serviço de caracteres,
animação, gráficos e ficheiros de vídeo, bem como dados multimédia. MHEG é uma tecnologia de interacção com o utilizador
em tempo de execução e está a ser aplicada a diversos campos, incluindo VOD (Video-On- Demand), ITV (Interactive TV),
EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-educação, teleconferência, bibliotecas digitais e jogos em rede.
Idioma do teletexto
Pode definir o idioma do Teletexto seleccionando o idioma.
O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão.
Preferência
Idioma principal / Idioma secundário / Idioma princ. Legendas / Idioma secund. Legendas / Idioma principal do
teletexto / Idioma secund. Teletexto
Ao utilizar esta funcionalidade, os utilizadores podem seleccionar um dos idiomas. O idioma seleccionado aqui é o predefinido
para quando o utilizador selecciona um canal.
Se alterar a definição de idioma, o Idioma das legendas, o Idioma de áudio e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma mudam
automaticamente para o idioma seleccionado.
O Idioma de áudio, o Idioma das legendas e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma apresentam uma lista de idiomas
suportados pelo canal actual e a selecção é realçada. Se alterar esta definição, a nova selecção só é válida para o canal
actual. A definição alterada não muda a definição do Idioma principal, do Idioma principal das legendas, nem do Idioma
principal do teletexto no menu Preferência.
Interface comum
Menu CI
Permite ao utilizador seleccionar a partir do menu fornecido pelo CAM.
Seleccione o Menu CI com base no menu PC Card.
Informação sobre aplicações
Contém informações sobre o CAM introduzido na ranhura CI e apresenta-as no ecrã.
Os dados apresentados em neste menu referem-se ao CI CARD. Pode instalar o CAM em qualquer altura,
independentemente de o televisor estar ligado ou desligado.
1. Adquira o módulo CI CAM no revendedor mais próximo ou por telefone.
2. Introduza o CI CARD no CAM na direcção da seta até ficar encaixado.
3. Introduza o CAM, com o CI CARD colocado, na ranhura da interface comum.
(Introduza completamente o CAM na direcção da seta, de modo a ficar paralelo à ranhura.)
4. Verifique se consegue ver uma imagem num canal de sinal codificado.
Uma vez que CAM não é suportado nalguns países e regiões, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor
autorizado.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:37Português - 21
Segurança
Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4
dígitos.
O número PIN predefinido de um novo televisor é 0-0-0-0. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando Alterar PIN no menu.
Bloq. crianças → Deslig. / Lig.
Esta função impede que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, vejam programas não apropriados, cortando a imagem e o som.
Pode bloquear canais da Lista de canais. (consulte a página 12)
Bloq. crianças só está disponível no modo TV.
Bloqueio para crianças
Esta função impede que que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, assistam a programas não apropriados através de um
código PIN (número de identificação pessoal) de 4 dígitos definido pelo utilizador.
O item de Bloqueio para crianças varia consoante o país.
Quando o Bloqueio para crianças está activado, o símbolo ‘\’ é apresentado.
Perm. Tudo: carregue para desbloquear as classificações do televisor.
Bloq. Tudo: carregue para bloquear as classificações do televisor.
Alterar PIN
Pode alterar o seu número de identificação pessoal necessário para configurar o televisor.
Caso se esqueça do código PIN, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela seguinte sequência, repondo o PIN para 0-0-0-0:
POWER (Deslig.) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Lig.).
Geral
Modo Jogo → Deslig. / Lig.
Ao ligar uma consola de jogos como a PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, pode tirar partido de uma experiência de jogo mais realista
seleccionando o menu jogo.
Para desligar a consola de jogos e ligar outro dispositivo externo, cancele o modo jogo no menu de configuração.
Se visualizar o menu TV no Modo Jogo o ecrã treme ligeiramente.
Modo Jogo não está disponível nos modos TV e PC.
Se o Modo Jogo estiver Ligado:
o modo Imagem muda automaticamente para Standard e os utilizadores não podem alterá-lo.
o modo Som muda automaticamente para Personal. e os utilizadores não podem alterá-lo. Regule o som utilizando o
equalizador.
A função Reset Sound é activada. Se seleccionar a função Reset depois de definir o equalizador, repõe os valores de fábrica.
Poupança energ. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Imagem Desligada / Auto.
Esta função ajusta o brilho do televisor para reduzir o consumo de energia. Quando estiver a ver televisão à noite, defina o modo
Poupança energ. para Alto, de forma a reduzir a fadiga ocular, bem como o consumo de energia.
Se seleccionar Imagem Desligada, o ecrã desliga-se e apenas conseguirá ouvir o som. Carregue em qualquer botão para sair da
função Imagem Desligada.
No menu Tools, a função Imagem Desligada não é suportada.
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o modo Poupança de energia ao
seleccionar Ferramentas → Poupança energ..
Melodia → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto
O som da melodia pode ser definido para quando o televisor é ligado ou desligado.
A Melodia não toca
Quando o televisor não emite som porque carregou no botão MUTE.
Quando o televisor não emite som porque carregou no botão (–) do Volume.
Quando o televisor é desligado pela função Temporizador.
❑
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
T
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:37Português - 22
ENTRADA / SUPORTE
Configurar o menu de Entrada
Lista de fontes
Utilize para seleccionar o televisor ou outras fontes de entrada externas como leitores de DVD/Blu-ray/receptores de satélite (SetTop Box) ligadas ao televisor. Utilize para seleccionar a sua fonte de entrada preferida.
Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando para ver uma fonte de sinal externo. O
modo TV pode ser seleccionado carregando no botão TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
Pode escolher apenas os dispositivos externos que estão ligados ao televisor. Em Lista
de fontes, as entradas ligadas são realçadas e ordenadas no topo. As entradas que não
estejam ligadas serão ordenadas na parte de baixo.
Ext. e PC permanecem sempre activados.
TOOLS (Ferramentas): apresenta os menus Editar nome e Informação.
Editar nome
Atribua um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas de entrada para facilitar a selecção da fonte de entrada.
VCR / DVD / STB Cabo / Satélite STB / STB PVR / Receptor AV / Jogos / Câmara de Vídeo / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
Quando ligar um cabo HDMI/DVI à porta HDMI IN 1(DVI), deve definir o modo HDMI1/DVI para DVI ou DVI PC em
Editar nome do modo de Entrada. Neste caso, é necessário uma ligação de som separada.
Configurar o menu Suporte
Auto-diagnóstico
Teste de imagem
Caso tenha algum problema com a qualidade da imagem, execute o teste de imagem.
Verifique o padrão de cores no ecrã para ver se o problema persiste.
Sim: se o padrão de teste não aparecer ou se houver interferências no mesmo,
seleccione Sim. Pode haver algum problema com o televisor. Contacte o centro de
atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência.
Não: se o padrão de teste for visualizado correctamente, seleccione Não. Pode haver
algum problema com o equipamento externo. Verifique as ligações. Se o problema
persistir, consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo externo.
Teste de som
Caso tenha algum problema com o som, execute o teste de som. Pode verificar o som ao
reproduzir uma melodia através do televisor. A mensagem "O problema do teste de som persiste?" é apresentada no ecrã.
Se não ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes do televisor, antes de executar um teste de som, certifique-se de que
Seleccionar Altifalante está definido para Altifalante do tv. no menu Som.
A melodia será ouvida durante o teste se Seleccionar Altifalante estiver definido para “Altifalante Exter. ou, se não houver
som, ao carregar no botão MUTE.
Sim: se durante o teste de som apenas conseguir ouvir som de um altifalante ou de nenhum, seleccione Sim. Pode haver
algum problema com o televisor. Contacte o centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência.
Não: se conseguir ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes, seleccione Não. Pode haver algum problema com o equipamento
externo. Verifique as ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo externo.
Informações sobre o sinal (apenas canais digitais)
Ao contrário dos canais analógicos, cuja qualidade de recepção pode variar entre "com interferências" a "clara", os canais
digitais (HDTV) ou têm qualidade de recepção perfeita, ou então não têm qualquer recepção. Por isso, ao contrário dos canais
analógicos, não pode fazer a sintonização fina aos canais digitais. Pode, contudo, ajustar a antena para melhorar a recepção dos
canais digitais disponíveis.
Se o medidor da intensidade do sinal indicar que o sinal é fraco, ajuste fisicamente a antena para aumentar a intensidade do
sinal. Continue a ajustar a antena até encontrar a melhor posição com o sinal mais forte.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Auto-diagnóstico ►
Actualização do software
Guia de ligação HD
Contactar a Samsung
Assistência
Lista de fontes
Editar nome
Entrada
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:37Português - 23
Actualização do software
Para manter o produto actualizado com novas funções da Televisão digital, são transmitidas
periodicamente actualizações de software como parte do sinal de televisão normal. O televisor
detecta automaticamente estes sinais e apresenta a faixa de actualização do software. Tem a
opção de instalar, ou não, a actualização.
Por USB
Introduza no televisor a unidade USB que contém a actualização do firmware. Tenha cuidado
para não desligar a corrente ou retirar a unidade USB enquanto as actualizações estiverem
a ser executadas. O televisor desliga-se e volta a ligar automaticamente após terminar a
actualização do firmware. Verifique a versão de firmware depois de concluída a actualização.
Quando o software é actualizado, as definições de áudio e de vídeo que fez voltam às predefinições (de fábrica).
Recomenda-se que anote as suas definições para que possa facilmente repô-las depois da actualização.
Por um canal
Actualiza o software através do sinal de transmissão.
Se a função for seleccionada durante o período de transmissão de software, esta função procura software disponível e
transfere-o.
O tempo necessário para a transferência do software é determinado pelo estado do sinal.
Actual. no Modo de Espera
Para continuar a actualizar o software com o interruptor de corrente principal ligado, seleccione Ligado, carregando nos botões
▲ ou ▼. 45 minutos depois de entrar no modo de espera, uma actualização manual é iniciada automaticamente. Dado que o
aparelho está ligado internamente, o LCD pode ficar aceso durante algum tempo. Este fenómeno pode persistir durante mais de 1
hora até a actualização do software ficar concluída.
Software Alternativo
Para visualizar as informações da versão de software.
Guia de ligação HD
Este menu apresenta o método de ligação que proporciona a melhor qualidade para um televisor HD.
Consulte esta informação quando ligar dispositivos externos ao televisor.
Contactar a Samsung
Leia esta informação quando o televisor não funcionar correctamente ou caso queira actualizar o software.
Esta informação ser-lhe-á útil no que diz respeito ao centro de atendimento e aos métodos de transferência de ficheiros de
software e produtos.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Painel posterior do televisor
USB Drive
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:38Português - 24
RECOMENDAÇÕES PARA A UTILIZAÇÃO
Funcionalidade de teletexto
A maioria das estações de televisão fornece serviços de informação por escrito através da função de Teletexto. A página de índice
do serviço de teletexto fornece informações sobre como utilizar o serviço. Além disso, pode seleccionar várias opções de acordo
com os seus requisitos, utilizando os botões do telecomando.
Para que as informações de teletexto sejam apresentadas correctamente, é preciso que a recepção dos canais se processe
em boas condições. Caso contrário, podem faltar informações ou podem não aparecer algumas páginas.
Pode mudar as páginas do teletexto com os botões numéricos do telecomando.
1 0 (modo)
Carregue neste botão para seleccionar
o modo de Teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Se
carregar no modo LIST, muda para o
modo de Lista de memorização. No
modo de Lista de memorização, pode
guardar a página de teletexto na lista
utilizando o botão 8(guardar).
2 5 (mostrar)
Utilizado para visualizar o texto oculto
(respostas a jogos de perguntas e
respostas, por exemplo). Para ver o
ecrã normal, carregue novamente no
botão.
3 4 (tamanho)
Carregue neste botão para visualizar
as letras com o dobro do tamanho na
metade superior do ecrã. Para que seja
apresentada a metade inferior do ecrã,
carregue novamente. Para visualizar o
ecrã normal, carregue novamente no
botão.
4 8 (guardar)
Utilizado para guardar as páginas de
teletexto.
5 Botões coloridos (vermelho/verde/
amarelo/azul)
Se a estação emissora utilizar o
sistema FASTEXT, os diferentes tópicos
apresentados na página de teletexto
aparecem codificados com cores e
podem ser seleccionados ao carregar
nos botões coloridas. Carregue num
dos botões que corresponda à cor
pretendida. A página inclui outras
informações a cores que podem ser
seleccionadas da mesma forma. Para
visualizar a página anterior ou a página
seguinte, carregue no botão colorido
correspondente.
6/ (activar teletexto/sobrepor)
Carregue para activar o modo de
Teletexto depois de seleccionar o canal
com o serviço de teletexto. Carregue
duas vezes para sobrepor o ecrã de
transmissão actual ao teletexto.
7 : (sair)
Para sair da apresentação de teletexto.
8 1 (página secundária)
Utilizado para visualizar a página
secundária disponível.
9 2 (página para cima)
Utilizado para ver a página seguinte do
teletexto.
0 3 (página abaixo)
Utilizado para ver a página anterior do
teletexto.
! 9 (modo de espera)
Utilizado para manter o ecrã numa
determinada página, se esta estiver
ligada a várias páginas secundárias
que aparecem automaticamente em
sequência. Para continuar, carregue
novamente neste botão.
@ 6 (índice)
Utilizado para ver a página de índice
(conteúdos) a qualquer momento,
enquanto está a visualizar o teletexto.
# 7 (cancelar)
Utilizado para ver a emissão enquanto
procura uma página.
As páginas do teletexto estão divididas em seis categorias:
Parte Conteúdo
A Número da página seleccionada.
B Nome da estação emissora.
C Número da página actual ou indicações da procura.
D Data e hora.
E Texto.
F Informações sobre o estado.
Informações FASTEXT.
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:38Português - 25
As informações de teletexto estão muitas vezes divididas em várias páginas apresentadas em sequência e às quais pode
aceder:
introduzindo o número da página
seleccionando um título numa lista
seleccionando um título a cores (sistema FASTEXT)
O nível de teletexto suportado pelo televisor é a versão 2.5 que permite também a visualização de gráficos ou textos
adicionais.
Dependendo da transmissão, painéis laterais em branco podem ocorrer ao visualizar o teletexto.
Nestes casos, gráficos ou textos adicionais não são transmitidos.
Os televisores mais antigos que não suportam a versão 2.5 não permitem a visualização de gráficos ou textos adicionais,
independentemente da transmissão de teletexto.
Carregue no botão TV para sair do teletexto.
Teletexto 16:9, imagem 16:9
Instalar a base
Predefinição: coloque a base guia e o tubo de cobertura no suporte e fixe-o utilizando os
parafusos. Aplicável apenas a modelos de 32 polegadas.
N
1. Coloque o televisor LCD na base.
São necessárias duas ou mais pessoas para pegar no televisor.
Certifique-se de que distingue a parte da frente da parte de trás da base quando está
a montá-la.
Para se assegurar que o televisor está colocado na base a um nível apropriado, não
aplique demasiada pressão na parte superior esquerda ou direita do televisor.
2. Atarraxe dois parafusos na posição 1 e os outros dois na posição 2.
Coloque o produto de pé e aperte os parafusos. Se apertar os parafusos com o
televisor LCD deitado, este pode ficar inclinado.
N
N
N
N
Instalar o kit de montagem na parede
Os acessórios de montagem na parede (vendidos em separado) permitem montar o televisor
na parede.
Para saber mais sobre como instalar o kit de montagem na parede, consulte as instruções
que acompanham os respectivos acessórios. Contacte um técnico para obter assistência na
instalação do suporte de montagem na parede.
Se a instalação for feita pelo cliente, a Samsung Electronics não se responsabiliza por
quaisquer danos no produto nem por ferimentos sofridos pelo cliente ou por outras pessoas.
Não instale o kit de montagem na parede com o televisor ligado. Pode resultar em
ferimentos devido a choques eléctricos.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Parte
posterior
Parte frontal
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:39Português - 26
Utilizar o Bloqueio anti-roubo Kensington
O dispositivo de Bloqueio Kensington serve para "fixar" fisicamente o sistema quando
o utilizar num local público. O aspecto e o método de bloqueio podem ser diferentes
da ilustração dependendo do fabricante. Consulte o manual fornecido com o Bloqueio
Kensington para uma utilização correcta. O dispositivo de bloqueio tem que ser adquirido
separadamente. A localização do dispositivo de Bloqueio Kensington pode ser diferente
consoante o modelo.
1. Introduza o dispositivo de bloqueio na ranhura Kensington do televisor LCD (1) e rodeo na direcção de bloqueio (2).
2. Ligue o cabo do Bloqueio Kensington (3).
3. Fixe o Bloqueio Kensington a uma secretária ou a um objecto estático pesado.
3
1
2
Manter um espaço de instalação seguro
Mantenha as distâncias recomendadas, entre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma parede) para garantir a ventilação
adequada.
Caso contrário, pode provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do mesmo.
Instale o produto de modo a que as distâncias recomendadas, assinaladas na figura seguinte, sejam respeitadas.
Se utilizar uma base ou suporte para montagem na parede, utilize apenas as peças fornecidas pela Samsung Electronics.
O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou ferimentos graves em caso
de queda do produto.
O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou provocar um incêndio
devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do produto por ventilação inadequada.
O aspecto exterior pode ser diferente, dependendo do produto.
Se instalar o produto com uma base Se instalar o produto com um suporte para montagem na parede
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:39Português - 2
Fixar o televisor à parede
Atenção: puxar, empurrar, ou subir para cima do televisor pode provocar a queda do mesmo. Em especial,
certifique-se de que as crianças não se penduram ou desestabilizam o televisor, o que poderia provocar a
queda do mesmo e resultar em acidentes graves ou morte. Siga todas as precauções de segurança fornecidas
no Folheto de segurança incluído. Para estabilidade adicional, instale o dispositivo anti-queda por razões de
segurança, como descrito em seguida.
Para evitar a queda do televisor:
1. Introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse-os com firmeza à parede. Verifique se
os parafusos foram aparafusados com firmeza à parede.
Pode necessitar de material adicional, tal como um suporte, consoante o tipo de
parede.
Uma vez que os grampos, parafusos e fios não são fornecidos, adquira-os em
separado.
2. Retire os parafusos da parte posterior central do televisor, introduza os parafusos nos
grampos e aparafuse os parafusos ao televisor novamente.
Os parafusos podem não ser fornecidos com o produto. Se for esse o caso,
adquira os parafusos com as seguintes especificações.
Especificações dos parafusos
Para um LCD entre 17 e 29 polegadas: M4 X L15
Para um LCD entre 32 e 40 polegadas: M6 X L15
3. Ligue os grampos fixados ao televisor e os grampos fixados à parede com um fio forte,
depois aperte-o muito bem.
Instale o televisor perto da parede de forma a não cair para trás.
É mais seguro ligar o fio de modo a que os grampos fixados à parede estejam ao
mesmo nível ou abaixo dos grampos fixados ao televisor.
Desaperte o fio antes de transportar o televisor.
4. Verifique se todas as ligações estão devidamente presas. Verifique regularmente as
ligações para evitar qualquer sinal de gasto ou falha. Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre a
segurança das suas ligações, contacte um instalador profissional.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Parede
Parede
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:40Português - 28
Resolução de problemas
Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre o televisor, consulte primeiro esta lista. Se nenhuma destas sugestões para resolução de problemas
se aplicar, consulte o site ‘www.samsung.com’ e, em seguida, clique em Assistência ou contacte o Centro de atendimento na lista
da última página.
Problema Solução
Qualidade de imagem
Primeiro, execute oTeste de imagempara confirmar se o televisor está a apresentar
correctamente a imagem de teste.
Vá para o MENU - Assistência - Auto-diagnóstico - Teste de imagem
Se a imagem de teste for apresentada correctamente, a imagem de má qualidade pode ser
provocada pela fonte ou sinal.
●
A imagem do televisor não parece
ser de tão boa qualidade como
na loja.
Se tiver uma caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box analógica actualize-a. Utilize
cabos HDMI ou de Componente para obter uma qualidade de imagem HD.
Subscritor de cabo/satélite: Tente estações HD (Alta Definição) a partir de canais codificados.
Ligação de antena: Tente estações HD após executar o Programa automático.
Vários canais HD são actualizados a partir de conteúdos SD (Definição standard).
Ajuste a resolução de saída de vídeo da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para
1080i ou 720p.
Certifique-se de que está a ver televisão à distância mínima recomendada, com base
no tamanho e na definição do sinal que está a visualizar.
●
●
●
N
●
●
A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, bloco pequeno, pontos,
pixelização
A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem,
especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de acção.
Um nível de sinal baixo ou uma má qualidade pode causar distorção de imagem. Não
é um problema do televisor.
●
●
Cor errada ou inexistente com a
ligação de Componente.
Certifique-se de que os cabos de Componente estão ligados às tomadas correctas. As ligações
incorrectas ou soltas podem provocar problemas na cor ou o ecrã pode ficar em branco.
●
Cor ou brilho fracos. Ajuste as opções de Imagem no menu do televisor. (ModoImagem, Cor, Brilho, Nitidez)
Ajuste a opção de Poupança energ. no menu Configurar.
Tente a reposição de imagem para visualizar as predefinições da imagem.
(Vá para MENU - Imagem - Reposição de imagem)
●
●
●
Linha pontilhada na extremidade
do ecrã.
Se o tamanho da imagem estiver definido para Ajustar ao ecrã, altere o mesmo para 16:9.
Altere a resolução da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box.
●
●
A imagem é a preto e branco
apenas com entrada AV
(Composto).
Ligue o cabo de vídeo (amarelo) à tomada verde da entrada de componente 1 do
televisor.
●
A imagem fica bloqueada
ou distorcida quando muda
de canais ou a imagem está
atrasada.
Se estiver ligado a uma caixa de televisão por cabo, tente reiniciar a caixa de televisão
por cabo. (ligue novamente o cabo de CA e espere até que a caixa de televisão cabo
reinicie. Pode demorar até 20 minutos.)
Defina a resolução de saída da caixa de televisão por cabo para 1080i ou 720p.
●
●
Qualidade do som
Primeiro, execute o Teste de som para confirmar se o áudio do televisor está a funcionar
correctamente.
Vá para o MENU - Assistência - Auto-diagnóstico - Teste de som
Se o áudio estiver a funcionar correctamente, o problema de som pode ser provocado pela
fonte ou sinal.
●
Não se ouve som ou o som é
demasiado baixo mesmo com o
volume no máximo.
Verifique o volume do dispositivo externo ligado ao televisor e, em seguida, ajuste o
volume do mesmo.
●
A imagem é boa, mas não tem
som.
Defina a opção Seleccionar Altifalante para Altifalante do tv. no menu do som.
Certifique-se de que os cabos de áudio do dispositivo externo estão ligados às
tomadas de entrada de áudio correctas no televisor.
Verifique a opção de s aída de áudio do dispositivo ligado. (ex: Pode ser necessário
alterar a opção de áudio da caixa de televisão por cabo para HDMI quando tiver o
cabo HDMI ligado ao televisor.)
Se estiver a utilizar um cabo DVI para HDMI, é necessário um cabo de áudio suplementar.
Desactive a função SRS se definir o volume acima do valor 30.
Remova a ficha da tomada dos auscultadores. (se disponível no televisor)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Ruído nos auscultadores. Verifique as ligações dos cabos. Certifique-se de que um cabo de vídeo não está
ligado à entrada de áudio.
Para ligações antena/cabo, verifique a intensidade do sinal. Um nível de sinal baixo
pode causar distorção de imagem.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:41Português - 29
Problema Solução
Sem imagem, sem vídeo
O televisor não liga. Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada
de parede e ao televisor.
Verifique se a tomada de parede está a funcionar devidamente.
Tente carregar no botão POWER no televisor para ter a certeza de que o telecomando
está a funcionar correctamente. Se o televisor ligar, o problema pode ser causado pelo
telecomando. Para resolver o problema do telecomando, consulte ‘O telecomando não
funciona’ abaixo.
●
●
●
O televisor desliga-se
automaticamente.
Verifique se o Temporizador está definido para Lig. no menu Configurar.
Se ligar o televisor ao PC, verifique as definições de alimentação do PC.
Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada
de parede e ao televisor.
Se não houver qualquer sinal durante 10 a 15 minutos com a ligação por antena/cabo,
o televisor desliga-se.
●
●
●
●
Sem imagem/vídeo. Verifique as ligações dos cabos (remova e ligue novamente todos os cabos do
televisor e dispositivos externos)
Defina a saída de vídeo do dispositivo externo (cabo/set top box, DVD, Blu-ray,
etc.) para corresponder às ligações de entrada do televisor. Por exemplo, saída do
dispositivo externo: HDMI, entrada do televisor: HDMI.
Certifique-se de que o dispositivo está ligado.
Certifique-se de que selecciona a fonte correcta do televisor, carregando no botão
SOURCE do telecomando.
●
●
●
●
Ligação RF (cabo/antena)
Impossível receber todos os
canais.
Certifique-se de que o cabo de antena está correctamente ligado.
Tente Plug & Play para adicionar canais disponíveis à lista de canais.
Vá para MENU - Configurar - Plug & Play e aguarde até que todos os canais
disponíveis sejam memorizados.
Verifique se a antena está na posição correcta.
●
●
●
A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, bloco pequeno, pontos,
pixelização
A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem,
especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de
acção.
Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. Não é um problema do
televisor.
●
●
Ligação ao PC
Mensagem ‘Função Não
Disponível’.
Defina a resolução de saída do computador e frequência para que corresponda às
resoluções suportadas pelo televisor.
●
O computador é sempre
apresentado na lista de fontes
mesmo que não esteja ligado.
Isto é normal; o computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que um
computador não esteja ligado.
●
O vídeo está a funcionar
correctamente, mas não há áudio
com ligação HDMI.
● Verifique as definições da saída de áudio no seu computador.
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 29 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:41Português - 30
Problema Solução
Outros
A imagem não é apresentada em
ecrã inteiro.
Serão apresentadas barras pretas em ambos os lados nos canais HD sempre que
forem apresentados conteúdos SD (4:3) actualizados.
Serão apresentadas barras pretas na parte superior e inferior dos filmes que tenham
um formato diferente do seu televisor.
Ajuste a opção de tamanho da imagem no seu dispositivo externo ou televisor para
ecrã inteiro.
●
●
●
O telecomando não funciona. Substitua as pilhas do telecomando com o tipo de polaridade correcto (+ -).
Limpe a janela de transmissão localizada na parte de cima do telecomando.
Tente apontar o telecomando directamente para o televisor a 5-6 pés (1,5 m a 1,8 m)
de distância.
●
●
●
Não é possível controlar o
volume e a energia do televisor
com o telecomando da caixa de
televisão por cabo/set top box.
Programe o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para funcionar
com o televisor. Consulte o manual do utilizador cabo/satélite para identificar o código
do televisor SAMSUNG.
●
Mensagem ‘Função Não
Disponível’.
Verifique a resolução suportada pelo televisor e ajuste a resolução de saída do
dispositivo externo em conformidade. Consulte as definições de resolução neste
manual.
●
Cheiro a plástico proveniente do
televisor.
● Este cheiro é normal e dissipa-se com o passar do tempo.
TV Informações sobre o sinal
não se encontra disponível no
menu Auto-diagnóstico.
Esta função encontra-se apenas disponível para canais digitais com uma ligação de
antena (RF/coaxial).
●
O televisor está inclinado para a
esquerda ou para a direita.
● Remova a base do suporte do televisor e monte novamente.
Não é possível montar a base do
suporte.
Certifique-se de que o televisor se encontra sobre uma superfície plana. Se
não conseguir retirar os parafusos do televisor, utilize uma chave de parafusos
magnetizada.
●
O menu do canal está a cinzento.
(indisponível)
● O menu Canal só está disponível quando a fonte de TV está seleccionada.
Perde as suas definições após
30 minutos ou sempre que o
televisor for desligado.
Se o televisor estiver no modo Demo Loja, as definições de áudio e imagem são
repostas a cada 30 minutos. Altere o modo Demo Loja para o modo Uso Doméstico
no procedimento Plug & Play. Prima o botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo TV,
vá até MENU → Configurar → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
●
Perda intermitente de áudio ou
vídeo.
Verifique as ligações dos cabos e ligue novamente.
Pode ser devido à utilização de cabos excessivamente rígidos ou finos. Certifique-se
de que os cabos são suficientemente flexíveis para uma utilização a longo prazo. Para
montagem na parede, recomenda-se a utilização de cabos com conectores de 90
graus.
●
●
Pode ver pequenas partículas se
olhar de perto para a extremidade
da moldura em volta do ecrã do
televisor.
● Tal faz parte do design do produto e não constitui um defeito.
‘Sinal codificado’ ou ‘Sem sinal/
Sinal fraco’ com CAM CARD (CI).
Verifique se o CAM tem o CI CARD colocado na ranhura da interface comum.
Retire o CAM do televisor e introduza-o na ranhura novamente.
●
●
Quando desligado e após 45
minutos, o televisor liga-se.
É normal, o televisor utiliza a função OTA (Over The Air) para actualizar o firmware
transferido enquanto vê televisão.
●
Problema imagem/som
recorrente.
● Verifique e altere o sinal/fonte.
O LCD TFT utiliza um painel composto por pixels secundários que requerem tecnologia sofisticada para serem reproduzidos.
No entanto, podem existir alguns pixels claros ou escuros no ecrã. Estes pixels não afectam o desempenho do produto.
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 30 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:41Português - 31
Características técnicas
Nome do modelo LE26B450 LE32B450
Tamanho do Ecrã
(Diagonal) 26 " 32 "
Resolução do PC
(Ideal) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz
Som
(Saída) 5W X 2 10W X 2
Dimensões (LxAxP)
Caixa
Com base
670 x 75 x 455 mm
670 x 216 x 495 mm
800 x 85 x 531 mm
800 x 252 x 577 mm
Peso
Com base 8 kg 12 kg
Considerações ambientais
Temperatura de funcionamento
Hu2midade de funcionamento
Temperatura de armazenamento
Humidade de armazenamento
10°C a 40°C (50°F a 104°F)
10% a 80%, sem condensação
-20°C a 45°C (-4°F a 113°F)
5% a 95%, sem condensação
10°C a 40°C (50°F a 104°F)
10% a 80%, sem condensação
-20°C a 45°C (-4°F a 113°F)
5% a 95%, sem condensação
Base rotativa
Esquerda / Direita 0˚ -10˚ ~ 10˚
O design e as características técnicas estão sujeitos a alterações sem aviso prévio.
Trata-se de um aparelho digital de Classe B.
Para informações sobre a fonte de alimentação e o consumo de energia, veja a etiqueta colada ao produto.
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 31 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:41Slike in ilustracije v tem uporabniškem priročniku so samo za referenco: Dejanski izdelek je lahko videti drugačen.
Obliko in tehnične lastnosti lahko spremenimo brez predhodnega obvestila.
Licenca
TruSurround HD, SRS in simbol so blagovne znamke podjetja SRS Labs, Inc. Tehnologija TruSurround HD
je vgrajena pod licenco podjetja SRS Labs, Inc.
Izdelano pod licenco podjetja Dolby Laboratories. Dolby in simbol DD sta blagovni znamki podjetja Dolby
Laboratories.
Obvestilo o digitalni televiziji
1. Funkcije, ki so povezane z digitalnim televizijskim signalom (DVB), so na voljo samo v državah/na območjih, kjer se oddajajo
digitalni prizemni signali (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AVC), ali kjer je mogoč dostop do združljive storitve kabelske televizije DVB-C
(MPEG2 in MPEG4 AAC). Pri lokalnem trgovcu preverite, ali imate dostop do signala DVB-T ali DVB-C.
2. DVB-T je standard DVB evropskega konzorcija za oddajanje digitalne prizemne televizije, DVB-C pa je standard za oddajanje
digitalne televizije prek kabla. V tej specifikaciji pa niso vključene nekatere funkcije, kot so EPG (elektronski programski
vodnik), VOD (video na zahtevo) itd. Torej jih zaenkrat še ni mogoče uporabljati.
3. Čeprav je televizor v skladu z najnovejšima standardoma DVB-T in DVB-C [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti združljivosti s
prihodnjimi sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije in digitalne kabelske televizije.
4. Nekateri ponudniki kabelske televizije morda takšno storitev dodatno zaračunavajo in se boste zato morda morali strinjati z
določbami in pogoji njihovega poslovanja. To je odvisno od države/območja, kjer uporabljate televizor.
5. V nekaterih državah ali regijah nekatere funkcije digitalne televizije morda niso na voljo in digitalna kabelska televizija morda
ne bo delovala pravilno pri nekaterih ponudnikih kabelskih storitev.
6. Za dodatne informacije se obrnite na lokalni center SAMSUNG za pomoč strankam.
Varnostni ukrepi pri prikazu mirujoče slike
Mirujoča slika lahko trajno poškoduje televizijski zaslon
Mirujoče in delno mirujoče slike ne prikazujte na zaslonu LCD dlje kot 2 uri, saj lahko povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu.
Tako zadrževanje slike se imenuje tudi “ožig zaslona”. Da bi se izognili takemu zadrževanju slike, pri prikazovanju mirujoče
slike zmanjšajte stopnjo svetlosti in kontrasta zaslona.
Dolgotrajno gledanje slike z razmerjem stranic 4:3 na televizorju LCD lahko na levi in desni strani ter na
sredini zaslona povzroči sledi okvirja zaradi različnega svetlobnega oddajanja na zaslonu. Predvajanje DVDja ali uporaba igralne konzole ima lahko podobne učinke. Garancija ne vključuje poškodb, ki so nastale na
tak način.
Če je na zaslonu dlje časa prikazana mirujoča računalniška slika ali slika iz video igrice, to lahko povzroči delni prikaz
zakasnele slike. Ta učinek preprečite tako, da pri prikazovanju mirujočih slih zmanjšate svetlost in kontrast.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
❑
❑
❑
●
●
●
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:41Slovenščina - 1
Simbol
N O T
Opomba Gumb na dotik Gumb TOOLS Pritisnite
❑
SPLOŠNE INFORMACIJE
Ogled nadzorne plošče.........................................................2
Dodatna oprema...................................................................2
Ogled plošče s priključki.......................................................3
Daljinski upravljalnik .............................................................5
Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik..............................5
UPRAVLJANJE
Ogled menijev.......................................................................6
Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti............................7
Funkcija Plug & Play.............................................................7
Ogled prikaza .......................................................................8
UPRAVLJANJE KANALOV
Konfiguriranje menija Channel .............................................8
Upravljanje kanalov ...........................................................11
UPRAVLJANJE SLIKE
Konfiguriranje menija Picture..............................................13
Uporaba televizorja kot računalniškega zaslona ................15
Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom ................................16
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
UPRAVLJANJE ZVOKA
Konfiguriranje menija Sound ..............................................17
Izbira zvočnega načina.......................................................18
NASTAVITEV
Konfiguriranje menija Setup ...............................................19
VHOD / PODPORA
Konfiguriranje menija Input.................................................22
Konfiguriranje menija Support ............................................22
PRIPOROČILA ZA UPORABO
Funkcija teleteksta..............................................................24
Namestitev stojala ..............................................................25
Namestitev kompleta za pritrditev na steno........................25
Uporaba ključavnice Kensington proti kraji.........................26
Zaščita prostora za namestitev...........................................26
Pritrditev televizorja na steno .............................................27
Odpravljanje težav..............................................................28
Specifikacije........................................................................31
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
VSEBINA
Slovenščina
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 1 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:42Slovenščina - 2
SPLOŠNE INFORMACIJE
Ogled nadzorne plošče
Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
Gumb lahko uporabite tako, da pritisnete gumbe na stranski plošči.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Za preklapljanje med vsemi razpoložljivimi vhodnimi viri. Ta gumb v meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte kot gumb
ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
2 MENU: Pritisnite za ogled menija na zaslonu s funkcijami televizorja.
3Y: Pritisnite za znižanje ali zvišanje glasnosti.
Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba Y, kot uporabljate gumba ◄ in ► na daljinskem upravljalniku.
4Z: Pritisnite za menjavo kanalov. Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba Z, kot uporabljate
gumba ▼ in ▲ na daljinskem upravljalniku.
5 P (Napajanje): Pritisnite za vklop in izklop televizorja.
6 SENZOR DALJINSKEGA UPRAVLJALNIKA: Daljinski upravljalnik usmerite proti tej točki na televizorju.
7 INDIKATOR NAPAJANJA: Utripa in se izklopi, ko je napajanje vklopljeno, in začne svetiti v stanju pripravljenosti.
8 ZVOČNIKA
Dodatna oprema
(M4 X L16) (M4 X L14)
Daljinski upravljalnik in
bateriji (AAA x 2)
Napajalni
kabel
Pokrov za
podstavek
Vijak za stojalo X 4
Vijak za stojalo X 3
(samo 32-palčni model)
Čistilna krpa
● Uporabnikova navodila ● Garancijska kartica ● Varnostni priročnik
Preverite, ali so televizorju LCD priloženi naslednji predmeti. Če kateri predmet manjka, se obrnite na prodajalca.
Garancijska kartica, varnostni priročnik (ni na voljo na vseh lokacijah)
Barva in oblika predmetov sta odvisni od modela.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 2 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:42Slovenščina - 3
Ogled plošče s priključki
Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
Vsakič ko na televizor priključite zunanjo napravo, mora biti napajanje enote izklopljeno.
Ko priključujete zunanjo napravo, mora biti barva priključka enaka barvi kabla.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Za povezavo z digitalno avdio komponento, kot je sprejemnik domačega kina.
Če so povezane vtičnice HDMI IN, potem vtičnica DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) na televizorju omogoča samo izhod
2-kanalnega zvoka. Za 5.1-kanalni zvok povežite optično vtičnico na predvajalniku DVD/Blu-ray ali kabelskem/satelitskem
sprejemniku neposredno z ojačevalnikom ali domačim kinom in ne s televizorjem.
2 PC IN
Za povezavo z vtičnico za video izhod na računalniku.
3 ANT IN
Za povezavo z antenskim ali kabelskim televizijskim sistemom.
4 PC / DVI AUDIO IN
Za povezavo z vtičnico za avdio izhod na računalniku.
Avdio izhodi DVI za zunanje naprave.
5 AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L]
Priključite avdio kabla RCA na AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] na hrbtni strani televizorja in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike
avdio vhoda na ojačevalniku ali domačem kinu DVD.
¦
N
N
N
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
9
7
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
@ ! 0
[Hrbtna plošča televizorja]
[Stranska plošča
televizorja]
Vhod za
napajanje
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 3 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:43Slovenščina - 4
6 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3
Za povezavo z vtičnico HDMI naprave z izhodom HDMI.
Za povezavo HDMI s HDMI ne potrebujete avdio povezave.
Vtičnico HDMI IN 1(DVI) uporabite za povezavo DVI z zunanjo napravo. Za video povezavo uporabite kabel za
povezavo vrat DVI in HDMI ali adapter DVI-HDMI (povezava vrat DVI in HDMI), za avdio povezavo pa uporabite vtičnico
PC / DVI AUDIO IN.
Vrata lahko uporabite tudi za povezavo z računalnikom.
Kaj je HDMI?
‘Večpredstavnostni vmesnik z visoko razločljivostjo HDMI’ omogoča prenos digitalnih video podatkov z visoko
razločljivostjo in večkanalni digitalni avdio.
Spojnik HDMI/DVI podpira povezavo DVI do razširjene naprave z ustreznim kablom (ni priložen).
HDMI in DVI se razlikujeta v tem, da je naprava HDMI manjša, da ima vgrajeno funkcijo kodiranja HDCP (zaščita pred
kopiranjem za širokopasovno digitalno vsebino) in da podpira večkanalni digitalni avdio.
Če priključite predvajalnike DVD/Blu-ray/kabelske/satelitske sprejemnike, ki podpirajo različice HDMI, ki so starejše od
1.3, televizor mogoče ne bo oddajal zvoka oziroma bodo barve nepravilne. Če ste priključili starejši kabel HDMI in ne
slišite zvoka, kabel HDMI vključite na vtičnico HDMI IN 1(DVI), avdio kabla pa na vtičnici PC / DVI AUDIO IN na hrbtni
strani televizorja. V tem primeru se obrnite na prodajalca predvajalnika DVD/Blu-ray/kabelskega/satelitskega sprejemnika,
da preverite različico HDMI, in zahtevajte nadgradnjo vdelane programske opreme. Pri HDMI kablih, ki niso različice 1.3,
se lahko pojavi moteče migljanje ali pa zaslon ni prikazan.
7 Reža za SPLOŠNI VMESNIK
Če pri nekaterih kanalih ni vstavljena ‘kartica za splošni vmesnik’, se na zaslonu prikaže sporočilo ‘Scrambled Signal’.
V 2–3 minutah se prikažejo informacije o združitvi s telefonsko številko, ID-jem kartice za splošni vmesnik, ID-jem
gostitelja in druge informacije. Če se prikaže sporočilo o napaki, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev.
Ko je konfiguracija informacij o kanalih končana, se prikaže sporočilo ‘Updating Completed’, kar pomeni, da je seznam
kanalov posodobljen.
Kartico za splošni vmesnik dobite pri lokalnem ponudniku kabelske televizije. Kartico za splošni vmesnik odstranite tako,
da jo previdno izvlečete z rokami, saj se pri padcu lahko poškoduje.
Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v smeri, ki je označena na njej.
Kje se nahaja reža COMMON INTERFACE, je odvisno od modela.
CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu.
8 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Priključite kabel RCA na ustrezno zunanjo napravo A/V, kot je videorekorder, predvajalnik DVD ali videokamera.
Priključite avdio kabla RCA na [R-AUDIO-L] na televizorju in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike avdio izhoda na napravi
A/V.
9 KLJUČAVNICA KENSINGTON (odvisno od modela)
Ključavnica Kensington (izbirno) je naprava, ki se uporablja za fizično pritrditev sistema pri uporabi na javnem mestu. Če
želite uporabljati napravo za zaklepanje, se obrnite na trgovca, pri katerem ste kupili televizor.
Kam se namesti ključavnico Kensington, je odvisno od modela.
0 COMPONENT IN
Priključite komponentne video kable (izbirno) na spojnik komponente (PR, PB, Y) na hrbtni strani televizorja in druge konce
na ustrezne spojnike video izhoda komponente na DTV ali predvajalniku DVD.
Če želite priključiti tako sprejemnik kot DTV (ali predvajalnik DVD), priključite sprejemnik na DTV (ali predvajalnik DVD)
ter DTV (ali predvajalnik DVD) priključite na spojnik komponente (PR, PB, Y) na televizorju.
Spojniki PR, PB in Y na komponentnih napravah (DTV ali predvajalnik DVD) imajo včasih oznako Y, B-Y in R-Y ali Y, Cb in
Cr.
Priključite avdio kabla RCA (izbirno) na [R-AUDIO-L] na hrbtni strani televizorja in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike
avdio izhoda na DTV ali predvajalniku DVD.
! EXT (RGB)
Spojnik
Input Izhod
Video Avdio (L / D) RGB Video + avdio (L / D)
EXT O O O Na voljo je samo izhod televizorja ali DTV.
Vhodi oziroma izhodi za zunanje naprave, kot so videorekorder, predvajalnik DVD, video igralna naprava ali predvajalnik
video plošč.
@ SERVICE
Spojnik za nadgradnjo programske opreme.
–
N
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
–
–
–
N
–
–
–
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 4 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:43Slovenščina - 5
Daljinski upravljalnik
Daljinski upravljalnik lahko uporabljate do oddaljenosti približno 7 m od televizorja.
Na delovanje daljinskega upravljalnika lahko vpliva močna svetloba.
Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
1 POWER: Gumb za televizor v
stanju pripravljenosti.
2 ŠTEVILSKI GUMBI : Pritisnite za
menjavo kanala.
3 FAV.CH: Pritisnite za preklop na
priljubljene kanale.
4Y: Pritisnite za znižanje ali
zvišanje glasnosti.
5 SOURCE: Pritisnite za prikaz in
izberite video vire, ki so na voljo.
6 INFO : Pritisnite za prikaz informacij
na televizijskem zaslonu.
7 TOOLS: Za hitro izbiro pogosto
uporabljenih funkcij.
8 CH LIST: Za prikaz seznama
kanalov na zaslonu
9 BARVNI GUMBI: Te gumbe
uporabljajte v menijih Channel list
itd.
! TV : Za neposredno izbiro načina
televizorja.
@ PRE-CH: Za vrnitev na prej gledani
kanal.
# MUTEM: Pritisnite za začasen
izklop zvoka.
$ P
: Pritisnite za menjavo
kanalov.
% MENU: Za prikaz glavnega menija
na zaslonu.
^ GUIDE: Prikaz elektronskega
programskega vodnika (EPG)
& RETURN: Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni
* NAVZGOR▲ / NAVZDOL▼ / LEVO◄
/ DESNO► / ENTERE: Uporabite za
izbiranje elementov menija na zaslonu in
spreminjanje vrednosti menija.
( EXIT: Pritisnite za izhod iz menija.
) SUBT. : Prikaz digitalnih podnapisov
a AD: Izbira zvočnega opisa.
Funkcije teleteksta
5 0: za izbiro načina teleteksta (LIST/
FLOF)
6 5: za prikaz teleteksta
7 4: za izbiro velikosti teleteksta
8 8: za shranjevanje teleteksta
9 Za izbiro teme Fastext
0/: za izmenično izbiro možnosti
Teletext, Double ali Mix.
! :: za izhod iz teleteksta
@ 1 : podstran teleteksta
$ 2 : naslednja stran teleteksta
3 : prejšnja stran teleteksta
% 6 : za kazalo teleteksta
& 9 : za zadržanje strani teleteksta
( 7 : Za preklic teleteksta
Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik
1. Odprite pokrovček na hrbtni strani daljinskega upravljalnika, kot je prikazano na sliki.
2. Vstavite dve bateriji AAA.
Poskrbite, da sta pola ‘+’ in ‘–’ baterije usmerjena skladno s prikazom v predelu za
baterije.
3. Pokrovček namestite nazaj.
Če daljinskega upravljalnika ne boste uporabljali dalj časa, odstranite baterije in jih
shranite na hladnem in suhem mestu.
Če daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje, preverite naslednje:
Ali je televizor vklopljen?
Ali so poli baterij ‘plus’ in ‘minus’ zamenjani?
Ali sta bateriji prazni?
Ali je prišlo do izpada napajanja oziroma je napajalni kabel izključen?
Ali je v bližini posebna fluorescentna luč ali neonska tabla?
¦
N
N
N
¦
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 5 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:43Slovenščina - 6
UPRAVLJANJE
Ogled menijev
Pred uporabo televizorja sledite spodnjim korakom, da se naučite krmariti po meniju in izbrati in
prilagoditi različne funkcije.
1. Pritisnite gumb MENU.
Na zaslonu se prikaže glavni meni. Na levi strani so ikone: Picture, Sound, Channel ,
Setup, Input, Application, Support.
2. Za izbiro ene od ikon pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼.
Za dostop do podmenija ikone pritiskajte gumb ◄ ali ►.
3. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼ za pomik na menijske elemente.
Za odprtje elementov v meniju pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
4. Pritiskajte gumb ▲/▼/◄/►, da spremenite izbrane elemente.
Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni pritisnite gumb RETURN.
5. Pritisnite gumb EXIT za izhod iz menija.
Uporaba gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku
Gumb Delovanje Gumb Delovanje
MENUm Za prikaz glavnega menija na zaslonu.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Za premikanje kazalca in izbiro elementa.
Za izbiro trenutno izbranega elementa.
Za potrditev nastavitve.
RUTURNR Za vrnitev v prejšnji meni.
EXITe Za izhod iz menija na zaslonu.
Primer: nastavitev svetlosti televizorja v slikovnem meniju
Nastavitev svetlosti na 80
1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU.
2. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Picture.
3. S pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Brightness.
4. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
5. Pritiskajte gumb ◄ ali ►, da svetlost nastavite na 80.
6. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Pritisnite gumb EXIT za izhod iz menija.
¦
N
N
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45 ►
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Napredne nastavitve
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return
Brightness 45
U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return
Brightness 80
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 6 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:44Slovenščina -
Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti
Televizor lahko preklopite v stanje pripravljenosti in s tem zmanjšate porabo energije. Stanje pripravljenosti je uporabno, če želite
začasno prekiniti gledanje (na primer med jedjo).
1. Pritisnite gumb POWERP na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Zaslon se izklopi in na televizorju začne svetiti indikator stanja pripravljenosti.
2. Za ponoven vklop televizorja enostavno znova pritisnite gumb POWERP.
Televizorja ne puščajte v stanju pripravljenosti dlje časa (na primer, ko greste na dopust). Priporočamo tudi, da izključite
napajanje in anteno.
Funkcija Plug & Play
Pri prvem vklopu televizorja se samodejno prikažejo osnovne nastavitve.
1. Pritisnite gumb POWER na daljinskem upravljalniku. Prikaže se sporočilo You can set the
menu language..
2. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezen jezik. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
3. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite Store Demo ali Home Use, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Priporočamo, da televizor nastavite na način Home Use, saj to zagotavlja najboljšo
sliko v domačem okolju.
Store Demo je namenjen samo uporabi v trgovinah.
Če je naprava po pomoti nastavljena na način Store Demo in se želite vrniti na Home Use (Standard): Na TV-ju pritisnite
gumb za glasnost. Ko je na zaslonu prikaz glasnosti, 5 sekund držite pritisnjen gumb MENU na televizorju.
4. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezno državo. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
5. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da izberete Air ali Cable, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Air: Air kot vrsta signala antene.
Cable: Cable kot vrsta signala antene.
6. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite kanal, ki ga želite shraniti. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Start.
Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali.
Digital: digitalni kanali.
Analogue: analogni kanali.
Ko vir antene nastavljate na Cable, pridete do koraka, pri katerem lahko nastavite vrednost za iskanje digitalnih kanalov.
Za več informacij si oglejte Channel → Auto Store.
Iskanje kanalov se bo samodejno začelo in končalo.
Če želite shranjevanje kadar koli prekiniti, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Ko so shranjeni vsi kanali, ki so na voljo, se prikaže sporočilo Set the Clock Mode..
. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Auto, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Če izberete Manual, se prikaže Set current date and time.
Če ste prejeli digitalni signal, se bo čas samodejno nastavil. Če se ne, izberite Manual, da nastavite uro. (Oglejte si 19.
stran.)
8. Na voljo je način povezave za najboljšo kakovost visoke ločljivosti. Ko potrdite način, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
9. Prikaže se sporočilo Enjoy your TV!. Ko končate, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Za ponastavitev te funkcije ...
1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Setup, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
2. Znova pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Plug & Play.
3. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0.
Če želite spremeniti številko PIN, uporabite funkcijo Change PIN. (Oglejte si 21. stran.)
Funkcija Plug & Play je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja.
¦
N
N
¦
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu Language : English ►
E Enter
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 7 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:44Slovenščina - 8
Ogled prikaza
Prikaz označuje trenutni kanal in stanje določenih zvočnih in slikovnih nastavitev.
Za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO.
Pritisnite gumb INFO na daljinskem upravljalniku. Na televizorju se bodo prikazali kanal,
vrsta zvoka in stanje določenih slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev.
▲, ▼: Za ogled drugih informacij o kanalu. Če se želite pomakniti na trenutno izbran
kanal, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
◄, ►: Ogledate si lahko informacije o želeni oddaji na trenutnem kanalu.
Znova pritisnite gumb INFO ali počakajte približno 10 sekund, da prikaz samodejno
izgine.
UPRAVLJANJE KANALOV
Konfiguriranje menija Channel
Country
Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
Analogue Channel
Spremenite lahko državo analognih kanalov.
Digital Channel
Spremenite lahko državo digitalnih kanalov.
Auto Store
Poiščete lahko razpoložljive frekvenčne razpone (razpoložljivost je odvisna od države).
Samodejno dodeljene številke programov mogoče ne ustrezajo dejanskim ali želenim številkam programov.
Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a.
Air / Cable
Vir antene za shranjevanje
Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali.
Digital: digitalni kanali.
Analogue: analogni kanali.
Če izberete ‘Cable → Digital & Analogue’ ali ‘Cable → Digital’
Vnesite vrednost za iskanje kabelskih kanalov.
Search Mode → Full / Network / Quick
Quick
Network ID: za prikaz identifikacijske kode omrežja.
Frequency: za prikaz frekvence kanala. (Razlikuje se od države do države.)
Modulation: za prikaz vrednosti modulacije, ki so na voljo.
Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
–
–
–
–
Poišče vse kanale aktivnih televizijskih postaj in jih shrani v pomnilnik televizorja.
Če želite ustaviti izvajanje funkcije Auto Store, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Prikaže se sporočilo Stop Auto Store?.
S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Yes, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
¦
O
●
●
N
¦
❑
N
❑
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Country ►
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Now & Next Guide
Full Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ' INFO
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 8 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:45Slovenščina - 9
Manual Store
Ročno poišče kanal in ga shrani v pomnilnik televizorja.
Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a.
Digital Channel
Ročno shranjevanje digitalnih kanalov.
Digital Channel je na voljo samo v načinu DTV.
Channel: Z gumboma ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko kanala.
Frequency: s številskimi gumbi nastavite frekvenco.
Bandwidth: Z gumboma ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite pasovno širino.
Ko se iskanje dokonča, so posodobljeni kanali v seznamu kanalov.
Analogue Channel
Ročno shranjevanje analognega kanala.
Programme (številka programa, ki naj bo dodeljena kanalu): z gumbom ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko
programa.
Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost barvnega sistema.
Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost zvočnega sistema.
Channel (če poznate številko kanala za shranjevanje): S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite C (običajna antena) ali
S (kabelski kanal). Pritisnite gumb ► in nato s pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼ ali številskih gumbov (0~9) izberite želeno številko.
Številko kanala lahko izberete tudi neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov (0~9).
Če ni zvoka ali le-ta ni normalen, znova izberite zahtevani zvočni standard.
Search (če ne poznate številk kanalov): za začetek iskanja pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Kanalnik pregleda frekvenčni razpon,
dokler se na zaslonu ne prikaže prvi kanal ali izbrani kanal.
Store (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa): Nastavite na OK s pritiskanjem gumba ENTERE.
Kanalni način
P (programski način): Po končani naravnavi so oddajnim postajam na vašem območju dodeljene številke položajev od
P00 do P99. Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom številke položaja v tem načinu.
C (način zunanje antene): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom dodeljene številke za posamezno oddajno postajo v tem načinu.
S (način kabelskega kanala): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom dodeljene številke za vsak kabelski kanal v tem načinu.
Cable Search Option (odvisno od države)
Za nastavitev dodatnih možnosti iskanja za kabelsko omrežje, kot sta frekvenca in hitrost simbolov.
Frequency (Start ~ Stop): za prikaz frekvence kanala.
Modulation: za prikaz vrednosti modulacije, ki so na voljo.
Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
Informacije EPG (elektronski programski vodnik) posredujejo izdajatelji televizijskega programa. Informacije o programu so lahko
zastarele ali jih ni, kar je posledica oddajanja informacij določene televizijske postaje. Zaslon se bo dinamično posodobil takoj, ko
bodo na voljo nove informacije.
Za podrobne postopke uporabe funkcij Now & Next Guide in Full Guide si oglejte opise na 10. strani.
Meni vodnika lahko prikažete tudi enostavno s pritiskom gumba GUIDE. (Za konfiguriranje funkcije Default Guide si oglejte
opise.)
Now & Next Guide
Za šest kanalov, ki so navedeni v levem stolpcu, prikaže informacije o trenutnem in naslednjem programu.
Full Guide
Informacije o programu so prikazane za eno uro. Prikazane so informacije o dveh urah programa, po katerih se lahko pomikate
naprej ali nazaj glede na čas.
❑
N
N
N
●
●
●
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
–
–
–
❑
●
●
●
❑
N
O
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 9 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:45Slovenščina - 10
Default Guide → Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
Odločite se lahko, ali želite prikazati Now & Next Guide ali Full Guide, ko pritisnete gumb GUIDE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Channel List
Za podrobne postopke uporabe možnosti Channel List si oglejte navodila ‘Upravljanje kanalov’.
Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba CH LIST na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Channel Mode
Ko pritisnete gumb P >/<, preklopite med kanali, ki so na seznamu izbranih kanalov.
Added Ch.
preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu shranjenih kanalov.
Favourite Ch.
preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu priljubljenih kanalov.
Fine Tune
Če je sprejem jasen, fina naravnava kanala ni potrebna, ker se samodejno izvede med iskanjem in shranjevanjem. Če je signal
šibak ali popačen, boste kanal mogoče morali ročno fino naravnati.
Shranjeni fino naravnani kanali so označeni z zvezdico ‘*’ na desni strani številke kanala na traku s kanalom.
Če želite ponastaviti fino naravnavo, izberite Reset s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Fino naravnavo je mogoče uporabiti samo pri analognih TV-kanalih.
Uporaba Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
Za ... Storite naslednje ...
Gledanje programa s seznama EPG S pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼, ◄, ► izberite program.
Izhod iz vodnika Pritisnite modri gumb
Če je izbran naslednji program, je dodan na razpored s prikazano ikono ure. Če znova pritisnete gumb ENTERE, s pritiskanjem
gumbov ◄, ► izberite Cancel Schedules. Določanje razporeda se prekliče in ikona ure izgine.
Ogled informacij o programu S pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼, ◄, ► izberite želeni program.
Ko je označen želeni program, pritisnite gumb INFO.
Naslov programa je na zgornjem osrednjem delu zaslona.
Za podrobne informacije kliknite gumb INFO. Podrobne informacije vključujejo številko kanala, čas predvajanja, informacije o
statusni vrstici, starševskem nadzoru, kakovosti videa (HD/SD), zvočnih načinih, podnaslovih ali teletekstu, jeziku podnaslovov ali
teleteksta ter kratek povzetek označenega programa. “...” se prikaže, če je povzetek dolg.
Preklapljanje med možnostima Now & Next Guide
in Full Guide
Pritiskajte rdeči gumb.
V možnosti Full Guide
Hiter pomik nazaj (24 ur).
Hiter pomik naprej (24 ur).
Pritiskajte zeleni gumb.
Pritiskajte rumeni gumb.
❑
❑
O
❑
❑
N
N
N
Now & Next Guide
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Now Next
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Full Guide ■ Exit
Full Guide
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITV Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Now / Next ■ +24 Hours ■ Exit
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 10 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:45Slovenščina - 11
Upravljanje kanalov
S tem menijem lahko dodate/izbrišete ali nastavite priljubljene kanale in uporabljate programski
vodnik za digitalne prenose.
All Channels
Prikaže vse trenutno razpoložljive kanale.
Added Channels
Prikaz vseh dodanih kanalov.
Favourites
Prikaz vseh priljubljenih kanalov.
Če želite izbrati priljubljene kanale, ki ste jih nastavili, pritisnite gumb FAV.CH na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Programmed
Prikaz trenutno rezerviranih oddaj.
Izberite kanal na zaslonu All Channels, Added Channels ali Favourites s pritiskanjem gumba ▲/▼ in pritiskom gumba
ENTERE. Nato lahko gledate izbrani kanal.
Uporaba barvnih gumbov skupaj z možnostjo Channel List
Rdeči (Channel Type): Preklapljanje med možnostmi TV, Radio, Data / Other in All.
Zeleni (Zoom): Povečanje ali pomanjšanje številke kanala.
Rumeni (Select): Izbira več seznamov kanalov. Istočasno lahko dodate/izbrišete več kanalov, jih dodate priljubljenim/
izbrišete izmed priljubljenih ali jih zaklenete/odklenete. Če želite istočasno nastaviti vse izbrane kanale, izberite želene
kanale in pritisnite rumeni gumb. Levo od izbranih kanalov se prikaže znak c.
TOOLS (Tools): Za prikaz menija Delete (ali Add), Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite), Lock (ali Unlock),
Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Sort, Edit Channel Number, Select All (ali Deselect All), Auto Store. (Meniji
možnosti so lahko drugačni, odvisno od okoliščin.)
Ikone stanja kanala
A : analogni kanal.
c: kanal, izbran s pritiskom rumenega gumba.
* : kanal, ki je nastavljen kot priljubljeni.
( : oddaja, ki se trenutno predvaja.
\ : zaklenjen kanal.
) : rezervirana oddaja.
Meni z možnostmi seznama kanalov (v možnosti All Channels/Added Channels/Favourites)
Če želite uporabljati meni z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
Elementi menija z možnostmi se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od stanja kanala.
Add/Delete
Lahko izbrišete ali dodate kanal, da prikažete želene kanale.
Vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju All Channels.
Če je kanal obarvan sivo, to pomeni, da je bil izbrisan.
Meni Add se prikaže samo pri izbrisanih kanalih.
Na enak način lahko izbrišete kanal v meniju Added Channels ali Favourite.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
Kanale, ki jih pogosto gledate, lahko nastavite kot priljubljene.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Nastavite lahko tudi dodajanje (ali
brisanje izmed) priljubljenih, tako, da izberete Tools → Add to Favourite (ali Delete from
Favourite).
Prikazan bo simbol ‘*’ in kanal bo nastavljen kot priljubljeni.
Vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju Favourite.
¦
O
N
N
–
–
–
–
N
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
N
N
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
▼
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 11 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:45Slovenščina - 12
Lock/Unlock
Kanal lahko zaklenete, tako da ga ni mogoče izbrati in gledati. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, če je možnost Child Lock nastavljena
na On. (Oglejte si 21. stran.)
Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
Prikazan bo simbol ‘\’ in kanal bo zaklenjen.
Timer Viewing
Če rezervirate oddajo, ki si jo želite ogledati, se kanal na seznamu kanalov samodejno preklopi v rezerviranega, tudi če gledate
drug kanal. Če želite rezervirati oddajo, najprej nastavite trenutni čas. (Oglejte si 19. stran.)
Rezervirati je mogoče samo shranjene kanale.
Kanal, dan, mesec, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
Rezerviranje programa bo prikazano v meniju Programmed.
Programski vodnik za digitalne kanale in rezerviranje oddaj
Če je izbran digitalni kanal in pritisnete gumb ►, se prikaže programski vodnik za ta kanal. Oddajo lahko rezervirate po zgoraj
opisanih postopkih.
Edit Channel Name (samo pri analognih kanalih)
Kanale lahko označite, tako da se vsakič, ko izberete določen kanal, prikaže njegovo ime.
Digitalnim kanalom so imena samodejno dodeljena in jih ni mogoče določiti.
Edit Channel Number (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Urejate lahko tudi številke kanalov, in sicer s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Sort (samo pri analognih kanalih)
Ta postopek omogoča spreminjanje številk programov shranjenih kanalov. To postopek boste mogoče morali izvesti po uporabi
funkcije samodejnega shranjevanja.
Select All/Deselect All
Select All: izberete lahko vse kanale na seznamu kanalov.
Deselect All: prekličete lahko izbor vseh izbranih kanalov.
Možnost Deselect All lahko izberete samo, če je kateri kanal izbran.
Auto Store
Za podrobnosti o nastavitvah možnosti si oglejte 8. stran.
Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a.
Meni z možnostmi seznama kanalov (v možnosti Programmed)
Rezervacijo si lahko ogledate, jo spremenite ali izbrišete.
Če želite uporabljati meni z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
Change Info
Za spremembo rezervacije oddaje.
Cancel Schedules
Za preklic rezervacije oddaje.
Information
Za ogled rezervacije oddaje. (Lahko tudi spremenite podatke o rezervaciji.)
Select All
Za izbiro vseh rezerviranih oddaj.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
N
N
N
N
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
Programmed All ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools E Information
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 12 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:46Slovenščina - 13
UPRAVLJANJE SLIKE
Konfiguriranje menija Picture
Mode
Izberete lahko vrsto slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Slikovni način lahko nastavite tudi z
izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Mode.
Dynamic
Za izbiro slike za visoko ločljivost v svetlem prostoru.
Standard
Za izbiro slike za optimalen prikaz v normalnem okolju.
Movie
Za izbiro slike za gledanje filmov v temnem prostoru.
Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Televizor ima več možnosti nastavitev za nadzor kakovosti slike.
Backlight: za prilagoditev svetlosti osvetlitve LCD-ja.
Contrast: za prilagoditev ravni kontrasta slike.
Brightness: za prilagoditev ravni svetlosti slike.
Sharpness: za prilagoditev nastavitve robov slike.
Colour: za prilagoditev nasičenosti barv slike.
Tint (G/R): za prilagoditev barvnega odtenka slike.
Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite najprej prilagoditi. Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo za vse slikovne načine.
Če spremenite možnosti Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour ali Tint (G/R), se prikaz na zaslonu ustrezno
prilagodi.
V analognih načinih sistema PAL TV, Ext., AV funkcije Tint (G/R) ni mogoče uporabljati.
V načinu računalnika je mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Backlight, Contrast in Brightness.
Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja.
Količino porabljene energije lahko opazno zmanjšate, če znižate raven svetlosti slike, s čimer boste tudi znižali celotne tekoče
stroške.
Napredne nastavitve
Novi Samsungov televizor omogoča še natančnejše slikovne nastavitve kot prejšnji modeli. Če želite prilagoditi podrobne slikovne
nastavitve, si oglejte spodnje besedilo.
Advanced Settings je na voljo v načinu Standard ali Movie.
V načinu računalnika je med elementi Advanced Settings mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Gamma in White Balance.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
Na zaslonu lahko izberete raven črne in tako prilagodite globino zaslona.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
Prilagodite lahko kontrast zaslona, tako da je optimalen.
Gamma
Nastavite lahko intenzivnost primarnih barv (rdeče, zelene, modre).
Colour Space
Barvni prostor je barvna matrika, ki je sestavljena iz rdeče, zelene in modre barve. Izberite najljubši barvni prostor za prikaz
najnaravnejših barv.
Native: nastavitev naravnega barvnega prostora omogoča globoke in bogate barvne tone.
Auto: samodejni barvni prostor se samodejno prilagodi na najnaravnejši barvni ton glede na programske vire.
¦
❑
T
❑
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
●
●
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Picture
Colour : 50
Tint (G / R) : G50 / R50
Advanced Settings ►
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 13 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:46Slovenščina - 14
White Balance
Prilagodite lahko barvno temperaturo za naravnejše barve slike.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Prilagodite lahko barvno ‘temperaturo’ na svetlih območjih, tako,
da spremenite vrednosti R, G in B. Priporočljivo samo za napredne uporabnike.
Reset: predhodno prilagojena izravnava belin bo ponastavljena na tovarniške vrednosti.
Flesh Tone
Poudarite lahko rožnati ton slike.
Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon.
Edge Enhancement → Off / On
Poudarite lahko robove predmetov na sliki.
Picture Options
V načinu računalnika je med elementi Picture Options mogoče spreminjati samo Colour Tone in Size .
Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2
Izberete lahko barvni ton, ki je najudobnejši za vaše oči.
Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja.
Warm1 ali Warm2 je aktivna samo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie.
Size
Izberete lahko velikost slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Velikost lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Size.
Auto Wide: velikost slike se samodejno prilagodi razmerju stranic 16:9.
16:9: velikost slike prilagodi razmerju stranic 16:9, ki je primerno za DVD-je in širokozaslonsko oddajanje.
Wide Zoom: povečava slike nad 4:3.
Zoom: povečava slike, široke 16:9, da jo prilagodi velikosti zaslona (v navpični smeri).
4:3: privzeta nastavitev za video film in običajno oddajanje.
Screen Fit: to funkcijo uporabite za ogled celotne slike brez prirezovanja pri vhodnem signalu HDMI (720p/1080i) ali
Component (1080i).
Možnosti velikosti slike se lahko razlikujejo glede na vhodni vir.
Razpoložljivi elementi se lahko razlikujejo glede na izbrani način.
V načinu računalnika je mogoče prilagajati samo načina 16:9 in 4:3.
Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja.
Če je na televizorju več kot dve uri prikazana negibna slika, se lahko pojavi začasno zadržanje slike.
Wide Zoom: S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼
pomaknite sliko navzgor/navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Zoom: S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite
sliko navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Size, nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da povečate ali zmanjšate velikost slike v navpični smeri. Nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
Po izbiri možnosti Screen Fit v načinu HDMI (1080i) ali Component (1080i): s pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Position.
Z gumbom ▲, ▼, ◄ ali ► pomaknite sliko.
Reset: S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Reset, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Nastavitev lahko inicializirate.
Če funkcijo Screen Fit uporabite pri vhodu HDMI 720p, bo odrezana po 1 vrstica zgoraj, spodaj, levo in desno, kot pri funkciji
zmanjšanja prevelike slike.
Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
Ko pri širokozaslonskem televizorju 16:9 velikost slike nastavite na Auto Wide, lahko določite velikost za sliko 4:3 WSS ali pa ne
določite teh nastavitev. V posameznih evropskih državah so zahtevane različne velikosti slike, zato to funkcijo izbere uporabnik.
16:9: nastavitev slike na široki način 16:9.
Wide Zoom: povečava slike nad 4:3.
Zoom: navpična povečava slike na zaslonu.
4:3: nastavitev slike na običajni način 4:3.
Ta funkcija je na voljo v načinu Auto Wide.
Funkcija ni na voljo v načinih PC, Component in HDMI.
●
●
N
❑
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
●
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 14 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:46Slovenščina - 15
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
Če je sprejeti televizijski signal šibak, lahko aktivirate funkcijo digitalnega odpravljanja šumov za zmanjšanje statičnih motenj in
odsevov na zaslonu.
Če je signal šibak, izberite eno od ostalih možnosti, tako da je slika prikazana z največjo kakovostjo.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
Neposredno lahko na izberete raven črne na zaslonu, da prilagodite globino zaslona.
Funkcija je aktivna samo, kadar je zunanji vhod povezan s HDMI (signali RGB).
Film Mode → Off / Auto
Televizor lahko nastavite tako, da samodejno zazna in obdela filmske signale iz vseh virov in prilagodi sliko na optimalno kakovost.
Film Mode je podprta v načinih TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i/1080i) in HDMI (480i/1080i).
Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel
Ponastavitev vseh slikovnih nastavitev na privzete vrednosti.
Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite ponastaviti. Ponastavitev se izvede za vse slikovne načine.
Reset Picture Mode: trenutne slikovne vrednosti se vrnejo na privzete nastavitve.
N
N
N
❑
N
●
Uporaba televizorja kot računalniškega zaslona
Nastavitev programske opreme računalnika (v okolju Windows XP)
Spodaj so prikazane nastavitve zaslona za tipični računalnik v OS Windows. Dejanski prikazi na računalniškem zaslonu bodo
najbrž drugačni, odvisno od različice operacijskega sistema Windows in grafične kartice. Četudi se dejanski prikazi razlikujejo,
v večini primerov veljajo iste osnovne nastavitvene informacije. (Sicer se obrnite na proizvajalca računalnika ali Samsungovega
prodajalca.)
1. Najprej kliknite možnost ‘Nadzorna plošča’ v meniju Start v OS Windows.
2. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Videz in teme’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona.
3. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Zaslon’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona.
4. Pomaknite se na zavihek ‘Nastavitve’ v pogovornem oknu zaslona.
Pravilna nastavitev velikosti (ločljivost): Optimalno – 1360 x 768 slikovnih pik
Če je v pogovornem oknu nastavitev zaslona na voljo možnost za navpično frekvenco, je njena ustrezna vrednost ‘60’ ali
‘60 Hz’. Sicer samo kliknite ‘V redu’ in zaprite pogovorno okno.
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 15 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:46Slovenščina - 16
Načini zaslona
Položaj in velikost zaslona se razlikujeta glede na vrsto računalniškega monitorja in njegovo ločljivost. Priporočene so ločljivosti v
tabeli.
Vhod D-Sub in HDMI/DVI
Mode Ločljivost
Vodoravna frekvenca
(kHz)
Navpična frekvenca
(Hz)
Točkovna ura (MHz)
Polariteta
sinhr. (V/N)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI IN 1(DVI).
Način prepletanja ni podprt.
Če izberete nestandardno obliko video zapisa, televizor morda ne bo deloval pravilno.
Podprta sta načina za ločeno in kompozitno. SOG ni podrt.
Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom
Prednastavitev: Pritisnite gumb SOURCE, da izberete način računalnika.
Auto Adjustment
Samodejna prilagoditev omogoča računalniškemu zaslonu, da se samodejno prilagodi
vhodnemu video signalu računalnika. Vrednosti za fino, grobo in položaj se samodejno
prilagodijo.
Ta funkcija ne deluje v načinu DVI-HDMI.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Samodejno prilagoditev lahko nastavite
tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Auto Adjustment.
Screen
Coarse/Fine
Namen prilagajanja kakovosti slike je odstraniti ali zmanjšati šum slike. Če šum ni odstranjen s fino naravnavo, čim bolje nastavite
frekvenco (Coarse) in znova fino naravnajte. Po zmanjšanju šumov znova nastavite sliko tako, da bo poravnana na sredino
zaslona.
PC Position
nastavite položaj računalniškega zaslona, če se ta ne prilega televizijskemu zaslonu. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ prilagodite
navpični položaj. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► prilagodite vodoravni položaj.
Image Reset
vse slikovne nastavitve lahko zamenjate s tovarniškimi vrednostmi.
N
N
N
N
¦
N
❑
N
T
❑
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Auto Adjustment ►
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 16 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:46Slovenščina - 1
UPRAVLJANJE ZVOKA
Konfiguriranje menija Sound
Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom
Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Zvočni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro
možnosti Tools → Sound Mode.
Standard
Za izbiro običajnega zvočnega načina.
Music
Glasba je bolj poudarjena kot glasovi.
Movie
Za najboljši zvok za filme.
Clear Voice
Glas je bolj poudarjen kot drugi zvoki.
Custom
Za priklic zvočnih nastavitev po meri.
Equalizer
Zvočne nastavitve lahko prilagodite, kot vam najbolj ustreza.
Mode
Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza.
Balance
Nadzor ravnovesja med desnim in levim zvočnikom.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (nastavitev pasovne širine)
Nastavitev ravni frekvenc različnih pasovnih širin.
Reset
Ponastavitev nastavitev izenačevalnika na privzete vrednosti.
SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SRS TruSurround HD je patentirana tehnologija SRS za predvajanje 5.1-večkanalne vsebine preko dveh zvočnikov. TruSurround
proizvaja odličen, navidezni prostorski na katerem koli sistemu z dvema zvočnikoma, tudi prek notranjih zvočnikov televizorja.
Tehnologija je popolnoma združljiva z vsemi večkanalnimi oblikami zapisa.
Audio Language (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Spremenite lahko privzeto vrednost za jezik avdia. Prikaže informacije o jeziku za dohodni tok.
Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani.
To funkcijo je mogoče izbrati pri gledanju digitalnega kanala.
Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Pri istočasnem oddajanju zvoka iz glavnega zvočnika in avdio sprejemnika lahko pride do odmeva zaradi različne hitrosti
odkodiranja za glavni zvočnik in avdio sprejemnik. V tem primeru uporabite funkcijo zvočnika televizorja.
Možnost Audio Format je prikazana v skladu z oddajanim signalom.
To funkcijo je mogoče izbrati pri gledanju digitalnega kanala.
¦
❑
T
❑
❑
❑
N
N
❑
N
N
Mode : Custom ►
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Audio Language : - - -
Audio Format : - - -
Audio Description
Auto Volume : Off
Sound
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 17 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:47Slovenščina - 18
Audio Description (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
To je dodatna funkcija za zvok, ki omogoča dodatne zvočne posnetke za slabovidne. Ta funkcija je namenjena zvočnemu toku
za AD (Audio Description), če jo oddajnik pošlje skupaj z glavnim zvokom. Uporabniki lahko zvočni opis vklopijo in izklopijo ter
upravljajo glasnost.
S pritiskom gumba AD na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite Off ali On.
Audio Description → Off / On
Vklop ali izklop funkcije zvočnega opisa.
Volume
Prilagodite lahko glasnost zvočnega opisa.
Volume je aktivna, če je možnost Audio Description nastavljena na On.
Auto Volume → Off / On
Stanje signalov posameznih postaj se razlikuje, zato ni enostavno prilagajati glasnosti ob vsaki zamenjavi kanala. Ta funkcija
omogoča samodejno prilagajanje glasnosti želenega kanala z znižanjem glasnosti v primeru visokega modulacijskega signala ali
zvišanjem glasnosti v primeru nizkega modulacijskega signala.
Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker
Če želite slišati zvok iz ločenih zvočnikov, izklopite notranji ojačevalnik.
Gumba za glasnost in gumb MUTE ne delujejo, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker.
Če izberete External Speaker v meniju Speaker Select, bodo zvočne nastavitve omejene.
Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel
Zvočne nastavitve lahko obnovite na tovarniške vrednosti.
Izbira zvočnega načina
Način zvoka lahko nastavite v meniju Tools. Če nastavite na Dual l ll, se na zaslonu prikaže trenutni zvočni način.
Vrsta zvoka Dual 1/2 Privzeto
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Samodejen preklop
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Samodejen preklop
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
Če je stereo signal šibak in pride do samodejnega preklopa, preklopite na Mono.
Ta funkcija je aktivirana samo v stereo zvočnem signalu. V mono zvočnem signalu je deaktivirana.
Ta funkcija je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja.
❑
O
N
❑
❑
N
N
❑
¦
N
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 18 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:47Slovenščina - 19
NASTAVITEV
Konfiguriranje menija Setup
Menu Language
Nastavite lahko jezik menija.
Time
Clock
Uro morate nastaviti, da lahko uporabljate različne funkcije časovnika televizorja.
Ob vsakem pritisku gumba INFO se bo prikazal trenutni čas.
Če izključite napajalni kabel, morate uro znova nastaviti.
Clock Mode
Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno ali samodejno.
Auto: samodejna nastavitev trenutnega časa z uporabo digitalno oddajanega časa.
Manual: ročna nastavitev trenutnega časa.
Samodejni čas morda ne bo pravilen, odvisno od oddajne postaje in signala. V tem primeru čas nastavite ročno.
Da je mogoča samodejna nastavitev časa, mora biti povezana antena ali kabel.
Clock Set
Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno.
Ta element nastavite, če ste možnost Clock Mode nastavili na Manual.
Dan, mesec, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
Izklopni časovnik samodejno izklopi televizor po prednastavljenem času (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 in 180 minut).
Ko časovnik doseže 0, se televizor samodejno preklopi v stanje pripravljenosti.
Če želite preklicati delovanje funkcije Sleep Timer, izberite Off.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Izklopni časovnik lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools →
Sleep Timer.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Opravite lahko tri različne nastavitve vklopa/izklopa časovnika. Najprej morate nastaviti uro.
On Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/deaktiviranje. (Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo, nastavite na
možnost Activate.)
Off Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/deaktiviranje. (Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo, nastavite na
možnost Activate.)
Volume: Izberite želeno raven glasnosti.
Antenna: izberite Air ali Cable.
Channel: za izbiro želenega kanala.
Repeat: Izberite Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun ali Manual.
Če je izbrana možnost Manual, s pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite želeni dan v tednu. Za želeni dan pritisnite gumb
ENTERE in prikazala se bo oznaka c.
Uro, minute in kanal lahko nastavite s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Samodejni izklop
Če vklopite časovnik, se bo televizor izklopil, če tri ure potem, ko je časovnik vklopil televizor, ni bila pritisnjena nobena
kontrola. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, ko je vklopljen časovnik, in preprečuje pregrevanje, do katerega lahko pride, če je
televizor predolgo vklopljen.
¦
❑
❑
N
N
●
–
–
N
N
●
N
N
N
N
T
●
●
●
●
●
●
N
N
N
Plug & Play
Menu Language : English ►
Time
Broadcast
Security
General
Setup
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 19 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:47Slovenščina - 20
Broadcast
Subtitle
Aktivirate in deaktivirate lahko podnapise. S tem menijem nastavite način podnapisov. Menijska možnost Normal predstavlja
osnovne podnapise, Hard of hearing pa podnapise za osebe z okvaro sluha.
Subtitle → Off / On
vklop ali izklop podnapisov.
Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing
nastavitev načina podnapisov.
Subtitle Language
nastavitev jezika podnapisov.
Če program, ki ga gledate, ne podpira funkcije Hard of hearing, se samodejno vklopi način Normal, čeprav je izbran način
Hard of hearing.
Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.
Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba SUBT. na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Digital Text → Disable / Enable (samo v VB)
Ta funkcija je omogočena, če je program oddajan z digitalnim besedilom.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Mednarodni standard za sisteme za kodiranje podatkov, ki se uporablja za večpredstavnost in hiperpredstavnost. Je na višjem
nivoju kot sistem MPEG in vključuje hiperpredstavnost s povezanimi podatki, kot so slike, znakovne storitve, animacije, grafike
in video datoteke ter večpredstavnostne podatke. MHEG je tehnologija, ki omogoča sodelovanje uporabnika med delovanjem,
in se uporablja na različnih področjih, kot so VOD (video na zahtevo), ITV (interaktivna TV), EC (elektronsko poslovanje),
teleizobraževanje, telekonference, digitalne knjižnice in omrežne igre.
Teletext Language
Nastavite lahko jezik teleteksta, in sicer tako, da izberete vrsto jezika.
Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.
Preference
Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language
S to funkcijo lahko uporabnik izbere enega od jezikov. Tukaj izbrani jezik je privzeti jezik, ko uporabnik izbere kanal.
Če spremenite nastavitev jezika, se možnosti menija Language Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language
samodejno spremenijo v izbrani jezik.
Možnosti menija Language Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language prikazujejo seznam jezikov, ki jih podpira
trenutni kanal; označen je izbor. Če spremenite to nastavitev jezika, nov izbor velja samo za trenutni kanal. S spremembo
nastavitve se ne spremenijo nastavitve menija Preference: Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language in Primary
Teletext Language.
Common Interface
CI Menu
Uporabniku omogoča, da lahko izbira iz menija, ki ga omogoča CAM. Meni splošnega vmesnika izberite glede na računalniško
kartico.
Application Info.
Prikaže informacije o CAM-u, ki je vstavljen v režo za splošni vmesnik.
Informacije o aplikaciji se nanašajo na kartico splošnega vmesnika. CAM lahko namestite kadar koli, ne glede na to, ali je
televizor VKLOPLJEN ali IZKLOPLJEN.
1. Modul CI CAM kupite pri najbližjem prodajalcu ali po telefonu.
2. Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v CAM v smeri puščici, da se zaskoči na mestu.
3. CAM z nameščeno kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v režo za splošni vmesnik.
(CAM vstavite v smeri puščice do konca, tako da je vzporeden z režo.)
4. Preverite, ali na kanalu z motenim signalom vidite sliko.
CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu.
❑
●
●
●
N
N
O
N
N
●
●
●
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 20 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:47Slovenščina - 21
Security
Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
Child Lock → Off / On
Ta funkcija preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa nepooblaščenim uporabnikom (na primer otrokom) tako, da prepreči
predvajanje slike in zvoka.
Zaklenete lahko nekatere kanale na seznamu kanalov. (Oglejte si 12 stran.)
Child Lock je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja.
Parental Lock
Ta funkcija nepooblaščenim uporabnikom, na primer otrokom, preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa, in sicer s 4- mestno
kodo PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka), ki jo določi uporabnik.
Element Parental Lock se razlikuje od države do države.
Ko je vklopljena funkcija starševskega nadzora Parental Lock, je prikazan znak‘\’.
Allow All: pritisnite, da odklenete vse oznake televizorja.
Block All: pritisnite, da zaklenete vse oznake televizorja.
Change PIN
Spremenite lahko osebno identifikacijsko številko, ki je potrebna za nastavitev televizorja.
Če PIN pozabite, pritisnite gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku v naslednjem zaporedju, s čimer PIN ponastavite na 0-0-0-0:
POWER (Izklop) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Vklop).
General
Game Mode → Off / On
Pri povezavi z igralno konzolo, kot je PlayStation™ ali Xbox™, lahko uživate v bolj realistični izkušnji tako, da izberete meni iger.
Če želite izključiti igralno konzolo in priključiti drugo zunanjo napravo, v nastavitvenem meniju prekličite način iger.
Če meni televizorja prikažete v načinu Game Mode, se zaslon rahlo trese.
Game Mode ni na voljo v običajnem načinu TV in PC.
Če je možnost Game Mode vklopljena:
slikovni način se samodejno spremeni v Standard in uporabniki ne morejo spremeniti načina.
zvočni način se samodejno spremeni v Custom in uporabniki ne morejo spremeniti načina. Z izenačevalnikom prilagodite
zvok.
Aktivira se funkcija ponastavitve zvoka. Če po nastavitvi izenačevalnika izberete funkcijo ponastavitve, se nastavitve
izenečevalnika ponastavijo na tovarniške vrednosti.
Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto
Ta funkcija prilagodi svetlost televizorja, tako da se zmanjša poraba energije. Če televizor gledate ponoči, nastavite možnost
načina Energy Saving na High, da zmanjšate utrujanje oči in tudi porabo energije.
Če izberete Picture Off, se izklopi slika in predvaja se samo zvok. Za izklop funkcije Picture Off pritisnite kateri koli gumb.
V meniju Tools funkcija Picture Off ni podprta.
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Možnost varčevanja energije lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools →
Energy Saving.
Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High
Nastavite lahko, da se ob vklopu ali izklopu televizorja predvaja melodija.
Melodija se ne predvaja
Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb MUTE.
Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb za glasnost (–).
Ko se televizor izklopi s funkcijo izklopnega časovnika.
❑
N
N
N
N
N
N
❑
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
T
N
–
–
–
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 21 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:47Slovenščina - 22
VHOD / PODPORA
Konfiguriranje menija Input
Source List
Za izbiro televizorja ali drugih zunanjih vhodnih virov, ki so povezani s televizorjem, na primer
predvajalnikov DVD/Blu-ray/satelitskih sprejemnikov. Uporabite za izbiro želenega vhodnega
vira.
Če si želite ogledati zunanji signalni vir, pritisnite gumb SOURCE na daljinskem
upravljalniku. Način TV lahko izberete s pritiskom gumba TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI3
Izberete lahko samo zunanje naprave, ki so povezane s televizorjem. Na seznamu Source
List se bodo povezani vhodi označili in pomaknili na vrh. Nepovezani vhodi pa se bodo
pomaknili na dno.
Možnosti Ext. in PC sta vedno aktivirani.
TOOLS (Tools): prikaz menijev Edit Name in Information.
Edit Name
Poimenujte napravo, ki je priključena na vhodne vtičnice, da boste lažje izbrali vhodne vire.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray
/ HD DVD / DMA
Po priklopu kabla HDMI/DVI na vrata HDMI IN 1(DVI) nastavite način HDMI1/DVI na DVI ali DVI PC v možnosti Edit Name
načina Input. V tem primeru je potrebna ločena avdio povezava.
Konfiguriranje menija Support
Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike. Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu,
da preverite, ali težava še vedno obstaja.
Yes: Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes. Vzrok težave je
morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center.
No: Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No. Vzrok težave je morda zunanja
oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za
zunanjo napravo.
Sound Test
Če menite, da imate težave z zvokom, izvedite preskus zvoka. Zvok lahko preverite s
predvajanjem vgrajene melodije prek televizorja. Na zaslonu se prikaže ‘Does the problem still
exist with this sound test?’.
Če iz zvočnikov televizorja ne prihaja zvok, pred izvedbo preskusa zvoka preverite, ali je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena
na TV speaker v meniju zvoka.
Med preskusom se melodija predvaja tudi, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker ali če je bil zvok
izklopljen s pritiskom gumba MUTE.
Yes: Če med preskusom zvoka slišite zvok samo iz enega zvočnika ali pa ga ne slišite, izberite Yes. Vzrok težave je morda
televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center.
No: če slišite zvok iz zvočnikov, izberite No. Vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste
odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za zunanjo napravo.
Signal Information (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Za razliko od analognih kanalov, pri katerih lahko kakovost sprejetega signala sega od ‘sneženja’ do jasne slike, je kakovost
sprejetih digitalnih kanalov (HDTV) popolna ali pa sploh ni slike. Zato digitalnega kanala ni mogoče fino naravnati, kot je to mogoče
pri analognem. Lahko pa prilagodite anteno, da izboljšate sprejem digitalnih kanalov, ki so na voljo.
Če merilnik jakosti signalov kaže, da je signal šibek, fizično prilagodite anteno, da povečate jakost signalov. Nadaljujte s
prilagajanjem antene, dokler ne najdete najboljšega položaja z najmočnejšim signalom.
¦
❑
O
N
N
N
❑
N
¦
❑
●
●
N
N
●
●
N
Self Diagnosis ►
Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Support
Source List
Edit Name
Input
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 22 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:48Slovenščina - 23
Software Upgrade
Da bi bil izdelek opremljen z najnovejšimi funkcijami digitalne televizije, so nadgradnje
programske opreme redno oddajane kot del običajnega televizijskega signala. Televizor
samodejno zazna take signale in prikaže obvestilo o nadgradnji programske opreme. Imate
možnost namestitve nadgradnje.
BY USB
Pogon USB, na katerem je nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme, vstavite v televizor.
Pazite, da med posodobitvijo ne odklopite napajanja ali odstranite pogona USB. Ko bo
nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme končana, se bo televizor samodejno izklopil in
znova vklopil. Po končani posodobitvi preverite različico vdelane programske opreme. Ko je
programska oprema nadgrajena, se uporabniške nastavitve videa in zvoka vrnejo na privzete
(tovarniške) vrednosti.
Priporočamo, da si zapišete vaše nastavitve, tako da jih boste po nadgradnji brez težav ponastavili.
BY Channel
Nadgradnja programske opreme z uporabo oddajnega signala.
Če med časom prenosa programske opreme izberete to funkcijo, zaženete iskanje in prenos razpoložljive programske
opreme.
Koliko časa se prenaša programska oprema, je odvisno od stanja signala.
Standby Mode Upgrade
Če želite nadaljevati nadgradnjo programske opreme z vklopljenim glavnim napajanjem, s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite On.
45 minut po preklopu v stanje pripravljenosti se samodejno izvede ročna nadgradnja. Ker je napajanje enote vklopljeno notranje,
lahko zaslon izdelka LCD rahlo sveti. Ta pojav lahko traja več kot 1 uro, dokler se nadgradnja programske opreme ne dokonča.
Alternative Software
Prikaz informacij o različici programske opreme.
HD Connection Guide
Ta meni predstavlja način povezave za optimalno kakovost televizorja visoke ločljivosti.
Te informacije si oglejte, če na televizor povezujete zunanje naprave.
Contact Samsung
Te informacije si oglejte, če televizor ne deluje pravilno ali če želite nadgraditi programsko opremo.
Ogledate si lahko informacije o klicnih centrih, izdelku in načinu prenosa datoteke s programsko opremo.
❑
N
N
❑
❑
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
Pogon USB
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 23 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:48Slovenščina - 24
PRIPOROČILA ZA UPORABO
Funkcija teleteksta
Večina televizijskih postaj nudi informacije v pisni obliki prek teleteksta. Na začetni stran teleteksta boste dobili informacije o tem,
kako uporabljati storitev. Poleg tega lahko z gumbi na daljinskem upravljalniku izbirate različne možnosti, ki bodo zadovoljile vaše
potrebe.
Za pravilen prikaz informacij teleteksta mora biti sprejem kanala stabilen. Sicer lahko manjkajo informacije ali pa nekatere
strani ne morejo biti prikazane.
Strani teleteksta lahko spremenite s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
1 0(način)
Pritisnite za izbiro načina teleteksta
(LIST/FLOF). Če ga pritisnete v načinu
LIST, bo preklopil v način List save. V
načinu List save lahko z gumbom 8
(shrani) shranite stran teleteksta na
seznam.
2 5 (razkrij)
Uporabite za prikaz skritega besedila
(na primer odgovori na vprašanja iz
kviza). Za prikaz običajnega zaslona
pritisnite znova.
3 4 (velikost)
Pritisnite za prikaz črk dvojne velikosti
na zgornji polovici zaslona. Za spodnjo
polovico zaslona pritisnite znova. Za
prikaz običajnega zaslona pritisnite še
enkrat.
4 8 (shrani)
Uporabite za shranjevanje strani
teleteksta.
5 Barvni gumbi (rdeči/zeleni/rumeni/
modri)
Če televizijska postaja uporablja
sistem FASTEXT, so različne teme na
strani teleteksta označene z različnimi
barvami, izberete pa jih lahko s
pritiskom na barvne gumbe. Pritisnite
enega od njih, odvisno od vaših želja.
Prikaže se stran z ostalimi obarvanimi
informacijami, ki jih lahko izberete na isti
način. Za prikaz prejšnje ali naslednje
strani pritisnite ustrezni barvni gumb.
6/ (teletekst vklopljen/mešano)
Ko ste izbrali kanal, ki omogoča storitev
teleteksta, pritisnite ta gumb, da aktivirate
teletekst. Pritisnite dvakrat, da teletekst
prekrijete s trenutno sliko.
7 : (izhod)
Izhod iz prikaza teleteksta.
8 1 (podstran)
Za prikaz podstrani, ki je na voljo.
9 2 (stran gor)
Za prikaz naslednje strani teleteksta.
0 3 (stran dol)
Za prikaz prejšnje strani teleteksta.
! 9(zadrži)
Uporabite, da zadržite prikazano stran,
če je izbrana stran povezana z več
drugimi stranmi, ki sledijo samodejno. Za
nadaljevanje gumb znova pritisnite.
@ 6 (kazalo)
Za prikaz strani s kazalom kadar koli, ko
gledate teletekst.
# 7(prekliči)
Za prikaz oddaje med iskanjem strani.
Strani teleteksta so organizirane v šestih kategorijah:
Del Vsebina
A Številka izbrane strani.
B Identiteta televizijskega kanala.
C Številka trenutne strani ali indikatorji iskanja.
D Datum in čas.
E Besedilo.
F Informacije o stanju.
Informacije FASTEXT.
¦
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 24 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:48Slovenščina - 25
Informacije teleteksta so pogosto razdeljene na več zaporednih strani, do katerih imate dostop z:
Vnosom številke strani
Izbiro naslova na seznamu
Izbiro obarvanega naslova (sistem FASTEXT)
Televizor podira različico teleteksta 2.5, v kateri je mogoče prikazati dodatne grafike ali besedilo.
Teletekst je lahko prikazan s praznimi deli strani, odvisno od prenosa.
V teh primerih dodatne grafike ali besedilo ni oddajano.
Starejši televizorji, ki ne podpirajo različice 2.5, ne morejo prikazati dodatnih grafik ali besedila, ne glede na to, ali se le-to
oddaja.
Pritisnite gumb TV za izhod iz teleteksta.
Pri teletekstu z razmerjem stranic 16:9 je prikazana slika z razmerjem stranic 16:9
Namestitev stojala
Prednastavitev: Na stojalo namestite vodilo stojala in ovoj in ga privijte z vijaki. Velja samo
za 32-palčne modele.
N
1. Pritrdite televizor LCD na stojalo.
Televizor naj nosita vsaj dve osebi.
Pri sestavljanju bodite pozorni na sprednji in hrbtni del stojala.
Da bo televizor nameščen na stojalo na ustrezni višini, ne pritiskajte preveč na zgornjo
levo ali desno stran televizorja.
2. Privijte dva vijaka v položaj 1 in nato še dva vijaka v položaj 2.
Izdelek postavite pokonci in privijte vijake. Če vijake privijete na ležečem televizorju
LCD, se le-ta lahko nagne v eno stran.
N
N
N
N
Namestitev kompleta za pritrditev na steno
Z elementi za pritrditev na steno (naprodaj posebej) lahko televizor pritrdite na steno.
Za podrobne informacije o pritrditvi na steno si oglejte navodila, ki so priložena elementom
za pritrditev na steno. Če nameščate nosilec za pritrditev na steno, se za pomoč obrnite na
tehnika.
Samsung Electronics ne odgovarja za poškodovanje izdelka ali telesne poškodbe, če se
odločite, da boste sami namestiti televizor.
Kompleta za pritrditev na steno ne nameščajte, ko je televizor vklopljen. To lahko
povzroči telesne poškodbe zaradi električnega šoka.
N
–
–
–
N
N
N
N
O
N
¦
¦
Zadaj
Spredaj
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 25 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:49Slovenščina - 26
Uporaba ključavnice Kensington proti kraji
Ključavnica Kensington je naprava, ki se uporablja za fizično pritrditev sistema, ko se ta
uporablja na javnem mestu. Videz in način zaklepanja se lahko razlikujeta od slike, odvisno
od proizvajalca. Za pravilno uporabo si oglejte priročnik, ki je priložen ključavnici Kensington.
Napravo za zaklep je treba kupiti posebej. Kam se namesti ključavnico Kensington, je
odvisno od modela.
1. Napravo za zaklepanje vstavite v režo Kensington na televizorju LCD (1) in jo obrnite v
smeri zaklepanja (2).
2. Povežite kabel ključavnice Kensington (3).
3. Ključavnico Kensington pritrdite na mizo ali težak nepremičen predmet.
3
1
2
Zaščita prostora za namestitev
Izdelek mora biti na zahtevani oddaljenosti od ostalih predmetov (npr. sten), da zagotovite ustrezno prezračevanje.
Sicer lahko pride do požara ali težave z izdelkom zaradi povišanja notranje temperature izdelka.
Izdelek namestite na zahtevani oddaljenosti, ki je navedena na sliki.
Če želite uporabiti stojalo ali opremo za pritrditev na steno, uporabite samo dele, ki jih nudi podjetje Samsung Electronics.
Čer uporabite dele drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pride do težav z izdelkom ali do telesne poškodbe zaradi padca izdelka.
Če uporabite dele drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pride do težav z izdelkom ali do požara zaradi povišanja notranje
temperature izdelka, ki je posledica slabega prezračevanja.
Videz se lahko razlikuje glede na izdelek.
Namestitev izdelka s stojalom Namestitev izdelka z opremo za pritrditev na steno
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦
¦
N
N
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 26 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:50Slovenščina - 2
Pritrditev televizorja na steno
Pozor: Televizorja ni dovoljeno vleči, potiskati ali nanj plezati, saj lahko pade. Posebno bodite pozorni na to, da
se na televizor ne nagibajo ali ga premikajo otroci, saj se lahko prevrne, kar lahko povzroči težje poškodbe ali
smrt. Upoštevajte varnostne ukrepe, navedene na priloženem letaku z varnostnimi ukrepi. Da zagotovite več
stabilnosti, namestite varnostni pripomoček za preprečevanje padcev, kot je opisano v nadaljevanju.
Da preprečite padec televizorja:
1. Namestite vijaka v objemki in ju trdno privijte na steno. Preverite, ali sta vijaka trdno
privita na steno.
Morda boste potrebovali dodaten material, kot je sidrni vložek, odvisno od vrste
stene.
Ker vijaka, objemki in vrvica, ki so potrebni za to, niso priloženi, jih kupite posebej.
2. Odstranite vijaka iz osrednjega dela hrbtne strani televizorja, namestite ju v objemki in
privijte nazaj na televizor.
Vijaka morda nista priložena izdelku. V tem primeru kupite vijaka z naslednjimi
specifikacijami.
Specifikacije vijakov
Za 17–29-palčni televizor LCD: M4 x L15
Za 32–40-palčni televizor LCD: M6 x L15
3. Objemki, nameščeni na televizorju, in objemki, pritrjeni na steno, povežite z močno
vrvico in jo zavežite.
Televizor namestite blizu stene, tako da ne more pasti nazaj.
Vrvico je varno privezati tako, da sta objemki na steni v višini objemk na televizorju
ali nižje.
Preden televizor premaknete, odvežite vrvico.
4. Preverite, ali so vsi spoji trdni. Redno preverjajte, ali so spoji poškodovani. Če niste
prepričani o varni namestitvi, se obrnite na strokovnjaka za namestitev.
¦
N
N
N
N
–
–
N
N
N
Stena
Stena
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 27 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:50Slovenščina - 28
Odpravljanje težav
Če imate vprašanja glede televizorja, si najprej oglejte ta seznam. Če noben od nasvetov za odpravljanje težav ni ustrezen,
obiščite spletno mesto ‘www.samsung.com’ in nato kliknite Support ali pa pokličite klicni center, ki je na seznamu na zadnji strani.
Težava Rešitev
Kakovost slike
Najprej izvedite Picture Test, da preverite, ali televizor pravilno prikazuje preskusno sliko.
Pojdite na MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture test
Če je preskusna slika pravilno prikazana, je slika morda slabe kakovosti zaradi vira ali signala.
●
Televizijska slika ni videti tako
dobro kot v trgovini.
Če imate analogni kabelski/običajni sprejemnik, nadgradite na sprejemnik. Za sliko
visoke ločljivosti uporabite kabel HDMI ali komponentni kabel.
Naročnik na kabelsko/satelitsko televizijo: Poskusite s postajami visoke ločljivosti (HD
(High Definition)) od kanala navzgor.
Povezava antene: Izvedite samodejni program in nato poskusite s postajami visoke
ločljivosti.
Številni kanali visoke ločljivosti prikazujejo izboljšano vsebino standardne ločljivosti.
Prilagodite ločljivost video izhoda kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika na 1080i ali 720p.
Prepričajte se, da televizijo gledate vsaj z minimalne razdalje, priporočene glede
velikosti in ločljivosti prikazanega signala.
●
●
●
N
●
●
Slika je popačena: veliki bloki,
majhni bloki, slikovne pike
Pri stiskanju video vsebine lahko pride so popačenja slike, še posebej pri gibljivih
slikah, kot so pri športu ali akcijskih filmih.
Slika je lahko popačena zaradi nizke stopnje signala ali slabe kakovosti. Ne gre za
okvaro televizorja.
●
●
Ko je povezana komponenta, je
barva napačna ali pa je ni.
Preverite, ali so komponentni kabli priključeni na ustrezne vtičnice. Nepravilna ali slaba
povezava povezava lahko povzroči težave z barvami ali prazen zaslon.
●
Blede barve ali šibka svetlost. V meniju televizorja prilagodite možnosti Picture. (način Picture, Color, Brightness,
Sharpness)
Prilagodite možnost Energy Saving v meniju Setup.
Poskusite s ponastavitvijo slike, da si ogledate privzeto nastavitev slike. (Pojdite na
MENU - Picture - Picture Reset.)
●
●
●
Na robu zaslona je pikčasta črta. Če je velikost slike nastavljena na Screen Fit, jo spremenite na 16:9.
Spremenite ločljivost kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika.
●
●
Samo pri vhodnem signalu AV
(kompozitnem) je slika črno-bela.
● Povežite video kabel (rumeni) na zelena vrata komponentnega vhoda 1 na televizorju.
Slika zmrzne ali je popačena pri
preklapljanju kanalov ali pa je
zakasnjena.
Če je priključen kabelski sprejemnik, ga ponastavite. (Znova povežite kabel za izmenični
tok in počakajte, da se kabelski sprejemnik znova zažene. To lahko traja do 20 minut.)
Nastavite ločljivost izhoda kabelskega sprejemnika na 1080i ali 720p.
●
●
Kakovost zvoka
Najprej izvedite Sound Test, da preverite, ali zvok televizorja pravilno deluje.
Pojdite na MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test
Če je zvok v redu, težavo z zvokom morda povzroča vir ali signal.
●
Ni zvoka ali zvok je pri največji
glasnosti pretih.
Preverite glasnost zunanje naprave, ki je povezana na televizor, nato ustrezno
prilagodite glasnost televizorja.
●
Slika je dobra, vendar ni zvoka. V meniju zvoka nastavite možnost Speaker Select na TV speaker.
Prepričajte se, da so avdio kabli zunanje naprave priključeni na ustrezne avdio vtičnice
na televizorju.
Preverite možnost avdio izhoda povezane naprave. (Npr.: če imate na televizor priključen
HDMI, je potrebno možnost zvoka kabelskega sprejemnika spremeniti na HDMI.)
Če uporabljate kabel za povezavo vrat DVI in HDMI, potrebujete ločeni avdio kabel.
Če je glasnost višja od vrednosti 30, izklopite funkcijo SRS.
Izključite vtič iz vtičnice za slušalke. (Če je ta na televizorju.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Iz zvočnika prihaja hrup. Preverite, ali so kabli ustrezno povezani. Preverite, ali je video kabel priključen na
avdio vhod.
Pri povezavi antene/kabelske televizije preverite moč signala. Zaradi nizke stopnje
signala je lahko popačen zvok.
●
●
¦
BN68-02360A_01L09.indb 28 2009-08-31 �� 10:31:51Slovenščina - 29
Težava Rešitev
Ni slike, ni videa
Televizorja ni mogoče vklopiti. Poskrbite, da je napajalni kabel za izmenični tok trdno priključen na stensko vtičnico in
televizor.
Preverite, ali stenska vtičnica deluje.
Pritisnite gumb POWER na televizorju, da preverite, ali daljinski upravljalnik deluje
pravilno. Če se televizor vklopi, je morda razlog daljinski upravljalnik. Za odpravo
težave z daljinskim upravljalnikom si oglejte spodnji razdelek ‘Daljinski upravljalnik ne
deluje’.
●
●
●
Televizor se samodejno izklopi. Preverite, ali je možnost Sleep Timer nastavljena na On v meniju Setup.
Če je televizija povezana z računalnikom, preverite nastavitve napajanja v računalniku.
Poskrbite, da je napajalni kabel za izmenični tok trdno priključen na stensko vtičnico in
televizor.
Če pri povezavi antene/kabelske televizije 10–15 minut ni signala, se televizor izklopi.
●
●
●
●
Ni slike/videa. Preverite povezavo kablov (izključite in znova priključite vse kable televizorja in
zunanjih naprav.)
Nastavite video izhod zunanje naprave (kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika,
predvajalnika DVD, Blu-ray itd.) tako, da ustreza povezavam vhoda televizorja. Na
primer: izhod zunanje naprave: HDMI, izhod televizorja: HDMI.
Preverite, ali se povezana naprava napaja.
S pritiskom gumba SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite ustrezen vir
televizorja.
●
●
●
●